DOCKETED  
Docket Number:  24-BSTD -01 
Project Title:  2025 Energy Code Rulemaking  
TN #:  255315 -3 
Document Title:  2025 Reference Appendices for the 2025 Building Energy 
Efficiency Standards, Express Terms, 45 -Day Language  
Description:  California Energy Commission’s proposed changes to the 2025 
Reference Appendices for the 2025 Building Energy Efficiency 
Standards, Express Terms, 45 -Day Language.  
Filer:  Javier Perez  
Organization:  California Energy Commission  
Submitter Role:  Commission Staff   
Submission Date:  3/28/2024 12:28:36 PM  
Docketed Date:  3/28/2024  
 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -1  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  Joint Appendix JA1  
APPENDIX JA1  – Definitions  
Terms, phrases, words  and their derivatives in the Reference Appendices shall be defined as 
specified in Title 24, Part 6, Section 100.1. Below are additional definitions for terms used in the 
Reference Appendices and not defined in Title 24, Part 6.  
ACM  See Alternative Calculation Method  in Section 100.1  of Title 24, Part 6 . 
ACP See Alternative Component Package.  
AFUE  See Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
AIR LEAKAGE  Iis a measure of how much outside air comes into a home or building through a 
manufactured fenestration or exterior door products.  
AIR POROSITY  is a measure of the air -tightness of infiltration barriers in units of cubic feet per 
hour per square foot per inch of mercury pressure difference.  
AIRFLOW ACROSS THE EVAPORATOR is the rate of airflow, usually measured in cfm across a 
heating or cooling coil. The efficiency of air conditioners and heat pumps is affected by the 
airflow across the evaporator (or condenser in the case of a heat pump).   
ALTERNATIVE CALCULATION METHOD (ACM) REFERENCE MANUAL or ACM REFERENCE  
MANUAL  contains the specific procedures to implement Sections 140.1 and 150.1 of Title 24, 
Part 6 of the California Code of Regulations in Compliance Software.  
ALTERNATIVE COMPONENT  PACKAGE  is a set of building measures whose aggregate calculated 
energy use is less than or equal to the maximum allowed Energy Budget.  
12ANSI  C78.377  is the American National Standards Institute document titled “Specifications for 
the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products.” (ANSI C78.377 -2017 ). 
ANSI C79.1  is the American National Standards Institute document titled “Nomenclature for Glass 
Bulbs Intended for Use with Electric Lamps.” (ANSI C79.1 -2002).  
ANSI C82.2  is the American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts –Method of Measurement for 
Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts (ANSI C82.2 -2002 (R2016) ). 
ANSI C82.77  is the American National Standard for Harmonic Emission Limits - Related Power 
Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment (ANSI C82.77 -2002).  
APPLIANCE STANDARDS  are the Standards contained in the Appliance Efficiency Regulations.  
APPROVED  as to a n home energy rating energy  code compliance  provider or home energy rating 
system, is means reviewed and approved by the Commission under Title 20, Section 1675 of the 
California Code of Regulations the Building Energy Efficiency Standards, Title 24, Part 1, Section 
10-103.3 .    Appendix JA1 -2 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  APPROVED BY THE COMMISSION  means approval under Section 25402.1 of the Public Resources 
Code.  
APPROVED CALCULATION  METHOD  is compliance software, or alternative component packages, 
or exceptional methods approved under Section 10 -109.  
AREAL  HEAT  CAPACITY  See Heat Capacity .  
AHRI  is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute.  
AHRI 2 10/240  is the Air -conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment,” 2008 
(ANSI/AHRI Standard 210/240 -2017 with Addenda 1).  
AHRI 310/380 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Standard for Packaged Terminal Air -Conditioners and Heat Pumps (CSA -C744 -17),” 2017 (AHRI 
310/380 -2017). 
AHRI 340/360 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning and Heat Pump 
Equipment,” 2019 (AHRI Standard 340/360 -(I-P) 2019 ). 
AHRI 365 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
"Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning Condensing Units," 2009 (ANSI/AHRI 
Standard 365 (I -P)-2009).  
AHRI 390 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigerat ion Institute document titled 
"Performance Rating of Single Package Vertical Air -Conditioners and Heat Pumps," 2003 
(ANSI/AHRI Standard 390 -2003).  
AHRI 400  is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled "Liquid to 
Liquid Heat Exchangers,"  2015 (ANSI/AHRI Standard 400 (I -P)-2015 )  
AHRI  460 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Remote Mechanical -Draft Air -Cooled Refrigerant Condensers,” 2005 
(ANSI/AHRI Standard 460 -2005).  
AHRI 550/590  is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle,” 2020 (AHRI 
Standard 550/590(I -P)-2020 ). 
AHRI 560 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled “Absorption 
Water Chilling and Water Heating Packages,” 2000 (AHRI Standard 560 -2000).  
AHRI 680 is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Residential Air Filter Equipment,” 2017 (AHRI Standard 680  (I-P)-2017 ). 
AHRI 1230  is the Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute document titled 
“Performance Rating of Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Multi -Split Air -Conditioning and Heat 
Pump Equipment,” 2014 (AHRI Standard 1230 -2014 ) with Addendum 1.  
AMCA  is the Air Movement and Control Association.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -3  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  ANSI /AMCA  220 is the Air Movement and Control Association document titled “Laboratory 
Methods of Testing Air Curtain Units for Aerodynamic Performance Rating ,” 2021 (ANSI/AMCA 
Standard 220 -21). 
ANSI/ASA S12.55 -2012  is the American National Standar d document titled “Acoustics - 
Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound 
pressure – Precision methods for anechoic rooms and hemi -anechoic rooms,” 2012  (ANSI/ASA 
S12.55 -2012).  
ASHRAE  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -conditioning Engineers.  
ASHRAE CLIMATIC DATA FOR REGION X  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -
Conditioning Engineers document titled "ASHRAE Climatic Data for Region X, Arizona, California, 
Hawaii and Nevada,” Publication SPCDX, 1982 and “Supplement,” 1994.  
ASHRAE HANDBOOK, APPLICATIONS VOLUME  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating 
and Air -Conditioning Engineers document titled "ASHRAE Handbook: Heating, Ventilating, and 
Air-Conditioning Applications" (I-P)(2019 ). 
ASHRAE HANDBOOK, EQUIPMENT VOLUME  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating 
and Air -Conditioning Engineers document titled "ASHRAE Handbook: Heating, Ventilating, and 
Air-Conditioning Systems and Equipment" (I-P)(2020 ).  
ASHRAE HANDBOOK, FUNDAMENTALS VOLUME  is the American Society of Heating, 
Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers document titled "ASHRAE Handbook: 
Fundamentals" (I-P)(2017 ). 
ASHRAE STANDARD 52.2  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning 
Engineers document titled "Method of Testing General Ventilation Air -Cleaning Devices for 
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size,” 2017 (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2 -2017 ). 
ASHRAE STANDARD 55  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning 
Engineers document titled " Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy,” 2020 
(ASHRAE Standard 55 -2020 ). 
ASHRAE STANDARD 62.2  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning 
Engineers document titled "Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low -Rise Residential 
Buildings,” 2019 (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.2 -2019 including ANSI/ASHRAE Addenda  v and 
published in the 2020 ).  
ASHRAE STANDARD 193  is the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning 
Engineers document titled "Method of Test for Determining the Airtightness of HVAC 
Equipment," R2014 (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 193 -RA2014 ). 
ASTM E2357  is the American Society for Testing and Materials document titled, "Standard Test 
Method for determining air leakage Rate of air barrier assemblies" 2018 (ASTM E2357 -18).  
AUTO REPAIR  See Nonresidential Functional Area or Type of Use.  
AUTOMATIC  is capable of operating without human intervention.     Appendix JA1 -4 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  BACK  is the back side of the building as one faces the front façade from the outside (see Front). 
This designation is used on the Certificate of Compliance (CF -1R form) to indicate the orientation 
of fenestration (e.g., Back -West).  
BATTERY ENERGY  STORAGE  SYSTEM  (BESS) , STATIONARY STORAGE . A rechargeable energy 
storage system consisting of electrochemical storage batteries, battery chargers, controls, and 
associated electrical equipment designed to provide electrical power to a building. The system is 
typically used to provide standby or eme rgency power, and uninterruptable power supply, load 
shedding,  load sharing or similar capabilities.  
BRITISH THERMAL UNIT (BTU)  is the amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of one 
pound of water one degree Fahrenheit.  
BTU/H  is the amount of heat in Btu that is removed or added during one hour. Used for 
measuring heating and cooling equipment output.  
BUILDER  is the general contractor responsible for construction .  
BUILDING ENERGY EFFICIENCY  STANDARDS  are the California Building Energy Efficiency 
Standards as set forth in the California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, a lso known as the 
California Energy Code.  
BUILDING LOCATION DATA  is the specific outdoor design temperatures shown in Reference Joint 
Appendix JA2 used in calculating heating and cooling loads for the particular location of the 
building.  
BUILDING  OWNER  is the owner of the building or dwelling unit.  
BUILDING  PERMIT  is an electrical, plumbing, mechanical, building, or other permit or approval, 
that is issued by an enforcement agency, and that authorizes any construction that is subject to 
Part 6.  
BUILDING  TYPES  is the classification of buildings defined by the CBC and applicable to the 
requirements of the Building Energy Efficiency Standards.  
CALIFORNIA  ELECTRICAL  CODE  is the 2019 California Electrical Code.  
CALIFORNIA  ENERGY  CODE  See Building Energy Efficiency Standards.  
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION  Is the California State Energy Resources Conservation and 
Development Commission.  
CALIFORNIA FLEXIBLE INSTALLATION (CFI)  is a set of criteria that allows a PV system to be 
modeled under the performance method without providing more specific orientations and tilts.  
In order to meet the requirements of CFI, the PV system must be  installed with an azimuth 
ranging from 150 to 270 degrees from true north, with all modules at the same tilt as the roof 
pitches between 0:12 and 7:12.  Additionally, each system must also meet minimal shading 
criterion  outlined in JA11.3 . 
CALIFORNIA PUBLIC UTILITIES COMMISSION (CPUC) RULE 21 is the  CPUC rule that that describes 
the interconnection, operating and metering requirements for generation facilities to be 
connected to a utility’s distribution system.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -5  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  CBC is the 2019 California Building Code.  
CEILING  is the interior upper surface of a space separating it from an attic, plenum, indirectly or 
directly conditioned space or the roof assembly, which has a slope less than 60 degrees from 
horizontal.  
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE  is a document with information required by the Commission that 
is prepared by the Documentation Author that indicates whether the building includes measures 
that require field verification and diagnostic testing.  
CERTIFICATE  OF INSTALLATION  is a document with information required by the Commission that 
is prepared by the builder or installer verifying that the measure was installed to meet the 
requirements of the Standards.  
CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION  is a document with information required by the Commission that 
is prepared by the HERS ECC-Rater to certify that measures requiring field verification and 
diagnostic testing comply with the requirements.  
CERTIFICATION  is certification by the manufacturer to the Commission, as specified the 
Appliance Efficiency Regulations, that the appliance complies with the applicable standard for 
that appliance.  The term certification is also used in other ways in the standards. Many of the 
compliance forms are certificates, whereby installers, HERS testers and others certify that 
equipment was correctly installed and/or tested.  
CERTIFIED  as to a home energy rater, is having been found by a certified home energy rating 
provider to have successfully completed the requirements established by that home energy 
rating provider.  
CIE 53  is the International Commission on Illumination (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) 
document titled “Methods of Characterizing the Performance of Radiometers and Photometers,” 
(CIE 053 -1982).  
COLOR RENDERING INDEX (CRI)  is a measure of the degree of color shift that objects undergo 
when illuminated by the lighting source as compared with the color of the same o bjects when 
illuminated by a reference source of comparable color temperature.  CRI is calculated according 
to CIE 13.3 .  
COMPLIANCE CYCLING CAPACITY is the cycling capacity in kWh of the BESS that is programmed 
during the installation/commissioning of the system. Once programmed, the ratio between 
compliance cycling  capacity and usable capacity shall be maintained for the life of the BESS.  
CORRELATED COLOR TEMPERATURE (CCT)  is the absolute temperature of a blackbody whose 
chromaticity  most nearly resembles that of the l ight source.  
CODES, CFR  is the Code of Federal Regulations.  
CLTD  is the Cooling Load Temperature Difference.  
COMBINATION SPACE -HEATING AND WATER -HEATING APPLIANCE  is an appliance that is 
designed to provide both space heating and water heating from a single primary energy source.     Appendix JA1 -6 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  COMBINED HYDRONIC SPACE/WATER HEATING SYSTEM  is a system which both domestic hot 
water and space heating is supplied from the same water heating equipment. Combined hydronic 
space heating may include both radiant floor systems and convective or fan coil systems.  
COMPLIANCE APPROACH  is any one of the allowable methods by which the design and 
construction of a building may be demonstrated to be in compliance with Part 6. The compliance 
approaches are the performance compliance approach and the prescriptive compliance 
approach. The requ irements for each compliance approach are set forth in §100 .0(e)2 of Part 6.    
COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS  are any of the documentation specified in §10 -103(a) utilized to 
demonstrate compliance with Part 6  (i.e. Certificate of Compliance, Certificate of Installation, 
Certificate of Acceptance, and Certificate of Verification).  
COMPLIANCE OPTION  is a method or procedure for demonstrating compliance with Title 24, Part 
6 and Part 11, Division 4.2 and 5.2 of the California Code of Regulations through modifications of 
approved calculation methods.  
CONDITIONED FOOTPRINT  is a projection of all conditioned space on all floors to a vertical plane. 
The conditioned footprint area may be equal to the first floor area, or it may be greater, if upper 
floors project over lower floors. One way to think of the conditioned footprint  area is as the area 
of the largest conditioned floor in the building plus the conditioned floor area of any projections 
from other stories that extend beyond the outline of that largest floor.  
CONSTRUCTION LAYERS  are roof, wall and floor constructions which represent an assembly of 
layers. Some layers are homogeneous, such as gypsum board and plywood sheathing, while other 
layers are non -homogeneous such as the combination of wood framing and cavity insulation 
typical in many buildings.  
CONTINUOUS AIR BARRIER See Air Barrier . 
CONTROLLED VENTILATION CRAWL SPACE (CVC) is a crawl space in a residential building where 
the side walls of the crawlspace are insulated rather than the floor above the crawlspace. A CVC 
has automatically controlled crawl space vents. Credit for a CVC is permitted for low -rise 
residential buildin gs that use the performance approach to compliance.  
COOL ROOF RATING COUNCIL (CRRC)  is a not -for-profit organization designated by the 
Commission as the Supervisory Entity with responsibility to rate and label the reflectance and 
emittance of roof products.  
COOLING COIL AIRFLOW  Is the air flow through the evaporator (indoor) coil of a direct expansion 
air conditioning unit in cooling mode. The air flow is expressed in cubic feet per minute (CFM) or 
liter per second (L/S) of standard air (standard air has a density of 0.075 lb/ft ³). 
COOLING LOAD  is the rate at which heat must be extracted from a space to maintain a desired 
room condition.  
COOLING LOAD TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (CLTD) is an equivalent temperature difference used 
for calculating the instantaneous external cooling loads across a wall or roof. The cooling load is 
the CLTD x U -factor x Area.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -7  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  COP  See Coefficient of Performance  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
COURTYARD  is an open space through one or more floor levels surrounded by walls within a 
building.  
CRRC  See Cool Roof Rating Council.  
CUSTOM ENERGY BUDGET  See Energy Budget.  
CYCLING CAPACITY  is the battery energy storage capacity in kWh available for daily cycling.  
DATA REGISTRY  is a web service with a user interface and database maintained by a Registration 
Provider that complies with the applicable requirements in Reference Joint A ppendix JA7, with 
guidance from the Data Registry Requirements Manual, and provides for registration of 
residential or nonresidential compliance documentation used for demonstrating compliance with 
Part 6.  
RESIDENTIAL DATA REGISTRY is a data registry that is maintained by a n HERS ECC-
Provider that provides for registration when required by Part 6 of all residential 
compliance documentation and the nonresidential Certification of Verification.  
NONRESIDENTIAL  DATA REGISTRY is a data registry that is maintained by the Registration 
Provider approved by the Commission that provides for registration, when required by 
Part 6, of all nonresidential documentation , excluding all Certificates of Acceptance  
recorded by an acceptance test technician certification provider (10 -103.1 and 10 -103.2) . 
However, nonresidential data registries may not provide for registration of nonresidential 
Certificate of Verification.  
DATA REGISTRY REQUIREMENTS MANUAL  is a document that provides additional detailed 
guidance regarding the functional and technical aspects of the Data Registry requirements given 
in Reference Joint Appendix JA7.  
DEMISING WALL  is a wall that is a demising partition.  
DENSITY is the mass per unit volume of a construction material as documented in an ASHRAE 
handbook, a comparably reliable reference or manufacturer’s literature.  
DEPLETABLE SOURCES  is energy obtained from electricity purchased from a public utility, or 
energy obtained from burning coal, oil, natural gas, or liquefied petroleum gases.  
DIRECTLY CONDITIONED SPACE  is an enclosed space that is provided with wood heating, is 
provided with mechanical heating that has a capacity exceeding 10 Btu/(hr.×ft.²), or is provided 
with mechanical cooling that has a capacity exceeding 5 Btu/(hr. xft.²), unless the space -
conditioning system is designed and thermostatically controlled to maintain a process 
environment temperature less than 55°F or to maintain a process environment temperature 
greater than 90°F for the whole space that the system serv es, or unless the space -condition ing 
system is designed and controlled to be incapable of operating at temperatures above 55°F or 
incapable of operating at temperatures below 90°F at design conditions.      Appendix JA1 -8 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  DIVIDERS  are wood, aluminum or vinyl glazing dividers including mullions, muntins, munnions 
and grilles. Dividers may truly divide lights, be between the panes, or be applied to the exterior or 
interior of the glazing.  
DOCUMENTATION AUTHOR  is a person who prepares a Title 24, Part 6 document that must 
subsequently be reviewed and signed by a responsible person in order to certify compliance with 
Part 6.  
DOMINANT OCCUPANCY is the occupancy type in mixed occupancy buildings with the greatest 
percentage of total conditioned floor area.  
DUCT LOSSES  is heat transfer into or out of a space conditioning system duct through conduction 
or leakage.  
ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE (ECC) PROGRAM  is the program for field verification and diagnostic 
testing  for residential construction  as set forth in Section 10 -103.3 to verify  that new ly 
constructed  buildings  and additions and alterations to existing buildings comply with the 
requirements of the Energy Code.  
ECC-PROVIDER  is an organization approved by the Commission to administer the ECC 
program pursuant to the requirements of Section 10 -103.3.  
ECC-RATER  is a person trained, tested, and certified by an ECC -Provider to perform field 
verification and diagnostic testing for the ECC program pursuant to the requirements of 
Section 10 -103.3.  
ECC-RATER COMPANY  is an organization certified by an ECC -Provider to offer field 
verification and diagnostic testing services by the ECC -Rater Company’s ECC -Raters for the 
ECC program pursuant to the requirements of Section 10 -103.3.  
VERIFIED ECC -RATER  is an ECC -Rater that has achieved the status of “Verified” as set forth 
in Section 10 -103.3(d)5B.  
ENTIRELY NEW OR REPLACEMENT DUCT SYSTEMS  installed as part of an alteration of a dwelling 
unit's space conditioning system(s) shall be constructed of at least 75% new duct material and 
may include reused parts from the dwelling unit's existing duct system (e.g. registers, boots, air 
handler, coi l, plenums, duct material, etc.) but only if the reused parts are accessible and they 
can be sealed to prevent leakage.  
EDGE OF GLASS  is the portion of fenestration glazing that is within two and one half inches of the 
spacer.  
EER and EER 2 See Energy Efficiency Ratio  and Energy Efficiency Ratio 2  in Section 100.1 of Title 
24, Part 6 . 
ELECTRIC HEATING  is an electrically powered heating source, such as electric resistance, heat 
pumps with no auxiliary heat or with electric auxiliary heat, solar with electric back -up, etc.  
ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING  is a heating system that converts electric energy directly into 
heat energy by passing a current through an electric resistance. Electric resistance heat is 
inherently less efficient than gas as a heating energy source because it must account for losses 
associated with generation from depletable fossil fuels and transmission to the building site.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -9  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  ENERGY EFFICIENCY STANDARDS  See Building Energy Efficiency Standards . 
ENERGY STAR Start Time Test Method  is the ENERGY  STAR program document entitled “ENERGY 
STAR Program Requirements for Lamps Version 1.0 – Start Time Test Method – Final” (August -
2013) . 
ENERGY STAR Ambient Temperature Life Test Method  is the ENERGY  STAR program document 
entitled “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Lamps Version 1.0 - Ambient Temperature Life 
Test Method – Final ” (August -2013) . 
ENERGY STAR Elevated Temperature Light Output Ratio Test Method  is the ENERGY STAR 
program document entitled “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Lamps Version 1.0 – 
Elevated Temperature Light Output Ratio Test Method – Final” (August -2013) . 
ENERGY STAR Elevated Temperature Life Test Method  is the ENERGY STAR program document 
entitled “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Lamps Version 1.0 – Elevated Temperature 
Life Test Method – Final” (August -2013) . 
ENERGY STAR Product Specification for Lamps Noise Recommended Practice  is the ENERGY 
STAR program document entitled, “ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Lamps Version 1.0 – 
Noise Recommended Practice – Final” (August -2013).  
EVAPORATIVE COOLER  provides cooling to a building by either direct contact with water (direct 
evaporative cooler), no direct contact with water (indirect evaporative cooler), or a combination 
of direct and indirect cooling (indirect/direct evaporative cooler). The credit of fered for 
evaporative coolers depends on building type and climate.  
EXCEPTIONAL METHOD  is a method for estimating the energy performance of building features 
that cannot be adequately modeled using the public domain computer programs  and that is 
approved by the Executive Director.  
EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR  is the Executive Director of the Commission.  
EXPOSED THERMAL MASS  is mass that is directly exposed (uncovered) to the conditioned space 
of the building. Concrete floors that are covered by carpet are not considered exposed thermal 
mass.  
CENTER OF GLASS U -FACTOR  is the U -factor for the glass portion only of vertical or 
horizontal fenestration and is measured at least two and one half inches from the frame. 
Center of glass U -factor does not consider the U -factor of the frame.  
FAÇADE  is the contiguous exterior of a building surface, but not limited to fenestration 
products.  
SIDE FINS  are vertical shading elements mounted on either side of a glazed opening 
that can protect the glazing from lateral low angle sun penetration.  
LOW -E COATING is a low emissivity metallic coating applied to glazing in fenestration 
products. See Soft Coat and Hard Coat.  
(a) HARD COAT  is a low emissivity metallic coating applied to the glass, which will be 
installed in a fenestration product, through a pyrolytic process (at or near the melting    Appendix JA1 -10 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  point of the glass so that it bonds with the surface layer of glass). Hard coatings are 
less susceptible to oxidation and scratching as compared to soft coats. Hard coatings 
generally do not have as low emissivity as soft coats.  
(b) SOFT COAT  is a low emissivity metallic coating applied to glass, which will be installed 
in a fenestration product through a sputter process where molecules of metals such as  
stainless steel or titanium are sputtered onto the surface of glass. Soft coats generally 
have lower emissivity than hard coats.  
OPERABLE  is fenestration that is designed to be opened or closed.  
SOLAR HEAT GAIN COEFFICIENT, CENTER OF GLAZING (SHGCc)  is the SHGC for the center 
of glazing area.  
SOLAR HEAT GAIN COEFFICIENT, TOTAL FENESTRATION PRODUCT (SHGC or SHGCT)  is 
the SHGC for the total fenestration product.  
U-FACTOR, CENTER OF GLAZING (Uc)  is the U -Factor for the center of glazing area.  
U-FACTOR, TOTAL FENESTRATION PRODUCT ( Ut) is the U -Factor for the total fenestration 
product.  
VISIBLE TRANSMITTANCE, CENTER OF GLAZING (VTC)  the VT for the center of glazing 
area.  
VISIBLE TRANSMITTANCE, TOTAL FENESTRATION PRODUCT (VT or VTt)  is the VT for the 
total fenestration product.  
WINDOW FILM  is fenestration attachment products which consist of a flexible adhesive -
backed polymer film which may be applied to the interior or exterior surface of an existing 
glazing system.  
FIELD -ASSEMBLED BESS is an BESS with a combination of battery energy storage modules and 
inverter components that are installed to operate as a system in the field, and the combination 
has more than one model number.  
FIELD TECHNICIAN  is a person who performs acceptance tests in accordance with the 
specifications in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA -7 and reports the results of the 
acceptance tests on the Certificate of Acceptance document, in accordance with the 
requirements of §10 -103(a)4.  
FOSSIL FUELS  are fuels which are derived from natural gas, coal, oil  and liquefied petroleum 
products. These are generally nonrenewable resources, although natural gas may also be 
produced by other means, such as biomass conversion.  
FRAMED PARTITION OR ASSEMBLY  is a partition or assembly constructed using separate 
structural members spaced not more than 32 inches on center.  
FRAMING EFFECTS  is the effect on the overall U -factor due to the type and amount of framing in 
walls, roofs/ceilings and floors. For compliance, fixed values for wood framing percentages are 
assumed when calculating U -factors.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -11  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  FRAMING PERCENTAGE  is the fraction of the surface of a partition that is framing as compared to 
that portion which is cavity.  
FRONT  is the primary entry side of the building (front facade) used as a reference in defining the 
orientation of the building or unit plan. The orientation of the front facade may not always be the 
same as that for the front door itself.  
FUME HOOD SASH OBSTRUCTION SENSOR  detects obstructions in the sash opening and 
prevents the automatic closing when obstructions are present.  
GAP WIDTH is the distance between lites in multi -glazed systems. This is typically measured from 
inside surface to inside surface, though some manufacturers may report “overall”  insulated glass 
(IG) width, which is measured from outside surface to outside surface.  
GAS INFILLS  are air, argon, krypton, CO 2, SF6, or a mixture of these gasses between the panes of 
glass in insulated glass units.  
GEOTHERMAL HEAT PUMP  See Ground Source Heat Pump . 
GLAZING AREA See Fenestration Area  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
GRID HARMONIZATION STRATEGIES are measures that harmonize customer owned distributed 
energy resource assets with the grid to maximize self -utilization of PV array output, and limit grid 
exports to periods beneficial to the grid and the ratepayer.  
GRILLES See Dividers.  
GROUND FLOOR AREA  is the slab -on-grade area of a slab -on-grade building and the conditioned 
footprint area of a raised floor building (for compliance with the low -rise residential standards).  
GROUND SOURCE HEAT PUMP  is a heat pump that uses the earth as a source of energy for 
heating and a sink for energy when cooling. Some systems pump water from an aquifer in the 
ground and return the water to the ground after transferring heat from or to the water. A few 
systems us e refrigerant directly in a loop of piping buried in the ground. Those heat pumps that 
use either a water loop or pump water from an aquifer have efficiency test methods that are 
accepted by the Energy Commission. These efficiency values a re certified to the Energy 
Commission by the manufacturer and are expressed in terms of heating Coefficient of 
Performance (COP) and cooling Energy Efficiency Ratio  or Energy Efficiency Ratio 2  (EER/ EER2). 
HERS  Is the California Home Energy Rating System as described in Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 8, 
Section 1670  et seq . 
HERS PROVIDER  is an organization that administers a home energy rating system as described in 
Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1670.  
HERS PROVIDER DATA REGISTRY  is a residential data registry maintained by an approved HERS 
provider.     Appendix JA1 -12 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  HERS RATER  is a person who has been trained, tested, and certified by a HERS Provider to 
perform the field verification and diagnostic testing required for demonstrating compliance with 
the Part 6, as described in Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1670  et seq . 
HOOD  is a device designed to capture and contain cooking effluent including, grease, smoke, 
steam, heat, and vapor until it is exhausted through a duct or recirculating system. Hoods are 
categorized as Type 1 or Type 2:  
TYPE I HOOD  is a hood used for collecting and removing convective heat, grease particulate, 
condensable vapor, and smoke. It includes listed grease filters, baffles, or extractors for 
removing the grease and a fire -suppression system.  Type I hoods are installed over  cooking  
appliances, such as ranges, fryers, griddles, broilers, and ovens, that produce smoke or 
grease -laden vapors.  For Type I hoods, the following types of hoods are commonly available:  
WALL -MOUNTED CANOPY HOOD  is mounted against a wall above a single appliance or a 
line of appliances, or it may be free -standing with a vertical back panel extending from the 
rear of the appliance(s) to the hood. It typically extends beyond the front and sides of the 
appliance(s) on all open sides. The wall acts as a back panel, forcing replacement air to be 
drawn across the front and/or side(s) of the cooking appliance, thus increasing the 
effectiveness of the hood to capture and contain effluent generated by the cooking 
operation s.  
SINGLE ISLAND CANOPY HOOD  is placed over a single appliance or line of appliances. It is 
open on all sides and overhangs the front, rear, and sides of the appliance(s). A single 
island canopy is more susceptible to cross -drafts and requires a greater exhaust airflow 
than an equiva lent sized wall -mounted canopy to capture and contain effluent generated 
by the cooking operations.  
DOUBLE ISLAND CANOPY HOOD  is placed over back -to-back appliances or lines of 
appliances. It is open on all sides and overhangs the front and the sides of the appliance(s). 
It may have a wall panel between the backs of the appliances.   
BACKSHELF or PROXIMITY HOOD  is a low-proximity hood, or a wall -mounted sidewall 
hood that:  
(a)  is positioned lower in height and depth than a canopy hood;  
(b) is set back from the front of the appliance;  
(c) is closed to the rear of the appliances by (a) a panel when the appliance is 
freestanding, or (b) a panel or wall when the appliance is wall mounted ;, and;  
(d) is located above the cooking surface.  
This style of hood can be constructed with partial end panels to increase its 
effectiveness in capturing the effluent generated by the cooking operations.  
EYEBROW HOOD  is mounted directly to the face or top of an appliance above the 
opening(s) or door(s) from which effluent is emitted, overhanging the front of the 
opening(s) to capture the effluent.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -13  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  PASS -OVER HOOD  is a back  shelf hood constructed and installed low enough to allow food 
to be passed over the top . 
TYPE II HOOD is a type of hood that collects and removes steam, heat, and products of 
combustion where grease or smoke is not present. It may or may not have grease filters or 
baffles and is not required to have a fire -suppression system.  
HORIZONTAL GLAZING  See Skylight  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
HOTEL/MOTEL  is a building or buildings that has six or more guest rooms or a lobby serving six or 
more guest rooms, where the guest rooms are intended or designed to be used, or  which are 
used, rented, or hired out to be occupied, or which are occupied for sleeping purposes by guests, 
and all conditioned spaces within the same building envelope. Hotel/motel includes all 
conditioned spaces which are (1) on the same property as the hotel/motel, (2) served by the 
same central heating, ventilation, and air -conditioning sy stem as the hotel/motel, and (3) 
integrally related to the functioning of the hotel/motel as such, including, but not limited to, 
exhibition facilities, meeting and conference facilities, food service facilities, lobbies, and 
laundries. Hotel/motel also in cludes the following:  
A building of Occupancy Group R -1, 
Vacation timeshare properties and hotel or motel buildings of Occupancy Group R -2, and  
The following types of Occupancy Group R -3: 
Congregate residences for transient use,  
Boarding houses of more than 6 guests, and  
Alcohol or drug abuse recovery homes of more than 6 guests.  
HSPF  and HSPF2  See Heating Seasonal Performance Factor  and Heating Seasonal Performance 
Factor 2  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
HYDRONIC COOLING SYSTEM  is any cooling system which uses water or a water solution as a 
source of cooling or heat rejection, including chilled water systems (both air and water -cooled) as 
well as water -cooled or evaporatively cooled direct expansion systems, such as water source  
(water -to-air) heat pumps.  
HYDRONIC SPACE HEATING SYSTEM  is a system that uses water -heating equipment, such as a 
storage tank water heater or a boiler, to provide space heating. Hydronic space heating systems 
include both radiant floor systems and convective or fan coil systems.  See Combined Hydronic 
Space/Water Heating System.  
ANSI/IES LS-1-20 is an American National Standard  as authored by the  Illuminating Engineering 
Society and titled "Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering."  (ANSI/IES LS-1-
20). 
IES LM -9 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Electrical and Photometric 
Measurements of Fluorescent Lamps.” ( ANSI/ IES LM -9-20) 
IES LM -20 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled “Photometric Testing of 
Reflector -Type Lamps – Incandescent Lamps.” ( ANSI/ IES LM -20-20)    Appendix JA1 -14 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  IES LM -45 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Electrical and Photometric 
Measurements of General Service Incandescent Filament Lamps.” ( ANSI/ IES LM -45-20) 
IES LM -46 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Photometric Testing of Indoor 
Luminaires Using High Intensity Discharge or Incandescent Filament Lamps.” 2004. ( ANSI/ IES-LM-
46-20)  
IES LM -51 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Electrical and Photometric 
Measurements of High Intensity Discharge Lamps.” ( ANSI/ IES LM -51-20) 
IES LM -66 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Electrical and Photometric 
Measurements of Single -Ended Compact Fluorescent Lamps.” ( ANSI/ IES LM66 -20) 
IES LM -79 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Approved Method : Optical 
and Electrical  Measurement s of Solid -State Lighting Products. ” (ANSI/ IES LM -79-19) 
IES LM-80 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Measuring Lum inous Flux and 
Color  Maintenance of LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules .” (ANSI/ IES LM 80 -20). 
IES TM -21 is the Illuminating Engineering Society document titled, “Projecting Long Term Lumen , 
Photon , and Radiant F lux Maintenance of LED Light Sources.” ( ANSI/ IES TM -21-19). 
IG UNIT , See “Insulating Glass Unit. ” 
INDEPENDENT IDENTITY  is having no financial interest in, and not advocating or recommending 
the use of any product or service as a means of gaining increased business with firms or persons 
specified in Section 1673(i) of the California Home Energy Rating System Program regulations 
(California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8) Section 10 -103.3 . 
(Financial Interest is an ownership interest, debt agreement, or employer/employee relationship. 
Financial interest does not include ownership of less than 5  percent of the outstanding equity 
securities of a publicly traded corporation) . 
NOTE : The definitions of "independent entity" and "financial interest," together with Title 
20, Section 1673(i) Section 10 -103.3 , prohibit conflicts of interest between HERS ECC-
Providers and HERS ECC-Raters, or between Providers/Raters and builders/subcontractors.  
INDIRECTLY CONDITIONED SPACE  is enclosed space, including, but not limited to, unconditioned 
volume in atria, that (1) is not directly conditioned space; and (2) either (a) has a thermal 
transmittance area product (UA) to directly conditioned space exceeding that to the outdoors or 
to unconditioned space and does not have fixed vents or openings to the outdoors or to 
unconditioned space, or (b) is a space through which air from directly conditioned spaces is 
transferred at a rate exceeding three air changes per hour.  
INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENT  is manufactured equipment used in industrial processes.  
INFILTRATION CONTROLS  are measures taken to control the infiltration of air. (Mandatory 
Infiltration control measures include weather -stripping, caulking, and sealing in and around all 
exterior joints and openings) . 
INSTALLER  means the builder’s subcontractor or the person installing the equipment.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -15  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  INSULATING GLASS UNIT  is a self -contained unit, including the glazings (lites or panes of glass) , 
spacer(s), films (if any), gas infills, and edge caulking, installed in fenestration products. It does 
not include the frame.  
INSULATION  is a material that limits heat transfer.  Insulating material of the types and forms 
listed in Section 110.8(a) may be installed only if the manufacturer has certified that the 
insulation complies with the Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, Chapter 12 -13 of 
the California Code of Regulations. (Movable insulation is designed to cover windows and other 
glazed openings part of the time to reduce  heat loss and heat gain.)  
INTEGRATED  BESS is an BESS that contains both battery energy storage and inverter components 
and has a single model number.  
INTERIOR PARTITION  is an interior wall or floor/ceiling that separates one area of conditioned 
space from another within the building envelope.  
IPLV  See Integrated Part Load Value.  
ISO 3745:2012  is the International Organization for Standardization document titled “Acoustics - 
Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources using sound 
pressure – Precision methods for anechoic rooms and hemi -anechoic rooms,”  2012  
(ISO 3745:2012).  
ISO 7574 -4:1985  is the International Organization for Standardization document titled “Acoustics 
- Statistical methods for determining and verifying stated noise emissions values of machinery 
and equipment – Part 4: Methods for stated values of batches of machines,” 1985  
(ISO 7574 -4:1985)  
ISO/IEC 17011  is the International Organization for Standardization and the International 
Electrotechnical Commission document titled  “Conformity assessment – General requirements 
for accreditation bodies accrediting conformity assessment bodies.” (EN ISO/IEC 17011: 2017 ). 
ISO/IEC 17020  is the International Organization for Standardization and the International 
Electrotechnical Commission document titled  “General criteria for the operation of various types 
of bodies performing inspection.” (EN ISO/IEC 17020: 2012 ). 
ISO/IEC 17025  is the International Organization for Standardization and the International 
Electrotechnical Commission document titled  “General requirements for the competence of 
testing and calibration laboratories.” (ISO/IEC Standard 17025: 2017 ). 
ISOLATION DEVICE  is a device that prevents the conditioning of a zone or group of zones in a 
building while other zones of the building are being conditioned.  
KNEE WALL  is a sidewall separating conditioned space from attic space under a pitched roof. 
Knee walls should be insulated as an exterior wall as specified by the chosen method of 
compliance.  
LEFT SIDE  is the left side of the building as one faces the front facade from the outside. This 
designation is used on the Certificate of Compliance and other compliance documentation.  
Decorative Lamp is a lamp with a candle -like or globe shape envelope including shapes B, BA, 
C, CA, DC, G , and F as defined in ANSI C79.1 -, and with at least 5  percent  of its total flux    Appendix JA1 -16 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  radiated in the 110  deg – 180 deg zone  of vertical angles, as measured from the nadir, when 
the lamp is oriented in a base up position . 
Omnidirectional lamp  is a general service replacement lamp with an ANSI standard base that 
emits the majority of light produced in an even distribution. Omnidirectional lamps shall have  
80 percent of the luminous intensity measured values (candelas) vary by no more than 35 
percent from the average of all measured values in the 0 deg to 130 deg zone. All measured 
values (candelas) in the 0 deg to 130 deg zone shall vary by no more than 60  percent from the 
average of all measured values in that zone. No less than 5 percent of total flux (zonal 
lumens) shall be emitted in the 130 deg to 180 deg zone.  Omnidirectional  lamps can be 
standard; having an ANSI standard lamp shape of A, BT, P, PS, S or T, or  omnidirectional lamps 
can have a non-standard  shape , such as a self -ballasted compact fluorescent that utilize a 
bare spiral.  
LIQUID LINE  is the refrigerant line that leads from the condenser to the evaporator in a split 
system air conditioner or heat pump. The refrigerant in this line is in a liquid state and is at an 
elevated temperature. This line should not be insulated.  
LISTED  is in accordance with Article 100 of the California Electric al Code.  
Long -term System Cost (LSC) is the present value of costs over a 30 -year period related to 
California's energy system. LSC does not  represent  a prediction of individual utility bill s. 
LOW -GWP REFRIGERANT  is a compound used as a heat transfer fluid or gas that is: (A) any 
compound or blend of compounds, with a GWP Value less than 150; and (B) U.S. EPA Significant 
New Alternatives Policy (SNAP) -approved; and (C) not an ozone depleting substance as defined in  
Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 82, §82.3 (as amended March 10, 2009).  
LOW -RISE ENCLOSED SPACE  is an enclosed space located in a building with 3 or fewer stories.  
LOW -RISE RESIDENTIAL BUILDING  is a building, other than a hotel/motel that is Occupancy 
Group:  
R-2, multifamily , with three stories or less; or  
R-3, single family; or  
U-building , located on a residential site.  
LOW -SLOPED ROOF  is a roof that has a ratio of rise to run of  less than  2:12  or less . 
LPG is liquefied petroleum gas. Propane is one type of LPG.  
MAKEUP AIR  is outdoor air deliberately brought into the building from the outside and supplied 
to the vicinity of an exhaust hood to replace air, vapor, and contaminants being exhausted. 
Makeup air is generally filtered and fan -forced, and it may be heated or cooled depending on the 
requirements of the application. Makeup air may be delivered through outlets integral to the 
exhaust hood or through outlets in the same room. (see Stds.)  
MANDATORY MEASURES CHECKLIST is a form used by the building plan checker and field 
inspector to verify compliance of the building with the prescribed list of mandatory features, 
equipment efficiencies and product certification requirements. The documentation author 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -17  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  indicates compliance by initialing, checking, or marking N/A (for features not applicable) in the 
boxes or spaces provided for the designer.  
MANUAL  is capable of being operated by personal intervention.  
MANUFACTURED DEVICE  is any heating, cooling, ventilation, lighting, water heating, 
refrigeration, cooking, plumbing fitting, insulation, door, fenestration product, or any other 
appliance, device, equipment, or system subject to §110.0 through §110.9 of Part 6.  
MEDICAL AND CLINICAL CARE  See Nonresidential Functional Area or Type of Use.  
MIXED OCCUPANCY BUILDING  is a building designed and constructed for more than one type of 
occupancy, such as a three story building with ground floor retail and second and third floor 
residential apartments.  
MODEL  is a single floor plan of a dwelling unit design. To be considered the same model; dwelling 
units shall be in the same subdivision or multifamily  housing development and have the same 
energy designs and features, including the same floor area and volume. For multifamily  buildings, 
variations in the exterior surface areas caused by the location of dwelling units within the 
building do not cause dwelling units to be considered different models.  
NOTE:  For purposes of establishing HERS sampling groups, variations in the basic floor 
plan layout, energy design, compliance features, zone floor area, or zone volume, that do 
not change the HERS features to be tested, the heating or cooling capacity of the HVAC 
unit(s), or the number of HVAC units specified for each dwelling unit, shall not cause 
dwelling units to be considered different models.  
MOVABLE SHADING DEVICE  See Operable Shading Device  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
MULLION  is a vertical framing member separating adjoining window or door sections.  See 
Dividers.  
MULTIFAMILY BUILDING  is any of the following:  
A building of Occupancy Group R -2, other than a hotel/motel building or timeshare property ; 
A building of Occupancy Group R -3 that is a nontransient congregate residence, other than 
boarding houses of more than 6 guests and alcohol or drug abuse recovery homes of more 
than 6 guests ; or  
A building of Occupancy Group R -4. 
MULTIFAMILY  DWELLING UNIT  is a dwelling unit of occupancy type R, as defined by the CBC, 
sharing a common wall and/or ceiling/floor with at least one other dwelling unit.   
MULTIPLE ZONE  is a supply fan (and optionally a return fan) with heating and/or cooling heat 
exchangers (e.g. DX coil, chilled water coil, hot water coil, furnace, electric heater) that serves 
more than one thermostatic zone. Zones are thermostatically controlled by fe atures including but 
not limited to variable volume, reheat, recool and concurrent operation of another system.  
MUNTINS  See Dividers.     Appendix JA1 -18 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  NEMA LE 7 is the National Electrical Manufacturers Association document titled “Recessed 
Luminaires intended for Contact with Expanding Polyurethane Foam Insulation,” (NEMA LE 7 -
2015).  
NEMA SSL 7A  is the National Electrical Manufacturers Association document titled “Phase Cut 
Dimming for Solid State Lighting: Basic Compatibility,” 2015 (NEMA SSL 7A -2015 ). 
NFRC  is the National Fenestration Rating Council. This is a national organization of fenestration 
product manufacturers, glazing manufacturers, manufacturers of related materials, utilities, state 
energy offices, laboratories, home builders, specifiers (archit ects), and public interest groups.  
NOTE : This organization is designated by the Commission as the Supervisory Entity, which is 
responsible for rating the U -factors and solar heat gain coefficients of manufactured 
fenestration products (i.e., windows, skylights, glazed doors) that must be used in 
compliance calculations. See also Fenestration Area and Fenestration Product.  
NONDEPLETABLE SOURCES  is defined as energy that is not obtained from depletable sources. 
Also referred to as renewable energy, including solar and wind power.  See Energy Obtained from 
Nondepletable Sources.  
NONDUCTED SYSTEM  Is an air conditioner or heat pump that is designed to be permanently 
installed equipment and directly heats or cools air within the conditioned space using one or 
more indoor coils that are mounted on room walls and/or ceilings. The unit may be of a modular  
design that allows for combining multiple outdoor coils and compressors to create one overall 
system.  
NSHP GUIDEBOOK  is the New Solar Homes Partnership Guidebook, currently adopted by the 
Energy Commission .  
OUTDOOR SALES CANOPY  is a canopy specifically to cover and protect an outdoor sales area.  
OUTSIDE AIR  See Outdoor Air.  
PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP  is an air conditioner or heat pump that combines 
both the condenser and air handling capabilities in a single enclosure or package . 
PARALLEL FAN -POWERED TERMINAL UNIT  is a terminal unit that combines a VAV damper in 
parallel with a fan that only runs when the terminal unit is providing heating to the space.  
PARTY PARTITION  is a wall, floor, or ceiling that separates the conditioned spaces of two 
different tenants.  
PERM  is equal to 1 grain of water vapor transmitted per 1 square foot per hour per inch of 
mercury pressure difference.   
PLENUM  is an air compartment or chamber, including uninhabited crawl space, areas above a 
ceiling or below a floor, including air spaces below raised floors of computer/data processing 
centers, or attic spaces, to which one or more ducts are connected and which forms part of either 
the supply -air, return -air or exhaust air system, other than the occupied space being conditioned.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -19  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  PROPOSED DESIGN BUILDING  is a proposed building being modeled using rules described in the 
Alternative Calculation Method Manual.  In order for a building to comply with the standards, the 
proposed building energy use must be less than or equal to the Standard Design Building energy 
use and meet the mandatory requirements in the Title 24 Building Energy Efficiency Standards.  
PUBLIC ADVISER  is the Public Adviser of the Commission.  
REAR  See Back.  
RECORD DRAWINGS  are drawings that document the as installed location and performance data 
on all lighting and space conditioning system components, devices, appliances and equipment, 
including but not limited to wiring sequences, control sequences, duct and pipe distribu tion 
system layout and sizes, spac e conditioning system terminal device layout and air flow rates, 
hydronic system and flow rates, and connections for the space conditioning system. Record 
drawings are sometimes called “as built ” drawings . 
RECOVERY EFFICIENCY  is one measure of the efficiency of water heaters. It is required for water 
heating energy calculations for some types of water heaters. It is a measure of the percentage of 
heat from combustion of gas or oil which is transferred to the water. For non -storage type water 
heaters, the recovery efficiency is really a thermal efficiency.  
REFERENCE COMPUTER PROGRAM  is the reference method against which other methods are 
compared.  For the Nonresidential Standards, the reference computer program is DOE 2.1E. For 
the low -rise Residential Standards the reference computer program is CALRES.  
REFERENCE JOINT APPENDICES  Are the Reference Joint Appendices published by the 
Commission . 
REFERENCE NONRESIDENTIAL APPENDICES  Are the Nonresidential Appendices published by the 
Commission . 
REFERENCE RESIDENTIAL APPENDICES  Are the Residential Appendices published by the 
Commission . 
REFRIGERANT CHARGE  is to the amount of refrigerant that is installed or “charged” into an air 
conditioner or heat pump.  The refrigerant is the working fluid. It is compressed and becomes a 
liquid as it enters the condenser. The hot liquid is cooled in the condenser and flows to the 
evaporator where it released through the expansion valve. When the pressure is released, the 
refrigerant expands into a gas and cools. Air is passed over the evaporator to provide the space 
cooling. When an air conditioner or hea t pump has too much refrigerant (overcharged) the 
compressor may be damaged. When an air conditioner has too little refrigerant (undercharged), 
the efficiency of the unit is reduced. A thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) can mitigate the 
impact of improper refrigerant charge.  
REGISTERED DOCUMENT  means the document has been submitted to a residential or 
nonresidential data registry for retention, and the data registry has assigned a unique registration 
number to the document.  
REGISTRATION PROVIDER  is an organization that administers a data registry service that 
conforms to the requirements of Reference Joint Appendix JA -7.    Appendix JA1 -20 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  RESERVE LEVEL is the battery energy storage capacity in excess of the compliance cycling 
capacity, is available for other functions, and is not subject to the control requirements in section 
JA 12.3.3.  
RIGHT SIDE  is the right side of the building as one faces the front facade from the outside (see 
Front). This designation is used to indicate the orientation of fenestration and other surfaces, 
especially in model homes that are constructed in multiple orientations.  
R-VALUE  is the measure of the thermal resistance of insulation or any material or building 
component expressed in (ft² -hr °F)/Btu.  
SASH ZONE PRESENCE SENSOR  is an occupancy sensor that detects people in the area near the 
fume hood sash for automatic closure controls.  
SC See Shading Coefficient  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
SHOWER HEAD  is a fixture for directing the spray of water in a shower.  A shower head may 
incorporate one or more sprays, nozzles or openings.  All components that are supplied standard 
together and function from one inlet (i.e., after the mixing valve) form a single  shower head.  
SINGLE FAMILY BUILDING  is any of the following:  
A residential building of Occupancy Group R -3 with two or less dwelling units ; 
A building of Occupancy Group R -3, other than a multifamily building or hotel/motel 
building ; 
A townhouse ; 
A building of Occupancy Group R -3.1; or 
A building of Occupancy Group U when located on a residential site.  
SINGLE ZONE is an HVAC  system with a supply fan (and optionally a return fan) and heating 
and/or cooling heat exchangers (e.g. DX coil, chilled water coil, hot water coil, furnace, electric 
heater) that serves a single thermostatic zone. This system may or may not be constant v olume.  
SLAB -ON-GRADE  is an exterior concrete floor in direct contact with the earth below the building.  
SOLAR REFLECTANCE  See Reflectance  in Section 100.1 of Title 24, Part 6 . 
SPACER, ALUMINUM  is a metal channel that is used either against the glass (sealed along the 
outside edge of the insulated glass unit), or separated from the glass by one or more beads of 
caulk, which is used to separate panes of glass in an insulated glass unit.  
SPACER, INSULATING  is a non -metallic, relatively non -conductive material, usually of rubber 
compounds, that is used to separate panes of glass in an insulated glass unit.  
SPACER, OTHER  is a wood, fiberglass, or composite material that is used as a spacer between 
panes of glass in insulated glass units.  
SPACER, SQUIGGLE  is a flexible material, usually butyl, formed around a thin corrugated 
aluminum strip that is used as a spacer in insulated glass units.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -21  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  SPECIFIC HEAT  is the quantity of heat that must be added to a unit mass of a material to increase 
its temperature by one degree. Typical units are Btu/°F -lb. 
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP  is an air conditioner or heat pump that has 
physically separate condenser and air handling units that work together as a single cooling 
system.  
STANDARDS  See Building Energy Efficiency Standards.  
STANDBY LOSS, BTU/HR  is the heat lost per hour from the stored water above room 
temperature. It is one of the measures of efficiency of water heaters required for water heating 
energy calculations for some types of water heaters. This standby loss is expressed as Btu/hr.  
STANDBY LOSS, PERCENT  is the ratio of heat lost per hour to the heat content of the stored 
water above room temperature. It is one of the measures of efficiency of water heaters required 
for water heating energy calculations for some types of water heaters. Standby loss is exp ressed 
as a percentage.  
STORAGE, COOL  is a storage area within a refrigerated warehouse where space temperatures are 
maintained between 32° F and 55° F.  
SUBORDINATE OCCUPANCY  is any occupancy type, in mixed occupancy buildings, that is not the 
dominant occupancy.  See Dominant Occupancy, Mixed Occupancy.  
SUCTION LINE  is the refrigerant line that leads from the evaporator to the condenser in a split 
system air conditioner or heat pump. This line is insulated since it carries refrigerant at a low 
temperature.  
SUSPENDED FILMS  are low -e coated plastic films stretched between the elements of the spacers 
between panes of glazing; acts as a reflector to slow the loss of heat from the interior to the 
exterior.  
SYSTEM  is a combination of equipment, controls, accessories, interconnecting means, or terminal 
elements by which energy is transformed to perform a specific function, such as space 
conditioning, service water heating, or lighting.  
TDV ENERGY  See Time Dependent Valuation (TDV) Energy . 
THERMAL BREAK WINDOW FRAME  is metal fenestration frames that are not solid metal from 
the inside to the outside, but are separated in the middle by a material, usually urethane, with a 
lower conductivity.  
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY  is the quantity of heat that will flow through a unit area of the material 
per hour when the temperature difference through the material is one degree.  
THERMAL EMITTANCE  See Emittance, Thermal.  
TITLE 24  is all of  the building standards and associated administrative regulations published in 
Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. The Building Energy Efficiency Standards are 
contained in Part 6. Part 1 contains the administrative regulations for the building  standards.  
U-FACTOR  is the overall coefficient of thermal transmittance of a fenestration, wall, floor, or 
roof/ceiling component, in Btu/(hr × ft² × ºF), including air film resistance at both surfaces.      Appendix JA1 -22 2025  Joint Appendices   
Joint Appendix JA1 – Definitions  U-FACTOR, CENTER OF GLAZING (Uc) is the U -factor for the center of glazing area . 
U-FACTOR, TOTAL FENESTRATION PRODUCT (Ut)  is the U -factor for the total fenestration 
product.  
UIMC  See Unit Interior Mass Capacity.  
UL 1574  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Track Lighting Systems,” 2016 . 
UL 1598  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Standard for Luminaires,” 2020 . 
UL 181  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Standard for Factory -Made Air Ducts 
and Air Connectors,” 2017 . 
UL 181A  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Standard for Closure Systems for 
Use With Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors,” 2017 . 
UL 181B  is the Underwriters Laboratories document  titled  “Standard for Closure Systems for 
Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors,” 2017 . 
UL 723  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Standard for Test for Surface 
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials,” 2018 . 
UL 2108  is the Underwriters Laboratories document titled  “Low Voltage Lighting Systems,” 
2019 . 
UL DATA ACCEPTANCE PROGRAM (DAP) is an Underwriters Laboratory program that utilizes 
work conducted by a client as well as third -party test facilities in accordance with national and 
international accreditation criteria to facilitate the conduct of investigations of products. 
Among the ty pes UL uses are Witnessed Test Data Program (WTDP) where UL witnesses the 
tests being conducted, Client Test Data Program (CTDP) which is where the client conducts the 
test and submits the data for UL review, and Third Part y Test Data Program (TPTDP) where 
testing is conducted by another testing organization for clients and submitted to UL for review.  
USABLE  CAPACITY  is the battery energy storage capacity in kWh that a manufacturer allows to 
be used for charging and discharging.  
U-VALUE  See U -factor.  
VAPOR RETARDER CLASS  is a measure of the ability of a material or assembly to limit the 
amount of moisture that passes through the material or assembly.  Vapor retarder class shall 
be defined using the desiccant method with Procedure A of ASTM E96 as follows:  
Class I:  0.1 perm or less  
Class II:  0.1 < perm < 1.0 perm        
Class III: 1.0 < perm < 10 perm  (see Stds.)  
VENTILATION AIR  is that portion of supply air which comes from outside plus any recirculated 
air that has been treated to maintain the desired quality of air within a designated space . See 
also Outside Air.  
VINYL WINDOW FRAME  is a fenestration frame constructed with a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 
which has a lower conductivity than metal and a similar conductivity to wood.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 -23  
Appendix JA1 – Definitions  VISUAL QUALITY STANDARD FOR APPLIED WINDOW FILM  is an International Window Film 
Association document titled "Visual Quality Standard for Applied Window Film," 2015.  
WEATHERSTRIPPING  is a specially designed strip, seal or gasket attached to doors and 
windows to prevent infiltration and exfiltration through cracks around the openings. 
Weatherstripping is one of the mandatory requirements for all new residential construction . 
See Infiltration, Exfiltration.  
WEIGHTED AVERAGING  is an arithmetic technique for determining an average of differing values 
for the members of a set by weighting each value by the extent to which the value occurs. In 
some cases when two or more types of a building feature, material or construction assemb ly 
occur in a building, a weighted average of the different types may be sufficiently accurate to 
represent the energy impact of each type considered separately.  
WEST -FACING  See Orientation.  
WINDOW TYPE  is a window assembly having a specific solar heat gain coefficient, relative solar 
heat gain, and U -factor.  
ZONAL CONTROL  is the practice of dividing a residence into separately controlled HVAC zones. 
This may be done by installing multiple HVAC systems that condition a specific part of the 
building, or by installing one HVAC system with a specially designed distribution sys tem that 
permits zonal control. The Energy Commission has approved an alternative calculation method 
for analyzing the energy impact of zonally  controlled space heating and cooling systems. To 
qualify for compliance credit for zonal control, specific eligi bility criteria specified in the 
Residential ACM Manual must be met.  
 
 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA2 -1     
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data   
Joint Appendix JA2  
Appendix JA2  – Reference Weather/Climate Data  
 
Figure2 -1 – Climate Zone Map  
#S#S
#S
#S
#S
#S
#S
#S
#S
#S16
1514131211
109
8
76543SONOMAEureka
FresnoAlturas
Barstow
San DiegoSacramento
BakersfieldSan FranciscoSouth Lake 
Tahoe1
2
1416
16
50 0 50 100Miles
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION
SYSTEMS ASSESMENT & FACILITIES SITING DIVISION
CARTOGRAPHY UNIT
MARCH 2005
T:\Projects\CEC\Mexico\MX Border.apr VIEW: CZ Building B&W 8.5X11 LAYOUT:CZ Building B&W 8.5X11SN
E WCALIFORNIA BUILDING
 CLIMATE ZONES Appendix JA2 -2 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   JA2.1   Weather Data - General  
All energy calculations used for compliance with the Standards must use the Commission's 
sixteen (16) official hourly weather files . These files are available in electronic form from the 
Commission in EPW (EnergyPlus) , BINM, and FIN4  format.  
Each weather file contains data on a variety of ambient conditions such as:  
(a) Dry bulb temperature  
(b) Humidity ( Wet bulb  or dewpoint  temperature ) 
(c) Wind speed and direction  
(d) Direct normal solar radiation  
(e) Diffuse horizontal solar radiation  
(f) Global horizontal solar radiation  
(g) Pressure  
(h) Rain fall  
Table 2 -1 –California Standard Climate Zone Summary  
Note: The alternative weather files modified for local design conditions use the specific latitude, longitude and elevation o f the selected 
city.  
Climate Zone  City Latitude  Longitude  Elevation (ft)  
1 Arcata  41.0 124.1  203 
2 Santa Rosa  38.5 122.8  125 
3 Oakland  37.7 122.2  6 
4 San Jose -Reid 37.3 121.8  135 
5 Santa Maria  34.9 120.4  253 
6 Torrance  33.8 118.3  88 
7 San Diego -Lindbergh  32.7 117.2  13 
8 Fullerton  33.9 118.0  95 
9 Burbank -Glendale  34.2 118.3  741 
10 Riverside  33.9 117.4  840 
11 Red Bluff  40.1 122.2  348 
12 Sacramento  38.5 121.5  16 
13 Fresno  36.8 119.7  335 
14 Palmdale  34.6 118.0  2523  
15 Palm Springs -Intl 33.8 116.5  475 
16 Blue Canyon  39.2 120.7  5279  
JA2.1.1  Counties and Cities with Climate Zone Designations  
The climate zone applicable to a building project is determined based on its physical location as it 
relates to the determinations of climate regions found in the Commission publication California 
Climate Zone Descriptions , which contains detailed survey definitions of the 16 climate zones.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA2 -3     
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  The Energy Commission publishes an online Climate Zone Search Tool  to assist in providing this 
determination, which is made available online at : 
https://www.energy.ca.gov/programs -and-topics/programs/building -energy -efficiency -
standards/climate -zone -tool-maps -and.  
Where a ZIP code contains more than one climate region, local jurisdictions may, at their 
discretion, designate a single climate zone within the ZIP code as applying to the entire ZIP code.  
JA2.2  California Design Location Data  
The data contained in the following table was obtained through a joint effort by the Southern 
California Chapter and the Golden Gate Chapter of ASHRAE. It is reprinted here with the written 
permission of Southern California Chapter ASHRAE, Inc. The values for 1.0 percent drybulb and 
1.0 percent mean coincident wetbulb (MCWB) are interpolated.1  
The data in  Table 2 -3 is developed from a full listing of design location data for California is 
contained in the ASHRAE publication SPCDX, Climate Data for Region X, Arizona, California, 
Hawaii, and Nevada (ISBN 200021, May 1982) and Supplement to Climatic Data for Region X, 
Arizona, California, Hawaii, Nevada  (ISBN 20002956, November 1994). The publication may be 
ordered from:  
Order Desk  
Building News  
10801 National Blvd.  
Los Angeles, CA 90064  
(888) 264 -7483 or (310) 474 -7771  
http://www.bnibooks.com  
 
 
1  The interpolation formula is 2.0%value + 0.6667 (0.5%Value – 2.0% value + 0.5).  Appendix JA2 -4 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   Table 2 -3 – Design Day Data for California Cities  
City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Adelanto  34.6  2865  117.4  105 67 101 65 100 64 97 62 70 68 39 14 24 27 1654  
Adin RS  41.2  4195  121 96 61 92 60 91 60 88 59 65 63 43 -7 -2 4 - 
Agoura Hills  34.2  700 118.8  103 70 96 68 94 68 90 66 73 71 29 27 31 34 - 
Alameda NAS  37.8  15 122.3  88 65 82 64 80 64 76 62 66 64 21 35 38 40 2507  
Alamo  37.9  410 122.9  102 69 97 68 96 68 92 66 72 70 30 23 28 31 - 
Albany  37.9  40 122.3  88 65 83 64 81 64 77 62 66 64 16 30 35 38 - 
Alderpoint  40.2  460 123.6  100 69 95 67 94 67 90 65 70 68 39 21 27 30 3424  
Alhambra  34 483 118.1  100 71 96 70 94 70 90 68 73 71 25 30 35 37 - 
Aliso Viejo  33.6  50 117.7  91 69 83 68 81 68 76 66 71 69 18 30 33 36 - 
Almaden AFS  37.2  3470  121.9  95 62 90 60 89 60 85 59 64 62 20 20 25 29 4468  
Alondra Park  33.9  50 118.3  91 69 86 68 85 68 81 66 71 69 17 35 40 42 - 
Alpine  32.8  1735  116.8  99 69 95 68 94 68 91 67 72 70 35 27 32 35 - 
Alta Sierra  35.7  6500  118.6  87 62 84 61 83 61 80 59 65 63 32 -4 1 8 2428  
Altadena  34.2  1200  118.1  99 68 94 67 92 67 88 66 72 70 31 32 37 39 1920  
Alturas RS  41.5  4400  120.6  99 62 96 61 95 61 91 59 65 63 43 -10 -4 0 6895  
Alum Rock  37.4  70 121.8  95 68 90 66 88 66 84 64 70 68 22 28 33 36 - 
American Canyon  37.6  85 122.3  93 67 90 66 88 66 84 64 70 68 23 28 33 36 - 
Anaheim  33.8  158 117.9  99 69 92 68 90 68 85 67 73 71 26 32 37 39 - 
Anderson  40.5  430 122.3  107 71 103 70 101 70 97 68 72 70 30 26 31 34 - 
Angwin  38.6  1815  122.4  98 66 93 64 92 64 88 62 69 66 33 25 30 33 - 
Antioch  38 60 121.8  102 70 97 68 95 68 91 66 70 69 34 22 28 31 2627  
Apple Valley  34.5  2935  117.2  105 66 101 65 100 65 97 64 70 68 38 14 21 25 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -5 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Aptos  37 500 121.9  94 67 88 66 87 65 83 63 69 67 30 27 32 35 - 
Arcadia  34.2  475 118 100 69 96 68 95 68 91 67 73 71 30 31 36 38 - 
Arcata  41 218 124.1  75 61 69 59 68 59 65 58 61 60 11 28 31 33 5029  
Arden  38.5  80 121.4  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 67 73 71 35 28 33 35 - 
Arroyo Grande  35.1  105 120.6  92 66 86 64 84 64 79 62 67 65 18 28 32 35 - 
Artesia  33.8  50 118.1  99 71 91 70 89 70 85 68 73 71 23 33 37 40 - 
Arvin  35.2  445 118.8  106 71 102 69 101 69 98 68 74 72 30 26 29 32 - 
Ash Mtn  36.5  1708  118.8  105 69 101 68 100 68 97 66 72 70 30 25 31 33 2703  
Ashland  37.7  45 122.1  92 66 86 65 85 64 81 62 68 66 24 26 31 34 977 
Atascadero  35.5  837 120.7  94 66 89 67 88 67 84 65 70 68 42 25 29 32 - 
Atherton  37.5  50 122.2  90 66 84 64 82 64 78 62 68 66 27 23 29 33 - 
Atwater  37.3  150 120.6  102 72 99 70 98 69 94 67 74 72 38 24 30 34 - 
Auberry  37.1  2140  119.5  102 69 98 67 97 66 95 64 71 69 36 21 27 30 3313  
Auburn  38.9  1292  121.1  103 69 100 67 99 67 95 66 72 69 33 25 30 33 3089  
Avalon  33.4  25 118.3  83 64 75 62 73 62 69 60 68 66 11 37 41 44 2204  
Avenal  36 550 120.1  103 70 98 70 97 70 93 69 73 72 34 23 28 31 - 
Avocado Heights  34.2  550 118 101 69 97 68 95 68 91 68 74 72 30 28 32 35 741 
Azusa  34.1  605 118.2  101 70 97 69 95 69 91 68 74 72 36 31 36 38 - 
Baker  35.3  940 116.1  115 73 112 72 111 72 108 70 77 75 29 23 28 31 - 
Bakersfield AP  35.4  475 119.1  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 34 26 31 35 2185  
Balch PH  36.9  1720  116.0  100 67 97 66 96 66 93 64 71 69 26 26 31 34 - 
Baldwin Park  34 394 118 100 69 96 69 94 69 90 68 73 72 32 31 36 38 - 
Banning  33.9  2349  116.9  104 69 100 68 99 68 96 67 73 71 34 20 26 30 - 
Barrett Dam  32.7  1623  116.7  103 69 97 68 96 68 92 67 73 71 35 22 26 28 2656  Appendix JA2 -6 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Barstow  34.9  2162  117 107 69 104 69 103 69 100 67 74 72 35 16 23 27 2580  
Baywood -Los Osos  35.3  100 - 88 65 82 64 80 64 76 62 67 65 14 31 36 38 - 
Beale AFB  39.1  113 121.4  105 71 102 70 101 70 97 68 74 72 34 25 28 30 2835  
Beaumont  33.9  2605  117 103 68 99 67 98 67 95 66 72 70 38 22 27 30 2628  
Bell 33.9  143 118.2  97 70 91 69 89 69 85 67 72 70 22 33 38 41 - 
Bell Gardens  33.9  160 118.2  97 70 91 69 87 67 85 67 72 70 22 32 37 40 - 
Bellflower  33.8  73 118.1  98 70 91 69 89 69 85 67 72 70 21 32 37 40 - 
Belmont  37.5  33 122.3  90 66 84 64 82 64 78 62 68 66 24 29 34 36 - 
Ben Lomond  37.1  450 122.1  92 67 85 66 83 65 79 63 69 67 30 25 30 33 - 
Benicia  38.1  55 122.1  99 69 93 67 91 67 87 65 70 68 30 28 33 36  
Berkeley  37.9  345 122.3  90 64 83 63 81 63 76 61 66 64 16 33 37 40 2950  
Berryessa Lake  38.6  480 122.1  102 70 98 69 96 69 92 67 72 70 35 26 31 34 - 
Beverly Hills 34.1  268 118.2  94 69 88 68 87 68 83 66 71 69 20 39 43 46 - 
Big Bar RS  40.8  1260  121.8  102 68 98 67 97 67 93 65 70 68 46 19 25 28 - 
Big Bear Lake  34.2  6745  116.9  87 59 83 58 82 58 79 56 64 62 32 -3 3 7 6850  
Bishop AP  37.4  4108  118.4  103 61 100 60 99 60 97 58 65 63 40 5 12 16 4313  
Blackhawk  37.7  10 121.9  88 65 82 64 80 64 76 62 66 64 21 35 38 40 977 
Blackwells Corner  35.6  644 119.9  99 68 94 66 93 66 89 65 71 69 31 23 28 32 - 
Bloomington  34 980 117.4  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 69 75 73 34 30 35 38 - 
Blue Canyon AP  39.3  5280  120.7  88 60 85 59 84 59 81 57 64 62 20 13 20 24 5704  
Blythe AP  33.6  395 114.7  115 74 112 73 111 73 108 71 80 78 27 28 33 36 1219  
Blythe CO  33.6  268 114.6  115 74 112 73 111 73 108 71 80 78 27 24 29 32 1312  
Boca  39.4  5575  120.1  92 58 89 57 88 57 84 55 62 60 46 -18 -13 -10 8340  
Bodie  38.2  8370  119 83 50 80 49 79 49 76 48 55 53 42 -21 -16 -13 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -7 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Bonadella Ranchos – 
Madera Rancho  36.8  270 119.9  105 72 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 40  29 32 1273  
Bonita  32.7  105 117 91 69 82 67 81 66 78 64 70 68 20 28 32 44 1864  
Boron AFS  35.1  3015  117.6  106 70 103 69 102 69 98 68 73 71 35 18 23 26 3000  
Borrego Desert PK  33.2  805 116.4  112 76 107 74 105 74 101 72 79 77 36 25 30 33 - 
Bostonia  32.8  600 116.9  96 70 91 69 88 69 81 67 72 70 30 29 34 36 - 
Boulder Creek  37.2  493 122.1  92 67 85 65 83 65 79 63 69 67 30 25 30 33 1120  
Bowman Dam  39.4  5347  120.7  89 59 86 57 85 57 82 55 63 60 26 9 17 22 5964  
Boyes Hot Sprgs  38.2  300 122.5  100 70 95 69 93 69 89 67 72 70 40 22 28 31 1289  
Brannan Island  38.1  30 121.7  100 69 95 68 93 68 89 67 72 70 10 24 28 31 - 
Brawley 2 SW  33 -100 115.6  113 74 110 73 109 73 105 73 81 79 32 25 30 33 1204  
Brea Dam  33.9  275 117.9  100 69 94 68 92 68 86 66 73 71 29 30 34 37 - 
Brentwood  37.9  71 121.7  102 70 97 68 95 67 89 65 71 68 34 27 32 35 - 
Bridgeport  38.2  6470  119.2  89 56 86 54 85 54 82 53 60 57 41 -20 -15 -12 - 
Broderick -Bryte  38.6  20 121.5  104 71 100 69 98 69 94 67 72 71 36 25 31 35 - 
Brooks Ranch  38.8  294 122.2  104 71 99 70 97 70 93 68 73 71 35 19 25 28 2968  
Buena Park  33.9  75 118 98 69 92 68 90 68 85 67 72 70 25 31 35 38 - 
Burbank AP  34.2  699 118.4  101 70 96 68 94 68 90 67 72 70 28 29 34 36 1701  
Burbank Vly Pump  34.2  655 118.4  101 69 96 68 94 68 90 66 72 70 28 29 34 36 1678  
Burlingame  37.6  10 122.4  88 67 82 64 80 64 76 63 68 65 20 30 35 37 - 
Burney  40.9  3127  121.7  95 64 92 63 91 63 88 61 67 65 42 0 5 12 6404  
Butler Valley (Korbel)  40.7  420 123.9  91 66 86 64 85 64 81 62 67 65 22 20 26 29 - 
Buttonwillow  35.4  269 119.5  103 71 99 70 98 70 95 68 74 72 36 20 26 29 2621  
Cabrillo NM  32.7  410 117.2  89 69 84 68 83 68 80 67 71 69 12 39 43 45 - Appendix JA2 -8 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Cachuma Lake  34.6  781 120 97 69 92 67 91 67 87 65 70 68 19 26 31 34 - 
Calabasas  34.2  1100  118.6  102 71 98 70 97 70 93 69 73 71 26 26 30 33 2348  
Calaveras Big Trees  38.3  4696  120.3  92 61 88 60 87 60 84 58 64 62 33 11 18 23 5848  
Calexico  32.7  12 115.5  114 74 110 73 109 73 106 71 81 79 28 26 31 34 - 
California City  35.1  2400  118 107 69 104 68 103 68 99 66 72 70 33 10 17 22 2572  
Callahan  41.3  3185  122.8  97 63 93 62 92 62 88 60 66 64 35 7 15 20 - 
Calwa  36.8  330 119.8  105 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 34 23 27 29 - 
Camarillo  34.2  147 119.2  91 69 84 68 82 68 78 67 71 69 22 28 32 35  
Cambria AFS  35.5  690 121.1  78 62 72 61 70 61 66 59 64 62 16 30 35 38 3646  
Cameron Park  38.6  1800  121 101 67 98 66 97 66 93 65 70 68 42 20 26 29 2235  
Camp Pardee  38.2  658 120.9  106 71 103 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 36 27 32 35 2812  
Camp Pendleton  33.4  50 117.4  88 69 85 68 84 68 80 67 71 69 12 34 38 40 - 
Camp Roberts  35.8  765 120.8  106 72 101 71 99 71 95 69 74 72 45 16 24 27 2890  
Campbell  37.3  195 121.8  93 69 88 66 87 66 83 65 71 68 30 28 33 36 - 
Campo  32.6  2630  116.5  101 67 95 66 94 66 90 66 71 69 41 16 23 27 3303  
Canoga Park  34.2  790 118.6  104 71 99 70 97 70 93 69 74 72 38 25 30 33 1884  
Cantil  35.3  2010  118 111 71 107 71 106 71 103 70 74 73 32 12 19 24 - 
Canyon Dam  40.1  4555  121.1  93 60 90 59 89 59 85 57 64 62 39 1 6 13 6834  
Canyon Lake  33.8  1500  117.3  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 68 74 72 39 22 27 30 - 
Capitola  37 64 122 94 67 88 66 86 65 81 63 69 67 24 27 32 35 - 
Cardiff -by-the-Sea 33 80 117.3  87 68 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 12 35 39 41 - 
Carlsbad  33.2  44 117.4  87 68 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 10 34 38 40 - 
Carmel Valley  36.5  425 121.7  94 68 88 66 86 66 80 65 69 67 20 25 30 33 - 
Carmel -by-the-Sea 36.5  20 121.9  87 65 78 62 76 62 71 61 66 63 20 30 35 38 968 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -9 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Carmichael  38.6  100 121.5  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 68 73 71 35 25 35 37 1290  
Carpinteria  34.4  385 119.5  90 69 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 15 30 34 37 - 
Carson  33.8  60 118.3  96 69 88 68 86 68 82 66 71 69 19 33 38 40 - 
Casa de Oro -Mount Helix  32.7  530 117.0  96 71 88 69 87 69 84 67 72 70 19 34 38 41 404 
Castle AFB  37.4  188 120.6  105 71 101 70 100 70 96 69 73 71 33 24 28 31 2590  
Castro Valley  37.6  177 122.2  93 67 87 67 85 67 80 65 69 68 25 24 29 32 - 
Castroville  36.8  20 121.8  86 66 77 63 75 63 70 61 67 64 18 32 37 40 1151  
Cathedral City  33.8  400 116.5  117 74 113 73 112 73 109 72 79 78 33 26 31 34 374 
Catheys Valley  37.4  1000  120.1  102 69 99 68 98 68 94 67 72 70 38 21 27 30 - 
Cecilville  41.1  3000  123.1  95 63 89 62 88 61 84 59 65 63 44 13 20 24 - 
Cedarville  41.5  4670  120.2  97 61 94 60 93 60 89 58 65 63 35 1 6 13 6304  
Centerville PH  39.8  522 121.7  105 70 100 68 99 68 96 67 72 70 40 25 30 33 2895  
Ceres  37.6  90 121 101 72 96 70 94 69 90 67 74 72 36 24 30 34 - 
Cerritos  33.9  34 118.1  99 71 92 69 90 69 85 68 73 71 23 33 38 40 - 
Charter Oak  34.1  600 117.9  101 70 97 69 95 69 91 68 74 72 34 29 34 36 - 
Chatsworth  34.2  964 118.6  98 69 93 68 91 68 87 66 72 70 38 26 31 34 664 
Cherry Valley Dam  38 4765  119.9  96 62 92 61 91 61 88 59 65 63 32 9 16 21 - 
Cherryland  37.5  100 122.1  93 67 86 66 84 66 79 64 69 67 24 26 31 37 - 
Chester  40.3  4525  121.2  94 62 91 61 90 61 86 59 65 63 33 -3 2 8 - 
Chico Exp Sta 39.7  205 121.8  105 70 102 69 100 69 96 68 72 71 37 22 27 30 2878  
China Lake  35.7  2220  117.7  112 70 108 68 107 68 104 68 74 72 33 15 22 25 2560  
Chino  34 714 117.7  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 68 74 72 35 27 32 35 - 
Chino Hills  34.1  800 117.7  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 68 74 72 35 27 32 35 800 Appendix JA2 -10 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Chowchilla  37 200 120.3  104 72 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 38 22 28 31 1250  
Chula Vista  32.6  9 117.1  90 70 84 68 83 68 79 66 71 69 9 33 38 40 2072  
Citrus Heights  38.7  138 121.5  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 74 72 36 24 26 29 - 
Claremont  34.1  1201  117.8  101 69 97 68 95 68 91 66 73 71 34 29 34 36 2049  
Clarksburg  38.4  14 121.5  102 70 97 69 95 69 91 67 72 70 35 24 29 32 2971  
Clayton  38 60 121.9  102 70 97 68 95 67 89 65 71 68 34 27 32 35 - 
Clearlake Highlands  39 1360  122.7  101 69 97 68 95 67 89 65 71 69 36 15 22 26 - 
Cloverdale  38.8  320 123 102 70 97 69 95 68 89 66 72 70 37 26 31 34 2763  
Clovis  36.8  404 119.7  105 72 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 36 22 28 32 - 
Coachella  33.7  -76 116.2  114 74 110 73 109 73 106 73 80 79 28 25 30 34 - 
Coalinga  36.2  671 120.4  103 70 98 70 97 70 93 69 73 72 34 23 28 31 2592  
Colfax  39.1  2418  121 100 66 97 65 96 65 92 63 69 67 29 22 28 31 3424  
Colton  34.1  978 117.3  105 70 102 68 101 68 97 67 74 72 35 28 33 36 - 
Colusa  39.2  60 122 103 72 100 70 98 70 94 68 74 71 36 23 29 31 2793  
Commerce  33.9  175 118.2  98 69 92 68 90 68 86 67 72 70 23 33 37 39 - 
Compton  33.9  71 118.2  97 69 90 68 88 68 83 67 72 70 21 33 37 39 1606  
Concord  38 195 112 102 70 97 68 95 67 89 65 71 68 34 27 32 35 3035  
Corcoran  36.1  200 119.7  106 72 102 71 101 71 98 70 74 73 36 22 28 31 2666  
Corning  39.9  487 122.2  106 71 103 70 102 69 98 67 73 71 33 23 28 31 1330  
Corona  33.9  710 117.6  104 70 100 69 98 69 92 67 74 72 35 26 31 34 1794  
Coronado  32.7  20 117.2  89 69 82 67 80 67 76 65 70 68 10 36 39 41 1500  
Corte Madera  37.9  55 122.5  97 68 91 66 89 66 84 64 69 68 34 28 33 35 - 
Costa Mesa  33.7  100 117.9  88 68 81 66 79 66 73 65 70 68 16 31 36 38 1482  
Cotati  38.3  100 122.7  99 69 94 68 93 68 89 66 71 69 32 24 28 30 1205  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -11 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Country Club  37.8  600 121.3  102 69 97 68 96 68 92 66 72 70 30 68 28 31 977 
Covelo  39.8  1385  123.3  99 67 93 65 91 65 87 63 69 67 43 15 22 26 4179  
Covina  34.1  575 117.9  101 70 97 69 95 69 91 68 74 72 34 29 34 36 - 
Crescent City  41.8  40 124.2  75 61 69 59 68 59 65 58 61 60 18 28 33 36 4445  
Crestline  34.2  4900  117.3  90 62 86 61 85 61 81 59 66 64 26 13 20 24 3200  
Crockett  38 9 122.2  96 68 90 66 89 66 85 64 70 67 23 28 33 36 - 
Crows Landing  37.4  140 121.1  101 70 96 68 94 68 89 66 72 70 33 23 28 31 2767  
Cucamonga  34.1  1450  117.6  103 69 99 68 97 67 93 65 73 71 31 29 34 36 - 
Cudahy  33.9  130 118.2  98 70 91 69 89 69 85 67 72 70 21 33 37 39 - 
Culver City  34 106 118.4  96 70 88 69 87 69 83 67 72 70 18 35 40 42 1515  
Cupertino  37.3  70 122 96 68 88 67 86 66 80 64 70 68 30 28 33 36 - 
Cuyama  34.9  2255  116.6  99 68 96 67 94 67 89 66 72 70 42 13 20 24 - 
Cuyamaca  33 4650  116.6  92 64 85 62 84 61 81 59 67 65 29 11 18 23 4848  
Cypress  33.8  75 118 98 70 92 69 90 69 85 67 72 70 24 31 35 38  
Daggett AP  34.9  1915  116.8  109 68 106 68 105 68 102 66 73 72 33 21 26 29 2203  
Daly City  37.6  410 122.5  84 65 78 62 77 62 73 61 66 63 16 34 37 39 - 
Dana Point  33.5  100 117.7  91 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 13 30 33 36 600 
Danville  37.8  368 122 102 69 97 68 96 68 92 66 72 70 30 23 28 31 977 
Davis  38.5  60 121.8  103 72 99 70 97 70 93 68 74 71 41 24 30 34 2844  
De Sabla  39.9  2713  121.6  97 66 94 64 92 64 88 62 68 66 35 18 24 27 4237  
Death Valley  36.5  -194 116.9  121 77 118 76 117 76 114 74 81 79 28 27 33 37 1147  
Deep Springs Clg  37.5  5225  118 98 60 95 59 94 59 92 58 64 62 35 -3 2 8  
Deer Creek PH  39.3  4455  120.9  93 61 91 60 90 60 87 58 65 63 39 10 17 22 5863  
Del Aire  34 100 118.4  91 69 84 67 83 67 79 66 71 69 15 37 40 42 383 Appendix JA2 -12 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Delano  35.8  323 119.3  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 69 74 72 36 22 25 28 - 
Denair  37.6  137 120.8  100 70 95 69 93 69 89 67 72 70 38 22 28 31 2974  
Desert Hot Springs  34 1060  116.5  115 73 111 72 110 72 107 71 78 77 35 24 29 32 400 
Diamond Bar  34 880 117.8  101 69 97 68 96 68 92 66 73 71 33 28 33 35 - 
Dinuba  36.5  340 119.4  104 73 101 70 100 70 96 69 75 73 36 24 30 34 - 
Discovery Bay  38.1  10 121.6  102 70 97 68 95 67 89 65 71 68 34 27 32 35 - 
Dixon  38.4  100 121.9  104 72 99 70 97 70 93 68 74 71 36 24 30 33 2826  
Dobbins  39.4  1640  121.2  104 70 101 68 100 68 96 67 72 70 31 24 29 32 - 
Donner Mem Stt Pk  39.3  5937  120.3  85 56 82 56 81 56 77 54 60 58 40 -3 3 6 - 
Donner Summit  39.4  7239  120.3  80 53 77 53 76 52 72 50 57 55 40 -8 -1 3 8290  
Downey  33.9  110 118 98 71 90 70 88 70 84 68 73 71 21 32 37 39 - 
Downieville RS  39.6  2895  120.8  98 64 95 63 94 63 90 61 68 66 42 13 20 24 - 
Doyle  40 4390  120.1  96 63 93 62 92 61 88 59 66 64 42 0 5 12 - 
Dry Canyon Res  34.5  1455  118.5  105 71 100 69 99 69 96 68 74 72 32 24 29 32 - 
Duarte  34.1  500 118 100 69 96 68 94 68 90 67 73 71 33 31 36 38 - 
Dublin  37.7  200 121.5  99 69 93 67 91 67 86 65 70 68 35 24 29 32 - 
Dudleys  37.7  3000  120.1  97 65 94 64 93 64 90 62 68 66 44 10 17 22 4959  
Duttons Landing  38.2  20 122.3  96 68 91 66 89 66 84 64 70 68 31 26 31 34 - 
Eagle Mtn  33.8  973 115.5  113 72 110 71 109 71 105 69 77 75 24 32 37 39 1138  
Earlimart  35.8  283 119.3  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 69 74 72 36 23 26 29 1100  
East Compton  34 71 118.2  97 69 90 68 88 68 83 67 72 70 21 33 37 39 436 
East Hemet  33.7  1655  116.9  109 70 104 69 103 69 101 67 74 72 40 20 25 28 - 
East La Mirada  33.9  115 118.0  99 70 91 69 89 69 85 68 73 71 26 31 36 38 - 
East Los Angeles  34 250 118.3  99 69 92 68 90 68 86 67 72 70 21 38 41 43 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -13 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
East Palo Alto  37.5  25 122.1  93 66 85 64 83 64 77 62 68 66 25 26 31 34 1103  
East Park Res  39.4  1205  122.5  101 69 97 68 96 68 92 66 71 69 38 19 25 28 3455  
East Pasadena  34.2  864 118.1  99 69 94 68 92 68 88 67 73 71 30 32 37 40 452 
East Porterville  36.1  393 119.0  106 71 102 70 101 70 97 69 74 72 36 25 30 33 1129  
East San Gabriel  34.1  450 118.1  99 70 94 69 92 69 88 68 73 71 30 30 35 37 431 
Edwards AFB  34.9  2316  117.9  107 69 104 68 103 68 99 66 72 70 35 10 17 22 3123  
El Cajon  32.7  525 117 96 70 91 69 90 69 87 67 72 70 30 29 34 36 - 
El Capitan Dam  32.9  600 116.8  105 71 98 70 97 70 93 68 74 72 35 29 34 36 1533  
El Centro  32.8  -30 115.6  115 74 111 73 110 73 107 73 81 79 34 26 35 38 1212  
El Cerrito  37.8  70 122.3  91 66 84 64 81 64 75 62 68 65 17 30 35 38 - 
El Dorado Hills  38.6  673 121.1  103 70 100 69 98 69 94 67 72 71 36 24 30 34 - 
El Mirage  34.6  2910  117.6  105 69 101 68 100 68 97 66 72 70 31 9 16 21 - 
El Monte  34.1  271 118 101 71 97 70 95 70 91 68 73 71 30 31 36 39 - 
El Paso de Robles  35.6  721 120.7  102 65 95 65 94 65 90 65 69 67 44 16 20 23 1768  
El Rio  34.3  50 119.2  95 69 88 68 86 68 82 66 71 69 20 30 34 37 - 
El Segundo  33.9  105 118.4  91 69 84 68 83 68 79 66 71 69 14 37 40 42 - 
El Sobrante  37.9  55 122.3  91 66 87 65 86 65 82 64 69 67 25 30 35 38 823 
El Toro MCAS  33.7  380 117.7  96 69 89 69 87 69 82 68 73 71 26 34 38 41 1591  
El Toro Station  33.7  380 117.7  96 69 89 69 87 69 82 68 73 71 26 34 38 41 560 
Electra PH  38.3  715 120.7  106 70 102 69 101 69 98 68 73 71 41 23 28 31 2858  
Elk Grove  38.4  50 121.4  104 71 100 69 98 69 94 68 73 71 35 29 34 36 1150  
Elk Valley  42 1705  123.7  96 65 90 63 88 63 84 61 67 65 39 16 23 27 5404  
Elsinore  33.7  1285  117.3  105 71 101 70 100 70 98 69 74 72 39 22 26 29 2128  
Encinitas  33 50 117.3  87 68 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 10 35 39 41 - Appendix JA2 -14 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Encino  34.2  750 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 27 28 33 36 664 
Enterprise  40.6  470 122.3  107 69 103 68 101 68 97 67 72 70 29 26 31 34 - 
Escondido  33.1  660 117.1  97 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 29 26 31 34 2005  
Eureka  40.8  43 124.2  75 61 69 59 68 59 65 58 61 60 11 30 35 38 4679  
Exeter  36.3  350 119.1  104 72 101 71 100 71 97 69 74 72 39 24 29 32 1236  
Fair Oaks  38.7  50 121.3  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 69 72 71 36 23 29 33 - 
Fairfax  38 110 122.6  96 68 90 66 88 65 83 63 71 68 34 26 31 34 - 
Fairfield FS  38.3  38 122 103 69 98 68 96 68 91 66 73 71 34 24 30 33 2686  
Fairmont  34.7  3060  118.4  100 67 96 66 95 66 92 65 71 69 22 22 28 31 3330  
Fairview  35.9  3519  118.5  97 67 94 66 93 66 90 64 70 68 43 11 18 23 - 
Fallbrook  33.6  660 117.3  94 68 89 67 88 67 85 66 71 69 29 26 31 34 2077  
Farmersville  36.3  350 119.2  104 72 101 72 100 71 97 69 74 72 39 24 29 32 1236  
Felton  37 100 122.1  94 68 88 66 86 66 81 64 69 67 28 27 32 35 1097  
Ferndale  40.5  1445  124.3  76 57 66 56 65 56 62 54 59 57 12 28 33 35 - 
Fillmore  34.4  435 118.9  100 70 94 69 92 69 87 67 73 71 30 28 32 35 - 
Five Points  36.4  285 120.2  103 71 99 70 97 70 93 68 73 71 36 21 27 30 - 
Fleming Fish & Game  40.4  4000  120.3  96 62 93 61 92 61 88 59 66 64 40 -3 2 8 - 
Florence -Graham  34 175 118.3  98 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 19 35 40 43 - 
Florin  38.5  100 121.4  104 71 100 69 98 69 94 68 73 71 35 29 34 36 - 
Folsom Dam  38.7  350 121.2  104 70 101 69 99 69 95 67 72 71 36 25 31 35 - 
Fontana  34.1  1090  117.4  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 67 74 72 33 30 35 38 1530  
Foothill Farms  38.6  90 121.3  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 36 24 30 34 - 
Forest Glen  40.4  2340  123.3  96 65 92 64 91 64 88 62 67 65 42 12 19 24 - 
Fort Baker  37.8  15 122.5  87 66 81 65 79 65 73 65 67 65 12 33 38 40 3080  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -15 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Fort Bidwell  41.9  4498  120.1  93 60 90 59 89 59 85 57 64 62 38 -2 3 10 6381  
Fort Bragg  39.5  80 123.8  75 60 67 59 66 59 62 58 62 61 15 29 34 37 4424  
Fort Jones RS  41.6  2725  122.9  98 64 93 63 92 63 88 61 67 65 44 5 13 18 5590  
Fort MacArthur  33.7  200 118.3  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 13 35 40 42 1819  
Fort Ord  36.7  134 121.8  86 65 77 63 75 62 70 60 67 64 18 24 29 32 3818  
Fort Ross  38.5  116 123.3  79 63 74 62 71 61 65 59 64 62 19 30 35 37 4127  
Fortuna  40.6  100 124.2  75 61 69 59 68 59 65 58 61 60 11 30 35 38 2000  
Foster City  37.5  20 122.7  92 67 84 65 82 65 76 63 68 66 22 29 34 36 - 
Fountain Valley  33.7  60 118 97 70 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 18 33 38 40 - 
Freedom  37 1495  121.8  89 67 85 64 83 64 79 62 68 65 22 27 32 34 - 
Fremont  37.5  56 122 94 67 88 65 86 65 81 63 69 67 24 25 30 33 - 
Fresno AP  36.8  328 119.7  104 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 34 24 28 30 2650  
Friant Gov Camp  37 410 119.7  106 72 103 70 102 70 100 68 74 72 40 23 28 31 2768  
Fullerton  33.9  340 117.9  100 70 94 69 92 69 87 68 73 71 26 30 35 37 - 
Galt 38.2  40 121.3  101 70 97 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 38 23 28 31 1240  
Garden Acres  38 20 121.3  103 71 98 69 97 69 93 67 73 71 35 24 28 30 1334  
Garden Grove  33.6  85 117.9  98 70 91 68 89 68 84 67 72 70 23 31 36 38 - 
Gardena  33.9  40 118.3  92 69 85 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 18 32 37 39 - 
George AFB  34.6  2875  117.4  105 67 102 65 101 64 98 62 70 68 31 19 23 26 2887  
Georgetown RS  38.9  3001  120.8  98 64 95 63 94 63 90 61 68 66 31 18 24 27 - 
Giant Forest  36.6  6412  118.8  84 56 81 55 80 55 77 53 60 58 26 5 13 18 - 
Gillespie Field  32.8  385 117.0  98 71 91 70 89 70 85 68 73 71 30 24 29 32 - 
Gilroy  37 194 121.6  101 70 93 68 91 67 86 65 72 69 25 23 28 31 - 
Glen Avon  34 827 117.5  105 70 101 69 99 69 95 67 74 72 35 28 33 35 - Appendix JA2 -16 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Glendale  34.2  563 118.3  101 70 96 68 94 68 90 67 73 71 28 30 35 37 - 
Glendora  34.1  822 117.9  102 69 98 68 96 68 92 67 73 71 35 30 35 37 - 
Glennville  35.7  3140  118.7  97 67 94 66 93 66 90 64 70 68 43 11 18 23 4423  
Gold Rock Rch  32.9  485 114.8  113 73 110 72 109 72 106 70 79 77 28 31 36 38 - 
Golden Hills  35.1  4000  118.5  97 66 93 65 92 65 89 64 69 67 33 13 20 24 - 
Granada Hills  34.4  1032  118.5  100 70 95 68 93 68 89 66 73 70 37 28 31 34 664 
Grand Terrace  34.1  1000  117.3  105 70 102 68 101 68 97 67 74 72 35 28 33 36 611 
Grant Grove  36.7  6600  119 82 56 78 55 77 54 74 52 59 57 26 6 14 19 7044  
Grass Valley  39.2  2400  121.1  99 67 96 65 95 65 91 63 69 67 29 19 25 28 - 
Graton  38.4  200 122.9  95 68 91 67 88 66 82 64 70 68 34 22 28 31 3409  
Greenacres  35.3  400 119.1  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 34 26 31 35 934 
Greenfield  36.2  287 121.2  92 67 88 65 87 65 84 64 70 68 32 22 27 30 1020  
Grossmont  32.7  530 117 96 69 89 68 88 68 84 66 71 69 23 31 36 38 - 
Grover City  35.1  100 120.6  93 69 86 64 84 64 80 62 67 65 18 30 34 37 - 
Guadalupe  35 85 120.6  92 66 86 64 84 64 79 62 67 65 18 28 32 35 1035  
Hacienda Hts  34 300 118 100 69 96 68 94 68 90 67 73 71 28 31 36 38 - 
Haiwee  36.1  3825  118 102 65 99 64 98 64 95 62 68 66 27 15 22 26 3700  
Half Moon Bay  37.5  60 122.4  83 64 76 62 74 61 69 59 65 63 15 32 37 39 3843  
Hamilton AFB  38.1  3 122.5  95 69 88 67 86 67 81 65 73 70 28 27 30 32 3311  
Hanford  36.3  242 119.7  102 71 99 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 37 22 28 31 2736  
Happy Camp RS  41.8  1150  123.4  103 67 97 66 96 66 92 65 69 67 41 18 24 27 4263  
Hat Creek PH 1  40.9  3015  121.6  99 65 96 64 95 64 91 62 68 66 48 2 7 17 5689  
Hawaiian Gardens  33.8  75 118.1  97 70 91 69 89 69 84 67 72 70 23 32 37 39 - 
Hawthorne  33.9  70 118.4  92 69 85 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 16 37 40 42 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -17 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Hayfield Pumps  33.7  1370  115.6  112 71 108 70 107 70 104 68 77 75 31 24 29 32 1529  
Hayward  37.7  530 122.1  92 66 86 65 85 64 81 62 68 66 24 26 31 34 2909  
Healdsburg  38.6  102 122.9  102 69 95 68 94 68 90 66 71 69 37 26 31 34 2572  
Hemet  33.7  1655  117 109 70 104 69 103 69 101 67 74 72 40 20 25 28 - 
Henshaw Dam  33.2  2700  116.8  99 68 94 67 93 67 90 66 71 69 38 15 22 26 3708  
Hercules  38 15 122.3  91 66 87 65 86 65 82 64 69 67 25 30 35 38 823 
Hermosa Beach  33.9  16 118.4  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 12 38 42 45 - 
Hesperia  34.4  3191  117.3  105 67 101 65 100 65 97 63 70 68 38 14 21 25 1654  
Hetch Hetchy  38 3870  119.8  93 62 89 61 88 61 85 59 65 63 32 14 21 25 4816  
Highland  34.1  1315  117.2  106 70 102 69 101 69 97 68 74 72 36 26 31 34 - 
Hillcrest Center  35.4  500 - 106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 34 26 31 35 - 
Hillsborough  37.6  352 122.3  90 66 82 65 80 65 74 64 68 66 23 30 35 37 - 
Hilt 42 2900  122.6  97 64 93 62 92 62 89 60 66 64 39 5 13 18 - 
Hollister  36.9  280 121.4  96 68 89 67 87 67 81 65 70 68 30 21 27 30 2725  
Hollywood  34 384 118.4  96 70 89 69 87 69 83 67 72 70 20 36 41 44 - 
Home Gardens  33.9  678 117.5  104 70 100 69 98 69 92 67 74 72 35 26 31 34 - 
Hoopa  41 360 123.7  100 67 92 66 91 66 87 64 69 67 25 23 28 31 - 
Huntington Beach  33.7  40 117.8  91 69 83 67 81 67 76 66 71 69 14 34 38 41 - 
Huntington Lake  37.2  7020  119.2  80 55 77 54 76 53 73 51 58 56 25 3 11 16 7632  
Huntington Park  34 175 118 98 70 90 69 88 69 84 67 72 70 20 38 42 45 - 
Idlewild  41.9  1250  124 103 68 96 66 95 66 92 65 69 67 40 18 24 27 - 
Idria  36.4  2650  120.7  97 66 92 65 91 64 87 62 68 66 27 24 29 32 3128  
Idyllwild  33.7  5397  116.7  93 62 89 61 88 61 84 60 67 65 35 9 16 21 - 
Imperial AP  32.8  -59 115.6  114 74 110 73 109 73 106 72 81 79 31 26 31 34 1060  Appendix JA2 -18 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Imperial Beach  32.5  23 117.1  87 69 82 68 81 68 78 67 71 69 10 35 39 41 1839  
Imperial CO  32.9  -64 115.6  112 73 108 72 107 72 104 71 80 78 31 29 34 36 976 
Independence  36.8  3950  118.2  104 61 101 60 100 60 97 60 65 63 31 12 19 24 - 
Indio  33.7  11 116.3  115 75 112 75 111 75 107 74 81 79 30 24 29 32 1059  
Inglewood  33.9  105 118 92 68 85 67 84 67 80 65 70 68 15 37 40 42 - 
Inyokern NAS  35.7  2440  117.8  110 71 106 68 105 68 102 66 75 71 37 15 22 26 2772  
Ione  38.3  298 120.9  101 70 97 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 38 23 28 31 - 
Iron Mtn  34.1  922 115.1  116 75 112 74 111 74 108 73 80 78 26 29 34 36 1251  
Irvine  33.7  50 118 96 69 88 68 86 68 82 67 72 70 27 33 37 40 - 
Isla Vista  34.5  40 119.9  90 69 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 20 33 38 40 - 
Jess Valley  41.3  5300  120.3  92 59 89 58 88 58 84 56 63 61 35 -7 -2 4 7045  
John Wayne AP  33.6  115 117.9  98 70 91 68 89 68 84 67 72 70 26 33 37 39 1496  
Julian Wynola  33.1  3650  116.8  96 66 91 64 90 64 87 62 69 67 39 20 24 26 4049  
Kentfield  38 120 122.6  97 66 91 65 89 65 84 63 70 68 35 27 32 35 3009  
Kerman  36.6  216 120.1  105 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 34 24 28 30 1262  
Kern River PH 1  35.5  970 118.8  106 72 103 71 102 71 99 69 75 73 26 30 35 37 1878  
Kern River PH 3  35.8  2703  118.6  103 69 100 68 99 68 96 66 72 70 34 19 25 28 2891  
Kettleman Stn  36.1  508 120.1  104 71 100 70 98 70 93 68 74 72 31 26 31 34 2180  
King City  36.2  320 121.1  94 67 90 65 89 65 85 64 70 68 36 20 26 29 2639  
Kingsburg  36.4  297 119.6  104 73 101 71 100 71 97 69 75 73 36 24 30 34 1300  
Klamath  41.5  25 124.1  79 62 71 60 70 60 66 58 64 61 18 26 31 33 4509  
Knights Ferry  37.8  315 120.6  103 70 99 68 98 68 94 67 73 71 37 19 25 28 - 
La Canada -Flintridge  34.2  1365  118 99 69 95 68 93 68 88 66 72 70 30 32 36 38 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -19 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
La Crescenta -Montrose  34.2  1565  118 98 69 94 68 92 68 87 66 72 70 33 31 35 37 - 
La Habra  33.9  305 118 100 69 94 68 92 68 87 67 72 70 27 30 35 37 - 
La Habra Heights  34 400 118 100 69 94 68 92 68 87 67 72 70 27 30 35 37 - 
La Mesa  32.8  530 117 94 70 88 69 87 69 84 67 72 70 23 34 39 41 1567  
La Mirada  33.9  115 118 99 70 91 69 89 69 85 68 73 71 26 31 36 38 - 
La Palma  33.9  75 118 98 69 92 68 90 68 85 67 72 70 25 31 35 38 - 
La Puente  34 320 118 101 71 97 70 95 70 91 69 74 72 28 31 36 38 - 
La Quinta  33.8  400 116.3  116 74 112 73 111 73 108 72 79 78 34 26 32 34 332 
La Riviera  38.6  190 121.3  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 32 30 35 37 1025  
La Verne  34.1  1235  118 101 69 97 68 95 68 91 67 73 71 34 29 34 36 - 
Ladera Heights  34.1  100 118.4  91 67 84 67 83 67 79 66 71 69 14 37 40 42 383 
Lafayette  37.9  535 122.1  100 69 94 67 92 67 87 66 71 69 32 24 29 32 - 
Laguna Beach  33.5  35 117.8  91 69 83 68 81 68 76 66 71 69 18 30 33 36 2222  
Laguna Niguel  33.6  500 117.7  95 67 87 66 85 65 81 63 71 67 22 33 37 40 - 
Lake Arrowhead  34.2  5205  117.2  90 62 86 61 85 61 81 59 66 64 26 13 20 24 5310  
Lake Elsinore  33.7  1233  117.3  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 68 74 72 39 22 27 30 827 
Lake Los Angeles  34.7  2300  117.8  106 68 102 67 101 67 98 66 72 70 35 12 17 20 1455  
Lake Spaulding  39.3  5156  120.6  89 58 86 57 85 57 83 55 62 60 34 3 11 16 6447  
Lakeland Village  33.6  1233  117.3  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 68 74 72 39 12 27 30 827 
Lakeport  39 1347  122.9  97 67 93 66 92 65 88 63 69 67 41 20 26 29 3728  
Lakeshore  40.9  1075  119.2  104 69 100 68 99 68 95 66 71 69 28 29 34 36 - 
Lakeside  32.8  690 117 95 69 90 68 89 68 86 66 72 70 20 26 31 34 - 
Lakewood  33.9  45 118 98 70 90 68 88 68 84 66 72 70 22 33 37 40 - Appendix JA2 -20 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Lamont  35.3  500 120 106 72 102 71 101 71 98 69 75 73 34 26 32 35 - 
Lancaster  34.7  2340  118.2  106 68 102 67 101 67 98 66 72 70 35 12 17 20 - 
Larksfield -Wikiup  38.5  170 122.8  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 35 24 27 29 1249  
Larkspur  37.9  20 122.5  97 68 91 66 89 66 84 64 69 68 34 28 33 35 - 
Las Plumas  39.7  506 121.4  104 71 101 70 100 70 96 68 73 71 32 24 29 32 - 
Lathrop  37.8  22 121.3  103 71 98 69 97 69 93 67 73 71 35 24 28 30 1300  
Lava Beds  41.7  4770  121.5  93 59 89 58 88 58 84 56 63 61 41 -1 4 11 - 
Lawndale  33.9  66 118 92 69 85 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 16 37 40 42 - 
Le Grand  37.2  255 120.3  101 70 96 68 95 68 91 66 72 70 38 23 28 31 2696  
Lemon Grove  32.7  437 117.2  96 71 88 69 87 69 84 67 72 70 19 34 38 41 - 
Lemoncove  36.4  513 119 105 72 102 70 101 70 98 68 72 70 38 25 38 41 2513  
Lemoore NAS  36.3  228 120 104 72 101 71 100 71 97 69 74 72 37 19 25 28 2960  
Lennox  33.9  71 117.8  92 69 85 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 16 37 41 44 - 
Lincoln Village  38 12 121.3  101 70 96 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 37 24 28 30 1334  
Linda  39 60 121.6  105 72 102 70 101 70 97 68 74 72 30 27 32 35 1160  
Lindsay  36.2  395 119.1  105 72 101 71 100 71 97 69 74 72 40 24 29 32 2634  
Little Panoche  36.8  677 120.7  100 68 94 67 92 67 86 66 71 69 33 23 28 31 - 
Live Oak  39.2  75 121.7  105 70 102 69 101 69 97 69 73 71 36 24 29 32 1160  
Livermore  37.7  490 122 100 69 95 68 93 68 88 67 71 70 35 22 25 28 3012  
Livingston  37.3  165 120.7  103 72 100 70 99 70 95 68 74 72 39 24 30 34 1244  
Llano Shawnee  34.5  3820  117.8  104 68 99 67 98 67 95 65 71 69 31 21 27 31 - 
Lodgepole  36.6  6735  118.7  84 57 80 56 80 56 78 54 60 58 26 -4 1 7 - 
Lodi  38.1  40 121.3  101 70 97 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 38 23 28 31 2859  
Loma Linda  34 1150  117.5  106 70 103 69 102 69 99 67 74 72 36 27 32 35 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -21 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Lomita  33.8  56 119 95 69 87 68 85 68 81 66 71 69 18 33 38 40 - 
Lompoc  34.9  95 120.5  84 63 77 62 76 62 72 60 65 63 18 26 31 34 2888  
Long Beach  33.7  34 118.2  97 70 88 68 86 67 82 65 65 63 18 35 31 34 - 
Long Beach AP  33.8  25 118.2  99 71 90 69 88 68 84 66 73 71 21 33 38 41 1606  
Loomis  38.8  408 121.2  107 71 103 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 39 21 27 30 - 
Los Alamitos NAS  33.8  30 118.1  98 71 89 69 87 69 83 68 73 71 23 32 37 39 1740  
Los Altos  37.3  163 122 96 68 88 65 86 64 80 62 70 68 26 28 33 35 - 
Los Altos Hills  37.3  183 122.1  93 67 85 64 83 64 77 63 68 66 25 28 33 35 1103  
Los Angeles AP  33.9  97 118.4  91 67 84 67 83 67 79 66 71 69 14 37 40 42 1819  
Los Angeles CO  34 270 118.2  99 69 92 68 90 68 86 67 72 70 21 38 41 43 1245  
Los Banos  37 120 120.9  100 70 96 68 94 68 88 67 72 70 42 22 28 31 2616  
Los Banos Res  37 407 120.9  101 70 97 68 95 68 89 67 72 70 42 23 29 31 - 
Los Gatos  37.2  365 122 98 69 90 67 88 67 82 66 71 69 32 26 31 34 2741  
Los Serranos  34.1  714 117.7  104 70 100 69 98 69 94 68 74 72 35 27 32 35 706 
Lucas Vly -Marinwood  38.3  20 122.6  79 63 74 62 71 61 65 59 64 62 12 30 35 37 874 
Lucerne Valley  34.5  2957  117 105 67 101 66 100 66 98 64 71 69 38 12 19 24 - 
Lynwood  33.9  88 118 98 70 90 69 88 69 83 67 72 70 21 32 37 39 - 
Madera  37 268 120.1  105 72 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 40 24 29 32 2673  
Madera Acres  36.9  275 120.1  105 72 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 40 24 29 32 1250  
Manhattan Beach  33.9  120 118 91 69 84 68 83 68 79 66 71 69 12 38 42 45 - 
Manteca  37.8  34 121.2  102 70 97 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 37 24 29 32 - 
Manzanita Lake  40.5  5850  121.6  87 58 84 57 83 57 79 55 61 59 34 -3 2 8 7617  
March AFB  33.9  1511  117.3  103 70 99 68 98 67 94 65 74 71 34 23 30 33 2089  
Maricopa  35.1  675 119.4  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 29 25 30 33 2302  Appendix JA2 -22 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Marina  36.7  20 121.8  86 66 77 63 75 63 70 61 67 64 18 32 37 40 - 
Marina del Rey  34.1  40 118.5  91 69 84 68 83 68 79 66 71 69 12 38 42 45 383 
Markley Cove  38.5  480 122.1  104 70 99 69 97 69 93 67 72 70 39 23 29 31 - 
Martinez FS  38 40 122.1  99 67 94 66 92 66 88 65 71 69 36 28 33 35 - 
Marysville  39.2  60 121.6  105 72 102 70 101 70 97 68 74 72 36 27 32 35 2552  
Mather AFB  38.6  96 121.3  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 35 28 33 35 - 
Maywood  34 170 118 97 70 91 69 89 69 85 67 72 70 21 34 38 41 - 
McClellan AFB  38.7  86 121.4  105 71 102 70 100 70 96 68 74 71 35 23 28 21 2566  
McCloud  41.3  3300  122.1  96 63 93 62 91 62 87 60 66 64 42 5 13 18 5990  
McFarland  35.6  350 119.2  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 69 74 72 36 22 25 28 1162  
McKinleyville  40.9  33 124.1  75 61 69 59 68 59 65 58 61 60 11 28 31 33 1995  
Mecca FS  33.6  -180 116.1  115 75 111 75 110 75 107 74 81 79 30 24 29 32 1185  
Mendota  36.7  169 120.4  105 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 34 24 28 30 1273  
Menlo Park  37.4  65 122.3  94 67 86 65 84 65 78 63 69 67 25 27 32 34 - 
Mentone  34.1  1700  117.1  106 70 102 69 101 69 98 67 74 72 34 27 32 35 741 
Merced AP  37.3  153 120.6  103 71 100 69 99 69 95 67 73 71 36 21 27 30 2653  
Mill Creek  35.1  2940  117 102 67 97 66 96 66 94 65 70 68 28 28 33 36 - 
Mill Valley  37.9  80 122.6  97 68 91 66 89 66 84 64 70 68 28 28 33 35 3400  
Millbrae  37.6  10 122.4  90 66 82 63 80 63 74 61 67 65 24 30 35 37 - 
Milpitas  37.4  15 121.9  94 68 87 65 85 65 79 63 70 67 27 27 32 35 - 
Mineral  40.4  4911  121.6  90 60 87 59 86 59 82 57 63 61 38 2 7 14 7257  
Mira Loma  34 700 117.5  105 70 101 69 99 68 95 66 74 72 34 25 33 36 600 
Miramar AFS  32.9  477 117.1  97 69 91 68 90 68 86 67 72 70 22 32 36 38 1532  
Miramonte  34.4  750 119.1  102 71 97 69 95 69 91 68 73 71 38 25 29 32 771 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -23 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Mission Viejo  33.6  350 118 95 67 87 66 85 65 81 63 71 67 22 33 37 40 - 
Mitchell Caverns  34.9  4350  117.0  102 64 98 63 97 63 94 61 69 67 29 21 27 30 - 
Modesto  37.6  91 121 102 73 99 70 98 70 95 68 75 72 36 25 30 33 2671  
Moffett Field NAS  37.4  39 122.1  89 68 84 66 82 66 78 64 70 68 23 30 34 36 2511  
Mojave  35.1  2735  118.2  106 68 102 67 101 67 98 66 71 69 35 16 22 26 3012  
Mono Lake  38 6450  119.2  91 58 88 57 87 57 84 55 62 60 32 4 12 17 6518  
Monrovia  34.2  562 118.3  100 69 96 68 94 68 90 67 73 71 30 33 38 41 - 
Montague  41.8  2648  122.5  99 66 95 65 94 65 90 63 69 67 39 3 11 16 5474  
Montclair  34 1220  117 104 69 100 68 98 68 94 66 73 71 35 28 33 35 - 
Montebello  34 205 118.1  98 69 93 68 91 68 86 67 72 70 24 33 37 39 - 
Monterey AP  36.6  245 121.9  86 65 77 62 75 62 70 61 66 63 20 30 35 38 3556  
Monterey CO  36.6  345 121.9  87 65 78 62 76 62 71 61 66 63 20 32 37 40 3169  
Monterey Park  34 380 118 99 69 94 68 92 68 87 67 72 70 23 30 35 37 - 
Monticello Dam  38.5  505 122.1  105 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 39 26 31 34 - 
Moraga  37.8  600 122.2  99 68 93 66 91 66 86 64 70 68 27 21 26 29  
Moreno Valley  33.9  1600  117.2  103 70 99 68 98 67 94 65 74 71 34 27 30 33 611 
Morgan Hill  37.1  350 120 100 69 92 68 90 68 85 66 71 69 25 26 31 34 - 
Morro Bay FD  35.4  115 120.9  88 65 82 64 80 64 76 62 67 65 14 31 36 38 - 
Mount Baldy Notch  34.3  7735  117.6  80 58 76 57 75 56 71 54 61 59 32 4 10 14 - 
Mount Diablo  37.9  2100  121.9  101 68 96 66 93 66 87 65 68 59 28 27 32 35 4600  
Mount Hamilton  37.3  4206  121.7  95 59 88 58 86 58 81 56 63 61 18 18 24 27 4724  
Mount Hebron RS  41.8  4250  122 92 60 88 59 86 59 82 57 63 61 42 -10 -4 0 - 
Mount San Jacinto  33.8  8417  116.6  82 56 77 55 76 55 73 53 61 59 35 -1 4 11 - 
Mount Shasta  41.3  3535  122.3  93 62 89 61 88 61 84 59 65 63 34 8 15 20 5890  Appendix JA2 -24 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Mount Wilson  34.2  5709  118.1  90 63 85 61 83 60 79 58 66 64 21 15 22 26 4296  
Mountain Pass  35.5  4730  115.5  100 65 96 64 95 64 92 63 68 66 29 11 18 23 - 
Mountain View  37.5  95 121.9  93 67 85 64 83 64 77 62 68 66 25 28 33 35 - 
Muscoy  34.2  1400  117.3  105 71 101 69 100 68 96 66 75 72 37 26 31 34 614 
Nacimiento Dam  35.8  770 120.9  100 68 94 66 92 66 88 64 70 68 35 22 28 31 - 
Napa State Hospital  37.3  60 122.3  94 67 91 67 90 67 86 66 71 70 29 26 31 34 2749  
National City  32.7  34 117 87 70 82 68 81 68 78 66 71 69 10 36 40 42 - 
Needles AP  34.8  913 114.6  117 73 114 72 113 72 110 71 77 75 26 27 32 35 1391  
Nevada City  39.3  2600  121 97 66 94 64 92 64 88 63 68 66 41 14 21 25 4900  
Newark  37.5  10 122 94 68 89 67 87 67 82 65 70 68 24 29 34 36 - 
Newhall Soledad  34.4  1243  118.6  104 70 100 68 99 68 95 67 73 71 42 27 33 36 - 
Newman  37.3  90 121.1  104 71 99 69 97 69 93 67 73 71 38 22 28 31 - 
Newport Beach  33.6  10 117.9  87 68 80 66 78 66 72 65 70 68 12 34 39 41 1952  
Nipomo  35 330 120.5  90 66 83 64 82 63 78 61 67 65 23 25 31 33 1035  
Norco  33.9  700 117 103 70 99 69 98 69 94 67 74 72 34 27 32 35 - 
North Auburn  38.9  1300  121.1  103 69 100 67 99 67 95 66 72 69 33 25 30 33 1518  
North Fork RS  37.2  2630  119.5  98 66 95 65 94 64 92 62 69 67 36 15 22 26 - 
North Highlands  38.6  45 121.4  104 71 100 69 98 69 94 67 73 71 35 23 28 31 2566  
North Hollywood  34.2  619 118.4  102 70 97 69 95 69 91 67 73 71 31 28 33 36 - 
Northridge  34.2  875 118.5  101 70 96 69 94 69 90 67 73 71 36 30 35 38 650 
Norwalk  33.9  97 118.1  99 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 26 31 35 37 - 
Novato  38.1  370 122.5  94 64 87 63 85 63 80 61 68 66 30 25 30 32 - 
Oakdale  37.8  215 120.9  102 71 99 69 97 69 93 67 73 71 37 22 28 32 - 
Oakland AP  37.7  6 122.2  91 66 84 64 82 64 77 62 67 65 20 32 34 37 2909  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -25 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Oakland Museum  37.8  30 122.2  96 68 89 66 87 65 82 63 69 67 20 31 33 36 - 
Oakley  38 20 121.7  102 70 97 68 95 68 91 66 70 69 34 22 28 31 - 
Oceano  35.1  20 120.6  93 69 86 64 84 64 80 62 67 65 18 30 34 37 795 
Oceanside  33.2  10 117.4  84 69 80 67 78 67 74 65 70 68 10 33 37 39 - 
Oildale  35.5  450 119 106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 34 26 31 35 - 
Ojai 34.5  750 119.3  102 71 97 69 95 69 91 68 73 71 38 25 29 32 2145  
Olivehurst  39 64 121.6  105 72 102 70 101 70 97 68 74 72 36 27 32 35 1160  
Ontario AP  34 934 117 105 70 101 69 99 68 95 66 74 72 34 26 33 36 1710  
Opal Cliffs  37 125 122 94 68 88 66 86 66 81 64 69 67 28 27 32 35 1097  
Orange  33.6  194 118 99 70 92 68 90 68 85 67 72 70 27 33 37 40 - 
Orange Cove  36.6  431 119.3  104 71 100 69 99 69 97 68 73 71 38 25 30 33 2684  
Orangevale  38.7  140 121.2  105 72 102 70 100 70 96 68 74 71 36 24 30 34 - 
Orick Prairie Creek  41.4  161 124 80 61 75 60 74 60 70 59 63 61 23 25 30 33 4816  
Orinda  37.9  550 122.2  99 68 93 66 91 66 86 64 70 68 32 21 26 29 - 
Orland  39.8  254 122.2  105 71 102 70 101 70 97 68 73 71 36 22 28 31 2824  
Orleans  41.3  403 123.5  104 70 97 68 95 68 91 66 71 69 42 21 27 30 3628  
Orosi  36.5  400 119.3  104 73 101 70 100 70 96 69 75 73 36 24 30 34 1130  
Oroville East  39.5  171 121.6  106 71 104 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 37 25 30 33 1385  
Oroville RS  39.5  300 121.6  106 71 104 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 37 25 30 33 - 
Otay -Castle Pk  32.6  500 117 87 68 81 66 79 65 74 63 69 67 10 33 38 40 - 
Oxnard AFB  34.2  49 119.2  94 69 86 68 84 68 79 67 71 69 21 30 34 37 2068  
Pacific Grove  36.7  114 122 87 66 78 63 76 63 71 61 67 64 19 31 35 37 - 
Pacifica  37.6  13 122 87 65 79 62 77 62 71 60 66 64 16 31 35 37 - 
Pacoima  34.3  895 118.4  104 71 99 70 98 70 94 68 74 72 35 29 34 37 664 Appendix JA2 -26 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Palermo  39.4  154 121.5  106 71 104 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 37 25 30 33 1170  
Palm Desert  33.7  200 116.5  116 74 112 73 111 73 108 72 79 78 34 26 32 34 - 
Palm Desert Country  33.7  243 116.3  116 74 112 73 111 73 108 72 79 78 34 26 32 34 374 
Palm Springs  33.8  411 116.5  117 74 113 73 112 73 109 72 79 78 35 26 31 34 1109  
Palmdale AP  34.6  2517  118.1  107 67 103 67 102 66 98 64 71 69 33 12 20 24 2929  
Palmdale CO  34.6  2596  118.1  106 67 102 67 101 66 97 64 71 69 35 13 21 25 2908  
Palo Alto  37.5  25 122.1  93 66 85 64 83 64 77 62 68 66 25 26 31 34 2891  
Palomar Obsy  33.4  5545  116.9  90 62 85 61 84 61 80 59 66 64 22 16 20 23 4141  
Palos Verdes  33.8  216 119 92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 14 38 43 46 - 
Panorama City  34.2  801 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 32 28 33 36 664 
Paradise  39.8  1750  121.6  102 69 99 67 98 67 94 66 71 69 34 25 30 33 - 
Paramount  33.9  70 117 98 70 90 69 88 69 84 67 72 70 22 32 37 40 - 
Parker Res  34.3  738 114.2  115 74 112 73 111 73 108 72 79 77 26 32 37 40 1223  
Parkway -South Sacramento  38.5  17 121.4  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 32 30 35 37 1150  
Parlier  36.6  320 119.5  104 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 38 24 30 34 1262  
Pasadena  34.2  864 118.2  99 69 94 68 92 68 88 67 73 71 30 32 37 40 1551  
Paso Robles AP  35.7  815 120.7  104 66 97 66 96 66 92 65 70 68 40 19 23 26 2973  
Paso Robles CO  35.6  700 120.7  102 65 95 65 94 65 90 65 69 67 44 16 20 23 2885  
Patterson  37.4  97 121.1  101 72 96 70 94 69 90 67 74 72 36 24 30 34 1240  
Pedley  34 718 117.5  105 70 101 69 99 68 95 66 74 72 34 26 33 36 600 
Pendleton MCB  33.3  63 117.3  92 68 87 67 85 67 81 66 71 69 22 34 39 41 1532  
Pendleton MCB Coast  33.2  24 117.4  84 69 80 67 79 67 75 65 70 68 10 39 44 46 1782  
Perris  33.8  1470  117.2  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 68 74 72 39 22 27 30 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -27 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Petaluma FS 2  38.2  16 122.6  98 69 92 67 90 67 85 66 72 69 31 24 29 32 2959  
Pico Rivera  34 180 118 98 70 91 69 89 69 85 67 72 70 24 31 35 38 - 
Piedmont  37.8  325 122 96 68 89 66 87 65 82 63 70 68 23 31 33 36 - 
Pinnacles NM  36.5  1307  121.2  98 68 94 67 93 66 89 64 70 68 45 20 26 29 2956  
Pinole  38 10 122.3  91 66 87 65 86 65 82 64 69 67 25 30 35 38 - 
Pismo Beach  35.1  80 120.6  92 66 85 64 84 64 80 62 67 65 16 30 34 37 2756  
Pittsburg  38 50 121.8  102 70 97 68 95 68 90 67 72 70 34 26 32 35 - 
Placentia  33.9  323 118 101 69 93 68 91 68 87 67 73 71 28 30 34 37 - 
Placerville  38.7  1890  120.8  101 67 98 66 97 66 93 65 70 68 42 20 26 29 4086  
Placerville IFG  38.7  2755  120.8  100 66 97 65 96 65 92 64 69 67 42 23 28 31 - 
Platina  40.4  2260  122.9  96 65 92 64 91 63 87 61 67 65 36 13 20 24 - 
Pleasant Hill  37.9  102 122 96 68 93 67 92 67 88 65 70 68 34 25 30 33 - 
Pleasanton  37.6  350 121.8  97 68 94 67 93 67 89 65 70 68 35 24 29 32 - 
Point Arena  38.9  100 123.7  76 62 72 60 71 60 67 58 63 61 19 29 32 34 4747  
Point Arguello  34.6  76 120.7  75 64 71 63 69 62 65 59 65 63 17 29 32 35 3826  
Point Mugu  34.1  14 119.1  88 68 81 67 79 67 75 66 70 68 15 33 37 39 2328  
Point Piedras Blancas  35.7  59 121.3  73 60 67 59 65 59 61 57 62 60 10 36 41 43 3841  
Pomona Cal Poly  34.1  740 117.8  102 70 98 69 97 69 93 67 74 72 36 27 32 35 1971  
Port Chicago ND  38 50 122 98 69 94 68 92 68 88 66 71 69 34 28 33 36 - 
Port Hueneme  34.2  13 119 88 68 81 67 79 67 75 66 70 68 15 33 37 39 2334  
Porterville  36.1  393 119 106 71 102 70 101 70 97 69 74 72 36 25 30 33 2456  
Portola  39.8  4850  120.5  92 63 89 61 88 61 84 59 65 63 48 -9 -3 1 7111  
Posey 3 E  35.8  4960  119 89 62 86 61 85 61 82 59 65 63 26 9 16 21 - 
Potter Valley PH  39.4  1015  123.1  101 68 96 67 94 67 89 65 70 68 40 20 26 29 3276  Appendix JA2 -28 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Poway Valley  33 500 117 100 70 94 69 93 69 89 68 73 71 26 29 33 35 - 
Priest Valley  36.2  2300  120.7  97 66 93 65 92 65 88 63 69 67 34 13 20 24 4144  
Prunedale  36.6  260 121.7  86 66 83 65 82 64 79 62 68 66 20 26 31 34 1100  
Quartz Hill  34.6  2428  118.2  106 68 102 67 101 67 98 66 72 70 35 12 17 20 1455  
Quincy  39.9  3409  120.9  101 64 98 63 97 63 93 62 68 66 45 1 6 13 5763  
Ramona Spaulding  33.1  1480  116.8  103 70 97 69 96 69 92 68 73 71 40 22 28 31 - 
Rancho Bernardo  33 500 117.1  96 69 91 68 89 68 85 67 72 70 26 29 34 36 - 
Rancho Cordova  38.6  190 121.3  104 72 100 69 98 69 94 68 74 71 35 26 31 33 - 
Rancho Mirage  33.8  248 116.4  117 74 113 73 112 73 109 72 79 78 33 26 31 34 374 
Rancho Palos Verdes  33.7  216 118.2  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 14 38 43 46 - 
Rancho San Diego  32.8  300 117.0  94 69 86 68 85 68 82 66 71 69 30 34 38 41 404 
Rancho Santa Margarita  33.6  116 117.6  95 67 87 66 85 65 81 63 71 67 22 33 37 40 496 
Randsburg  35.3  3570  117.7  105 67 102 66 101 66 97 65 70 68 30 19 25 28 2922  
Red Bluff AP  40.2  342 122.3  107 70 104 69 102 68 98 66 73 71 31 24 29 31 2688  
Redding FS 4  40.6  470 122.4  107 69 103 68 101 68 97 67 72 70 30 26 31 34 2544  
Redlands  34.1  1318  117.2  106 70 102 69 101 69 98 67 74 72 34 27 32 35 1993  
Redondo Beach  33.8  45 118.3  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 12 37 42 44 - 
Redwood City  37.5  31 122.2  90 67 86 66 85 66 81 64 69 67 28 28 33 35 2599  
Reedley  36.6  344 119.7  104 71 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 40 24 30 34 - 
Reseda  34.2  736 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 32 28 33 36 664 
Rialto  34.1  1254  117 105 70 101 69 100 68 96 66 74 72 35 28 33 35 - 
Richardson Grove  40 500 123.8  96 67 92 66 91 66 87 64 69 67 28 25 30 33 - 
Richmond  37.9  55 121.6  88 65 84 64 82 64 77 62 67 65 17 31 36 38 2684  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -29 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Ridgecrest  35.6  2340  117.8  110 70 106 68 105 68 102 66 75 71 35 15 22 26 - 
Rio Del Mar  37 50 121.9  94 67 88 66 87 65 83 63 69 67 30 27 32 35 1097  
Rio Linda  38.6  86 121.5  104 72 100 70 98 70 94 68 74 71 32 28 33 35 1290  
Ripon  37.7  61 121.1  102 70 97 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 37 23 30 33 1240  
Riverbank  37.7  133 120.9  102 73 99 70 98 70 95 68 75 72 36 25 30 33 1240  
Riverside Exp Sta  34 986 117.4  106 71 102 69 101 69 97 67 75 72 36 29 34 36 - 
Riverside FS 3  34 840 117.4  104 70 100 69 99 68 95 65 74 72 37 27 32 35 1818  
Rocklin  38.8  239 121.2  108 72 104 70 103 70 99 69 74 72 39 20 26 29 3143  
Rodeo  38.1  15 122.3  93 67 90 66 88 66 84 64 70 68 23 28 33 36 823 
Rohnert Park  38.4  106 122.6  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 33 24 27 29 - 
Rolling Hills  33.6  216 119 92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 15 38 43 46 - 
Rosamond  34.8  2326  118.2  106 68 102 67 101 67 98 66 71 69 35 16 22 26 1455  
Roseland  38.4  167 122.7  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 35 24 27 29 1249  
Rosemead  34 275 118 98 70 90 69 88 69 84 67 72 70 27 30 35 37 - 
Rosemont  38.3  190 121.4  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 32 30 35 37 1025  
Roseville  38.7  160 121.2  105 71 102 70 100 70 96 68 74 71 36 24 30 34 - 
Rossmoor  33.8  20 118.1  92 67 85 64 83 64 79 62 71 69 19 32 37 39 - 
Rowland Hts  33.9  540 118 99 70 93 69 91 69 86 68 73 71 27 29 34 36 - 
Rubidoux  34 792 117 106 71 102 70 101 70 97 68 75 73 36 27 32 35 - 
Sacramento AP  38.5  17 121.5  104 72 100 70 98 70 94 68 74 71 35 26 31 33 2843  
Sacramento CO  38.6  84 121.5  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 32 30 35 37 - 
Saint Helena  38.5  225 122.5  102 70 98 69 97 69 93 67 72 70 40 22 28 31 2878  
Saint Mary's College  37.8  623 122.1  98 69 93 68 91 68 86 66 71 69 28 21 27 30 3543  
Salinas 3 E  36.7  85 121.6  86 66 83 65 82 64 79 62 68 66 20 26 31 34 - Appendix JA2 -30 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Salinas AP  36.7  69 121.6  85 67 82 65 81 64 78 62 69 66 20 28 33 35 2959  
Salt Springs PH  38.5  3700  120.2  95 62 92 61 91 61 87 59 66 64 27 19 25 28 3857  
Salyer RS  40.9  623 123.6  102 69 95 67 93 66 87 64 70 68 33 22 28 31 - 
San Anselmo  38 50 122 95 67 89 66 87 66 82 65 70 68 32 26 31 33 - 
San Antonio Canyon  34.2  2394  117.7  100 68 96 67 94 67 90 65 72 70 33 29 35 39 - 
San Antonio Mission  36 1060  117.7  99 69 94 68 92 68 88 67 71 69 28 19 25 28 - 
San Bernardino  34.1  1125  117.3  106 70 102 69 101 69 98 68 75 72 39 27 31 33 1777  
San Bruno  37.7  20 122.4  86 66 80 64 78 64 73 62 67 65 23 30 35 38 3042  
San Carlos  37.5  26 122.3  92 67 88 65 86 65 82 63 68 66 28 28 33 35 - 
San Clemente  33.4  208 118.6  91 68 85 67 84 67 80 66 71 69 12 31 35 37 - 
San Diego AP  32.7  13 117.2  88 70 83 69 82 69 78 68 72 70 13 38 42 44 1507  
San Dimas  34 955 118.4  102 70 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 72 35 30 35 37 - 
San Fernando  34.3  977 118.5  104 71 99 70 98 70 94 68 74 72 37 30 35 37 1800  
San Francisco AP  37.6  8 122.4  89 66 83 64 80 63 74 61 67 64 20 31 35 38 3042  
San Francisco CO  37.8  52 122.4  84 65 79 63 77 62 71 60 66 63 14 38 41 44 3080  
San Gabriel FD  34.1  450 118.1  99 70 94 69 92 69 88 68 73 71 30 30 35 37 1532  
San Gregorio 2 SE  37.3  275 122.4  87 66 81 63 79 63 74 61 68 65 30 27 32 35 - 
San Jacinto  33.8  1535  117 110 70 105 69 104 69 102 68 75 73 41 20 26 29 2376  
San Jose  37.4  67 121.9  94 68 86 66 84 66 78 64 70 68 26 29 34 36 2438  
San Leandro  37.7  45 122.2  89 67 83 64 81 64 76 62 69 66 22 28 33 35 - 
San Lorenzo  37.7  45 122.1  89 67 83 64 81 64 76 62 69 66 23 28 33 36 - 
San Luis Dam  37.1  277 121.1  97 68 91 66 90 66 86 64 70 68 32 25 30 33 - 
San Luis Obispo  35.3  320 120.7  94 63 87 63 85 63 81 62 67 65 26 30 33 35 2498  
San Marcos  33.1  567 117.2  97 69 98 68 94 68 84 67 72 70 29 26 31 34 662 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -31 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
San Marino  34.2  300 118.1  100 69 95 68 93 68 88 66 73 71 28 30 35 37 - 
San Mateo  37.5  21 122.3  92 67 84 65 82 65 76 63 68 66 24 31 36 38 2655  
San Nicholas Island  33.2  504 119.5  85 66 78 65 76 65 70 64 69 67 11 39 43 45 2454  
San Pablo  37.6  30 122.3  90 65 84 63 82 63 77 61 69 66 17 29 34 37 - 
San Pedro  33.7  10 118.3  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 72 70 13 35 31 34 1819  
San Rafael  38 40 122.6  96 67 90 65 88 65 83 63 71 68 29 30 35 37 2440  
San Ramon  37.7  360 122 99 69 93 67 91 67 86 65 70 68 35 24 29 32 1369  
Sandberg  34.8  4517  118.7  95 63 91 61 90 61 87 59 67 65 32 17 21 24 4427  
Sanger  36.7  364 119.6  105 72 101 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 37 24 30 34 - 
Santa Ana FS  33.8  115 117.8  98 70 91 68 89 68 84 67 72 70 26 33 35 38 1430  
Santa Barbara AP  34.4  9 119.8  90 69 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 20 29 34 36 2487  
Santa Barbara CO  34.4  5 119.7  91 69 84 67 82 67 78 65 70 68 22 33 38 40 1994  
Santa Clara Univ  37.4  88 121.9  90 67 87 65 86 65 82 63 69 67 30 29 34 36 2566  
Santa Clarita  34.4  1300  118.5  103 71 98 70 97 70 93 68 74 72 36 30 35 37 - 
Santa Cruz  37 125 122 94 68 88 66 86 66 81 64 69 67 28 27 32 35 3136  
Santa Fe Springs  33.9  280 118.1  99 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 24 31 36 38 - 
Santa Maria AP  34.9  236 120.5  90 66 83 64 82 63 78 61 67 65 23 25 31 33 3053  
Santa Monica  34 15 118.5  85 67 78 66 76 66 72 64 69 67 15 39 44 46 1873  
Santa Paula  34.4  263 119.1  101 71 94 70 92 70 87 68 73 71 28 28 33 35 2030  
Santa Rosa  38.5  167 122.8  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 35 24 27 29 2980  
Santee  32.8  400 117 96 69 91 68 90 68 87 67 72 70 20 25 30 33 - 
Saratoga  37.3  500 122 96 67 88 66 86 66 80 65 70 68 31 27 32 35 - 
Sausalito  37.9  10 122.5  85 66 80 65 78 65 73 63 67 65 12 30 34 36 - 
Sawyer's Bar RS  41.3  2169  123.1  100 66 95 65 93 64 88 62 68 66 38 14 21 25 4102  Appendix JA2 -32 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Scotia  40.5  139 124.4  78 61 74 60 73 60 69 58 63 61 19 28 33 35 3954  
Scotts Valley  37 400 122 94 68 88 66 86 66 81 64 69 67 28 27 32 35 1097  
Seal Beach  33.8  21 118.1  94 69 86 68 84 67 80 65 71 69 15 35 40 42 1519  
Seaside  36.6  17 122.9  85 66 79 64 77 64 73 62 67 65 20 30 35 37 - 
Sebastapol  38.4  102 122.8  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 35 24 27 29 1249  
Selma  36.6  305 119.6  104 73 101 71 100 70 97 68 75 73 38 24 30 34 - 
Sepulveda  34.2  818 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 32 28 33 36 664 
Shafter  35.5  345 119.2  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 28 24 29 32 2185  
Shasta Dam  40.7  1076  122.4  105 69 101 68 99 68 95 67 72 70 27 29 34 36 2943  
Shelter Cove  40 110 124.1  80 61 73 60 72 59 68 57 63 61 15 34 39 41 - 
Sherman Oaks  34.2  657 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 28 29 34 37 664 
Sierra City  39.6  4230  120.1  96 62 93 61 92 61 89 59 66 64 43 12 19 24 - 
Sierra Madre  34.2  1153  118.1  102 69 96 68 94 68 90 67 73 71 27 32 37 39 - 
Sierraville RS  39.6  4975  120.4  94 60 91 59 90 59 86 57 64 62 44 -10 -4 0 6893  
Signal Hill  33.5  100 118.2  99 70 90 69 88 68 84 66 72 70 19 35 39 42 - 
Simi Valley  34.4  500 118.8  98 70 93 68 91 68 87 66 73 71 30 28 33 35 - 
Solana Beach  33 15 117.3  87 68 83 67 81 67 77 65 70 68 10 35 39 41 - 
Soledad  36.4  200 121.3  90 67 87 65 86 65 82 64 70 67 23 24 29 32 1020  
Sonoma  38.3  70 122.5  101 70 96 69 94 69 90 67 72 70 40 22 28 31 2998  
Sonora RS  38 1749  120.4  103 68 100 67 99 67 95 66 72 70 34 20 26 29 3537  
Soquel  37 50 122 94 67 88 66 86 65 81 63 69 67 24 27 32 35 1097  
South El Monte  34 270 118.1  101 72 97 70 95 70 91 68 74 72 28 31 36 38 - 
South Entr Yosemite  37.5  5120  119.6  92 61 88 60 87 60 84 59 64 62 36 8 15 20 5789  
South Gate  33.9  120 118.2  97 70 90 69 88 69 84 67 72 70 21 32 37 39 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -33 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
South Laguna  33.6  100 117.7  91 69 83 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 18 30 33 36 586 
South Lake Tahoe  38.9  6200  120 85 56 82 55 79 55 71 54 60 58 33 -2 3 10 - 
South Oroville  39.5  174 121.6  106 71 104 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 37 25 30 33 1385  
South Pasadena  34 657 118.2  99 69 94 68 92 68 88 67 73 71 30 31 36 38 - 
South San Francisco  37.7  10 122.4  87 67 81 64 78 64 72 62 68 65 20 32 36 38 - 
South San Gabriel  34.1  450 118.1  99 70 94 69 92 69 88 68 73 71 73 30 35 37 431 
South Whittier  33.9  300 118 100 70 92 69 90 69 84 68 73 71 30 31 36 38 - 
South Yuba City  39.1  59 121.6  105 69 101 69 100 69 96 68 72 71 36 24 29 32 1160  
Spring Valley  32.7  300 117 94 69 86 68 85 68 82 66 71 69 30 34 38 41 - 
Squaw Valley  39.2  6235  120.2  88 57 85 56 84 56 80 54 61 59 40 -10 -4 0 - 
Squirrel Inn  34.2  5680  117.2  86 61 82 60 81 60 77 58 65 63 23 12 18 22 5175  
Stanford  37.5  23 122.1  93 66 85 64 83 64 77 62 68 66 25 26 31 34 1103  
Stanton  33.6  45 118 98 69 91 68 89 68 84 67 72 70 24 31 36 38 - 
Stockton AP  37.9  22 121.3  103 71 98 69 97 69 93 67 73 71 35 24 28 30 2806  
Stockton FS 4  38 12 121.3  101 70 96 68 95 68 91 67 72 70 37 24 28 30 2846  
Stony Gorge Res  39.6  791 122.5  104 70 99 69 97 69 93 67 72 70 37 21 27 30 3149  
Strawberry Valley  39.6  3808  121.1  96 63 93 62 92 62 88 60 66 64 32 14 21 25 5120  
Studio City  34.3  620 118.4  102 70 97 69 95 69 91 67 73 71 31 28 33 36 664 
Suisun City  38.2  72 122 103 71 98 69 96 68 91 66 73 70 35 24 29 32 1299  
Sun City  33.7  1420  117.2  105 70 101 69 100 69 97 68 74 72 39 22 27 30 827 
Sunland  34.3  1460  118.3  107 71 102 70 100 70 96 68 74 72 36 28 33 36 - 
Sunnyvale  37.3  97 122 96 68 88 66 86 66 80 64 70 68 26 29 34 36 2511  
Susanville AP  40.4  4148  120.6  98 62 95 61 94 61 90 59 66 64 38 -1 4 11 6233  
Taft 35.1  987 119.5  106 71 102 70 101 70 98 68 74 72 34 26 31 35 934 Appendix JA2 -34 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Tahoe City  39.2  6230  120.1  84 56 81 55 80 55 76 53 60 58 36 2 7 14 8085  
Tahoe Valley AP  38.9  6254  120.0  85 56 82 55 81 55 77 53 60 58 38 -5 2 6 - 
Tamalpais -Homestead 
Valley  37.9  25 122.5  97 68 91 66 89 66 84 64 70 68 28 28 33 35 874 
Tarzana  34.2  800 118.6  104 71 99 69 97 69 93 68 74 71 27 27 32 35 664 
Tehachapi  35.1  3975  118.5  97 66 93 65 92 65 89 64 69 67 33 13 20 24 4494  
Tejon Rancho  35 1425  118.8  107 71 103 70 102 70 99 68 74 72 27 24 29 32 2602  
Temecula  33.5  1006  117.2  101 69 96 68 95 68 91 67 73 71 34 24 29 32 - 
Temple City  34.1  403 118.1  101 70 95 69 93 69 89 68 73 71 27 30 35 37 - 
Termo  40.9  5300  120.5  95 60 92 59 91 59 87 57 64 62 37 -17 -11 -4 - 
Thermal AP  33.6  -112 116.1  114 74 110 74 109 74 106 74 80 79 29 26 31 35 1154  
Thermalito  37.9  25 121.6  106 71 104 70 102 70 98 69 74 72 37 25 30 33 - 
Thousand Oaks  34.2  810 118.8  98 69 93 68 92 68 88 67 72 70 30 27 32 35 - 
Three Rivers PH 1  36.5  1140  118.9  105 70 102 69 101 69 98 67 73 71 38 24 30 32 2642  
Tiburon  37.9  90 122.5  85 66 80 65 78 65 73 63 67 65 12 30 34 36 - 
Tiger Creek PH  38.5  2355  120.5  100 66 96 65 95 65 92 63 69 67 36 20 26 29 3795  
Torrance  33.8  110 118.3  93 69 86 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 18 32 37 39 1859  
Tracy Carbona  37.7  140 121.4  102 70 97 68 95 68 90 67 72 70 38 24 29 32 2704  
Tracy Pumps  37.8  61 121.4  104 71 99 69 97 69 92 68 73 71 39 23 28 31 - 
Travis AFB  38.3  72 121.9  103 71 98 69 96 68 91 66 73 70 35 24 29 32 2725  
Trinity Dam  40.8  2500  122.8  99 65 94 64 92 64 88 62 68 66 37 17 24 28 - 
Trona  35.8  1695  117.4  113 72 109 70 108 70 105 68 76 73 35 18 24 27 2415  
Truckee RS  39.3  5995  120.2  90 58 87 57 86 57 82 55 62 60 40 -10 -4 0 8230  
Tujunga  34.3  1820  118.3  103 70 99 69 98 69 94 67 73 71 36 20 26 29 - 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -35 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Tulare  36.2  290 119.4  105 72 101 71 100 71 96 69 74 72 39 24 30 34 - 
Tulelake  42 4035  121.5  92 60 88 59 87 59 83 57 63 61 41 -5 0 6 6854  
Turlock  37.5  100 120.9  104 72 100 70 99 70 95 68 74 72 40 24 30 34 - 
Turntable Creek  40.8  1067  120.9  105 69 101 68 99 68 95 66 72 70 28 24 29 32 - 
Tustin Foothills  33.8  500 117.8  99 71 92 69 90 69 85 68 73 71 27 28 31 34 550 
Tustin Irvine Rch  33.7  118 117.8  99 71 92 69 90 69 85 68 73 71 27 28 31 34 1856  
Twentynine Palms  34.1  1975  116.1  110 71 107 70 106 70 103 69 76 74 31 21 26 29 1973  
Twin Lakes  38.7  7829  119.1  73 49 64 47 62 47 57 46 53 50 30 -7 -2 4 9196  
Twitchell Dam  35 582 120.3  99 70 93 68 92 68 88 66 71 69 26 26 31 34 - 
UCLA  34.1  430 118.4  93 69 86 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 20 39 43 46 1509  
Ukiah  39.2  623 123.2  100 70 97 69 96 69 92 68 72 71 42 22 28 31 2958  
Union City  37.6  5 122.1  90 67 87 66 85 65 81 63 69 67 20 25 30 33 - 
Upland  34.1  1605  117.7  102 69 98 68 96 68 92 66 73 71 31 29 34 36 2175  
Upper Lake RS  39.2  1347  123 98 68 95 67 94 66 91 64 73 71 39 18 34 36 - 
Upper San Leandro  37.8  394 122.1  93 67 87 66 85 65 80 63 69 67 22 28 33 35 - 
Vacaville  38.4  105 122 103 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 40 23 28 31 2788  
Valinda  34 340 117.9  102 70 98 69 96 69 92 68 74 72 28 31 36 38 - 
Valle Vista  33.8  1655  116.9  109 70 104 69 103 69 101 67 74 72 40 20 25 28 - 
Vallejo  38.1  85 122.3  93 67 90 66 88 66 84 64 70 68 23 28 33 36 - 
Valyermo RS  34.5  3600  117.9  100 67 96 66 95 66 91 65 70 68 41 12 19 24 3870  
Van Nuys  34.2  708 118.5  103 71 98 69 96 69 92 67 74 71 30 28 33 39 664 
Vandenburg AFB  34.7  368 122.8  85 62 77 61 75 61 71 60 64 62 16 30 35 37 3451  
Ventura  34.3  341 119.3  89 68 82 67 80 67 76 66 70 68 15 29 34 36 - 
Victorville Pumps  34.5  2858  117.3  105 67 101 65 100 64 97 62 70 68 39 14 24 27 3191  Appendix JA2 -36 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
View Park  34 300 118.3  95 69 88 68 85 68 78 66 71 69 18 36 40 43 - 
Villa Park  33.8  300 117.8  99 70 92 68 90 68 85 67 72 70 27 33 37 40 550 
Vincent  34.5  3135  118.1  105 67 101 65 100 65 96 64 71 69 33 10 18 22 1455  
Visalia  36.3  325 119.3  103 71 100 70 99 70 96 69 73 72 38 25 30 33 2459  
Vista  33.2  510 117.2  96 69 90 68 89 68 85 67 72 70 16 30 35 37 - 
Volta PH  40.5  2220  120.9  101 66 98 65 97 65 93 63 69 67 33 21 27 30 - 
Walnut  34 550 117.9  101 70 97 69 96 69 92 69 74 72 30 28 33 35 - 
Walnut Creek  37.9  245 122.1  100 69 94 67 92 67 87 66 71 69 32 23 29 31 - 
Walnut Grove  38.2  23 121.5  102 70 98 69 96 69 92 68 72 71 37 24 30 32 - 
Walnut Park  33.9  45 118.2  92 69 84 68 82 68 78 66 71 69 12 37 42 44 450 
Warner Springs  33.3  3180  116.6  100 67 95 66 94 66 91 65 71 69 40 15 22 26 3591  
Wasco  35.6  333 119.3  105 71 101 70 100 70 97 68 74 72 36 23 28 31 2466  
Watsonville  36.9  95 121.8  86 66 82 64 81 63 79 61 68 65 22 28 33 35 3418  
Weaverville RS  40.7  2050  122.9  100 67 95 66 93 65 89 63 69 67 46 10 17 22 4992  
Weed FD  41.4  3590  122.4  92 63 89 62 88 61 84 59 65 63 35 4 12 17 - 
West Athens  33.9  25 118.3  92 69 85 68 84 68 80 66 71 69 18 32 37 39 450 
West Carson  33.8  100 118.3  92 69 87 68 85 68 81 66 71 69 18 32 37 39 - 
West Compton  33.9  71 118.3  97 69 90 68 88 68 83 67 72 70 21 33 37 39 450 
West Covina  34 365 117.9  102 70 98 69 96 69 92 68 74 72 34 29 34 36 - 
West Hollywood  34 290 118.4  95 70 89 69 87 69 82 67 72 70 20 38 42 45 - 
West Pittsburg  38 12 121.9  102 70 97 68 95 68 90 67 72 70 34 26 32 35 - 
West Puente Valley  34 500 117.9  101 71 97 70 95 70 91 68 73 71 26 31 36 39 - 
West Sacramento  38.6  19 121.5  104 72 100 70 98 70 94 68 74 71 35 26 31 33 1290  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 2 -37 
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data  City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
West Whittier -Los Nietos  34 320 118.1  99 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 24 31 35 38 - 
Westlake Village  34.2  750 118.8  103 71 99 70 98 70 94 69 73 71 26 26 30 33 - 
Westminster  33.8  38 118 95 70 88 68 86 68 81 67 72 70 23 33 38 41 - 
Westmont  33.9  110 118.3  96 70 89 69 87 69 83 67 72 70 20 36 41 44 400 
Whiskeytown Res  40.6  1295  122.6  105 69 101 68 100 68 96 67 72 70 31 25 30 33 - 
White Mtn 1  37.5  10150  119.3  73 49 69 47 68 47 65 45 53 50 37 -15 -9 -6 - 
White Mtn 2  37.6  12470  119.3  61 42 58 41 57 41 54 40 46 43 38 -20 -15 -12 - 
Whittier  34 320 118 99 69 90 68 88 68 84 67 72 70 24 31 35 38 - 
Wildomar  33.6  1255  117.3  103 70 99 69 98 69 94 68 74 72 36 23 28 30 827 
Wildrose RS  36.3  4100   100 64 97 63 96 63 93 61 68 66 33 13 20 24 - 
Williams  39.2  85 122.2  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 36 24 29 32 - 
Willits  39.4  1350  123.3  95 66 89 65 87 64 82 62 68 66 38 18 24 27 - 
Willow Brook  33.9  60 118.2  97 70 90 69 88 69 83 67 72 70 21 35 39 42 - 
Willow Creek  41 461 123 104 70 98 68 96 68 92 66 71 69 35 22 28 31 - 
Willows  39.5  140 122.2  104 71 100 70 98 70 94 68 73 71 36 22 28 31 2836  
Windsor  38.5  130 122.8  99 69 96 68 95 68 92 66 71 69 35 24 27 29 1249  
Winters  38.5  135 122 104 71 99 70 97 70 93 68 73 71 38 24 29 32 2593  
Winton  37.4  168 120.6  103 71 100 69 99 69 95 67 73 71 36 21 27 30 1244  
Woodcrest  33.9  1500  117.4  104 70 100 69 99 68 95 65 74 72 37 27 32 35 611 
Woodfords  38.8  5671  119.8  92 59 89 58 88 58 84 56 63 61 32 0 5 12 6047  
Woodlake  36.3  500 119.1  103 71 100 70 99 70 96 69 73 72 38 25 30 33 1130  
Woodland  38.7  69 121.8  106 72 101 71 100 71 96 69 74 72 40 25 30 33 2708  
Woodland Hills  34.2  944 118.6  104 71 99 70 97 70 93 68 74 72 32 26 31 34 664 Appendix JA2 -38 2025  Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather / Climate Data   City 
Latitude  
Elevation (ft)  
Longitude  
Cooling 0.10%  
DB 
Cooling 0.10%  
MCWB  
Cooling 0.50%  
DB 
Cooling 0.50%  
MCWB  
Cooling 1.00%  
DB 
Cooling 1.00%  
MCWB  
Cooling 2.00%  
DB 
Cooling 2.00%  
MCWB  
Design Wetbulb 0.1%  
Design Wetbulb 0.5%  
Outdoor Daily Range  
Heating  
Winter Median of 
Extremes  
Heating  
Design  Drybulb (0.2%)  
Heating  
Design Drybulb (0.6%)  
Heating  
HDD*  
Woodside  37.5  75 122.3  92 67 84 66 82 65 76 63 69 67 24 22 28 31 - 
Yorba Linda  33.9  350 117.8  102 70 94 69 92 69 88 68 73 71 31 30 35 37 1643  
Yosemite Park Hq  37.7  3970  119.6  97 63 94 62 93 62 90 60 67 65 38 11 18 23 4785  
Yreka  41.7  2625  122.6  99 66 95 65 94 65 90 64 69 67 39 8 15 20 5395  
Yuba City  39.1  70 121.6  105 69 101 69 100 69 96 68 72 71 36 24 29 32 - 
Yucaipa  34 2600  117 106 68 102 67 101 67 98 65 73 71 35 27 32 35 - 
Yucca Valley  34.2  2600  116.4  108 71 105 70 104 70 101 69 75 73 32 19 24 27 862 2025  Joint Appendices  Appendix JA2-3 9 
Appendix JA2  – Reference Weather / Climate Data  *Heating Degree Day is a unit, based on temperature difference and time, used in estimating fuel
consumption and specifying nominal annual heating load of a  building. For any one day when the
mean temperature is less than 65ºF (18ºC), there exist as many degree days as there are
Fahrenheit degrees difference in temperature between mean temperature for the day and 65ºF
(18ºC).
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS:  
AFB Air Force Base  
AFS Air Force Station  
AP Airport  
CO City/County Office  
FD Fire Department  
FS Fire Station  
MCB  Marine Corps Base  
MCWB Mean Coincident Wet Bulb  
NAS Naval Air Station  
NM National Monument  
PH Power House  
RS Ranger Station  Appendix JA2 -40                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA2 – Reference Weather/Climate Data   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(This page intentionally left blank.)  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -1  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)   
Joint Appendix JA3  
Appendix JA3  – Time Dependent Valuation Energy 
Budget  (TDV)  
JA3.1  Scope and Purpose  
Time dependent valuation (TDV) Energy Budget  is the currency used to compare energy 
performance when the performance compliance method is used.  It is the maximum energy 
consumption that a proposed building, or portion of a building, can be designed to consume, 
calculated using Commission -approved compliance software as specified by the Alternative 
Calculation Method Approval Manual. The Energy Budget for  newly constructed  single -family , 
multifamily,  and nonresidential  buildings are expressed in terms of the Long -Term System Cost 
(LSC) and Source Energy.  The Energy Budget for additions and alterations  for all building types  
are expressed in terms of LSC.   TDV is also used to evaluate the cost effectiveness of measures 
and to perform other codes analysis. TDV replaces source energy, which was used to compare 
performance prior to the 2005 Standards.  
 Long-Term System Cost (LSC)TDV  
LSC consists of large data sets that convert electricity, gas and or propane to LSCTDV energy. The 
rate of conversion varies for each hour of the year, for each climate zone and for each energy 
type (electricity, natural gas and or propane). The conversion factors also vary by building type: 
low-rise residential and other building types, including nonresidential, hotel/motel and high-rise 
residential. There are a total of 96144 hourly data sets (16 climate zones x 3 fuel types x 3 2 
building types) where the 32 building types are residential 30 year and,   nonresidential 15 year, 
nonresidential 30 year. The completeactual LSCTDV data can may  be downloaded from the 
Energy Commission’s website . 
Because of the length, the actual data is not published in this appendix.  
LSC is also used to evaluate the cost effectiveness of measures and to perform other codes 
analysis.  
 Source Energy 
Source energy is the long run marginal source energy of fossil fuels that are combusted as a result 
of building energy consumed either directly at the building site or caused to be consumed to 
meet the electrical demand of the building considering the long-term marginal hourly resources 
of Commission-projected electric system resource procurement. For a given hour, the value in 
that hour for each forecasted year is averaged to get a lifetime average source energy. 
The complete Source Energy data can be downloaded from the Energy Commission’s website. 
Because of the length, the actual data is not published in this appendix.     Appendix JA3 -2                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA3 –Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  JA3.2  Summary of Data  
Table 3 -1 through Table 3 -63 give a statistical summary of the LSCTDV conversion and source 
energy  factors for electricity, natural gas and propane. Each table has the annual minimum, 
maximum, and average for each climate zone and building type.  
(a) Table 3 -1 – LSC Statistical Data – Electricity  ($/kWh)  
(b) Table 3 -2 – LSC Statistical Data – Natural Gas  ($/Therm)  
(c) Table 3 -3 – LSC Statistical Data – Propane  ($/Therm)  
(d) Table 3 -4 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Electricity  (kBtu/KWh)  
(e) Table 3 -5 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Natural Gas  
(f) Table 3 -6 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Propane  
 
(g) Table  3.1 – TDV Statisti cal Data – Electricity (kBtu/kWh)  
(h) Table 3 -2 – TDV Statistical Data – Natural Gas (kBtu/therm)  
(i) Table 3 -3 – TDV Statistical Data – Propane (kBtu/therm)  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -3  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -1 – TDV LSC Statistical Data – Electricity ( kBtu $/kWh)  
                                    Residential                                   Nonresidential (15  yr)                                                 Nonresidential (30 yr )                                                                                
 
  Climate   
Zone  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  
1 14.13  27.22  309.69  13.26  28.21  423.98  12.99  27.21  333.97  
2 13.92  26.97  2755.84  13.06  27.97  334.02  12.81  27.00  2992.60  
3 14.07  27.15  2441.14  13.19  28.12  2924.14  12.93  27.13  2648.86  
4 13.95  27.01  1866.06  13.22  28.16  2324.98  12.97  27.18  2028.71  
5 14.15  27.25  669.24  13.32  28.27  873.02  13.05  27.28  724.78  
6 14.14  26.96  1501.89  13.53  28.11  1546.57  13.17  27.13  1632.17  
7 14.20  27.06  662.28  13.51  28.12  1016.86  13.15  27.12  717.65  
8 13.84  26.61  923.37  13.63  28.23  1103.70  13.27  27.24  1008.16  
9 13.82  26.58  1878.92  13.57  28.15  2072.04  13.21  27.17  2052.46  
10 13.81  26.58  682.02  13.52  28.10  917.99  13.16  27.12  743.46  
11 13.96  27.02  1533.26  13.16  28.08  2162.91  12.93  27.13  1665.42  
12 13.95  27.01  1507.16  13.16  28.09  2112.00  12.93  27.14  1637.22  
13 13.89  26.94  2537.01  13.10  28.02  3109.71  12.86  27.05  2757.28  
14 13.68  26.42  1911.10  13.51  28.09  2454.87  13.16  27.11  2090.42  
15 13.73  26.48  2068.49  13.52  28.10  2533.73  13.17  27.12  2261.44  
16 14.63  27.54  1286.61  13.99  28.66  1591.54  13.62  27.65  1396.28     Appendix JA3 -4                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA3 –Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)   
  Climate 
Zone  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Nonresidential 
Minimum  Nonresidential 
Average  Nonresidential 
Maximum  
1 4.37  6.71  53.7 0 3.24  5.63  53.78  
2 4.37  6.71  60.3 8 3.24  5.64  60.57  
3 4.37  6.71  50.85  3.24  5.64  50.89  
4 4.37  6.70  50.82  3.23  5.63  50.82  
5 4.37  6.71  50.85  3.24  5.64  50.89  
6 4.57  6.74  52.22  3.43  5.66  52.33  
7 4.21  6.67  133.66  3.11  5.60  133.57  
8 4.55  6.72  51.24  3.42  5.65  51.33  
9 4.55  6.72  51.24  3.42  5.65  54.28 
10 4.55  6.72  41.52  3.42  5.64  51.50  
11 4.37  6.71  50.82  3.23  5.63  50.81  
12 4.37  6.71  50.82  3.24  5.63  50.84  
13 4.36  6.70  50.80  3.23  5.63  50.81  
14 4.55  6.71  51.22  3.42  5.64  51.30  
15 4.54  6.71  51.18  3.41  5.64  51.29  
16 4.58  6.75  51.35  3.42  5.65  51.36  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -5  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -2 – TDV LSC Statistical Data – Natural Gas ( kBtu $/therm)  
                                                      Residential                                                               Nonresidential (15  yr)                                             Nonresidential (30 yr)      
Climate 
Zone  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  
1 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
2 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
3 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
4 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
5 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
6 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
7 330.41  352.40  381.47  226.80  255.27  293.31  259.74  287.70  324.97  
8 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
9 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
10 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
11 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
12 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
13 330.15  351.04  378.53  226.53  253.18  288.62  259.47  285.66  320.39  
14 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
15 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
16 330.33  351.58  379.63  226.75  254.56  291.68  259.69  287.01  323.37  
     Appendix JA3 -6                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA3 –Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)   Climate Zone Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  
1 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
2 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
3 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
4 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
5 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
6 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
7 113.12  119.45  128.00  46.55  53.78  63.59  
8 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
9 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
10 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
11 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
12 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
13 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.51  53.23  62.33  
14 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
15 113.10  119.21  127.44  46.54  53.59  63.16  
16 113.07  119.05  127.10  46.54  53.59  63.16  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -7  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -3 – TDV LSC Statistical Data – Propane ( kBtu $/therm)  
                                                 Residential                                                    Nonresidential (15  yr)                                          Nonresidential (30 yr)  
Climate 
Zone  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Average  Maximum  
1 567.80  626.404  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
2 567.80  626.404  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
3 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
4 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
5 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.444  462.53  505.74  550.36  
6 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
7 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
8 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
9 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
10 567.80  626.404  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
11 567.80  626.404  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
12 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
13 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
14 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
15 567.80  626.404  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
16 567.80  626.40  686.90  451.71  495.37  540.44  462.53  505.74  550.36  
     Appendix JA3 -8                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA3 –Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)    Climate 
Zone  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Nonr esidential 
Minimum  Nonresidential 
Average  Nonresidential 
Maximum  
1 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
2 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
3 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
4 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
5 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
6 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
7 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
8 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
9 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
10 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
11 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
12 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
13 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
14 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
15 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  
16 92.50  101.65  111.51  75.97  82.76  90.07  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -9  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -4 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Electricity ( kBtu /kWh ) 
  Climate 
Zone  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Nonresidential 
Minimum  Nonresidential 
Average  Nonresidential 
Maximum  
1 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
2 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
3 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
4 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
5 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
6 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
7 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
8 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
9 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
10 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
11 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
12 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
13 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
14 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
15 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67  
16 0.0036  1.70  8.67  0.0036  1.70  8.67     Appendix JA3 -10                                                                                                     2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA3 –Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -5 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Natural Gas (kBtu/Therm)  
  Climate 
Zone  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Nonresidential 
Minimum  Nonresidential 
Average  Nonresidential 
Maximum  
1 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
2 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
3 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
4 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
5 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
6 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
7 89.64  89.64  89.64  89.64  89.64  89.64  
8 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
9 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
10 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
11 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
12 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
13 90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  90.54  
14 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
15 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  
16 89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  89.96  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA3 -11  
Appendix JA3 – Time Dependent Valuation Energy Budget (TDV)  Table 3 -6 – Source Energy Statistical Data – Propane (kBtu/Therm)  
 Climate 
Zone  Residential 
Minimum  Residential 
Average  Residential 
Maximum  Nonresidential 
Minimum  Nonresidential 
Average  Nonresidential 
Maximum  
1 100 100 100 100 100 100 
2 100 100 100 100 100 100 
3 100 100 100 100 100 100 
4 100 100 100 100 100 100 
5 100 100 100 100 100 100 
6 100 100 100 100 100 100 
7 100 100 100 100 100 100 
8 100 100 100 100 100 100 
9 100 100 100 100 100 100 
10 100 100 100 100 100 100 
11 100 100 100 100 100 100 
12 100 100 100 100 100 100 
13 100 100 100 100 100 100 
14 100 100 100 100 100 100 
15 100 100 100 100 100 100 
16 100 100 100 100 100 100 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4-1 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Joint Appendix JA4  
Appendix JA4  – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  
 
JA4.1  Scope and Purpose  .......................................................................................................... 2  
JA4.1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 2  
JA4.1.2 California Energy Commission Approved Software  ....................................................... 2  
JA4.1.2.1  Determining R -value and U -factor of Construction Assemblies  ............................. 3  
JA4.1.2.2  Accounting for Continuous Insulation R -value  ....................................................... 4  
JA4.1.2.3  Accounting for Unusual Construction Layers  ......................................................... 5  
JA4.1.2.4  Double Walls  .......................................................................................................... 5  
JA4.1.3 Tapered Insulation ........................................................................................................ 6  
JA4.1.4 Insulating Layers on Mass and Other Walls  ................................................................... 6  
JA4.1.5 Wood Based Sheathing R -values  ................................................................................... 7  
JA4.1.6 Framing Percentages for Calculating U -factors ............................................................. 7  
JA4.1.7 R- values and U -factors for Medium- Density Closed Cell and Low- Density Open Cell 
Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation:  ............................................................................... 8  
JA4.2  Roofs and Ceilings  .......................................................................................................... 11 
JA4.3  Walls  .............................................................................................................................. 17 
JA4.4  Floors and Slabs  ............................................................................................................. 44 
JA4.5  Miscellaneous Construction  .......................................................................................... 59 
  Appendix JA4-2 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
JA4.1  Scope and Purpose  
JA4.1.1  Introduction 
The values in this appendix must be used for all residential and nonresidential prescriptive 
compliance calculations. California Energy Commission approved compliance software may make adjustments to the values in these tables using procedures described in this appendix.  
The data tables are organized first by roofs, walls, and floors.  For each, the data is further organized by construction type, beginning with wood framed construction, followed by metal 
framed construction, concrete and special construction assemblies. Ea ch table features a 
letter/number coordinate system (shaded in gray) that can be used as an identifier for each 
value, i.e. 4.2.1- A10 indicates Table 4.2.1, Column A, Row 10. Construction assembly descriptions 
shall be concatenated first by row and then by  column. For example, the descriptions of 4.2.1. -
A20 and 4.3.1- H3 and shall be as follows (abbreviations are acceptable):  
Wood Framed Attic, Trusses@24 inch. OC, R -30 attic insulation, No continuous insulation  
Wood Framed Wall, Wd 2x4 @16 inch OC, R -13 cavity insulation, R -14 continuous insulation  
The R -value representing the component(s) of a construction assembly may be rounded to the 
nearest whole R -value.  If a construction assembly is not adequately represented in the tables 
below, the permit applicant or the manufacturer of the product may request the California Energy Commission approve alternative U -factors for the construction assembly. The California 
Energy Commission Executive Director will grant such approval, after reviewing submittals and supporting information from the applicant and the merits of the information to support the intended use.  Acceptable calculation methods for determining a construction component’s R -
value or overall assembly U -factor are based on ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamental  procedures, 
such as:  
(a) Testing:  Guarded Hot Plate (ASTM C177)  
  Heat Flow Meter (ASTM C518)  
  Hot Box Apparatus (ASTM C1363)  
(b) Series/Parallel Path Calculation Method for wood framed assemblies of roof/ceilings, walls (above and below grade), and floors.  
(c) Modified Zone Method for roof/ceilings, walls, and floor constructions that have metal framing.  
 New component(s) of a construction assembly  approved by the Executive Director will be 
published as an addendum to this appendix for use by all compliance authors. Addenda may consist of new tables or additional rows or columns to existing tables.  
NOTE: Insulation must be certified in accordance with Section  110.8(a) . 
JA4.1.2  California Energy Commission Approved Software  
California Energy Commission approved software used for performance or prescriptive calculations may make adjustments to the data contained in this appendix to account for the 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4-3 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  special circumstances of particular constructions. This section defines the rules for making these 
adjustments. These adjustments may not be made when the tables are used manually. Software may have input screens where the user may choose a construction by  entering the cavity 
insulation (or insulation penetrated by framing); the continuous insulation; and other factors 
such as framing spacing. To the software user, the process of using these tables may look very 
much like a traditional U -factor calculation.  
JA4.1.2.1  Determining R -value and U -factor of Construction Assemblies  
The installer shall provide documentation from the manufacturer supporting the installed R -
value.  Some products have R -value markings, others do not.  For site applied insulation (i.e., 
loose -fill glass fiber and mineral fiber, cellulose, and spray polyur ethane foam insulation), the 
insulation shall be installed in co mnformance to the manufacturer’s coverage chart, R -value 
chart, or similar performance data sheet.  
Data presented in the tables is not inclusive of all materials or combinations of materials used in construction of residential and nonresidential buildings.  Information presented for framed and nonframed assemblies provides a summary of the reference ass embly components representing 
the R -value and U -factor necessary for determining prescriptive compliance with the Standards.  
This data is also used by approved compliance software to establish the required thermal efficiencies affecting energy use for the  standard design building in performance compliance 
calculations.  
R-value is used to describe insulation effectiveness, but R -value does not describe the overall 
performance of the complete assembly.  Construction assemblies usually have more than one layer and each layer has its own conductance, or rate of heat transfer .  The U- factor more fully 
describes the conductance of every component of the construction assembly.  
The prescriptive compliance table values for framed and nonframed assemblies of wood and steel roof and ceilings, walls, and floors are developed from series and parallel path procedures 
of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE).  
Approved computer software uses more detailed calculations and must be used for all buildings using mass type construction.  Prescriptive compliance can be demonstrated when the insulation’s R -value is equal to or greater than the R -value required for the envelope feature in 
the climate zone which the building is permitted for construction; or has an overall U -factor equal 
to or less than the U -factor required for the envelope feature in the climate zone which the 
building is permitted for construction.  
For example, the R -value and U -factor of components within assemblies of wood framing that are 
not represented in the tables can be calculated using the procedure shown below (i.e., substituting for different components).  For example, R -values of different insulation types can be 
inserted into Table 4.1.1 and the assembly’s overall R -value and U -factor can be determined.  
Each layer of the assembly is entered in sequence at a cross -section through its cavity, from 
outside to inside.  
For more advanced assemblies, and for steel framed assemblies,  within the California Building 
Code Compliance software (CBECC) for both residential and nonresidential buildings, the Energy 
Commission has developed an assembly calculator to automate ASHRAE procedures in order to Appendix JA4-4 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  help the building community in calculating R -values and U -factors of wood and metal framed 
assemblies with a higher degree of accuracy and speed.  The output forms of this program can be 
used as part of a residential or nonresidential building permit submittal. 
Table 4.1.1 U -Factor Calculations for Wood Framed Assembly  
Assembly Type:  Wall 2x4 16 in. o.c  R-Value  R-Value  
Framing Material:  WoodA -- -- 
Assembly Components  Cavity (R c) Frame (R f) 
Outside air film 0.17  0.17  
3/8 inch 2 -coat stucco  0.08  0.08  
1 inch, R -4 EPS insulating sheathing  4.0 4.0 
Building paper (felt)  0.06  0.06  
R-15 insulation 15 -- 
2x4 inch doug  fir framing @ R -0.99 
per inch  -- 3.47  
0.50 inch gypsum board  0.45  0.45  
Inside air film 0.68  0.68  
Subtotal  20.44  8.91  
A.  [ 1/Rc   x (1 – (Frame% / 100)) ] + [ (1/Rf) x (Frame% / 100) ] = Assembly U -Factor, where:  Frame percentage 
(%) determined by Table 4.1.6  
JA4.1.2.2  Accounting for Continuous Insulation R -value  
Many of the tables in this appendix have columns for varying levels of continuous insulation. 
Continuous insulation is insulation that is uninterrupted by framing and provides a continuous insulating layer. Limits on the position of the continuous insulation and other factors are specified in each table. When data from a table is used manually, the R -value of the continuous 
insulation in the proposed construction shall be equal to or greater than the R -value shown in the 
column heading; no interpolation is permitted. California Energy Commission approved software used for performance or prescriptive calculations may account for any amount of continuous 
insulation using Equation 4 -1.  This adjustment may not be used, however, for continuous 
insulation with thermal resistance less than R -2.  
 
Equation 4-1  
Insul. Cont
A .ColInsul. Cont.With
RU11U
+=    
Where: 
UWith.Cont.Insul  Calculated U -factor of the construction assembly with a specific R -value of 
continuous insulation.  
UCol.A A U-factor selected from column A.  
RCont.Insul  The R -value of continuous insulation.  
If insulation layers are added that are interrupted by furring strips, then the effective R- values from Table  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4-5 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  4. 3.13 shall be used in Equation 4- 1.  
JA4.1.2.3  Accounting for Unusual Construction Layers  
The assumptions that are the basis of the U -factors published in this appendix are documented in 
the paragraphs following each table. California Energy Commission approved software used for 
prescriptive or performance calculations may be used to make adjus tments to these assumptions 
based on data entered by the software user. Adjustments may only be made, however, when the total R -value of the proposed construction is at least an R -2 greater than the documented 
assumption. Each table includes the assumptions used to determine the U -factors.  
Equation 4 -2 shall be used to make these adjustments.  
Equation 4-2 
Assumed
Insul.Cont.WithoposedPr
R
U11U
∆ +=    
Where:  
UProposed  Calculated U -factor of the proposed construction assembly.  
UWith.Cont.Insul  The U -factor adjusted for continuous insulation using Equation 4 -1.  
∆RAssumed  The difference in R -value between what was assumed in the table and the proposed 
construction for a continuous layer.  
There are limits, however, on the types of adjustments that can be made.  
(a) The difference in resistance shall be at least R -2. When calculating the difference in R -
value, no changes in assumptions shall be made to the framing/insulation layer; the 
proposed construction shall assume the same values as the table.  
(b) The thermal resistance of air layers shall be taken from the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, for a mean temperature of 50°F, a temperature difference of 20 °F and an effective emittance of 0.82.  
(c) R-values for air layers for roof and ceiling assemblies shall be based on heat flow up.  R -
values for air layers for floor assemblies shall be based on heat flow down.  R -values for 
other assemblies shall be based on horizontal heat flow. Air layers must b e sealed on 
edges to prevent air layer mixing with ambient air.  
(d) One additional air gap may be credited, but not air gaps that are within the framing insulation cavity layer; these are already accounted for in the published data. Air gaps of less than 0.5 inch thickness shall be considered to have an R -value of zero. An example of 
an acceptable additional air gap would be the space between a brick veneer and the sheathing on the framed wall.  
JA4.1.2.4  Double Walls  
The U -factor of double walls or other double assemblies may be determined by combining the U -
factors from the individual construction assemblies that make up the double wall. The following equation shall be used.  Appendix JA4-6 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
 
Equation 4-3 
2 1Combined
U1
U11U
+=   
JA4.1.3  Tapered Insulation 
If continuous roof insulation is tapered for drainage or other purposes, then the user may 
determine the overall U -factor in one of two ways:  
(a) To determine the U -factor for the roof at the location where the insulation is at a 
minimum and where it is at a maximum. Take the average of these two U -factors.  With 
the R -value compliance approach (prescriptive method only), calculate the R -value as th e 
inverse of the average U -factor as determined above. R -values may not be averaged.  
(b) Divide the roof into sub -areas for each one -inch increment of insulation and determine 
the U -factor of each sub -area.  This approach may only be used with the performance 
method, and in this case, each sub area shall be modeled as a separate surface.  
When roofs have a drain located near the center and when tapered insulation creates a slope to the drain, the surface area at the maximum insulation thickness will be significantly greater than the surface area at the minimum thickness, so the second metho d will give a more accurate 
result. The first method yields a conservative estimate for roofs with central drains.  
JA4.1.4  Insulating Layers on Mass and Other Walls 
The data in Table 4.3.14 may be used to modify the U -factors and C -factors from Table 4.3.5 , 
Table 4.3.6, and Table 4.3.7 when an additional layer is added to the inside or outside of the mass wall. For exterior insulation finish systems (EIFS) or other insulation only systems, values should be selected from row 26 of Table 4.3.14 In these cases, the R -value of the layer is equal to the R -
value of the insulation. The other choices from this table represent systems typically placed on the inside of mass walls. The following equations calculate the total U -factor or C -factor, where 
U
mass and C mass are selected from Table 4.3.5 , Table 4.3.6, or Table 4.3.7 and R Outside  and R Inside are 
selected from Table 4.3.14. R outside  is selected from row 26 while R inside is selected from rows 1 
through 25.  
Inside
MassOutsideTotal
R
U1R1U
+ +=
   Equation 4 -4 
Inside
MassOutsideTotal
R
C1R1C
+ +=
   Equation 4 -5 
The values from Table 4.3.14 may be used to modify the U -factors of other construction 
assemblies as well, when non -homogeneous layers are added (see Equation 4 -1).  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 7 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  JA4.1.5  Wood Based Sheathing R -values  
For the purpose of calculations for the Joint Appendices plywood, particle board, oriented strand 
board (OSB) and similar sheathing materials will all be considered Wood Based Sheathing. A single R -value will be used for each thickness listed regardless of the material.  This approach 
simplifies calculations yet has little effect on the overall R -value of assemblies since the 
differences in sheathing R -value are minimal compared to the overall assembly.  
R-values for Wood Based Sheathing  
Thickness  R-value (ft2-hr oF/Btu)  
3/8 inch  0.36  
1/2 inch  0.48  
5/8 inch  0.60  
3/4 inch  0.72  
1 inch  0.96  
1 1/4 inch  1.20  
JA4.1.6  Framing Percentages for Calculating U -factors  
The thermal resistance of framed assemblies is dependent on the assembly’s total R -value, and 
the quality of construction to limit air intrusion within the assembly that can rob the insulation of 
its effectiveness.  A given assembly type is made of several individual layers  and components, 
each having specific resistance values.  However, the assembly’s R- value and overall U -factor is 
primarily affected by: (1) the R- value of insulation installed within the cavity, (2) the R -value of 
continuous insulating sheathing added to the i nterior or exterior face of the framing, and, (3) the 
amount of framing tha t interrupts the plane of insulation separating conditioned from 
unconditioned space.  All framed assemblies shall include the framing percentages indicated in 
Table 4.1.6.   
Advanced wall systems (AWS) reduce the amount of material required for wall framing which 
increases the insulation within the cavity by:   
(a) Use of 24” oc framing  
(b) Eliminating intermediate framing for cripple and king studs  
(c) Use of single top plates  
(d) Use of double stud corners  
(e) Use of in -line (i.e., stack) framing to maintain continuity of transferring live loads of roof 
framing to wall framing, allowing roof sheathing and exterior siding to be installed at full widths  
(f) Reducing framing for connections at interior partition walls (i.e., T -walls)  
(g) Reducing window and door header size  
 Appendix JA4-8 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.1.6 – Framing Percentages  
Assembly Type and  
Framing Spacing  Framing Percentage  
Walls: 16"o.c. 25 %  
Walls: 24"o.c. 22 %  
AWS: 48"o.c. 4 % 
AWS: 24” o.c. 17%  
Walls Metal: 16"o.c.  15%  
Walls Metal: 24"o.c.  12%  
Floors: 16"o.c. 10 %  
Floors: 24"o.c. 7 % 
 
Roofs: 16"o.c. 10 %  
Roofs: 24"o.c. 7 % 
Roofs: 48"o.c. 
 4 % 
 
JA4.1.7  R-values and U -factors for Medium- Density Closed Cell and Low -Density Open Cell 
Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF) Insulation:  
  
These procedures apply to two types of SPF used as building insulation:  medium -density closed 
cell SPF (ccSPF) and low -density open cell SPF (ocSPF).  
 
(a)  ccSPF:  A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having a closed cellular structure 
resulting in an installed nominal density of 1.5 to less than 2.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf).  
R-value:   The total R -value shall be calculated based on the nominal required thickness of the 
insulation multiplied by an R -value of 5.8 per inch.  The R -value of ccSPF insulation shall meet or 
exceed the installed thickness specified in Table 4.1.7.  
Alternatively, the total R -value may be calculated based on the thickness of insulation multiplied 
by the "tested R -value per inch" as  certified by Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of 
Household Goods and Services . Supporting documentation showing the certified R -value per inch 
shall be made available at the site for verification and noted on the Certificate of Installation. Based on this calculation, the overall assembly U -factor shall be determined by selecting the 
assembly that matches the assembly type, framing configuration, and cavity insulation from the appropriate Reference Joint Appendix JA4 table or other approved method specified in Sec tion 
JA4 of the Reference Appendices.   
The R -value of the installed insulation shall be based on the verified thickness at an R -value of 5.8 
per inch unless supporting documentation is pr ovided  that verifies use of other values.  Approved 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 9 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  compliance software shall make appropriate adjustments to account for the R -value and U -factor 
effects of the ccSPF assembly.    
Nominal Thickness:   ccSPF sprayed into framed cavities or on flat surfaces will expand with 
variable thicknesses, visibly appearing as undulations on the surface of the insulation.  The 
average thickness of the foam insulation must meet or exceed the required R -value.  Depr essions 
in the foam insulation’s surface shall not be greater than 1/2 -inch of the required thickness at any 
given point of the surface area being insulated.  
Filling of Framed Assemblies:  ccSPF insulation is not required to fill the cavities of framed 
assemblies provided the installed thickness of insulation conforms to compliance documentation and that the bottom and top plates of vertical framing and both ends of horizontal framing, including band and rim joists, are sprayed to completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact 
with the framing to a distance of 2.0 inches away from the framing for ocSPF insulation, or filled to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an air barrier.   
Air Barrier:   ccSPF installed as an air barrier shall be a minimum of 2.0 inches in thickness; 
alternatively, ccSPF insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no greater than 0.02 L/s -m
2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance with  ASTM 
E2178 or ASTM E283.      
(b) ocSPF:   A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having an open cellular structure 
resulting in an installed nominal density of 0.4 to less than 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf).  
R-value:   The total R -value shall be calculated based on the nominal required thickness of the 
insulation multiplied by an R -value of 3.6 per inch.  The R -value of ocSPF insulation shall meet or 
exceed the installed thickness specified in Table 4.1.7.  
Alternatively, the total R -value may be calculated based on the thickness of insulation multiplied 
by the "tested R -value per inch" as certified by Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of 
Household Goods and Services . Supporting documentation showing the certified R -value per inch 
shall be made available at the site for verification and noted on the Certificate of Installation.  
Based on this calculation, the overall assembly U -factor shall be determined by selecting the 
assembly that matches the assembly type, framing configuration, and cavity insulation from the appropriate Reference Joint Appendix JA4 table or other approved method specified in Section JA4 of the Reference Appendices.   
The R -value of the installed insulation shall be based on the verified thickness at an R -value of 3.6 
per inch unless supporting documentation is provided that verifies use of other values.  Approved 
compliance software shall make appropriate  adjustments to account for the R -value and U -factor 
effects of the ocSPF assembly.    
Nominal Thickness:   ocSPF sprayed into framed cavities or on flat surfaces will expand with 
variable thicknesses, visibly appearing as undulations on the surface of the insulation.  The 
average thickness of the foam insulation must meet or exceed the required R -value.  Depr essions 
in the foam insulation surface shall not be greater than 1 -inch of the required thickness provided 
these depressions do not exceed 10% of the surface area being insulated.  
Filling of Framed Assemblies:  ocSPF insulation shall completely fill cavities of 2x4 inch framing or 
less.  Cavities greater than 2x4 inch framing dimensions may be filled to the thickness that meets Appendix JA4- 10 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  the required R -value used for compliance provided that the bottom and top plates of vertical 
framing and both ends of horizontal framing, including band and rim joists, are sprayed to 
completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact with the framing to a distance of 5.5 inches away from the framing for ocSPF insulation, or filled to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an air barrier.   
Air Barrier:   ocSPF installed as an air barrier shall be a minimum of 5.5 inches in thickness; 
alternatively, ocSPF insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no greater than 0.02 L/s -m
2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance with  ASTM 
E2178 or ASTM E283.  
Table 4.1.7: Required Thickness of SPF Insulation (inches) to Achieve Specified R -values  
Equivalent R -Values for 
SPF insulation 11 13 15 19 21 22 25 30 38 
Required thickness of ccSPF Insulation @ R5.8/inch  2.00  2.25  2.75  3.50  3.75  4.00  4.50  5.25  6.75  
Required thickness of 
ocSPF insulation @ 
R3.6/inch  3.0 3.5 4.2 5.3 5.8 6.1 6.9 8.3 10.6  
NOTE:  
An HERS ECC- rater shall verify the installation of SPF insulation using the procedures specified in RA3.5. 56 whenever 
R-values other than the default R -value per inch listed in Table 4.1.7 are used for compliance (see "Thermal 
Specifications " in sections RA3.5. 6.1).   2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 11 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  JA4.2  Roofs and Ceilings  
Table 4.2.1 – U- factors of Wood Framed Attic Roofs – 16 in. OC Truss Spacing 
Rated R -Value of Continuous Insulation1 
R-value of Attic 
Insulation  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
None  0.300  0.187  0.136  0.107  0.097  0.088  0.075  0.058  
R-11  0.079  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.051  0.048  0.044  0.037  
R-13  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.036  
R-19  0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.037  0.035  0.033  0.029  
R-21 0.042  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.030  0.026  
R-22 0.043  0.039  0.037  0.034  0.033  0.032  0.030  0.027  
R-25  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.031  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.025  
R-30  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.022  
R-38  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.019  
R-44 0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.016  
R-49 0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.017  0.016  
R-60 0.017  0.016  0.016  0.015  0.015  0.015  0.014  0.013  
Table 4.2.1 Continued – U-factors of Wood Framed Attic Roofs – 24 in. OC Truss Spacing 
Rated R -Value of Continuous Insulation1 
R-value of Attic 
Insulation  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
None  0.305  0.189  0.137  0.108  0.097  0.089  0.075  0.058  
R-11  0.076  0.066  0.058  0.052  0.050  0.047  0.043  0.037  
R-13  0.068  0.060  0.054  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.041  0.035  
R-19  0.048  0.043  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.029  
R-21 0.043  0.040  0.037  0.034  0.033  0.032  0.030  0.027  
R-22  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.033  0.032  0.031  0.029  0.026  
R-25  0.037  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.024  
R-30  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.025  0.024  0.022  
R-38  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  0.018  
R-44 0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.016  
R-49 0.019  0.019  0.018  0.017  0.017  0.017  0.016  0.015  
R-60 0.016  0.016  0.015  0.015  0.014  0.014  0.014  0.013  
Notes:   
1. Continuous insulation shall be located at the ceiling, below the bottom chord of the truss and be uninterrupted 
by framing.  
2. In climate zones 1 and 16 the insulating R -value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roofs 
waterproof membrane shall be multiplied by 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining assembly U -
factor. Appendix JA4- 12 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  This table contains thermal performance data (U -factors) for wood framed attics where the 
ceiling provides the air barrier and the attic is ventilated. Wood trusses are the most common 
construction for low- rise residential buildings and for Type V nonresid ential buildings. While the 
sketch shows a truss system with a flat ceiling, the data in this table may be used for scissor trusses and other non- flat trusses. If the bottom chord is not flat, then the slope should not 
exceed 4:12 for nonadhesive binder bl own insulation. This table may also be used with composite 
trusses that have a wood top and bottom chord and metal struts connecting them.  
For the majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Column A shall be used for the common situation where either batt or blown insulation is placed directly over the ceiling (and tapered at the edges). Builders or designers may increase thermal performance by 
adding a continuous insulation layer at the ceiling. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation. Continuous insulation does not include the 
blown or batt insulation that is  over the bottom chord of the truss (this is already accounted for 
in the U -factors published in Column A).  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. For instance if the 
insulation is R -3, the R -2 column shall be used. No interpolation is pe rmitted when data from the 
table is selected manually. CEC approved compliance software, including those used for 
prescriptive compliance, may accurately account for any amount of continuous insulation or for unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   
 
Figure 4.2. 1 – Wood Framed Attic Roofs  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 13 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  This table shall not be used for cases where insulation is located at the roof of the attic. There are 
several situations in which this may be done.  For example, in a sealed attic, f oamed plastic may 
be sprayed onto the top chord of the trusses and onto the bottom of the upper structural deck (roof). The foam expands and cures  with the intent of provid ing an airtight barrier and 
continuous insulation. Another case is where a plastic membrane or netting is installed above the ceiling  (hanging below the roof deck) either in a ventilated or sealed (not ventilated) attic , and 
then either batt or blown insulation is installed over the netting. Since t here are a number of 
issues related to these insulation techniques , special CEC approval is required.  
Assumptions : This data is calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, 
asphalt shingles of R -0.44 (AR02), building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), ½ inch of wood based 
sheathing ( Custom), an attic air space (greater than 3.5 inch) with a R -0.80, the insulation / 
framing layer, continuous insulation (if any) ½ inch gypsum board (GP01) of R -0.45, and an 
interior air film (heat flow up) of R -0.61.  Wood 2x4 framing is assumed at the ceiling level. R -13 
of attic insulation is assumed between the framing members; above that level, attic insulation is uninterrupted by framing.  The framing percentage is assumed to be 10 percent for 16 inch on center and 7 percent for 24 inch on center.  7.25 percent of the attic insulation above the framing members is assumed to be at half depth, due to decreased depth of insulation at the eaves.Appendix JA4- 14 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.2 – U- factors of Wood Framed Rafter Roofs  – 16 in. OC Rafter Spacing 
Rated R- value of Continuous Insulation5 
R-value of  
Cavity  
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing  
Size None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 R-17 R-20 R-23 
None  Any 0.297  0.186  0.136  0.107  0.096  0.088  0.075  0.058  0.049  0.043  0.038  
R-112 2x4 0.084  0.072  0.063  0.056  0.053  0.050  0.046  0.039  0.035  0.031  0.029  
R-132 2x4 0.075  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.043  0.037  0.033  0.030  0.028  
R-152 2x4 0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.035  0.032  0.029  0.027  
R-192 2x4 0.075  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.043  0.037  0.033  0.030  0.028  
R-192,3 2x4 0.062  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  0.030  0.028  0.026  
R-11  2x6 0.076  0.066  0.058  0.052  0.050  0.047  0.043  0.037  0.033  0.030  0.028  
R-13  2x6 0.069  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.047  0.044  0.041  0.035  0.032  0.029  0.027  
R-15 2x6 0.062  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  0.030  0.028  0.026  
R-192 2x6 0.056  0.050  0.046  0.042  0.040  0.039  0.036  0.031  0.029  0.026  0.024  
R-212 2x6 0.052  0.047  0.043  0.040  0.038  0.037  0.034  0.030 0.028  0.025  0.024  
R-192  2x8 0.051  0.046  0.042  0.039  0.038  0.036  0.034  0.030  0.027  0.025  0.023  
R-21  2x8 0.048  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.032  0.029  0.026  0.024  0.023  
R-22  2x10  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.035  0.034  0.033  0.031  0.027  0.025  0.023  0.022  
R-25  2x10  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.032  0.031  0.029  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.021  
R-304 2x10  0.036  0.034  0.031  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.024  0.022  0.021  0.020  
R-30  2x12  0.035  0.033  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.019  
R-384 2x12  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.024  0.022  0.021  0.019  0.018  0.017  
R-384 2x14  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.020  0.019  0.018  0.017  
 
  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 15 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.2 – Continued U-factors of Wood Framed Rafter Roofs  – 24 in. OC Rafter Spacing 
Rated R- value of Continuous Insulation5 
R-value of  
Cavity  
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing  
Size None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 R-17 R-20 R-23 
None  Any 0.237  0.161  0.122  0.098  0.089  0.082  0.070  0.055  0.047  0.041  0.037  
R-112 2x4 0.081  0.070  0.061  0.055  0.052  0.049  0.045  0.038  0.034  0.031  0.028  
R-132 2x4 0.072  0.063  0.056  0.050  0.048  0.046  0.042  0.036  0.032  0.030  0.027  
R-152 2x4 0.065  0.058  0.052  0.047  0.045  0.043  0.039  0.034  0.031  0.028  0.026  
R-192 2x4 0.072  0.063  0.056  0.050  0.048  0.046  0.042  0.036  0.032  0.030  0.027  
R-192,3 2x4 0.059  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.037  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.025  
R-11 2x6 0.075  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.043  0.037  0.033  0.030  0.028  
R-13 2x6 0.067  0.059  0.053  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.035  0.031  0.029  0.026  
R-152 2x6 0.060  0.054  0.048  0.044  0.042  0.041  0.038  0.033  0.030  0.027  0.025  
R-192 2x6 0.054  0.049  0.044  0.041  0.039  0.038  0.035  0.031  0.028  0.026  0.024  
R-212 2x6 0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.029  0.027  0.025  0.023  
R-192 2x8 0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.029  0.027  0.025  0.023  
R-21 2x8 0.046  0.042  0.039  0.036  0.035  0.034  0.032  0.028  0.026  0.024  0.022  
R-22 2x10  0.043  0.040  0.037  0.034  0.033  0.032  0.030  0.027  0.025  0.023  0.022  
R-25 2x10  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.030  0.028  0.025  0.023  0.022  0.021  
R-304 2x10  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.027  0.025  0.023  0.022  0.020  0.019  
R-30 2x12  0.033  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.023  0.021  0.020  0.019  
R-38 4 2x12  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.020  0.019  0.018  0.017  
R-384 2x14  0.027  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.018  0.017  
Notes: 
1. Rigid foam board used for cavity insulation must fill the entire cavity between the rafters and be sealed 
properly to prevent air gaps, and must be secured properly to prevent any future discrepancies in the 
construction assembly.  
2. This assembly is only allowed where ventilation is provided between the bottom of the roof deck and the top 
of the insulation meeting CBC requirements or with enforcement agency official’s approval of rafter attic assemblies with no ventilation air spac es. 
3. This assembly requires insulation with an R -value per inch 5.6 or larger (k- factor 1.8 or less). This is board type 
insulation, mostly Isocyanurate. Medium density spray polyurethane foam may also be used to meet this 
requirement if the quality installa tion procedures and documentation in Reference Joint Appendix JA7 are 
followed, Documentation from Directory of Certified insulation materials must be provided to show compliance with this assembly.  
4. Higher density fiberglass batt is needed to achieve the indicated U -factor. R -30 must be achieved with less than 
8.25 inch full thickness. R- 38 must be achieved with less than 10.25 inch thickness (R- 30c, R- 38c).  
5. Continuous insulation shall be located at the ceiling or at the roof and be uninterrupted by framing. In climate 
zones 1 and 16 the insulating R- value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roofs waterproof 
membrane shall be multiplied b y 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining assembly U -factor. 
 
This table contains thermal performance data (U -factors) for wood framed rafter roofs. This is a 
common construction in residential buildings and in Type V nonresidential buildings. The rafters 
may be either flat or in a sloped application. Insulation is t ypically installed between the rafters. 
With this construction, the insulation is in contact with the ceiling and there is typically a one -Appendix JA4- 16 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  inch air gap above the insulation so that moisture can be vented. Whether there is an air space 
above the insulation depends on local climate conditions and may not be required in some building permit jurisdictions. Filling the entire cavity of framed raft er assemblies with loose -fill 
mineral fiber and wool, cellulose, or ocSPF requires prior approval by the local building official.  
For the majority of cases, U -factors will be selected from Column A of this table; this case covers 
insulation placed only in the cavity. When continuous insulation is installed either at the ceiling or at the roof, then U -factors from other columns may be  selected. The continuous insulation is 
typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation, but can also include mineral wool or other suitable materials.  
 
 
Figure  4.2.2 – Wood Frame Rafter Roof  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. For instance, if the 
continuous insulation is R -3, the R -2 column shall be used. No interpolation is permitted when 
data from the table is used manually. CEC approved software, however, may determine the U -
factor for any amount of continuous insulation and/or for layer s using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 
4-2.  
Assumptions : These data are calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, 
asphalt shingles of R -0.44 (AR02), building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), ½ inch of wood based 
sheathing (Custom), continuous insulation (optional), the insulation / framing layer with an air space of R -0.76 or R -0.80 (except for loose -fill mineral fiber and wool,  cellulose, ccSPF, and 
ocSPF), 1/2 inch gypsum of R -0.45 (GP01), and an interior air film (heat flow up diagonally) of R -
0.62. The continuous insulation may also be located at the ceiling, between the drywall and the 
framing. The framing percentage is assumed to be 10 percent for 16 inch OC and 7 percent for 24 
inch. OC. Th e thickness of framing members is assumed to be the actual size of 3.50, 5.50, 7.25, 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 17 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  9.25, and 11.25 inches for 2x4, 2x6, 2x8, 2x10, and 2x12 nominal sizes. High -density batt 
insulation is assumed to be 8.5 inch thick for R -30 and 10.5 inch thick for R -38. The R -value of 
sprayed foam and cellulose insulation is assumed to be R -3.6 per inch . Appendix JA4- 18 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.3 – U- factors of Structurally Insulated Panels (SIPS) Roof/Ceilings 
Rated R- value of Continuous Insulation 4,5 
Wood 
Framing 
Connection Type 
(spline)  Insulation Core  
 R-value1 Typical Panel 
Thickness  None  R-2 R-4 R-5 R-7 R-8 
OSB  R-22 6.5 in  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.034  0.032  0.031  
Single 2x  R-22 6.5 in  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.033  0.032  
Double 2x  R-22 6.5 in  0.046  0.042  0.038  0.037  0.034  0.033  
I-joist  R-22 6.5 in  0.043  0.039  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.032  
OSB  R-28 8.25 in  0.033  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  
Single 2x  R-28 8.25 in  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.027  0.027  
Double 2x  R-28 8.25 in  0.037  0.034  0.031  0.030  0.028  0.028  
I-joist  R-28 8.25 in  0.033  0.310  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  
OSB  R-332 6.5 in  0.030  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  
Single 2x  R-332 6.5 in  0.031  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  
Double 2x  R-332 6.5 in  0.034  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.025  
I-joist  R-332 6.5 in  0.031  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  
OSB  R-36 10.25 in  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.022  
Single 2x  R-36 10.25 in  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  
Double 2x  R-36 10.25 in  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  
I-joist  R-36 10.25 in  0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.022  
OSB  R-44 12.25 in  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.018  
Single 2x  R-44 12.25 in  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  0.019  
Double 2x  R-44 12.25 in  0.025  0.023  0.022  0.022  0.021  0.020  
I-joist  R-44 12.25 in  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.019  0.019  
OSB  R-553 10.25 in  0.017  0.016  0.016  0.016  0.016  0.016  
Single 2x  R-553 10.25 in  0.019  0.018  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.016  
Double 2x  R-553 10.25 in  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.017  
I-joist  R-553 10.25 in  0.018  0.017  0.017  0.017  0.016  0.016  
Steel 
Framing  R-14 48 in  0.075  0.065  0.058  0.055  0.049  0.047  
Steel 
Framing  R-22 48 in  0.057  0.051  0.046  0.044  0.041  0.039  
Steel 
Framing  R-28 48 in  0.047  0.043  0.040  0.039  0.035  0.034  
Steel 
Framing  R-36 48 in  0.043  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.033  0.032  
NOTES:  
1. The insulation R -value must be at least R -21.7 in order to use this table.  This table assumes moulded 
expanded polystyrene (EPS) unless noted otherwise.  Although other insulation types are used by some SIP 
manufacturers, such as polyurethane and extruded expanded insulation (XPS), EPS is the most common insulation used in SIP construction.  
2. R-33.2 is achievable using polyurethane insulation in 6.5" panels.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 19 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  3. R-55.3 is achievable using polyurethane insulation in 10.25" panels.  
4. Continuous insulation shall be at least R -2 and may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the 
roof/ceiling.  
5. In climate zones 1 and 16 the insulating R- value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roof 
waterproof membrane shall be multiplied times 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining 
assembly U -factor.  
Structural insulated panels (SIPs) consist of a rigid insulation core, securely bonded between two 
structural facings, to form a structural sandwich panel.  SIPs are considered a non- framed 
assembly usually with little or no structural framing that penetra tes the insulation layer, resulting 
in less thermal bridging across the insulation when compared to a conventional framed assembly.  
This table gives U -factors for structurally insulated panels used in ceiling and roof constructions. 
Data is provided for three variations of this system. The system labeled “Wood Framing” uses 
wood spacers to separate the plywood or OSB boards and provide  a means to connect the panels 
with mechanical fasteners. The system labeled “Steel Framing” uses steel framing members and 
mechanical fasteners at the joints. The system labeled “OSB Spline” uses splines to connect the 
panels so that framing members do no t penetrate the insulation.  
  Appendix JA4- 20 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
 
  
 
Figure 4.2. 3 – SIPS Roof/Ceiling  
Data from Column A will be used in most cases, since it is quite unusual to add continuous 
insulation to a panel that is basically all insulation anyway. If insulation is added, however, then 
the U -factor is selected from one of the other columns. If the tables are used manually, then the 
installed insulation shall have a thermal resistance at least as great as the column selected. When 
the table is used with CEC approved compliance software, then the R -value of any amount of 
continuous insulation may be ac counted for along with the thermal resistance of special 
construction layers may be accounted for using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.  
Assumptions: The wood framing and OSB spline data are calculated using the parallel path 
method documented in the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Assemblies with metal 
framing are calculated using the ASHRAE Zone Calculation Method which is also documented in 
the 2005 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -
0.17, asphalt shingles of R -0.44 (AR02), building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), 7/16 inch of OSB of R -
0.69, the rigid insulation of R -3.85 per inch, another l ayer of 7/16 inch of OSB, ½ inch gypsum 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 15 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  board of R -0.45 (GP01), an R -value of 0.99  per inch is assumed for the wood frame and an 
interior air film (heat flow up diagonally) of R -0.62. If an additional layer of insulation is used, this 
may be installed on either the interior or exterior of the SIPS panel assembly  
 
Table 4.2.4 –  U-factors of Metal Framed Attic Roofs –  16 in. OC Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation1 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size Cavity 
Insulation 
R-Value:  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.328  0.198  0.142  0.111  0.100  0.091  0.077  0.059  
2 x 4  R-11  0.126  0.101  0.084  0.072  0.067  0.063  0.056  0.046  
(3.65 in.)  R-13  0.121  0.097  0.082  0.070  0.066  0.061  0.055  0.045  
(3.65 in.)  R-19  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.042  0.036  
(3.65 in.)  R-21 0.063  0.056  0.050  0046  0.044  0.042  0.039  0.033  
(3.65 in.)  R-22  0.059  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.037  0.032  
(3.65 in.)  R-25  0.051  0.046  0.042  0.039  0.038  0.036  0.034  0.030  
(3.65 in.)  R-30  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.032  0.031  0.029  0.026  
(3.65 in.)  R-38  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.025  0.024  0.022  
(3.65 in.)  R-44 0.027  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  
(3.65 in.)  R-49 0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.018  
(3.65 in.)  R-60 0.019  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.017  0.016  0.016  0.015  
 
  Appendix JA4- 16 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.4 –  Continued U-factors of Metal Framed Attic Roofs –  24 in. OC Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation1 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size Cavity 
Insulation 
R-Value:  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.324  0.197  0.141  0.110  0.099  0.090  0.076  0.059  
2 x 4  R-11  0.109  0.089  0.076  0.066  0.062  0.058  0.052  0.043  
(3.65 in.)  R-13  0.103  0.085  0.073  0.064  0.060  0.056  0.051  0.042  
(3.65 in.)  R-19  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.047  0.045  0.043  0.039  0.034  
(3.65 in.)  R-21 0.058  0.052  0.047  0.043  0.041  0.040  0.037  0.032  
(3.65 in.) R-22  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.041  0.040  0.038  0.035  0.031  
(3.65 in.)  R-25  0.047  0.043  0.040  0.037  0.035  0.034  0.032  0.028  
(3.65 in.)  R-30  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.030  0.028  0.025  
(3.65 in.)  R-38  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.021  
(3.65 in.)  R-44 0.026  0.025  0.024  0.022  0.022  0.022  0.021  0.019  
(3.65 in.)  R-49 0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.017  
(3.65 in.)  R-60 0.019  0.018  0.018  0.017  0.017  0.016  0.016  0.015  
Notes:  
1 Continuous insulation shall be located at the ceiling or at the roof and be uninterrupted by framing.  
2. In climate zones 1 and 16 the insulating R -value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roofs 
waterproof membrane shall be multiplied by 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining assembly 
U-factor.  
This table contains U -factors for metal- framed attic roofs, where the ceiling is the air barrier and 
the attic is ventilated. This construction assembly is similar to those that are covered by Table 
4.2.1, except that metal framing members are substituted for the wood -framing members. The 
top chord of the truss is typically sloped, while the bottom chord is typically flat. Data from this table may be used for cases where the bottom chord of the truss is sloped.  If the bottom chord slopes more than 4:12, no nadhesive binder blown insulation must not be used.  
For the majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Column A applies for the common situation where either batt or blown insulation is placed directly over the ceiling. Builders or designers may increase thermal performance by adding a continuous insulation layer at the ceiling. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyurnate foam 
insulation. Continuous insulation does not include the blown or batt insulation that is over the 
bottom chord of the trus s (this is already accounted for in the first column data).  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. CEC approved software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation and for unusual construction 
layers using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.
 
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 17 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.2. 4 – Metal Framed Attic Roofs  
 
Assumptions : These data are calculated using the zone method calculation documented in the 
2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -
0.17, asphalt shingles of R -0.44 (AR02), building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), ½ inch of wood based 
sheathing (Custom), the attic air space (greater than 3.5 inch) of R -0.80, the insulation / framing 
layer, con tinuous insulation (if any) ½ inch gypsum of R -0.45 (GP01), and an interior air film (heat 
flow up) of R -0.61.  The framing percentage is assumed to be 10 percent for 16 inch on center and 
7 percent for 24 inch on center 7.25 percent of the attic insulation above the framing members is 
assumed to be at half depth, due to decreased depth of insulation at the eaves. S teel framing has 
1.5 inch flange and is 0.0747 inch thick steel with no knockouts. U -factors calculated using EZ 
Frame 2.0.  
Appendix JA4- 18 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.5 –  U-factors of Metal Framed Rafter Roofs  – 16 in. OC Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-Value  of 
Insulation 
Between 
Framing  Nominal 
Framing Size  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
None  Any 0.325  0.197  0.141  0.110  0.099  0.090  0.076  0.059  
R-112 2x4 0.129  0.103  0.085  0.073  0.068  0.063  0.056  0.046  
R-132 2x4 0.121  0.097  0.082  0.070  0.066  0.061  0.055  0.045  
R-152 2x4 0.115  0.093  0.079  0.068  0.064  0.060  0.053  0.044  
R-192,3 2x4 0.121  0.097  0.082  0.070  0.066  0.061  0.055  0.045  
R-11 2x6 0.123  0.099  0.082  0.071  0.066  0.062  0.055  0.045  
R-13 2x6 0.115  0.093  0.079  0.068  0.064  0.060  0.053  0.044  
R-152 2x6 0.101  0.084  0.072  0.063  0.059  0.056  0.050  0.042  
R-192 2x6 0.100  0.083  0.071  0.063  0.059  0.056  0.050  0.042  
R-192 2x8 0.096  0.081  0.069  0.061  0.057  0.054  0.049  0.041  
R-21 2x8 0.093  0.078  0.068  0.060  0.056  0.053  0.048  0.040  
R-25 2x10  0.084  0.072  0.063  0.056  0.053  0.050  0.046  0.039  
R-304  2x10  0.079  0.068  0.060  0.054  0.051  0.048  0.044  0.038  
R-30  2x12  0.076  0.066  0.058  0.052  0.050  0.047  0.043  0.037  
R-38 4 2x12  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.042  0.036  
R-38 4 2x14  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.035  
 
  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 19 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.5 – Continued U-factors of Metal Framed Rafter Roofs – 24 in. OC Spacing  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-Value  of 
Insulation 
Between 
Framing  Nominal 
Framing Size  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
None  Any 0.322  0.196 .170  0.141  0.110  0.099  0.090  0.076  0.058  
R-112 2x4 0.111  0.091  0.077  0.067  0.062  0.059  0.053  0.043  
R-132 2x4 0.102  0.085  0.072  0.063  0.060  0.056  0.050  0.042  
R-152 2x4 0.096  0.081  0.069  0.061  0.057  0.054  0.049  0.041  
R-192,3 2x4 0.102  0.085  0.072  0.063  0.060  0.056  0.050  0.042  
R-11 2x6 0.107  0.088  0.075  0.065  0.061  0.058  0.052  0.043  
R-13 2x6 0.099  0.083  0.071  0.062  0.058  0.055  0.050  0.041  
R-152 2x6 0.086  0.073  0.064  0.057  0.054  0.051  0.046  0.039  
R-192 2x6 0.083  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.052  0.050  0.045  0.038  
R-192 2x8 0.080  0.0690  0.061  0.054  0.051  0.049  0.044  0.038  
R-21 2x8 0.076  0.066  0.058  0.052  0.050  0.047  0.043  0.037  
R-25 2x10  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.035  
R-304 2x10  0.063  0.056  0.050  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.039  0.033  
R-30 2x12  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  
R-384 2x12  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.041  0.040  0.038  0.035  0.031  
R-384 2x14  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.040  0.039  0.037  0.035  0.030  
Notes: 
1. Rigid foam board used for cavity insulation must fill the entire cavity between the rafters and be sealed 
properly to prevent air gaps, and must be secured properly to prevent any future discrepancies in the 
construction assembly.  
2. This assembly is only allowed where ventilation is provided between the bottom of the roof deck and the top 
of the insulation meeting, CBC requirements or enforcement agency officials approval of rafter attic 
assemblies with no ventilation air spaces.  
3. This assembly requires insulation with an R -value per inch 5.6 or larger (k- factor 1.8 or less). This is board type 
insulation, mostly Isocyanurate. Medium density spray polyurethane foam may also be used to meet this 
requirement if the quality installa tion procedures and documentation in Joint Appendix 7 are followed.  
Documentation from Directory of Certified insulation materials must be provided to show compliance with this assembly.  
4. Higher density fiberglass batt is needed to achieve the indicated U -factor. R -30 must be achieved with less 
than 8.25 inch full thickness. R- 38 must be achieved with less than 10.25 inch thickness (R- 30c, R -38c).  
 
This table contains pre -calculated U -factors for metal- framed rafter roofs where the ceiling is the 
air barrier. This construction assembly is similar to that covered by Table 4.2.2 except that metal 
framing members are substituted for the wood -framing members. The rafters may be either flat 
or in a sloped application. Insulation is typically installed between the rafters. With this construction, the insulation is in contact with the ceiling and there is typically a one -inch air gap 
above the insulation so that moisture can be vented. Whether there is an air space above the insulation depends on local climate conditions and may not be required in some building permit 
jurisdictions.  Appendix JA4- 20 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  U-factors are selected from Column A of this table when there is no continuous insulation. When 
continuous insulation is installed either at the ceiling or at the roof, then U -factors from other 
columns may be selected. The continuous insulation is typical ly a rigid polystyrene or 
polyisocyanurate foam insulation, but can also include mineral wool or other suitable materials.  
 
Figure 4.2. 5 – Metal Framed Rafter Roof  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. For instance, if the 
insulation is R -3, the R -2 column shall be used. No interpolation is permitted when data from the 
table is used manually. Commission approved software, however, may determine the U -factor for 
any amount of continuous insulation and/or for unusual construction layers using Equation 4 -1 
and Equation 4 -2.  
Assumptions: These data are calculated using the zone calculation method documented in the 
2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -
0.17, asphalt shingles of R -0.44 (AR02), building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), ½ inch of wood  based 
sheathing (Custom), the insulation / framing layer, ½ inch gypsum of R -0.45 (GP01), and an 
interior air film (heat flow up diagonally) of R -0.62 The continuous insulation may either be 
located at the ceiling or over the structural deck.  The thickness of framing members is assumed 
to be 3.50, 5.50, 7.25, 9.25, and 11.25 inch for 2x4, 2x6, 2x8, 2x10, and 2x12 nominal sizes. High -
density batt insulation is assumed to be 8.5 in. thick for R -30 and 10.5 in thick for R -38. Framing 
spacing is 1 0 percent for 16 inches on center and 7 percent for 24 inches on center. Steel framing 
has 1.5 inch flange and is 0.075 inch thick steel with no knockouts. U -factors calculated using EZ 
Frame 2.0.  
  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 21 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.6 – U-factors for Span Deck and Concrete Roofs –  with Fireproofing  
R-value of Continuous Insulation  
Concrete 
Topping Over 
Metal Deck  None  R-4 R-6 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
None  0.348  0.145  0.113  0.092  0.078  0.067  0.056  0.044  0.036  0.030  
2 in.  0.324  0.141  0.110  0.090  0.076  0.066  0.055  0.043  0.036  0.030  
4 in.  0.302  0.137  0.107  0.088  0.075  0.065  0.055  0.043  0.035  0.030  
6 in.  0.283  0.133  0.105  0.087  0.074  0.064  0.054  0.042  0.035  0.030  
 
Table 4.2.6 –  Continued U-factors for Span Deck and Concrete Roofs –  with out Fireproofing  
R-value of Continuous Insulation  
Concrete 
Topping Over 
Metal Deck  None  R-4 R-6 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
None  0.503  0.167  0.125  0.100  0.083  0.071  0.059  0.045  0.037  0.031  
2 in.  0.452  0.161  0.122  0.098  0.082  0.070  0.058  0.045  0.037  0.031  
4 in.  0.412  0.156  0.119  0.096  0.080  0.069  0.057  0.045  0.036  0.031  
6 in.  0.377  0.150  0.116  0.094  0.079  0.068  0.057  0.044  0.036  0.031  
1. In climate zones 1 and 16 the insulating R -value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roof 
waterproof membrane shall be multiplied by 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining assembly U -
factor.  
The constructions in this table are typical of Type I and Type II steel framed or concrete 
nonresidential buildings. The construction consists of a metal deck with or without a concrete topping. It may also be used for a metal deck or even wood deck ceiling as long as the insulation is continuous. Fireproofing may be sprayed onto the underside of the metal deck; it also covers steel structural members. Insulation is typically installed above the structural deck and below the waterproof membrane. This table may also be used for reinforced concrete roofs that do not 
have a metal deck. In this case, the fireproofing will typically not be installed and choices from 
the table should be made accordingly.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation and for 
unusual construction layers using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2. If the data is adjusted using 
Equation 4 -2, the user shall take credit for a ceiling  and the air space above the ceiling only if the 
ceiling serves as an air barrier. Suspended or T -bar ceilings do not serve as air barriers.  
  Appendix JA4- 22 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.2. 6 – Span Deck and Concrete Roof  
Assumptions:  These calculations are made using the parallel path method documented in the 
2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The assembly is assumed to consist of an exterior air 
film of R -0.17, a single ply roofing membrane (R -0.15), protective board (R -1.06), con tinuous 
insulation (if any), concrete topping with a density of 120 lb/ft and an R -value of 0.11 per inch (if 
any), metal span deck (negligible), and fireproofing (R -0.88). While a suspended ceiling typically 
exists below the structure, this is  not considered part of the construction assembly therefore the 
same U -values are used for assemblies with or without suspended ceilings. The fireproofing is 
assumed to be equivalent to 60 lb/ft³ concrete with a resistance of 0.44 per inch.  
 Table 4.2.7 –  U-factors for Metal Building Roofs - Screw Down Roofs  with no Thermal Blocks  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-Value of 
Insulation  Overall U-
Factor for 
Entire Base 
Roof 
Assembly  R-6 R-9 R-13 R-15 R-19 R-22 R-25 R-32 R-38 
R-10 0.184  0.087  0.069  0.054  0.049  0.041  0.036  0.033  0.027  0.023  
R-11 0.182  0.087  0.069  0.054  0.049  0.041  0.036  0.033  0.027  0.023  
R-13 0.174  0.085  0.068  0.053  0.048  0.040  0.036  0.033  0.026  0.023  
R-16 0.157  0.081  0.065  0.052  0.047  0.039  0.035  0.032  0.026  0.023  
R-19 0.151  0.079  0.064  0.051  0.046  0.039  0.035  0.032  0.026  0.022  
 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 23 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.7 –  Continued U-factors for Metal Building Roofs - Standing Seam Roof with Single Layer 
of Insulation Draped over Purlins and Compressed. Thermal blocks at supports.2 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-Value of 
Insulation  Overall U -
Factor for 
Entire Base 
Roof 
Assembly  R-6 R-9 R-13 R-15 R-19 R-22 R-25 R-32 R-38 
None  1.280  0.147  0.102  0.073  0.063  0.051  0.044  0.039  0.031  0.026  
R-10 0.115  0.068  0.057  0.046  0.042  0.036  0.033  0.030  0.025  0.021  
R-11 0.107  0.065  0.055  0.045  0.041  0.035  0.032  0.029  0.024  0.021  
R-13 0.101  0.063  0.053  0.044  0.040  0.035  0.031  0.029  0.024  0.021  
R-16 0.096  0.061  0.052  0.043  0.039  0.034  0.031  0.028  0.024  0.021  
R-19 0.082  0.055  0.047  0.040  0.037  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.023  0.020  
 
Table 4.2.7 –  Continued U-factors for Metal Building Roofs - Standing Seam Roof with Double 
Layer of Insulation.3Thermal blocks at supports.2 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-Value of 
Insulation  Overall U -
Factor for 
Entire Base 
Roof 
Assembly  R-6 R-9 R-13 R-15 R-19 R-22 R-25 R-32 R-38 
R-10 + R -10 0.088  0.058  0.049  0.041  0.038  0.033  0.030  0.028  0.023  0.020  
R-10 + R -11 0.086  0.057  0.048  0.041  0.038  0.033  0.030  0.027  0.023  0.020  
R-11 + R -11 0.085  0.056  0.048  0.040  0.037  0.033  0.030  0.027  0.023  0.020  
R-10 + R -13 0.084  0.056  0.048  0.040  0.037  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.023  0.020  
R-11 + R -13 0.082  0.055  0.047  0.040  0.037  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.023  0.020  
R-13 + R -13 0.075  0.052  0.045  0.038  0.035  0.031  0.028  0.026  0.022  0.019  
R-10 + R -19 0.074  0.051  0.044  0.038  0.035  0.031  0.028  0.026  0.022  0.019  
R-11 + R -19 0.072  0.050  0.044  0.037  0.035  0.030  0.028  0.026  0.022  0.019  
R-13 + R -19 0.068  0.048  0.042  0.036  0.034  0.030  0.027  0.025  0.021  0.019  
R-16 + R -19 0.065  0.047  0.041  0.035  0.033  0.029  0.027  0.025  0.021  0.019  
R-19 + R -19 0.060  0.044  0.039  0.034  0.032  0.028  0.026  0.024  0.021  0.018  
 
  Appendix JA4- 24 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.2.7 –  Continued U-factors for Metal Building Roofs - Filled Cavity with Thermal Blocks 3,4,5 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Notes:  
1. A roof must have metal purlins no closer than 4 ft on center to use this table.  If the roof deck is attached to 
the purlins more frequently than 12 in oc, 0.008 must be added to the U -factors in this table.  
2. Thermal blocks are an R -3 of rigid insulation, which extends 1.5" beyond the width of the purlin on each side.  
3. Multiple R -values are listed in order from outside to inside. First layer is parallel to the purlins, and supported 
by a system; second layer is laid on top of the purlins.  
4. Thermal blocks are an R -5 of rigid insulation, which extends 1.5" beyond the width of the purlin on each side.  
5. In climate zones 1 and 16 the insulating R -value of continuous insulation materials installed above the roof 
waterproof membrane shall be multiplied times 0.8 before choosing the table column for determining 
assembly U -factor.  
 
The U -factors in this table are intended for use with metal building roofs. This type of 
construction is typical for manufacturing and warehouse facilities, but is used for other building 
types as well. The typical method of insulating this type of building is to drape vinyl backed fiberglass insulation over the metal purlins before the metal deck is attached with metal screws. With this method, the insulation is compressed at the supports, reducing its effectiveness. The 
first part of the table contains va lues for this insulation technique. The second section of the 
table has data for the case when a thermal block is used at the support. The insulation is still 
compressed, but the thermal block, which generally consists of an 8 inch wide strip of foam insul ation, improves the thermal performance. The third section of the table deals with systems 
that involve two layers of insulation.  
  R-Value of 
Insulation  Overall U -
Factor for 
Entire Base 
Roof 
Assembly  R-6 R-9 R-13 R-15 R-19 R-22 R-25 R-32 R-38 
R10 + R -19 0.041  0.033  0.030  0.027  0.025  0.023  0.022  0.020  0.018  0.016  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 25 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Screw -Down,  
No Thermal Blocks  
 
 
Single Layer,  
Thermal Blocks  
 
 Double Layer,  
Thermal Blocks  
 
 
Filled Cavity,  
Thermal Blocks  
 
Figure 4.2. 7 – Metal Building Roofs  
For the majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Builders or 
designers may increase thermal performance by adding a continuous insulation layer between the metal decking and the structural supports. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation using 
Equation 4 -1.  
Appendix JA4- 14 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Assumptions : Data in Column A of this table is taken from the ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -
2004, Appendix A. The data is also published in the NAIMA Compliance for Metal Buildings, 1997.  
 
Table 4.2.8 –  U-factors for Insulated Ceiling with Removable Panels  
R-value of Insulation Over Suspended 
Ceiling  U-factor  
None  0.304  
7 0.152  
11 0.132  
13 0.126  
19 0.113  
21 0.110  
22 0.109  
30 0.102  
38 0.098  
49 0.094  
60 0.092  
 
This table includes U -factors for the case of insulation placed over suspended ceilings. This 
situation is only permitted for a combined floor area no greater than 2,000 square feet in an 
otherwise unconditioned building, and when the average height of the  space between the ceiling 
and the roof over these spaces is greater than 12 feet. The suspended ceiling does not provide an 
effective air barrier and leakage is accounted for in the calculations.  
 
 
Figure 4.2. 8 – Insulated Ceiling with Removable Panels  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 15 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Assumptions :  These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a built -up roof of R -0.33 
(BR01), ¾ inch wood based sheathing (Custom), a twelve foot air space of R -0.80, the insulation 
(for the insulated portion), removable ceiling panels with a R -0.50 and a n interior air film (heat 
flow up) of R -0.61. 75 percent of the ceiling is assumed covered by insulation and the remainder 
is not insulated. The uninsulated portion includes lighting fixtures and areas where the insulation 
is not continuous. A c orrection factor of 0.005 is added to the resulting U -factor to account for 
infiltration through the suspended ceiling and lighting fixtures.  
 
Table 4.2.9 –  U-factors of Insulated Metal Panel Roofs and Ceilings  
Panel Thickness  U-factor (Btu/0F-ft2) A 
2” 0.079  
2 ½”  0.064  
3” 0.054  
4” 0.041  
5” 0.033  
6” 0.028  
This table contains thermal performance data (U -factors) for foamed -in-place, insulated metal 
panels consisting of liquid polyurethane or polyisocyanurate injected between metal skins in individual molds or on fully automated production lines.  Metal building construction is the most common application for this product where the metal panel is fastened to the frame of the structure.  This table can only be used for insulated panels that are factory built.  This table does 
not apply to panels that utilize polystyrene, or to field applied products such as spray applied 
insulations.  Appendix JA4- 16 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.2. 9 –Insulated Metal Panel Roofs  
Assumptions:   These data are calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, 
light gauge metal exterior of R -0.0747, continuous insulation R -5.9 per inch, light  gauge metal 
interior of 0.0747 inch thickness and an interior air film (heat flow up) of R -0.61.  The panels are 
assumed to be continuous with no framing penetration. The R -value of the light gauge metal is 
negligible.  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 17 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  JA4.3  Walls  
Table 4.3.1 – U- factors of Wood Framed Walls with 1/2 -inch Gypsum Board – 16 in. OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation2 
Table 4.3.1 – Continued U-factors of Wood Framed Walls with 1/2 -inch Gypsum Board – 24 in. OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation2 
Notes 
1. Higher density fiberglass batt is required in these cases.  
2. Continuous insulation may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the wall, or both.  Cavity 
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 
None  Any 0.356  0.209  0.146  0.127  0.113  0.101  0.092  0.078  0.067  0.056  
R-11  2x4 0.110  0.088  0.074  0.068  0.064  0.060  0.056  0.050  0.045  0.040  
R-13  2x4 0.102  0.082  0.069  0.064  0.060  0.056  0.053  0.047  0.043  0.038  
R-15 1 2x4 0.095  0.077  0.065  0.060  0.056  0.053  0.050  0.045  0.041  0.036  
R-19   2x6 0.074  0.063  0.055  0.051  0.049  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.033  
R-20 2x6 0.071  0.060  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.044  0.042  0.039  0.036  0.032  
R-211 2x6 0.069  0.059  0.051  0.048  0.046  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.031  
R-22 2x6 0.072  0.062  0.054  0.051  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.037  0.036  0.033  
R-23 2x6 0.067  0.057  0.049  0.047  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.037  0.034  0.030  
R-25 2x6 0.065  0.055  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.040  0.039  0.035  0.036  0.032  
R-19  2x8 0.065  0.057  0.051  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.032  
R-22 2x8 0.061  0.053  0.047  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.036  0.033  0.030  
R-25 2x8 0.057  0.050  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.038  0.037  0.034  0.032  0.029  
R-301 2x8 0.056  0.049  0.044  0.041  0.040  0.038  0.036  0.033  0.031  0.028  
Cavity 
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 
None  Any 0.362  0.211  0.148  0.128  0.114  0.102  0.092  0.078  0.067  0.056  
R-11 2x4 0.106  0.086  0.072  0.067  0.062  0.059  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.039  
R-13 2x4 0.098  0.079  0.067  0.062  0.058  0.055  0.052  0.047  0.043  0.038  
R-15 2x4 0.091  0.074  0.063  0.059  0.055  0.052  0.049  0.044  0.040  0.036  
R-19 2x6 0.071  0.061  0.053  0.050  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.040  0.036  0.033  
R-20 2x6 0.068  0.058  0.051  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.031  
R-211 2x6 0.066  0.057  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.042  0.040  0.037  0.034  0.031  
R-22 2x6 0.069  0.060  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.044  0.042  0.036  0.036  0.033  
R-23 2x6 0.064  0.054  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.036  0.033  0.030  
R-25 2x6 0.061  0.052  0.046  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.037  0.034  0.035  0.031  
R-19 2x8 0.063  0.055  0.049  0.047  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.037  0.035  0.031  
R-22 2x8 0.058  0.051  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.030  
R-25 2x8 0.055  0.048  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.037  0.036  0.033  0.031  0.028  
R-301 2x8 0.054  0.047  0.042  0.040  0.038  0.037  0.035  0.033  0.030  0.028  Appendix JA4- 18 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  This table contains U -factors for wood framed walls, which are typical of low -rise residential 
buildings and Type V nonresidential buildings. If continuous insulation is not used, then choices 
are made from Column A. In this case, the insulation is installed in the cavity between the framing members. When continuous insulation is  used, this is typically installed on the exterior 
side of the wall, but can also be used on the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid 
polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation or for 
unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 19 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.1(a) –  U-factors of Wood Framed Walls with installed 5/8- inch Gypsum  Board1  
– 16 in. OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation3 
Cavity 
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10  
None  Any 0.343  0.208  0.145  0.126  0.112  0.100  0.091  0.077  
R-11  2x4 0.109  0.087  0.073  0.067  0.063  0.059  0.055  0.050  
R-13  2x4 0.101  0.081  0.068  0.063  0.059  0.056  0.052  0.047  
R-15 2 2x4 0.094  0.076  0.064  0.059  0.055  0.052  0.049  0.045  
R-19   2x6 0.073  0.062  0.054  0.050  0.048  0.045  0.043  0.040  
R-212 2x6 0.068  0.058  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.040  0.038  
R-22 2x6 0.071  0.061  0.053  0.050  0.047  0.044  0.042  0.039  
R-19  2x8 0.064  0.056  0.050  0.047  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.038  
R-22 2x8 0.060  0.052  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.038  0.036  
R-25 2x8 0.056  0.049  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.037  0.036  0.034  
R-302 2x8 0.055  0.048  0.043  0.040  0.039  0.037  0.035  0.033  
 
Table 4.3.1(a) –  Continued U-factors of Wood Framed Walls with installed 5/8- inch Gypsum  
Board1  – 24 in. OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation3 
Cavity 
Insulation  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10  
None  Any 0.361  0.210  0.147  0.127  0.113  0.101  0.091  0.077  
R-11 2x4 0.105  0.085  0.071  0.066  0.061  0.058  0.055  0.049  
R-13 2x4 0.097  0.078  0.066  0.061  0.057  0.054  0.052  0.046  
R-15 2x4 0.090  0.073  0.062  0.058  0.054  0.051  0.049  0.04  
R-19 2x6 0.070  0.060  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.044  0.043  0.039  
R-212 2x6 0.065  0.056  0.049  0.046  0.044  0.041  0.040  0.037  
R-22 2x6 0.068  0.059  0.051  0.048  0.046  0.043  0.042  0.038  
R-19 2x8 0.062  0.054  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.041  0.037  
R-22 2x8 0.057  0.050  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.038  0.035  
R-25 2x8 0.054  0.047  0.042  0.040  0.038  0.036  0.036  0.033  
R-301 2x8 0.053  0.046  0.041  0.039  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.033  
Notes  
1. The 5/8 inch gypsum board must be verified by the enforcement agency. If 5/8 inch gypsum board is not 
installed use table 4.3.1.  
2. Higher density fiberglass batt is required in these cases.  
3. Continuous insulation may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the wall, or both.  
This table contains U -factors for wood framed walls, which are typical of low -rise residential 
buildings and Type V nonresidential buildings. If continuous insulation is not used, then choices 
are made from Column A. In this case, the insulation is installed in the cavity between the 
framing members. When continuous insulation is used, this is typically installed on the exterior Appendix JA4- 20 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  side of the wall, but can also be used on the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid 
polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approve d compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation or for 
unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.  
 
 
Figure 4.3.1 –  Wood Framed Wall  
Assumptions:  Values in this table were calculated using the parallel heat flow calculation 
method, documented in the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The construction 
assembly assumes an ext erior air film of R -0.17, a 7/8 inch layer of stucco of R -0.18 (SC01), 
building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), continuous insulation (if any), the cavity insulation / framing 
layer, 1/2 inch gypsum board of R -0.45 (GP01)  or 5/8 inch gypsum board of R -0.56, and an 
interior air film 0.68. The framing factor is assumed to be 25 percent for 16 inch stud spacing and 22 percent for 24 inch spacing.  Actual cavity depth is 3.5 inch for 2x4, 5.5 inch for 2x6, 7.25 inch for 2x8, 9.25 inch for 2x10, and 11.25 inch f or 2x12. High density R -30 insulation is  assumed to be 
8.5 inch thick batt and R -38 is assumed to be 10.5 inch thick. The thickness of the stucco is 
assumed to be reduced to 3/8 inch when continuous insulation is applied.  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 21 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.2 –  U-factors of Structurally Insulated Wall Panels (SIPS)  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation5 
Wood Framing 
Connection 
Type (spline)  
Insulation Core   R-value1 Typical 
Panel 
Thickness  None  R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-8 
OSB  R-14 4.5 in  0.061  0.055  0.049  0.047  0.045  0.041  
Single 2x  R-14  4.5 in  0.071  0.061  0.054  0.051  0.048  0.044  
Double 2x  R-14 4.5 in  0.077  0.065  0.057  0.054  0.050  0.046  
I-joist  R-14   4.5 in  0.070  0.060  0.053  0.051  0.048  0.044  
OSB  R-182 4.5 in  0.053  0.045  0.041  0.039  0.037  0.034  
Single 2x  R-182 4.5 in  0.061  0.052  0.047  0.045  0.042  0.039  
Double 2x  R-182 4.5 in  0.066  0.056  0.050  0.048  0.045  0.041  
I-joist  R-182 4.5 in  0.059  0.051  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.038  
OSB  R-22 6.5 in  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.031  
Single 2x  R-22 6.5 in  0.050  0.044  0.040  0.039  0.037  0.034  
Double 2x  R-22 6.5 in  0.054  0.048  0.043  0.041  0.039  0.036  
I-joist  R-22 6.5 in  0.048  0.043  0.039  0.038  0.036  0.033  
OSB  R-28 8.25 in  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  
Single 2x  R-28 8.25 in  0.039  0.036  0.033  0.032  0.031  0.029  
Double 2x  R-28 8.25 in  0.043  0.039  0.035  0.034  0.033  0.030  
I-joist  R-28 8.25 in  0.037  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.030  0.028  
OSB  R-333 6.5 in  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.023  
Single 2x  R-333 6.5 in  0.038  0.034  0.031  0.030  0.029  0.027  
Double 2x  R-333 6.5 in  0.043  0.038  0.034  0.033  0.031  0.029  
I-joist  R-333 6.5 in  0.036  0.033  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.026  
OSB  R-36 10.25 in  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  
Single 2x  R-36 10.25 in  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.024  
Double 2x  R-36 10.25 in  0.035  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.026  
I-joist  R-36 10.25 in  0.030  0.028  0.026  0.026  0.025  0.023  
OSB  R-44 12.25 in  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.019  0.018  
Single 2x  R-44 12.25 in  0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  
Double 2x  R-44 12.25 in  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.025  0.024  0.023  
I-joist  R-44 12.25 in  0.025  0.024  0.022  0.022  0.021  0.020  
OSB  R-554 10.25 in  0.020  0.019  0.017  0.016  0.016  0.016  
Single 2x  R-554 10.25 in  0.024  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  0.019  
Double 2x  R-554 10.25 in  0.028  0.025  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  
I-joist  R-554 10.25 in  0.022  0.021  0.019  0.019  0.018  0.018  
Notes:  
1. The insulation R -value must be at least R -14 in order to use this table.  This table assumes moulded  
expanded polystyrene (EPS) unless noted otherwise.  Although other insulation types are used by some SIP 
manufacturers, such as polyurethane and extruded expanded insulation (XPS), EPS is the most common 
insulation used in SIP construction.  
2. R-18.1 is achievable using extruded expanded polystyrene (XPS) insulation in 4.5" thick panels.  
3. R-33.2 is achievable using polyurethane insulation in 6.5" panels.  Appendix JA4- 22 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  4. R-55.3 is achievable using polyurethane insulation in 10.25" panels.  
5. Continuous insulation shall be at least R -2 and may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the 
wall.  
 
Structural insulated panels (SIPs) consist of a rigid insulation core, securely bonded between two 
structural facings, to form a structural sandwich panel.  SIPs are considered a non- framed 
assembly usually with little or no structural framing that penetra tes the insulation layer, resulting 
in less thermal bridging across the insulation when compared to a conventional framed assembly.  
This table gives U -factors for structurally insulated panels used in wall construction. This is a 
construction system that consists of rigid foam insulation sandwiched between two layers of plywood or oriented strand board (OSB). Data is provided for four variations of connecting two panels together.  
If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. When continuous 
insulation is also used, this is typically installed on the exterior side of the wall, but can also be 
used on the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a r igid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate 
foam insulation. Adding continuous insulation to a SIPS panel is highly unusual since the panel itself is mostly continuous insulation.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved software, however, 
may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation or for unusual construction 
assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 23 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.3.2 –  Structurally Insulated Wall Panels (SIPS)  
This figure shows just one way that panels are connected. Other options exist.  
Assumptions: These data are calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.  
These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 7/8 inch layer of stucco of R -0.18, 
building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), 7/16 inch of OSB of R -0.44, insulation at carrying R -values (as 
specified), 7/16 inch of OSB of R -0.44, ½ inch gypsum board of R -0.45 (GP01), and in interior air 
film of R -0.68. A framing factor of 13 percent is assumed for wood spacers and 7 percent for the 
OSB spline system. Framing includes the sill plate, the header and framing around windows and 
doors.  
Appendix JA4- 24 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.3 –  U-factors of Metal Framed Walls for Nonresidential Construction – 16 in OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation2 
R-Value:  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-14 R-15 
None  Any 0.458  0.239  0.162  0.139  0.122  0.109  0.098  0.082  0.071  0.062  0.058  
R-5 2x4 0.351  0.206  0.146  0.127  0.113  0.102  0.092  0.078  0.067  0.059  0.056  
R-11  2x4 0.224  0.155  0.118  0.106  0.096  0.087  0.080  0.069  0.061  0.054  0.052  
R-13  2x4 0.217  0.151  0.116  0.104  0.094  0.086  0.079  0.068  0.060  0.054  0.051  
R-15 2x4 0.211  0.148  0.114  0.103  0.093  0.085  0.078  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.050  
R-19 2x6 0.183  0.134  0.106  0.096  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.065  0.057  0.051  0.049  
R-20 2x6 0.181  0.133  0.105  0.095  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.064  0.057  0.051  0.049  
R-211 2x6 0.178  0.131  0.104  0.094  0.086  0.079  0.073  0.064  0.057  0.051  0.049  
R-19 2x8 0.164  0.123  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.076  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  
R-22 2x8 0.160  0.121  0.098  0.089  0.082  0.075  0.070  0.062  0.055  0.049  0.047  
R-25 2x8 0.158  0.120  0.097  0.088  0.081  0.075  0.070  0.061  0.055  0.049  0.047  
R-301 2x8 0.157  0.119  0.096  0.088  0.081  0.075  0.070  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.047  
 
Table 4.3.3 –  Continued U-factors of Metal Framed Walls for Nonresidential Construction – 24 in 
OC 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation2 
R-Value:  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-14 R-15 
None  Any 0.455  0.238  0.161  0.139  0.122  0.109  0.098  0.082  0.070  0.062  0.058  
R-5 2x4 0.333  0.200  0.143  0.125  0.111  0.100  0.091  0.077  0.067  0.059  0.056  
R-11  2x4 0.210  0.148  0.114  0.102  0.093  0.085  0.078  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.051  
R-13  2x4 0.203  0.144  0.112  0.101  0.092  0.084  0.077  0.067  0.059  0.053  0.051  
R-15 2x4 0.197  0.141  0.110  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.076  0.066  0.059  0.052  0.050  
R-19 2x6 0.164  0.123  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.076  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  
R-20 2x6 0.164  0.123  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.076  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  
R-211 2x6 0.161  0.122  0.098  0.089  0.082  0.076  0.070  0.062  0.055  0.049  0.047  
R-19 2x8 0.153  0.117  0.095  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.069  0.060  0.054  0.049  0.047  
R-22 2x8 0.149  0.115  0.093  0.085  0.079  0.073  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  
R-25 2x8 0.147  0.114  0.093  0.085  0.078  0.072  0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  
R-301 2x8 0.146  0.113  0.092  0.084  0.078  0.072  0.067  0.059  0.053  0.048  0.046  
Notes  
1. Higher density fiberglass batt is required in these cases.  
2.  Continuous insulation may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the wall, or both.  
This table contains U -factors for steel or metal- framed walls, which are typical of nonresidential 
buildings. The table may be used for any construction assembly where the insulation is installed 
in the cavity of a metal -framed wall, or where continuous in sulation is installed on the exterior or 
interior of the metal framing, or a combination of these two methods of insulating a metal -
framed wall.   2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 25 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. In this case, the 
insulation is installed only in the cavity between the framing members. When continuous insulation is used, it is typically installed on the exterior side of the wall, but can also be used on the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam 
insulation.  
 
Figure 4.3.3 – Metal Framed Wall  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software programs, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous 
insulation or for unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   
Assumptions:  Values in this table were calculated using the zone calculation method. The 
construction assembly assumes an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 7/8 inch layer of stucco of R -0.18, 
building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), continuous insulation (if any), the insulation / framing layer, 1/2 
inch gypsum of R -0.45 gypsum board  (GP01), and an interior air film 0.68. The steel framing is 
assumed to be 0.0747 inch thick with a 15 percent knock out. The framing factor is assumed to be 
25 percent for 16 inch stud spacing and 22 percent for 24 inch spacing. The EZFrame internal default framing percentages are 15 percent for 16 inch stud spacing and 12 percent for 24 inch spacing.  To account for the increased wall framing percentage the frame spacing input to the EZ Frame program is reduced to 13.218 inches for 16 inch stud spacing and 15.231 inches for 24 inch stud spacing. Actual cavity depth is 3.5 inch for 2x4, 5.5 inch for 2x6, 7.25 inch for 2x8, 9.25 inch 
Appendix JA4- 26 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  for 2x10, and 11.25 inch for 2x12. High density R -30 insulation is assumed to be 8.5 inch thick 
batt and R -38 is assumed to be 10.5 inch thick. The thi ckness of the stucco is assumed to be 
reduced to 3/8 inch when continuous insulation is applied.  
 
Table 4.3.4 –  U-factors of Metal Framed Walls for Residential Construction – 16in OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 2 
Cavity 
Insulation 
R-Value:  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 
None  Any 0.455  0.238  0.161  0.139  0.122  0.109  0.098  0.082  0.070  0.058  
R-05 2x4 0.252  0.165  0.124  0.110  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.071  0.062  0.052  
R-11  2x4 0.200  0.137  0.107  0.097  0.088  0.081  0.075  0.065  0.058  0.049  
R-13  2x4 0.192  0.132  0.105  0.095  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.064  0.057  0.049  
R-15 2x4 0.186  0.129  0.102  0.093  0.085  0.078  0.073  0.063  0.056  0.048  
R-19 2x6 0.154  0.112  0.092  0.084  0.077  0.072  0.067  0.059  0.053  0.046  
R-20 2x6 0.151  0.112  0.091  0.084  0.077  0.072  0.067  0.059  0.053  0.046  
R-211 2x6 0.151  0.110  0.090  0.083  0.076  0.071  0.066  0.058  0.052  0.045  
R-19 2x8 0.134  0.102  0.085  0.078  0.072  0.067  0.063  0.056  0.050  0.044  
R-22 2x8 0.129  0.099  0.082  0.076  0.071  0.066  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.043  
R-25 2x8 0.125  0.096  0.081  0.075  0.069  0.065  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.043  
R-301 2x8 0.120  0.093  0.078  0.073  0.068  0.063  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.042  
R-30 2x10  0.109  0.086  0.073  0.068  0.064  0.060  0.057  0.051  0.046  0.041  
R-381 2x10  0.104  0.082  0.071  0.066  0.062  0.058  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.040  
R-38 2 x 12  0.095  0.077  0.067  0.062  0.059  0.055  0.053  0.048  0.043  0.038  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 27 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.4 – Continued U-factors of Metal Framed Walls for Residential Construction – 24in OC  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 2 
Cavity 
Insulation 
R-Value:  Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-0 R-2 R-4 R-5 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-15 
None  Any 0.449  0.236  0.161  0.138  0.121  0.108  0.098  0.082  0.070  0.058  
R-05 2x4 0.243  0.161  0.122  0.108  0.098  0.089  0.082  0.070  0.062  0.052  
R-11  2x4 0.189  0.131  0.104  0.094  0.086  0.079  0.073  0.064  0.057  0.048  
R-13  2x4 0.181  0.127  0.101  0.092  0.084  0.078  0.072  0.063  0.056  0.048  
R-15 2x4 0.175  0.123  0.099  0.090  0.082  0.076  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.047  
R-19 2x6 0.144  0.107  0.088  0.081  0.075  0.070  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.045  
R-20 2x6 0.141  0.106  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.069  0.065  0.057  0.051  0.044  
R-211 2x6 0.141  0.105  0.086  0.080  0.074  0.069  0.064  0.057  0.051  0.044  
R-19 2x8 0.126  0.097  0.081  0.075  0.070  0.065  0.061  0.055  0.049  0.043  
R-22 2x8 0.121  0.094  0.079  0.073  0.068  0.064  0.060  0.054  0.048  0.042  
R-25 2x8 0.117  0.091  0.077  0.071  0.067  0.063  0.059  0.053  0.048  0.042  
R-301 2x8 0.112  0.088  0.075  0.069  0.065  0.061  0.057  0.052  0.047  0.041  
R-30 2x10  0.102  0.081  0.070  0.065  0.061  0.058  0.055  0.049  0.045  0.039  
R-381 2x10  0.096  0.077  0.067  0063  0.059  0.056  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.039  
R-38 2 x 12  0.088  0.072  0.063  0.059  0.056  0.053  0.050  0.046  0.042  0.037  
Notes 
1. Higher density fiberglass batt is required in these cases.  
2. Continuous insulation may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the wall, or both.  
This table contains U -factors for steel or metal framed walls in low -rise residential buildings 
where the thickness of the framing members is 18 gauge or thinner. Table 4.3.3 in Reference 
Joint Appendix JA4 must be used for steel -framed  or metal- framed walls in nonresidential 
buildings (including high- rise residential buildings and hotels and motels) and in low rise 
residential buildings if the thickness of the framing members are thinner than 18 gauge.  
If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. In this case, the insulation is installed only in the cavity between the framing members. When continuous insulation is  used, it is typically installed on the exterior side of the wall, but can also be used on 
the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation. Appendix JA4- 28 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.3.4 –  Metal Framed Wall  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software programs, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous 
insulation or for unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.  
Assumptions:  Values in this table were calculated using the zone calculation method. The 
construction assembly assumes an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 7/8 inch layer of siding or stucco 
averaging R -0.18, building paper of R -0.06 (BP01), continuous insulation (if any ), the insulation / 
framing insulation layer, 1/2 inc h gypsum of R -0.45 gypsum board  (GP01), and an interior air film 
0.68. The framing factor is assumed to be 25 percent for 16 inch stud spacing and 22 percent for 
24 inch spacing. To account for the increased wall framing percentage, the frame spacing input to 
the EZ Frame program is reduced to 13.218 inches for 16 inch stud spacing and 15.231 inches for 
24 inch stud spacing. The stud web thickness is assumed to be 0.038 inches, which is a 50/5 0 mix 
of 18 gauge and 20 gauge C -channel studs. This value was confirmed to be representative of low-
rise residential construction by polling several California- based light- gauge steel structural 
engineers and light- gauge steel framers. Actual cavity depth  is 3.5 inch for 2x4, 5.5 inch for 2x6, 8 
inch for 2x8, 10 inch for 2x10, and 12 inches for 2x12. High density R -30 insulation is assumed to 
be 8.5 inch thick batt and R -38 is assumed to be 10.5 inches thick. The thi ckness of the stucco is 
assumed to be reduced to 3/8 inch when continuous insulation is applied.   
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 29 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.5 –  Properties of Hollow Unit Masonry Walls – 12in Thickness  
 Solid Grouts  Empty1   Insulated1  
Type  U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC 
LW CMU  0.51  0.90  23 0.43  0.68  14.8  0.30  0.40  14.8  
MW CMU  0.54  1.00  23.9  0.46  0.76  15.6  0.33  0.46  15.6  
NW CMU  0.57  1.11  24.8  0.49  0.84  16.5  0.36  0.52  16.5  
 
Table 4.3.5 –  Continued Properties of Hollow Unit Masonry Walls – 10in Thickness  
 Solid Grouts  Empty1   Insulated1  
Type  U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC 
LW CMU  0.55  1.03  18.9  0.46  0.76  12.6  0.34  0.48  12.6  
MW CMU  0.59  1.18  19.7  0.49  0.84  13.4  0.37  0.54  13.4  
NW CMU  0.62  1.31  20.5  0.52  0.93  14.2  0.41  0.63  14.2  
 
Table 4.3.5 –  Continued Properties of Hollow Unit Masonry Walls – 8in Thickness  
 Solid Grouts  Empty1   Insulated1  
Type  U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC 
LW CMU  0.62  1.31  15.1  0.50  0.87  9.9 0.37  0.54  9.9 
MW CMU  0.65  1.45  15.7  0.53  0.96  10.5  0.41  0.63  10.5  
NW CMU  0.69  1.67  16.3  0.56  1.07  11.1  0.44  0.70  11.1  
Clay Unit  0.57  1.11  15.1  0.47  0.78  11.4  0.39  0.58  11.4  
 
Table 4.3.5 –  Continued Properties of Hollow Unit Masonry Walls – 6in Thickness  
 Solid Grouts  Empty1   Insulated1  
Type  U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC U-factor  C-factor  HC 
LW CMU  0.68  1.61  10.9  0.54  1.00  7.9 0.44  0.70  7.9 
MW CMU  0.72  1.86  11.4  0.58  1.14  8.4 0.48  0.81  8.4 
NW CMU  0.76  2.15  11.9  0.61  1.27  8.9 0.52  0.93  8.9 
Clay Unit  0.65  1.45  11.1  0.52  0.93  8.6 0.45  0.73  8.6 
Notes:  
1. Partly Grouted with Ungrouted Cells  
 
The walls addressed in this table are rarely used in residential construction, but are common in 
some types of nonresidential construction. The tables include four types of hollow masonry units: lightweight concrete masonry units (CMU), medium weight CMU, normal weight CMU, and hollow clay masonry units. ASTM C -90 defines these masonry products in more detail.  
Masonry used in California must be reinforced to withstand wind loads and earthquakes. This is achieved by installing reinforcing steel and grouting the cells in both a vertical and horizontal direction. Since grouting the cells affects thermal performance , data is provided for three cases: 
where every cell is grouted, where the cells are partially grouted and the remaining cells are left empty, and where the cells are partially grouted and the remaining cells are filled with perlite or some other insulatin g material.   Appendix JA4- 30 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.3.5 –  Masonry Wall 
For each of these conditions the U -factor, C -factor and heat capacity (HC) is published. There are 
other properties of mass materials that may be needed in compliance calculations, but these 
values can be determined from the published data using the procedures in Modeling 
Constructions in the Nonresidential compliance software and in Section 4.6 of this document.  
Assumptions : Data is taken from Energy Calculations and Data, CMACN, 1986, Berkeley Solar 
Group; Concrete Masonry Association of California and Nevada. The density of the CMU material 
(not counting the grouted or hollow cells) is 105 lb/ft³ for lightweight, 115 lb/ft³ for medium weight and 125 lb/ft³ for normal wei ght. The density of the clay unit material is 130 lb/ft³. For all 
four types of masonry units, data is provided for thicknesses of 6 in., 8 in., 10 in., and 12 in. For the partially grouted cases, vertical cells are assumed to be grouted at 32 inch on center. 
Reinforcing in the horizontal direction is at 48 in. on center. Wall thicknesses given in the table are nominal; actual thicknesses are 3/8 in. less. Insulating material inside unit masonry ho llow is 
assumed to be perlite.  
  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 31 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.6  – Properties of Solid Unit Masonry and Solid Concrete Walls – LW CMU  
Wall Thickness, inches  
Property  3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
U-Factor  0.79  0.71  0.65  0.59  0.54  0.51  0.47  0.44  0.42  0.39  
C-Factor  2.38  1.79  1.43  1.18  1.01  0.88  0.79  0.71  0.65  0.59  
HC 5.3 7.00  8.80  10.50  12.30  14.00  15.80  17.50  19.30  21.00  
 
Table 4.3.6 –  Continued Properties of Solid Unit Masonry and Solid Concrete Walls – MW CMU  
Wall Thickness, inches  
Property  3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
U-Factor  0.84  0.77  0.70  0.65  0.61  0.57  0.53  0.50  0.48  0.45  
C-Factor  2.94  2.22  1.75  1.47  1.25  1.10  0.98  0.88  0.80  0.74  
HC 5.80  7.70  9.60  11.5  13.40  15.30  17.30  19.20  21.10  23.00  
 
Table 4.3.6 –  Continued Properties of Solid Unit Masonry and Solid Concrete Walls – NW CMU  
Wall Thickness, inches  
Property  3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
U-Factor  0.88  0.82  0.76  0.71  0.67  0.63  0.60  0.56  0.53  0.51  
C-Factor  3.57  2.70  2.17  1.79  1.54  1.35  1.20  1.03  0.98  0.90  
HC 6.30  8.30  10.40  12.50  14.6  16.70  18.80  20.80  22.90  25.00  
Table 4.3.6 –  Continued Properties of Solid Unit Masonry and Solid Concrete Walls – Clay Brick  
Wall Thickness, inches  
Property  3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
U-Factor  0.80  0.72  0.66  NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 
C-Factor  2.50  1.86  1.50  NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 
HC 6.30  8.40  10.43  NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 
 
Table 4.3.6 –  Continued Properties of Solid Unit Masonry and Solid Concrete Walls – Concrete  
Wall Thickness, inches  
Property  3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 
U-Factor  0.96  0.91  0.86  0.82  0.78  0.74  0.71  0.68  0.65  0.63  
C-Factor  5.22  4.02  3.20  2.71  2.31  1.99  1.79  1.61  1.45  1.36  
HC 7.20  9.60  12.00  14.40  16.80  19.20  21.60  24.00  26.40  28.80  
 
This table provides thermal performance information for solid masonry units and solid concrete 
walls.  
The walls addressed in this table are rarely used in residential construction, but are common in some types of nonresidential construction.  
There are other properties of mass materials that may be needed in compliance calculations, but these values can be determined from the published data using the procedures in Modeling Constructions in the Nonresidential compliance software and in Section 4 .6 of this document.  Appendix JA4- 32 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  When insulation is added to the outside of masonry walls and/or when the inside is furred and 
insulated, the performance data in this table may be adjusted using Equation 4 -4 and Equation 4 -
5 in coordination with Table 4.3.14.  
 
  
Figure 4.3.6 –  Solid Unit Masonry (left) and Solid Concrete (right) Walls  
 
Assumptions : Data is taken from ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -2004. The density of the CMU 
material is 105 lb/ft³ for lightweight, 115 lb/ft³ for medium weight and 125 lb/ft³ for normal 
weight. The density of the clay unit material is 130 lb/ft³ and the density of the concrete is 144 lb/ft³. For all five types of masonry walls, the U -factor, C -factor and heat capacity (HC ) is provided 
for thicknesses of 3 inch, 4 inch, and 5 inch ASTM C -90 provides more information on the  
classification of masonry walls.  
 
Table 4.3.7 –  Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 0 Percent Concrete Web and Steel  does 
not Penetrate  Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.122  0.095  0.066  0.051  0.034  
C-factor  0.136  0.104  0.07  0.053  0.035  
HC 16.13  16.13  16.13  16.13  16.13  
 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 15 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.7 –  Continued Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 0 Percent Concrete Web and 
Steel Penetrates Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.164  0.128  0.091  0.07  0.048  
C-factor  0.19  0.144  0.099  0.074  0.05  
HC 16.13  16.13  16.13  16.13  16.13  
 
Table 4.3.7 –  Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 10 Percent Concrete Web and Steel does 
not Penetrate Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.476  0.435  0.345  0.286  0.217  
C-factor  0.8 0.69  0.488  0.377  0.267  
HC 16.53  16.66  16.93  17.2  17.74  
 
Table 4.3.7 –  Continued Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 10 Percent Concrete Web and 
Steel Penetrates Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.5 0.435  0.357  0.303  0.227  
C-factor  0.87  0.69  0.513  0.408  0.282  
HC 16.53  16.66  16.93  17.2  17.74  
 
Table 4.3.7 –  Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 20 Percent Concrete Web and Steel does 
not Penetrate Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.588  0.556  0.476  0.417  0.333  
C-factor  1.176  1.053  0.8 0.645  0.465  
HC 16.93  17.2  17.74  18.28  19.35  
 Appendix JA4- 16 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.7 –  Continued Properties of Concrete Sandwich Panels – 20 Percent Concrete Web and 
Steel Penetrates Insulation  
Insulation Thickness (R -value)  
Performance 
Factor  1.5 (7.0)  2.0 (9.3)  3.0 (14.0)  4.0 (18.6)  6.0 (27.9)  
U-factor  0.588  0.556  0.476  0.417  0.333  
C-factor  1.176  1.053  0.8 0.645  0.465  
HC 16.93  17.2  17.74  18.28  19.35  
 
This table provides U -factors, C -factors, and heat capacity (HC) data for concrete sandwich 
panels.  Concrete sandwich panels, as the name suggests, consist of two layers of concrete that 
sandwich a layer of insulation.  The wall system can be constructed in the field or in a factory. One method of field construction is where the wall panels are formed in a flat position using the 
concrete floor slab of the building as the bottom surface.  After the panel has set, it is hoisted 
with a crane into its final v ertical position.   
Both the percent of concrete web and the percent steel are factors in determining the thermal performance of walls.  The insulation layer in this type of concrete sandwich panel generally does not extend over the entire surface of the wall.  To provide str uctural integrity, a certain portion of 
the wall is solid concrete, which ties together the two concrete layers.  This portion is known as the concrete web.  The thermal performance of concrete sandwich panels depends on the 
percent of the wall that is concrete web.  Data is provided for concrete webs representing 0 
percent, 10 percent and 20 percent of the opaque wall surface. In some cases, the concrete layers are tied together by structural steel that penetrates the insulation layer. Data is provided for the case where this steel is present and for cases where it is not.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 17 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.3.7 –  Concrete Sandwich Panel  
Other properties of mass materials such as density, conductivity, specific heat and wall weight 
may be needed in compliance calculations and these properties may be determined from the published data in Table 4.3.7 using the procedures in Modeling Construc tions in the 
Nonresidential compliance software and in Section 4.6 of this document.  
Values from this table may be combined with values from Table 4.3.14 when a furring layer is 
added to the inside of the wall and/or continuous insulation is added to the outside of the wall. Adjustments for additional layers shall follow the procedure of E quation 4 -4 and Equation 4 -5.  
Assumptions:  U-factors include an inside air film of 0.68 and an exterior air film of 0.17. 
Conductivity of the concrete is assumed to be 0.215 Btu/h- ºF-f, density is 150 lb/ft³, the thickness 
of each side of the sandwich panel is 0.5 ft. The data was calculated by Co nstruction Technologies 
Laboratories, Inc. and published in the Thermal Mass Handbook, Concrete and Masonry Design 
Provisions Using ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 -1989, National Codes and Standards Council of the Concrete 
and Masonry Industries, 1994.  
  
Appendix JA4- 18 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.8 –  U-factors for Spandrel Panels  - Frame Type: Aluminum without Thermal 
Break  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Spandrel Panel  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  0.445  0.285  0.259  0.247  0.236  0.230  0.226  0.224  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.356  0.273  0.254  0.244  0.234  0.229  0.226  0.223  
Triple or low-e glass  0.313  0.263  0.249  0.241  0.233  0.228  0.225  0.223  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Spandrel Panels -  Frame Type: Aluminum with 
Thermal Break  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Spandrel Panel  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  0.429  0.243  0.212  0.197  0.184  0.176  0.172  0.169  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.328  0.228  0.205  0.193  0.182  0.175  0.171  0.168  
Triple or low -e glass  0.277  0.217  0.199  0.189  0.180  0.174  0.170  0.167  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Spandrel Panels -  Frame Type: Structural Glazing  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Spandrel Panel  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  0.428  0.217  0.180  0.161  0.145  0.136  0.130  0.126  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.316  0.199  0.172  0.157  0.143  0.135  0.129  0.126  
Triple or low -e glass  0.257  0.186  0.165  0.152  0.140  0.133  0.128  0.125  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Spandrel Panels - Frame Type: No framing or 
Insulation is Continuous  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Spandrel Panel  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  0.445  0.160  0.108  0.082  0.058  0.045  0.037  0.031  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.356  0.147  0.102  0.078  0.056  0.044  0.036  0.030  
Triple or low -e glass  0.313  0.139  0.098  0.076  0.055  0.043  0.035  0.030  
 
  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 19 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Curtain Walls -  Frame Type: Aluminum without 
Thermal Break  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Curtain Wall  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  1.224  0.929  0.427  0.372  0.347  0.326  0.315  0.308  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.727  0.611  0.400  0.361  0.341  0.323  0.313  0.307  
Triple or low -e glass  0.567  0.494  0.380  0.351  0.335  0.320  0.311  0.306  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Curtain Walls -  Frame Type: Aluminum with 
Thermal Break  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Curtain Wall  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  1.110  0.862  0.339  0.282  0.256  0.234  0.222  0.215  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.617  0.531  0.311  0.270  0.249  0.230  0.220  0.214  
Triple or low-e glass  0.458  0.409  0.290  0.260  0.243  0.227  0.218  0.212  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Curtain Walls -  Frame Type: Structural Glazing  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Curtain Wall  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  1.106  0.859  0.290  0.228  0.199  0.175  0.162  0.154  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.577  0.502  0.260  0.215  0.192  0.171  0.160  0.152  
Triple or low -e glass  0.407  0.368  0.237  0.204  0.185  0.168  0.158  0.151  
 
Table 4.3.8 –  Continued U-factors for Curtain Walls -  Frame Type: No framing or 
Insulation is Continuous  
Rated R -value of Insulation between Framing Members 
Curtain Wall  None  R-4 R-7 R-10 R-15 R-20 R-25 R-30 
Single glass pane, stone, or 
metal panel  1.224  0.929  0.197  0.124  0.090  0.062  0.047  0.038  
Double glass with no low -e 
coatings  0.727  0.611  0.177  0.116  0.086  0.060  0.046  0.038  
Triple or low -e glass  0.567  0.494  0.166  0.111  0.083  0.059  0.045  0.037  
 
This table has U -factors for the spandrel section of glass and other curtain wall systems. Design 
factors that affect performance are the type of framing, the type of spandrel panel and the R -
value of insulation.  
Four framing conditions are considered in the table. The first is the common case where standard 
aluminum mullions are used. Standard mullions provide a thermal bridge through the insulation, reducing its effectiveness. The second case is for metal framing  members that have a thermal Appendix JA4- 20 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  break. A thermal break frame uses a urethane or other non -metallic element to separate the 
metal exposed to outside conditions from the metal that is exposed to interior conditions. The 
third case is for structural glazing or systems where there is no expo sed mullion on the interior. 
The fourth case is for the condition where there is no framing or the insulation is continuous and uninterrupted by framing. The columns in the table can be used for any specified level of 
insulation between framing members ins talled in framed curtain walls or spandrel panels.  
 
Figure 4.3.8 –  Spandrel Panel  
There are three cases considered in the table. To determine an appropriate thermal performance 
value the assumption used to differentiate  between spandrel panels and curtain walls is that 
spandrel panels include an air gap and rigid backing, while curtain walls do not. The first is for a 
panel that provides little or no insulating value. This includes single pane glass, stone veneer, 
metal panels, or pre -case concrete less than 2 inches thick. The second case is for insulating glass. 
Sometimes insulating glass is used so that the spandrel panel looks similar to the vision glass. The third case is for triple glass or double glass that has a low -e coating.  
Insulation levels are shown in the columns of the table. When the table is used manually, the R -
value of insulation shall be equal to or greater than the R -value published in the columns. No 
interpolation is permitted when data from the table is selected m anually. California Energy 
Commission approved compliance software programs, including those used for prescriptive compliance , may accurately account for any amount of continuous insulation or for unusual 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 21 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2. If the curtain wall has an insulated 
metal- framed wall on the inside, then values from this table may be combined with values from 
Table 4.3.4 or Table 4.3.14 using the procedures of Equation 4 -2 or Equation 4 -3.  
Assumptions:   The U -factors in Table 4.3.8 were derived from a regression analysis of the values 
for “Glass Only Center of Glass” and “Curtain Wall” in the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of 
Fundamentals, Chapter 15, Table 4 , with adaptions to update the values .  The U -factors in Table 
4.3.8 for curtain walls include an exterior air film with an R -value of 0.17 and an interior air film R -
value of 0.68, which are accounted for in the values from the 2009  ASHRAE Handbook of 
Fundamentals.  For spandrel panels t he construction assembly includes an air gap with an R -value 
of 1.39 (3/4 inch gap, 50 ºF mean temperature and 30 ºF temperature difference), and includes 5/8 inch gypsum board with an R -value of 0.56 that provides the interior finish.  The gypsum 
board is assumed to span between the windowsill  and a channel at the floor.  
 Table 4.3.9 – U- factors for Metal Building Walls - Single Layer of Batt Insulation  
Continuous Rigid Insulation  
Rated R -Value of 
Insulation  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
None  1.18  0.351  0.206  0.146  0.127  0.113  0.092  0.067  
R-6 0.184  0.135  0.106  0.087  0.080  0.074  0.065  0.051  
R-10 0.134  0.106  0.087  0.074  0.069  0.065  0.057  0.047  
R-11 0.123  0.099  0.082  0.071  0.066  0.062  0.055  0.045  
R-13 0.113  0.092  0.078  0.067  0.063  0.059  0.053  0.044  
 
Table 4.3.9 – Continued U-factors for Metal Building Walls - Double Layer of Batt Insulation  
Continuous Rigid Insulation  
Rated R -Value of 
Insulation  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
R-6 + R -13 0.07  0.061  0.055  0.049  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.035  
R-10 + R -13  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  
R-13 + R -13 0.057  0.051  0.046  0.042  0.041  0.039  0.036  0.032  
R-19 + R -13 0.048  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.032  0.029  
 
Double layer or batt insulation may not be able to have c ontinuous rigid insulation added.  
The U -factors in this table are intended for use with metal building walls. This type of 
construction is typical for manufacturing and warehouse facilities, but is used for other building 
types as well. The typical method of insulating this type of building is to stretch vinyl backed 
fiberglass insulation over the metal girts before the metal siding is attached with metal screws. 
With this method, the insulation is compressed at each girt, reducing its effectiveness. The first part of the table contains values for this insulation technique. The second section of the table has data for systems that have two layers of insulation. In this section layers are listed from inside to outside.  
For the majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Builders or 
designers may increase thermal performance by adding a rigid continuous insulation layer Appendix JA4- 22 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  between the metal siding and the structural supports. When this table is used manually, the R -
value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or greater than the R -value published in the 
continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is permitted when da ta from the table is used 
manually. Energy Commission approved compliance software, however, may determine the U -
factor for any amount of continuous insulation using Equation 4 -1.  
 
 
Figure 4.3.9 –  Metal Building Wall  
Assumptions : Data in Column A of this table is taken from the ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -
2004, Appendix A. The data in columns beyond A are calculated using Equation 4 -1. 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 23 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.10 –  U-factors for Insulated Metal Panel Walls  
Panel Thickness  U-factor (Btu/0F-ft2) 
2” 0.078  
2 ½”  0.063  
3” 0.053  
4” 0.041  
5” 0.033  
6” 0.027  
This table contains thermal performance data (U -factors) for foamed -in-place, insulated metal 
panels consisting of liquid polyurethane or polyisocyanurate injected between metal skins in 
individual molds or on fully automated production lines.  Metal building construction is the most common application for this prod uct where the metal panel is fastened to the frame of the 
structure.  This table can only be used for insulated panels that are factory built.  This table does not apply to panels that utilize polystyrene, or to field applied products such as spray applied insulations.  
 
Figure 4.3.10 – Insulated Metal Panel Walls 
Assumptions . These data are calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, 
light gauge metal exterior of 0.0747 inch thickness, continuous insulation R -5.9 per inch, light 
gauge metal interior of 0.0747 inch thickness, interior air film (heat flow horizontal) of R -0.68.  
The panels are assumed to be continuous with no framing penetrati on. The R -value of the metal 
is negligible.  
Appendix JA4- 24 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.11 –  Thermal Properties of Log Home Walls  
Log Diameter  U-factor  Heat Capacity (HC)  
6” 0.132  5.19  
8” 0.102  6.92  
10” 0.083  8.65  
12” 0.070  10.37  
14” 0.060  12.10  
16” 0.053  13.83  
This table has U -factors and heat capacity data for log homes Data is provided for logs in six 
thicknesses ranging from 6 in. to 16 in. If other thermal properties are needed such as density, 
weight, conductivity, etc., use the procedures in Modeling Constructions in the Nonresidential 
compliance software and contained in Section 4.6 of this document. Energy Commission approved Compliance Software Programs may adjust the data for interior furring using data from Table 4.3.14 and the procedure from Equation 4 -2.  
 
Figure 4.3.11 –  Log Home Walls  
Assumptions: Calculations are based on ASHRAE series method of calculation, 2009 ASHRAE 
Handbook of Fundamentals.  Values assume a log R -value of R -1.25/inch, an average wall 
thickness of 90 percent of the log diameter, an interior air film of R -0.68 and an exterior air film 
of R-0.17.  Values do not account for presence of windows or doors. Construction assumes no 
additional siding or insulation. Heat Capacity is based on a softwood density of 26.6 lb/ft³ and a 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 25 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  specific heat of 0.39 Btu/lb- ºF. An exterior air film of R -0.17 and an interior film of R -0.68 are 
assumed.  
Table 4.3.12 –  Thermal and Mass Properties of Straw Bale Walls  
Factor  Value  
R-value  30 
U-factor  0.033  
Heat Capacity 
Btu/ft2*°F] 6.34  
This table has data that may be used for straw bale construction.  This is an alternative construction technique used in some rural areas. The technique is not commonly used for 
production homes.        
                     
 
 
Figure 4.3.12 –  Straw Bale Wall  
 
Assumptions:  The construction consists of an exterior film of R -0.17, stucco and lath of R -0.18, 
the straw bale, interior plaster of R -0.47, and an interior air film of 0.68. Straw bale must have a 
minimum cross section of 22 inch by 16 inch, and shall have a thermal resistance of R -30, 
whether stacked so the walls are 22 inch wide or 16 inch wide. Due to the higher resistance to 
heat flow across the grain of the straws, a bale laid on edge with a nominal 16 inch horizontal 
Appendix JA4- 26 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  thickness has the same R -value (R -30) as a bale laid flat. Framing is assumed to not penetrate 
more than 25 percent of the way through the straw bale.  
 
Table 4.3.13 –  Thermal Properties of Insulating Concrete Forms – EPS3 – Insulated Concrete Forms 
(inches of Concrete Core Thickness ) 
Insulation 
Thickness Per 
Side (Total R -
Value)  Performance Factor 
by Concrete Core 
Thickness (inches)  Flat1 
(4) Flat1 
(6) Flat1 
(8) Flat1 
(10) Flat1 
(12) Waffle 
Grid2  
(6) Waffle 
Grid2 
(8) Screen 
(6) 
2.0 
(15.4)  U-factor  
HC 0.058  
12.20  0.057  
17.00  0.056  
21.80  0.055  
26.60  0.055  
31.40  0.047  
13.90  0.039  
15.87  0.041  
12.10  
2.25  
(18.9)  U-factor  
HC 0.052  
12.22  0.051  
17.02  0.051  
21.82  0.050  
26.62  0.050  
31.42  0.043  
13.92  0.036  
15.89  0.038  
12.11  
2.5 
(19.25)  U-factor  
HC 0.047  
12.24  0.047  
17.04  0.046  
21.84  0.046  
26.64  0.045  
31.44  0.040  
13.94  0.034  
15.91  0.036  
12.13  
2.625  
(20.2)  U-factor  
HC 0.045  
12.25  0.045  
17.05  0.044  
21.85  0.044  
26.65  0.043  
31.45  0.038  
13.95  0.033  
15.92  0.035  
12.14  
2.75  
(21.2)  U-factor  
HC 0.043  
12.26  0.043  
17.06  0.042  
21.86  0.042  
26.66  0.042  
31.46  0.037  
13.96  0.032  
15.92  0.0323  
12.15  
3.0 
(23.1)  U-factor  
HC 0.040  
12.27  0.040  
17.07  0.039  
21.87  0.039  
26.67  0.039  
31.47  0.0334  
13.98  0.030  
15.94  0.031  
12.17  
3.5 
(27.0)  U-factor  
HC 0.035  
12.31  0.034  
17.11  0.034  
21.91  0.034  
26.71  0.034  
31.51  0.030  
14.01  0.027  
15.98  0.028  
12.21  
4.0 
(30.8)  U-factor  
HC 0.031  
12.35  0.030  
17.15  0.030  
21.95  0.030  
26.75  0.030  
31.55  0.027  
14.05  0.024  
16.02  0.025  
12.24  
 
Table 4.3.13 –  Continued Thermal Properties of Insulating Concrete Forms – XPS3 – Insulated 
Concrete Forms  (inches of Concrete Core Thickness ) 
Insulation 
Thickness Per 
Side (Total R -
Value)  Performance Factor 
by Concrete Core 
Thickness (inches)  Flat1 
(4) Flat1 
(6) Flat1 
(8) Flat1 
(10) Flat1 
(12) Waffle 
Grid2  
(6) Waffle 
Grid2 
(8) Screen 
(6) 
2.0 
(20.0)  U-factor  
HC 0.045  
12.29  0.045  
17.09  0.045  
21.89  0.044  
26.69  0.044  
31.49  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
2.5 
(25.0)  U-factor  
HC 0.037  
12.35  0.037  
17.15  0.036  
21.95  0.036  
26.75  0.036  
31.55  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
2.625  
(26.3)  U-factor  
HC 0.035  
12.36  0.035  
17.16  0.035  
21.96  0.035  
26.76  0.034  
31.56  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
2.75  
(27.5)  U-factor  
HC 0.034  
12.38  0.034  
17.18  0.033  
21.98  0.033  
26.78  0.033  
31.58  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 27 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Insulation 
Thickness Per 
Side (Total R -
Value)  Performance Factor 
by Concrete Core 
Thickness (inches)  Flat1 
(4) Flat1 
(6) Flat1 
(8) Flat1 
(10) Flat1 
(12) Waffle 
Grid2  
(6) Waffle 
Grid2 
(8) Screen 
(6) 
3.0 
(30.0)  U-factor  
HC 0.031  
12.41  0.031  
17.21  0.031  
22.01  0.031  
26.81  0.030  
31.61  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
3.5 
(35.0)  U-factor  
HC 0.027  
12.46  0.027  
17.26  0.027  
22.06  0.027  
26.86  0.026  
31.66  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
4.0 
(40) U-factor  
HC 0.024  
12.52  0.024  
17.32  0.024  
22.12  0.023  
26.92  0.023  
31.72  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
 
Table 4.3.13 –  Continued Thermal Properties of Insulating Concrete Forms – Polyurethane  –  
Insulated Concrete Forms (inches of Concrete Core Thickness ) 
Insulation 
Thickness Per 
Side (Total R -
Value)  Performance Factor 
by Concrete Core 
Thickness (inches)  Flat1 
(4) Flat1 
(6) Flat1 
(8) Flat1 
(10) Flat1 
(12) Waffle 
Grid2  
(6) Waffle 
Grid2 
(8) Screen 
(6) 
1.5 
(9.09)  U-factor  
HC 0.050  
12.23  0.049  
17.03  0.049  
21.83  0.048  
26.63  0.048  
31.43  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
2.0 
(10.9)  U-factor  
HC 0.042  
12.41  0.042  
17.21  0.041  
22.01  0.041  
26.81  0.041  
31.61  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
4.5 
(20.95)  U-factor  
HC 0.023  
12.58  0.023  
17.38  0.023  
22.18  0.022  
26.98  0.022  
31.78  NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 
 
Table 4.3.13 –  Continued Thermal Properties of Insulating Concrete Forms – Cement/EPS 
Compound –  Insulated Concrete Forms (inches of Concrete Core Thickness ) 
Insulation 
Thickness Per 
Side (Total R -
Value)  Performance Factor 
by Concrete Core 
Thickness (inches)  Flat1 
(4) Flat1 
(6) Flat1 
(8) Flat1 
(10) Flat1 
(12) Waffle 
Grid2  
(6) Waffle 
Grid2 
(8) Screen 
(6) 
2.0 
(12.0)  U-factor  
HC NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 0.059  
16.49  0.048  
18.46  0.052  
14.69  
3.0 
(18.0)  U-factor  
HC NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 0.043  
17.50  0.037  
19.47  0.040  
15.69  
4.0 
(24.0)  U-factor  
HC NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA NA 
NA 0.034  
18.51  0.031  
20.47  0.032  
16.70  
Notes:  
1. Flat Insulated Concrete Forms utilizes rigid insulation as the form and do not use cement compound as the 
form.  
2. Waffle and screen type Insulated Concrete Forms typically utilize either a cement/EPS compound or EPS 
insulation as the form.   ICF's using the cement/EPS compound do not utilize rigid insulation added to the 
interior and exterior surfaces.  Appendix JA4- 28 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  3. 1.5 lb density EPS insulation at R- 3.85 per inch except for the 2.25” insulation thickness which uses 2.0 lb 
density EPS at R- 4.2 per inch.  
 
This table provides thermal performance information for insulating concrete forms.  
Insulating Concrete Forms (ICFs) are concrete forming systems that use stay- in-place panels made 
from a variety of insulating materials for constructing cast -in-place solid concrete walls.  There 
are three basic types of ICFs: flat wall, waffle -grid and sc reen -grid. A flat wall system is a wall with 
uniform thickness just like a conventional poured wall made with plywood or metal forms. 
Waffle -grid wall systems have a solid concrete wall of varying thickness and look like a breakfast 
waffle.  Screen grid wa ll systems also known as , “post and beam”, have a perforated concrete 
wall of varying thickness similar to the waffle type wall systems but with a solid form material 
between the horizontal and vertical members instead of concrete. The insulating panels for all three ICF types are most commonly made from expanded polystyrene (EPS) and extruded polystyrene (XPS) rigid insulation boards.  Plastic or metal crossties separate the insulating panels 
and provide structural integrity during the pour.  The ICF syst em is modular and stackable with 
interlocking edges.  The materials can be delivered as pre -assembled blocks or as planks that 
require the flanges and web to be assembled during construction.  
 
Figure 4.3.13 –  Insulating Concrete Forms  
 
Assumptions:  Values in this table were calculated using  the one dimensional calculation method 
documented in 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 7/8 inch layer of stucco of R -0.18, building paper of R -0.06, an exterior insulating 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 29 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  form of varying resistance, a concrete core of varying thickness at R -0.11 per inch, an interior 
insulating form of varying resistance, and an interior air film of R -0.68. The R -value of the 
cement/EPC compound is assumed to be R -3.0 per inch, the XPS insulation assumed to be R -5.0 
per inch, and the polyurethane assumed to be aged and dried in 1.5 inch, 2.0 inch, and 4.5 inch 
thickness.  
 Appendix JA4- 14 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.3.14 –  Effective R -values for Interior or Exterior Insulation Layers  
R-value of Insulation Installed in Furring Space  
Thickness  Frame 
Type  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 
Any None  0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5 10.5  11.5  12.5  13.5  14.5  15.5  16.5  17.5  18.5  19.5  20.5  21.5  
0.5" Wood  1.3 1.3 1.9 2.4 2.7 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
0.5” Metal  0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.2 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
.75" Wood  1.4 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.8 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
.75” Metal  1.0 1.0 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.6 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
1.0" Wood  1.3 1.5 2.2 2.9 3.4 3.9 4.3 4.6 4.9 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
1.0” Metal  1.0 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9 1.9 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
1.5" Wood  1.3 1.5 2.4 3.1 3.8 4.4 4.9 5.4 5.8 6.2 6.5 6.8 7.1 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
1.5” Metal  1.1 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.7 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
2" Wood  1.4 1.5 2.5 3.3 4.0 4.7 5.3 5.9 6.4 6.9 7.3 7.7 8.1 8.4 8.7 9.0 9.3 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
2” Metal  1.1 1.2 1.7 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  N.A.  
2.5" Wood  1.4 1.5 2.5 3.4 4.2 4.9 5.6 6.3 6.8 7.4 7.9 8.4 8.8 9.2 9.6 10.0  10.3  10.6  10.9  11.2  11.5  N.A.  
2.5” Metal  1.2 1.3 1.8 2.3 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.3 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.9 4.0 4.0 4.1 4.1 4.1 N.A.  
3" Wood  1.4 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.3 5.1 5.8 6.5 7.2 7.8 8.3 8.9 9.4 9.9 10.3  10.7  11.1  11.5  11.9  12.2  12.5  12.9  
3” Metal  1.2 1.3 1.9 2.4 2.8 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.7 4.7 4.8 
3.5" Wood  1.4 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.4 5.2 6.0 6.7 7.4 8.1 8.7 9.3 9.8 10.4  10.9  11.3  11.8  12.2  12.6  13.0  13.4  13.8  
3.5” Metal  1.2 1.3 2.0 2.5 2.9 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3 
4" Wood  1.4 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.5 5.3 6.1 6.9 7.6 8.3 9.0 9.6 10.2  10.8  11.3  11.9  12.4  12.8  13.3  13.7  14.2  14.6  
4” Metal  1.2 1.3 2.0 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.2 4.5 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.8 
4.5" Wood  1.4 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.5 5.4 6.2 7.1 7.8 8.5 9.2 9.9 10.5  11.2  11.7  12.3  12.8  13.3  13.8  14.3  14.8  15.2  
4.5” Metal  1.2 1.3 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.2 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.4 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 
5" Wood  1.4 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.6 5.5 6.3 7.2 8 8.7 9.4 10.1  10.8  11.5  12.1  12.7  13.2  13.8  14.3  14.8  15.3  15.8  
5” Metal  1.2 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.1 4.4 4.7 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 5.9 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 
5.5" Wood  1.4 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.6 5.5 6.4 7.3 8.1 8.9 9.6 10.3  11.0  11.7  12.4  13.0  13.6  14.2  14.7  15.3  15.8  16.3  
5.5” Metal  1.3 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.2 4.6 4.9 5.2 5.4 5.7 5.9 6.1 6.3 6.4 6.6 6.7 6.8 7.0 7.1 7.2 
EIFS NA 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0  11.0  12.0  13.0  14.0  15.0  16.0  17.0  18.0  19.0  20.0  21.0  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 1 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Metal Clips  Wood Framing  
 
  
Figure 4.3.14 –  Interior or Exterior Insulation Layers  
 
This table is used in combination with other tables and Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2 to account 
for interior furring and continuous insulation added to other constructions.   
Assumptions: Data is taken from ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -2004 All furring thickness values 
given are actual dimensions. All values include 0.5 inch gypsum board on the inner surface, 
interior surface resistances not included. The metal furring is 24 inch on center, 2 4 gauge , Z-type 
Metal Furring. The wood furring is 24 inch on center, Douglas -Fir Larch Wood Furring, density = 
34.9 lb/ft³. Insulation assumed to fill the furring space.  
Appendix JA4- 44 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U- factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  4.4  Floors and Slabs  
Table 4.4.1 – Standard U -factors for Wood -Framed Floors with a Crawl Space  – 16 in. OC Frame 
Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-Value 
Cavity Insul.  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any 2 x 6  None  0.097  0.081  0.070  0.061  0.058  0.055  0.049  0.041  
2 x 6  R-11  0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.037  0.035  0.033  0.029  
2 x 6  R-13  0.046  0.042  0.039  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.031  0.028  
2 x 6  R-19 0.037  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.029  0.027  0.024  
2 x 8  R-19  0.037  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.029  0.027  0.024  
2 x 8  R-22  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.027  0.025  0.023  
2 x 10  R-25  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.025  0.024  0.022  
2 x 10  R-30  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.020  
2 x 12  R-38 0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.019  0.018  
 
Table 4.4.1 – Continued Standard U-factors for Wood -Framed Floors with a Crawl Space  – 16 in. 
OC Frame Spacing  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size R-Value 
Cavity Insul.  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any 2 x 6  None  0.098  0.082  0.070  0.062  0.058  0.055  0.049  0.041  
2 x 6  R-11  0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.029  
2 x 6  R-13  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.034  0.033  0.031  0.028  
2 x 6  R-19 0.037  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.024  
2 x 8  R-19  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.030  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.024  
2 x 8  R-22  0.033  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.023  
2 x 10  R-25  0.030  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.021  
2 x 10  R-30  0.027  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  
2 x 12  R-38 0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.020  0.019  0.017  
Notes: 
1. In order to use the U -factors listed in this section, exterior raised -floor insulation shall be installed between 
floor joists with a means of support that prevents the insulation from falling, sagging or deteriorating. Two 
approaches that accomplish this are: 
2. Nailing insulation hangers 18 inches apart prior to rolling out the insulation.  Hangers are heavy wires up to 48 inches long with pointed ends, which provide positive wood penetration.  
3. Attaching wire mesh to form a basket between joists to support the insulation.  Mesh is nailed or stapled to the underside of the joists. 
This table contains U -factors for wood framed floors built over a ventilated crawlspace. This 
construction is common for low- rise residential buildings and for Type IV nonresidential buildings.  
If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. In this case, the 
insulation is installed only between the framing members. Continuous insulation is not common 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 45 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  for wood floors over a crawlspace, but if credit is taken, the insulation may be installed either 
above or below the framing members. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation.  
 
Figure 4.4.1 –  Wood Framed Floor with a Crawl Space  
 
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. Continuous insulation 
of at least R -2 must exist in order to use columns B and beyond. No i nterpolation is permitted 
when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance software, 
however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation or for unusual 
construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   
If the crawlspace is not ventilated and is modeled as a controlled ventilation crawlspace (CVC), then values from this table shall not be used. Values from Table 4. 21 shall be used instead and 
the crawlspace shall be modeled as a separate and unconditioned zone.  
Assumptions : Calculations use the ASHRAE parallel heat flow method documented in the 2005 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 
vented crawlspace for an effective R -6, a continuous insulation layer (if any), the insulation / 
framing layer, 5/8 inch wood based sheathing (Custom), carpet and pad of R -2.08 (CP01), and an 
interior air film (heat flow down) of R -0.92. The framing factor is assumed to be 10 percent for 16 
inch stud spacing and 7 percent for 2 4 inch spacing.   
Appendix JA4- 46 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.2 –  Standard U -factors for Wood Framed Floors without a Crawl Space  – 16 in OC 
Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing Size  R-Value of 
Cavity Insul.  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.238  0.161  0.122  0.098  0.089  0.082  0.070  0.055  
2 x 6 (5.50 in)  R-11  0.071  0.062  0.055  0.050  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.036  
2 x 6 (5.50 in)  R-13 0.064  0.057  0.051  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.039  0.034  
2 x 6 (5.50 in)  R-19 0.049  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.032  0.028  
2 x 8 (7.25 in)  R-19  0.048  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.029  
2 x 8 (7.25 in)  R-22  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.035  0.033  0.032  0.030  0.027  
2 x 10 (9.25 in)  R-25  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.031  0.030  0.030  0.028  0.025  
2 x 10 (9.25 in)  R-30 0.034  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.023  
2 x 12 (11.25 
in) R-38 0.029  0.027  0.026  0.024  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.020  
 
Table 4.4.2 –  Continued Standard U -factors for Wood Framed Floors without a Crawl Space  – 24 
in OC Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing Size  R-Value of 
Cavity Insul.  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.243  0.163  0.123  0.099  0.090  0.083  0.071  0.055  
2 x 6  (5.50 in)  R-11  0.070  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.035  
2 x 6 (5.50 in)  R-13 0.062  0.055  0.050  0.045  0.043  0.042  0.038  0.033  
2 x 6 (5.50 in)  R-19 0.047  0.043  0.039  0.037  0.035  0.034  0.032  0.028  
2 x 8  (7.25 in)  R-19  0.047  0.043  0.039  0.037  0.035  0.034  0.032  0.028  
2 x 8 (7.25 in)  R-22  0.042  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.033  0.032  0.030  0.026  
2 x 10 (9.25 in)  R-25  0.037  0.035  0.033  0.031  0.030  0.029  0.027  0.025  
2 x 10 (9.25 in)  R-30 0.033  0.031  0.029  0.027  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.022  
2 x 12 (11.25 
in) R-38 
0.027  0.026  0.025  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  
This table contains U -factors for wood framed floors that are exposed to ambient (outdoor) 
conditions. This construction is common for low -rise residential buildings and for Type 4 
nonresidential buildings.  
If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. In this case, the 
insulation is installed only between the framing members. If credit is taken for continuous insulation, the insulation may be installed either above or below the framing members.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 47 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.4.2 –  Wood Framed Floor without a Crawl Space  
 
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation or for 
unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   
Assumptions : Calculations use the ASHRAE parallel heat flow method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 
continuous insulation layer (if any), the cavity insulation / framing layer, 5/8 inch wood based 
sheathing (Custom), carpet and pad of R -2.08 (CP01), and an interior air film (heat flow down) of 
R-0.92.  
 
Appendix JA4- 48 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.3 –  Standard U -factors for Wood Foam Panel (SIP) Floors – with Crawlspace Insulation 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation3 
R-value1 
Wood Framing  
Spline Connection 
Type (Splines)  Typical 
Panel  Thickness  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 
R-22  Single 2x   6.5 in  0.033  0.030  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.026  0.024  
R-22 Double 2x  6.5 in  0.034  0.031  0.029  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  
R-22 I-Joist  6.5 in  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  
R-28 Single 2x   8.25 in  0.027  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  0.021  
R-28  Double 2x  8.25 in   0.028  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  
R-28  I-Joist  8.25 in   0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.022  0.021  
R-332 Single 2x   6.5 in  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  0.019  
R-332 Double 2x  6.5 in  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  
R-332 I-Joist  6.5 in  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.019  
R-36 Single 2x   10.25 in  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.018  
R-36 Double 2x  10.25 in  0.024  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.020  0.020  0.019  
R-36 I-Joist  10.25 in  0.022  0.021  0.020  0.019  0.019  0.019  0.018  
 
Table 4.4.3 –  Continued Standard U -factors for Wood Foam Panel (SIP) Floors – without 
Crawlspace Insulation  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation3 
R-value1 
Wood Framing  
Spline Connection 
Type (Splines)  Typical 
Panel  Thickness  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 
R-22  Single 2x   6.5 in  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.031  0.030  0.029  
R-22 Double 2x  6.5 in  0.043  0.039  0.036  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.029  
R-22 I-Joist  6.5 in  0.040  0.037  0.034  0.032  0.031  0.030  0.028  
R-28 Single 2x   8.25 in  0.033  0.030  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.026  0.024  
R-28  Double 2x  8.25 in   0.034  0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  
R-28  I-Joist  8.25 in   0.032  0.030  0.028  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  
R-332 Single 2x   6.5 in  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.024  0.024  0.023  0.022  
R-332 Double 2x  6.5 in  0.032  0.029  0.027  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 49 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.3 –  Continued Standard U -factors for Wood Foam Panel (SIP) Floors – with no 
Crawlspace  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation3 
R-value1 
Wood Framing  
Spline Connection 
Type (Splines)  Typical 
Panel  Thickness  None  R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 
R-332 I-Joist  6.5 in  0.028  0.027  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.023  0.022  
R-36 Single 2x   10.25 in  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.022  0.021  
R-36 Double 2x  10.25 in  0.028  0.026  0.025  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  
R-36 I-Joist  10.25 in  0.026  0.024  0.023  0.022  0.021  0.021  0.020  
Notes:  
1. The insulation R -value must be at least R -21.7 in order to use this table.  This table assumes molded 
expanded polystyrene (EPS) unless noted otherwise.  Although other insulation types are used by some SIP 
manufacturers, such as polyurethane and extruded expanded insulation (XPS), EPS is the most common 
insulation used in SIP construction.  
2. R-33.2 is achievable using polyurethane insulation in 6.5" panels.  
3. Continuous insulation shall be at least R -2 and may be installed on either the inside or the exterior of the 
roof/ceiling.  
Structural insulated panels (SIPs) consist of a rigid insulation core, securely bonded between two 
structural facings, to form a structural sandwich panel.  SIPs are considered a non- framed 
assembly usually with little or no structural framing that penetra tes the insulation layer, resulting 
in less thermal bridging across the insulation when compared to a conventional framed assembly.  
If continuous insulation is not used, then choices are made from Column A. When continuous insulation is also used, this is typically installed on the exterior side of the floor, but can also be used on the inside. The continuous insulation is typically a rigid polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam insulation.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. C ommission  approved 
compliance software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous 
insulation or for unusual construction assemblies using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.   
 Appendix JA4- 50 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.4.3 –  Wood Foam Panel (SIP) Floor  
 
Assumptions: These data are calculated using the parallel path method documented in the 2009 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 
vented crawlspace of R -6, 7/16 inch of OSB at R -0.44, framing factor of 2 %, 7/16 inch of OSB, 
carpet and pad of R -2.08 and an  interior air film of R -0.92.  
 
Table 4.4.4 –  Standard U -factors for Metal -Framed Floors with a Crawl Space  – 16in OC Framing 
Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing Size  Cavity 
Insulation R -
Value  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.094  0.079  0.068  0.060  0.057  0.054  0.048  0.041  
2 x 6  R-11  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.047  0.045  0.043  0.039  0.034  
2 x 6  R-13  0.063  0.056  0.050  0.046  0.044  0.042  0.039  0.033  
2 x 6  R-19 0.059  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.042  0.040  0.037  0.032  
2 x 8  R-19  0.058  0.052  0.047  0.043  0.041  0.040  0.037  0.032  
2 x 8  R-22  0.056  0.050  0.046  0.042  0.040  0.039  0.036  0.031  
2 x 10  R-30  0.051  0.046  0.042  0.039  0.038  0.036  0.034  0.030  
2 x 12  R-38 0.048  0.044  0.040  0.037  0.036  0.035  0.032  0.029  
 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 51 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.4 –  Continued Standard U -factors for Metal -Framed Floors with a Crawl Space  – 24in OC 
Framing Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing Size  Cavity 
Insulation R -
Value  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.094  0.079  0.068  0.060  0.057  0.054  0.048  0.041  
2 x 6  R-11  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  
2 x 6  R-13 0.058  0.052  0.047  0.043  0.041  0.040  0.037  0.032  
2 x 6  R-19  0.053  0.048  0.044  0.040  0.039  0.037  0.035  0.030  
2 x 8  R-19  0.051  0.046  0.042  0.039  0.038  0.036  0.034  0.030  
2 x 8  R-22  0.049  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.036  0.035  0.033  0.029  
2 x 10  R-30  0.045  0.041  0.038  0.035  0.034  0.033  0.031  0.028  
2 x 12  R-38 0.041  0.038  0.035  0.033  0.032  0.031  0.029  0.026  
Notes:   
In order to use the U -factors listed in this table, exterior raised -floor insulation shall be installed between floor joists 
with a means of support that prevents the insulation from falling, sagging or deteriorating. Two approaches that 
accomplish this are:  
1. Attaching insulation hangers 18 inches apart prior to rolling out the insulation.  Hangers are heavy wires up to 48 inches long with pointed ends.  
2. Attaching wire mesh to form a basket between joists to support the insulation.  Mesh is nailed or stapled to the underside of the joists.  
This table contains U -factors for metal- framed floors built over a crawlspace. The constructions 
represented are similar to those in Table 4.4.1, except that wood framing is replaced with metal 
framing. Cavity insulation is installed between the framing me mbers. Since the steel is not as 
large a cross section as wood, the insulation needs to be wider than that used with wood to fit in between the steel framing members.  
 
Figure 4.4.4 –  Metal Framed Floors with a Crawl Space  
 
Appendix JA4- 52 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  For the majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Column A applies 
for the common situation where batt insulation is supported between framing members. Builders or designers may increase thermal performance by adding a continu ous insulation layer either 
above or below the framing members.  
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation and for 
unusual construction layers using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.  
Assumptions: Calculations are based on the ASHRAE Zone Method Calculation, 2009 ASHRAE 
Handbook of Fundamentals These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a vented 
crawlspace for an effective R -6, a continuous insulation layer (if any), the insulation / framing 
layer, 5/8 inch wood based sheathing (Custom), carpet and pad of R -2.08 (CP01), and an interior 
air film (heat flow down) of R -0.92. The effect of the crawlspace is approximated by an additional 
R-6 of insulation. The internal default framing percentages are 10 percent for 16 inch on center 
and 7 percent for 24 inch on center. Steel Framing has a 1.5 inch flange and is 0.075 inch thick steel (14 gauge) with no knockouts. U -factors are calculated using EZ frame 2.0.  
Table 4.4.5 –  Standard U -factors for Metal -Framed Floors without a Crawl Space  – 16in. OC 
Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size Cavity 
Insulation R -
Value  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.253  0.168  0.126  0.100  0.091  0.084  0.072  0.056  
2 x 6  R-11  0.108  0.089  0.075  0.066  0.062  0.058  0.052  0.043  
2 x 6  R-13  0.102  0.085  0.072  0.063  0.060  0.056  0.050  0.042  
2 x 6  R-19 0.092  0.078  0.067  0.059  0.056  0.053  0.048  0.040  
2 x 8  R-19  0.088  0.075  0.065  0.058  0.054  0.052  0.047  0.039  
2 x 8  R-22  0.085  0.073  0.063  0.056  0.053  0.051  0.046  0.039  
2 x 10  R-30  0.075  0.065  0.058  0.052  0.049  0.047  0.043  0.037  
2 x 12  R-38 0.068  0.060  0.053  0.048  0.046  0.044  0.040  0.035  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 53 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.5 –  Standard U -factors for Metal -Framed Floors without a Crawl Space  – 16in. OC 
Spacing 
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
Nominal 
Framing 
Size Cavity 
Insulation R -
Value  R-0 R-2 R-4 R-6 R-7 R-8 R-10 R-14 
Any None  0.253  0.168  0.126  0.100  0.091  0.084  0.072  0.056  
2 x 6  R-11  0.095  0.080  0.069  0.061  0.057  0.054  0.049  0.041  
2 x 6  R-13 0.087  0.074  0.065  0.057  0.054  0.051  0.047  0.039  
2 x 6  R-19  0.077  0.067  0.059  0.053  0.050  0.048  0.044  0.037  
2 x 8  R-19  0.074  0.064  0.057  0.051  0.049  0.046  0.043  0.036  
2 x 8  R-22  0.07  0.061  0.055  0.049  0.047  0.045  0.041  0.035  
2 x 10  R-30  0.061  0.054  0.049  0.045  0.043  0.041  0.038  0.033  
2 x 12  R-38 0.054  0.049  0.044  0.041  0.039  0.038  0.035  0.031  
Notes:  
In order to use the U -factors listed in this section, exterior raised -floor insulation shall be installed between floor 
joists with a means of support that prevents the insulation from falling, sagging or deteriorating. Two approaches 
that accomplish this are:  
1. Attaching insulation hangers 18 inches apart prior to rolling out the insulation.  Hangers are heavy wires up to 48 inches long with pointed ends.  
2. Attaching wire mesh to form a basket between joists to support the insulation.  Mesh is nailed or stapled to the underside of the joists.  
This table contains U -factors for metal- framed floors built over outdoor conditions. For the 
majority of cases, values will be selected from column A of this table. Column A applies for the 
common situation where batt insulation is supported between framing members. Builders or designers may increase thermal performance by adding a continuous insulation layer either above or below the framing members.  Appendix JA4- 54 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data   
Figure 4.4.5 –  Metal Framed Floors without a Crawl Space  
 
When this table is used manually, the R -value of continuous insulation shall be equal to or 
greater than the R -value published in the continuous insulation columns. No interpolation is 
permitted when data from the table is used manually. Commission approved compliance 
software, however, may determine the U -factor for any amount of continuous insulation and for 
unusual construction layers using Equation 4 -1 and Equation 4 -2.  
Assumptions: Calculations are based on the ASHRAE Zone Method Calculation, 2009 ASHRAE 
Handbook of Fundamentals Handbook. These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a 
continuous insulation layer (if any), the insulation / framing layer, 5/8 inch wood based sheathing 
(Custom), carpet and pad of R -2.08 (CP01), and an interior air film (heat flow down) of R -0.92. 
The internal default framing percentages are 10 percent for 16 inch on center and 7 percent for 
24 inch on center. Steel Framing has a 1.5 inch flange and is 0.075 inch thick steel with no 
knockouts. U -factors calculated using EZ frame 2.0.  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 55 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.6 –  Standard U -factors for Concrete Raised Floors  
Rated R -value of Continuous Insulation 
R-value of 
Insulation  Continuous Insulation 
Underneath  Continuous Insulation 
Above Deck1 with no 
Sleepers  Continuous Insulation 
Above Deck1 with Sleepers  
R-0 0.269  0.234  0.229  
R-2 0.183  0.159  0.157  
R-4 0.138  0.121  0.120  
R-6 0.111  0.097  0.097  
R-8 0.092  0.081  0.081  
R-10 0.079  0.070  0.070  
R-12 0.069  0.061  0.061  
R-15 0.058  0.052  0.052  
R-20 0.045  0.041  0.041  
R-25 0.037  0.034  0.034  
R-30 0.031  0.029  0.029  
Notes:   
1. Above deck case includes a 5/8 inch layer of plywood between the insulation and the carpet and pad.  
This table may be used only if the HC of the proposed design floor is greater than or equal to 7.0 Btu/ft² -ºF. 
Continuous Insulation Underneath  
Continuous Insulation Above Deck  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 55 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data    
Figure 4.4.6 –  Concrete Raised Floors  
Assumptions : These calculations assume an exterior air film of R -0.17, a continuous insulation layer 
(if any), 4 inches of the lightweight concrete (CC14) over metal deck R -0, a continuous insulation 
layer (if any), 1.5 x 3.5 inch sleeper of R -0.99 per inch, R -0.80 a ir space between sleepers (2005 
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 25, Table 3), 5/8 inches of wood based sheathing 
(Custom) (if continuous insulation above deck), carpet and pad of R -2.08 (CP01), and an interior air 
film (heat flow down) of R -0.92. Sleepers have 10 percent framing factor. Below slab insulation 
assumes 6 inch wide beams 96 inches on center extending 8 inches below the slab.  
Appendix JA4- 56 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.7 –  F-Factors for Unheated Slab- on-Grade Floors  
Insulation Description 
Rated  
R-Value of 
Insulation  None  12 in. 
horiz.  24 in. 
horiz.  36 in. 
horiz.  48 in. 
horiz.  12 in. 
vert.  24 in. 
vert.  36 in. 
vert.  48 in. 
vert.  Fully 
insul. 
slab 
R-0 0.73   NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 
R-5  NA 0.72  0.7 0.68  0.67  0.61  0.58  0.56  0.54  0.46  
R-7.5  NA 0.71  0.7 0.67  0.65  0.6 0.56  0.53  0.51  0.41  
R-10  NA 0.71  0.7 0.66  0.64  0.58  0.54  0.51  0.48  0.36  
R-15  NA 0.71  0.69  0.66  0.63  0.57  0.52  0.48  0.45  0.3 
R-20  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.567  0.51  0.472  0.434  0.261  
R-25  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.565  0.505  0.464  0.424  0.233  
R-30  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.564  0.502  0.46  0.419  0.213  
R-35  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.198  
R-40  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.186  
R-45  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.176  
R-50  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.168  
R-55  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.161  
Note: These values are used for slab edge conditions with and without carpet.  
 
Figure 4.4.7 –  Unheated Slab- on-Grade Floor  
Horizontal insulation is continuous insulation that is applied directly to the underside of the slab and 
extends inward horizontally from the perimeter for the distance specified or continuous insulation 
that is applied downward from the top of the slab and then extends horizo ntally to the interior or 
the exterior from the perimeter for the distance specified. Vertical insulation is continuous insulation 
that is applied directly to the slab exterior, extending downward from the top of the slab for the dista nce specified. Fully insulated slab is continuous insulation that extends downward from the top 
to the slab and along the entire perimeter and completely covers the entire area under the slab.  
Assumptions : Data of this table is taken from the ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -2004, Appendix A.  
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 57 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.4.8 –  F-Factors for Heated Slab- on-Grade Floors  
Insulation Description 
Rated R -
Value of 
Insulation  None  12 in. 
horiz.  24 in. 
horiz.  36 in. 
horiz.  48 in. 
horiz.  12 in. 
vert.  24 in. 
vert.  36 in. 
vert.  48 in. 
vert.  Fully 
insul. 
slab 
R-0 1.35   NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA NA  
R-5  NA 1.31  1.28  1.24  1.2 1.06  0.99  0.95  0.91  0.74  
R-7.5  NA 1.31  1.27  1.21  1.17  1.02  0.95  0.89  0.85  0.64  
R-10  NA 1.3 1.26  1.2 1.13  1 0.9 0.84  0.78  0.55  
R-15  NA 1.3 1.25  1.18  1.11  0.98  0.86  0.79  0.72  0.44  
R-20  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.968  0.843  0.762  0.688  0.373  
R-25  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.964  0.832  0.747  0.671  0.326  
R-30  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.961  0.827  0.74  0.659  0.296  
R-35  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.273  
R-40  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.255  
R-45  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.239  
R-50  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.227  
R-55  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA  NA 0.217  
Note: These values are used for slab edge conditions with and without carpet.  
 
Figure 4.4.8 –  Heated Slab- on-Grade Floor  
Horizontal insulation is continuous insulation that is applied directly to the underside of the slab and 
extends inward horizontally from the perimeter for the distance specified or continuous insulation 
that is applied downward from the top of the slab and then extending hori zontally to the interior or 
the exterior from the perimeter for the distance specified. Vertical insulation is continuous insulation 
that is applied directly to the slab exterior, extending downward from the top of the slab for the 
Appendix JA4- 58 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  distance specified. Fully insulated slab is continuous insulation that extends downward from the top 
to the slab and along the entire perimeter and completely covers the entire area under the slab.  
Assumptions : Data of this table is taken from the ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 -2004, Appendix A.  
  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 59 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  JA4.5  Miscellaneous Construction 
Table 4.5.1 – Doors  
Description  U-factor (Btu/ºF -
ft²) 
Uninsulated single -layer metal swinging doors or non- swinging doors , 
including single -layer uninsulated access hatches and uninsulated 
smoke vents:   1.45  
Uninsulated double -layer metal swinging doors or non- swinging doors, 
including double -layer uninsulated access hatches and uninsulated 
smoke vents:   0.70  
Insulated metal swinging doors , including fire -rated doors , insulated 
access hatches, and insulated smoke vents:   0.50  
Wood doors , minimum nominal thickness of 1 -3/4 in. (44 mm), 
including panel doors  with minimum panel thickness of 1 -1/8 in. (28 
mm), and solid core flush doors , and hollow core flush doors :   0.50  
Any other wood door:  0.60  
Uninsulated single layer metal roll up doors including fire rated door 1.45  
Insulated single layer metal sectional doors,  minimum insulation 
nominal thickness of 1 -3/8 inch; expanded polystyrene (R- 4 per inch).  0.179  
Source:  ASHRAE 90.1- 2007, Section A7.  
 Appendix JA4- 60 2025 Joint Appendices  
Appendix JA 4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.5.2 – Physical Properties of Materials  
Code  Description  R-value  Thickness  Conductivity  Density  Specific Heat  
AR02  Asphalt Shingle & Siding  0.44  NA NA 70.0  0.35  
BP01  Building Paper, Permeable Felt  0.06  NA NA NA NA 
PW03  Plywood 1/2 in.  0.63  0.0417  0.0667  34.0  0.29  
GP01  Gypsum Board 1/2 in.  0.45  0.0417  0.0926  50.0  0.26  
BR01  Built -up Roofing 3/8 in.  0.33  0.0313  0.0939  70.0  0.35  
PW05  Plywood 3/4 in.  0.94  0.0625  0.0667  34.0  0.29  
PW04  Plywood 5/8 in.  0.78  0.0521  0.0667  34.0  0.29  
CP01  Carpet with Fibrous Pad  2.08  NA NA NA 0.34  
PB01  Particle Board Low Density 3/4 in.  1.39  0.0625  0.0450  75.0  0.31  
SC01  Stucco 1 in.  0.20  0.0833  0.4167  116.0  0.20  
WD05  Wood, Soft 4 in.  5.00  0.3333  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
WD11  Wood, Hard 3/4 in.  0.68  0.0625  0.0916  45.0  0.30  
-CC03  Heavy Wt. Dried Aggregate 4 in.  0.44  0.3333  0.7576  140.0  0.20  
CC14  Heavy Wt. Undried Aggregate 4 in.  0.32  0.3333  1.0417  140.0  0.20  
AC02  1/2 in. Acoustic Tile  1.26  0.0417  0.0330  18.0  0.32  
AL33  Air Layer 4 in. or more, Horizontal Roof  0.92  1.0000  0.4167  120.0  0.20  
CP01  Carpet with Fibrous Pad  2.08  NA NA NA 0.34  
 
Table 4.5.2  – Physical Properties of Materials (Continued)  
Code  Description  R-value  Thickness  Conductivity  Density  Specific Heat  
Custom  Concrete  0.11  NA NA 144.0  0.20  
Custom  Light Weight CMU  0.35  NA NA 105.0  0.20  
Custom  Medium Weight CMU  0.35  NA NA 115.0  0.20  
Custom  Normal Weight CMU  0.35  NA NA 125.0  0.20  
Custom  Earth (Soil)  3.00  1.5000  0.5000  85.0  0.20  
Custom  Logs 6 in.  7.50  0.5000  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Logs 8 in.  10.00  0.6667  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Logs 10 in.  12.49  0.8333  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Logs 12 in.  14.99  1.0000  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Logs 14 in.  17.49  1.1667  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Logs 16 in.  19.99  1.3333  0.0667  32.0  0.33  
Custom  Earth 12 in.  2.00  1.0000  0.5000  85.0  0.20  
Custom  Vented crawlspace  6.00  NA NA NA NA 
Custom  7/8" layer of stucco of R -0.18  0.18  0.0729  0.4167  116.0  0.20  
Custom  Straw bale  30.00  NA NA NA NA 
Custom  Acoustic tile + Metal  0.50  0.0417  0.0330  18.0  0.32  
Custom  OSB 7/16 in.  0.44  0.4375  0.0667  34.0  0.29  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA4- 61 
Appendix  JA4 – U-factor, C -factor, and Thermal Mass Data  Table 4.5 .3 – Rules for Calculating Mass Thermal Properties From Published Values  
Property  Units  Rule for Calculation  
Heat Capacity 
(HC)  Btu/ºF -ft²  From Table 4.3.5, Table 4.3.6, or Table 4.3.7  
U-factor  Btu/h -ºF-
ft² From Table 4.3.5, Table 4.3.6, or Table 4.14  
C-factor  Btu/h -ºF-
ft² From Table 4.3.5, Table 4.3.6, or Table 4.3.7  
Thickness (T)  Ft From Table 4.3.5, Table 4.3.6, or Table 4.3.7  
Specific Heat 
(SH) Btu/ºF -lb Assume that the specific heat of all concrete and masonry materials 
is 0.20 Btu/ºF -lb and that the specific heat of wood or straw (see 
Table 4.3.11 and Table 4.3.12) is 0.39 Btu/ºF -lb.  
Weight (W)  lb/ft²  Divide the HC by the assumed specific heat. Wall weight is used with 
the low -rise residential standards to define a high mass wall.  
Density (D)  lb/ft³  Multiply the weight (as calculated above) by the thickness (T)  
Conductivity (C)  Btu/h -ºF-
ft Divide the published C -factor by the thickness (T). When only a U -
factor is published, calculate the C -factor by assuming an exterior air 
film of 0.17 and an interior air film of 0.68.  
 2025 Joint Appendices  Appendix JA5-1  
Appendix JA5 – Technical Specifications for Demand Responsive Thermostats  Joint Appendix JA5  
Appendix JA5  – Technical Specifications For Occupant 
Controlled Smart Thermostats 
 
JA5.1  Introduction 
 Joint Appendix 5 (JA5) provides the technical specifications for an Occupant Controlled Smart 
Thermostat (OCST). An OCST can be an independent device or part of a control system comprised of multiple devices.  
The requirements in this appendix are intended to be compatible with National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard DC 3 -2013 Residential Controls – Electrical Wall 
Mounted Thermostats and NEMA DC 3 Annex A -2013 Energy -Efficiency Requirement s for 
Programmable Thermostats.  
JA5.1.1  Manufacturer Self -Certification  
An OCST is compliant with Title 24, Part 6, only if it has been certified to the Energy Commission as meeting all of the requirements in this Appendix. Certification to the Energy Commission shall 
be as specified in Section 110.0.  
JA5.2  Required Functional Specification 
JA5.2.1  Setback Capabilities  
An OCST shall meet the requirements of Section 110.2(c). Thermostats for heat pumps shall also 
meet the requirements of Section 110.2(b).  
JA5.2.2  Restart Settings  
In the event of a disruption of power to the device that results in power off or restart, upon 
device restart, the device shall automatically restore the most recently programmed settings, including reconnection to a network, if the device was previously enabled and network connectivity is available.  
JA5.2.3   Automatic Rejoin  
An OCST shall connect , and remain connected in its communication path and control end point. 
The OCST shall incorporate an automatic rejoin function. When physical and/or logical communication is lost, the OCST shall trigger its automatic rejoin function to restore the physical and/or logical communication.  Appendix JA5- 2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 5 – Technical Specifications for Demand Responsive Thermostats  JA5.2.4   Event Responses  
Event response, unless overridden by the occupant or modified by an energy management 
control system or service, may be triggered by price signals or Demand Response Signals. The OCST shall provide one set of event responses for price signals and one set o f event responses for 
Demand Response Signals. The responses may be common for both types of events.  The OCST’s 
default responses shall comply with the following:  
(a) A Demand Response Signal shall trigger the OCST to adjust the thermostat setpoint by either the default number of degrees or the number of degrees established by the occupant.  
(b) When a price signal indicates a price in excess of a price threshold established by the occupant, the OCST shall adjust the thermostat setpoint by either the default number of 
degrees or the number of degrees established by the occupant.  
(c) In response to price signals or Demand Response signals, the OCST shall default to an 
event response that initiates setpoint offsets of +4°F for cooling and - 4°F for heating 
relative to the current setpoint.   
(d) The OCST shall have the capability to allow occupants or their representative to modify 
the default event response with occupant defined event responses for cooling and heating relative to the current setpoint in response to price signals or Demand Respons e 
Signals.  
(e) Override Function: Occupants shall be able to change the event responses and thermostat settings or setpoints at any time, including during price events or Demand Response 
Periods.   
(f) The Demand Response Signal shall start the Demand Response Period either immediately or at a specific start time as specified in the event signal and continue for the Demand Response Period specified in the Demand Response Signal or until the occupant over rides 
the event setpoint.  
(g) The thermostat’s price response shall start either immediately or at a specific start time as specified in the pricing signal and continue for the duration specified in the pricing signal or until the occupant overrides the event setpoint.  
(h) The OCST shall have the capability to allow occupants to define setpoints for cooling and heating in response to price signals or Demand Response signals as an alternative to the default event response.  
(i) At the end of a price event or Demand Response Period, the thermostat setpoint shall be set to the setpoint that is programmed for the point in time that the event ends or to the manually established setpoint that existed just prior to the Demand Response Period.  
 The OCST shall include the capability to allow the occupant to restore the factory installed default settings.  2025 Joint Appendices  Appendix JA5- 3  
Appendix JA5 – Technical Specifications for Demand Responsive Thermostats  JA5. 2.5  User Display and Interface  
The OCST shall have the capability to display information to the user. The following information 
shall be readily available whenever the OCST display is active:  
(a) communications system connection status,  
(b) an indication that a Demand Response Period or pricing event is in progress, 
(c) the currently sensed temperature,  
(d) the current setpoint.  
JA5. 2.6  Required Functional Behavior  
(a) Normal Operation.  Normal operation of an OCST is defined to be the OCST’s prevailing 
mode of operation as determined by the occupant’s prior settings and use of features provided by the OCST manufacturer’s design. Aspects of normal operation of an OCST 
may be modified or interrupted in response to occupant subscribed price signals or when 
Demand Response Periods are in prog ress, but only to the extent specified by occupants 
or their representatives.  
Unless an occupant has elected to connect the OCST to an energy management control system or service that provides for alternate strategies, the OCST shall provide a mode of operation whereby it controls temperature by following the scheduled temperature setpoints.  
Occupants shall always have the ability to change OCST settings or use other features of 
an OCST during an event. Those changes may alter what is considered to be the prevailing mode of operation  when a Demand Response Period is terminated and the OCST returns 
to normal operation.  
(b) Demand Responsive Control.  Upon receiving a price signal or a Demand Response Signal, 
OCSTs shall be capable of automatic event response by adjusting the currently applicable  
temper ature setpoint by the number of degrees indicated in the temperature offset 
(heating or cooling, as appropriate).  
Override:  OCSTs shall allow an occupant or their representative to alter or eliminate the 
default response to price signals or Demand Response Signals, and to override any individual price response or Demand Responsive Control and allow the occupant to choose any temperature setpoint at any time including during a price event or a Demand 
Response Period.   
When the price signal changes to a non- response level or the Demand Response Period is 
concluded, OCSTs shall return to normal operation. The thermostat setpoint shall be set 
to the setpoint that is programmed for the point in time that the event ends or to the manually established setpoint that existed just prior to the Demand Response Period.   
The OCST shall also be equipped with the capability to allow occupants to define setpoints 
for cooling and heating in response to price signals or Demand Response Signals as an Appendix JA5-4 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 5 – Te chnical Specifications for Demand Responsive Thermostats  alternative to the default event response. The default setpoint definitions unless 
redefined by the occupant shall be as follows:  
1. The default price response or Demand Response Period setpoint in the cooling mode for OCSTs shall be 82°F.  The OCST shall allow the occupant to change the default 
event setpoint to any other value.   
2. The default price response or Demand Response Period setpoint in the heating mode 
for OCSTs shall be 60°F.  The OCST shall allow the occupant to change the default event setpoint to any other value.  
3. The OCST shall ignore price response or Demand Response Period setpoints that are lower (in cooling mode) or higher (in heating mode) than the programmed or occupant selected prevailing setpoint temperature upon initiation of the price event 
or Demand Response Period.  
4. By default, thermostats shall not be remotely set above 90°F or below 50°F. 
Occupants shall have the ability to redefine these limits. This measure protects occupant premises from extreme temperatures that might otherwise be imposed by event responses, should the occupant already have a very high or low temperature setpoint in effect.  
The occupant may still override or change the setpoint during all price events and 
Demand Response Periods. Price signal response and Demand Responsive Control only 
modify the operating range of the thermostat. They do not otherwise affect the operation and use of features provided by the manufacturer’s design.  
JA5.3  HVAC System Interface  
HVAC wiring terminal designations shall be clearly labeled. OCSTs shall use labels that comply with Table 5 -1 in NEMA DC 3 -2013.  
 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA6 -1  
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology   
Joint Appendix JA6  
Appendix JA6  – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic 
Technology  
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  ................................ ..... 1 
JA6.1  Fault Indicator Display (FID)  ................................ ................................ .............................  2 
JA6.1.1  Purpose and Scope  ................................ ................................ ................................ ........  2 
JA6.1.2  FID Product Approval  ................................ ................................ ................................ .... 2 
JA6.1.3  FID Installation  ................................ ................................ ................................ ..............  2 
JA6.1.4  FID Product Documentation  ................................ ................................ ..........................  2 
JA6.1.5  Optional Fault Detection Capabilities  ................................ ................................ ............  3 
JA6.1.6  Requirements for a Fault Indicator Display  ................................ ................................ ... 3 
JA6.2  Saturation Pressure Measurement Sensors  ................................ ................................ ..... 8 
JA6.2.1  Purpose and Scope  ................................ ................................ ................................ ........  8 
JA6.2.2  SPMS Device Approval  ................................ ................................ ................................ .. 8 
JA6.2.3  Standard for Saturation Pressure Measurement Sensors  ................................ .............  8 
JA6.3  Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics Certification Submittal Requirements  .......  9 
JA6.3.1 Information that shall be included with the Declaration  ................................ ..............  9 
JA6.3.2  Fault Detection Test Specifications  ................................ ................................ .............  10 
JA6.3.3  Reporting of Test Results  ................................ ................................ ............................  11 
JA6.3.4  Declaration  ................................ ................................ ................................ ..................  14 
Declaration  ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ .... 15 
JA6.3.5  Certification  ................................ ................................ ................................ ................  16 
  Appendix JA6 -2 2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.1  Fault Indicator Display ( FID) 
JA6.1.1   Purpose and Scope  
Joint Appendix JA6.1 defines required elements for fault  indicator display technologies that utilize 
instrumentation and computer software functionality to monitor and determine the operating 
performance of vapor compression air conditioning and heat pump systems, to provide visual 
indication to the system owne r/operator if the system’s refrigerant charge or metering device 
performance does not conform to approved target parameters for minimally efficient operation.  
JA6.1.6  specifies the required instrumentation, instrumentation accuracy, parameters measured, 
required calculations, allowable deviations from target values for system operating parameters, 
and the requirements for system fault indication for a fault  indicator display technology that 
conforms to the methods for verifying refrigerant charge and metering device performance 
described in Reference Residential Appendix RA3.2.2.  
Fault  indicator display technologies other than what is described in Section JA6.1  are possible, 
and when vapor compression air conditioner and heat pump system refrigerant charge, metering 
device and airflow operating performance can be reliably determined by methods and 
instrumentation other than those specifically defined in section J A6.1 such alternative fault  
indicator display technologies may be allowed for Fault  Indicator Display compliance credit if the 
manufacturer of the product requests approval from the Energy Commission. The Commission 
may grant such approval after reviewing submittals from the applicant. Fault  indicator display 
technologies that are approved by the Commission shall be specified in documentation that will 
be published as an addendum to this appendix.  
The applicant shall provide information that specifies the required instrumentation, the 
instrumentation accuracy, the parameters measured, the required calculations, the allowable 
deviations from target values for system operating parameters, and the requ irements for system 
fault indication.  
JA6.1.2   FID Product Approval  
Fault  indicator display technology manufacturers shall certify to the Energy Commission that the 
fault  indicator display technology meets the requirements of Reference Joint Appendix JA6.1.   
JA6.1.3   FID Installation  
Fault  indicator display devices shall be factory installed by the space -conditioning system 
manufacturer, or field installed according to the space -conditioning system manufacturer's 
requirements and the FID manufacturer’s specifications.  
JA6.1.4   FID Product Documentation  
Manufacturers of FID technologies shall, upon request, provide comprehensive engineering 
specification documentation, installation and technical field service documentation, and 
homeowner user instructions documentation to designers, installers, service personnel and 
homeowne rs who utilize the technology.  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA6 -3  
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.1.5   Optional Fault Detection Capabilities  
The FID may also be used to signal other system operation faults as long as these additional 
functions do not detract from the proper function of the refrigerant charge, metering device, or 
airflow operation indications.  
JA6.1.6   Requirements for a Fault  Indicator Display  
This section specifies the required instrumentation, the instrumentation accuracy, the 
parameters measured, the required calculations, the allowable deviations from target values for 
system operating parameters, and the requirements for system fault indica tion for a fault  
indicator display technology.  
JA6.1.6.1  Instrumentation Specifications  
Instrumentation for the procedures described in JA6.1.6 shall conform to the following 
specifications:  
JA6.1.6.1.1  Temperature Sensors  
The temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of plus or minus1.8°F.  
JA6.1.6.1.2  Refrigerant Pressure Sensors  
Refrigerant pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.  
JA6.1.6.1.3  Parameters Measured  
The following parameters shall be measured:  
(a) Suction line temperature (T suction, ). 
(b) Liquid line temperature (T liquid). 
(c) Evaporator saturation temperature or low side refrigerant pressure (T evaporator, sat ). 
(d) Condenser saturation temperature or high side refrigerant pressure (T condensor, sat ). 
(e) Return air wet bulb temperature or humidity (T return, wb ). 
(f) Return air dry bulb temperature (T return, db ). 
(g) Condenser air entering dry bulb temperature (T condenser, db ). 
(h) Supply air dry bulb temperature (T supply, db ). 
JA6.1.6.2  Refrigerant Charge, Metering Device, and Airflow Calculations  
Refrigerant charge, metering device and airflow calculations for determining superheat, 
subcooling, and temperature split values shall conform to the specifications of this section 
utilizing the measured parameters data from instrumentation as specified in  Section JA6.1.6.1.   Appendix JA6 -4 2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.1.6.2.1  Fixed Metering Device Calculations  
The fixed metering device calculations are used only for systems equipped with fixed metering 
devices. These include capillary tubes and piston -type metering devices.  
(a) Calculate Actual Superheat as the suction line temperature minus the evaporator 
saturation temperature. Actual Superheat = T suction,  – Tevaporator, sat . 
(b) Determine the Target Superheat using Reference Residential Appendix RA3 Table RA3.2 -2, 
the return air wet -bulb temperature (T return, wb ) and the condenser air entering dry-bulb 
temperature (T condenser, db ). If a dash mark is read from Reference Residential Appendix RA3 
Table RA3.2 -2, the target superheat is less than 5°F.  
(c) Calculate the difference between Actual Superheat and Target Superheat (Actual 
Superheat - Target Superheat)  
JA6.1.6.2.2  Variable Metering Device Calculations  
The variable metering device calculations are used only for systems equipped with variable 
metering devices. These include Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) and Electronic Expansion 
Valves (EXV).  
(a) Calculate Actual Subcooling as the condenser saturation temperature minus the liquid line 
temperature. Actual Subcooling = T condenser, sat  - Tliquid. 
(b) Determine the Target Subcooling specified by the manufacturer.  
(c) Calculate the difference between actual subcooling and target subcooling (Actual 
Subcooling - Target Subcooling.  
(d) Calculate Actual Superheat as the suction line temperature minus the evaporator 
saturation temperature. Actual Superheat = T suction  – Tevaporator, sat . 
(e) If possible, determine the Superheat Range specified by the manufacturer.  
JA6.1.6.2.3  Minimum Airflow Calculations  
The minimum airflow calculations are designed to determine whether the rate of airflow across 
the evaporator coil is above the minimum airflow rate requirement for a valid refrigerant charge 
test result.  
(a) Calculate the Actual Temperature Split as the return air dry -bulb temperature minus the 
supply air dry -bulb temperature. Actual Temperature Split = T return, db  - Tsupply, db  
(b) Determine the Target Temperature Split from Table JA6.1 -1 using the return air wet -bulb 
temperature (T return, wb ) and return air dry -bulb temperature (T return, db ). 
(c) Calculate the difference between target and actual temperature split (Actual Temperature 
Split - Target Temperature Split).  2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA6 -5  
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.1.6.3  System Fault Indication  
Data from instrumentation specified in Section JA6.1.6.1 and calculations specified in Section 
JA6.1.6.2 shall be processed and interpreted continuously or at sufficiently frequent time step 
intervals, during normal system operation, to insure that system operating conditions that meet 
the system fault criteria of this section will be detected, and indicated by the fault  indicator 
display. Data from instrumentation specified in Section JA6.1.6.1 and calculations specified in 
Section JA6.1.6.2 shall be proce ssed and interpreted in a manner that prevents indication of 
system faults when system fault criteria are triggered by temporary or transitory operating 
conditions that are not true indicators of problems with refrigerant charge, metering device, or 
airflo w performance.  
The fault  indicator display shall:  
(a) be clearly visible to occupants of the home during normal operation.  
(b) be located on or within one foot of (one of) the thermostat(s) controlling the air 
conditioner.  
(c) display an indication of a system fault requiring service or repair when system normal 
operation fails to meet the required operating performance criteria specified in this 
section. These system fault indications shall be displayed for a period of at least  7 days 
after a system fault is detected unless the fault  indicator display is reset by the installing 
or servicing technician.  
1. Refrigerant charge verification criterion for fixed metering device systems.  
If the air conditioner has a fixed metering device, runs for 15 minutes, has a Target Superheat 
value determined by Reference Residential Appendix RA3 Table RA3.2 -2 that is greater than or 
equal to 5°F, the condenser air entering temperature is greater tha n or equal to 65°F, and the 
minimum airflow requirement from item d below is satisfied, then the conditions for a valid 
refrigerant charge test are satisfied.  
If the conditions for a valid refrigerant charge test are satisfied, and the air conditioner has an 
Actual Superheat value that deviates more than plus or minus 10°F from the Target Superheat 
value determined by Reference Residential Appendix RA3 Table RA3 .2-2, then the system fails 
the refrigerant charge test, and a system fault shall be reported.  
2. Refrigerant charge verification criterion for variable metering device systems.  
If the air conditioner has a TXV or EXV, runs for 15 minutes, the condenser air entering 
temperature is greater than or equal to 65°F, and the minimum airflow requirement from item d 
below is satisfied, then the conditions for a valid refrigerant charge te st are satisfied.  
 If the conditions for a valid refrigerant charge test are satisfied, and the air conditioner has an 
Actual Subcooling value that deviates more than plus or minus 6°F from the Target Subcooling 
value listed by the manufacturer, then the system fails the ref rigerant charge test, and a system 
fault shall be reported.  
3. Variable metering device function verification criterion.   Appendix JA6 -6 2025  Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology   If the air conditioner has a TXV or EXV, runs for 15 minutes, the condenser air entering 
temperature is greater than or equal to 65°F, and the minimum airflow requirement from item d 
below is satisfied, then the conditions for a valid metering device test are satisfied.  
 If the conditions for a valid metering device test are satisfied, and the air conditioner has an 
Actual Superheat value outside the range specified by the manufacturer (or outside the range 2°F 
to 28°F if there is no manufacturer’s specification), then the  system fails the metering device test, 
and a system fault shall be reported.  
4. Minimum airflow verification criterion.  
 If the air conditioner runs for 15 minutes, and the condenser air entering temperature is greater 
than or equal to 65°F, then the conditions for a valid minimum airflow test are satisfied.  
 If the conditions for a valid minimum airflow test are satisfied, and the air conditioner has an 
Actual Temperature Split value that deviates more than plus 5°F from the Target Temperature 
Split value determined by Table JA6.1 -1, then the system fails the minimum airflow test, and a 
system fault shall be reported.  
JA6.1.6.4  Optional Functionality  
The fault  indicator display devices may be set to tighter specifications than those specified in 
Section JA6.1.6.3. The fault  indicator display may also be used to signal other system faults as 
long as these additional diagnostic functions do not detract from the accuracy of the 
measurement and reporting of system faults as specified in Section JA6.1.6.3.  
JA6.1.6.4.1  Self Diagnostic Reporting  
When equipped with self diagnostic reporting functionality, the FID shall check for 
communication with every sensor and provide an indication when there are any sensor failures.  
JA6.1.6.4.2  Data Access  
In order to provide for verification of sensor data and FID system functionality, data access shall 
be provided.  The FID manufacturer shall specify the data access method(s), and the minimum 
data reporting capability including requirements for any data history reporting.  
 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA6 -7  
Appendix JA6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  Table JA6.1 -1 Target Temperature Split (Return Dry -Bulb – Supply Dry -Bulb)  
Return Air Wet -Bulb (ºF) (T return, wb)  
Return Air 
Dry-Bulb 
(ºF)  (T 
return, db)  50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
70 20.9  20.7  20.6  20.4  20.1  19.9  19.5  19.1  18.7  18.2  17.7  17.2  16.5  15.9  15.2  14.4  13.7  12.8  - - - - - - - - - 
71 21.4  21.3  21.1  20.9  20.7  20.4  20.1  19.7  19.3  18.8  18.3  17.7  17.1  16.4  15.7  15.0  14.2  13.4  12.5  - - - - - - - - 
72 21.9  21.8  21.7  21.5  21.2  20.9  20.6  20.2  19.8  19.3  18.8  18.2  17.6  17.0  16.3  15.5  14.7  13.9  13.0  12.1  - - - - - - - 
73 22.5  22.4  22.2  22.0  21.8  21.5  21.2  20.8  20.3  19.9  19.4  18.8  18.2  17.5  16.8  16.1  15.3  14.4  13.6  12.6  11.7  - - - - - - 
74 23.0  22.9  22.8  22.6  22.3  22.0  21.7  21.3  20.9  20.4  19.9  19.3  18.7  18.1  17.4  16.6  15.8  15.0  14.1  13.2  12.2  11.2  - - - - - 
75 23.6  23.5  23.3  23.1  22.9  22.6  22.2  21.9  21.4  21.0  20.4  19.9  19.3  18.6  17.9  17.2  16.4  15.5  14.7  13.7  12.7  11.7  10.7  - - - - 
76 24.1  24.0  23.9  23.7  23.4  23.1  22.8  22.4  22.0  21.5  21.0  20.4  19.8  19.2  18.5  17.7  16.9  16.1  15.2  14.3  13.3  12.3  11.2  10.1  - - - 
77 - 24.6  24.4  24.2  24.0  23.7  23.3  22.9  22.5  22.0  21.5  21.0  20.4  19.7  19.0  18.3  17.5  16.6  15.7  14.8  13.8  12.8  11.7  10.6  9.5 - - 
78 - - - 24.7  24.5  24.2  23.9  23.5  23.1  22.6  22.1  21.5  20.9  20.2  19.5  18.8  18.0  17.2  16.3  15.4  14.4  13.4  12.3  11.2  10.0  8.8 - 
79 - - - - - 24.8  24.4  24.0  23.6  23.1  22.6  22.1  21.4  20.8  20.1  19.3  18.5  17.7  16.8  15.9  14.9  13.9  12.8  11.7  10.6  9.4 8.1 
80 - - - - - - 25.0  24.6  24.2  23.7  23.2  22.6  22.0  21.3  20.6  19.9  19.1  18.3  17.4  16.4  15.5  14.4  13.4  12.3  11.1  9.9 8.7 
81 - - - - - - - 25.1  24.7  24.2  23.7  23.1  22.5  21.9  21.2  20.4  19.6  18.8  17.9  17.0  16.0  15.0  13.9  12.8  11.7  10.4  9.2 
82 - - - - - - - - 25.2  24.8  24.2  23.7  23.1  22.4  21.7  21.0  20.2  19.3  18.5  17.5  16.6  15.5  14.5  13.4  12.2  11.0  9.7 
83 - - - - - - - - - 25.3  24.8  24.2  23.6  23.0  22.3  21.5  20.7  19.9  19.0  18.1  17.1  16.1  15.0  13.9  12.7  11.5  10.3  
84 - - - - - - - - - 25.9  25.3  24.8  24.2  23.5  22.8  22.1  21.3  20.4  19.5  18.6  17.6  16.6  15.6  14.4  13.3  12.1  10.8  
 Appendix JA6 -8 2019 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.2  Saturation Pressure Measurement Sensors  
JA6.2.1   Purpose and Scope  
Appendix JA6.2 specifies the required instrumentation, and the instrumentation accuracy, for a 
saturation pressure measurement sensor (SPMS) device intended to provide a means for a n HERS 
ECC-Rater to observe space conditioning system refrigerant pressure measurement data without 
attaching refrigerant gages to the refrigerant system service access ports.  
The SPMS device manufacturer shall provide certification to the commission that the SPMS 
device conforms to the requirements of Reference Joint Appendix JA6.2.  
JA6.2.2   SPMS Device Approval  
SPMS devices, if approved by the Commission, shall be allowed for use for determining 
compliance with the refrigerant charge verification requirements in the Standards. The 
Commission may grant such approval after reviewing submittals from the applicant. S PMS 
devices that are approved by the Commission shall be listed as approved SPMS devices in 
directories published by Energy Commission.  
Manufacturers of approved SPMS devices shall, upon request, provide comprehensive 
engineering specification documentation, installation and technical field service documentation, 
and user instructions documentation to installers and service personnel that utilize the 
procedure.  
JA6.2.3   Standard for Saturation Pressure Measurement Sensors  
SPMS devices shall measure and report the refrigerant system pressure for both the high -
pressure side and the low pressure side of the air conditioner or heat pump refrigerant system 
within the tolerances given in Section JA6.2.3.1.  
JA6.2.3.1  Instrumentation Specifications  
The pressure measurement instrumentation shall have accuracy equal to or better than the 
following:  
(a) accuracy: ± 7.0 psi liquid line pressure  
(b) accuracy: ± 3.5 psi suction pressure  
JA6.2.3.2  Installation  
SPMS devices shall be installed by the space -conditioning equipment manufacturer, or installed 
in the field according to any applicable space -conditioning equipment manufacturer 
requirements, within 12 inches of the refrigerant system service port.  2019 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 6-9 
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.3  Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics Certification Submittal 
Requirements  
Title 24, Part 6 , Section 120.2(i) requires that economizer FDD functions be installed on air-cooled 
unitary air conditioning systems with an air handler mechanical cooling capacity over 33,000  
Btu/hr cooling capacity , with the ability to detect the faults specified in Section 120.2(i).  Each air 
conditioning system manufacturer, controls supplier, or FDD supplier of stand -alone or integrated 
FDD systems used  to fulfill  economizer fault detection and diagnostics  requirements wishing 
toshall  certify that their FDD analytics conform to the FDD requirements of Title 24, Part 6 , 
Section 120.2(i)1 – 120.2(i)7 may do so in a written declaration.  This requires that a letter be 
sent to the California Energy Commission  declaring that the FDD conforms to Title 24, Part 6 , 
Section 120.2(i) .  The declaration at the end of this section shall be used in the letter to submit ted 
to the California Energy Commission.  
JA6.3.1   Information that shall be included with the Declaration  
The air conditioning system manufacturer, controls supplier, or FDD supplier provides evidence 
as shown below:  
(a) The following temperature sensors are permanently installed to monitor system 
operation:  
i. Outside air .  
ii. Supply air . 
iii. Return air, when required for differential economizer operation.  
Evidence: Photograph or schematic of all required sensors indicating their 
recommended mounting instructions.  
(b) Temperature sensors have an accuracy of ±2°F over the range of 40°F to 80°F  
Evidence: Photocopy of sensor specification . 
(c) The controller is capable of providing system status by indicating the following:  
i. Free cooling available . 
ii. Economizer enabled . 
iii. Compressor enabled . 
iv. Heating enabled, if applicable . 
v. Mixed air low limit cycle active . 
vi. The current value of each sensor . 
Evidence:  Laboratory test: describe how the mode is simulated and the wording used 
to indicate the status.    
(d) The unit controller is capable of manually initiating each operating mode so that the 
operation of compressors, economizers, fans, and heating system, if applicable, can be 
independently tested and verifie d. 
Evidence: Photocopy of controller manual showing instructions for manually initiating 
each operating mode.  
(e) The unit controller is capable of reporting faults one of the following ways:  Appendix JA6 -10 2019 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  i. To an Energy Management Control System regularly monitored by facility 
personnel , or; 
ii. Annunciated locally on one or more zone thermostats, or on a device within 
five (5) feet of zone thermostat(s), clearly visible, at eye level, and meeting 
the following requirements:  
1. On the thermostat, device, or an adjacent written sign, display 
instructions to contact appropriate building personnel or an HVAC 
technician . 
2. In buildings with multiple tenants, the annunciation shall either be 
within property management offices, or in common space 
accessible by the property or building manager.  
iii. To a fault management application which automatically provides notification 
of the fault to a remote HVAC service provider . 
Evidence: Supplier’s description of how they comply, and supporting 
documentation such as a photocopy of controller manual or photograph of fault 
management application, zone thermostat, or other device showing indication of a 
fault.  
(f) The unit control is capable of detecting the following faults:  
i. Air temperature sensor failure/fault . 
ii. Not economizing when it should . 
iii. Economizing when it should not . 
iv. Damper not modulating . 
v. Excess outdoor air . 
JA6.3.2   Fault Detection Test Specifications    
To provide evidence that the required faults are detected by the FDD functionality, the FDD 
Provider shall perform a No -Fault and Fault test for each of the tests in Table 1.  A pre -defined 
Test Procedure such as the one provided in the example shown in Ta ble 2 could be used to fill out 
Table 1.  
 2019 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 6-11 
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  Table JA6.3 -1 – Sample of a completed fault test  
Tests  Air 
temperature 
sensor 
failure/fault  Not 
Economizing 
when it 
should  Economizing 
when it 
Should not  Damper not 
modulating  Excess 
outdoor air  
1. Damper is 
Stuck Open  NA NA X X X 
2. Damper Stuck 
at Minimum  NA X NA X NA 
3. Bad or 
Unplugged 
Actuator  NA X X X NA 
4. Sensor Hard 
Failure  X X X NA X 
5. Actuator 
Mechanically 
Disconnected  NA X X X X 
  
JA6.3.3   Reporting of Test Results  
The results of each test shall be provided in a report using a standard test results reporting 
format that provides the following information for each test:  
a. Organization and individual conducting the test . 
b. Time, Date, and Location of test . 
c. Make and model of unit/control tested . 
d. Range of models represented by test . 
e. Test procedure used, including description of the method for imposing fault with 
repeatability . 
f. Test driving Conditions (outdoor air temperature, return air temperature or enthalpy as 
required by the type of high limit control being used) . 
g. Results of the test:  Alarms generated . 
h. Provide a bill of materials for the configuration that is being certified.  
i. The FDD supplier shall describe any special field or data verifications that are required for 
the particular FDD analytics (beyond those included in Acceptance Test requirements).  
j. Sample of documentation that would accompany each qualifying set of FDD analytics.  
k. Name and contact information of company personnel in charge of certification . Appendix JA6 -12 2019 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  l. A mapping from the manufacturer’s alarm description to what is required by Title 24 
similar to Table 1.  
 
Table JA6.3 -2 - Sample Test Procedure    
Step  Description  Purpose  
1 Close the economizer damper fresh air blades, then secure the 
blades in a m anner that prevents opening.  Test alarm response 
when “Damper Stuck at 
Minimum”  
2 Simulate conditions such that the damper actuator attempts to 
open the fresh air blades.  Verify the damper blades remains 
secured and that the fault(s) specified in Table 1 are detected.  
Record the annunc iated fault(s) and fault text.  NA 
3 Release the blades and allow the economizer damper to 
modulate open.  Verify the ann unciated fault(s) have cleared.  NA 
4 Open fully the economizer damper fresh air blades, then secure 
the blades in a  manner that prevents closing.  Test alarm response 
when “Damper is Stuck 
Open”  
5 Simulate conditions such that the damper actuator attempts to 
modulate the fresh air blade closed.  Verify the damper remains 
secured and that the fault(s) specified in Table 2 are detected.  
Record the annunc iated fault(s) and fault text.  NA 
6 Release the blades and allow the economizer damper to 
modulate.  Verify the annunciated fault(s) have cleared.  NA 
7 Disconnect 1 sensor and verify the fault(s) specified in Table 1 
are detected.  Record the annun ciated fault(s) and fault text.  Test alarm response 
when “Sensor Hard 
Failure”  
8 Reconnect the sensor and verify that the ann unciated fault(s) 
have cleared.  NA 
9 Repeat steps 7  – 8 for each available sensor.  NA 
10 Electrically disconnect the damper actuator and verify the 
fault(s) specified in Table 1 are detected.  Record annunciated 
fault(s) and fault text.  Test alarm response 
when “Bad or Unplugged 
Actuator”  
11 Reconnect the damper actuator.  Verify the fault(s) have cleared 
and normal eco nomizer operation has resumed.  NA 
12 Mechanically disconnect the damper actuator f rom the damper 
blade assembly.  Test alarm response 
when “Actuator 
Disconnected”  
13 Simulate conditions such that the damper actuator would be 
moving the damper blades.  Verify the fault(s) specified in Table 
2 are detected.  Record annunciated fault(s) and fault text.  NA 
14 Reconnect the damper actuator to the damper blade assembly.  
Verify the fault(s) have cleared and normal eco nomizer 
operation has resumed.  NA 2019 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 6-13 
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  Step  Description  Purpose  
15 Simulate conditions necessary to generate system status of 
“Free cooling available”.  Recor d text of annunciated status.  Test for System Status 
Capability  
16 Simulate system conditions necessary to generate system status 
of “Economizer enabled”.  Recor d text of annunciated status.  NA 
17 Simulate system conditions necessary to generate system status 
of “Compressor enabled”.  Record text of annunciated status.  NA 
18 If equipped with a heating system, simulate system conditions 
necessary to generate system status of “Heating enabled”.  
Recor d text of annunciated status.  NA 
19 Simulate system conditions necessary to generate system status 
of “Mixed air low limit cycle active”.  Record text of annunciated 
status.  NA 
 Appendix JA6 -14 2019 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.3.4   Declaration  
Consistent with the requirements of Title 24, Part 6 , Sections 100.0(h) and 120.2(i), companies 
wishing to certify to the California Energy Commission shall execute a declaration under penalty 
of perjury attesting that all information provided is true, complete, accurate, and in compliance 
with the applicabl e provisions of Part 6.  Companies may fulfill this requirement by providing the 
information, signing the declaration below and submitting to the California Energy Commission as  
specified by the  instructions in JA6.3.5.  
Manufacturer, Model Name and Number of all devices being certified  
Manufacturer  Model Name  Model Number  
                  
                  
                  
When providing the information below, be sure to enter complete mailing addresses, including 
postal/zip codes.  
Certifying Company  
Contact Person Name *  
      Phone 1  
      
Certifying Company Name **  
      Phone 2  
      
Address  
      Fax 
      
(Address)  
      E-mail  
      
(Address)  
      Company Website (URL)  
      
* If the contact person named above is NOT the person whose signature is on the Declaration, then the full contact informatio n for the person whose signature is on the 
Declaration must also be provided on a separate page.  
** If the company named above is: A) a parent entity filing on behalf of a subsidiary entity; B) a subsidiary entity filing o n behalf of a parent entity; or C) an affiliate entity filing on 
behalf of an affiliate entity, the above contact information must be provided for any additional entities on a separate page.  
  2019 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 6-15 
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  Manufacturer (if different from Certifying Company)  
Contact Person Name  
      Phone 1  
      
Manufacturing Company Name  
      Phone 2  
      
Address  
      Fax 
      
(Address)  
      E-mail  
      
(Address)  
      Company Website (URL)  
      
 
Declaration  
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that:  
(1) All the information in this statement is true, complete, accurate, and in compliance with 
all applicable provisions of Section 120.2(i) of Title 24, Part 6 of the California Code of 
Regulations.  
(2) Each Fault Detection and Diagnostic (FDD) system has been tested in accordance with all 
applicable requirements of Section 120.2(i)1 -120.2(i)7 of Title 24, Part 6 of the California 
Code of Regulations.  
(3)  [If the party submitting this statement is a corporation, partnership, or other business 
entity] I am authorized to make this declaration, and to file this statement, on behalf of 
the company named below.  
 
             
Certifying Company Name  
       Date  
 
Name/Title (please print)   Signature  
  Appendix JA6 -16 2019 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA6.3.5  Certification  
Send declarations and evidence of functionality or test reports to the addresses below. Electronic 
submittals are preferred.  
(1) Electronic submittal:  
CertifiedtoCEC@energy.ca.gov  
Attn:  FDD Certification  
 
(2) Mail:  
Attn:  FDD Certification  
Building Standards Development Office Unit  
California Energy Commission  
1516 Ninth St. 715 P Street , MS 37  
Sacramento, CA  95814  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7-1  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements   
Joint Appendix JA7  
Appendix JA7  – Data Registry Requirements  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  ................................................................................... 1  
JA7.1  Purpose and Scope  .......................................................................................................... 3  
JA7.2  Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 3  
JA7.3  Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 9  
JA7.4  Roles and Responsibilities, and Authorized Users  ......................................................... 10 
JA7.4.1 Registration Provider .................................................................................................. 10 
JA7.4.2 Authorized Users  ......................................................................................................... 10 
JA7.4.3 View -Only Authorized User  ......................................................................................... 11 
JA7.4.4 Documentation Author  ............................................................................................... 11 
JA7.4.5 Field Technician  .......................................................................................................... 11 
JA7.4.6 Registration Signer (Responsible Person)  .................................................................... 12 
JA7.4.7 Enforcement Agency  ................................................................................................... 12 
JA7.5  Document Registration Requirements  .......................................................................... 13 
JA7.5.1 Overview  ..................................................................................................................... 13 
JA7.5.2 Document Appending  ................................................................................................. 14 
JA7.5.3 Data Validation for Compliance Document Registration  ............................................. 15 
JA7.5.4 Registration Numbering Conventions  ......................................................................... 16 
JA7.5.5 Verification of Authenticity of Copies of Registered Documents  ................................ 17 
JA7.5.6 Project Document Configuration ................................................................................ 18 
JA7.5.7 Certificate of Compliance Requirements  .................................................................... 20 
JA7.5.8 Certificate of Installation Requirements  ..................................................................... 21 
JA7.5.9 Certificate of Verification Requirements  ..................................................................... 21 
JA7.5.10 Certificate of Acceptance Requirements  ................................................................... 22 
JA7.6  Electronic and Digital Signature Requirements  ............................................................. 22 
JA7.6.1 Introduction  ................................................................................................................ 22 
JA7.6.2 Overall Description  ..................................................................................................... 22 
JA7.6.3 Specific requirements  ................................................................................................. 25    Appendix JA7- 2                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.7  Data Exchange Requirements  ........................................................................................ 31 
JA7.7.1 Data Exchange for Document Registration Procedures  .............................................. 31 
JA7.8  Data Registry Approval  .................................................................................................. 34 
JA7.8.1 Overview  ..................................................................................................................... 35 
JA7.8.2 Application Checklist  ................................................................................................... 35 
JA7.8.3 Where a Registration Provider makes use of an Application Programming Interface 
(API), each EDDS that the API interfaces with must be approved.  Types of Approval  ............. 37 
JA7.8.4 Rescinding Approval (Deactivation) of Data Registries  ............................................... 38 
JA7.8.5 Data Registry User Manual  .......................................................................................... 40 
  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7-3  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements   
JA7.1  Purpose and Scope  
Appendix JA7 specifies required functional and technical elements for Data Registries that 
provide services to authorized users and receive data to produce, register, retain, and distribute 
both copies of compliance documents and their associated Compliance Registration Packages 
required for compliance with Title 24 , Part 6. The functional and technical elements specified in 
this document include the following:  
(a) Document registration is defined.  
(b) Roles and responsibilities for users and administrators of data registries are defined.   
(c) Requirements for registered documents are defined.  
(d) Requirements for configuration of project documents in the Data Registry are defined.  
(e) Requirements for electronic and digital signatures used on registered documents are 
defined. 
(f) Requirements for data exchange between Data Registries and external software tools are defined. 
(g) Requirements for transmittal of copies of compliance documents and Compliance 
Registration Packages  to a Commission Compliance Document Repository at time of 
registration are defined.  
(h) Procedures for approval of Data Registries and software used for data input to data registries are defined.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance regarding functional and 
technical aspects of the requirements in Appendix JA7, including forms, to assist designers and builders in meeting the standards.  
JA7.2  Definitions 
For the purposes of the specifications in Appendix JA7, the following definitions shall apply:  
Application Programming Interface (API) is any software that serves as an intermediary between a Data Registry and any other software, database, data entry method, or EDDS.  
Asymmetric Key Encryption is also known as public key encryption.  This type of encryption uses 
a pair of keys that are mathematically related: one key for encryption and another key for 
decryption.  In digital signature processing, a user is assigned a private key that is not shared with anyone, and a public key that is given to anyone who receives digitally signed material from the user.  
From California Code of Regulations, Title 2. Section 22003, List of Acceptable Technologies: “The 
technology known as Public Key Cryptography is an acceptable technology for use by public entities in California...”     Appendix JA7- 4                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  All major development environments such as Microsoft and Adobe support PKCS1 asymmetrical 
key encryption.  
Authorized User  is a person who has a user account with a Data Registry and is required to 
provide their correct username  and password in order to access the Data Registry.  Data Registry 
users may be required to provide professional licensure, certification or credential information, or other qualifying information as condition of receiving authority to provide signatures for certain types of documentation.  
Commission  means the State of California Energy Resources Conservation and Development 
Commission, commonly known as the California Energy Commission, also referred to as the Energy Commission.  
Commission Compliance Document Repository  (also known as an electronic document 
repository) is an electronic database and document storage software application used for 
retention of registered  electronic Compliance Documents generated by Data Registries, and may 
also contain data and documentation relevant to other regulatory procedures administered by 
the California Energy Commission. The Commission Compliance Document Repository shall maintain these retained documents in accordance with Evidence Code sect ions 1530- 1532 (in the 
custody of a public entity).  
Compliance Data Exchange File is an XML file that contains compliance data used to populate a 
Compliance Document. The Compliance Data Exchange File is part of the Compliance Registration 
Package.  
Compliance Document  is one of the following documents required for demonstration of 
compliance with Title 24, Part 6: Certificate of Compliance, Certificate of Installation, Certificate 
of Acceptance, Certificate of Verification.  
Compliance Registration Package  means digitally signed or encrypted digital data that is 
transmitted to or from a Data Registry that contains the data required for registering a 
Compliance Document with a Data Registry, including the Compliance Data Exchange File. A  
commonly used method is the Zip file format, a data compression and archiving specification that is in the public domain. Files transmitted to or from a Data Registry using the Zip file format shall be password protected as described in JA7.6.3. 2.7. 
Compliance Report Generator is a web service maintained by the Commission that receives 
standardized document data exchange files from third party software approved by the Commission and produces the document registration package required to complete registered 
compliance documents i n data registries that are approved by the Commission.  
Compliance Software is software approved by the California Energy Commission for use in 
demonstrating compliance with the performance standards in Title 24 , Part 6.  
Cryptographic Hash Function is a mathematical function that creates a unique number that 
represents the contents of a block of data or text. In digital signature processing the data or text 
that the user is digitally signing is called the message. The number generated by the cryptog raphic hash function is called the message digest. To verify a copy of the message, the 
cryptographic hash function is applied to both the original message and the copy of the message, 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7-5  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  and the resulting message digests are compared.  If they are both the same, then the copy is 
valid.  
There is a number of cryptographic hash functions used in digital signature processing.  All major 
development environments such as Microsoft and Adobe support the most commonly used hash 
algorithm family, SHA- 1, SHA- 256, SHA-384, SHA- 512 hash algorithms which were developed by 
National Security Agency (NSA).  
ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE (ECC) PROGRAM is the program for field verification and diagnostic 
testing for residential construction as set forth in Section 10 -103.3 to verify th at newly 
constructed buildings and additions and alterations to existing buildings comply with the 
requirements of the Energy Code.  
ECC- PROVIDER  is an organization approved by the Commission to administer the ECC 
program pursuant to the requirements of Section 10 -103.3.  
ECC- RATER  is a person trained, tested, and certified by an ECC -Provider to perform field 
verification and diagnostic testing for the ECC program pursuant to the requirements of 
Section 10 -103.3.  
ECC- RATER COMPANY  is an organization certified by an ECC -Provider to offer field 
verification and diagnostic testing services by the ECC -Rater Company’s ECC -Raters for the 
ECC program pursuant to the requirements of Section 10 -103.3.  
VERIFIED ECC -RATER is an ECC- Rater that has achieved the status of “Verified” as set forth 
in Section 10 -103.3(d)5B. 
Data Registry is a web service with a user interface and database maintained by a Registration 
Provider that complies with the applicable requirements in Appendix JA7, with additional  
guidance from the Data Registry Requirements Manual, and provides for registration of residential or nonresidential compliance documentation used for demonstrating compliance with Title 24, Part 6.  
Residential Data Registry is a Data Registry that is maintained by a n HERS ECC- Provider, that 
provides for registration, when required by Title 24, Part 6, of all residential compliance 
documentation and the nonresidential Certificate of Verification.  
Nonresidential Data Registry is a Data Registry that is maintained by a Registration Provider approved by the Commission, that provides for registration, when required by Title 24, Part 6, of all nonresidential compliance documentation, excluding all Certificates of Acceptance recorded by an acceptance test technician certification provider (10 -103.1 and 10 -103.2) . 
However, nonresidential data registries may not provide for registration of nonresidential Certificates of Verification.  
Data Registry Requirements Manual  is a document that provides additional detailed guidance 
regarding the functional and technical aspects of the Data Registry requirements given in Appendix JA7.  
Digital Certificate  is a computer -based record that contains a person's identifying information 
and the person's digital signature public key, as well as information about the certificate 
authority that issued the Digital Certificate and the certificate authority's digital s ignature    Appendix JA7-6                                                                                                      2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  verifying the authenticity of the person's identity and digital signature. Although California Code 
of Regulations, title 2, section 22003(a)(2)(C) states "although not all digitally signed 
communications will require the signer to obtain a certificate, the signer is capable of being 
issued a certificate to certify that he or she controls the key pair used to create the signature."  
External Digital Data Source  (EDDS)  is a data transfer service approved by the Energy 
Commission to operate in conjunction with an approved Data Registry that allows authorized users of a Data Registry to transfer data from a digital data source external to the Data Registry as an alternative to the key -in data entry described in JA7.7.1.1 for registering compliance 
documents as required by Title 24 Part 6 . 
External Digital Data Source (EDDS) Provider  is an organization that administers an EDDS that 
conforms to the requirements in Appendix JA7 with additional  guidance given in the Data 
Registry Requirements Manual.  
Digital Signature  an electronic signature that incorporates cryptographic methods of originator 
authentication, allowing the identity of the signer and the integrity of the data to be verified. The regulations adopted by the Secretary of State that govern the use of Digital Signatures for use by public entities in California are found in the California Code of Regulations, Title 2, Division 7, Chapter 10 Digital Signatures.  
Documentation Author  is a person who prepares a Title 24 , Part 6 compliance document that 
must subsequently be reviewed and signed by a responsible person in order to certify compliance with Part 6.  
Electronic Signature is a "computer data compilation of any symbol or series of symbols 
executed, adopted, or authorized by an individual to be the legally binding equivalent of the individual's handwritten signature.” (21 C.F.R. § 11.3.)  
For the purposes of using electronic signatures to sign compliance documents, the electronic signature shall be an electronic image of the signer’s handwritten signature.  
Executive Director  means the Executive Director of the Energy Commission.  
Field Technician  is a person who performs acceptance tests in accordance with the specifications 
in Appendix NA7 and reports the results of the acceptance tests on the Certificate of Acceptance 
in accordance with the requirements of Section 10 -103(a)4.  
HERS is the California Home Energy Rating System as described in California Code of Regulations, 
title 20, sections 1670 et seq.  
HERS Provider is  an organization that administers a home energy rating system as described in 
California Code of Regulations, title 20, sections 1670 et seq . 
HERS Rater is  a person who has been trained, tested, and certified by a HERS Provider to perform 
the field verification and diagnostic testing required for demonstrating compliance with the Title 
24, Part 6, as described in California Code of Regulations, title 20, sections 1670 et seq.  
HERS Provider Data Registry  is a Data Registry maintained by a HERS Provider.  
Login (see Secure Login) . 
Message  is a block of data or text that has been digitally signed.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7-7  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  Message Digest  is the unique number generated when a Cryptographic Hash Function is applied 
to the Message which is the data or text that is digitally signed.  
Password is a string of characters used for authenticating a user on a computer system.  
Personal Computing Device  includes desktop computers, laptops, smartphones, and tablets  
Private Key  is one of the keys in Asymmetric Key Encryption used in a Digital Signature. As its 
name implies, the Private Key should only be known to the owner of the Digital Signature. The 
private key is used to encrypt the Message Digest of the message that the use r digitally signed.  
Public Key  is one of the keys in Asymmetric Key Encryption used in a Digital Signature.  As its 
name implies, the Public Key must be made public to receivers of digitally signed documents in order to decrypt the Message Digest.  
Registered Compliance Document  is a compliance document that has been submitted to a 
residential or nonresidential Data Registry for retention, verified as  valid with an XML schema 
approved by the Commission, and has gone through the registration process so that the Registered Document displays all applicable electronic signatures as well as the Registration Provider's digital certificate and the document's unique registration number. The image of the registe red document is accessible for printing or viewing by authorized users of the Data Registry 
via the Registration Provider’s internet website. The registered document’s unique visible registration number is appended onto the document image by the Data Registry.  
A Registered Document meets all applicable requirements in Standards Section 10 -103(a)  and 
Appendix JA7. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
Registration  is the process applicable to electronic Compliance Documents that are verified as 
complete by the Data Registry , and are electronically signed by all required Data Registry 
Authorized Users. Registration is initiated when an authorized Registration Signer signs the Compliance Document electronically where subsequently the Data Registry adds the Registration Signer's  Electronic Signature to the signature block, appends a unique Registration Number to 
each page of the document, and then applies the Registration Provider's Digital certificate issued 
by a Certificate Authority approved by the California Secretary of State to the Compliance 
Document and displays the Registration Provider's digital signature appearance following  the 
registration signers  signature block. When Registration is complete, the Data Registry 
immediately and automatically transmits a copy of the completed Registered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package to the Commission Compliance Document 
Repository and also retains a copy of the Registered Compliance Document for use by authorized 
users for submittals.  
Registration Number  is an alphanumeric sequence of digits and delimiters appended to a 
Compliance Document when the document's Registration Signer provides his or her Electronic 
Signature to the Data Registry to complete Registration for any document. Each Registration Numbe r shall be unique to only one document. The registration numbering convention utilizes 
specific digits to reference the document type, revision level, and the parent- child relationships 
between the compliance documents in a specific proj ect.    Appendix JA7- 8                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  Registration Provider  is an organization that administers a Data Registry service that conforms to 
the requirements in Appendix JA 7, with additional guidance given in the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual . 
Registration Signer  is a Responsible Person as defined in Title 24, Part 1, chapter 10, Sections 10 -
103(a)1, 10 -103(a)3, 10 -103(a)4, or 10- 103(a)5 who has established a user account with a Data 
Registry and has provided sufficient evidence to the Registration Provider to qualify for the 
authorization to register applicable compliance documentation by providing an electronic signature. The Documentation Author or Field Technician, and Registration Signer on a compliance document may be one and the same perso n or they may be different persons.  
Secure Login means the unique Username and Password given to an Authorized User for maintaining the security of the Data Registry.  
Standards  means the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards, codified in the California 
Code of Regulations, title 24, part 1, chapter 10, and part 6 . 
Standards Data Dictionary (SDD) is a dictionary that contains all data and technical terms used to 
describe building components, equipment, attributes and measurements that are regulated by the Standards. The purpose of the SDD is to provide the vocabulary that is used in expressing standards as well as published compliance documentation.  
URI stands for Uniform Resource Indicator which is a standard for identifying a name or a 
resource on the Internet.  
URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator is a type of URI used to identify locations on the World 
Wide Web.  
Username is a name that uniquely identifies someone on a computer system.  The Username is 
paired with a Password to create a Secure Login.  
W3C  stands for World Wide Web Consortium which is an international standards body that 
develops standards for the World Wide Web.  
XML  stands for Extensible Markup Language and is a set of rules for encoding documents in 
machine -readable form to facilitate the electronic transmission of documents. XML standard was 
developed by the W3C . 
XML Schema  refers to XML Schema Definition Language, commonly referred to as XSD, which is 
another standard defined by the W3C. An XML schema uses XSD to define a set of rules to which an XML document must conform in order to be considered valid according to that schema. The rules can include definition of m ajor organizational units, definition of data elements and 
attributes data types, constraints on valid values such as upper and lower bounds, and whether data is required or optional.  
XSL-FO stands for Extensible Stylesheet Language Formatting Objects and is a standard of the 
W3C for representing content from an XML document. It is based on a standard vocabulary of document plus formatting and layout directives that can be interpreted by a co mputer 
application called an FO processor. XSL -FO is commonly used as an  intermediary to generate PDF 
and printable documents.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7-9  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  XSLT  stands for Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation which is a standard from the W3C 
for translating an XML document into another format such as XSL- FO or HTML.  
JA7.3  Introduction 
A Data Registry is a web service with a user interface and database maintained by a Registration 
Provider that provides for registration of residential or nonresidential compliance documentation used for  demonstrating compliance with Part 6. Data Registries shall conform to the 
requirements specified in Appendix JA7. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
A Data Registry shall include the minimum functional features specified by Appendix JA7.   
Document registration is the process for verifying, serializing, and signing electronic compliance 
documents produced using a method approved by the Commission. Approved Data Registries are 
the entities that implement and manage the procedures for registering documents. The procedures include authenticating and approving users to submit or sign electronic documents 
and data for registration, validating that these data and documents are completed in 
conformance with the requirements defined by the Standards Section 1 0-103(a) and Appendix 
JA7, and affixing the electronic signature of the Documentation Author. The registration process is completed only when an authorized registration signer signs the compliance document electronically; whereupon the Data Registry automa tically performs the following actions:  
(a)  Adds the registration signer's electronic signature to the document's signature block.  The 
electronic signature date of the registration signer shall be included either within the 
document itself or within the signature block.  
(b) Appends a unique registration number to each page of the document.  
(c) Applies the Registration Provider's digital certificate containing their digital signature  to 
the entire compliance document.  
(d) Displays the Registration Provider's digital signature in the signature block that includes a date and time stamp corresponding to the date and time of the document registration process conclusion.  
(e) When the document registration process has concluded, the Data Registry shall 
immediately and automatically transmit a copy of the completed R egistered Compliance 
Document and Compliance Registration Package  to the Commission Compliance 
Document Repository.  
(f) The Data Registry shall also retain a copy of the Registered Compliance Document for use 
by authorized users for submittals.  
Paper copies of R egistered Compliance Documents printed directly from the Data Registry 
website, or electronic copies downloaded from the Data Registry website shall be used for submittal to enforcement agencies or other parties to the building construction project.  
The Registration Provider's digital signature provides for automatic electronic verification of the 
authenticity of electronic copies of registered documents.     Appendix JA7- 10                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  The electronic copies of the registered documents and Compliance Registration Packages  
retained by the Commission Compliance Document Repository shall be utilized to satisfy public 
information requests, perform research, and shall be maintained in a manner conforming to Evidence Code section s 1530 -1532 (in the custody of a public entity) for use in enforcement of 
the Standards.  
Any person or entity wishing to have a Data Registry approved shall submit an application to the Energy Commission. Data Registries may be approved by the Energy Commission or by the Executive Director to provide document Registration services. Data Regist ries shall conform to 
the requirements of Appendi x JA7. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for 
additional implementation guidance  
JA7.4  Roles and Responsibilities,  and  Authorized Users  
This section summarizes the roles and responsibilities for the individuals who participate in the document registration procedures administered by a Data Registry. However, this section is not a 
complete accounting of the responsibilities of the respective parties.  
JA7.4.1   Registration Provider  
A Registration Provider is an entity that has been approved by the Energy Commission to provide 
Data Registry services. Registration Providers maintain Data Registries that conform to the requirements in Appendix JA7 , with additional guidance specified in the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual . Registration Providers are required to retain completed R egistered 
Compliance Documents and Compliance Registration Packages and make copies of the registered 
documents available to authorized users for submittals to enforcement agencies or to other parties to the building project that require the documents. Registration Providers make services available that enable authorized users of their Data Registry to verify the authenticity of paper and electronic copies of the  retained registered documents.  
In order to facilitate Commission oversight of a Registration Provider's documentation processes, the Registration Providers shall grant authorization to Energy Commission staff to view the data and documents retained in the Data Registry, and shall provide functionality that allows Energy Commission staff to query and download retained data or documents.  
For residential compliance document registration, the Registration Provider shall be approved in 
accordance with the requirements in Section JA7.8 , and shall also be a n HERS ECC-Provider 
approved by the Energy Commission.  
For nonresidential compliance document registration, the Registration Provider shall be 
approved in accordance with the requirements in Section JA7.8.  
The Registration Provider shall only use XML S chema approved by the Commission in a 
nonresidential data registry.  
JA7.4.2   Authorized Users  
Authorized users are persons who have established a user account with a Data Registry and are required to provide their correct username  and pas sword in order to access the secured 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 11  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  information in that Data Registry. Data Registry authorized users may be required to provide 
proof of professional licensure, professional certification, or other qualifying information as a condition for receiving authority to access records or provide signatures for certain types of documentation. User accounts shall be established for each Data Registry for which a user must 
gain access.  
The information required to establish a user account with a Data Registry shall be determined by 
the Registration Provider who shall gather and verify any and all information necessary to validate a user applicant's identity or applicable professional qualifications as prerequisite to authorizing assignment to a user applicant an electronic signature, or permissions as a documentation author, or permissions as a registration signer.  
Authorized Users may not share their Secure Login with any other individual for any purpose. 
Violation of this policy may constitute fraud, and can be cited as a reason for denial of access for 
all the persons involved, including the user who releases thei r Secure Login to another person or 
persons, and the person or persons who use the Secure Login to gain access the Data Registry.  
The rol es and responsibilities in the remainder of this section JA7.4 describe specific types of 
authorized users of the Data Registry.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance regarding user accounts 
and authorized users.  
JA7.4.3   View -Only Authorized User  
Data Registries may provide user accounts that allow users to view only certain records. These types of accounts may allow access to records to view, print or download copies of compliance 
documents in order to validate the information submitted to enforce ment agencies on paper 
copies of registered documents, and for determining the status of completion of the full documentation package for a project.  
JA7.4.4   Documentation Author  
Documentation Authors are persons who prepare Title 24 , Part 6 compliance documents that 
must subsequently be reviewed and signed by a Registration Signer (responsible person) in order 
to certify compliance with Part 6.  
Documentation Authors assist with input of information required to complete the compliance documents required for the registration procedures in a Data Registry. Documentation authors who provide support for preparation of compliance documents in a Data Re gistry shall establish a 
user account and an electronic signature authority with the Data Registry. Documentation 
Authors shall sign the documents they prepare, but documentation author signatures do not 
indicate or assume responsibility for the truth or v alidity of the information reported on a 
compliance document.  Documentation Authors may engage in business relationships with the Registration Signers they assist, or they ma y be employees of the Registration Signers they assist.   
JA7.4.5   Field Technician  
The Field Technician is responsible for performing the acceptance test procedures and documenting the results of the acceptance tests on a Certificate of Acceptance. The Field    Appendix JA7- 12                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  Technician shall sign the Certificate of Acceptance to certify that the information he reports on 
the Certificate of Acceptance is true and correct. When registration of a Certificate of Acceptance is required, the Field Technician shall establish a user account and an electronic signature authority with the Data Registry in order to provide electronic signatures to complete the 
Certificate of Acceptance. When a Field Technician also performs the data input to prepare the 
Certificate of Acceptance documenta tion, the Field Technician shall also provide the 
documentation author signature on the Certificate of Acceptance. The Field Technician may be , 
but is not required to be the installer of the system that requires Acceptance Testing.  Field 
Technicians shall be certified A cceptance Test Technicians (ATT) when  required by Sections 10 -
103.1 or 10 -103.2.  
JA7.4.6   Registration Signer (Responsible Person)  
The Registration Signer is the person responsible for the work identified on a compliance document (Certificate of Compliance, Certificate of Installation, Certificate of Acceptance, or Certificate of Verification).  
(a) For Certificate of Compliance documentation , the Registration Signer shall be eligible 
under Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code to accept responsibility for the building design.  
(b) For Certificate of Installation documentation, the Registration Signer shall be eligible 
under Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code to accept responsibility for the 
building construction or installation in the applicable classification for the scope of work identified on the document.  
(c) For Certificate of Acceptance documentation , the Registration Signer shall be eligible 
under Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code to accept responsibility for the system design, construction or installation in the applicable classification for the scope of work identified on the document. 
(d) For Certificate of Verification documentation , the Registration Signer shall be a certified 
HERS ECC-Rater.  
The Registration Signer shall provide a signature to certify that the information reported on a compliance document for which he is responsible is true and correct. When registration of a compliance document is required, the Registration Signer shall estab lish a user account and an 
electronic signature authority with the Data Registry. When a Registration Signer also performs the data input to prepare a compliance document, the Registration Signer shall also provide the 
documentation author signature on the  compliance document.  
JA7.4.7   Enforcement Agency  
Standards Section 10 -103(d) requires the Enforcement Agency to verify that all required 
compliance documents for a project are completed, signed, and submitted or posted as required 
by Standards Section 10 -103(a). Thus, when Section 10 -103(a) requires that a compliance 
document be registered with a Data Registry, the Enforcement Agency must verify that compliance documents submitted when applying for a permit, or posted in the field are 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 13  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  registered documents. Such enforcement agency verification shall be by any valid means the 
Enforcement agency considers satisfactory.  
Enforcement Agency persons may establish user accounts with data registries to enable viewing the compliance documents for projects for which their jurisdiction has enforcement authority.  
Enforcement Agencies may be authorized to enter notations into project records in data registries to communicate plan check and field inspection information to builders, designers, installers, raters , and other parties to the project. 
JA7.4.8 Commission Oversight  
At any time, Commission staff may request access to those documents and associated 
Compliance Registration Package that a Registration Provider is required to maintain pursuant to 
Title 24, Part 1; Title 24, Part 6; or Appendix JA 7. Upon receipt of a request for access, a 
Registration Provider shall provide Commission staff with copies of, or access to , those 
documents and associated Compliance Registration Package specified in the request within 30 
days of receipt of the request, unless granted an extension by Commission staff. 
If a Registration Provider fails to provide Commission staff with copies of, or access to, those 
documents and associated Compliance Registration Package, the Registration Provider shall 
explain in writing, fully and concisely, the basis for their failure to provide access or copies of 
those documents  and associated Compliance Registration Package . 
If a Registration Provider fails to comply with this or any other provision of Appendix JA7, Commission staff may initiate a review of the Registration Provider’s Data Registry approval 
pursuant to JA 7.8.4.2.  
This subsection shall not be construed to limit existing enforcement oversight authority by Commission staff pursuant to any other provision of Appendix JA7 . 
JA7.5   Document Registration Requirements  
JA7.5.1   Overview  
All compliance documents for which registration is required shall be produced by a method 
approved by the Commission and then registered with an approved Data Registry by authorized users of the Data Registry. Procedures for submittal of required documentation to enforcement 
agencies and other parties to the building construction project are given in Reference Residential 
Appendix RA2, and Reference Nonresidential Appendices NA1. Standards Section 10 -103(a) 
defines the administrative requirements for the co mpliance documents (Certificate of 
Compliance, Certificate of Installation, Certificate of Acceptance, and Certificate of Verification).  
Compliance document layouts shall be defined by standardized data structures implemented according to the requirements given in JA7.7. Compliance documents produced by the Data Registry shall conform to the applicable informational content and graphical layout formatting 
approved by the Energy Commission.     Appendix JA7- 14                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  The Data Registry shall be capable of tracking all compliance documentation and maintaining the 
correct associations between related documents within a building project. Any revisions to compliance documents shall be tracked and reported.  
The Data Registry shall ensure that registered documents are retained such that they are 
available to authorized users for submittals to enforcement agencies or other parties to the 
building construction project that require copies of the R egistered Compliance Documents.  
Contingent upon the availability of a Commission Compliance Document Repository, the Data Registry shall immediately and automatically, upon concluding the registration of compliance documents, transmit a copy of each Registered Compliance Document and Compliance 
Registration Package  to the Commission Compliance Document Repository  in a manner 
prescribed by the Energy Commission . 
JA7.5.2   Document Appending  
The compliance document informational content, graphical layout, and formatting used by the Data Registry shall conform to the standardized document layouts and data structures approved 
by the Energy Commission as further described in Section J A7.7 . Refer to the  Data Registry 
Requirements Manual  for additional guidance . The Data Registry sha ll be capable of receiving 
electronic compliance document images  and data produced by the methods approved by the 
Energy Commission  such as by approved performance compliance software , and shall be capable 
of appending  the received compliance document images and data with additional information 
received from authorized users according to the requirements in Sections JA7.5 , JA7.6, JA7.7 , and 
with additional guidance given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual .  
Electronic document layout designs implemented according to the requirements in JA7 shall 
include specifications for coordinate locations and positions where the Data Registry will affix  the 
Registration Signer's Electronic Signatures, registration numbers, registration date and time record information and Registration Provider's  logos and watermarks. Refer to the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
The following conventions shall be enforced:  
JA7.5.2.1  Registration Number  
The registration number for a multiple -page document shall be visible on all pages of the 
document.  
JA7.5.2.2  Registration Date and Time  
The registration date and time shall reflect the point in time corresponding to the submittal of 
the electronic certification signature by the person responsible for the information on the 
document. The format for the registration date and time record shal l be calendar date (year-
month-day) with time of day (hour -minutes -seconds). Hour of the day shall utilize 24 -hour 
format. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 15  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.5.2.3  Performance Compliance Software Calculation Date and Time 
The performance compliance calculation date and time information that is generated by the 
compliance software tool shall be retained as data in the record for the registered Certificate of Compliance document in the Data Registry.  
The date and time information for the compliance calculation for a multiple -page performance 
Certificate of Compliance document shall be visible on all pages of the compliance document.  
JA7.5.2.4  Electronic Signatures  
Registered documents shall be electronically signed by the documentation authors, and by the 
persons who are eligible to assume responsibility for the documentation as specified by Standards Section 10 -103(a) and who are authorized users of the Data Registry who have 
established an electronic signature authority with the Data Registry. The Registration Provider 
shall ensure that all required electronic signature features and procedures specified in Section 
JA7.6 are implemented and enforced. The electronic signature layouts and locations shall be consistent with the document layouts approved by the Energy C ommission. Refer to the Data 
Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
JA7.5.2.5  Digital Signatures  
The Registration Provider shall ensure that the required digital signature procedures specified in Section JA7.6 are enforced. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional 
guidance.  
JA7.5.3   Data Validation for Compliance Document Registration  
Data Registries shall have the capability to automatically perform validation of data entered by a 
documentation author to complete a compliance document as required by the document data validation procedures in Section JA7.6.3.2.2.  
There shall be a data validation rule set specific to each compliance document.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
Compliance document data validation rules may be implicit in the formatting of the data 
elements that define a compliance document for data exchange processes, or data validation rules may be implemented by the Data Registry software.  
Data validation rules or specifications may be defined in the XML schema that represents the compliance data for a compliance document as further described in Section JA7.7. Validation criteria such as whether data is required or optional, the required dat a type, the data numeric 
upper and lower bounds, acceptable enumeration values, calculations that must be performed, 
etc., shall be defined in the XSD file.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance on the methods for 
validation of the data taking into consideration the specifications for the data elements for the 
data exchange processes described in Section JA7.7.     Appendix JA7- 16                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  The Data Registry may flag data entry errors at any time during data entry, however all data 
validation shall be completed prior to allowing a documentation author signature action to be completed. Documents shall not be marked as ready for registration si gning unless all required 
data validation errors have been corrected, and a documentation author signature action has 
been completed successfully.  
The following conventions shall be enforced as a condition for registration of a document:  
JA7.5.3.1  Null Entries  
When completion of a compliance document requires data entry for an information field, the 
data shall be entered, otherwise registration shall not be allowed. However, if data entry for a particular information field is optional, use of a null entry  or symbol such as n/a that is allowed by 
the document schema  shall not prevent registration from concluding.  
JA7.5.3.2  Calculated Values  
Whenever possible or practica l, the Data Registry shall perform the calculations required for 
determining compliance results.  Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional 
guidance on these calculations.  
JA7.5.3.3  Look -up Functions for Calculations  
Whenever possible or practical, the Data Registry shall use lookup functions that provide values needed for completing calculations as referenced from the applicable protocols in the Reference 
Appendices or from Standards compliance criteria. Guidance for application of lookup functions 
may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.4   Registration Numbering Conventions  
Registration numbers used for the document registration procedures described in Appendix JA7 are alphanumeric sequences of digits and delimiters that shall be appended to a compliance document when the document's registration signer performs an electronic signature action in the Data Registry to conclude the registration procedure for a document. Each registration number 
shall be unique to only one document. The  registration numbering convention assigns 
significance to certain digits in order to define the document type, document revision level, and 
the parent- child relationships between the compliance documents contained in a project. As the 
compliance document types required for residential projects are different than those required for nonresidential proj ects, the numbering conventions used shall conform to the conventions 
specified in sections JA7.5.4.1 and JA7.5.4.2 respectively.  
Registration numbering conventions for other documentation processes are possible. Any new 
document process for which the Commission requires the documents to be registered shall use a 
registration numbering convention that is approved by the Commission.  
JA7.5.4.1  Nonresidential Registration Numbering Convention  
Contingent upon approval of nonresidential Data Registries, a nonresidential registration numbering convention shall be determined and approved by the Commission in conjunction with 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 17  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  the approval of the first nonresidential Data Registry , and shall be used by all nonresidential data 
registries thereafter. The nonresidential registration numbering convention specification shall use 
a similar design concept as used in the residential registration numbering convention described in 
Section JA7.5.4.2 which assigns significance to digits in order to define the document type, 
document revision level, and the relationships between the compliance documents contained in 
a project. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance on the layout, 
configuration, and application of the approved nonresidential registration  numbering convention. 
JA7.5.4.2  Residential Registration Numbering Convention  
The registration numbers assigned to residential compliance documents by the Data Registry at the conclusion of the registration process shall use standardized numbering convention to assign 
the applicable significance to the alphanumeric digits to define the unique document designation, 
document revision level, and establish the parent/child relationships between the documents 
contained in a project.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance on this standardized 
convention, as well  the layout, configuration, and application of the approved residential 
registration  numbering convention . 
JA7.5.5   Verification of Authenticity of Copies of Registered Documents  
For projects for which Standards Section 10 -103(a) requires the documents to be registered, 
compliance requires that documents shall first be registered with a Data Registry before being 
submitted to an enforcement agency for approval. Additionally, when revisions to the compliance documents are necessary, compliance requires the revised documents to be registered with the Data Registry prior to re -submittal to the enforcement agency for approval. 
Thus, the current revision of a registered document in the Data Registry shall be the reference document for validation of the authenticity of a document submitted to an enforcement agency or to another party to the construction project.   
Registration Providers shall make available document verification services to authorized users of 
their Data Registry.  
Methods for verification of a document's authenticity shall include basic visual comparison of a 
copy of a registered document to the current version of the registered document on file in the Data Registry.  
Additionally, the automated document validation utility that is made possible by digital signature technology shall make it possible for a document recipient to automatically verify an electronic 
copy of a registered compliance document without having to manually inspect it against the registered document in the Data Registry. As described in Section JA7.3, the last step in the document registration procedure in the registry applies the Registration Provider's digital certificate containing their digital signature to the entire compliance document, thus providing 
the capability for automated verification of authenticity of electronic copies of the registered document. 
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance on digital signature 
technology for verification of document authenticity .    Appendix JA7- 18                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.5.6   Project Document Configuration  
Data Registries shall be capable of tracking all compliance documentation and maintaining the 
correct associations between related documents, including revisions and completion statuses for all documents within a building project.  
A certificate of compliance establishes the requirements for project documentation for prescriptive and performance compliance methods.  
The Standards specify mandatory HERS verification for residential projects for which there are 
options for compliance with the mandatory requirement. Thus, indication of the option selected for compliance with a residential mandatory measure may not be known until after a Certificate of Installation is submitted to a Data Registry to demonstrate compliance with the mandatory requirement. The Data Registry shall track when Certificate of Installation documents are 
registered for any mandatory measure that has an option for compliance; shall report any HERS 
verification requirement that is triggered by the mandatory measure; and ensure that any 
required HERS verification is completed as a condition of co mpliance. Refer to the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual for additional guidance describing residential Data Registry tracking of mandatory measure options and the required documentation for the mandatory options . 
JA7.5.6.1  Project Status Reports  
The status of completion of a project shall be reported by the Data Registry.   
The Data Registry shall determine the documents required for a project based on the Certificate of Compliance and maintain a project status report with a summary of the current status of 
completion of the required documents  for the project.  The project status report shall be readily 
accessible to authorized users of the Data Registry. Access to the report shall be facilitated by use of search parameters relevant to the project as listed in Sections JA7.5.6.1.1 and JA7.5.6.1.2.  
Enforcement Agencies may be authorized to enter notations into project records in data registries to communicate plan check and field inspection information to builders, designers, 
installers , raters  and other parties to the construction project. 
The project status report shall be made available in a printable format.  
Minimum information requirements for the project status report shall include the following:  
JA7.5.6.1.1  Project Status Report Information for Residential Projects:  
(a) 
 Project name  
(b) Project location (or address)  
(c) Listing of the Certificate of Compliance documents required; date registered (or indicate not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); 
registration number  
(d) Listing of the Certificate of Installation documents required; date registered (or indicate not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); registration number  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 19  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  (e) Listing of the Certificate of Verification documents required; date registered or indicate 
not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); registration number  
(f) Listing of the mandatory measure options required; options selected (refers to the 
Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Verification documentation).  
JA7.5.6.1.2  Project Status Report Information for Nonresidential Projects:  
Note: Nonresidential Document registration is contingent upon approval of a nonresidential Data 
Registry by the Commission.  
(a)  Project name  
(b) Project location (or address)  
(c) Listing of the Certificate of Compliance documents required; date registered (or indicate not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); 
registration number  
(d) Listing of the Certificate of Installation documents required; date registered (or indicate not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); registration number  
(e) Listing of the Certificate of Acceptance documents required; date registered (or indicate not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); 
registration number  
(f) Listing of the Certificate of Verification documents required; date registered (or indicate 
not complete if the document record has been started but is not yet registered); registration number . 
JA7.5.6.2  Revision Control  
When a revision to a compliance document is made, the revised version of the compliance document shall also be registered (a registration signer must sign again to register the revision), 
and the revision digit for the compliance document shall be incremented. Thus , a copy of each 
registered revision of each R egistered Compliance D ocument and the associated Compliance 
Registration Package  shall be transmitted to the Commission Compliance Document Repository.  
When a revision is made to a compliance document that is associated with one or more 
registered dependent (child) documents, the dependent documents shall have their registered status revoked, and their status shall be reported as incomplete (orphaned) until signed again by the registration signer subsequent to making any necessary changes to the "orphaned child" 
document made necessary by the revision of the applicable dominant (parent) document. A new 
registration signature is required for the orphaned child document in order to update the registration number such that the new revision level of both the parent and the child documents is shown.  
A copy of the new revision of a document shall be submitted to the enforcement agency for all applicable approvals or inspections.     Appendix JA7- 20                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  The data that was used to create obsolete versions of Registered Compliance Documents and the 
associated Compliance Registration Package shall not be required to be retained in the Data 
Registry history or memory.  However, a copy of each revision of each registered electronic document shall be retained.  
The current revision of any document in the registry shall be considered to be the only valid version of that document.  All previous revisions of that document shall be considered obsolete, thus not valid for use for submittal to enforcement agencies to demonstrate compliance.  
JA7.5.6.3 Photographic Documentation for Registered Documents  
If a registered compliance document is associated with photographic evidence, the photograph 
shall be stored as a Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) file and comply with the following 
requirements:  
(a) Photographs shall not to be issued with registered compliance documents.  
(b) Photographs shall be stored by the ECC -Provider and made available to the Commission 
upon request.  
(c) Photographs shall show the specific equipment being tested, or measure being verified.  
(d) Photographs shall include sufficient background to identify the location of the project 
site.  
(e) Photographs shall include a time and location stamp.  
JA7.5.7  Certificate of Compliance Requirements  
JA7.5.7.1  Prescriptive Certificate of Compliance Document  
Procedu res for submittal of prescriptive Certificate of Compliance data shall conform to the 
requirements in  Section JA7.7.1. Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional 
guidance on  procedures and requirements for Data Registry features for prescriptive certificate 
of compliance document registration . 
JA7.5.7.2  Performance Certificate of Co mpliance Document:   
Procedures for submittal of the performance Certificate of Compliance shall use Compliance Software approved by the Commission pursuant to all applicable procedures in Title 24 Part 1, Section 10 -109, and shall conform to all applicable data exchange requirements given in Section 
JA7.7. 
JA7.5.7.3  Multiple Orientation Plans (Residential)  
The Data Registry shall ensure that multiple orientation performance Certificate of Compliance 
documents are configured in the Data Registry such that the registered multiple orientation 
Certificate of Compliance document is referenced for all build- outs of that master plan. The 
registered Certificate of Compliance that was approved by the enforcement agency shall be the 
Certificate of Compliance document that is the parent document for each and every dwelling unit built from that master plan.   
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance describing the 
procedures for tracking revisions to multiple orientation Certificate of Compliance Documents . 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 21  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.5.7.4  Multifamily Dwelling units  
The Data Registry shall ensure that multifamily whole -building performance Certificate of 
Compliance documents are configured in the Data Registry such that the registered multifamily 
Certificate of Compliance document is referenced for all dwelling units in the multifamily 
building. The registered Certificate of Compliance that was approved by the enforcement agency 
shall be the Certificate of Compliance document that is the parent document for each and every dwelling unit specified by that whole -building certificate of Compliance document.   
Detailed guidance describing the procedures for tracking revisions to multifamily whole -building 
Certificate of Compliance Documents may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.8   Certificate of Installation Requirements  
JA7.5.8.1  Residential Certificate of Installation  
Procedures for submittal of residential Certificate of Installation data shall conform to the requirements in Section JA7.7.1. Detailed guidance for the functional and technical elements necessary for registration of residential Certificate of Installation documents for a Data Registry 
may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.8.2  Nonresidential Certificate of Installation  
Nonresidential Certificate of Installation document registration is contingent upon the approval of nonresidential Data Registries . 
Procedures for submittal of Nonresidential Certificate of Installation data shall conform to the requirements in Section JA7.7.1.  Detailed guidance for the functional and technical elements 
necessary for registration of Nonresidential Certificate of Installation documents for a Data Registry may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.9   Certificate of Verification Requirements  
Certificate of Verification documents are always registered documents.  
Procedures for submittal of Certificate of Verification shall conform to the requirements in 
Section JA7.7.1. Detailed guidance for the required functional and technical elements necessary 
for registration of Certificate of Verification documents for a Data Registry may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.9.1  Managing Sample Groups  
HERS ECC-Provider Data Registries are required to manage the group sampling procedures. 
Details that describe the requirements for managing sample groups are given in Reference Residential Appendix RA2 and in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA1.  
JA7.5.9.2  Group Numbering Convention  
Group number is a n HERS ECC- Provider -designated identification number unique to the sample 
group to which a dwelling has been assigned. The group numbers assigned to residential compliance documents by the Data Registry at the conclusion of the registration process shall use    Appendix JA7- 22                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  the standardized numbering convention published in the Data Registry Requirements Manual 
approved by the Energy Commission. The group number shall be reported on all Certificate of Verification documents that utilize group sampling for compliance.  Guidance for the layout, 
configuration, and application of the approved residential group numbering convention shall be 
maintained in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.5.10   Certificate of Acceptance Requirements  
Certificate Acceptance document registration is contingent on the approval of nonresidential 
Data Registries . 
Procedures for submittal of Certificate Acceptance data shall conform to the requirements in Section JA7.7.1. Detailed guidance for the required functional and technical elements necessary for registration of Certificate of Acceptance documents for a Data Registry may be given in the 
Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6  Electronic and Digital Signature Requirements  
JA7.6.1   Introduction 
This section defines the functional and technical requirements for the use of electronic and 
digital signatures in the registration of compliance documents. These specifications shall be implemented by a Data Registry as a condition of approval of the Data  Registry by the 
Commission.  
JA7.6.2   Overall Description  
JA7.6.2.1  Interfaces - Main Users  
(a) Authorized Users  of Data Registries who must sign Compliance Documents either as the 
Documentation Author, or Field Technician, or as the Registration Signer (responsible person). 
(b) Registration Providers  who must implement the electronic and digital signature 
specifications into the Data Registry user interface to provide Electronic Signature capabilities to the Authorized Users of the Data Registry , and must append their digital 
signature to all registered compliance documents created in their Data Registry.  
(c) Commission Compliance Document Repository  which must receive R egistered 
Compliance D ocuments and Compliance Registration Packages  transmitted from the Data 
Registries and will process the digital signature to validate the sender and the contents.  
(d) Persons or Software Entities who Validate Electronic Documents who may receive electronic copies of registered documents made available by the Data Registries and will process the digital signature to validate the sender and the contents.  
(e) Compliance Software Tools  that export C ompliance Documents and Compliance 
Registration Packages  for transmittal to the Data Registries that must subsequently be 
electronically signed and registered in the Data Registry.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 23  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.6.2.2  Major Functions  
The electronic and digital signature requirements of the Data Registry consist of the following 
major functions:  
JA7.6.2.2.1  Electronic Signature Capability   
The Data Registry shall provide electronic signature capability to authorized users.  
JA7.6.2.2.2  Document Data Validation 
The Data Registry shall ensure that compliance documents are complete , and the data entered 
conforms to the data validation rules for the applicable document prior to making the documents available for registration signing . 
JA7.6.2.2.3  Signer Review and Signature Actions  
The Data Registry shall provide functionality for authorized users to select, review, and sign 
compliance documents as a Documentation Author, Field Technician, or Registration Signer.  
JA7.6.2.2.4  Digital Signatures  
The Data Registry shall apply the Registration Provider's Digital Signature to compliance 
documents electronically signed by the registration signer when concluding the document registration procedure in the Data Registry . The Registration Provider's digital signature shall be 
based on a digital certificate issued by a certificate authority approved by the California Secretary 
of State mustshall be created by a  technology acceptable by the California Secretary of State . 
The function of the Registration Provider's digital certificate is to provide verification from an approved certificate authority that the document came from the Registration Provider's Data Registry and to provide automated document verification to persons or agencies that receive electronic submittals of these registered documents.  
Additional guidance for use of digital signatures and digital certificates shall be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.2.2.5  Transmittal to Commission Compliance Document Repository  
The Data Registry, upon completion of the registration procedure, shall immediately and automatically transmit a copy of the completed R egistered Compliance Document and 
Compliance Registration Package  to the Commission Compliance Document Repository , which 
will process the Registration Provider's digital signature to validate the sender and the 
compliance document contents.   
Additional guidance for use of digital certificates for validation of document authenticity shall be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.2.2.6  Document and Data Retention  
The Data Registry shall retain a copy of the completed Registered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package  and make the Registered Compliance Document  available for    Appendix JA7- 24                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  use by authorized users of the registry who may access a copy of the registered document and 
may subsequently process the Registration Provider's digital signature to verify the sender and 
the compliance document contents.  
JA7.6.2.2.7  Receive and Process Output From Compliance Software and External Digital 
Data Sources  
The Data Registry shall process the completed Compliance Registration Package from Compliance software tools approved by the Energy Commission  for use in the Compliance Document 
Registration process  in accordance with the specifications in Section JA7.7.1.6 . 
If the Data Registry allows  use of External Digital Data Sources  (EDDS) as an alternative to keyed-
in data input for document registration procedures, the requirements in  Section JA7.7.1.2  shall 
be met . 
Additional guidance for receiving and processing output from compliance software and EDDS may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.2.3  User Characteristics  
There are four categories of users who will participate in the electronic and digital signature functionality: 
JA7.6.2.3.1  Users who will use electronic signatures to sign and register compliance documents. 
This is a heterogeneous category composed of HERS ECC-Raters, building designers, building 
contractors, installation contractors, energy consultants, homeowners, and others.   
JA7.6.2.3.2  Users who use a digital certificate to secure registered compliance documents.  
This category consists of each approved Registration Provider.  
JA7.6.2.3.3  Users who will receive the electronically transmitted R egistered Compliance 
Documents  and Compliance Registration Package s 
These users will need to apply decryption processing using the digital certificate to identify the 
sender and verify the contents of the received Registered Compliance Document and Compliance 
Registration Package. The Commission Compliance Document Repository is a main user in this category. Also, users who take advantage of digital signature automated verification capabilities to verify the authenticity of Registered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package  received as electronic submittals from various other participants in the compliance 
documentation process will be another main user in this category.   
JA7.6.2.3.4  Users who transmit electronic compliance documentation to the Data 
Registry.   
Title 24 compliance software tools are the main users in this Category.  
The electronic compliance documents exported from the compliance software tools that are 
approved by the Energy Commission must be formatted to provide a standardized location for 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 25  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  the visible aspects of electronic signatures,  digital signature  appearances, and other aspects of 
registration information such as registration numbering, and registration date/time stamp s.  
The Data Registry shall be capable of appending the visible aspects of electronic and digital 
signatures and other required registration information to the correct locations in the signature 
blocks and footers on the imported compliance documents during the subsequent electronic 
signature and registration procedures.  
The Data Registry shall implement the capability to append the visible aspects of the required 
document registration information to the signature blocks and footers on compliance documents in these locations.   
Detailed guidance for appending the required document registration information may be described in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.2.4  Constraints  
JA7.6.2.4.1  Software Constraint:  
The digital signature technology including the hash algorithm and asymmetric key encryption used shall be consistent across all Data Registries because the Commission Compliance Document Repository will not support multiple approaches.  
Detailed guidance for use of digital signature technology and digital certificates  shall be given in 
the Data Registry Requirements manual.   
JA7.6.3   Specific requirements  
JA7.6.3.1  Interface Requirements  
JA7.6.3.1.1  User interfaces    
All Data Registries shall utilize the same informational content, graphical layout and formatting unique to the applicable type of compliance document when displaying the completed compliance documents for review and signing as part of the registration process. These document layouts shall conform to the informational content, graphical layout and formatting 
approved by the Commission. Additional detailed guidance regarding informational content, 
graphical layout and formatting will be presented in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.3.1.2  Software interfaces  
JA7.6.3.1.2.1 All Registered Compliance Documents and Compliance Registration 
Package s transmitted from any Data Registry shall be secured with the Registration 
Provider digital signature. 
JA7.6.3.1.2.1.1  All Data Registries shall use the same hash algorithm to generate 
the document’s message digest for the digital signature.     Appendix JA7- 26                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.6.3.1.2.1.2  All Data Registries shall use the same asymmetrical key encryption 
for generating the digital signature private and public keys used to encrypt and decrypt 
the message digest.  
JA7.6.3.1.2.1.3   R egistration Providers shall provide their digital certificate which 
contains their digital signature public key to any other software entity that receives Registered Compliance Documents and Compliance Registration Packages  from their 
Data Registry, in particular the Commission document repository.  
JA7.6.3.1.2.1.4  T
 he Commission  Compliance  Document R epository, which will 
receive Registered Compliance Documents and Compliance Registration Packages 
electronically from Data Registries, will implement digital signature processing 
capability in order to perform automatic verification and validation processing on 
received documents.   
JA7.6.3.1.2.1.5  U sers who take advantage of automated software capabilities to 
verify the authenticity of R egistered Compliance Documents received from Data 
Registries will have to implement digital signature processing capability in order to 
perform automatic digital signature verification processing on received documents. Numerous PDF reader freeware  tools  are available that have the capability to process 
digital signatures that utilize standardized digital signature technology.  
JA7.6.3.1.2.2 All Data Registries shall implement the same security protocol for importing 
completed compliance document transmittals as described in Section JA7.7.1.6.  
JA7.6.3.2  Functions  
JA7.6.3.2.1  Electronic Signature Capability  
The Data Registry shall provide electronic signature capability to authorized users who have the role of Documentation Author, Field Technician, or Registration Signer. A Field Technician Signature is required only on registered Certificate of Acceptance Documentation. A Certificate of 
Acceptance document requires that there be both a Documentation Author signature and a Field Technician signature prior to registration signing.  The Data Registry shall  not register a Certificate 
of Acceptance document that has been recorded (or is expected to be recorded) by an Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider.  
JA7.6.3.2.1.1 Any authorized user of a Data Registry can request an electronic signature 
in order to sign compliance documents as the documentation author, Field Technician, or as the registration signer.  
JA7.6.3.2.1.2 Registration Providers shall gather and verify any and all information 
necessary to validate a user applicant's identity and applicable qualifications as prerequisite to authorizing assignment to a user applicant an electronic signature, or permissions as a documentation author, Field Technician, or Registration Signer.   
JA7.6.3.2.1.3 Authorized users shall provide to the Registration Provider an electronic 
image of their handwritten signature for use in displaying their electronic signature.  The 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 27  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  Registration Provider may make available alternative methods for creating an electronic 
image for displaying  electronic signatures.  
JA7.6.3.2.2  Document Data Validation 
The Data Registry shall check that compliance documents are complete and shall perform the 
required data validation for the document before making them available for signing and/or 
registering. Data must be validated with an XML schema approved by the Commission. Additional   
guidance for the data validation for each document shall be provided in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
Any applicable error messages shall be posted indicating the actions necessary as prerequisite to completion of the registration process.   
JA7.6.3.2.2.1 When a documentation author indicates that the compliance document is 
complete and he/she is ready to sign it, the Data Registry shall verify that all information necessary to complete the document has been provided as prerequisite to making the signing functionality available to the documentation author.  
JA7.6.3.2.2.2 The Data Registry shall verify that a compliance document is complete and 
has received the documentation author’s signature as prerequisite to making the compliance document available for registration signing. For Certificate of Acceptance documents, both the Documentation Author and the Field Technician signatures shall be provided as 
prerequisite to making the document available for registration signing.
 The Data Registry shall 
not register a Certificate of Acceptance document that has been recorded (or i s expected to 
be recorded) by an Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider.  
JA7.6.3.2.3  Signer Review and Signature Actions  
The Data Registry shall provide functionality for authorized users to select, review and sign 
compliance documents as a documentation author, field technician, or registration signer.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.1 The documentation author can electronically sign a compliance document 
if it has been verified as complete by the Data Registry.   
JA7.6.3.2.3.2 The Field Technician can electronically sign a Certificate of Acceptance 
document if it has been verified as complete by the Data Registry and has the documentation 
author’s signature.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.3 The registration signer can electronically sign a compliance document if it 
has been verified as complete by the Data Registry and has the documentation author’s signature. For Certificate of Acceptance documents both the Documentation Author 
signature and the Field Technician signature are prerequisite to allowing registration signing.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.4 When an authorized user selects to sign a compliance document, the Data 
Registry provides a display of the compliance document layout that allows the user access to    Appendix JA7- 28                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  any part of the compliance document for review, as well as a display of the declaration 
statement.   
JA7.6.3.2.3.4.1  All compliance documents shall include a declaration statement applicable 
to the documentation author signature. The declaration statement language shall be 
approved by the Commission.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.4.2  All Certificate of Acceptance documents shall include a declaration 
statement applicable to the field technician signature. The declaration statement 
language shall be approved by the Commission.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.4.3  All compliance documents shall include a declaration statement applicable 
to the registration signer signature. The declaration statement language shall be approved by the Commission.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.4.4  All compliance document layouts displayed shall conform to the same 
format, informational order, and content approved by the Commission. Guidance for data 
and layout specifications shall be published in the Data Registry requirements manua l.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.5 When the documentation author activates the signing control to sign the 
compliance document, the Data Registry shall display the completed documentation author 
signature block including the documentation author’s electronic signature utilizing the visible image of his or her hand written signature, applicable professional qualifications, licenses 
and/or certificates the documentation author holds, and the date and time the document 
was signed.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.6 When the Field Technician activates the signing control to sign the 
Certificate of Acceptance document, the Data Registry shall display the completed field 
technician's signature block including the Field Technician's  electronic signature utilizing the 
visible image of his or her hand written signature, applicable professional qualifications, licenses and/or certificates the Field Technician holds, and the date and time the document 
was signed.  
JA7.6.3.2.3.7 When the registration signer activates the signing control to register the 
compliance document, the Data Registry shall display the completed signature block including 
the registration signer’s electronic signature utilizing the visible image of his or her hand 
written signature, applicable professional qualifications, licenses or certificates the registration signer holds, the date and time the document was signed, with the newly generated registration number appended to the footer of each of the pages of the document. 
The registration numbering convention shall conform to the requirements in Appendix 
JA7.5.4. 
JA7.6.3.2.4  Digital Signatures  
The Data Registry shall apply the Registration Provider digital signature to compliance documents 
electronically signed by the registration signer . 
The Registration Provider shall ensure that PDF reader freeware can verify the digital signature of 
the registered PDF documents. The Registration Provider shall make available a procedure that 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 29  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  allows users to securely acquire the digital certificate issued by the Data Registry's approved 
certificate authority. The procedure may add the certificate to the user's local root certificate store if necessary .   
JA7.6.3.2.4.1 When a compliance document is electronically signed by the registration 
signer, the Data Registry shall apply a visible indication of the Registration Provider's digital signature (digital signature appearance) to the document which shall include the following 
statement:   
“Digitally signed by [Data Registry Provider’s name]. This digital signature is provided in order 
to secure the content of this registered document, and in no way implies Registration Provider responsibility for the accuracy of the information".  
Other information such as graphic(s), watermark(s), date, or time stamps are not required for 
the digital signature appearance . 
JA7.6.3.2.4.1.1  The Data Registry digital signature software generates a hash 
number from the contents of the registered compliance document to create the message 
digest part of the digital signature.  
JA7.6.3.2.4.1.2   The Data Registry digital signature software encrypts the message 
digest using the Registration Provider's digital signature private key to produce the digital signature.  
JA7.6.3.2.4.1.3   The Data Registry digital signature software attaches the 
Registration Provider's digital certificate which contains their digital signature public key to the compliance document.  
JA7.6.3.2.4.1.4   The digital signature appearance shall be placed at the end of the 
compliance document i n a location that is just after  the responsible person’s signature 
block.  
JA7.6.3.2.5  Transmittal to Commission Compliance Document Repository  
The Data Registry, upon completion of the registration procedure, shall immediately and automatically transmit a copy of the completed R egistered Compliance Document and 
Compliance Registration Package  to the Commission Compliance Document Repository which will 
process the Registration Provider's digital signature using the Registration Provider's digital certificate to verify the sender and the compliance document contents.  
JA7.6.3.2.5.1 The Data Registry shall transmit the digitally signed and R egistered 
Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package  to the Commission document 
repository using a secure transmission protocol. Detailed guidance for the secure transmission protocol may be specified in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.6.3.2.6  Document Retention  
The Registration Provider shall retain a copy of the completed Registered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package . The Registration Provider shall make the Registered 
Compliance Document  available for use by authorized users of the registry who may print a hard    Appendix JA7- 30                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  copy, or access an electronic copy of the registered document and may subsequently process the 
Registration Provider's digital signature using their digital certificate to verify the sender and the compliance document contents.   
JA7.6.3.2.6.1 The Data Registry shall provide users the functionality to either view 
registered documents in their web browser or download the document file to their personal 
computer . 
JA7.6.3.2.6.2 The Data Registry shall provide functionality to transmit electronic copies 
of registered compliance documents to  enforcement agencies or other parties to the 
construction project.   
JA7.6.3.2.6.3 The Data Registry shall make their digital signature public key available for 
use for electronic validation of the authenticity of the registered documents.  
JA7.6.3.2.7  Receive and Process Output From Compliance Software or External Digital Data Sources  
The Data Registry shall process the Compliance Registration Package transmitted from Title 24, Part 6 performance compliance software tools approved by the Energy Commission, and shall process transmittals from external digital data sources  described in Section JA7.7.1.2 when 
approved in accordance with the requirements in Section JA7.8 for use in compliance document 
registration processes.  
JA7.6.3.2.7.1 The Data Registry shall have functionality to receive data containing 
electronic documents and data exported from performance compliance software tools  
approved by the Energy Commission  in accordance with the specifications in Section 
JA7.7.1.6.  If the Data Registry makes available use of External Digital Data Sources (EDDS) as 
an alternativ e to keyed -in data input for doc ument registration procedures, the requirements 
in Section JA7.7.1.2 shall be met.   
There may be alternate means by which Compliance Software tools or other external digital 
data sources  communicate with Data Registries , such as by data streaming. Use of such 
alternate means shall not be allowed unless approved by the Energy Commission.  
JA7.6.3.2.7.2 The Data Registry shall have functionality to decrypt data files it receives 
that contain completed compliance documents exported from compliance software tools that are approved by the Energy Commission  in accordance with the requirements in Section 
JA7.7.1.6..  
JA7.6.3.2.7.3 The Data Registry shall only allow the transmission of data between 
compliance software tools or external data sources approved by the Energy Commission 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 31  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  using secure data transfer protocols.  Detailed guidance for secure data transfer protocols 
may be given in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.7  Data Exchange Requirements  
Compliance documents required by the Administrative Regulations (Title 24, Part 1, §10 -103)  
shall be based on standardized data structures that define the ir informational content and 
graphical layout . These data structures shall be represented using  the XML data exchange 
standard developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. The XML data that represents the 
information entered  by users and subsequently displayed in information fiel ds on compliance 
document images  shall be validated against an XML schema that is published in the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual that is approved by the Energy Commission. The XML schema(s) shall standardize the organization of the data, the terminology, and the data types, thus support data integrity and provide built- in data validation. All electronic data transmittals used for producing 
compliance documents  in Data Registries shall be based on XML technology.  
The compliance document images rendered from XML data submitted to the Data Registry  shall 
be consistent with the informational content, graphical layout , and graphical formatting for the 
compliance documents approved by the Energy Commission.  
Detailed Guidance for use of the data definitions defined in the XML schema, and the data formats used to render each of the registered compliance documents shall be provided in the 
Data Registry Requirements Manual. Consideration shall be given to use of two complimentary XML technologies, Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation (XSLT) and Extensible 
Stylesheet Language Formatting Objects (XSL -FO) which shall work directly with the data in the 
Compliance Data Exchange File to transform the data into the required graphical layout and 
formatting for the completed compliance document image . 
Data registries shall provide web -based services to authorized users to enable user data exchange 
in accordance  with JA7.7.1. 
JA7.7.1   Data Exchange for  Document Registration  Procedures  
Data exchange transactions with a Data Registry for document registration procedures shall utilize keyed -in data entry as described in Section JA7.7.1.1; output from approved Title 24, Part 6 
Performance Compliance Software as described in Section JA7.7.1. 6; or data exchange from an 
external digital data source as described  in Section JA7.7. 1.2 that has been approved by the 
Energy Commission in accordance with applicable requirements specified in Section JA7.8 . 
Data exchange utilizing software tools/ technology or external digital data sources (EDDS) that 
have not been approved by the Energy Commission shall not be used for the document registration processes required by Title 24, Part 6.  
JA7.7.1.1  Keyed -in Data Entry  
Data Registries shall have the capability to receive data entry from an authorized user's personal 
computing device  when the authorized user has logged- on to the Data Registry web service  using 
the personal computing device .    Appendix JA7- 32                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.7.1.2  Digital Data Sources  External to a Data Registry  
As an alternative to the data entry  described in JA7.7.1.1,  digital data sources external to a  Data 
Registry  may be used  by an authorized user of a Data Registry for  transmit ting information to a  
Data Registry during document registration procedures . External Digital Data Sources (EDDS) shall 
be approved by the Energy Commission in accordance with the applicable requirements specified 
in Section s JA7.8 . 
JA7.7.1.2.1  EDDS Data Exchange Requirements  
The data uploads to an EDDS , and the data exchange between a  Data Registry and an EDDS , 
including  data upload and data exchange that is facilitated by an API, shall conform to the 
following:  
(a) The data exchange  from an EDDS to a Data  Registry  shall be initiated only by an 
authorized user of the Data Registry; only while the user is logged into his Title 24 , Part 6 
Data Registry user account; and only by use of a data exchange feature managed and made available to the user by the Data Registry user interface .  
(b) The data exchange from an EDDS to a Data  Registry shall not be an unattended automatic 
electronic data exchange transaction.  
(c) The Registration Provider shall ensure the authorized user has the opportunity to review 
and revise the information transmitted to the data registry by use of an EDDS prior to 
making electronic signature controls available to the user.  
(d) The Registration Provider shall be responsible for managing the security and integrity of 
the data exchange with the EDDS.  
(e) The Registration Provider  shall ensure that user data uploads  to the EDDS , and 
subsequent storage and maintenance of compliance data in  the EDDS are done using best 
practices  for secure data exchange  and secure data storage . 
(f) The Registration Provider shall ensure that the data exchange processes that import data into the Data Registry from the EDDS are performed using best practices for secure data 
exchange.  
(g) The user's compliance  data may be uploaded automatically to an EDDS datastore , such as 
by ne twork- connected diagnostic field verification instruments, or it may be keyed in by 
the user using an EDDS services software user interface.  
(h) The data transmitted from an EDDS to a Data Registry shall conform to the XML schema 
for each respective Title 24 , Part 6 compliance document for which the data is to be used. 
All data provided to complete compliance documents shall be subjected to data validation by the Data Registry software after the data is transmitted to the Data Registry.  
(i) The current compliance document schemas  approved by the Energy Commission  shall be 
made available to the EDDS services providers as needed in order to clarify the Title 24 Part 6 compliance document data requirements.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 33  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  (j) Examples and additional guidance for how to comply with Joint Appendix JA7 regarding 
interfacing with and managing EDDS technical features are  included in the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual.  
JA7.7.1.2.2  EDDS Types  
EDDS types may include  but are not limited to : 
(a) Diagnostic instrument manufacturer services  that incorporate wireless or  web-based data 
logging capabilities  into their products , capture and store relevant information from field 
diagnostic testing procedures , and provide digital access to the stored data to the 
diagnostic tool owners and other parties to the field verification procedure . 
(b) Third party quality control p rogram s (TPQCP) services that verify the work of participating 
installers, collect and evaluate more detailed data than necessary for compliance, identify 
in real- time during the installation invalid and inaccurate installer testing and 
noncompliant installations, and enable corrected testing with the goal of bringing 
installations into compliance before the installer leaves the job site.  TPQCP descrip tions 
and requirements are specified in Appendix RA2.7 . 
(c) I nternet- based datastore services  that are administered  by an EDDS Provider to who 
ensures the security and integrity of data input to the datastore  service.  Authorized users 
of Title 24, Part 6 Data Registries  may elect to use EDDS datastore services for data input, 
and subsequently transmit the stored data to a Title 24, Part 6 Data Registry while logged -
in to the Data Registry during Title 24, Part 6 document registration procedures.  
JA7.7.1.3  Image File Format Specification for Document Registration 
Image files transmitted to a Data Registry that originate from an Energy Commission -managed  
compliance Report G enerator or approved compliance software as part of document registration 
procedures shall be non- editable "flat" image files in PDF format. Registered C ompliance 
Document images produced by a Data Registry shall be non- editable "flat" image files in PDF 
format. The PDF image of a Registered Compliance Document shall not be recreated from data 
when a user subsequently wishes to view a copy of  the registered document or download a PDF 
file copy of the document . Thus, the image shall be generated only once, and stored in the Data 
Registry  as a "non -editable" image file.  
JA7.7.1.4  Export to Commission Compliance Document Repository  
Contingent upon approval of a document repository by the Commission, upon conclusion of the registration of a document, the Data Registry shall immediately and automatically export a copy 
of the R egistered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package  to the Energy 
Commission Document Repository.  
The Compliance Registration Package  export shall conform to the specifications for data 
exchange described in JA7.6 and JA7.7 . 
Compliance Registration Package exports to the Commission Compliance Document Repository 
shall contain the Compliance Data Exchange File that includes the XML data representation of the    Appendix JA7- 34                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  information displayed on the R egistered Compliance Document, and the Registration Provider's 
digitally signed image file that represents the completed R egistered Compliance Document.  
Detailed guidance for  how to comply with requirements in JA7 concerning data and document 
exports to the document repository are included in the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.7.1.5  Electronic Copies of Registered Compliance Documents for Submittals  
Registered document files retained by a Data Registry shall be made available to authorized users 
of the Data Registry for download for use for electronic submittals. These electronic copies of the registered compliance documents shall have the Registration Provider's digital signature which provides for automatic electronic verification of the authenticity of the document. Refer to Section JA7.5.5 for more information about automatic verification of document authenticity using digital certificates.  
JA7.7.1.6  Security and Authentication for the Performance Certificate of Compliance  
The Title 24 , Part 6 residential and nonresidential compliance manager- based performance 
compliance software (compliance software) utilizes digital signing when generating analysis data 
for submission to the Compliance Report Generator  (RG) for creating the Certificate of 
Compliance.  Subsequently, the RG utilizes  digital signing of  the Certificate of Compliance 
Registration Package returned to the compliance software user  making available the capability 
for Data Registries to verify the authenticity of the compliance software output and confirm the 
data has not been tampered with .   
Data R egistries shall digitally inspect  all Certificate of Compliance Registration Package s 
submitted for registration to ensure both the Certificate of Compliance data and PDF image 
components of the compliance software output are authentic and have not been tampered with. Data Registries shall ensure that Certificate of Compliance Registration Packages that are not authentic or have been tampered with shall not be used for document registration for 
demonstrating compliance with Title 24 Part 6 . 
Detailed guidance for how to comply with requirements in JA7 concerning Data Registry use of the digital signing technologies employed by the compliance software and the RG are included  in 
the Data Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.8  Data Registry Approval  
This section explains the requirements for approval of Data Registries that provide services to authorized users for creating and registering documents required for compliance with Title 24, Part 6.  
The Commission shall perform acceptance testing of Data Registries when a Registration Provider submits an application for approval in order to confirm the requirements in Appendix JA7 have 
been met.  
When an application for approval includes use of external digital data sources (EDDS)  described  
in Section JA7.7.1 , the Energy Commission shall perform acceptance testing of the EDDS 
proposed to be used for data input by authorized users of the Data Registry.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 35  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  Detailed examples and  guidance for how to comply with requirements in JA7 concerning 
acceptance testing and approval procedures  for data registries and EDDS are included  in the Data 
Registry Requirements Manual.  
JA7.8 is not applicable to approval of compliance software used for the performance compliance 
method for demonstrating compliance with Part 6.  
JA7.8.1   Overview  
The approval procedure requires the Registration Provider applicant to perform self -testing of 
the required document registration capabilities .  
When the application for approval includes use of an EDDS, the EDDS services provider and the 
Registration Provider shall perform self -testing of the data exchange features proposed for 
approval, and confirm that the data exchange from the EDDS to the Data Registry provides 
accurate information to all applicable compliance document data fields for each compliance 
document for which the EDDS is proposed to be used for data input.  
The Commission shall subsequently perform acceptance  tests to verify that the proposed Data 
Registry is suitable for use for providing the compliance document registration functionality required by the Standards.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance  on alternative 
procedures  for the Energy Commission staff to perform acceptance testing of the document 
registration capabilities . 
The Registration Provider shall develop a user manual or online help screens that explain how to 
perform the document registration procedures offered by the Data Registry. The user manual or 
online help screens shall be reviewed by the Commission for accur acy and ease of use.  
JA7.8.2   Application Checklist  
Application for approval shall conform to all applicable requirements given in Standards Section s 
10-109 and 10 -110. The following is a list of the items that shall be included in an application 
package:  
JA7.8.2.1  Registration Provider Applicant Certification Statement.  
A statement from the Registration Provider applicant certifying the reliability and accuracy of the Data Registry when used for registration of Compliance Documents in accordance with the requirements of Standards Section 10 -103(a), App endix JA7 . Refer to the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual for additional guidance.  
The template for the Registration Provider Certification Statement document may be published 
in the Data Registry Requirements Manual, and electronic versions of the Registration Provider 
Certification Statement template shall be made available to the Registration Provider applicant 
upon request.     Appendix JA7- 36                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.8.2.2  Compliance Document Registration Self -Test Results .  
Electronic copies of the results from the Registration Provider's document registration self -tests 
shall be provided.  
Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for additional guidance on performing and 
reporting self -tests.  
JA7.8.2.3  User Manual  
A copy of the user manual for the Data Registry shall be provided in an electronic format that can 
be utilized by word processing software.  Help screens from the Data Registry user interface, organized into an electronic document file with a table of contents is an acceptable alternative to the requirement for a user manual.  
JA7.8.2.4  Data Registry User Account Access . 
Username  and password information shall be provided to allow access to the Data Registry for  
Energy Commission staff to perform acceptance testing of Data Registry functionality.  
The Registration Provider's digital signature public key shall be made available such that the digital signature on registered documents  produced by the Data Registry  can be tested.  
JA7.8.2.5  Application Fee and Other Administrative Requirements  
Data Registry approvals shall  conform to all applicable requirements and procedures specified in 
Standards Section 10 -109 and 10 -110. 
JA7.8.2.6  Disclosure of Contractual  Agreements with External Digital Data Sources  (EDDS)  
A working agreement document or contract shall be executed between a Registration Provider and an External Digital Data Source  (EDDS)  services provider as prerequisite  to approval of  the 
EDDS for use for  transmit tal of  data to the Data Registry for Title 24 , Part 6 document 
registration. The agreement shall describe the specifications of any Internet- based EDDS services  
or EDDS software utilized to store the compliance document data  on behalf of authorized users 
of the Data Registry , including description of any Internet- based data gateway interfaces  (such as 
an API)  used for sharing the compliance  data with third parties .  
Applications for approval of  a Data Registry  to use  EDDS services  shall include  documentation to 
disclose  the details of the working agreement(s)  or contract (s) between the Registration  Provider  
and EDDS  servic es Provider . This documentation shall include descriptions of the parties involved, 
and the technologies used for the data exchanges  between the EDDS  and the Data Registry.  
A separate agreement is required for each working relationship between a Data Registry and an EDDS.  EDDS services providers may be approved to provide services to any number of approved 
Registration Providers. Registration Providers may be approved  for use of any number of EDDS 
services  providers . Where a Registration Provider makes use of an Application Programming 
Interface (API), each EDDS that the API interfaces with must be approved.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 37  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  JA7.8.3    Types of Approval  
There are two Data Registry approval procedures: full approval as described in Section JA7.8.3.1 , 
and streamlined approval of amendment s and revisions  as described in Section JA7.8.3.2 . 
Approval of an EDDS services provider shall conform to the requirements of either Section 
JA7.8.3.1 or Section JA7.8.3.2, as applicable . Refer to the Data Registry Requirements Manual for 
additional guidance on  approval procedures . 
JA7.8.3.1  Full Approval 
Full approval by the Energy Commission shall be required when an applicant Registration 
Provider  has not previously been approved by the Energy Commission.  
Full approval by the Energy Commission shall be required whenever major changes are made to a Data Registry's functionality, security, or technology features that necessitate acceptance testing 
of more than 30% of the compliance document templates used in the applicant's Data Registry 
library.  
Full approval by the Energy Commission shall be required when the Standards are updated (re -
approval) . When Data Registry re -approval is mandated by the Energy Commission, all 
Registration Providers shall be notified of the re -approval timetable.  Refer to the Data Registry 
Requirements Manual for additional guidance  on the re -approval proc ess.  
Full approval shall ensure the Data Registry conforms to all applicable requirements for 
functionality and security in Appendix JA7 including but not limited to:  
(a) Capability to produce and manage registered documents (JA7.5).  
(b) Electronic signature capability , and manage authorization of users (JA7.6.3.2.1).  
(c) Document data validation (JA7.6.3.2.2).  
(d) Signer review and signature actions (JA7.6.3.2.3).  
(e) Digital signature and digital certificate actions (JA7.6.3.2.4).  
(f) Capability to transmit secured documents and data to the Commission Compliance Document Repository (JA7.6.3.2.5). 
(g) Document retention capability (JA7.6.3.2.6).  
(h) Capability to receive and process electronic  data using best practices for secure data 
exchange, using data sources and procedures  approved by the Energy Commission  for 
registering compliance documents (JA7.6.3.2.7 ; JA7.7 ). 
(i) Capability for data exchange with the compliance report generation services made 
available by the Energy Commission to generate formatted electronic documents ( JA7.2, 
JA7.7). 
JA7.8.3.2  Streamlined Approval of Amendments  and Revisions  
Amendments and revisions to  existing Data Registry software and services  for which full approval 
by the Energy Comm ission is not required , may be approved by the Executive Director through a 
streamlined process.     Appendix JA7- 38                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  Changes that qualify for streamlined approval include minor changes to the Data Registry 
document registration procedures, data input specifications and procedures , or registered 
compliance document output.  
Any application for amendment or revision to existing Data Registry software and services shall 
be accompanied by a cover letter explaining the type of amendment or revision requested, and 
copies of any applicable documents that are necessary to fully desc ribe and justify the proposed 
amendment or revision.  
All items on the application checklist in section JA7.8.2 that are applicable to the proposed amendment or revision shall be submitted.  
When Data Registry modifications qualify for streamlined approval, the following procedure shall 
be followed:  
(a) The Registration Provider applicant shall notify the Executive Director  in writing to provide 
a description of the change and the reason for making the change.  
(b) The Registration Provider applicant shall prepare an addendum to the user manual describing the change to the Data Registry if applicable.  
(c) The Executive Director  shall respond to the Registration Provider applicant  in accordance 
with the procedures specified in Standards Section 10 -110. The Executive Director  
response to the applicant may:  
1. Approve the modification;  
2. Request additional information;  
3. Refuse to approve the modification;  
4. Require the Registration Provider to submit results of additional acceptance tests 
applicable to the modification; or  
5. Require that the Registration Provider make specific changes to either the User Manual 
addendum or the Data Registry functionality.  
(d) Subject to approval by the Executive Director , the Registration Provider may make the 
modified Data Registry available for use for registration of compliance documentation, along with the modified user manual or addendum to the user manual, and shall notify authorized users of the Data Registry  when modifications to the Data Registry have been 
made available . 
JA7.8.4   Rescinding Approval (Deactivation) of Data Registries  
The Commission may rescind approval of Data Registries through various means  as described in 
this section.  
A revision  to the functionality of a Data Registry to discontinue  a working or contractual  
relationship between the Data Registry and an E xternal Digital Data Sourc e Provider : 
(a) Shall not be a procedure that initiates deactivation of the Data Registry .   2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 39  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  (b) Shall use the approval procedures specified in Sections JA7 .8.3.1 or JA7.8.3.2, as 
applicable.  
JA7.8.4.1  Procedures that Initiate Deactivation 
(a) All Data Registries are deactivated when the Standards undergo substantial changes, usually 
occurring with each Standards update. However, the Data Registry shall remain approved to 
provide document registration for projects that have been permitted under the prior versions of the Standards.  
(b) Any Data Registry can be deactivated by a letter from the Registration Provider requesting that the Data Registry be deactivated. The deactivation request shall briefly describe the reasons that justify the need for deactivation.  
(c) The Executive Director may at any time, including upon petition by any party  or 
recommendation by Commission staff , initiate a review of a Data Registry approval according 
to the steps outlined in Section JA7.8.4.2 below. The intent is to provide a means whereby serious Data Registry errors, violations of JA7, flawed numeric results, or improper registered 
document output not discovered in the Data Registry approval proce ss can be verified, and a 
corrective course of action determined. Also, the intent is to provide ample opportunity for the Commission, the Registration Provid er, and all interested parties to evaluate any alleged 
errors in the Data Registry functionality.  
JA7.8.4.2  Challenging a Data Registry and Initiating Deactivation  
A description of the process for challenging a Data Registry or initiating a deactivation procedure follows:  
(a) Any party may request a review of a Data Registry approval by submitting a petition to the 
Energy Commission's Executive Director. petition shall:  
1. State the name of the Data Registry that contains the alleged errors  or violations of the 
Registration Provider’s obligations under JA7 ; 
2. Identify concisely the nature of the alleged errors or violations of the Registration 
Provider’s obligations under JA7 in the Data Registry that require review;  
3. Explain why the alleged errors are serious enough in their effect on document 
registration compliance to justify a deactivation procedure; and 
4. Include appropriate data electronically (in a format agreed to by the Executive Director) and/or information sufficient to evaluate the alleged errors  or violations of 
JA7. 
(b) The Executive Director shall make a copy or copies of the  petition or Commission Staff’s 
recommendation report available  to the Registration Provider and interested parties 
within 30 days. Comments from interested parties shall be received within 60 days of the acceptance of the original application.  
(c) Within 75 days of receipt of the petition or recommendation report , the Executive Director 
may request any additional information needed to evaluate the alleged Data Registry errors or violations of the Registration Provider’s obligations under JA7  from the party who    Appendix JA7- 40                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  initiated the deactivation review process. If the additional information is incomplete, this 
procedure will be delayed until the initiating party submits complete information.  
(d) Within 75 days of receipt of the petition or recommendation report, the Executive Director may convene a workshop to gather additional information from the initiating party, the 
Registration Provider and interested parties. All parties will have 15 days after the 
workshop to submit additional information regarding the al leged Data Registry errors  or 
alleged violations of the Registration Provider’s obligations under JA7 .  
(e) Within 90 days after the Executive Director receives the petition or recommendation report or within 30 days after receipt of complete additional information requested of the 
initiating party, whichever is later, the Executive Director shall either:  
1. Determine that the Data Registry need not be deactivated; or  
2. Submit to the Energy Commission a written recommendation that the Data Registry be 
deactivated.  
(f) If the Energy Commission approves the Data Registry deactivation, it shall take effect 60 
days later. During the first 30 days of the 60 day period, the Executive Director shall send out a Notice to Enforcement Agencies and Interested Parties announcing the deactivation.   
JA7.8.4.3  Burden of Proof  
All initiating parties have the burden of proof to establish that the review of alleged Data Registry 
errors should be granted. The deactivation process may be terminated at any time by mutual 
written consent of the initiating party and the Executive Direc tor.  
The Registration Provider may use the 180 to 210 -day period outlined here to update the Data 
Registry, get it re -approved by the Commission, and make available for use by authorized users 
the revised version of the Data Registry that does not contain the errors or violations ini tially 
brought to the attention of the Commission.   
JA7.8.5   Data Registry User Manual  
Each Registration Provider is required to publish a Data Registry User Manual. This requirement may be met by incorporating help screens into the Data Registry user interface , or making 
electronic tutorials readily available to users.  A printed or electronic version which includes all 
help screen items or tutorials must be submitted with the application. The Data Registry User Manual shall provide guidance for building permit applicants and enforcement agency officials to 
enable correct use of the Data Regi stry, and assists with preparation of registered documentation 
used for submittals to enforcement agencies and other parties to the construction project.  
The Document Registration Manual shall describe the specific Data Registry procedures for completing registered compliance documents. The manual shall provide instructions for preparing the data input and for utilizing the registered documents for submittals. An example of 
a full set of compliance documents for a building project shall be included.  
Data Registry User Manuals shall be written in a clear and concise manner and with an 
organization and format that will allow users to quickly locate the topic and understand the 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA7- 41  
Appendix JA7 – Data Registry Requirements  instructions. Also, Registration Providers shall make electronic copies of their user manual 
available from their Data Registry website to all building departments in California.  
Portions of a Data Registry User Manual that are incorporated as help screens into the Data Registry user interface do need not be published separately; their inclusion into the user 
interface satisfies the requirements of this subsection.  
The following sections describe the information that shall be included in all Data Registry User 
Manuals. It also presents the required organization for that information.  
JA7.8.5.1  Data Registry Capabilities  
This section shall discuss the Data Registry capabilities, providing explanation of how to access these capabilities, and the purpose for each of these features.  
JA7.8.5.2  Preparing Basic Documents  
This section shall cover the basic use of the Data Registries to prepare each of the basic Compliance Document types , and should include a complete summary of all document creation 
methods or commands necessary to complete the required registered documents.  
JA7.8.5.3  Instruction for Submittal of the Registered Document(s) 
This section shall contain instruction for completing submittals of completed registered documents to enforcement agencies or other persons who require copies of completed registered documents.  Instruction shall be given for all methods of submittal the Data Registry 
supports, including various methods for submittal of electronic copies of the registered 
documents, as well as for printing of paper copies . 
JA7.8.5.4  Sample Compliance Documentation  
This section shall include an example of a complete set of compliance documentation for a sample building. The building need not be overly complex, nor need it include every document type possible. The example should, however, include example documentation for all c ompliance 
document types that would normally be submitted for typical occupancy types administered by 
the Data Registry.  
JA7.8.5.5  Instruction for Use of EDDS  for Data Input for Document Registration   
When a Data Registry is approved to make available use of EDDS features to authorized users of the Data Registry for data input during document registration procedures, the Data Registry user 
manual shall include instructions for use of those features.  The instructions shall describe use of 
the Data Registry user interface for EDDS data input procedures. Additionally, if the EDDS services provider has a user interface or software application that the user is expected to access and 
operate  that is independent of the Data Registry user interface, a copy of the EDDS service or 
software user  instructions shall be included in  the Data Registry  User M anual.  If the EDDS service 
or software user instructions contain proprietary information or intellectual propert y, the EDDS  
service or software user instructions do not need to be included in the Data Registry User    Appendix JA7- 42                                                                                                     2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 7 – Data Registry Requirements  Manual. However, the EDDS service or software user instructions must be made available to all 
authorized users that use the EDDS service or software.  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8-1 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  Joint Appendix JA8  
Appendix JA8   – Qualification Requirements for High 
Luminous Efficacy Light Source s 
JA8.1  Purpose and Scope  
Joint Appendix JA8 provides the qualification requirements for high luminous efficacy light 
sources installed to comply with Section 150.0(k).  For the purposes of this Section, high luminous 
efficacy light sources include ballast s or LED drivers if needed for operation of the light source : 
light sources shall be certified together with a driver or ballast. If the light source is inseparable 
from the luminaire the entire luminaire shall meet the requirements of this section. All qualifying 
light sources shal l be certified to the Energy Commission according to all of the requirements  in 
this Appendix . 
JA8.2  Certification of Test Labs 
The light source under test shall be tested at a testing laboratory accredited to  ISO/IEC 
17025:2017, by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or other laboratory accreditation body operating in accordance with ISO/IEC 17011 and produced under an ongoing inspection program carried out by a Type A inspection body in accordance with ISO/IEC 17020.  
JA8.3  Tests to be performed  
Compliance with the requirements of this Appendix shall be determined by performance of the following test procedures, as applicable to the type of light source.  
Sample group size shall be as specified in the referenced test procedures . Where a sample group 
is not specified for a test, a single unit shall be tested.  
JA8.3.1   Luminous Efficacy Test  
For federally regulated light  sources, luminous efficacy shall be determined by the test 
procedures specified in 10 CFR 429 Subpart B and 10 CFR 430 .23(gg).  
For non -federally  -regulated light sources, luminous efficacy at full light output shall be 
determined by the following test procedures, as applicable to the type of light source:  
a) F or incandescent and incandescent reflector lamps: 10CFR 430.23(r).  
b) For medium base compact fluorescent lamps: 10CFR 430.23(w).  
c) For general service fluorescent lamps: 10CFR 430.23(r).  
d) For fluorescent lamps that are not Medium base compact fluorescent lamps and general 
service fluorescent lamps: IES LM -9. 
a) For LED light sources, IES LM -79.  Appendix JA8-2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  b) For high intensity discharge lamps, IES LM -51. 
c) For induction lamps, IES LM -66. 
The reported value shall be the minimum luminous efficacy of the tested units and be rounded to 
the nearest tenth.  
JA8.3.2   Power Factor Test  
Power factor shall be measured at full light output in accordance with ANSI C82.77, Section 6 and 
7.  
For lamps , the reported value shall be the average measured values of  the tested units rounded 
to be the nearest tenth.  
For all other sources , the reported value shall be the minimum power factor of the tested  units 
rounded to the nearest tenth. 
JA8.3.3   Start Time Test  
Start time shall be measured in accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program Requirements 
Product Specifications for Lamps 2 .1: Start Time Test Method as specified in Section  JA8.7, 
notwithstanding the scope of the test, subject to the following modifications:  
For lamps the reported value shall be the average start time of the tested units rounded to the 
nearest millisecond.  
For all other light sources , the reported value shall be the maximum start time of the tested units 
rounded to the nearest millisecond.  
For light sources that provide a fade -i n feature, the initial plateau shall be the point specified in 
Section JA8.7.1the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR Program Requirements 
for Lamps and Luminaires Start Time Test Method dated October  2017. 
For light sources with a standby mode consuming no more than 0.2 watts of power, the start 
time test may be performed with the product receiving power and in this mode. In this case, the start time shall be the time between the sending of an on signal to the device via an appropriate 
control and the initial plateau.  
JA8.3.4   
Color Characteristics Tests 
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) and Color Rendering Index of federally  -regulated light 
sources shall be determined by the test procedures specified in 10 CFR 429 Subpart B and 10 CFR 430.23(gg).  
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) and Color Rendering Index of non- f
 ederally  -regulated light 
sources shall be determined by the following test procedures, as applicable to the type of light 
source: 
a) I ncandescent and halogen reflector lamps: IES LM- 20.  
b) Incandescent non- reflector lamps: IES LM -45. 
c) Single ended compact fluorescent lamps: IES LM- 66.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8-3 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  d) Fluorescent lamps that are not single ended compact fluorescent lamps: IES LM- 9. 
a) Induction lamps: IES LM- 66. 
b) LED light sources: IES LM 79.  
c) High intensity discharge lamps: IES LM -51. 
d) Other equipment: other applicable test procedure approved by the Executive Director  
Nominal Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be calculated in accordance with CIE 15 
(reference document ANSI C78.377).  Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be calculated in 
accordance with CIE 13.3.   
The reported value shall be the average measured values of units tested rounded to be the 
nearest whole number for CRI.   
JA8.3.5   RESERVED  
JA8.3.6   RESERVED  
JA8.3.7   Tests for Minimum Dimming Level, Flicker , and Audible Noise  
Light sources shall be tested for flicker using Joint Appendix 10.  
The audible noise test shall be performed as specified in the ENERGY STAR Program 
Requirements Product Specification for Lamps Version 2 .1: Noise  Test Method as specified in 
Section JA8.8 – Noise, notwithstanding scope .  
Minimum dimming level is measured by comparing the stabilized light output of the light source 
with the dimming control set to full light output with the dimming control being set to the 
manufacturer’s minimum rated output.  Full light output and minimum light output is measured after the light output has stabilized according to the test procedures specific to light source type in Section JA 8.3.1.  
In addition to the reporting of flicker results as described in Section  JA8.6, flicker test data for 
each combination of light source, ballast or driver (if applicable), transformer type and dimmer type claiming compliance with JA8 shall be submitted to the California Energy Commission.  
Testing for minimum dimming level,  flicker, and audible noise is required for each combination of 
light source, ballast or driver (if applicable), transformer type and dimmer type as follows:  
a) Low voltage light sources shall be tested with a representative transformer for each  
transformer type that the light source is claiming compatibility .  
b) Light sources claimed  as compatible with forward phase -cut dimmers shall be tested in 
combination with a NEMA SSL 7A compliant dimmer.  
c) Light sources claimed  as compatible with dimmers other than forward phase -cut 
dimmers, dimmability, low noise and low flicker operation shall be tested for each ballast 
or driver combination (if applicable) with at least one representative dimmer for each dimmer type for which compatibility is claimed.   Appendix JA8-4 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  JA8.4  Qualification Requirements  
The following qualification requirements must be met for the light source to be considered High 
Luminous Efficacy as specified in Section 150(k)  and Table 150.0 -A. 
JA8.4.1   Lumin ous Efficacy  
The light source shall meet the following requirements when measured in accordance with the test method of Section JA8.3.1:  
The luminous efficacy of the light source shall be equal to or greater than either the applicable State or federal appliance efficiency standard or 45 lumens/Watt, whichever is higher,  when 
tested at its full light output. 
JA8.4.2   Power Factor  
The light source shall meet the following requirements when measured in accordance with the 
test method of Section JA8.3.2:  
The light source shall have a power factor equal to or greater than 0.90 when tested at its full 
light output.  
JA8.4.3   Start Time  
The light source shall meet the following requirements when measured in accordance with the test method of Section JA8.3.3:  
The light source shall have a start time no greater than 0.5 seconds.  
JA8.4.4  Color Characteristics  
The light source shall meet the following CCT and color rendering  requirements when measured 
in accordance with the test method of Section JA8.3.4:  
a) LED lamps regulated by the Title 20 Appliance Efficiency Regulations and subject to Color Rendering Index requirements under Title 20 shall comply with the Color Rendering Index 
requirements in Title 20.    
b) All other light source s shall provide a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 90 or higher and color 
rendering R9 value of 50 or higher.  
c) All light sources shall be capable of providing a nominal Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 4000 Kelvin or less. 
JA8.4.5   RESERVED  
JA8.4.6   Dimming, Reduced Flicker Operation and Audible Noise  
The light source shall meet the following dimming, reduced flicker operation, and audible noise requirements  when measured in accordance with the test method of Section JA8.3.7 : 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8-5 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  a) The light source shall be dimmable down to 10 percent light output where 100 percent 
full light output is defined as operating the light source at the maximum setting provided 
by the control . 
b) LED- based light sources designed to be connected with or dimmed by forward phase cut 
dimmers shall meet the requirements of NEMA standard SSL 7A.  
c) Light source in combination with specified control shall provide “reduced flicker operation” when tested at full light output as specified in JA10 , where reduced flicker 
operation is defined as having percent amplitude modulation (percent flicker) less than 30 percent at frequencies less than 200Hz.  
d) Light source shall not emit audible noise above 24dBA measured at 1 meter from the light 
source  when tested at full light output. 
e) Light sources shall also be tested and shown to comply with (c) and (d) while at 20% light output. 
JA8.5  Marking 
Light sources meeting the requirements of this Appendix shall be marked with “ JA8-2025” to 
indicate their compliance with the criteria of this Appendix. Light sources that have passed the Elevated Temperature Life Test specified in the ENERGY STAR Product Specification for Lamps Version 2.1 , or that have passed the rated life test specified in the ENERGY STAR Product 
Specification for Luminaires Version 2. 1, shall instead be marked with “JA8 -2025- E” to indicate 
that they comply with this Appendix  and may additionally be installed in elevated temperature 
applications such as enclosed fixtures. Light sources that do not comply with this Appendix  shall 
not be marked with “JA8 -2025” or “ JA8-2025- E”.  
JA8.6  Data Reporting  
The following test data shall be submitted to the California Energy Commission in the format specified in Table JA -8. The entity submitting the filing shall keep all test data and documentation 
required for compliance for at least two years from the date of certification and shall provide copies of this documentation to the Energy Commission within 10 days of written request received from the Energy Commission.  
 
   Appendix JA8-6 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  TABLE JA- 8. DATA TO BE RECORDED AND SUBMITTED TO THE CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION  
Required Information  Permissible Answers  Compliance Threshold  
Manufacturer, Model number, 
Description  NA NA 
Light Source Type  LED, OLED, Fluorescent, HID, 
Incandescent, Other  NA 
Product type  Omnidirectional lamp, 
Directional lamp , Decorative  
lamp, LED light engine, 
inseparable SSL luminaire, 
T20 lamp, other  NA 
Lab accredited by NVLAP or 
accreditation body operating in 
accordance with ISO/IEC 17011  Yes/No  Yes 
Initial  Luminous  Efficacy  Value ( lumens/Watt) ≥ 45 l umens/Watt 
Power Factor at Full Rated Power  0 – 1 Fraction  ≥ 0.90  
Start time  Value (seconds ) ≤ 0.5 sec  
Correlated Color Temperature 
(CCT)  Number Kelvin  ≤4000 Kelvin.  
Color Rendering Index (CRI) 0-100  ≥ 90 for all products other 
than T20 lamps, ≥ 82 for 
T20 lamps     
Color Rendering R9 (red)  0-100 or below 0  ≥ 50  for all products other 
than T20 lamps  
Ambient or elevated temperature  Ambient or Elevated  NA 
Minimum dimming level  Value (percent)  ≤ 10%  
Dimming control compatibility  Forward Phase cut control, 
reverse phase cut, powerline carrier, digital, 0 -10 VDC, 
other.  At least one type must be listed  
NEMA SSL 7A compatible?  Yes/No , NA If compatible with forward 
phase cut dimmer control, 
“Yes” .  If not, “N A”. 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8- 7 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  Required Information  Permissible Answers  Compliance Threshold  
Flicker: See JA10 Table 10 -1 for 
flicker data requirements and 
permissible answers  NA <30% for frequencies of 200 Hz or below , at 100% 
light output 
<30% for frequencies of 200 Hz or below, at 20% 
light output     
Audible Noise:  
100% light output: Audible Noise  
20% light output: Audible Noise  Value (dBA)  ≤ 24 dBA  
Marking: Marked in accordance 
with JA8.5  Yes/No  Yes 
   Appendix JA8-8 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  JA8.7 Start Time Test Method  
JA8.7.1  Definitions  
Device Under Test (DUT): the integrated LED lamp, LED light engine, or LED luminaire which is 
undergoing the start time test.  
Start Time: the time between the application of power to the DUT and the point where the light 
source is continuously illuminated, and the light output is either constant or increasing.  DUTs 
with integral controls (e.g., motion sensors, photosensors, wireless control, standby mode, or 
connected functionality) may have these controls disabled or bypassed for this testing.  
Initial Plateau: the point at which the average increase in the light output over time levels out 
(reduces in slope). This can be determined mathematically or visually based on the output trace.  
JA8.7.2  Methods Of Measurement and Reference Documents  
IES LM -79-19. 
JA8.7.3  Test Setup  
A. Test Setup and Instrumentation:  
1. Regulated AC or DC power supply (as applicable to the DUT)  
2. Multichannel oscilloscope with data storage capability  
3. Appropriate attenuator probes  
4. Photodetector 
B. Seasoning and Preburning: SSL sources shall not be seasoned.  
C. Input Power for Start Time Measurements: The power requirements shall be per IES LM- 79-
19 as applicable. When selecting a power supply for use with integrated lamps and 
luminaires, it is necessary to apply an appropriate power factor when specifying the Volt- Amp 
capacity of the power supply.  
D. Storage: Lamps and luminaires shall be stored at 25°C ± 5°C for a minimum of 16 hours prior 
to the test, after which the temperature range shall be 25°C ± 1°C for at least two hours 
immediately prior to the test.  
E. Ambient Temperature: Testing shall take place in an ambient temperature of 25°C ± 1°C. 
Drafts shall be minimized.  
F. Power Meter: Power meters shall be capable of measuring to the appropriate requirements 
of IES LM- 79-19 as applicable.  
G. Environmental Conditions: The test environment shall be clean and free from large amounts 
of dust and moisture.  
H. Orientation: Test samples in orientation(s) as specified by the ENERGY STAR specification or 
manufacturer specified position if different.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8-9 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  I. Sample Selection: Samples shall be representative of the manufacturer’s typical product. The 
samples shall be clean and thoroughly inspected before testing. Any flaws or inconsistencies 
in the DUT samples shall be noted.  
 
JA8.7.4  Test Conduct  
Photometric Measurements:  
A. For integrating sphere measurements, refer to IES-LM- 79-19 as applicable.  
B. For non -integrating sphere measurements, the photodetector used for photometric 
measurements shall be a silicon detector corrected to closely fit the Commission 
Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) spectral luminous efficiency curve (Vil).  
 JA8.7.5  Test Procedure
 
A. Install the DUT in the test environment. The driver may be external to the test environment, if 
applicable.  
B. For non -integrating sphere measurements, position the photocell so it sees the main body of 
the discharge tube or array (as applicable). Shield from extraneous light as needed.  
C. For integrating sphere measurements, see test conduct section JA8.7.4  
D. When testing DUTs with sensors (e.g. motion sensors, photosensors) the sensors may be 
disabled or bypassed for this testing.  
E. Connect oscilloscope probe to measure the input voltage to the sample, and light output.  
F. Set the scope to trigger off the input voltage signal. Set trigger level at 10V.  
G. Set power supply to rated voltage and frequency of the DUT. If a range is specified, test 
sample at the midpoint of the range.  
H. Use an exemplar sample to determine the proper voltage and time base settings. Suggested 
initial time base is 200 ms/div.  
I. Apply rated voltage/frequency to the DUT.  
J. Record the input voltage and light output waveform on which the starting time was based.  
K. Record Start Time.  
   Appendix JA8- 10 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  JA8.8 Nois e Test Method 
JA8.8.1  Definitions  
Unit Under Test: The unit under test (UUT) refers the the specific lamp sample being tested.  
Baseline Light Output: The baseline light output (BLO) refers to the stabilized light output of the 
unit under test (UUT) is operating without a dimmer in the circuit.  
Maximum Control Position: The setting on the dimmer or control device intended to achieve the 
maximum light output during operation.  
Maximum Light Output: The maximum light output (MaxLO) refers to the light output of the UUT 
when operating with a dimmer in the circuit at the Maximum Control Position.  
Minimum Dimming Level Claimed: The minimum light output level of a UUT when operated with 
a dimmer in the circuit, as declared by the lamp manufacturer. Typically expressed as a 
percentage. 
Minimum Light Output: The minimum light output (MinLO) refers to the minimum light output 
when the UUT is operating with a dimmer in the circuit.  
Peak Noise: The highest time -averaged sound value recorded at a measurement point during 
stable operation of the UUT.  
 
JA8.8.2  Methods Of Measurement a nd Reference Documents  
A. IES LM -79-19. 
B. ISO 7574 -4 B.2.1: 1985. Statistical methods for determining and verifying stated noise 
emission values of machinery and equipment, International Organization for Standardization, 
Geneva, Swizerland.  
C. ASA S12.55 -2006/ISO3745:2003: 2006. Acoustical Society of America, New York. 
 JA8.8.3  Recommended Practice Test Setup
 
A. Test Setup and Instrumentation: The test can be performed using a single microphone and 
rotating the product, or by using multiple microphones. Equipment required for 
measurement is as follows:  
1. Regulated AC or DC power supply (as applicable to the UUT or transformer).  
2. Multichannel oscilloscope with data storage capability or similar equipment for comparing 
output readings from a photodetector.  
3. Appropriate attenuator probe(s), if applicable.  
4. Photodetector capable of measuring relative light output.  
5. Noise level measurement equipment.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8- 11 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  6. Microphone(s). 
7. Isolated sound chamber (e.g., anechoic chamber).  
B. Lamp Seasoning and Preburning: LED lamps shall not be seasoned.  
C. Input Power for Measurements: The power requirements shall be per IES LM- 79-19 as 
applicable. Note: When selecting a power supply, it is necessary to apply an appropriate 
power factor when specifying the Volt- Amp rating of the power supply.  
D. Ambient Temperature: testing of the UUT shall take place in an ambient temperature of 25°C 
± 5°C. Drafts shall be minimized.  
E. Power Meter: Power meters shall be capable of measuring to the appropriate requirements 
of IES LM -79-19 as applicable.  
F. Environmental Conditions: The test environment shall be clean and free from large amounts 
of dust and moisture.  
G. Sample Selection: Samples shall be representative of the manufacturer’s typical product. The 
samples shall be clean and thoroughly inspected before testing. Any flaws or inconsistencies 
in the samples shall be noted. The samples used for noise testing shal l be the same sample(s) 
used for testing for meeting  Joint Appendix JA10 , if applicable, and can be the same sample(s) 
used for other testing.  
  
JA8.8.4  Test Conduct - Guidance for Noise Test Procedure  
A. Photometric Measurements:  
1. For absolute measurements, refer to IES LM -79-19 as applicable with the exception of the 
guidance for stabilization.  
2. The photodetector used for photometric measurements shall be a silicon detector 
corrected to closely fit the Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) spectral 
luminous efficiency curve (Vil).  
Ensure that the measurement equipment receives the appropriate voltage range from the 
photodetector, using an amplifier if necessary.  
B. Measurement Equipment:  
1. The sound chamber shall provide an environment suitable for the sound testing of the 
UUT. External sources of noise shall be minimized.  
2. The sound measurement equipment shall be capable of measuring A -weighted decibels.  
3. The microphone(s) shall be placed at a distance of one (1) meter or less from the UUT to 
be measured.  
i) If multiple microphones are used, 6 microphones shall be placed about the UUT 
spaced 90° apart and aimed at the UUT.   Appendix JA8- 12 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  ii) If a single microphone is used, the microphone shall be aimed at the UUT and the UUT 
holding device shall be capable of moving and holding the UUT so that six 
measurements about the UUT can be made 90° apart.  
4. The sound level of the UUT shall be calculated from the measurement taken.  
i) The baseline level may be corrected for in accordance with ISO 7574 -4:1985, B.2.1.  
ii) ANSI standard S12.55 -2006/ISO3745:2003 may be used as a reference document for 
other aspects of the measurements (calibration, etc.).  
C. Reserved  
D. Low Voltage UUTs  
1. UUTs designed for operation on low voltage transformers shall be operated on a 
compatible transformer specified or supplied by the lamp manufacturer.  
2. Electrical measurements shall include characteristics of the UUT.  
E. Measurements: 
1. The following data shall be collected at each measurement point:  
i) Light output.  
ii) Peak Noise Reading.  
iii) Microphone Position at which the Peak Noise Reading occurs (e.g., 0 degrees / 
opposite lamp base).  
JA8.8.5  Test Procedure f or Products Claiming Dimmability  
JA8.8.5.1  General Test Procedures for Noise at Baseline output : 
A. Install the UUT in the test environment without a dimmer in the circuit.  
B. Set power supply to rated voltage and frequency of the device. If a range is specified, test 
sample at the midpoint of the range.  
C. Record noise readings from measurement equipment to determine sound level in dBA. This is 
the control noise level.  
D. Apply rated voltage/frequency to the device.  
E. Allow UUT to stabilize per IES LM -79-19 as applicable. If lamp has been stabilized for 
measurements previously and the stabilization time recorded, the lamp may be considered 
stabilized after operating for this period of time.  
F. Record noise readings as specified in Section 8.8.4.E from measurement equipment about the 
UUT to determine the peak sound level in dBA. This is the noise at the Baseline Light Output 
(BLO).  
G. If using a single microphone, note the position with the highest sound level (if applicable).  
H. Remove power from UUT. 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA8- 13 
Appendix JA8 – Qualification Requirements for High Luminous Efficacy Light Sources  JA8.8.5.2 General Test Procedures for Noise on a Dimmer  
A. Install dimmer into the UUT test circuit.  The dimmer shall be located outside of the sound 
chamber. 
B. Apply rated voltage/frequency to the dimmer or control device.  
C. Adjust dimmer to the maximum control position.  
D. Allow UUT to stabilize and verify by taking light output measurements every minute until 
consecutive measurements are no more than 0.5% apart, utilizing previously recorded UUT 
stabilization time or verify by mathematical means that the lamp is stabilized.  
E. Record noise readings as specified in Section 8.8.4.E from measurement equipment about the 
UUT to determine the peak sound level in dBA. This is the noise at the MaxLO.  
F. Adjust dimmer so that the light output is the lower of:  
1. 20% of the MaxLO ± 5%; or  
2. The minimum dimming level claimed as a percentage of the MaxLO ± 5%.  
G. Allow UUT to stabilize and verify by taking light output measurements every minute until 
consecutive measurements are no more than 0.5% apart, utilizing previously recorded UUT 
stabilization time or verify by mathematical means that the lamp is stabilized.  
H. Verify that the UUT light output is still within the range in F).  
1. If not, repeat step A) and G).  
2. If light output is within range, record noise readings as specified in Section 8.8.4.E from 
measurement equipment about the UUT to determine the peak sound level in dBA. This is 
the noise at MinLO.  
I. Repeat step A thru H  as specified in JA8.8.5.2 for each dimmer to be tested. A test setup that 
includes a device that allows hot switching between dimmers may be utilized to bypass 
stabilization time.  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA9- 1  
Appendix JA9 – Qualification Requirements for Low Leakage Air -Handling Units  Joint Appendix JA9  
Appendix JA9  – Qualification Requirements for Low Leakage 
Air-Handling Units  
Contents  
Appendix JA9 – Qualification Requirements for Low Leakage Air -Handling Units  ...................... 1 
JA9.1  Purpose and Scope  ................................................................................................ 1 
JA9.2  Qualification Requirements  .................................................................................... 2 
JA9.2.1 Method of Test  ................................................................................................... 2 
JA9.2.2 Testing Laboratory Requirements  ......................................................................... 2 
JA9.2.3 Nominal Air- Handling Unit Airflow  ........................................................................ 2 
JA9.2.4 Leakage Criterion for Qualification  ........................................................................ 2 
 
JA9.1  Purpose and Scope  
Joint Appendix JA9 provides the qualification requirements for air- handling units to meet the 
requirements for low leakage air- handling unit compliance credit(s) available in the performance 
standards set forth in Title 24, Part 6, Sections 150.1(b) , and 140.1, and 170.1. Joint Appendix JA9 
is applicable to air- handling units intended for installation in ducted forced- air space conditioning 
systems. Joint Appendix JA9 is applicable to air- handling units that are rated by the manufacturer 
to move less than 3,000 cfm (1400 L/s) of air.  
Air-handling unit equipment types include:  
(a) furnaces  
(b) heat pumps  
(c) air conditioners  
Joint Appendix JA9 does not apply to coil boxes, filter boxes, or other duct system components 
that are not an integral part of the air -handling unit cabinet or enclosure certified by the 
manufacturer.  
Joint Appendix JA9 does not apply to ducts, plenums, or other field- constructed components.      Appendix JA9- 2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA9 – Qualification Requirements for Low Leakage Air -Handling Units  JA9.2  Qualification Requirements  
To qualify as a low leakage air- handling unit for use for compliance with applicable performance 
compliance credits, the air- handling unit shall be certified to the Energy Commission according to 
the following requirements:  
JA9.2.1   Method of Test  
The air- handling unit shall be tested in accordance with the requirements given in ASHRAE 
Standard 193.   
JA9.2.2   Testing Laboratory Requirements  
The Air- Handling Unit shall be tested in a laboratory that has demonstrated compliance with ISO 
Standard 17025, General Criteria for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories, 
and is accredited for the ASHRAE Standard 193 test methods. The accreditation body shall be a signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement  (ILAC MRA) www.ilac.org .  
JA9.2.3   Nominal Air -Handling Unit Airflow  
The nominal air- handling unit airflow used for determining the leakage criterion for qualification 
shall be as follows:  
(a)  For heating -only systems the nominal air- handling unit airflow shall be 21.7 cfm per 
kBtu/hr of rated heating output capacity.  
(b) For systems that provide space cooling, the nominal air- handling unit airflow shall be 400 
cfm per nominal ton of cooling capacity as specified by the manufacturer, or the heating -
only value, whichever is greater.  
JA9.2.4   Leakage Criterion for Qualification  
Allowable leakage for qualification as a Low Leakage Air- Handling Unit shall be equal to or less 
than 1.4 percent of the nominal air -handling unit airflow determined by Section JA9.2.3.  2025 Joint Appendices    Appendix JA10-1  
Appendix JA10 – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting Systems and Reporting Requirements  Joint Appendix JA10  
Appendix JA10  – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting 
Systems and Reporting Requirements 
JA10.1  Introduction 
This test method quantifies flicker from lighting systems which may include all of the following 
components: lamps, light sources, transformers, ballasts or drivers , and dimming controls. This 
test method measures the fluctuation of light from lighting systems and processes this signal to 
quantify flicker as a percent amplitude modulation (percent flicker) below a given cut-off 
frequency. Signal processing is used  to remove high frequency components  above the cut off-
frequency.  
JA10.2  Equipment Combinations 
The test results measured using this method are specific to each combination of:  
• Light source  and a representative dimmer ; or  
• Low voltage lamp together with a representative transformer and a representative 
dimmer (if applicable); or 
• Light source and a representative dimming control (if applicable); or  
• Light source together with a representative driver, and a representative dimming control 
(if applicable); or  
• Light source together with a representative ballast, and a representative dimming control (if applicable) .  
If the control or transformer requires a greater load th an what is provided by a single sample of 
the unit under test, additional load will be created by adding quantities of the identical light source, and ballast or driver if applicable on the same circuit receiving the control signal.  
Flicker measurements of a phase cut dimmer controlling an incandescent line voltage lamp shall be considered representative for that dimmer with any line voltage incandescent lamp.  
Flicker measurements of a phase cut dimmer controlling a transformer for low voltage incandescent lamps shall be representative only for that combination of dimmer and transformer 
with any incandescent lamp.  
Flicker measurements of all non -incandescent lamp sources controlled by a phase cut dimmer 
represents only the specific combination of phase cut dimmer, ballast or driver, and lamp. These 
results cannot be applied to other combinations of dimmer, ballast, driver or lamp.  Appendix JA10-2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 10 – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting Systems and Reporting Requirements  Flicker measurements of light sources controlled by 0 -10 volt control, digital control, wireless 
control or powerline carrier control, the flicker measurement is specific to that combination of 
control type and ballast or driver and lamp. Test results of the lamp and ballast or driver combination can be applied to other systems that have another control of the same type (0 -10 
volt, digital, etc.) providing the control signal.  
JA10.3  Test Equipment Requirements  
Test Enclosure: The test enclosure does not admit stray light to ensure the light measured comes only from the UUT (unit under test). Provision shall be made so the test enclosure is able to maintain a constant temperature of 25°C ±5°C.  
Device for data collection:  Light output waveform shall be measured with a photodetector with a 
rise time of 10 microseconds or less, transimpedance amplifier and oscilloscope. An alternate measurement system providing the same accuracy and function as the specified equipment may be used. 
Temporal response, amplification and filtering characteristics of the system shall be designed to 
capture the photometric data at intervals of 50 microseconds or less, corresponding to a data recording rate of no less than 20 kHz, and shall be capable of capturing at least 1 second of data.  
JA10.4  Flicker Test Conditions  
Product wiring setup: Fluorescent ballasts shall be wired in accordance to the guidelines provided in the DOE ballast luminous efficiency test procedure in 10 CFR 430.23(q).  
Product pre -conditioning: All fluorescent lamps shall be seasoned (operated at full light output) 
at least 100 hours before initiation of the test. Seasoning of other lamps types is not required.  
Input power: Input power to UUT (unit under test), shall be provided at the rated primary voltage and frequency within 0.5  percent for both voltage and frequency. When ballasts are labeled for a 
range of primary voltages, the ballasts should be operated at the primary application voltage. The voltage shall have a sinusoidal wave shape and have a voltage total harmonic distortion (THD)  of 
no greater than 3  percent. 
Temperature: Temperature shall be maintained at a constant temperature of 25°C ±5°C.  
Dimming levels: Measurements shall be taken within 2  percent of the following increments of full 
light output: 100  percent, 20 percent, and minimum dimming level where 100 percent full light 
output is defined as operating the light source at the maximum setting provided by the control. 
When the minimum light output of the systems is greater than 20  percent of full light output, 
then the flicker measurements are taken at the minimum light output. For dimming fluorescent 
ballasts, lamp arc power may be used as a proxy for light output for the purpose of setting dimming levels for collecting test measurements.  
 2025 Joint Appendices    Appendix JA10-3  
Appendix JA10 – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting Systems and Reporting Requirements  JA10.5  Test Procedure  
Lamp stabilization: Lamp stabilization shall be determined in accordance with:  
IES-LM- 9 for circleline, and U -tube fluorescent systems;  
Code of Federal Regulations - 10 CFR 430.23(q) for linear fluorescent systems;  
IES-LM- 66 for compact fluorescent systems  and induction lighting systems induc tion lamps ;  
IES-LM- 79 for light emitting diode systems ; and  
IES-LM- 5146  for high intensity discharge systemslamps .  
Lamp light output shall be stabilized in advance of taking measurements at each dimming level. 
Light output shall be considered stabilized when consecutive measurements taken at one minute intervals deviate by no more than 0.5%.  
Recording interval: Measured data shall be recorded to a digital file with an interval between each measurement no greater than 0.00005 sec (50 microseconds) corresponding to an equipment measurement rate of no less than 20kHz, and capture at least 1 second of data . 
For each dimming level after the lamps have stabilized, record lighting measurements (in footcandles or volts) from test equipment with readings taken at intervals of no greater than 50 microseconds. These readings shall be recorded for a test period of no less than one second. 
JA10.6  Calculations 
Perform the following data manipulation and calculation tasks for each dimming level (100  
percent, 20 percent and minimum dimming  level claimed by the manufacturer ): 
Calculate percent amplitude modulation (percent flicker) of unfiltered data over the duration of the test for a given dimming level using the following equation:  
 
Percent Amplitude Modulation = 100 x (Max – Min)/(Max + Min)  
Where: Max is the maximum recorded light level or voltage from the test apparatus during the duration 
of the test for a given dimming level.  
Min is the minimum recorded light level or voltage from the test apparatus during the duration 
of the test for a given dimming level.  
Conduct a Fourier analysis to transform data for each dimming level into the frequency domain .  
Filter frequency data to evaluate the data under four additional different conditions: frequencies 
under 40 Hz (data above 40 Hz is set to 0), and frequencies under 90 Hz, 200 Hz, 400 Hz, and 
1,000 Hz.  
Perform inverse Fourier transform to place data back in time domain.  Appendix JA10-4 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 10 – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting Systems and Reporting Requirements  Calculate percent amplitude modulation on resulting time domain data for each filtered dataset 
over the full sampling duration.  
JA10.7  Test Report and Data Format  
For all systems where reporting of flicker is required, the test data shall be submitted to the California Energy Commission in the format specified in Table JA- 10. For two years from the date 
of certification, the entity submitting the test report shall keep all documentation required for 
compliance, stored and shall provide copies of this documentation to the Energy Commission 
within 10 days of written request rece ived from the Commission.  This documentation shall also 
include for each measured system, a  digital file containing the raw photometric data as described 
in Section JA10.5.  
  2025 Joint Appendices    Appendix JA10- 5  
Appendix JA10 – Test Method for Measuring Flicker of Lighting Systems and Reporting Requirements  TABLE JA-10 FLIC KER DATA TO BE RECORDED AND SUBMI TTED TO THE CALIFORNI A ENERGY 
COMMISSION  
Data  Units/Format  
Test Date   Use middle endian  format (Month/Day/Year) . 
Test Operator  Company  Name , Contact Name , Address , Phone Number, 
e-mail address  
Entity submitting results  Company  Name , Contact Name , Address , Phone Number, 
e-mail address  
Entity submitting results  Manufacturer  or Brand  
Tested lighting system component: 
Dimmer  Dimmer  type,  Manufacturer  or Brand , model number  
Tested lighting system component: 
light source (lamp or light engine)  Light source  type (lamp, light engine, etc) , Manufacturer  
or Brand , model number  
Tested lighting system component: 
Ballast or Driver  Ballast or Driver, Manufacturer  or Brand , model number  
Recording interval  seconds  (no greater than 0.00005 sec onds ) 
Equipment Measurement Period  seconds  (no less than 1 second)  
Fraction of rated light output 
integrated over measurement period 
at 100%, 20% and minimum fraction 
of light output.  Fraction of rated light output integrated over 
measurement period at 100%, 20% and minimum fraction 
of light output.  
Amplitude modulation unfiltered  calculated percent amplitude modulation unfiltered for 
each dimming level (100%, 20% and minimum fraction of 
light output)  
Percent a mplitude modulation with 
1,000 Hz cut -off calculated percent amplitude modulation, data filtered 
with a 1,000 Hz cut -off frequency for each dimming level: 
(100%, 20% , and minimum fraction of light output)  
Percent amplitude modulation with 
400 Hz cut -off calculated percent amplitude modulation, data filtered 
with a 400 Hz cut -off frequency for each dimming level: 
(100%, 20%, and minimum fraction of light output)  
Percent amplitude modulation with 
200 Hz cut -off calculated percent amplitude modulation, data filtered 
with a 200 Hz cut -off frequency for each dimming level: 
(100%, 20% and minimum fraction of light output)  
Percent amplitude modulation with 
90 Hz cut -off calculated percent amplitude modulation, data filtered 
with a 90 Hz cut -off frequency for each dimming level: 
(100%, 20% and minimum fraction of light output)  
Percent amplitude modulation with 
40 Hz cut -off calculated percent amplitude modulation, data filtered 
with a 40 Hz cut -off frequency for each dimming level: 
(100%, 20% and minimum fraction of light output)  
 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA11-1  
Appendix JA11 – Qualification Requirements for Photovoltaic  System  Joint Appendix JA 11 
Appendix JA11  – Qualification  Requirements for Photovoltaic 
System  
JA11.1   Purpose and Scope  
Joint Appendix JA1 1 provides the qualification requirements for  photovoltaic (PV) system  to meet 
the prescriptive or performance standards set forth in Title 24, Part 6, Sections 140.1, 140.10, 
150.1(b) ,150.1(c) , 170.1, 170.2(f), and 170.2(g) . 
JA11.2   System Orientation  
JA11.2.1   Prescriptive Compliance  
PV systems or strings with module pitches greater than 2:12 or 10 degrees shall be installe d with 
azimuth range between 90 to 300 degrees  measured clockwise  from true north. PV systems or 
strings with module pitches smaller than 2:12 or 10 degrees can be installed with any azimuth range.     
JA11.2.2   Performance Compliance  
When the California Flexible Installation (CFI) 1 is selected in the performance calculation, the PV 
array shall be installed with an azimuth range between 150 to 2 70 degrees from true north, and 
with all modules at the same tilt as the roof for pitches up to  7:12.  
When the CFI2 is selected in the performance calculation, the PV array shall be installed with an azimuth range between 105 to 300 degrees from true north, and with all modules at the same tilt as the roof for pitches up to 7:12.  
If the PV array does not meet either CFI1 or CFI2, then the actual orientation of the PV array shall 
be described.  
JA11. 3  Shading 
Shading on the PV array from obstructions shall be eliminated or avoided as necessary  to meet 
performance requirements under the performance approach or the prescriptive limit on shading 
under the prescriptive approach (stated in JA11.3.1) . Any obstruction located north of all points 
on the array need not be considered as shading obstructions.  Obstructions to consider include: 
(a) Any vent, chimney, architectural feature, mechanical equipment, or other obstruction that is on the roof or any other part of the building.  
(b) Any part of the neighboring terrain.  
(c) Any tree that is mature at the time of installation of the PV system.     Appendix JA11-2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 11 – Qualification Requirements for Photovoltaic System  (d) Any tree that is planted on the building lot or neighboring lots or planned to be planted as 
part of landscaping for the building. (The expected shading shall be based on the mature 
height of the tree.)  
(e) Any existing neighboring building or structure.  
(f) Any planned neighboring building or structure that is known to the applicant or building owner. 
(g) Any telephone or other utility pole that is closer than 30 feet from the nearest point of the array.  
Figure JA11 -1: The Minimal Shading Criterion Artistic Depiction of "H" and "D"
 
 
JA11.3.1 Prescriptive Minimum Shading Requirement 
If the PV system does not qualify for exception 1 of section 150.14, then the weighted average annual solar access by panel count shall be equal or greater than 98 percent.
 
JA11.4  Solar Access Verification  
A certified solar assessment tool shall be used to demonstrates the shading condition of the 
actual installation of the PV module is consistent with compliance with JA11.3.1 , the shading 
condition modeled in the performance method as indicated on the CF1R -PRF-01, and 
qualification to exceptions in 150.1(c)14 .  
JA11.4.1   Solar Assessment Tool Certification  Requirement  
Solar assessment tools shall be certified to the Executive Director according to the following 
requirements:  
a) The solar assessment tool shall calculate  the annual solar access percentage of each 
individual solar array  and a weighted average of the PV system as a whole .  The 
calculation shall include all known obstructions, including any tree that is planted on the 
building lot or neighboring lots or planned to be planted as part of landscaping for the 
building. 
b) The solar assessment tool shall not include horizon shading in the calculation by default. 
2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA11-1  
Appendix JA11 – Qualification Requirements for Photovoltaic  System  c) The solar assessment tool shall produce a shade report with a summary  of the  PV system, 
including the address of the project, individual array panel count, orientation,  annual solar 
access percentage , and a weighted average of the PV system as a whole.  
d) If the solar assessment tool model shading condition based on satellite or aerial images, 
the annual solar access percentage values shall be comparable to on -site measurements. 
Documentation shall be provided to CEC  as proof.  
 
Figure JA1 1-2: Example of Points Where Measurement Shall Be Made Using a Solar 
Assessment Tool  
 
JA11.5  System Monitoring Requirements 
JA11.5.1   Remote Monitoring Capability  
The PV system shall have a web- based  portal and a mobile device application that at a minimum 
provide the building owner , manager,  or dwelling occupants access to the following information:  
(a) The nominal kW rating of the PV system . 
(b) Number of PV modules and the nominal watt rating of each module. 
(c) Hourly (or 15-minute interval), daily, monthly, and annual kWh production in numeric and 
graphic formats . 
(d) Running total of daily kWh production. 
(e) Daily kW peak power production . 
(f) Current kW production of the entire PV system . 
   Appendix JA11-2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 11 – Qualification Requirements for Photovoltaic System  JA11.6  Interconnection Requirements  
The installed inverters  shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements in UL1741 
and UL1741 Supplement A.  The PV system and the associated components, including inverters, 
shall comply with all applicable requirements specified in Rule 21 as adopted by the California Public Utilities Commission ( CPUC ).  
JA11.7  Certificates and Availability  
The PV installer shall certify on the CF2R -PVB-01-E, Certificate of Installation  for Photovoltaic 
System  that all provisions of JA11 are met and provide a solar assessment report meeting one of 
the following conditions:  
a) The satellite, drone or other digital image used in the solar assessment report must be created and dated after the installation of the photovoltaic system.  
b) If the satellite, drone or other digital image used in the solar assessment report is dated before the installation of the photovoltaic system, additional on- site pictures must be 
attached to clearly show that the installed system matches the system modeled in the solar assessment report.  
The Certificate of Installation shall be available on the building site for inspections.  
JA11.8   Enforcement Agency  
The local enforcement agency shall verify  that the CF2R -PVB-01-E Certificate of Installation is 
complete and correct , and uploaded into a Commission -approved registry.         
     
   
 
  
    
  
   
    
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
  
   
   
  2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA12 -1 
Joint Appendix JA 12 
Appendix JA12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery 
Energy Storage System 
JA12.1 Purpose and Scope 
Joint Appendix JA 12 provides the qualification requirements for battery energy storage system 
(BESS) to meet the requirements for battery storage compliance credit(s) available in the 
standards set forth specified in Title 24, Part 6, Sections 150.1(b) , and 140.10 , and 170.2(h) in 
combination with an on -site or community solar photovoltaic system , or a separate battery 
storage system BESS. The primary function of the battery storage system BESS is daily cycling for 
the purpose of load shifting , maximized solar self -utilization , and grid -harmonization . 
JA12.2 Definitions 
Cycling Capacity is the battery energy storage capacity in kWh available for daily cycling . 
Compliance Cycling Capacity is the cycling capacity in kWh of the BESS that is programmed 
during the installation/commissioning of the system. Once programmed, the ratio between 
compliance cycling capacity and usable capacity shall be maintained for the life of the BESS. 
Field -Assembled BESS is a BESS with a combination of battery energy storage modules and 
inverter components that are installed to operate as a system in the field, and the combination 
has more than one model number. 
Integrated BESS is a BESS that contains both battery energy storage and inverter components 
and has a single model number. 
Reserve Level is the battery energy storage capacity in excess of the compliance cycling 
capacity , is available for other functions , and is not subject to the control requirements in 
section JA12.3. 3. 
Usable Capacity is th e battery energy storage capacity in kWh that a manufacturer allows to be 
used for charg ing and discharg ing. 
JA12.3 Qualification Requirements 
To qualify as a battery storage system BESS for use for compliance with applicable Standards 
requirements and/or performance compliance credits, the battery storage system BESS shall be 
certified to the Energy Commission to meet the following requirements: 
Appendix JA12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System        
   
   
  
   
    
  
      
  
      
   
    
  
  
   
 
 
 
    
 
 
   
  
   
  
  
    
    
 
 
 
     JA12.3.1 
JA12.3.2 
JA12.3.3 __ _ Appendix JA12-2 2025 Joint Appendices 
Safety Requirements 
The battery storage system BESS shall be tested in accordance with the applicable 
requirements given specified in UL1973 and UL9540.  Inverters used with battery storage 
systems BESS shall be tested in accordance with the applicable requirements in UL1741 ,and 
UL1741 Supplement SA , or UL1741 Supplement SB. 
Minimum System Performance Requirements 
JA12.3.2.1 Prescriptive Compliance 
The installed battery storage system BESS shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 
(a) Usable capacity of at least 5 kWh per building. 
(b) Single Charge-discharge cycle AC to AC (round-trip) efficiency of at least 80 percent. 
(c) Energy capacity retention of 70 percent of nameplate capacity after 4,000 cycles 
covered by a warranty, or 70 percent of nameplate capacity under a 10-year warranty. 
JA12.3.2.2 Performance Compliance The installed battery storage systemBESS shall meet or exceed the following specifications: 
(a) Usable capacity of at least 5 kWh per building . 
(b) Energy capacity retention of 70 percent of nameplate capacity after 4,000 cycles 
covered by a warranty, or 70 percent of nameplate capacity under a 10-year 
warranty. 
General Control Requirements for Prescriptive and Performance Compliance Paths 
The requirements below are applicable to all control strategies. 
(a) The battery storage system BESS  shall have the capability of being remotely 
programmed to change the charge and discharge periods.  
(b) During discharge, the battery storage system BESS shall be programmed to first meet 
the electric al load of the dwelling unit(s) property . If during the discharge period the 
electrical load of the dwelling unit(s) property is less than the maximum discharge rate, 
the battery storage system BESS shall have the capability to discharge electricity into the 
grid upon receipt of a demand flexibility signal from the local utility or a third-party 
aggregator. 
(c) The battery storage system shall operate in one of the control strategies listed in JA12.2.3.1, JA12.2.3.2, JA12.2.3.3, and JA12.2.3.4 except during a power interruption, when it may switch to backup mode.  If the battery system switches to backup power 
Appendix JA 12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System      
     
 
 
 
 
     
    
     
   
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
   
    
  
 
       
 
       
 
  
   
 
    
    
  
     
       JA12.4.1 
JA12.4.2 2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA12 -3 
mode during a power interruption, upon restoration of power the battery system shall 
immediately revert to the previously programmed JA12 control strategy. 
(d) The battery storage system shall perform a system check on the following dates, to 
ensure the battery is operating in one of the control strategies listed in JA12.2.3.1, 
JA12.2.3.2, and JA12.2.3.3, and JA12.2.3.4: 
1) Within 10 calendar days before the onset of summer TOU schedule, and 
2) Within 10 calendar days before the onset of winter TOU schedule. 
(c) At the time of enforcement agency inspection, the battery storage system BESS shall be 
installed and commissioned to meet one of the following control strategies in JA12.4 
below . The battery storage system BESS also shall have the capability to remotely 
switch to the other control strategies. 
The requirements below are applicable to single family only. 
(d) If the cycling capacity of the BESS drops below the level of the compliance cycling 
capacity as a result of changes in the reserve level, the BESS shall automatically reset 
the cycling capacity back to the compliance cycling capacity level after 72 hours. This 
reset requirement does not apply to reserve level changes that are controlled by a 
load serving entity or the California Independent System Operator, third -party 
aggregator, or manufacturer due to severe weather or Public Safety Power Shutoff 
events. At the conclusion of the severe weather or Public Safety Power Shutoff event, 
the BESS shall return to the compliance cycling capacity. 
JA12.4 Control Strategies 
Basic Control 
When combined with an on-site solar photovoltaic system , to qualify for the Basic Control, t he 
battery storage system BESS shall be installed in the default operation mode to allow charging 
only from an on -site photovoltaic system when the photovoltaic system production is greater 
than the on -site electrical load.  The battery storage system BESS shall discharge only when ever 
the photovoltaic system production is less than the on -site electrical load.  
Time -of-Use (TOU) Control 
When com bined with an on -site solar photovoltaic system , to qualify for the TOU Control, the 
battery storage system BESS shall be installed in the default operation mode to allow charging 
only from an on -site photovoltaic system. The battery storage system BESS shall begin 
discharging during the highest priced TOU hours of the day . The operation schedule shall be 
preprogram med from the factory, updated remotely , or program med during the 
installation /commissioning of the system . At a minimum, the system shall be capable of 
program ming three separate seasonal TOU schedules, such as spring, summer , and winter. 
Appendix JA12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System        
        
  
 
   
 
    
  
 
      
    
   
   
    
       
   
 
   
 
      
    
 
 
 
    
   
  
   
 
   
  
   
 
   
      
  
  JA12.4.3 
JA12.4.4 
JA12.4.5 ________ _ 
JA12.4.6 Appendix JA12 -4 2025 Joint Appendices 
Advanced Demand Flexibility Control 
When combined with an on -site solar photovoltaic system , to qualify for the Advanced Demand 
Flexibility Control, the battery storage system BESS shall be programmed by default as Basic 
Control as described in JA12. 4.12.3.1 or TOU control as described in JA12. 4.22.3.2 . The battery 
storage control BESS shall meet the demand flexibility control requirements specified in Section 
110.12(a). Additionally , the battery storage system BESS shall have the capability to change the 
charging and discharging periods in response to signals from the local utility or a third -party 
aggregator. 
Controls for Separate Battery Energy Storage Systems 
When installed separate from (not in combination with ) an on -site solar photovoltaic system , 
including when the building is served by a community solar PV system, to qualify for the 
compliance credit , the battery storage system BESS shall be programmed by default to: 
1. Start Charging from the grid at the onset of lowest price d TOU hours of the day and start 
discharging at the onset of highest priced TOU hours of the day , or 
2. Meet the demand flexibility control requirements specified in Section 110.12(a) , and shall 
have the capability to change the charging and discharging periods in response to signals 
from the local utility or a third -party aggregator. 
Price Optimization Control 
When combined with an on -site solar photovoltaic system, to qualify for the Price Optimization 
Control, the BESS shall be controlled to maximum financial benefit. Additionally, the BESS shall 
discharge daily the full compliance cycling capacity. The BESS shall meet the demand flexibility 
control requirements specified in Section 110.12(a) and have the capability to change the 
charging and discharging periods in response to signals from the local utility or a third -party 
aggregator . 
Alternative Control Approved by the Executive Director 
The Executive Director may approve applications for alternative control strategies that 
demonstrate equal or greater benefits to one of the JA12 control strategies. To qualify for 
Alternative Control, t he battery storage system BESS shall be operated in a manner that 
increases self -utilization of the PV array output , responds to utility rates, responds to demand 
response signals, minimizes greenhouse gas emissions from buildings , and/or other strategies 
that achieve equal or greater benefits than speci fied in Section s JA12. 2.34.1, JA12. 2.34.2, 
JA12. 2.34.3, or JA12. 2.34.4, JA12 .43.3.5. The application to the Executive Director for the is 
alternative control option shall be accompanied with clear and easy to implement algorithms 
for incorporation into the compliance software for compliance credit calculations . 
JA12.5 System Labeling – Single -Family Residential Buildings 
BESS installed for single -family buildings shall have a Commission approved label to identify the 
compliance cycling capacity of the system. The label shall be permanently attached to the BESS 
Appendix JA 12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System      
     
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
    
     
 
 
    
  ESS kWh Capacity 
CEC JA12 kWh Cycling Capacity 
Programmer's Initials 
Date 
CSLB# 
Installer's Company Name ANSI Safety 
Blue 
background 
White background 2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA12 -5 
for verification by the enforcement agency. In addition, the responsible party shall fill out the 
Certificate of Installation and verify that the compliance cycling capacity meets or exceed the 
required kWh in the Certificate of Compliance and building plans. 
At a minimum, the label shall provide the following information: 
(a) JA12 compliance cycling capacity in kWh 
(b) Total capacity in kWh 
(c) Programmer’s name 
(d) Company name 
(e) Date of Installation 
(f) California State License Board Number 
Figure JA12 -1 Sample JA12 Label 
JA12.6 Interconnection and Net Energy Metering Requirements 
The battery storage system ESS and the associated components, including inverters, shall 
comply with all applicable requirements specified in Rule 21 and Net Energy Metering (NEM) 
rules as adopted by the California Public Utilities Commission ( CPUC ). 
JA12.6 Enforcement Agency 
The local enforcement agency shall verify that all Certificate of Installations are valid . The 
battery storage systems BESS shall be verified as a model certified to the Energy Commission as 
qualified for credit as a battery storage system BESS. In addition, the enforcement agency shall 
verify that the battery storage system BESS is programmed and operational with one of the 
control s listed in JA12. 42.3.1, JA12. 42.3.2, JA12. 42.3.3, JA12. 42.3.4, JA12. 42.3.4 3.5, 
JA12. 3.3.4.6. The programmed control strategy at system installation , final inspection and 
commissioning , and final i nspection by the enforcement agency shall be the strategy that was 
Appendix JA12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System        
        
 
    
 
   
 
 
 
     
  
    
  Appendix JA12 -6 2025 Joint Appendices 
used in the Certificat e of Compliance . For single -family buildings, the enforcement agency shall 
verify that the system label as described in JA12.5 is attached to the BESS, and that the 
compliance cycling capacity is equal to or greater than the compliance cycling capacity specified 
on the Certificate of Installation CF2R-PVB-02. 
JA12.7 Certification Documentation Requirements 
The following document shall be submitted to CEC for JA12 certification : 
a) The specification sheet showing usable capacity, roundtrip efficiency and other 
characteristics addressed in JA12 .3.2. 
b) In addition, the BESS for single family buildings shall submit the following: 
1. The document showing the cycling control strategy as described in JA12.4 
2. The document or training material s describing the permanent 72 hour reset 
requirement of the BESS as described in JA12.3.3(4) 
Appendix JA 12 – Qualification Requirements for Battery Energy Storage System      
                 
   
  
  
          
       
        
     
  
 
  
    
      
     
 
  
     
  
    
 
    
    
  
  
    
  
  
 JA13.2.1 
JA13.2.2 2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA13 -1 
Joint Appen dix JA13 
Appendix JA13 – Qu alification Requi reme nts for Heat Pump 
Water Heater Demand Management Systems 
JA13.1 Purpose and Scope 
Joint Appendix JA13 provid es the qua lificati on requirements f or a heat pump water heater 
(HPWH) demand management system (System) to m eet the requirem ents for HPWH 
demand flexibility compli ance credit available in the perform ance standards specified in Title 
24, Part 6, Sections 1 50.1(b). 
User interfaces referenced in these requirements shall be designed for use by a typical 
residential user. 
JA13.2 Definitions 
Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System 
The HPWH Demand Management S ystem mean s the following components connected to a 
water heater, but not the water heater itself, all of which are necessary to fulfill the primary 
function of the System : 
(a) Any hardware or software contained inside the water heater; 
(b) Any hardware or software installed on premise (including a module); and 
(c) Any software contained in applications or in the cloud. 
The primary function of the System is to interface with the HPWH to serve the users’ domestic 
hot water needs and provide daily load shifting, as applicable, for the purpose of user bill 
reductions, maximized solar self -utilization, and grid harmonization. 
Local and Remote Methods 
A Local Method means a method that can be performed from within the building that does not 
require the System to have a live connection to an off-premise source . A temporary connection 
to a live off -premise source such as via a smart phone, may be used for local setup and updates. 
A Remote Method means a method that is performed via a live connection to an off- premise 
source, such as the internet, advanced metering infrastructure (AMI) , or cellular 
communication . 
Appendix JA13 – Qualification Requirements for Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System     
       
    
      
            
 
  
     
   
 
            
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
            
 
              JA13.3.1   Safety Requirements  
The System shall comply  with  applicable  installation standards  in the California electrical,  
mechanical,  and plumbing codes.  
JA13.3.2   Minim um  Performan ce  Requirem ents  
The  installed System  shall  meet  or  exceed  the  following  perform ance  specifications :  
(a)  Efficiency : meet  all requirements of version  7.08.0  of the Northwest Energy  
Efficiency Alliance (NEEA) Advanced  Water Heater Specification Tier 3 or higher,  
excluding Appendix A ..  
(b)  Thermal storage : comply with the first hour rating requirements in the following  
table  (Chapter 5, Table 501.1 (2)  in 2025  California  Plumbing  Code ):  
JA13.3.3   Contr ol  Requi rements  
The  requirements  below are  applic able  to all  contr ol  strateg ies:  
(a)  Time -of-use schedules:  The  System  shall  have  the  capability  of storing a  
minimum of five time -of-use schedule (s)  locally, each supporting a  minimum  of 
five distinct time periods for both weekdays and weekends,  at least  three  separate  
season al  schedu les, and daylight savings time changes . The  System  shall support 
both local and remote setup, selection, and update of time -of-use schedules.  
Local and remote setup, selection, and update shall be possible through a user  
interface  (such as an app) .   
(b)  Demand  management  functionality  
Upon receiving  a demand management price or dispatch signal, t he  System  shall 
be capable of all the following  automatic event responses :  Appendix JA13 -2 2025 Joint Appendices 
JA13.3 Quali fication Requirem ents 
To qua lify for the HPWH Demand Management System perform ance complian ce cred it, 
the System shall be certifi ed to the Energy Comm ission to m eet the fo llowing 
requirem ents: 
A th
ermostatic mixing valve conforming to ASSE 1017 shall be installed on the hot water supply 
line following all manufacturer installation instructions or the water heater shall conform to UL 
60730-1 , ASSE 1082, or ASSE 1084. 
Feature 
(Requirement) A B C D E F G H I J K 
Number of 1 to 1 to 1 to 2 to 2 to 2 to 2 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 
bathrooms 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 
Number of 
bedrooms 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 
First Hour Rating 
Required (gallons) 38 49 49 49 62 62 74 62 74 74 74 
Appendix JA13 – Qualification Requirements for Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System      
            
      
     
       
   
   
  
    
    
   
    
 
  
    
      
  
  
      
    
       
    
   
  
     
     
   
  
      
  
   
      
     
  
     
 
       
     
   
     2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA13 -3 
1. Basic Load Up: The System will store extra thermal energy without 
exceeding the user set point temperature . It will avoid use of electric 
resistance elements unless user needs cannot be met ; 
2. Advanced Load Up: The System stores extra thermal energy, where 
some or all of the tank may exceed the set point temperature chosen by 
the user, within safe operati ng conditions . Advanced Load Up must only 
be enabled after agreement by the user and utility as defined below . It 
will avoid use of electric resistance elements unless user needs cannot be 
met. Advanced Load Up will only be available in Advanced Demand 
Response Control mode as defined in JA13.3.3.2; 
3. Return to Standard Operation : The System terminates any demand 
management function and returns to user -selected standard 
operation mode until the next demand management function is activated; 
4. Light Shed : The System will defer complete recovery for the duration of 
the shed event unless user needs cannot be met ; The water heater shall 
avoid use of electric resistance elements during and immediately after the 
event unless user needs cannot be met; 
5. Deep Shed : same as Light Shed, but the System will completely avoid use 
of electric resistance elements during the event ; and 
6. Full Shed : same as L ight Shed, but the System will complete ly avoid use 
of both compressor and electric resistance element during the event. 
The demand management signals may be sent from a local utility, a remote 
aggregator, a local demand manager (e.g. ,local time -of-use demand manager) or be 
internal to the System (e.g. ,internal schedule -or price -based demand management) . 
The “ Advanced Load Up” function shall only be enabled by a deliberate action of the 
user through the system’s physical or remote interface upon enrolling in a utility’s 
demand response program .  The “ Advanced Load Up” function shall be capable of being 
disabled deliberately by the user , or remotely by the utility or third-party service 
provider without deliberate action by the user. 
For a water heater sized in accordance with JA13.3.2(b) and with the default set point 
as shipped from the manufacturer, the System shall be able to shift: 
• A minimum of 0.5 kWh of user electrical energy per ( Basic Load Up + Light 
Shed) event ; and 
• A minimum of 1 kWh of user electrical energy per ( Advanced Load Up + Light 
Shed) event, including at least 0.5 kWh on Advanced Load Up. 
(c) Non -standard mode exception : The demand management functionality shall be 
achieved in all user -selected modes except for vacation and off modes , which are 
deemed non -standard modes . The System shall return to the previous standard 
operation mode once the water heater exits from a non- standard mode . 
Appendix JA13 – Qualification Requirements for Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System     
       
      
 
 
    
    
     
  
  
 
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
   
   
  
  
 
 
           
            
  
 
    
             
     
       
         
   
     
          
        
       
        
  
 
    
  Appendix JA13 -4 2025 Joint Appendices 
(d) Local time management : In the event of a loss of power, the System settings, 
including operating mode, time -of-use schedules, and local clock, shall be 
retained , or reacquired, for at least three months. The local clock shall have a 
maximum drift of less than 5 minutes per year under standard operating 
conditions and without requiring remote connectivity. 
(e) Override and permanent disabling : The System shall provide local and remote 
means for the user to override or permanently disable the demand management 
functions . The override shall be temporary and have a maximum duration of 72 
hours . Permanent disabling shall not be available as an operating mode or as an 
option in the primary menu. 
(f) User interface: The S ystem shall provide both a remote and local user interface, 
such as a web- based portal or a mobile device application , that at a minimum 
provides the dwelling occupants access to the following information: control 
strategy that is currently active, remote ,or local demand management mode, 
selected time- of-use schedule if applicable , and confirmation of any settings 
change. 
(g) Measurement and validation : When connected remotely, the System shall be 
capable to  make the following data available to the local utility, remote 
aggregator, or local demand manager: Demand Management Override Status , 
Demand Management Disabled Status ; power demand (watts); cumulative energy 
consumption (watt- hours); total energy storage capacity (watt -hours), available 
energy storage capacity (watt -hours). 
The System shall be capable to use one of the following c ontrol strategies at the time of 
installation . The System also shall have the ca pability to switch to ot her contro l strateg ies if 
available . The “ Advanced Load Up” function shall not be enabled at time of installation . 
JA13.3.3.1 Time- of-Use (TOU) Control 
To qua lify f or the TOU Control, the System shall be install ed in the def ault oper ation mode to 
serve domestic hot water user needs while optimizing System operation to reduce user bills 
under the selected time -of-use schedule . The System shall load up (charge) during the lowest 
priced TOU hours of the day and shed (minimize charging while serving user needs ) during the 
highest priced TOU hours. 
JA13.3.3.2 Advanced Demand Response Control 
To qua lify f or the Adv anced Demand Response Control, the System shall m eet the demand 
responsive control requirements specifi ed in Secti on 110. 12(a) of the 2025 Building Energy 
Efficiency Standards . Additiona lly, the System shall be capable of chang ing the load -up and 
shed periods in resp onse to real-time or day -ahead dispatch or price signals fr om the local 
utility, a remote aggregator, or a local demand manager. If remote communication is lost for 
more than 12 hours while the water heater is under Advanced Demand Response Control, 
the water heater shall revert to TOU Control until remote communication is reestablished , 
and then revert back to Advanced Demand Response Control . 
Appendix JA13 – Qualification Requirements for Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System      
               
           
            
          
         
        
      
  
 
  
   
      
     
   2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA13 -5 
JA13.3.3.3 Alternative C ontrol Strategy Appro ved by the Executive Director 
Any party may submit a request to the Executive Director, in writing, for approval of an 
Alternative Control Strategy that dem onstrates equal or greater benefi ts to one of the JA13 
contr ol strategies. To qua lify as an Alternative C ontrol Strategy, the System shall be operated in 
a manner that incr eases self-util ization of the PV a rray output, responds to utility rates , 
responds to de mand response signals, and/ or other strategi es that achieve equal or greater 
benefits . The application shall include well-documented algorithms f or incorporation into the 
comp liance software f or compliance credit calculati ons. The Executive Director may approve 
the proposed Alternative Control Strategy after providing an opportunity for public comment. 
JA13.4 Enforcement Agency 
To receive the HPWH Demand Management System compliance credit, the completed Certificate of Installation shall be a model that has been certified to the Energy Commission as qualified for the credit. This certification shall be made available for review 
by the local building department. 
Appendix JA13 – Qualification Requirements for Heat Pump Water Heater Demand Management System     
 
              
     
  
  
    
   
  
  
   
 
  
 
   
   
 
    
  
 
 
  
 
   
  
 
    
  
 
  2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA14 -1 
Joint Appen dix JA14 
Appendix JA14 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat 
Pump Water Heater Systems 
JA14.1 Purpose and Scope 
Joint Appendix JA14 provides the qualification requirements to meet the standards for central 
heat pump water heater (Central HPWH) systems set forth in Title 24, Part 6, Section 170.2(d)2 
and in performance standards set forth in Section 140.1 and 170.1. 
JA14.2 Definitions 
Basic Model means, with respect to a central HPWH , all units of a given type of product 
manufactured by one manufacturer; having the same primary energy source; and, which have 
essentially identical electrical, physical, and functional (or hydraulic) characteristics that affect 
energy consumption, energy efficiency, water consumption, or water efficiency . 
JA14.3 Qualification Requirements 
To qualify as a central HPWH for use for compliance, the c entral HPWH products shall be 
certified to the Energy Commission to meet the following requirements: 
Determination of Performance Data 
Manufacturers shall determine central HPWH performance data for each basic model either by 
testing pursuant to the requirements in (a) or by simulating pursuant to the requirements in (b) 
below: 
(a) Testing shall be conducted in accordance with the test setup, installation, 
calculation procedures, and instruments described in Appendix E to Subpart G of 
10 CFR Part 431 for each of the test conditions described in JA14.3.3; or 
(b) Simulated performance shall be conducted using an alternative efficiency 
determination methods (AEDM) as described in 10 CFR part 429.70(a) -(c) to 
generate the performance data described in JA14.3. 2.  In addition, manufacturers 
shall only simulate the performance of other central HPWH basic models sharing 
the same series compressor, same type of heat exchangers, and same architecture as the tested basic model. 
Appendix JA14 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater System s     
       
   
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
    
    
   
   
  
  
  
  
   
      
   
    
       
  
       
 
  
  
    Appendix JA14 -2 2025 Joint Appendices 
Performance Data Reporting 
The following performance specifications shall be submitted to the Energy Commission: 
a) Water heater input power ; 
b) Water heater output capacity; and 
c) Water heater COP . 
The performance data shall be provided at the following conditions: 
d) Inlet ambient air temperature: Maximum, minimum, and two midpoint 
temperatures of the manufacturer specified operating range. 
e) Inlet water temperature: Maximum, minimum, and two midpoint temperatures of 
the manufacturer specified operating range. 
f) Outlet water temperature: Maximum, midpoint, and minimum of outlet water 
(setpoint) temperatures of the manufacturer specified operating range. 
For conditions where defrost strategies operate, reported data shall include at least one 
complete defrost cycle, or alternatively, for each model submitted for approval, provide a 
description of the defrost strategy including method, cycle length, and process. 
Basic Model Test Condition 
The C entral HPWH basic model shall be tested at the following conditions : 
(a) Inlet ambient air temperature:  If the minimum operating temperature is above 40 ⁰F, 
the following three test conditions are required: the DOE test Procedure condition, the 
minimum, and one midpoint temperatures within the manufacturer specified operating range. If the minimum operating temperature limit is below 40 ⁰F, the 
following four test conditions are required:  the DOE test procedure condition, the 
minimum, and two midpoint temperatures within the manufacturer specified 
operating range. 
(b) Two inlet water temperatures:  maximum and minimum within the manufacturer 
specified operating range. 
(c) Two outlet water temperatures: Maximum and minimum outlet water (setpoint) 
temperatures within the manufacturer specified operating range. 
JA14.4 Design Condition Documentation Requirements 
The Central HPWH system shall be capable of supplying hot water at design outlet water 
temperature under specified operating ranges for: 
a) Minimum and maximum ambient air temperature ; 
b) Minimum and maximum cold -water temperature ; 
c) Minimum and maximum building demand at design draw and recovery conditions 
Appendix JA1 4 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater Systems     
 
     
   
 
   
  
   2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA14 -3 
and duration; and 
d) Recirculation loop heat loss . 
Design documentation shall specify the operating conditions at which the primary heat 
pump water heater can supply hot water at design outlet water temperature without 
engaging auxiliary heating mechanism. 
Appendix JA14 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater System s     
                  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
 H
Space shall eat Pump Space Requirements  
be reserved for future installation of  central heat  pump water heaters. The space  
reserved shall meet the following requirements:  
  
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 Storage Tank Space Requirements  
Space shall  be reserved for future installation of hot water storage tanks. The space reserved 
shall meet the following requirements:  
(a)  If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is less than 200,000 Btu per hour, 
the minimum space reserved for the storage and temperature maintenance tanks shall be 4.4 square feet per 10,000 Btu per hour input of the gas or propane  water heating  
system.  
(b)  If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is greater than or equal to  
200,000 Btu per hour, the minimum  physical space reserved for the storage and 
temperature maintenance tanks shall be 3.1 square feet per 10,000 Btu per hour input 
of the gas or propane water heating system.  
2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA1 5-1 
Joint Appen dix JA15 
Appendix JA15 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat 
Pump Water Heater Ready 
JA14.1 Purpose and Scope 
Joint Appendix JA15 provides sizing requirements, for electric ready infrastructure installed 
with gas or propane water heating systems to meet the requirement for electric readiness 
specified in Title 24, Part 6, Section 160.9(e) 
JA14.2 Electric Ready Requirements 
(
a) If the gas water heating system has an input capacity less than 200,000 Btu per hour, 
the minimum space reserved for the heat pump shall be 2.0 square feet per 10,000 Btu per hour input of the gas or propane water heating system, and the minimum linear dimension of the space reserved shall be 48 linear inches. 
(b) If the gas water heating system has an input capacity reater than or equal to 200,000 Btu per hour, the minimum space reserved for the heat pump shall be 3.6 square feet 
per 10,000 Btu per hour input of the gas or propane water heating system, and the 
minimum linear dimension of the space reserved shall be 84 linear inches. 
Appendix JA15 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater Ready     
 
      
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  Appendix JA1 5-2 2025 Joint Appendices 
Ventilation Requirements 
The reserved pathway and penetrations through the building envelope shall meet the 
following requirements: 
(a) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is less than 200,000 Btu per hour, 
the minimum air flow rate shall be 70 CFM per 10,000 Btu per hour input of the gas or propane water heating system and the total external static pressure drop of ductw ork 
and louvers shall not exceed 0.17 inch when the future heat pump water heater is installed. 
(b) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is greater than or equal to 
200,000 Btu per hour, the minimum air flow rate shall be 420 CFM per 10,000 Btu per 
hour input of the gas or propane water heating system and the total external static pressu re drop of ductwork and louvers shall not exceed 0.17 inch when the future 
heat pump water heater is installed. 
Condensate Drainage Piping Requirements 
The condensate drainage piping shall meet the following requirements: 
(a) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is less than 200,000 Btu per hour, condensate drainage shall be sized for 0.2 tons of refrigeration capacity per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
(b) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is greater than or equal to 
200,000 Btu per hour, condensate drainage shall be sized for 0.7 tons of refrigeration 
capacity per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
Electrical Requirements 
The electrical system serving the heat pump shall meet the following requirements: 
(a) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is less than 200,000 Btu per hour, 
provide 0.1 kVA per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
(b) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is greater than or equal to 200,000 Btu per hour, provide 1.1 kVA per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
The electrical system serving the temperature maintenance tank shall meet the following 
requirements: 
(c) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is less than 200,000 Btu per hour, 
provide 1.0 kVA per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
Appendix JA1 5 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater Systems Ready     
       
 2025 Joint Appendices Appendix JA1 5-3 
(d) If the input capacity of the gas water heating system is greater than or equal to 
200,000 Btu per hour, provide 0.6 kVA per 10,000 Btu per hour input. 
Appendix JA15 – Qualification Requirements for Central Heat Pump Water Heater Ready 2025  Joint Appendices   Appendix JA1 6-1 
 
Appendix JA16 – Criteria for Pool and Spa Heating Systems  Joint Appendix JA16          
Appendix JA16 – Criteria for Pool and/or Spa Heating  
JA16.1  Systems Purpose and Scope  
Joint Appendix JA 16 provides the eligibility criteria for energy efficiency measures for solar pool 
heating systems , sizing for heat pump pool heaters  (HPPH), and on- site renewable energy or 
recovery energy . 
JA16.2  Solar Pool Heating Systems  
Solar pool heating systems shall be certified and rated by the Solar Rating and Certification 
Corporation (ICC -SRCC), the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, 
Research and Testing (IAPMO R&T), or by a listing agency that is approved by the Executive 
Director.  
Solar thermal collectors shall be listed and labeled in accordance with Table 110.4 -A. The 
installed system shall meet the following eligibility criteria:  
(a) The system shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions.  
(b) The system shall be installed in the exact configuration for which it was rated. The 
system shall have the same collector(s), piping, pump, vacuum relief valve, 
controls, and other components used to establish the rated condition.  
JA16.3  Heat Pump Pool Heater Sizing  
A heat pump pool heater (HPPH) shall be sized using the HPPH  manufacturer’s specifications. 
The following sizing provisions shall be applicable if the HPPH  manufacturer’s specifications 
do not include information on HPPH  sizing:  
(a) Determine desired pool temperature in °F.  
(b) Determine average temperature for the coldest month of pool use in °F.  
(c) Determine temperature rise in °F by subtracting the average temperature for the 
coldest month from the desired pool temperature.  
(d) Calculate the pool volume in gallons.  
(e) Calculate the time needed for the HPPH to achieve the 10 °F degree rise in hours . This   
shall not exceed 17.5 hours . 
(f) Use equation JA1 6-1 to determine the Btu/h output requirement of the HPPH . 
 Appendix JA1 6-2  2025  Joint Appendices  
 
Appendix JA1 6 – Criteria for Pool and Spa Heating Systems  Equation JA16 -1 
Qout=Vp x 8.33 x Δ T
t 
Where:  
Qout is the output heating capacity of the HPPH  
Vp is the pool volume in gallons  
8.33 is the weight of a gallon of water at 62°F in pounds per gallon  
ΔT is the pool temperature rise in °F, and shall not exceed 10°F 
t is the time needed for the HPPH to achieve the 10 ° F degree rise  in hours and shall not 
exceed 17.5 hours  
JA16.4  On-site Renewable or Recovered Energy  
The mechanical engineer shall provide documentation that a on -site renewable source and/or 
on-site recovery source provides at least 60 percent of the calculated annual energy 
consumption of the pool and/or spa heater.  The documentation shall be submitted together 
with the Certificate of Installation for the pool and/or spa heater.  Joint Appendix JA 17 
 
Appendix JA1 7 – Qualification Requirements for Heat/Energy 
Recovery Ventilation System (HRV/ERV)  Fault Indicator 
Displays  (FIDs)  
 
JA17.1  Introduction  
 
Joint Appendix JA1 7 provides the technical specifications for fault indication  display devices 
(FIDs) that provide visual and/or audible indications that HRV/ERV systems maintain their rated 
airflow and fan efficacy for the life of the equipm ent. 
 
JA17.2  Fault Indication Categories  
 
Fault indication devices shall respond to the following categories:  
 
(a) Filter check or maintenance, either based on performance or a predetermined  
      schedule.  
(b) Low supply airflow.  
(c) Low exhaust airflow (balanced systems only)  
(d) Sensor failure for sensors that assist in monitoring or controlling airflow regulation, frost 
control,  supply air tempering, and economizing.  
 
JA17. 3    Fault Indication  Means  
 
Fault indication shall use one or more of the following means:  
 
(a) A visual display that is readily accessible to occupants of the dwelling unit.  
(b) An electronic application.  
(c) An audible alarm accompanied by a visual display.  
JA17. 4  Instrumentation and Reporting  
 
Instrumentation shall measure and report the following:  
(a) Airflow.  
(b) Fan power.  JA17. 5  Manufacturer Certification  
 
To qualify, manufactures shall  certify to the CEC that the FID systems meet the  
requirements of JA1 7.2 – JA17.4. 
 
A listing of certified products is provided at the following location:  
https://www.energy.ca.gov/media/7020  2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 18-1 
Appendix JA 18 – Guideline 36 Programming Library Requirements   
Joint Appendix JA 18 
Appendix JA18  – Guideline 36 Programming Library 
Requirements  
Appendix JA18 – Guideline 36 Programming Library Requirements  ............................................ 1 
JA.18  Guideline 36 Programming Library Certification .......................................................... 2 
JA.18.1  Purpose and Scope  ....................................................................................................... 2  
JA.18.2  Certification Submittal Requirements  ......................................................................... 2  
JA.18.3  Information that shall be included with the Declaration ............................................ 2  
JA.18.4  Programming Library Requirements  ............................................................................ 2  
JA.18.5  Declaration  ................................................................................................................... 4  
JA.18.6  Certification  .................................................................................................................. 5  
 Appendix JA 18-2 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA.18  Guideline 36 Programming Library Certification  
JA.18.1   Purpose and Scope   
Title 24, Part 6, Section 140.4(r) requires that HVAC control systems with DDC use programming 
originating from a certified programming library based on control sequences of operation 
described in  ASHRAE  Guideline 36 -2023. This section describes the requirements of the Guideline 
36 programming library.  
HVAC Controls technology companies shall certify to the Energy Commission that the Guideline 
36 Programming Library  meets the requirements of Reference Joint Appendix JA 18.  
JA.18.2  Certification Submittal Requirements  
Each company wishing to certify that their Guideline 36 programming library conforms to the 
Guideline 36 library requirements of Title 24, Part 6, may do so in a written declaration. This 
requires that a letter be sent to the California Energy Commission declaring that the Guideline 36 
library is complete and conforms to the requirements listed in JA15.3. The declaration at the end 
of this section shall be used to submit to the California Energy Commission.  
JA.18.3  Information that shall be included with the Declaration 
The certifying company shall provide evidence of compliance with these requirements, including 
the following at a minimum:  
• Evidence: List of hardwired points and control points used in the library.  
• Evidence: Documentation of test plan and results, including inputs and outputs for each 
test.  
• Evidence: Documentation of programming, such as screenshots of programming function 
blocks or programming script.  
JA.18.4   Programming Library Requirements  
The programming library to be certified shall include complete control logic for all sections from 
ASHRAE Guideline 36 listed in Table JA15.3 -1, and shall meet the minimum validation 
requirements listed.  
Table  JA15.3 -1 Required Guideline  36 Logic  for Certified  Programming Library  
Guideline  36 Logic Section  Minimum  Validation  Requirements  
Section  5.1 
General  
Sections 5.1.14 and 
5.1.17.3 only Trim and Respond Setpoint Reset  Logic,  including Importance 
Multipliers, Request- Hours Accumulator, and Trim and 
Respond Variables per 5.1.14  
Air Economizer  High  Limits based  on device type  and climate 
zone, per 5.1.17.3 
Section  5.2 
Generic Ventilation  Zones  
(Section  5.2.1.3 is not 
required)  Zone minimum  outdoor air setpoints and occupied minimum 
airflow calculations per 5.2.1.4  
Time -averaged  ventilation logic  per 5.2.2 2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 18-3 
Appendix JA 18 – Guideline 36 Programming Library Requirements  Guideline  36 Logic Section  Minimum  Validation  Requirements  
Section 5.3  
Generic Thermal Zones  Independently adjustable zone heating and cooling 
setpoints, demand limit setpoint adjustments, and setbacks 
per 5.3.2 
Heating Loop and Cooling Loop are separate control loops 
per 5.3.4  
Section 5.4 Zone Groups  Separate schedules for each Zone Group per 5.4.2  
All zones in a Zone Group are in the same Operating Mode 
per 5.4.3 
Zone Group Operating Modes per 5.4.6  
Section 5.5  
VAV Terminal Unit —Cooling 
Only  Airflow endpoints determined by Zone Group Mode per 
5.5.4 
Airflow setpoint is reset by Heating Loop or Cooling Loop 
signals per 5.5.5System Requests per 5.5.8  
Section 5.6  
VAV Terminal Unit with 
Reheat  Airflow endpoints determined by Zone Group Mode per 
5.6.4 
Airflow setpoint is reset by Heating Loop or Cooling Loop 
signals per 5.6.5System Requests per 5.6.8  
Section 5.15  
Air-Handling Unit System 
Modes  All Operating Modes defined for Zone Groups (see Section 
6.4) are also defined for air -handling units per 5.15.1  
Section 5.16 
Multiple- Zone VAV Air-
Handling Unit 
(Sections 5.16.3.1, 5.16.4.1, 
5.16.5.1,  
5.16.6.1, and  
5.16.11.2.a are not required)  Fan speed control and duct static pressure setpoint reset 
using trim and respond logic per 5.16.1  
Supply air temperature control, temperature setpoint reset 
based on outdoor air temperature and trim and respond 
logic, and air economizer high limits per 5.16.2  
System outdoor airflow requirements dynamically 
calculated for Zone Groups in Occupied Mode in accordance 
with Title 24 ventilation requirements, per 5.16.3.2  
Minimum outdoor air control for multiple supported 
equipment configurations per 5.16.4, 5.16.5, and 5.16.6, 
using Title 24 ventilation logic  
Building relief per 5.16.8 and 5.16.9 Return fan control, per 
5.16.10 and 5.16.11 Fan, filter, and pressure alarms per 
5.16.13  
Automatic FDD based on equipment operating state, 
including diagnostics based on fault conditions per 5.16.14  
Plant Requests per 5.16.16  
 Appendix JA 18-4 2025 Joint Appendices   
Appendix JA 6 – HVAC System Fault Detection and Diagnostic Technology  JA.18.5   Declaration  
Consistent with the requirements of Title 24, Part 6 , Sections 100.0(h) and 120.2(i), companies 
wishing to certify to the California Energy Commission shall execute a declaration under penalty 
of perjury attesting that all information provided is true, complete, accurate, and in compliance 
with the applicable provisions of Part 6.  Companies may fulfill this requirement by providing the 
information, signing the declaration below and submitting to the California Energy Commission as 
as specified by the  instructions in JA 18.6.  
Company , Model Name and Number of all devices being certified  
Company  Model Name  Model Number  
                  
                  
                  
When providing the information below, be sure to enter complete mailing addresses, including 
postal/zip codes.  
Certifying Company  
Contact Person Name *  
      Phone 1  
      
Certifying Company Name **  
      Phone 2  
      
Address  
      Fax 
      
(Address)  
      E-mail 
      
(Address)  
      Company Website (URL)  
      
* If the contact person named above is NOT the person whose signature is on the Declaration, then the full contact 
information for the person whose signature is on the Declaration must also be provided on a separate page.  
** If the company named above is:  A) a parent entity filing on behalf of a subsidiary entity; B) a subsidiary entity 
filing on behalf of a parent entity; or C) an affiliate entity filing on behalf of an affiliate entity, the above contact 
information must be provided for any additional entities on a separate page.  
Manufacturer (if different from Certifying Company) 
Contact Person Name  
      Phone 1  
      
Manufacturing Company Name 
      Phone 2  
      
Address  
      Fax 
      2025 Joint Appendices   Appendix JA 18-5 
Appendix JA 18 – Guideline 36 Programming Library Requirements  (Address)  
      E-mail 
      
(Address)  
      Company Website (URL)  
      
 
Declaration  
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that:  
(1) All the information in this statement is true, complete, accurate, and in compliance with 
all applicable provisions of Section 120.2(i) of Title 24, Part 6 of the California Code of 
Regulations. 
(2) [If the party submitting this statement is a corporation, partnership, or other business 
entity] I am authorized to make this declaration, and to file this statement, on behalf of 
the company named below.  
 
             
Certifying Company Name  
       Date 
 
Name/Title (please print)   Signature  
JA.18.6   Certification  
Send declarations and evidence of functionality or test reports to the addresses below. Electronic 
submittals are preferred.  
(1) Electronic submittal:  
CertifiedtoCEC@energy.ca.gov  
Attn:  Guideline 36 programming library  Certification  
 
(2) Mail:  
Attn:  Guideline 36 programming library  Certification  
Building Standards Development Branch  
California Energy Commission  
715 P Street, MS 37  
Sacramento, CA  95814      
 
        
 
   
 
 
 
  
    
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
  
  
 
   
 
   
 
   
   2025 Residential Appendices RA1-1 
Residential Appendix RA  
Appendix RA1 -Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification 
and Diagnostic Test Protocols 
RA1.1 Alternative Protocol Approval 
Field verification and diagnostic test protocols other than those described in Reference 
Residential Appendix RA3 are possible, and when field verification or diagnostic testing 
measurements can be reliably determined by methods, procedures , or instrumentation other 
than those specified in Reference Residential Appendix RA3, such alternative protocols shall be 
allowed if approved by the Commission. The Commission may grant such approval after 
reviewing submittals from the applicant. Submittals shall adhere to the application process of 
Title 24, Part 1 Section 10 -109(j).  Alternative Protocols that are approved by the Commission 
shall be published as an addendum to Reference Residential Appendix RA1. 
RA1.1.1 Alternative Refrigerant Charge Verification Protocol Approval 
The applicant for a special case refrigerant charge verification protocol shall provide information 
that specifies: 
(a) the required instrumentation, 
(b) the instrumentation accuracy, 
(c) the parameters measured, 
(d) the required calculations, 
(e) the target values for system operating parameters for verification of optimum system 
operation, 
(f) the allowable deviations from target values for system operating parameters, and 
(g) the requirements for reporting system faults. 
Manufacturers that elect to utilize an alternative protocol for compliance with refrigerant charge 
verification requirements in the Standards shall demonstrate in their application for approval by 
the Energy Commission that use of the alternative refrigerant charge verification protocol 
produces equipment performance at a sensible EER 2at AHRI Standard 210/240 standard rating 
conditions (80°F indoor dry -bulb, 67°F indoor wet -bulb, and 95°F outdoor dry -bulb) that deviates 
less than or equal to 5 percent from the sensible EER 2 determined by laboratory testing at the 
AHRI Standard 210/240 standard rating conditions when the air conditioner is charged with the 
manufacturer's specified refrigerant charge determined by measurement of the weight of the 
specified refrigerant charge. The deviations from the manufacturer's target values of system 
operating parameters, that correspond to the maximum allowable 5 percent deviation in sensible 
EER2 shall be determined and reported to the Energy Commission by the manufacturer , and shall 
-Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
      
 
  
 
   
 
   
   
   
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 RA1-2 2025 Residential Appendices 
be utilized as the required compliance criteria for HERS Rater refrigerant charge verification. 
Deviations of system operating parameters from the manufacturer's target values for less than 5 
percent deviation in sensible EER 2 (tighter tolerances) may be specified by the manufacturer for 
use by the installing contractor. 
Manufacturers using an alternative refrigerant charge verification protocol s shall, upon request, 
provide comprehensive engineering specification documentation, installation and technical field 
service documentation, and user instructions documentation to installers and service personnel 
that utilize the procedure. 
RA1.2 Winter Setup for the Standard Charge Verification Procedure 
RA1.2.1 Purpose and Scope 
The purpose of this procedure is to verify that residential split system air conditioners and heat 
pumps have the required refrigerant charge , and that the metering device is working as designed. 
The procedures only apply to ducted split system central air-cooled air conditioners and ducted 
split system central air-source heat pumps for which the system manufacturer has specified that 
this procedure may be used to verify refrigerant charge. 
The Standard Charge Verification Procedure (Section RA3.2.2 of the Reference Residential 
Appendices) calls for the outdoor temperature to be within the manufacturer's specified range.  
When outdoor temperatures are below 55°F, the setup for the Standard Charge Verification 
Procedure must be modified in order to achieve the proper system pressure differential needed 
for the procedure.  The Winter Setup for the Standard Charge Verification Procedure (Winter 
Charge Setup) allows both installers and HERS ECC-Raters to utilize the Standard Charge 
Verification Procedure of RA3.2.2 in the winter.  Note that the Weigh -in Charging Procedure 
specified in Section RA3.2.3 may also be used only by the installer. 
The Winter Charge Setup creates the right conditions at the unit being tested for outdoor 
temperatures above 37°F and below 71°F that allow the system to operate in the same range of 
pressure differences between the low side pressure and the high side pres sure as occurs during 
warm outdoor temperatures. 
The Winter Charge Setup is used only for units equipped with variable metering devices, which 
include Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) and Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) for which the 
manufacturer specifies subcooling as the means for determining the proper charge for the unit, 
including units equipped with micro -channel heat exchangers. The Winter Charge Setup achieves 
an appropriate high side -low side pressure differential to conduct the Standard Charge 
Verification Procedure, by restricting the a irflow at the condenser fan outlet through the use of a 
Condenser Outlet Air Restrictor. Once this pressure differential is achieved, the Variable Metering 
Device Calculations are conducted in the same way as the variable metering device procedures 
described in Reference Residential Appendix RA 3.2.2.6.2.  All other applicable requirements of 
Section RA3.2.2 remain the same and must also be completed when using the Winter Charge 
Setup . 
-Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
 
     
 
 
  
     
      
  
 
 
 
  
 
     
      
 
  
     
 
     
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA1-3 
Definition -Condenser Outlet Air Restrictor: A device which restricts the free area of the outlet 
from the condenser fan to reduce the air flow , but does not interfere with air entering the 
condenser coil. The amount of restriction shall be adjustable to allow the operator to vary the 
airflow to achieve the target refrigerant pressure difference. 
RA1.2.2 Winter Setup for the Standard Charge Verification Procedure 
a) Install the condenser outlet air restrictor on the outlet from the condenser fan: 
Position the restrictor so it does not interfere with the inlet airflow to the condenser. 
Start the air conditioner or heat pump in the cooling mode and restrict the outlet until the 
difference between the high side pressure and the low side pressure is between 160 psi and 
220 psi for R -410A refrigerant and 100 to 145 psi for R -22 refrigerant. 
160 psi ≤ (P high, – Plow ) ≤ 220 psi for R -410A refrigerant; 
100 psi ≤ (P high, – Plow ) ≤ 145 psi for R -22 refrigerant 
Allow the unit to stabilize for 15 minutes, watching the pressures to make sure the 
differential achieves and remains within 160 psi ≤ (P high, – Plow ) ≤ 220 psi for R -410A 
refrigerant 
100 psi ≤ (P high, – Plow ) ≤ 145 psi for R -22 refrigerant 
b) Follow the test procedures specified in the Reference Residential Appendix, Section 
RA3.2.2.6.2, Variable Metering Device Calculations to determine compliance . 
RA1.2.3 Additional Requirements and Q ualifications 
The Winter Charge Setup may only be used for equipment for which the air conditioning 
manufacturer approve s the use of the Winter Charge Setup. Refer to the Energy Commissions 
website for the list of split system air condition er units approved by the manufacturers to use the 
Winter Charge Setup. In addition to the requirements of Section RA1.2 , manufacturers may issue 
additional instructions/clarification for the equipment and procedures required to be used to 
conduct the Winter Charge Setup. These addition al instruction/clarifications shall also be 
available on the Energy Commission website: www.energy.ca.gov/title24 /. 
Winter Charge Setup may be used for systems that use a target subcooling for refrigerant charge 
verification , including units equipped with micro -channel heat exchangers where the 
manufacturer specifies subcooling for measuring refrigerant charge. 
Similar to the Standard Charge Verification Procedure for warm weather, the Winter Charge 
Setup may be used by the Installer and/or the HERS ECC-Rater. 
The system shall comply with the minimum system airflow requirements specified in Reference 
Residential Appendix Section RA 3.3.3.1 . 
Similar to the Standard Charge Verification Procedure for warm weather, the Winter Charge 
Setup requires that the return air dry bulb temperature must be maintained within the 
-Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
  
    
  RA1-4 2025 Residential Appendices 
manufacturer's specification during the test, as specified in RA3.2.2.  Suggestions for methods to 
accomplish warmer return air are posted on the Energy Commission website at the following link: 
http://www.energy.ca.gov/title24/orc/hvac/ Similar  to the Standard Charge Measurement 
Procedure for warm weather, the Winter Charge Setup procedure does not relieve the installing 
contractor from any obligations to follow manufacturers’ specifications. Th e procedures in 
Section RA1.2 are used to demonstrate compliance with Title 24 , Part 6 requirements for 
refrigerant charge verification . 
-Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
 
     
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA1-5 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
-Alternative Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
    
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-1 
Residential Appendix RA2 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, and Field 
Verification and Diagnostic Testing Documentation Procedures 
RA2.1 California Home Energy Rating Systems Field Verification and 
Diagnostic Testing 
Compliance for certain energy efficiency measures, as specified by the Commission, requires field 
verification and diagnostic testing of dwelling units by a certified Home Energy Rating System 
(HERS) ECC-Rater. The Commission approves HERS ECC-Providers, subject to the Commission’s 
HERS regulations, which appear in the California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 
4, Article 8, Sections 1670 -1675 to Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 . Approved HERS ECC-
Providers are authorized to certify HERS ECC-Raters and are required to maintain quality control 
over HERS ECC-Rater field verification and diagnostic testing activities. 
When the Certificate of Compliance documentation for a dwelling unit indicates that field 
verification and diagnostic testing of specific energy efficiency measures are required as a 
condition for complying with Title 24, Part 6, an approved HERS ECC-Provider and certified HERS 
ECC-Rater shall be used to conduct the field verification and diagnostic testing according to the 
applicable procedures in Appendix RA2. HERS Raters shall be considered special inspectors by 
enforcement agencies and shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the building 
official, for the visual inspections and diagnostic testing that they perform. As specified by 
California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1673(j)(2), Section 
10-103.3 , “Providers and Raters shall be independent entities from the builder and from the 
subcontractor installer of energy efficiency improvements field verified or diagnostically tested. ” 
An “Independent Entity means having no financial interest in, and not adv ocating or 
recommending the use of any product or service as a means of gaining increased business with, 
firms or persons specified in California Code of Regulations Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 
8, Sections 1671 and 1673(j) Section 10 -103.3 .” Third Party Quality Control Programs approved 
by the Commission may serve some of the functions of HERS ECC-Raters for field verification 
purposes as specified in Section RA2.7 . 
The remainder of this Appendix RA2 describes the: 
(a) Measures that require field verification or diagnostic testing; 
(b) Requirements for documentation and communication for HERS verification compliance 
processes; 
(c) Responsibilities assigned to each of the parties involved in the field verification and 
diagnostic testing process; 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
   
 
  
 
  
  
   
  
   
 
 
 
 
    
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
    
   
   
 
  
  
 
   
 
  RA2-2 2025 Residential Appendices 
(d) Requirements for procedures for installing contractors and Certificate of Installation 
documentation ; 
(e) Requirements for HERS Rater field verification and diagnostic testing and documentation 
procedures; 
(f) Requirements for sampling procedures for HERS verification compliance; 
(g) Requirements for Third Party Quality Control Programs; 
(h) Requirements for HERS verification compliance for alterations to existing dwellings. 
RA2.2 Measures that Require Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
Table RA2 -1 describes the measures that require installer certification and HERS Rater field 
verification and diagnostic testing, and identifies the protocol or test procedure in the Reference 
Residential Appendices that shall be used for completing installer and HERS ECC-Rater field 
verification and diagnostic testing. 
Table RA2 -1 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
Duct Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure( s) 
Duct Sealing Component Packages require that space conditioning ducts be sealed. If 
sealed and tested ducts are claimed for compliance, field verification 
and diagnostic testing is required to verify that approved duct system 
materials are utilized, and that duct leaka ge meets the specified 
criteria. RA3.1.4.3 
Duct Location, 
Surface Area and 
R-value Compliance credit can be taken for improved duct location, surface area 
and R -value. Field verification is required to verify that the duct system 
was installed according to the design, including location, size and length 
of ducts, duct insulation R -value and installation of buried ducts.1 For 
buried ducts measures, Duct Sealing and High Quality Insulation 
Installation (QII) is required. RA3.1.4.1 
Verification of 
low leakage ducts 
located entirely 
in conditioned 
space Duct system location shall be verified by visual inspection and 
diagnostic testing. 
Compliance credit can be taken for verified duct systems with low air 
leakage to the outside when measured in accordance with Reference 
Residential Appendix Section RA3.1.4.3.8. Field Verification for ducts in 
conditioned space is required. Duct sealing is required. RA3.1.4.3.8 
Low Leakage 
Air-handling 
Units Compliance credit can be taken for installation of a factory sealed air 
handling unit tested by the manufacturer and certified to the 
Commission to have met the requirements for a Low Leakage Air -
Handling Unit. Field verification of the air handler’s model number is 
required. Duct Sealing is required. RA3.1.4.3.9 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
    
 
  
    
   
    
  
   
    
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
 
   2025 Residential Appendices RA2-3 
Measure Title Description Procedure( s) 
Verification of 
Return Duct 
Design Verification to confirm that the return duct design conform s to the 
applicable criteria given in T ABLE 150.0 -B, TABLE 150.0 -C, TABLE 160.3 -
A, or TABLE 160.3 -B. RA3.1.4.4 
Verification of Air 
Filter Device 
Design Verification to confirm that the air filter devices conform to the 
requirements given in applicable Standards Section s 150.0(m)12 or 
160.2(b)1 . RA3.1.4.5 
Verification of 
Prescriptive 
Bypass Duct 
Requirements Verification to confirm zonally controlled systems comply with the 
bypass duct requirements in Section 150.1(c)13 or 170.2(c)3C . RA3.1.4.6 
Table RA2 -2 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Air Conditioning Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Improved 
Refrigerant 
Charge Component Packages require in some climate zones that air -cooled air 
conditioners and air -source heat pumps be diagnostically tested in the 
field to verify that the system has the correct refrigerant charge. For the 
performance method, the Proposed Design is modeled with less 
efficiency if diagnostic testing and field verif ication is not performed. 
The system must also meet the prerequisite minimum System Airflow 
requirement. RA3.3 
RA3.2 
RA1.2 
Installation of 
Fault Indicator 
Display Component Packages specify that a Fault Indicator Display can be 
installed as an alternative to refrigerant charge testing. The existence of 
a Fault Indicator Display has the same calculated benefit as refrigerant 
charge testing. Field verification is required. RA3.4.2 
Verified System 
Airflow When compliance requires verified system airflow greater than or equal 
to a specified criterion, field verification and diagnostic testing is 
required. RA3.3 
Air-handling Unit 
Fan Efficacy When compliance requires verified fan efficacy (Watt/cfm) less than or 
equal to a specified criterion, field verification and diagnostic testing is 
required. RA3.3 
Verified Energy 
Efficiency Ratio 
(EER/ EER2) Compliance credit can be taken for increased EER/ EER2 by installation 
of specific air conditioner or heat pump models. Field verification is 
required.2 RA3.4.3 
RA3.4.4.1 
Verified Seasonal 
Energy Efficiency 
Ratio 
(SEER/ SEER2) HERS ECC-Rater field verification of the SEER/ SEER2 rating is required 
for some systems. RA3.4.3 
RA3.4.4.1 
Rated Heat Pump 
Capacity 
Verification When performance compliance uses a heat pump, the rated capacity of 
the installed system shall be verified to be greater than or equal to the 
specified value. RA3.4.4.2 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
    
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
  
   
    
    
   
  
  
  RA2-4 2025 Residential Appendices 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Evaporatively 
Cooled 
Condensers Compliance credit can be taken for installation of evaporatively cooled 
condensers. Field verification of duct leakage is required. Field 
verification of refrigerant charge is required. Field verification of 
EER/ EER2 is required. This measure is only applicable to single -family 
buildings. RA3.1.4.3, 
RA3.2 
RA3.4.3. 
RA3.4.4.1 
Variable Capacity 
Heat Pump 
(VCHP) 
Compliance 
Option When performance compliance uses the VCHP compliance option, the 
system shall be field verified to confirm it meets the eligibility 
requirements. RA3.4.4.3 
Table RA2 -3 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Ventilation Cooling Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Whole House Fan When performance compliance uses a whole house fan, the installed 
whole house fan airflow rate (cfm) and fan efficacy (W/cfm) shall be 
verified to be equal to or better than the specified values. This measure 
is only applicable to single -family buildings. RA3.9 
Central Fan 
Ventilation 
Cooling System When performance compliance uses a central fan ventilation cooling 
system (CFVCS), the installed CFVCS ventilation airflow rate (cfm) and 
fan efficacy (W/cfm) shall be verified to be equal to or better than the 
specified values. This measure is applicable only to single -family 
buildings. RA3.3.4 
Table RA2 -4 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Mechanical Ventilation Measures for Improved Indoor Air Quality 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Continuous Whole -Building 
Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Measurement of whole -building mechanical ventilation 
is mandatory for newly constructed buildings. RA3.7.4.1 
Intermittent Whole -Building 
Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Measurement of whole -building mechanical ventilation 
is mandatory for newly constructed buildings. RA3.7.4.2 
Kitchen Local Mechanical 
Exhaust Verification Verification of kitchen local mechanical exhaust is 
mandatory for newly constructed buildings. RA3.7.4.3 
Heat Recovery Ventilation (HRV) 
or Energy Recovery Ventilation 
(ERV) Rated Performance 
Verification When performance compliance requires verification of 
the HRV/ERV fan efficacy (W/cfm) or heat recovery 
efficiency, then the installed ventilation system shall be 
verified. RA3.7.4.4 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
    
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
   
  2025 Residential Appendices RA2-5 
Table RA2 -5 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Building Envelope Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Building Envelope Air 
Leakage Compliance credit can be taken for reduced building envelope air 
leakage. Field verification and diagnostic testing is required. 
Multifamily dwelling units are required to have enclosure leakage 
verified when supply or exhaust ventilation systems are insta lled. RA3.8 
Quality Insulation 
Installation (QII) Compliance Software recognizes standard and improved envelope 
construction. Quality Insulation Installation is a prescriptive 
measure in all climate zones for newly constructed buildings and 
additions greater than 700 square feet, except low -rise multifami ly 
buildings in Climate Zone 7.  Field verification is required. RA3.5 
Quality Insulation 
Installation for Spray 
Polyurethane Foam 
(SPF) Insulation A HERS ECC-Rater shall verify the installation of SPF insulation 
whenever R -values other than the default R -value per inch are 
used for compliance. RA3.5.6 
Table RA2 -6 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Single Family Domestic Hot Water Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Verified Pipe Insulation Credit 
(PIC-H)for Single Dwelling Inspection to verify that all hot water piping in non -
recirculating systems is insulated and that corners and tees 
are fully insulated.  No piping should be visible due to 
insulation voids with the exception of the last segment of 
piping that penetrate walls and delivers hot w ater to the 
sink, appliance, etc. RA3.6. 23. 
Verified Parallel Piping (PP -H) Inspection that requires that the measured length of piping 
between the water heater and single central manifold does 
not exceed five feet RA3.6.4 
Verified Compact Hot Water 
Distribution System Expanded 
Credit (CHWDS -H-EX) Field verification to insure Inspection to verify that the 
eligibility criteria specified in RA 3.6.5 are met. RA3.6.5 
Demand Recirculation: 
Manual Control (RDRmc -H) Inspection to verify that all recirculating hot water piping is 
insulated , and that corners and tees are fully insulated.  No 
piping should be visible due to insulation voids RA3.6.6 
Demand Recirculation: Sensor 
Control (RDRsc -H) Inspection to verify that all recirculating hot water piping is 
insulated , and that corners and tees are fully insulated.  No 
piping should be visible due to insulation voids. RA3.6.7 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
    
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 RA2-6 2025 Residential Appendices 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Verified Drain Water Heat 
Recovery System (DWHR -H) Inspection to verify that the DWHR unit(s) and installation 
configuration match the compliance document and the 
DWHR(s) is certified to the Commission to have met the 
requirements. RA3.6,9 
Table RA2 -7 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
(Continued) 
Multi Family Domestic Hot Water Heating Measures 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Multiple Recirculation 
Loop Design for DHW 
Systems Serving Multiple 
Dwelling Units Verified 
Pipe Insulation for Central 
Systems Inspection that a central DHW system serving a building with 
more than eight dwelling units has at least two recirculation 
loops, each serving roughly the same number of dwelling 
units. These recirculation loops may the same water heating 
equipment or be connected to independent water heating 
equipment . 
Inspection to verify that the central system hot water piping, 
fittings and appurtenances are continuously insulated per 
mandatory requirements. RA3.6.8 RA3.6.3 
Verified Drain Water Heat 
Recovery System (DWHR -
H) Inspection to verify that the DWHR unit(s) and installation 
configuration match the compliance document and the 
DWHR(s) is certified to the Commission to have met the 
requirements. RA3.6.9 
1. Note: Compliance credit for increased duct insulation R -value (not buried ducts) may be taken without field 
verification if the R -value is the same throughout the building, and for ducts located in crawlspaces and garages 
where all registers are either in the floor or within 2 feet of the floor. These two credits may be taken subject only to 
enforcement agency inspection. 
2. Note: The requirement for verification of a high EER/ EER2 does not apply to equipment rated only with an 
EER/ EER2. 
RA2.3 Documentation and Communication Requirements for HERS 
Verification Compliance 
The building energy compliance features, HERS field verification requirements, and applicable 
special feature eligibility criteria shall be identified on a Certificate of Compliance that conforms 
to the requirements in Standards Sections 10 -103(a)1 and 10 -103(a)2. The builder or 
subcontractor shall su bmit all applicable Certificate of Installation documentation in conformance 
with the requirements in Standards Section 10 -103(a)3 and the procedures described in RA2, and 
shall provide certification that the c onstruction/installation complies with all applicable 
requirements on the Certificate of Compliance and complies with all applicable field verification 
and eligibility criteria. Field verification shall be performed by a n HERS EEC-Rater and 
documented on applicable Certificate of Verification documentation that conforms to the 
requirements of Standards Section 10 -103(a)5 and the procedures in RA2. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
    
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
       
 
 
  
 
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA2-7 
RA2.3.1 Documentation Constraints, Registration, and Verification 
The performance compliance method allows for preparation of Certificate of Compliance 
documentation for multifamily buildings that precludes use of certain HERS verification 
compliance credits that would otherwise be available for compliance credit as described in 
Section RA2.3.1.1 below. Document registration is required for all dwelling units that utilize 
building energy features for which HERS verification is required as introduced in Section 
RA2.3.1.2 and described in the procedures in subsequent sectio ns of RA2. Verification of 
electronic documentation is introduced in section RA2.3.1.3 and is applicable to many aspects of 
the documentation procedures described in subsequent sections of RA2. 
RA2.3.1.1 Whole -Building Compliance Approach for Multifamily Buildings 
For multifamily buildings, a single Certificate of Compliance may be prepared for the whole 
building, however dwelling unit -specific Certificates of Installation and dwelling unit -specific 
Certificates of Verification shall be required for each individual dwelling unit in the building. Thus, 
for the whole -building compliance approach in a multifamily building utilizing features that 
require HERS verification, the required energy compliance documentation for each dwelling unit 
shall consist of a copy of the whole -building Certificate of Compliance, the applicable dwelling 
unit-specific Certificates of Installation, and the applicable dwelling unit -specific Certificates of 
Verification. 
When the whole -building compliance approach is utilized for a multifamily building, some energy 
efficiency measures that require HERS field verification shall not be used for compliance credit in 
performance compliance calculations. These measures require dwelling unit -specific information 
input to the compliance software, and dwelling unit -specific information that must be shown on 
the Certificate of Compliance, thus these measures cannot be properly documented using a 
whole -building Certificate of Complia nce (which is not a dwelling unit -specific document type). 
The HERS measures that shall not be utilized for the multifamily whole -building compliance 
approach are: 
(a) Buried Ducts credit 
(b) Deeply Buried Ducts credit 
(c) Reduced Duct Surface Area credit 
(d) Building Envelope Sealing credit for reduced outdoor air infiltration (blower door test) 
All other measures that require HERS field verification and diagnostic testing are allowed for use 
with the multifamily whole -building compliance approach. 
RA2.3.1.2 Document Registration 
For all low -rise residential buildings for which compliance requires HERS field verification, all 
Registered Compliance Document and Compliance Registration Package (Certificate of 
Compliance, Certificate of Installation, and Certificate of Verification) required for the dwelling 
unit shall be submitted for registration and retention to a n HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
When submittal of documentation to a n HERS ECC-Provider data registry is required, the 
completed documents are referred to as registered documents, and the process of completing 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
   
 
 
 
   
  
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 RA2-8 2025 Residential Appendices 
these documents by submitting information (Compliance Registration Package) and certification 
signatures to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry is called registration. Refer to Reference Joint 
Appendix JA1 for the definitions for HERS ECC-Provider data registry, and for registered 
document. Additional specification for the document registration process is given in Reference 
Joint Appendix JA7. 
RA2.3.1.3 Verification of Registered Documents 
Printed paper copies or electronic copies of the completed, signed, registered Certificate of 
Compliance, Certificate of Installation, and Certificate of Verification documentation shall be 
allowed for use for required submittals to enforcement agencies, s ubject to verification that the 
information shown on the submitted document(s) conforms to the information shown on the 
current revision of the registered document(s) on file in the HERS ECC-Provider data registry for 
the applicable dwelling unit. 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall make document verification services available via phone, internet, 
or utilization of digital technologies, to enable enforcement agency officials, builders, installation 
contractors, HERS ECC-Raters, and other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry 
to verify that the information shown on submitted documentation is consistent with the 
information shown on the current revision of the registered document on file in the HERS ECC-
Provider data registry for the applicable dwelling unit. President 
RA2.3.2 Summary of Documentation and Communication Procedures 
The documentation and communication process for measures that require field verification and 
diagnostic testing is summarized below. The subsequent sections of this chapter contain 
additional information and requirements that apply to all situations; howev er, the section on 
alterations, RA2.8 , applies specifically to the differences in the requirements for alterations. 
Section RA2.7 applies specifically to the differences in the requirements for Third Party Quality 
Control Programs. 
(a) A Certificate of Compliance shall be prepared for each dwelling unit or building that 
requires a building permit. The Certificate of Compliance information shall be submitted 
to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry, validated, and signed by the documentation 
author and the building’s designer or owner to register the documentation prior to 
submittal of the Certificate of Compliance to the enforcement agency for approval. The 
documentation autho r and the building designer or owner shall submit certification to the 
HERS ECC-Provider data registry electronically. 
(b) The builder shall arrange for the services of a certified HERS ECC-Rater prior to installation 
of the measures, so that once the installation is complete the HERS ECC-Rater has ample 
time to complete the field verification and diagnostic testing without delaying final 
approval of the dwelling unit by the enforcement agency. The Builder shall make available 
to the HERS ECC-Rater a copy of the Certificate of Compliance that was approved/signed 
by the building designer or owner and submitted to the enforcement agency. The b uilder 
or subcontractor shall install the measure(s) that require field verification and diagnostic 
testing. When the installation is complete, the builder or subcontractor shall perform 
diagnostic testing on the installation using the applicable procedure s specified in 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
    
  
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-9 
Reference Residential Appendix RA2.5 , RA3, and RA1. If testing confirms compliance, the 
builder or subcontractor shall submit the required information and signatures 
electronically to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry to register the applicable 
Certificate(s) of Installation, then post a copy of the applicable registered Certificate(s) of 
Installation at the building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with 
requests for final inspection for each dwelling unit. 
(c) The HERS ECC-Rater shall confirm that registration of the Certificate(s) of Compliance and 
the applicable Certificate(s) of Installation has been completed for each dwelling unit that 
requires HERS verification. The HERS ECC-Rater shall complete the applicable field 
verification and diagnostic testing as specified in Section RA2.6 . The HERS ECC-Rater shall 
submit the required field verification and diagnostic testing information and signatures 
electronically to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry to register the applicable Certificate 
of Verification documentation. 
(d) The HERS ECC-Provider shall make available registered copies of the Certificate(s) of 
Verification to the HERS ECC-Rater, builder, enforcement agency and other authorized 
users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. If a building owner is identifiable, the HERS 
ECC-Provider shall make available registered copies of the Certificate(s) of Verification to 
that person. 
(e) The enforcement agency shall not approve a dwelling unit until the enforcement agency 
has received the required registered Certificate(s) of Verification, posted at the building 
site for review in conjunction with requests for final inspection for the dwel ling. The HERS 
ECC-Provider shall make document verification services available, to enforcement 
agencies, builders and contractors, HERS ECC-Raters, the Energy Commission, and other 
authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. The HERS ECC-Prov ider shall 
ensure that the content and approval signatures for copies of submitted Certificate(s) of 
Compliance, Certificate(s) of Installation, and Certificate(s) Verification are retained as 
specified by Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1673(e) Title 24, Part 1, 
Section 10 -103.3 . 
RA2.4 Summary of Responsibilities 
Section RA2.4 summarizes responsibilities set forth in Appendix RA2 and organizes them by the 
responsible party. This section is not, however, a complete accounting of the responsibilities of 
the respective parties. 
RA2.4.1 Builder 
The builder shall make arrangements for submittal of the Certificate of Compliance information 
and certification signatures to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry for dwelling units with 
features that require HERS verification. The builder shall make arrangements for the services of a 
certified HERS ECC-Rater prior to installation of the features, so that once the installation is 
complete the HERS ECC-Rater has ample time to complete the field verification and diagnostic 
testing without delaying final appro val of the building permit by the enforcement agency. The 
Builder shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater a copy of the Certificate of Compliance that 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 RA2-10 2025 Residential Appendices 
was approved/signed by the building designer or owner and submitted to the enforcement 
agency. 
The builder or subcontractor responsible for the installation shall complete and sign all applicable 
Certificates of Installation to certify that the installation work meets the requirements for 
compliance credit shown on the Certificate of Compliance and that all applicable field verification 
and diagnostic test results reported on Certificates of Installation are accurate. The builder or 
subcontractor shall post a copy of all applicable Certificates of Installation at the construction site 
for review by t he enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final inspection for each 
dwelling unit. Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on an 
approved Data R egistry . The builder or subcontractor shall also make available to the HERS ECC-
Rater copies of all applicable Certificates of Installation. 
If the builder utilizes group sampling for HERS verification compliance, the builder, builder’s 
authorized representative, or the HERS ECC-Rater shall identify the dwelling units to be included 
in the sample group for field verification and diagnostic testing. The HERS ECC-Rater, with no 
direction from the installer or builder, shall randomly select one dwelling unit from a sample 
group for field verification and diagnostic testing upon receiving the builder’s or builder 
representative’s request for HERS verification of that group. 
The builder shall arrange for copies of all applicable registered Certificates of Verification to be 
posted at the building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for 
final inspection for each dwelling unit. Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view 
the certificates on an approved Data R egistry . 
When re-sampling reveals a failure (see Section RA2.6.4), the builder is required to offer at no 
charge to all building owners for occupied dwelling units in the group to complete field 
verification, diagnostic testing , and corrective action if necessary. Building owners may decline to 
have field verification and diagnostic testing and corrective action completed for the dwelling 
unit. The builder shall report the identifying location of any dwelling unit in which the bu ilding 
owner declines field verification a nd diagnostic testing and corrective action to the HERS ECC-
Provider. The builder shall take corrective action as required in all unoccupied dwelling units in 
the group and in occupied dwelling units in the group where building owners have accepted field 
verification, diagnostic testing , and corrective action. 
The builder shall leave in the building, for the building owner at occupancy, copies of all 
compliance, operating, maintenance, and ventilation information specified in applicable sections 
of Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103(b). 
RA2.4.2 HERS ECC-Provider and ECC-Rater 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall maintain a data registry with the capability to receive and store 
electronic data and image information provided by authorized users of the data registry sufficient 
to facilitate administration of all applicable document registration procedu res and HERS 
compliance verification procedures as described in Reference Residential Appendix RA2 and 
Reference Joint Appendix JA7. Data registry capabilities include a secure web -based interface 
accessible by authorized users, and the abilit y to receive and process data transfer files 
generated by the Title 24 performance compliance software tools or other approved data input 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
   
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-11 
software. For sampling purposes, the HERS ECC-Provider shall maintain a list of the dwelling units 
in a group, the features that require Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing, the dwelling units 
selected for sample testing for each feature and the dwelling units that were not tested, the 
results o f the sample testing, the dwelling units that were tested and verified as a result of re -
sampling, and any corrective action taken. 
For all dwelling units that require HERS verification for compliance, the HERS ECC-Provider shall 
retain records of all information and approval signatures for completed Certificates of 
Compliance, Certificates of Installation, and Certificates of Verification for a period of ten years as 
specified by Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1673(e) in Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -
103.3 . 
The HERS ECC-Rater who provides field verification and diagnostic testing shall transmit the 
required test results and certification signatures to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
Registered Certificates of Verification from the Provider shall be made available for the tested 
dwelling unit and each of the remaining untested dwelling units from a designated group for 
which compliance is verified based on the r esults of a sample test. The registered Certificates of 
Verification shall be made available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the builder, the enforcement agency, 
and to other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall produce a separate Certificate of Verification for each dwelling unit that 
meets the requirements for compliance. The registered Certificate of Verification shall have 
unique HERS ECC-Provider -designated identifiers for registration number and sample group 
number, and shall include lot location or address, building permit number, time and date stamp, 
Provider logo, water mark or official seal, and indicate if the dwelling unit has been tested or if it 
was an untested dwelling unit a pproved as part of sample group. The HERS ECC-Rater shall not 
submit a Certificate of Verification for a dwelling unit that does not have a completed Certificate 
of Installation submitted by the installer as required in Section RA2.5 . 
If field verification and diagnostic testing on a sampled dwelling unit identifies a failure to meet 
the requirements for compliance credit, the HERS ECC-Rater shall report to the HERS ECC-
Provider, the builder, and the enforcement agency that re -sampling will be required. 
If re-sampling identifies another failure, the HERS ECC-Rater shall report to the HERS ECC-
Provider, the builder, and the enforcement agency that field verification and diagnostic testing 
will be required for all the untested dwelling units in the group. The report shall specify the 
identifying location of all dwelling units that shall be fully tested. 
(a) The HERS ECC-Provider shall also report to the builder once diagnostic testing and field 
verification has shown that the failures have been corrected in all of the dwelling units except 
those for which the building owner has declined field verification, diagnostic test ing, and 
corrective action. When field verification and diagnostic testing confirm that the requirements 
for compliance have been met, the HERS ECC-Provider shall make available the applicable 
registered Certificate(s) of Verification for each dwelling unit in the group. 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall file a report with the enforcement agency if there has been a failure 
on a re -sample within a group, explaining all actions taken (including field verification, testing, 
corrective actions, offers to building owners for testing and correctiv e action, and building owner 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
     
    
  
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
  
 
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
  
  
  
   RA2-12 2025 Residential Appendices 
declines of such offers) to bring into compliance dwelling units for which full testing has been 
required. 
RA2.4.3 Third Party Quality Control Program 
Third Party Quality Control Programs (TPQCP) verify the work of participating installers, collect , 
and evaluate more detailed data than necessary for compliance, identify in real time during the 
installation invalid and inaccurate installer testing and noncompliant installations, and enable 
corrected testing with the goal of bringing installations into compliance before the installer 
leaves the job site. TPQCP personnel and participating TPQCPs do not sign Certificate of 
Verification documentation, given th at they provide assistance and quality control to HERS ECC-
Raters, who remain responsible for this documentation. 
An approved Third Party Quality Control Program shall: 
(a) Provide training to participating program installers, installing but not limited to 
contractors, subcontractors, and technicians, to ensure proficiency in: 
i. Quality HVAC installation procedures, common causes of failure, and corrections. 
ii. Understanding of the Standards requirements for field verification and diagnostic 
testing of measures, which are subject to TPQCP program procedures . 
iii. Understanding all applicable specifications for field verification and diagnostic testing 
procedures specified in the Reference Residential Appendices. 
iv. Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures. 
(b) Collect field verification and diagnostic test data ( data ) from participating installers for 
each installation completed, 
(c) Confirm the location of the system undergoing testing using an electronic tracking means 
such as Global Positioning Satellite System (GPS) technology, 
(d) Provide data checking analysis to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the collected data 
to independently determine whether compliance has been achieved , and to uncover 
invalid or erroneous information, 
(e) Provide real-time direction to the installer to retest and correct problems when data 
checking determines that compliance has not been achieved, or erroneous information is 
present, so that testing can be redone and corrections can be made before the installer 
leaves the site, 
(f) Ensure the installer resubmi ts updated data from new testing when retesting and 
correction is completed , 
(g) Maintain a database of all data submitted by participating TPQCP installers, and 
(h) Enable Energy Commission staff to query retained TPQCP data or documents. 
TPQCPs do not impose restrictions on HERS ECC-Raters or Providers that limit their independence 
or ability to properly perform their functions, nor do they impose restrictions on the HERS ECC-
Rater’s use of equipment (beyond those required by the Energy Commission) . 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
  
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
     
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
   2025 Residential Appendices RA2-13 
Refer to RA2.7 for additional detail describing the roles and responsibilities and approval 
procedures for TPQCP. 
RA2.4.4 Enforcement Agency 
The enforcement agency at its discretion may require independent testing and field verification 
to be scheduled so that it can be completed in conjunction with the enforcement agency’s 
required inspections, or observe the field verification and diagnostic testing performed by 
builders, subcontractors or the certified HERS ECC-Rater in conjunction with the enforcement 
agency’s required inspections to corroborate the results documented on the Certificate(s) of 
Installation and on the Certificate(s) of Verific ation. 
For dwelling units that have used a compliance alternative that requires field verification and 
diagnostic testing, the enforcement agency shall not approve a dwelling unit until the 
enforcement agency has received, in accordance with Title 24, Part 1 Sect ion 10 -103(a), Section 
10-103(d) and the procedures in Appendix RA2, a registered copy of the Certificate of Compliance 
that has been completed and signed by the person responsible for the design; all applicable 
registered Certificates of Installation that have been completed and signed by the builder or 
subcontractor, and all applicable registered Certificates of Verification that have been completed 
and signed by the HERS ECC-Rater in conjunction with requests for final inspection for each 
dwelling unit. The HERS ECC-Provider shall make document verification services available to 
enforcement agencies, builders and contractors, HERS ECC-Raters, the Energy Commission, and 
other authorized users of the Provider data registry. 
If necessary to avoid delay of approval of dwelling units completed when outside temperatures 
are below 55°F, the enforcement agency may approve compliance with the refrigerant charge 
verification requirements when installers have used the Weigh -in Chargin g Method described in 
Reference Residential Appendix RA3, Section RA3.2.3.1 and have not used the Section RA3.2.3.2 
option for HERS verification compliance. This approval will be on the condition that installers 
submit to the enforcement agency a registere d Certificate of Installation that includes a signed 
declaration indicating agreement to return to correct refrigerant charge if an HERS ECC-Rater 
determines at a later time when the outside temperature is 55°F or above, that correction is 
necessary. Installers must also notify homeowners that their systems have not had their charge 
verified . The HERS ECC-Provider shall track these projects to ensure a HERS ECC-Rater conducts 
the required refrigerant charge verification for all such systems. When the outdo or temperature 
is 55°F or above, the HERS ECC-Rater shall use the RA3.2.2 standard charge verification 
procedure, or a procedure approved by the HVAC system manufacturer and Energy Commission 
for the refrigerant charge verification. The HERS ECC-Rater shall report the diagnostic results on 
the applicable Certificate of Verification , and shall register the certificate with the HERS ECC-
Provider. When refrigerant charge verification testing performed by the HERS ECC-Rater indicates 
adjustment to the charge is required, the HERS ECC-Provider shall notify the installer, and the 
builder or building owner that corrective action is required. The HERS ECC-Provider may also 
notify the enforcement agency that corrective action is required. All air -cooled air conditioners 
and air -source heat pumps that utilize the Weigh -In Method shall be verified by a HERS ECC-Rater 
using one of the applicable refrigerant charge verification procedures. Compliance with HERS 
verification requirements cannot utilize group sampling proced ures when the installer utilized 
the Weigh -In Method. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
    
 
 
 
    
  
   
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
   
  
 
 RA2-14 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA2.5 Installer Requirements -Certificate of Installation Documentation 
Certificates of Installation are required when dwelling units utilize features, materials, 
components, or manufactured devices that are required for compliance with the Appliance 
Efficiency Regulations and Title 24, Part 6. Certificates of Installation sha ll indicate the installed 
features, materials, components, or manufactured devices are in conformance with the 
specifications listed on the Certificate of Compliance for the dwelling. The builder or the installing 
subcontractor eligible under Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code to accept 
responsibility for construction or installation, in the applicable classification for the scope of 
work, shall sign and submit Certificate of Installation documentation and post a copy of the 
Certificate(s) at t he building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with 
requests for final inspection for each dwelling unit. Alternatively, the enforcement agency may 
elect to view t he certificates on an approved Data R egistry . 
When the dwelling unit does not require HERS field verification for compliance, the Certificates of 
Installation that are posted in the field for review by the enforcement agency at final inspection 
are not required to be registered certificates from a n HERS ECC-Provider data registry , but shall 
conform to all other applicable requirements of 10 -103(a)3. The remainder of Section RA2.5 
describes the documentation procedures for Certificates of Installation for dwelling units that 
require HERS verification. 
RA2.5.1 Field Verification, Diagnostic Testing, and Certificate of Installation Registration 
For the features, materials, components, or manufactured devices that are listed on the 
Certificate of Compliance indicating HERS verification is required for compliance, the builder shall 
arrange for the services of a certified HERS ECC-Rater prior to installation of the measures so that 
once the installation is complete the HERS ECC-Rater will have ample time to complete the 
required field verification and diagnostic testing without delaying final approval of the dwelling 
unit by the enforcement agency. 
For all low -rise residential buildings for which compliance requires HERS field verification and 
diagnostic testing, the Certificate(s) of Installation shall be signed and submitted to a n HERS ECC-
Provider data registry as specified in Standards Section 10 -103(a)3 to certify conformance with 
Part 6. When Standards Section 10 -103(a)3 requires document registration, all Certificates of 
Installation that are applicable to the dwelling unit shall be reg istered. 
When the installation of a measure is complete, the builder or the builder’s subcontractor shall 
perform all required field verification and diagnostic testing of the installation(s) to confirm 
compliance with the Standards utilizing the applicable procedu res specified in Reference 
Residential Appendix RA3 or RA1, and submit, or make arrangements for submittal of all required 
Certificate of Installation information to a n HERS ECC-Provider data registry. Submittal of 
Certificate of Installation information t o the HERS ECC-Provider data registry shall be done 
electronically. 
HERS ECC-Raters or other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry may provide 
documentation author support to facilitate the submittal of the Certificate of Installation 
information to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry on behalf of the builder or the builder’s 
subcontractor when such facilitation has been authorized by the builder or subcontractor. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
    
    
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-15 
Documentation authors shall provide an electronic signature to certify the documentation is 
accurate and complete. The builder or subcontractor who is eligible under Division 3 of the 
Business and Professions Code to take responsibility for the construction or installation, or their 
authorized representative as specified in Standards Section 10 -103(a)3A , shall provide an 
electronic signature to register the Certificate of Installation, to certify the information provided 
on the Certificate is true and corre ct, and confirm that the construction or installation complies 
with the requirements shown on the dwelling unit's Certificate of Compliance that was approved 
by the enforcement agency. The builder or subcontractor shall make available a copy of the 
registe red Certificate of Installation to the HERS ECC-Rater , and post a copy of the registered 
Certificate of Installation at the building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction 
with requests for final inspection for each dwelling unit. Alterna tively, the enforcement agency 
may elect to view the certificates on an approved Data Registry . 
RA2.6 HERS ECC-Rater Procedures – Verification, Testing, and Sampling 
At the builder’s option, HERS field verification and diagnostic testing ( HERS verification) shall be 
completed either for each and every dwelling unit, or alternatively for a dwelling unit sample 
from a designated group of dwelling units in which the same measure(s) requiring HERS 
verification is installed in each dwelling unit in the group. If the builder elects to demonstrate 
compliance utilizing group sampling, all applicable procedures described in Sections RA2.6.2 , 
RA2.6.3 , and RA2.6.4 shall be followed. 
RA2.6.1 HERS ECC-RATER Procedures -General Requirements 
The general requirements in RA2.6.1 are applicable to all dwelling units that require HERS 
verification for compliance, and shall be incorporated into procedures specified in Sections 
RA2.6.2 , RA2.6.3 , and RA2.6.4 whenever applicable. 
The builder or the builder's authorized representative shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater 
the names and license numbers of the subcontractors responsible for the installations in the 
dwelling units that require HERS verification; and a copy of the registered Certificate of 
Compliance that was signed and submitted by the person responsible for the building design and 
was approved by the enforcement agency. 
The builder, builder's authorized representative, or subcontractor shall make available to the 
HERS ECC-Rater a copy of the applicable registered Certificate(s) of Installation signed and 
submitted by the builder or subcontractors responsible for the construction or installation as 
described in Section RA2.5 . 
Prior to performing field verification and diagnostic testing, the HERS ECC-Rater shall verify that 
registration of all applicable Certificate of Compliance documentation, and registration of all 
applicable Certificate of Installation documentation has been completed for all dwelling units for 
which compliance requires HERS verification. The HERS ECC-Rater shall confirm the installer’s 
diagnostic test results and all other Certificate of Installation information indicates compliance 
consistent with the requ irements given in the plans and specifications and registered Certificate 
of Compliance documents approved by the enforcement agency for the dwelling. 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall perform all applicable field verification and diagnostic testing. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
      
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
      
   RA2-16 2025 Residential Appendices 
If the HERS ECC-Rater's field verification and diagnostic testing determines that the requirements 
for compliance are met, the HERS ECC-Rater shall submit, or make arrangements for submittal of 
the Certificate of Verification testing information to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
Authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry that are not certified HERS ECC-Raters 
may provide documentation author support to facilitate submittal of the Certificate of 
Verification information to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry on behalf of the HERS ECC-Rater 
when such facilitation has been authorized by the HERS ECC-Rater. Documentation authors shall 
provide an electronic signature to certify the documentation is accurate and complete. 
The Certificate of Verification shall be signed by the HERS ECC-Rater who performed the field 
verification and diagnostic testing services to certify that the information provided on the 
Certificate is true and correct.  
A completed signed registered copy of the Certificate of Verification shall be posted at the 
building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final 
inspection for each dwelling unit. Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry . 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall make document verification services available, to enforcement 
agencies, builders and contractors, HERS ECC-Raters, the Energy Commission, and other 
authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
RA2.6.2 HERS ECC-Rater Procedures -Initial Model Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall diagnostically test and field verify the first dwelling unit of each model 
within a subdivision or multifamily housing development when the builder elects to demonstrate 
HERS verification compliance utilizing group sampling. To be considered the same model, 
dwelling units shall have the same basic floor plan layout, energy design, and compliance 
features as shown on the Certificate of Compliance. Variations in the basic floor p lan layout, 
energy design, compliance features, zone floor area, or z one volume, that do not change the 
HERS features to be tested, the heating or cooling capacity of the HVAC unit(s), or the number of 
HVAC units specified for the dwelling units, shall not cause dwelling units to be considered a 
different model. For multifamily buildings, variations in exterior surface areas caused by location 
of dwelling units within the building shall not cause dwelling units to be considered a different 
model. This initial model testing allows the builder to identify and correct any poten tial 
construction flaws or practices in advance of the build out of each model. If field verification and 
diagnostic testing determines that the requirements for compliance are met, the HERS ECC-Rater 
shall transmit the test results to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry, whereupon the Provider 
shall make available a registered copy of the Certificate of Verification, to the HERS ECC-Rater, 
the builder, the enforcement agency, and other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data 
registry. 
RA2.6.3 HERS ECC-Rater Procedures – Group Sample Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
Descriptions for HERS verification compliance using group sampling, and details describing 
procedures for sampling of a “closed” group of up to seven dwellings, and for sampling of an 
“open” group of up to five dwellings are described in Section RA2.6.3. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
   
    
 
 
 
 
    
  2025 Residential Appendices RA2-17 
RA2.6.3.1 Designation of Groups 
After the initial model field verification and diagnostic testing is completed as specified in 
RA2.6.2, the builder, or the builder’s authorized representative shall determine a sampling 
procedure to be used , and shall designate the dwelling units to include in the group of dwellings 
that require HERS verification. The maximum number of dwelling units allowed in a sample group 
may range from five, to seven, to thirty as described in Sections RA2.6.3.3, RA2.6.3.4, and RA2.7 
respectively. 
If multiple measures requiring HERS verification are installed, each dwelling unit in a designated 
group shall have the same measures requiring HERS verification as the other dwelling units in the 
designated group. If some dwelling units have installed a different set of measures requiring 
HERS verification, those dwelling units shall be in a separate group. 
If the dwelling units in a designated group have multiple measures that require HERS verification, 
sample testing for individual measures may be conducted in any of the dwelling units in the 
group -it is not required that all of the sample tests for all of the individual measures be 
completed in the same dwelling unit. Individual measures shall be allowed to be included in a 
group regardless of whether compliance requires one sample test, or if compliance requires more 
than one sample test (up to100% sample test rate) be reported for such individual measures. 
Dwelling units in a designated group shall all be located within the same enforcement agency 
jurisdiction and subdivision or multifamily housing development. Refer also to Section RA2.8 for 
requirements for sample groups applicable to alterations. 
If dwelling units have central forced -air space conditioning equipment that introduces outside air 
into the conditioned space utilizing means that connect outside air ventilation ducts directly to 
the dwelling unit’s central forced air duct system (Central Fan-Integrated Ventilation System or 
CFI Ventilation System), the CFI ventilation technology shall be considered a separate measure 
for HERS verification sampling purposes, and dwellings with CFI ventilation systems shall be 
placed in separate groups from other dwelling units that do not utilize CFI ventilation technology. 
RA2.6.3.2 Group Status -"Open" Groups and "Closed" Groups 
Registration of the first Certificate of Installation, for the first dwelling in a sample group shall be 
required to “open” a new group. The date of the responsible persons registration signature for 
the first Certificate of Installation for the group shall establish the start date for the group. 
Additional dwellings may be entered into the registry , and included in an “open” group over a 
period of time subject to registration of the Certificate of Installation documents for each 
additional dwelling. Howeve r, the group shall not remain “open” to receive additional dwellings 
for a period longer than six months after the start date of the group. A group may be “closed” at 
any time after the group has been “opened” at the option of the builder or builder’s authorized 
representative, thus the size of a “closed” group may range from a minimum of one dwelling to a 
maximum of seven dwellings. W hen a group becomes classified as “closed”, no additional 
dwellings shall be added to the group. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
  
   
 
  
 RA2-18 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA2.6.3.3 Sampling of a “Closed” Group of Up to Seven Dwellings 
The following criteria shall be met as prerequisite to attaining HERS verification compliance for 
the group: 
(a) All of the dwelling units contained in the sample group have been identified. A maximum 
of seven dwellings are allowed to be included in a “closed” sample group for HERS 
compliance. 
(b) Installation of all the measures that require HERS verification has been completed in all 
the dwellings that are entered in the group, and registration of the Certificates of 
Installation for all the dwellings entered in the group has been completed . 
(c) The group has been classified as a “closed” group in the Provider data registry . 
(d) At the request of the builder or the builder’s authorized representative, a HERS ECC-Rater 
shall randomly select one dwelling unit from the “closed” sample group for field 
verification and diagnostic testing. If the dwelling unit meets the compliance 
requirements, this “tested” dwelling and also each of the other “not -tested” dwellings in 
the group shall receive a registered Certificate of Verification. 
RA2.6.3.4 Sampling of an “Open” Group of Up to Five Dwellings 
The following criteria shall be met as prerequisite to attaining HERS verification compliance for 
the group: 
(a) At least one dwelling unit from the sample group has been identified. A maximum of five 
dwellings are allowed to be included in an “open” sample group for HERS compliance. 
(b) Installation of all the measures that require HERS verification shall be completed in all the 
dwellings that are entered in the group, and registration of the Certificates of Installation 
for all the dwellings entered in the group has been completed. 
(c) At the request of the builder, or the builder’s authorized representative, a n HERS ECC-
Rater shall randomly select one dwelling unit from those currently entered into the 
“open” sample group for field verification and diagnostic testing. If the dwelling unit 
meets the compliance requirements, the “tested” dwelling and also each of the other 
“not tested” dwellings currently entered into the group shall receive a registered 
Certificate of Verification. If less than five dwelling units have been entered into t he 
group, the group shall be allowed to remain “open” and eligible to receive additional 
dwelling units. Dwelling units entered into the “open” group subsequent to the compliant 
HERS verification of the “tested” dwelling shall also receive a registered Certificate of 
Verification as a “not tested” dwelling subject to receipt of the registered Certificate of 
Installation by the HERS ECC-Provider data registry for the dwelling. The group shall be 
“closed” when it reaches the limit of five dwellings or when th e six month limit for “open” 
groups has been exceeded, or when the builder requests that the group be closed . 
RA2.6.3.5 Additional Requirements Applicable to Group Sampling Procedures 
The builder or the HERS ECC-Rater may request removal of untested dwelling units from a group 
by notifying the HERS ECC-Provider prior to selection of the dwelling sample that will be tested 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
   
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-19 
from an “open” or “closed” group and shall provide justification for the change. Removed 
dwelling units shall be field verified and diagnostically tested individually or shall be included in a 
subsequent group for sampling. 
There are exceptions to the requirement to have completed Certificate of Installation data 
entered into the HERS ECC-Provider data registry prior to selection of the dwelling unit to be 
tested in a group. Some HERS measures require multiple verifications during the construction 
process. A sample group is not required to be closed before HERS field verification and diagnostic 
testing can begin for the following measures. For these measures the HERS ECC-Rater is allowed 
to randomly select the dwelling unit to be field verified from those that are at the proper stage of 
construction to enable the first of the multiple verifications to be completed. 
(a) Quality Installation of Insulation measure requires inspection of the air barrier and 
inspection of the insulation behind tubs and showers at framing rough -in. Verification of 
the wall, floor and ceiling insulation must be completed prior to drywall installation. Attic 
insulation installat ion may require follow -up verification. 
(b) Buried Ducts measure requires verification of the duct design prior to verification of the 
attic insulation. 
(c) Duct Surface Area requires verification of the duct design prior to installation of the attic 
insulation. 
The HERS ECC-Rater, with no direction from the installer or builder, shall randomly select one 
dwelling unit from a “closed” sample group for field verification and diagnostic testing upon 
receiving the builder’s or builder representative’s request for HERS verification of that group. 
Alternatively, the HERS ECC-Rater shall randomly select one dwelling unit from the dwellings 
currently entered into an “open” sample group upon receiving the builder’s or builder 
representative’s request for HERS verification of that group. The HERS ECC-Rater shall 
diagnostically test and field verify the selected dwelling unit. The HERS ECC-Rater shall enter the 
test and/or field verification results into the HERS ECC-Provider data registry regardless of 
whether the results indicate a pass or fail. If the test fails, then the failure must be entered into 
the Provider’s data registry even if the installer immediately corrects the problem. In addition, 
the procedures in S ection RA2.6.4 shall be followed. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing determines that the requirements for compliance are 
met, the HERS ECC-Rater shall enter the test results into the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
Whereupon the Provider shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the builder, the 
enforcement agency, and other approved users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry, a 
registered copy of the Certificate of Verification for the “tested” dwelling, and for all other “not 
tested” dwelling units entered in the group at t he time of the sample test. The registered 
Certificate of Verification shall report the successful diagnostic testing results and conclusions 
regarding compliance for the tested dwelling unit. The registered Certificate of Verification shall 
also provide: 
(a) Building permit number for the dwelling unit. 
(b) Registration Number that conforms to the numbering convention specified in Reference 
Joint Appendix JA7. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
      
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 RA2-20 2025 Residential Appendices 
(c) Group Number that conforms to the numbering convention specified in Reference Joint 
Appendix JA7. 
(d) Time and date stamp of the Provider’s issuance of the registered Certificate of 
Verification. 
(e) Provider’s logo, water mark, or official seal. 
(f) Indication that the dwelling was a “tested” dwelling , or was a “not -tested” dwelling in a 
sample group. 
Whenever the builder changes subcontractors who are responsible for a feature that is being 
diagnostically field verified and tested, the builder shall notify the HERS ECC-Rater of the 
subcontractor change , and terminate sampling for any affected groups. All dwelling units utilizing 
features that require HERS verification for compliance that were installed by previous 
subcontractors or were subject to verification and testing under the supervision of a previous 
HERS ECC-Provider, for which the builder does not have a completed Certificate of Verification, 
shall be individually tested , or included in a separate group for sampling. Dwelling units with 
installations completed by new subcontractors shall be indiv idually tested or shall be included in 
a new sampling group. 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall not notify the builder when sample testing will occur prior to the 
completion of the work that is to be tested, or prior to registration of the C ertificate of 
Installation. 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall “close ” any “open” group within 6 months after the earliest 
signature date shown on any Certificate of Installation for a dwelling entered in the group. When 
such group closure occurs, the HERS ECC-Provider shall notify the builder that the group has been 
“closed ”, and require that a sample dwelling shall be selected for field verification and diagnostic 
testing by a HERS ECC-Rater if field verification has not yet been conducted on a sample dwelling 
entered in the group. 
RA2.6.4 HERS ECC-Rater Procedures -Re-sampling, Full Testing and Corrective Action 
“Re-sampling” refers to the procedure that requires testing of additional dwellings within a group 
when the initial selected sample dwelling from a group fails to comply with the HERS verification 
requirements. 
When a failure is encountered during sample testing, the failure shall be entered into the HERS 
ECC-Provider data registry. Corrective action shall be taken on the failed dwelling unit and the 
dwelling unit shall be retested to verify that corrective action was successful. Corrective action 
and retesting on the dwelling unit shall be repeated until the t esting indicates compliance and 
the successful compliance results have been entered into the HERS ECC-Provider data registry (or 
the dwelling unit complies using an alternative method). Whereupon , a registered Certificate of 
Verification for the dwelling s hall be made available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the builder, the 
enforcement agency, and other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. 
In addition, the HERS ECC-Rater shall conduct re -sampling to assess whether the first failure in 
the group is unique, or if the rest of the dwelling units in the group are likely to have similar 
failings. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
     
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA2-21 
RA2.6.4.1 Re-sampling procedures for a “closed” group of up to seven dwellings: 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall randomly select for re -sampling one of the remaining untested dwelling 
units in the group for retesting of the feature that failed. If the failed dwelling was entered in a 
“closed” group, and the testing of the second randomly selected dwelling unit in the group 
confirms that the requirements for compliance credit are met on that unit, then the dwelling unit 
with the initial failure shall not be considered an indication of failure in the remaining untested 
dwelling units in the grou p. The HERS ECC-Rater shall transmit the re -sample test results to the 
HERS ECC-Provider registry, whereupon the Provider shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater, 
the builder, the enforcement agency, and other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data 
registry, a registered copy of the Certificate of Verification for the remaining dwelling units in the 
group including the dwelling unit in the re -sample. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing of the second sample results in a failure, the HERS ECC-
Rater shall report the second failure to the HERS ECC-Provider, the builder, and the enforcement 
agency. All dwelling units in the group must thereafter be individually field verified and 
diagnostically tested to confirm compliance for the feature that failed to comply with re -
sampling. In cases where correct ive action would require destruction of building components, the 
builder may choose to reanalyze comp liance and choose different measures that will achieve 
compliance. In this case a new Certificate of Compliance shall be completed and submitted to the 
HERS ECC-Provider, the HERS ECC-Rater, and the enforcement agency. Even with a new 
Certificate of Compliance, the dwelling unit must be individually field verified and diagnostically 
tested. Upon verification of compliance, the HERS ECC-Rater shall enter the test results into the 
HERS ECC-Provider data registry. Whereupon the Provider shall make available to the HERS ECC-
Rater, the builder, the enforcement agency, and other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider 
data registry, a registered copy of the Certificate of Verification for each individual dwelling in the 
group. 
RA2.6.4.2 Re-sampling procedures for an “open” group of up to five dwellings: 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall randomly select for re -sampling one of the remaining untested dwelling 
units in the group for retesting of the feature that failed. If the failed dwelling was entered in an 
“open” group, and there are no other untested dwellings entered in the “open” group at the time 
of the failed HERS verification, subsequent dwellings entered into the “open” group shall not 
receive a Certificate of Verification until a second dwelling in the “open” group is tested and 
successfully complies. If th e subsequent testing of the second dwelling unit in the group confirms 
that the requirements for compliance credit are met on that unit, then the dwelling unit with the 
initial failure shall not be considered an indication of failure in the untested dwelli ng units in the 
group. The HERS ECC-Rater shall transmit the compliant re -sample test results to the HERS ECC-
Provider data registry, whereupon the Provider shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the 
builder, the enforcement agency, and other authoriz ed users of the HERS ECC-Provider data 
registry, a registered copy of the Certificate of Verification, for the re -sampled dwelling, and the 
remaining not yet tested dwelling units entered in the “open” group at the time of the re -sample 
test, and the group shall be allowed to rema in open and eligible to receive additional dwelling 
units. Dwelling units entered into the “open” group of up to 5 dwellings following the successful 
HERS verification of the re -sampled dwelling shall receive a Certificate of Verif ication as a “not 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   RA2-22 2025 Residential Appendices 
tested” dwelling subject to registration of the Certificate of Installation by the HERS ECC-Provider 
data registry for the dwelling. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing of the second sample results in a failure, the HERS ECC-
Rater shall report the second failure to the HERS ECC-Provider, the builder, and the enforcement 
agency, and the Provider shall require the “open” group to be “closed”. All remaining untested 
dwelling units entered in the group at the time of the re -sample must thereafter be individually 
field verified and di agnostically tested. In cases where corrective action would require 
destruction of building component s, the builder may choose to reanalyze compliance and choose 
different measures that will achieve compliance. In this case, a new Certificate of Compliance 
shall be completed and submitted to the HERS ECC-Provider, the HERS ECC-Rater, and the 
enforcement agency. Even with a new Certificate of Compliance, the dwelling unit must be 
individually field verified and diagnostically tested. Upon verification of compliance, the HERS 
ECC-Rater shall enter the test results into the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. Wh ereupon the 
Provider shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the builder, the enforcement agency, and 
other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry, a registered copy of the Certificate 
of Verification for each individual dwelling in the group. 
RA2.6.4.3 Corrective Action 
Builders shall offer to provide the necessary field verification and diagnostic testing services and 
any necessary corrective action at no charge to building owners (for a definition of “building 
owner” and of other terms used, see Reference Joint Appendix JA1) in occupied dwelling units in 
the group. Builders shall report to the HERS ECC-Provider the identifying location of any dwelling 
unit in which the building owner or occupant declines field verification and diagnostic testing and 
corrective action. Th e HERS ECC-Provider shall verify that the builder has made this offer. If a 
building owner of a dwelling unit declines this offer, field verification, diagnostic testing, and 
corrective action will not be required for that dwelling unit and the dwelling unit will no longer be 
considered a part of the group. If a building owner accepts this offer, the builder shall take 
corrective action, and the HERS ECC-Rater shall conduct field verification and diagnostic testing to 
verify that problems have been correcte d. Upon verification of compliance, the HERS ECC-Rater 
shall transmit the test results to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry. Whereupon the Provider 
shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater, the builder, the enforcement agency, and other 
authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry, a registered copy of the Certificate of 
Verification for the dwelling unit. 
The HERS ECC-Provider shall file a report with the enforcement agency explaining all actions 
taken (including field verification, diagnostic testing, corrective action, offers to building owners 
for testing and corrective action, and/or building owner declines of such offers) to bring into 
compliance dwelling units for which full testing has been required. If corrective action requires 
work not specifically exempted by the CMC or the CBC, the builder shall obtain a permit from the 
enforcement agency prior t o commencement of any of the work. 
Corrections to avoid reporting a failure to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry shall not be made 
to a sampled dwelling unit after the HERS ECC-Rater selects the sample dwelling unit. If it is 
evident that such corrections have been made to a sampled dwelling unit to avoid reporting a 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
  
  
   
 
    
 
  
  
    
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
     
  
 
 
 
   
  
 
    
  
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA2-23 
failure, field verification and diagnostic testing shall be required for 100 percent of the dwelling 
units in the group. 
RA2.7 Third Party Quality Control Programs 
The Energy Commission may approve Third Party Quality Control Programs (TPQCP) to verify the 
work of participating installers , collect and evaluate more detailed data than necessary for 
compliance, identify in real time during the installation invalid and inaccurate installer testing and 
noncompliant installations, and enabl e corrected testing with the goal of bring ing installations 
into compliance before the installer leaves the job site. TPQCP personnel and participating TPQCP 
installation contractors do not have the authority to sign Certificate of Verification 
documentation as a HERS ECC-Rater. 
RA2.7.1 Third Party Quality Control Program Responsibilities 
An approved Third Party Quality Control Program shall: 
a. Provide training to participating program installers (including contractors, subcontractors, 
and technicians) to ensure proficiency in: 
i. Quality HVAC installation procedures, common causes of failure, and corrections. 
ii. Understanding of the Standards requirements for field verification and diagnostic testing 
of measures, which are subje ct to TPQCP program procedures. 
iii. Understanding all applicable specifications for field verification and diagnostic testing 
procedures specified in the Reference Residential Appendices. 
iv. Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures. 
b. Collect field verification and diagnostic test data (data) from participating installers for each 
installation completed . 
c. Automatically c onfirm the location of the system undergoing testing using an electronic 
tracking means such as Global Positioning System Satellite (GPS) technology if available . 
d. Provide data checking analysis to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the collected data to 
independently determine whether compliance has been achieved . Data checking based on 
more detailed data than is required for showing compliance must be able to uncover invalid 
or erroneous information supplied by installers. 
e. Provide direction to the installer to retest and correct problems when data checking 
determines that compliance has not been achieved . The direction to the installer shall occur 
in real time so that testing can be redone , and corrections can be made before the installer 
leaves the site. 
f. Ensure the installer resubmi ts updated data from new testing when retesting and correction 
is completed . 
g. Maintain a database of all data submitted by all participating TPQCP installers . 
h. Provide functionality that enables Energy Commission staff to query retained TPQCP data or 
documents . 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
     
 
 
    
  
    
 
  
 
   
 
 
  
    
   
      
 
 
    
 
   
  
    
  
   
 
 
    
  
 
 
    
  
 RA2-24 2025 Residential Appendices 
i. TPQCP s hall n ot impose restrictions on the HERS ECC-Rater or the HERS ECC-Provider that 
limit their independence, or the ability of the HERS ECC-Rater or the HERS ECC-Provider to 
properly perform their functions. 
j. TPQCP s hall n ot impose restrictions on the HERS ECC-Rater’s use of equipment beyond those 
required by the Energy Commission. 
RA2.7.2 Requirements for Data Collected by a Third Party Quality Control Program 
TPQCP data collection shall conform to the following requirements: 
a. Data shall be more detailed than the data required for showing compliance with the 
Standards . 
b. Data shall enable the TPQCP to conduct an independent check on the validity and accuracy of 
the installer’s claim that compliance has been achieved . 
c. Data shall n ot be alterable by the installer to indicate that compliance has been achieved 
when in fact compliance has not been achieved. 
RA2.7.3 HERS ECC-Provider Responsibilities 
HERS ECC-Providers shall conform to the following requirements: 
a. HERS ECC-Providers shall assign an HERS ECC-Rater to conduct independent field verification 
and diagnostic testing of the installation work performed by the participating Third Party 
Quality Control Program installing contractor s, and to submit Certificates of Verification at 
the close of the sampling group . 
b. HERS ECC-Providers shall notify enforcement agencies when groups close or exceed six 
months without closing . 
c. HERS ECC-Providers shall explain, in their applications for approval by the Energy Commission, 
the way in which their program will work with TPQCPs. 
RA2.7.4 HERS ECC-Rater Responsibilities 
HERS ECC-Raters shall conform to the following requirements: 
a. Complete all of the responsibilities of a n HERS ECC-Rater as specified in Appendix RA2, with 
the exception that sampling procedures utilized for TPQCP installations shall be limited to 
sampling of a “closed” group as described in Section RA2.6.3 . However, the sample tested 
shall be selected and field verified from within a group of up to thirty dwelling units. 
b. HERS ECC-Raters shall be independent entit ies from the Third Party Quality Control Program. 
c. If re-sampling is required, the HERS ECC-Rater shall perform full testing and corrective action 
as specified in Section RA2.6.4 with the exception that re -sampling as defined in RA2.6.4 shall 
be completed for a minimum of one out of every thirty dwelling units from the group. 
RA2.7.5 Conflict of Interest Guidelines 
The TPQCP shall meet the requirements imposed on a HERS ECC-Rater specified in the Energy 
Commission’s HERS P program regulations ( California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
    
   
 
    
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
    
    
 
 
 
 
    
  
  
 
  
  
  
   2025 Residential Appendices RA2-25 
Chapter 4, Article 8, Sections 1670 -1675 Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 ), including the 
requirement to be an independent entity from the builder, the HERS ECC-Provider, the HERS ECC-
Rater that provides independent field verifications, and the subcontractor installer as specified by 
Section 1673(j). However, a Third Party Quality Control Program may have business relationships 
with installers participating in the program to advocate or promote the program and an installer’s 
participation in the program, and to advocate or promote products that the Third Party Quality 
Control Program sells to installers as part of the Program. 
RA2.7.6 Conditions of TPQCP Approval 
Prior to approval by the Commission, the Third Party Quality Control Program shall provide a 
detailed explanation to the Commission of the following: 
a. The data that is to be collected from the installers . 
b. The data checking process that will be used to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the data 
submitted by the TPQCP installation contractors . 
c. The justification for why this data checking process will provide strong assurance that the 
installation actually complies . 
d. The detailed description of the database that will be maintained by the TPQCP, and the 
functionality that will allow Energy Commission staff to query retained data or documents. 
e. A detailed explanation of how their data input complies with Reference Joint Appendix JA7.9. 
f. A detailed description of the training that will be provided to TPQCP installers. 
g. The procedures the TPQCP will follow to ensure the installer makes appropriate on -site data 
submittals, installation corrections . 
The Third Party Quality Control Program may apply for a confidential designation for information 
submitted to the Energy Commission as specified in the Commission’s Administrative Regulations 
(California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 7, Article 2, Section 2505). 
RA2.7.7 Training for TPQCP Installation Contractors 
As a condition to participation in the TPQCP program, a ll approved TPQCP installing contractor s 
and the TPQCP installing contractor’s responsible installation technicians shall be trained and 
confirmed to be proficient in the following: 
1) Quality installation procedures . 
2) The requirements of this Appendix RA2 . 
3) Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures . 
The training requirements also apply to the installing contractor’s specialty subcontractors who 
provide Third Party Quality Control Program services. All installation verification and diagnostic 
work performed in the program shall be subject to the same q uality assurance procedures as 
required by the Energy Commission’s HERS ECC program regulations. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
   
 
 
   
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  RA2-26 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA2.8 Installer Requirements and HERS Procedures for Alterations 
This section on alterations describes the differences that apply to alterations. Otherwise , the 
procedures and requirements detailed in previous sections of Appendix RA2 shall also apply to 
alterations. For alterations, building owners or their agents may carry out the actions that are 
assigned to builders in previous sections of Appendix RA2. 
Applicable procedures for registration of compliance documents described in Appendix RA2 shall 
also apply to alterations. 
When compliance for an alteration requires field verification and diagnostic testing, the building 
owner may choose for the field verification and diagnostic testing to be completed for the 
dwelling unit individually, or alternatively, as part of a designa ted sample group of dwelling units 
for which the same installing company has completed work that requires HERS verification for 
compliance. 
When sampling is utilized for HERS verification compliance for alterations, the dwelling units in a 
designated sample group are not required to be located within the same enforcement agency 
jurisdiction. However, to enable the enforcement agency to schedule testing to accomplish the 
corrobo ration of field verification and diagnostic testing procedures performed by the building 
owner, subcontractors, or certified HERS ECC-Rater as described in Section RA2.4.4, the 
enforcement agency may require that a separa te dwelling unit from the sample group that is 
located within its jurisdiction be tested. 
The building owner or agent of the building owner shall submit, or make arrangements for 
submittal , of the required Certificate of Compliance information to the HERS ECC-Provider data 
registry to complete the applicable Certificate of Compliance documentation in accordance with 
the requirements in Standards Section 10 -103(a)1 and 10 -103(a)2. 
When the enforcement agency does not require building design plans to be submitted with the 
application for a building permit for an alteration, the applicable registered Certificate of 
Compliance documentation specified in 10 -103(a)1 is not required to be approved by the 
enforcement agency prior to issuance of a building permit, but shall be approved by the 
enforcement agency prior to final inspec tion of the dwelling unit, and shall be made available to 
the enforcement agency for all applicable inspections as specified in Standards Section 10 -
103(a)2A. 
HERS ECC-Raters or other authorized users of the HERS ECC-Provider data registry may provide 
documentation author support to facilitate the submittal of the required Certificate of 
Compliance information to the HERS ECC-Provider data registry on behalf of the building owner , 
or agent of the building owner, when such facilitation has been authorized by the building owner 
or agent of the building owner. Documentation authors shall provide an electronic signature to 
certify the documentation is accurate and co mplete. The building owner or agent of the building 
owner who is eligible under Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code to take responsibility 
for the design specification for the alteration shall provide an electronic signature to register the 
Certificate of Compliance, to certify the information provided on the Certificate is true and 
correct, to certify conformance with Part 6, and shall submit the registered Certificate of 
Compliance to the enforcement agency for approval. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA2-27 
The building owner or agent shall make available to the HERS ECC-Rater a copy of the registered 
Certificate of Compliance approved by the enforcement agency. 
The installer shall perform diagnostic testing and the procedures specified in Section RA2.5 . 
When the installation is complete, the person responsible for the performance of the installation 
shall complete the Certificate of Installation in accordance with the procedures specified in 
Section RA2.5 . 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall perform the applicable verification and diagnostic testing required for 
compliance following the procedures in Section RA2.6 . If group sampling is utilized for 
compliance, the sampling procedures described in Section RA2.6.3 for sampling of a “closed” 
group of up to seven dwelling units shall be used, requiring that all dwelling units within the 
group have been serviced by the same installing company. The installing company may request a 
group for sampling that is smaller than seven dwelling uni ts. Whenever a HERS ECC-Rater for the 
group is changed, a new group shall be established. 
Re-sampling, full testing, and corrective action shall be completed, if necessary, as specified by 
Section RA2.6.4 . 
The enforcement agency shall not approve the alteration until the enforcement agency has 
received a completed Certificate of Installation as specified in Section RA2.5 , and a completed 
Certificate of Verification as specified in Section RA2.6 . 
Third Party Quality Control Programs, as specified in Section RA2.7 , may also be used with 
alterations, and shall be limited to “closed” sample group sizes of thirty dwelling units or less. 
When a Third Party Quality Control Program is used, the enforcement agency may approve 
compliance based on the Certificate of Installation prior to registration of the Certificate of 
Verification where data checking has indicated that the unit complies, on the condition that a 
Certificate of Verification will be submitted . If the required HERS verification procedures 
determine that re -sampling, full testing, or corrective action is necessary, such work shall be 
completed. 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures    
 
  
 RA2-28 2025 Residential Appendices 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
Appendix RA2 – Residential HERS Verification, Testing, andField Verification and Diagnostic 
Testing Documentation Procedures     
   
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
   
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-1 
Residential Appendix RA3 
Appendix RA3 – Resident ial HERS Field Verification and 
Diagnostic Test Protocols 
RA3.1 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Air Distribution Systems 
RA3.1.1 Purpose and Scope 
RA3.1 contains procedures for measuring the air leakage in forced air distribution systems as well 
as procedures for verifying duct location, duct surface area, duct R -value, return duct design, 
return grille design, and air filter installation. 
RA3.1 applies to air distribution systems in both ne w and existing low-risesingle -family and 
multifamily residential buildings. 
RA3.1 provides required procedures for installers, HERS ECC-raters and others who are required 
to perform field verification of air distribution systems. 
Table RA3.1 -1 is a summary of the tests and criteria included in RA3.1 . 
Table RA3.1 -2 Provides compliance criteria for the duct leakage test protocols in Section 
RA3.1.4.3. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
      
   
 
 
  
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
   
  
  
  
  
   
 
  
 RA3-2 2025 Residential Appendices 
Table RA3.1 -1 – Summary of Duct System Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols 
Verification/Diagnostic Description Procedure 
Duct Location, Surface 
Area and R -value Verify duct system was installed according to the 
specifications on the Certificate of Compliance or 
in accordance with an approved duct system 
design layout. RA3.1.4.1 
Verified Duct System 
Design Procedure for duct system design layout 
approval and field verification RA3.1.4.1.1 
Duct Leakage Verify that duct leakage is less than or equal to 
the compliance criteria given in Table RA3.1 -2. RA3.1.4.3 
Return Duct Design Verify compliance with the return duct and 
return grill sizing requirements of Table 150.0 -B 
or Table 150.0 -C). RA3.1.4.4 
Air Filter Device Design Verify compliance with the requirements in 
150(m)12. RA3.1.4.5 
Verification of 
Prescriptive Bypass 
Duct Requirements Verification to confirm zonally controlled 
systems comply with the bypass duct 
requirements in 150.1(c)13 RA3.1.4.6 
Verification of Space -
Conditioning System 
Airflow Supply to All 
Habitable Spaces Verify that all habitable spaces in the dwelling 
unit receive space -conditioning system airflow. RA3.1.4.1.7 
Verification of Ductless 
Space -Conditioning 
System Indoor Units 
Located Entirely in 
Conditioned Space Verify that ductless indoor units are located 
entirely in conditioned space . RA3.1.4. 1.8 
RA3.1.2 Instrumentation Specif ications 
The instrumentation for the air distribution diagnostic measurements shall conform to the 
following specifications: 
RA3.1.2.1 Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be measured with measurement systems (i.e. sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy equal to or better than ± 1% of pressure reading or ± 0.2 
Pa. (0.0008 inches water) (whichever is greater). All pressure meas urements within the duct 
system shall be made with static pressure probes such as Dwyer A303 or equivalent. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
     
 
 
   
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
  
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-3 
RA3.1.2.2 Duct Leakage Measurements 
Duct leakage airflow rates during duct leakage testing shall be measured with a duct leakage 
airflow rate measurement apparatus that has a duct leakage airflow rate measurement accuracy 
equal to or better than ± 3 percent of reading or ± 1 cfm (whichever i s greater). 
RA3.1.2.3 Calibration 
All instrumentation used for duct leakage diagnostic measurements shall be calibrated according 
to the manufacturer’s calibration procedure to conform to the accuracy requirement specified in 
Section RA3.1.2 . 
RA3.1.3 Diagnostic Apparatus 
RA3.1.3.1 Apparatus for Duct Pressurization and Leakage Flow Measurement 
The apparatus for fan pressurization duct leakage measurements shall consist of a duct 
pressurization and flow measurement device meeting the specifications in Section RA3.1.2 . 
RA3.1.3.2 Apparatus for Duct Leakage to Outside Measurement 
The apparatus for measuring duct leakage to outside shall include a fan that is capable of 
maintaining the pressure within the conditioned spaces in the house at 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) 
relative to the outdoors. The fan most commonly used for this purpose is known as a “blower 
door” and is typically installed within a temporary seal of an open exterior doorway. 
RA3.1.3.3 Apparatus for Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing (Existing Duct Systems) 
The apparatus for determining leakage in and verifying sealing of all accessible leaks in existing 
duct systems provide means for introducing controllable amounts of non -toxic visual/theatrical 
smoke into the duct pressurization apparatus for identifying l eaks in accessible portions of the 
duct system. The means for generating smoke shall have sufficient capacity to ensure that any 
accessible leaks will emit visibly identifiable smoke. 
RA3.1.4 Verification and Diagnostic Procedures 
This section describes the procedures used to verify compliance with the mandatory and 
performance compliance requirements for air distribution systems. 
RA3.1.4.1 Diagnostic Duct Location, Surface Area and R -value 
The performance compliance calculations allow credit for duct systems that are designed to be in 
advantageous locations, that have reduced duct surface areas, and/or that provide higher R -
values or portions of the system. This section specifies procedures for verification of duct systems 
for conformance with the requirements for the performance compliance credits. When indicated 
on the Certificate of Compliance, the Installer shall certify compliance with the applicable 
procedures in RA3.1.4.1 on a Certific ate of Installation, and a n HERS ECC-rater shall verify 
compliance on a Certificate of Verification. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
  
 
    
 
    
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
    
 
 RA3-4 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.1.4.1.1 Verified Duct System Design 
An installed duct system meets the Verified Duct System Design compliance criteria if it is field 
verified by a HERS ECC-rater to be in conformance with a duct design layout that meets all 
applicable duct design and documentation requirements given in Section RA3.1.4.1.1. The duct 
design layout shall be approved by the enforcement agency. 
RA3.1.4.1.1.1 Verified Duct System Design -Duct Design Layout 
The duct system design shall be documented on the Duct Design Layout, a scaled layout drawing 
that identifies the location of the space conditioning equipment, all supply and return 
registers/grilles, the size, R -value, and location of each duct segment. T he Duct Design Layout 
shall incorporate all other duct details reported on the registered Certificate of Compliance. 
RA3.1.4.1.1.2 Verified Duct System Design -Compliance Criteria 
The duct system design shall be based on an industry standard design methodology such as ACCA 
Manual D , or an equivalent, and shall take into account: the available external static pressure 
from the air handler, the equivalent length or pressure drop of external devices, and the pressure 
drop of the duct runs accounting for size, type and configuration of t he ducts and fittings. The 
duct system shall be designed to meet the required system airflow rate with the manufacturer -
specified available external static pressure for the specified system air handler at that airflow. 
The duct system design shall include calculations that indicate the duct system will operate at 
equal to or greater than 0.0292 cfm/Btu (350 cfm/12000 Btu) in cooling speed (350 cfm per 
nominal ton of condensing unit cooling capacity specified by the manufacturer) or, if heating 
only, equal t o or greater than 16.8 cfm per 1000 Btu/hr furnace nominal output specified by the 
manufacturer. 
RA3.1.4.1.1.3 Verified Duct System Design -Duct Design Layout Approval 
The Duct Design Layout shall be included with the building design plans and the registered 
Certificate of Compliance submitted to the enforcement agency in conjunction with the 
application for the building permit. A copy of the Duct Design Layout approved by the 
enforcement agency shall be posted or made available with the building permit(s) issued for the 
building, and shall be made available to the enforcement agency, installing contractor, and HERS 
ECC-rater for use during the installation work and for a ll applicable inspections. 
RA3.1.4.1.1.4 Verified Duct System Design -Field Verification of Installation 
The location of all supply and return registers shall be verified by inspection of the interior of the 
dwelling unit. The location of the space conditioning equipment and the size, R -value, and 
location of each duct segment shall be verified by observation in the spaces where they are 
located. Deviations from the approved Duct Design Layout shall not be allowed without a revised 
a Duct Design Layout approved by the enforcement agency. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
 
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-5 
RA3.1.4.1.2 Verification of 12 Linear Feet or Less of Duct Located Outside Of Conditioned 
Space 
A visual inspection shall confirm space conditioning systems with air handlers located outside the 
conditioned space have 12 linear feet or less of duct located outside the conditioned space 
including air handler and plenum.  If the space conditioning syst em has more than 12 feet of duct 
outside of conditioned space, the system does not pass. 
RA3.1.4.1.3 Visual Verification of Ducts Located Entirely Iin Conditioned Space 
A visual inspection shall confirm space conditioning duct systems are located entirely in 
conditioned space. If any part of the space conditioning duct system is outside of conditioned 
space, the system does not pass. 
RA3.1.4.1.4 Verification of Duct Surface Area Reduction 
Compliance with Verified Duct System Design procedures specified in RA3.1.4.1.1 are 
prerequisite for compliance with the Duct Surface Area Reduction compliance credit. A visual 
inspection shall on confirm the installed duct system layout conforms to the Duct Design Layout. 
RA3.1.4.1.5 Verification of Buried Ducts on The Ceiling R -Value 
Compliance with Verified Duct System Design procedures specified in RA3.1.4.1.1 is prerequisite 
for compliance with the Buried Ducts on the Ceiling compliance credit. A visual inspection shall 
confirm the installed duct system layout conforms to the Duct D esign Layout. This procedure 
shall be carried out prior to covering the ducts with insulation. 
Ducts designed to be buried shall be insulated to R4.2 or greater. In addition, ducts designed to 
be in contact with the ceiling shall be not more than 3.5 inches from the ceiling drywall. A sign 
shall be hung near the attic access that displays a warning: “Caution: Buried Ducts. Markers 
indicate location of buried ducts.” All ducts that will be completely buried shall have vertical 
markers that are visible after insulation installation, placed at least every 8 feet of duct length 
and at the beginning and e nd of each duct run. 
RA3.1.4.1.6 Verification of Deeply Buried Ducts R -Value 
Compliance with Verified Duct System Design procedures specified in RA3.1.4.1.1 is prerequisite 
for compliance with the Deeply Buried Ducts compliance credit. A visual inspection shall confirm 
the installed duct system layout conforms to the Duct Design La yout. This procedure shall be 
carried out prior to covering the ducts with insulation. 
Ducts designed to be buried shall be insulated to R4.2 or greater. In addition, ducts designed to 
be in contact with the ceiling shall be not more than 3.5 inches from the ceiling drywall. A sign 
shall be hung near the attic access that displays a warning: “Caution: Buried Ducts. Markers 
indicate location of buried ducts.” All ducts that will be completely buried shall have vertical 
markers that are visible after insulation installation, placed at least every 8 feet of duct length 
and at the beginning and e nd of each duct run. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
    
 
    
   
   
   
 
 RA3-6 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.1.4.1.7 Verification of Space -Conditioning System Airflow Supply to All Habitable 
Spaces 
A visual inspection shall confirm that all habitable spaces in the dwelling unit receive space -
conditioning system airflow either by use of a ductless space -conditioning system indoor unit 
located on the wall, ceiling, or floor of the habitable space, or b y use of space -conditioning 
system air supply registers located in the habitable space that use ductwork connected from the 
register directly to the supply air outlet of a ducted space -conditioning system air handling unit. 
Refer to Standards Section 100.1 for the definition of habitable space. Transfer fans that move air 
from one space in the dwelling to a different space in the dwelling, but do not heat or cool the air 
transferred, do not meet the requirement for providing space -conditioning system airflo w. 
RA3.1.4.1.8 Verification of Ductless Space -Conditioning System Indoor Units Located 
Entirely in Conditioned Space 
A visual inspection shall confirm that ductless indoor units are located entirely in conditioned 
space in accordance with the following requirements: 
(a) Ductless indoor unit types that mount entirely on the interior surface of dwelling unit 
walls, ceilings, or floors shall be considered to be entirely in conditioned space. 
Penetrations in the wall, ceiling , or floor surface necessary for the indoor unit refrigerant 
piping, condensate drain, or electrical connections shall be allowed, provided the 
penetrations are sealed. 
(b) Ductless indoor units that penetrate the interior surface of dwelling unit walls, ceilings, or 
floors, and protrude through cut -out openings in the dwelling unit walls, ceilings, or floors 
shall be inspected to determine whether the indoor unit is inst alled inside both the 
thermal boundary and the air barrier of the dwelling according to the following criteria as 
applicable : 
i. Ductless indoor unit s that protrude through the air barrier into unconditioned spaces 
(including but not limited to attics, crawl spaces, garages, or outdoors ) are not located 
entirely in conditioned space. 
ii. Ductless indoor unit s that protrude into indirectly conditioned spaces (including but 
not limited to drop ceilings, or floor assemblies in a single family or multifamily multi -
story building ) that are wholly inside both the thermal boundary , and the air barrier of 
the dwelling are located entirely in conditioned space. Note: Verification at an early 
stage of building construction may be necessary for visual verification to be possible. 
If field verification according to RA3.1.4.1.8 determines the installed system's ductless indoor 
units are not located entirely in conditioned space, then the system does not comply with the 
VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
    
  
   
  
   
    
  
   
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
    
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-7 
RA3.1.4.2 Determining Air Handler Airflow for Calculation of Duct Leakage Rate Compliance 
Targets 
For use in establishing the target duct leakage rate c ompliance criteria, the system air handler 
airflow shall be calculated using RA3.1.4.2.1 , RA3.1.4.2.2 , or RA3.1.4.2.3 as applicable . 
RA3.1.4.2.1 Default Air Handler Airflow 
Default air handler airflow may be used for any one of the following conditions: 
(a) for heating -only systems , or 
(b) when a duct system is being tested prior to installation of the air conditioning or heating 
system equipment , or 
(c) when the space conditioning system equipment specification is not known. 
Default air handler airflow shall be a calculated value equal to 0.5 CFM per ft² of Conditioned 
Floor Area. 
RA3.1.4.2.2 Nominal Air Handler Airflow 
Nominal air handler airflow shall be calculated according to one of the following methods as 
applicable : 
(a) For heating -only systems , the nominal air handler airflow shall be 21.7 CFM per kBtu/hr of 
rated heating output capacity. 
(b) For split or packaged cooling systems with only one indoor unit , the nominal air handler 
airflow shall be 400 CFM per nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as 
specified by the manufacturer . 
(c) For small duct high velocity systems, the nominal air handler airflow shall be 250 CFM per 
nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as specified by the 
manufacturer. 
(d) For multiple -split systems that provide cooling, the nominal air handler airflow for each 
indoor unit shall be 350 CFM per nominal ton of indoor unit cooling capacity as specified 
by the manufacturer . 
RA3.1.4.2.3 Measured System Airflow 
The system airflow shall be as measured according to a procedure in Section RA3.3.3 . The system 
airflow can be used as the air handler airflow for the purpose of establishing duct leakage 
percentage. 
RA3.1.4.3 Diagnostic Duct Leakage 
Diagnostic duct leakage measurement is used by installers and raters to verify that total leakage 
meets the criteria for any sealed duct system specified in the compliance documents. 
When c entral fan integrated (CFI) indoor air quality ventilation system air duct s, or central fan 
ventilation cooling system (CFVCS) air ducts connect to space conditioning system ducts , the 
ventilation duct branch openings shall not be sealed/taped off during space conditioning system 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
 
    
   
  
   
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
   
  
   
  
    
 
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 RA3-8 2025 Residential Appendices 
duct leakage testing. However, the ventilation system motorized dampers that open only when 
ventilation airflow is required and close when ventilation airflow is not required may be closed 
during space conditioning system duct leakage testing. Table RA3.1 -2 summarizes the leakage 
test procedures that may be used to demonstrate compliance. 
Table RA3.1 -2 – Duct Leakage Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols 
Verification Description User Application Procedure(s) 
Sealed and tested new duct systems in single 
family homes and townhomes Installer Testing at Final 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.1 
Sealed and tested new duct systems in single 
family homes and townhomes Installer Testing at Rough -in, 
Air Handling Unit Installed RA3.1.4.3.2 
RA3.1.4.3.2.1 
RA3.1.4.3.3 
Sealed and tested new duct systems in single 
family homes and townhomes Installer Testing at Rough -in, 
Air Handling Unit Not 
Installed RA3.1.4.3.2 
RA3.1.4.3.2.2 
RA3.1.4.3.3 
Sealed and tested new duct systems in 
multifamily homes regardless of duct system 
location. Installer Testing at Final 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.1 
Sealed and tested new duct systems in 
multifamily homes regardless of duct system 
location. Installer Testing at Final 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.4 
Verification of Low Leakage Air Handler with 
Sealed and Tested Duct System Compliance 
Credit Installer Testing at Final 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.1 and 
RA3.1.4.3.9 
Verification of low leakage ducts located 
entirely in conditioned space Installer Testing 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.8 
Sealed and tested altered existing duct 
systems Installer Testing 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.1 
Sealed and tested altered existing duct 
systems Installer Testing 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing RA3.1.4.3.4 
Sealed and tested altered existing duct 
systems Installer Testing and 
Inspection 
HERS ECC-Rater Testing and 
Verification RA3.1.4.3.5 
RA3.1.4.3.6 
RA3.1.4.3.7 
RA3.1.4.3.1 Diagnostic Duct Leakage from Fan Pressurization of Ducts 
The objective of this procedure is for an installer to determine or a rater to verify the total 
leakage of a new or altered duct system. The total duct leakage shall be determined by 
pressurizing the entire duct system to a positive pressure of 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) with respect 
to outside . The following procedure shall be used for the fan pressurization tests: 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
   
  
 
 
   
  
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-9 
(a) Verify that the air handler, supply and return plenums and all the connectors, transition 
pieces, duct boots and registers are installed and sealed . The entire duct system shall be 
included in the total leakage test. 
(b) For newly installed or altered ducts, verify that cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape 
has not been used and if a platform or other building cavity used to house the air 
distribution system has been newly installed or altered, it contains a duct or is du cted 
with duct board or sheet metal. 
(c) Seal all the supply registers and return grilles except for one large centrally located return 
grille or the air handler cabinet access panel. Floor registers on carpeted floors may be 
removed and the opening sealed to the floor under the carpet. If allowed by the 
equipment manufacturer, the air -handling unit blower compartment access panel may be 
sealed with an approved tape -do not use mastic or other permanent sealing material. 
(d) Attach the fan flowmeter device to the duct system at the unsealed return grille or the air 
handler cabinet access panel. Ensure that the air filter has been removed. 
(e) Install a static pressure probe at a supply register located close to the air handler, or at 
the supply plenum. 
(f) Adjust the fan flowmeter to produce a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) pressure at the 
supply register or the supply plenum with respect to the outside or with respect to the 
building space with the entry door open to the outside. 
(g) Record the flow through the flowmeter; this is the leakage flow at 25 Pa (0.1 inches 
water). 
(h) Divide the leakage flow by the total air handler airflow determined by the procedure in 
Section RA3.1.4.2 and convert to a percentage. If the leakage flow percentage is equal to 
or less than the compliance criterion required by the Standards, the system passes. 
RA3.1.4.3.2 Diagnostic Duct Leakage at Rough -in Construction Stage 
Installers may determine duct leakage in new ly construct ed buildings by using diagnostic 
measurements at the rough -in building construction stage prior to installation of the interior 
finishing. When using this measurement technique, the installer shall complete additional 
inspection (as described in section RA3.1.4.3.3) o f duct integrity after the finishing wall has been 
installed. In addition, after the finishing wall is installed, spaces between the register boots and 
the wallboard shall be sealed. Cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tapes shall not be used to seal 
the space between the register boot and the wall board. 
The duct leakage measurement at rough -in construction stage shall be performed using a fan 
pressurization device. The duct leakage shall be determined by pressurizing both the supply and 
return ducts to 25 Pa (0.1 inches water). The following procedure (ei ther RA3.1.4.3.2.1 or 
RA3.1.4.3.2.2 ) shall be used: 
RA3.1.4.3.2.1 Ducts with the Air Handling Unit Installed and Connected: 
For total leakage: 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 RA3-10 2025 Residential Appendices 
(a) Verify that supply and return plenums and all the collars, connectors, transition pieces, 
duct boots, and return boxes have been installed. If a platform or other building cavity is 
used to house portions of the air distribution system, it shall contain a duct, be lined with 
duct board or sheet metal, and all duct connectors and transition part s shall be installed 
and sealed. The platform, ducts, and connectors shall be included in the total leakage test. 
All joints shall be inspected to ensure that no cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape is 
used. 
(b) Seal all the supply duct boots and return boxes except for one return duct box. 
(c) Attach the fan flowmeter device at the unsealed return duct box. 
(d) Insert a static pressure probe at one of the sealed supply duct boots located close to the 
supply plenum or at the supply plenum. 
(e) Adjust the fan flowmeter to maintain a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) pressure in the 
duct system with respect to the outside, or with respect to the building space with the 
entry door open to the outside. 
(f) Record the flow through the flowmeter; this is the leakage flow at 25 Pa (0.1 inches 
water). 
(g) Divide the leakage flow by the total air handler airflow determined by the procedure in 
Section RA3.1.4.2 and convert to a percentage. If the leakage flow percentage is less than 
or equal to the compliance criterion required by the Standards, the system passes.  
RA3.1.4.3.2.2 Ducts with Air Handling Unit Not Yet Installed: 
For total leakage: 
(a) Verify that supply and return plenums and all the collars, connectors, transition pieces, 
duct boots, and return boxes have been installed. If a platform or other building cavity is 
used to house portions of the air distribution system, it shall contain a duct, be lined with 
duct board or sheet metal, and all duct connectors and transition parts shall be installed 
and sealed. The platform, ducts and connectors shall be included in the total leakage test. 
All joints shall be inspected to ensure that no cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape is 
used. 
(b) Supply and return leaks may be tested separately, or the supply and return plenums may 
be connected together using suitable temporary air -tight means to facilitate testing the 
total system. If the supply and return systems are to be tested separately, the opening to 
the supply or return plenums shall be sealed to prevent leakage unless used as the point 
of attachment for the fan flowmeter. 
(c) Seal all the supply duct boots and/or return duct boxes except for a location where the 
fan flo wmeter device will be attached. 
(d) Attach the fan flowmeter device at the unsealed location. 
(e) Insert a static pressure probe at one of the sealed supply duct boots, or return duct boxes, 
located at a point in the system close to the fan flowmeter. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
   
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-11 
(f) Adjust the fan flowmeter to produce a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) pressure at the 
supply plenum with respect to the outside or with respect to the building space with the 
entry door open to the outside. 
(g) Record the airflow through the flowmeter; this is the leakage flow at 25 Pa (0.1 inches 
water). 
(h) If the supply and return ducts are tested separately, repeat items 4 through 6 with the 
flow meter attached to the unsealed return box and the static pressure probe in the 
return duct boxes, located at a point in the system close to the fan flowmeter, then add 
the two leakage rates together to get a total leakage flow. 
(i) Divide the leakage flow by the total air handler airflow determined by the procedure in 
Section RA3.1.4.2 and convert to a percentage. If the leakage flow percentage is less than 
or equal to the compliance criterion required by the Standards, the system passes. 
RA3.1.4.3.3 Installer Visual Inspection at Final Construction Stage 
After installing the interior finishing drywall, or other finishing material, and verifying that one of 
the above rough -in tests was completed, the following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Remove at least one supply and one return register, and verify that the spaces between 
the register boot and the interior finishing wall are properly sealed. 
(b) If the house rough -in duct leakage test was conducted without an air handler installed, 
inspect the connection points between the air handler and the supply and return plenums 
to verify that the connection points are properly sealed. 
(c) Inspect all joints to ensure that no cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape is used. 
RA3.1.4.3.4 Duct Leakage to Outside from Fan Pressurization of Ducts 
The objective of this test is to determine the amount of duct leakage to outside the air barrier for 
the conditioned space. This measurement is utilized to verify that duct systems are located 
entirely within conditioned space. The procedure is also utiliz ed to provide an alternate leakage 
measurement for situations when it is likely that a portion of the total duct leakage is inside the 
air barrier for the conditioned space. The duct leakage to outside shall be determined by 
pressurizing the ducts and the conditioned space of the house to 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) with 
respect to outside. The following procedure shall be used for the fan pressurization test of 
leakage to outside: 
(a) Seal all the supply registers and return grilles except for one large centrally located return 
grille or the air handler cabinet access panel. 
(b) Attach the fan flowmeter device to the duct system at the unsealed return grille or the air 
handler cabinet access panel. 
(c) Install a static pressure probe at the supply plenum. 
(d) Attach a blower door to an external doorway. If the door between the dwelling and the 
garage is used, the garage car -bay doors must be open. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
   RA3-12 2025 Residential Appendices 
(e) If any ducts are located in an unconditioned basement, all doors or accesses between the 
conditioned space and the basement shall be closed, and at least one operable door or 
window (if it exists) between the basement and outside shall be open during the t est. 
(f) If the ducts are located in a conditioned basement, any door between the basement and 
the remaining conditioned space shall be open, and any basement doors or windows to 
outside must be closed during the test. 
(g) Adjust the blower door fan to provide positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches of water) pressure in the 
conditioned space with respect to outside. 
(h) Adjust the fan/flowmeter to maintain a zero pressure difference (plus or minus 0.5Pa 
(.002 inches water)) between the ducts and the conditioned space, and adjust the blower 
door fan to maintain a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches of water) pressure in the conditi oned 
space with respect to outside. This step may require several iterations. 
(i) Record the flow through the flowmeter; this is the duct leakage flow to outside at 25 Pa 
(0.1 inches water). If the leakage flow is less than or equal to the applicable compliance 
criteria required by the Standards , the system passes. 
(j) If required for compliance, divide the leakage flow by the system air handler airflow 
determined by the procedure in Section RA3.1.4.2 , and convert to a percentage. If the 
leakage flow percentage is less than or equal to the criterion required by the Standards, 
the system passes . 
RA3.1.4.3.5 Sealing of All Accessible Leaks 
For altered existing duct systems that are unable to pass either the Fan Pressurization of Ducts 
test (RA3.1.4.3.1 ), or the Duct Leakage to Outside test (RA3.1.4.3.4)), the objective of this test is 
to verify that all accessible leaks are sealed. The following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Complete the leakage test specified in Section RA3.1.4.3.1 to measure the leakage before 
commencing duct sealing. 
(b) Seal all accessible ducts. 
(c) After sealing is complete, again use the procedure in RA3.1.4.3.1 to measure the leakage 
after duct sealing. 
(d) Complete the Smoke Test as specified in RA3.1.4.3.6. 
(e) Complete the Visual Inspection as specified in RA3.1.4.3.7. 
RA3.1.4.3.6 Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing 
For altered existing ducts that fail the leakage tests, the objective of the smoke test is to confirm 
that all accessible leaks have been sealed. The following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Inject either theatrical or other non -toxic smoke into a fan pressurization device that is 
maintaining a duct pressure difference of 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) relative to the duct 
surroundings, with all grilles and registers in the duct system sealed. 
(b) Visually inspect all accessible portions of the duct system during smoke injection. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
     
   
  
 
 
  
 
    
   
  
   
 
 
   
  
   
     
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-13 
(c) The system shall pass the test if one of the following conditions is met: 
1. No visible smoke exits the accessible portions of the duct system. 
2. Smoke only emanates from the furnace cabinet which is gasketed and sealed by the 
manufacturer and no visible smoke exits from the accessible portions of the duct 
system. 
RA3.1.4.3.7 Visual Inspection of Accessible Duct Sealing 
The objective of this inspection in conjunction with the smoke test (RA3.1.4.3.6) is to confirm that 
all accessible leaks have been sealed. Visually inspect to verify that the following locations have 
been sealed: 
(a) Connections to plenums , evaporator coils, and other connections to the forced air unit . 
(b) Refrigerant line s, p-traps and other penetrations into the forced air unit . 
(c) Air handler door panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is acceptable) . 
(d) Register boots sealed to surrounding material at all registers and grilles . 
(e) Connections between lengths of duct, as well as connections to takeoffs, wyes, tees, and 
splitter boxes. 
RA3.1.4.3.8 Verification of Low Leakage Ducts Located Entirely In Conditioned Space 
RA3.1.4.3.4 A visual inspection shall confirm the duct system location as specified by Section 
RA3.1.4.1.3 . Additionally, d ucts shall be confirmed to have less than or equal to 25 cfm leakage to 
outside when measured as specified by Section RA3.1.4.3.4 . 
RA3.1.4.3.9 Verification of Low Leakage Air -Handling Unit with Sealed and Tested Duct 
System 
An additional performance compliance credit is available for verified low leakage ducts if a 
qualified low leakage air -handling unit is installed. The low leakage air -handling unit cabinet 
(furnace, or heat pump fan and inside coil) shall conform to the qu alification requirements given 
in Reference Joint Appendix JA9 , and shall be included in the list of low leakage air handling units 
published by the Energy Commission. The qualified air handler must be connected to a sealed 
and tested new duct system to re ceive the credit. 
In order to comply with this credit, the duct system shall be verified to leak less than or equal to 
the leakage rate specified on the Certificate of Compliance using the methods in Section 
RA3.1.4.3.1, and the air handler manufacturer make and model numbe r shall be verified to be a 
model certified to the Energy Commission as qualified for credit as a low leakage air handler. 
RA3.1.4.4 Verification of Return Duct Design 
Verification shall consist of a visual inspection to confirm that the duct design conforms to the 
criteria given in Table 150.0 -B or Table 150.0 -C. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
   
 
    
 
   
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
 RA3-14 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.1.4.5 Verification of Air Filter Device Design 
Verification shall consist of a visual inspection to confirm that the air filter devices conform to the 
requirements given in Section 150.0(m)12. 
RA3.1.4.6 Verification of Bypass Duct s for Zonally Controlled Forced Air Systems 
When a zonally controlled forced air system is installed , a visual inspection shall confirm : 
(a) That bypass ducts are not used to deliver conditioned supply air directly to the space 
conditioning system return duct airflow; or 
(b) That the Certificate of Compliance indicates an allowance for use of bypass duct s. 
RA3.1.4.7 Verification of Air Filter Sizing According to Face Velocity Specification 
When compliance requires verification that a ducted system's indoor unit air filters have been 
sized in accordance with a maximum face velocity specification, the following procedure shall be 
used. 
(a) Indoor unit design airflow rate. Record the design airflow rate for the indoor unit in CFM 
as specified by the system designer. The design airflow rate shall be equal to or greater 
than the minimum airflow rate required for compliance with the standards. Alternatively, 
if the design airf low rate for the indoor unit is not available, calculate and record the 
nominal air handler airflow rate for the indoor unit in accordance with the specifications 
in RA3.1.4.2.2. 
(b) Air filter design airflow rate . Determine the air filter design airflow rate. For indoor units 
with only one filtered return air inlet, the air filter design airflow rate in CFM is equal to 
the indoor unit design airflow rate determined in step (a). For indoor units with more than 
one filtered return air inlet, the system designer s hall determine what portion of the total 
indoor unit airflow is equal to the air filter design airflow for each air filter, ensuring that 
the sum total of all individual air filter design airflow rates is equal to the total indoor unit 
design airflow rate determined in step (a). 
(c) Air filter grille/rack sticker . Compare the air filter design airflow rate calculated in step (b) 
to the design airflow rate on the filter grille or rack. Standards Section 150.0(m)12Biv 
requires that air filter installation locations shall have the air filter design airflow rate, and 
maximum allowable clean -filter pressure drop at the design airflow rate posted on a 
label/sticker, inside or near the locatio n of the filter grille/rack such that this information 
will be visible to a person replacing the air filter. 
If the air filter installation location does not have the required information marked on a 
label or sticker, the indoor unit does not comply. 
(d) Air filter maximum face velocity allowed . Record the maximum allowable face velocity 
value in ft/min required for compliance for each air filter. 
(e) Minimum air filter face area allowed . For each air filter, divide the air filter design airflow 
rate in ft3/min by the maximum allowable face velocity in ft/min. The result is the 
minimum allowable total air filter face area in ft2 for the air filter. Convert the calculated 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-15 
face area from square feet to square inches by multiplying the face area in square feet by 
144. 
Note: the air filter face area is the nominal area of the side of the air filter that is 
perpendicular to the direction of the airflow through the air filter. 
(f) Installed air filter nominal dimensions . Measure and record the installed nominal length 
dimension in inches and nominal width dimension in inches for the side of the filter that is 
perpendicular to the direction of the airflow through the air filter installed in the return 
air grille/rack of t he indoor unit. If there is more than one filtered return air inlet for the 
indoor unit, measure and record the length dimension and width dimension of each of the 
air filters. 
(g) Installed air filter face area . For each of the filtered return air inlets for the indoor unit, 
multiply the nominal air filter length dimension by the nominal air filter width dimension 
to calculate the nominal air filter face area in square inches. 
(h) Determining compliance . For each of the filtered return air inlets for the indoor unit, if 
the installed air filter face area is greater than or equal to the minimum air filter face area 
allowed as determined in step (e), then the air filter complies. All of the indoor unit air 
filters that are required be sized and verified according to a face velocity specification 
shall comply, otherwise the indoor unit does not comply. 
RA3.1.4.8 Verification of Air Filter Pressure Drop Rating 
When compliance requires field verification to confirm that a ducted system's indoor unit air 
filter(s) comply with a minimum clean filter pressure drop requirement, the following steps shall 
be followed. When there is more than one filtered return air inl et for the indoor unit, all of the 
indoor unit's air filter devices shall be field verified. 
(a) Indoor unit design airflow rate . Record the design airflow rate for the indoor unit in CFM 
as specified by the system designer. The design airflow rate shall be equal to or greater 
than the minimum airflow rate required for compliance with the standards. Alternatively, 
if the design air flow rate for the indoor unit is not available, calculate and record the 
nominal air handler airflow rate for the indoor unit in accordance with the specifications 
in RA3.1.4.2.2. 
(b) Air filter design airflow rate . For indoor units with only one filtered return air inlet, the air 
filter design airflow rate in CFM is equal to the indoor unit design airflow rate determined 
in step (a). For indoor units with more than one filtered return air inlet, the system 
designer shall determine what portion of the total indoor unit airflow is equal to the air 
filter design airflow for each air filter, ensuring that the sum total of all individual air filter 
design airflow rates is equal to the to tal indoor unit design airflow rate determined in step 
(a). 
(c) Air filter grille/rack sticker. Standards Section 150.0(m)12Biv requires that air filter 
installation locations shall have the air filter design airflow rate, and maximum allowable 
clean -filter pressure drop at the design airflow rate posted on a label/sticker, inside or 
near the locati on of the filter grille/rack such that this information will be visible to a 
person replacing the air filter. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
  
 RA3-16 2025 Residential Appendices 
Field inspection shall verify that each air filter installation location has the required 
sticker. If the air filter installation location does not have the required sticker, the indoor 
unit does not comply. 
(d) Air filter manufacturer's performance rating label . Standards section 150.0(m)12E 
requires that the air filter placed in the filter grille/rack shall be labeled by the air filter 
manufacturer to disclose the clean filter pressure drop performance determined 
according to ASHRAE Standard 52.2 or AHRI Standa rd 680. The required air filter label 
information includes clean filter pressure drop ratings at a range of airflow rates. 
Field inspection shall verify that the air filter installed in the filter grille/rack has the 
required performance rating label. If an installed air filter does not have the required 
manufacturer's performance rating label, then the indoor unit does not co mply. 
(e) Determining clean filter pressure drop compliance . Inspection of the air filter 
manufacturer's performance rating label shall verify that the air filter is rated to provide a 
clean filter pressure drop less than or equal to the value required for compliance, at an 
airflow rate greater than or equal to th e design airflow for the filter. Interpolation of the 
manufacturer's airflow and pressure drop rating values published on the air filter 
performance rating label is allowed when determining compliance. F ield diagnostic 
pressure measurements of operating indoor units to determine the pressure drop of 
installed air filters are not required for demonstrating compliance. 
If all of the indoor unit air filters are rated to operate at a pressure drop less than or equal to the 
value required for compliance, and at an airflow rate greater than or equal to the design airflow 
for the air filter, then the indoor unit complies. 
RA3.2 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Refrigerant Charge for Air 
Conditioners and Heat Pumps 
RA3.2.1 Purpose and Scope 
(a) The procedures in Appendix RA3.2 are for use for residential air -cooled air conditioners 
and air -source heat pumps to verify the systems have the required refrigerant charge. 
(b) For dwelling units with multiple air conditioners or heat pumps, the procedures shall be 
applied to each system separately. 
(c) Appendix RA3.2 defines two procedures, the Standard Charge Verification Procedure in 
Section RA3.2.2 and the Weigh -in Charging procedure in Section RA3.2.3. 
(d) Sections 150.1(c)7 and 150.2(b)1F specify the requirements for minimum system airflow 
rates to be verified in conjunction with the refrigerant charg e verification. 
(e) Failure to follow the manufacturer’s installation and charging instructions may result in 
significant refrigeration system faults that may invalidate refrigerant charge and metering 
device verification results. The installer shall certify that he/she has c onformed to the 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
     
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
    
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-17 
manufacturer’s instructions and specifications for charging the system prior to proceeding 
with the verification procedures in this appendix. 
(f) In the case where the Energy Commission has approved an alternative protocol as 
described in RA1, the HVAC Installer and HERS ECC-Rater may choose to perform the 
alternative refrigerant charge verification procedure. 
RA3.2.1.1 Scope of the Standard Charge Verification Procedure (RA3.2.2) 
(a) The procedures in Section RA3.2.2 are applicable to ducted split system air -cooled air 
conditioners and ducted split system air -source heat pumps, and may be applicable to 
packaged air -cooled air conditioners and packaged air -source heat pumps. 
(b) The procedures in Section RA3.2.2 require verification of the applicable minimum system 
airflow rate across the cooling coil when refrigerant charge is verified . 
(c) The procedures in Section RA3.2.2 require verification (for applicable systems) that the 
metering device is operating properly. 
(d) The procedures in Section RA3.2.2 may be used when the outdoor air temperature is 55°F 
or above. 
(e) When refrigerant charge verification is required for compliance, the applicable 
procedures in Section RA3.2.2 shall be used by the HVAC installer after installing a new 
HVAC system or after altering refrigerant -containing components in an existing HVAC 
system, and after charging the air conditioner or heat pump system in accordance with 
the manufacturer's instructions and specifications. 
(f) The applicable procedures in Section RA3.2.2 shall always be used by the HERS ECC-Rater 
for verification of the system's refrigerant charge when HERS verification is required for 
compliance unless an applicable alternate procedure is available in Reference Residential 
Appendix RA1, or the Standards specify the Section RA3.2.3.2 procedure (observation of 
weigh -in) as mandatory for compliance, or as an available option for compliance and the 
HVAC installer elects to use the RA3.2.3.2 procedure for HERS verification. 
(g) When the procedures in Section RA3.3.3.1.5 (alternative to compliance with minimum 
system airflow) are utilized for compliance, HERS verification compliance shall not use 
group sampling. 
RA3.2.1.2 Scope of the Weigh -In Charging Procedure (RA3.2.3) 
(a) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3 are applicable to air -cooled air conditioners or air -
source heat pumps. 
(b) The weigh -in charging procedure is an acceptable method for demonstrating compliance 
at any outdoor temperature. 
(c) Use of the Section RA3.2.3 procedure does not change the obligation for exempt the 
system from compliance to comply with all applicable minimum airflow rate verification 
requirements . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
    
 RA3-18 2025 Residential Appendices 
(d) When the procedures in Section RA3.2.3 are utilized by the HVAC installer, HERS 
verification compliance shall not use group sampling. 
(e) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3.1 may be used by the HVAC installer as an alternative 
to the Standard Charge Verification Procedure in RA3.2.2, or as an alternative to any 
applicable Alternative Refrigerant Charge Verification Protocol in Reference Residential 
Appendix RA1 . 
(f) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3.1 shall be used by HVAC installers when refrigerant 
charge verification is required for compliance when the outdoor air temperature is below 
55°F, and there is no applicable alternative refrigerant charge verification protocol in 
Reference Residential Appendix RA1 available for use with the system for outdoor 
temperatures below 55°F. 
(g) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3.1 shall be used by HVAC installers when refrigerant 
charge verification is required for compliance when the standard charge verification 
procedure in RA3.2.2 is not applicable to the system that must demonstrate compliance , 
and there is no applicable alternative refrigerant charge verification protocol in Reference 
Residential Appendix RA1 available for use with the system. 
(h) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3.1 shall not be utilized by HERS ECC-Raters for 
verification of refrigerant charge. 
(i) The procedures in Section RA3.2.3.2 shall be utilized by HERS ECC-Raters for verification of 
refrigerant charge only when the Standards specify that the RA3.2.3.2 procedure shall be 
used for HERS verification compliance, otherwise only when the Standards specify the 
RA3.2.3.2 procedure is an available option, and the HVAC installer elects to use the 
RA3.2.3.2 procedure for HERS verification compliance. 
RA3.2.2 Standard Charge Verification Procedure 
This section specifies the standard charge verification procedure. Under this procedure, the 
refrigerant charge is verified using the "superheat charging method" for systems with fixed 
metering devices, or the "subcooling charging method" for systems with thermostatic expansion 
valves (TXV) or electronic expansion valves (EXV). 
The following sections describe the required instrumentation; required calibration for the 
instrumentation; required diagnostic measurements; and the required calculations to determine 
results that must be compared to the criteria in Table RA3.2 -1 to deter mine compliance. 
Refrigerant charge verification utilizing the procedures in Section RA3.2.2 requires compliance 
with a minimum airflow rate across the cooling coil at the time of charge verification, as specified 
by Standards Sections 150.1(c)7 Aib and 150.2(b)1F iia as applicable. 
Table RA3.2 -1 summarizes the standard charge verification protocols and defines the 
corresponding compliance criteria that shall be used by system installers and HERS ECC-Raters. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
    
     
   
   
 
 
 
  
   
    
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
    
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-1 
Table RA3.2 -1 – Refrigerant Charge Verification Protocols and Compliance Criteria 
Case User Application Compliance Criteria Procedure(s) 
Standard Charge Verification 
Procedure -Fixed Metering Device 
Systems Installer Testing at Final 55°F ≤ Outdoor Air Dry -bulb Temp ≤ 115°F 
Return Air Dry -bulb Temp ≥ 70°F 
Return Air Wet -bulb Temp ≤ 76°F 
Superheat tolerance ±5°F 
of the specified target RA3.2.2.6.1 
Standard Charge Verification 
Procedure -Fixed Metering Device 
Systems HERS ECC-Rater Testing 55°F ≤ Outdoor Air Dry-bulb Temp ≤ 115°F 
Return Air Dry -bulb Temp ≥ 70°F 
Return Air Wet -bulb Temp ≤ 76°F 
Superheat tolerance ±8°F 
of the specified target RA3.2.2.6.1 
Standard Charge Verification 
Procedure -Variable Metering 
Device Systems Installer Testing at Final 55°F ≤ Outdoor Air Dry -bulb Temp ≤ 120°F 
Return Air Dry -bulb Temp ≥ 70°F 
Subcooling tolerance ±3°F 
of the manufacturer -specified target1 
Metering Device tolerance: 
Superheat meets the Manufacturer's specifications or 
4°F ≤ Superheat ≤ 25°F RA3.2.2.6.2 
Standard Charge Verification 
Procedure -Variable Metering 
Device Systems HERS ECC-Rater Testing 55°F ≤ Outdoor Air Dry -bulb Temp ≤ 120°F 
Return Air Dry -bulb Temp ≥ 70°F 
Subcooling tolerance ±6°F 
of the manufacturer -specified target1 and 
Subcooling ≥2°F 
Metering Device tolerance: 
Superheat meets the Manufacturer's specifications or 
3°F ≤ Superheat ≤ 26°F RA3.2.2.6.2 
Note: 
1. If a manufacturer -specified subcooling target value is not available or cannot be determined, the Executive Director may provide additional gui dance for 
compliance. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-1 
The standard charge verification procedure detailed in this section may be used to demonstrate 
compliance when the outdoor temperature is within the manufacturer's specified temperature 
range, or the outdoor temperature is 55°F or higher, after the HVAC installer has installed and 
charged the system in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. The ret urn dry bulb 
temperature shall be maintained above 70°F during the test. 
This procedure does not relieve the installing contractor from any obligation to conform to the 
manufacturers’ specifications for installation, refrigerant charge, or system operation. This 
procedure is used to determine compliance with Title 24, Part 6. 
RA3.2.2.1 Minimum Qualifications for this Procedure 
Persons who use this procedure to demonstrate compliance with Title 24 Part 6 shall be qualified 
to perform the following: 
(a) Obtain accurate system pressure and saturation temperature readings utilizing digital 
refrigeration gauges. 
(b) Obtain accurate temperature readings utilizing a digital thermometer and temperature 
sensors. 
(c) Check calibration of digital refrigerant gauges using a known reference pressure. 
(d) Check calibration of digital thermometer and temperature sensors using a known 
reference temperature. 
(e) Determine the required or best location for temperature measurements in duct systems 
and on refrigerant lines. 
(f) Calculate the mea sured superheat and subcooling. 
(g) Determine the required superheat, based on the conditions present at the time of the 
test. 
(h) Determine if measured values are accurate. 
RA3.2.2.2 Instrumentation Specifications 
Instrumentation for the procedures described in this section shall conform to the following 
specifications: 
RA3.2.2.2.1 Digital Temperature Measurement Specifications 
Temperature measurements shall be made utilizing digital temperature measurement 
instrumentation (combined sensor plus device for data acquisition, processing , and reporting) 
that shall have dual channel capability in Celsius or Fahrenheit and conform to the following 
specifications: 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
   
 
  
   
   
  
 
 
  
 
 RA3-2 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.2.2.2.1.1 Dry-bulb Air Temperature Measurements 
Air temperature measurements made of supply or return airflow and the outdoor air entering 
the condensing unit shall meet the following specifications: 
(a) Accuracy: ± 2°F. 
(b) Resolution: 0.2°F. 
RA3.2.2.2.1.2 Wet -bulb Air Temperature Measurements Using Wetted Wick 
Air temperature measurements made of return airflow using the wetted wick method shall use a 
temperature sensor and a clean cotton wick wetted with distilled water.  Temperature 
measurements using this method shall meet the following specifications: 
(a) Accuracy: ± 2°F. 
(b) Resolution: 0.2°F. 
RA3.2.2.2.1.3 Wet -bulb air Temperature Measurements Using Digital 
Hygrometer Device 
Air temperature measurements made of return airflow using a digital hygrometer device shall 
have a probe that is a minimum of 3 inches in length , and be capable of measurements for both 
dry-bulb and wet -bulb temperature. Dry -bulb and wet -bulb temperature measurements made 
with digital hygrometer devices shall meet the following specifications: 
(a) Accuracy: ± 2°F wet -bulb temperature; or a calculated wet -bulb temperature based on 
accuracies of ± 3% RH and ± 2.0 degree F Dry bulb temperature. 
(b) Resolution: 0.2°F. 
RA3.2.2.2.1.4 Refrigerant Lines -Pipe Temperature Measurement 
Temperature measurement of suction or liquid refrigerant lines using sensor mounting styles 
such as pipe -clamp sensors, Velcro strap -on, or an equivalent sensor device or sensor mounting 
method shall meet the following specifications: 
(a) Accuracy: ± 2°F. 
(b) Resolution: 0.2°F. 
RA3.2.2.2.2 Temperature Sensor Specifications 
RA3.2.2.2.2.1 Response Time Qualification Specification for Air Temperature 
Sensors 
Measurements for verification of refrigerant charge require air temperature sensors that pass the 
following qualifying test: 
(a) Using a test enclosure or test environment that is maintained at known dry bulb 
temperature T1 ; 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
 
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
    
 
 
 
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-3 
(b) The temperature sensor subjected to the qualifying test shall be placed outside the test 
enclosure or test environment until its temperature has stabilized at a drybulb 
temperature T2 ; 
(c) The absolute value of (T1 minus T2 ) shall be greater than 40ºF ; and 
(d) The sensor shall have a response time that produces the accuracy specified in Section 
RA3.2.2.2.1 within 90 seconds of insertion into the test enclosure or test environment. 
RA3.2.2.2.2.2 Response Time and Application Specification for Pipe Temperature 
Sensors 
Measurements for verification of refrigerant charge require two (2) pipe temperature sensors 
that pass the following qualifying test: 
(a) Using test pipes in six sizes (1/4” dia., 3/16” dia., 3/8” dia., 3/4” dia., 7/8” dia., 1 1/8” dia.) 
that are maintained at a known temperature T1 in a test enclosure or test environment 
that is maintained at a known dry -bulb temperature T2 ; 
(b) The absolute value of (T1 minus T2 ) is greater than 40ºF ; 
(c) The temperature sensor subjected to the qualifying test shall be placed in the test 
enclosure or test environment until its temperature has is stabilized at T2 ; 
(d) The sensor shall have a response time that produces the accuracy specified in Section 
RA3.2.2.2.1.4 within 90 seconds of application of the sensor to one of the test pipes ; and 
(e) A sensor may be used for more than one pipe size if it passes the above test for each pipe 
size for which it is used. 
RA3.2.2.2.3 Digital Refrigerant Gauge Specifications 
Refrigerant pressure measurements shall be made utilizing digital measurement instrumentation. 
Measurements made with digital refrigerant pressure measurement devices shall meet the 
following specifications : 
(a) Accuracy: ± 7.0 psi liquid line pressure 
(b) Accuracy: ± 3.5 psi suction pressure 
As an alternative, two saturation pressure measurement sensors (SPMS) may be permanently 
installed by the equipment manufacturer, or in a manner and location approved by the 
equipment manufacturer for use for measuring the saturation pressure of the refrigerant in the 
evaporator coil and in the condenser coil. Refer to Reference Joint Appendix JA6.2 for additional 
speci fication for SPMS. 
RA3.2.2.3 Measurement Access Hole (MAH) Specification 
When required for compliance by Standards Section 150.1(c)7Aia, or when return plenum 
measurements are necessary for compliance with refrigerant charge verification requirements, a 
5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter hole shall be provided as shown in Figure RA3.2 -1. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 RA3-4 2025 Residential Appendices 
Return plenum temperature measurements shall be taken at the location specified in Figure 
RA3.2 -1 when performing the procedures in RA3.2. The measurement access shall be sealed to 
prevent leakage after the measurements have been completed. 
The hole location shown in Figure RA3.2 -1 can be applied to any one of the four sides of the 
return plenum. The hole location shall be labeled "Title 24 – Return Plenum Measurement 
Access" in at least 12 -point type. 
For air -handling units with the return located entirely within conditioned space (such as when an 
up-flow air handler is mounted on a pedestal in a closet in the dwelling, or when the return grille 
is an integral part of the air -handling unit), the return plenum measurement access hole is not 
required, and in this case the return air temperature measurements shall be taken at the return 
grill when performing the procedures in RA3.2. 
Systems that cannot conform to the specifications for the hole location shown in Figure RA3.2 -1 
shall not be required to have holes as described in Figure RA3.2 -1; however , if return plenum 
measurements are required for compliance, an alternate location that provides access for making 
an accurate return plenum measurement shall be used. 
B.75BA.75AAir FlowEvaporator 
Coil
A= Return Plenum/Blower 
Compartment dimension 
parallel to airflow.
B= Return Plenum/Blower 
Compartment dimension 
perpendicular to airflow.
Title 24 
Return Plenum 
Measurement 
Access
5/8 inch Diameter HoleReturn Plenum/Blower 
CompartmentSupply Plenum/Coil Box
Figure RA3.2 -1 Measurement Access Hole 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
    
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
    
    
   
 
    
  
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-5 
RA3.2.2.4 Calibration 
The accuracy of instrumentation shall be maintained using the following procedures. A sticker 
with the calibration check date shall be affixed to each instrument calibrated. 
RA3.2.2.4.1 Digital Thermometer and Temperature Sensor Field Calibration Procedure 
Thermometers with their temperature sensors shall be calibrated monthly to ensure that they 
are reading accurate temperatures. 
The following procedure shall be used to check thermometer/temperature sensor calibration: 
(a) Fill an insulated cup (foam) with crushed ice from distilled water. The ice shall completely 
fill the cup. Add distilled water to fill the cup. 
(b) Insert two sensors into the center of the ice bath and attach them to the digital 
thermometer. 
(c) Let the temperatures stabilize. The temperatur es shall be 32 degrees Fahrenheit (plus or 
minus 1 degrees Fahrenheit ). If the temperature is off by more than 1 degrees Fahrenheit , 
make corrections according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Any sensors that are off by 
more than 2 degrees Fahrenheit shall be replaced. 
(d) Switch the sensors and ensure that the temperatures read on both channels are still 
within plus or minus 1 degrees Fahrenheit of 32 degrees Fahrenheit . 
(e) Affix sticker with calibration check date onto sensor. 
(f) Repeat the process for all sensors. 
RA3.2.2.4.2 Digital Refrigerant Gauge Field Check Procedure 
Refrigerant gauges shall be checked monthly to ensure that the gauges are reading the correct 
pressures and corresponding temperatures. The following procedure shall be used to check 
gauge calibration: 
(a) Place a refrigerant cylinder in a stable temperature environment and let it acclimate for 4 
hours minimum to stabilize to the ambient conditions. 
(b) Attach a calibrated temperature sensor to the refrigerant cylinder using tape so that there 
is good contact between the cylinder and the temperature sensor. 
(c) Insulate over the temperature sensor connection to the cylinder. 
(d) Zero the low side and high side refrigerant gauges with all ports open to atmospheric 
pressure (no hoses attached). 
(e) Re-install the hoses, attach the high side gauge to the refrigerant cylinder, and open the 
valves to measure the pressure in the refrigerant cylinder. 
(f) Read the temperature of the sensor on the refrigerant cylinder. 
(g) Using a pressure/temperature chart for the refrigerant, look up the pressure that 
corresponds to the temperature measured. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
    
 
 
 RA3-6 2025 Residential Appendices 
(h) If gauge does not read the correct pressure corresponding to the temperature, the gauge 
is out of calibration and needs to be recalibrated. 
(i) Close the valve to the refrigerant cylinder, and bleed off a small amount of refrigerant to 
lower the high side pressure to give a corresponding temperature to between 45°F and 
55°F. 
(j) Open the valves between the high side gauge and low side gauge. 
(k) If the two gauges corresponding refrigerant temperatures do not read within 1°F of each 
other, the low side gauge is out of calibration and needs to be recalibrated. 
(l) Affix sticker with calibration check date onto refrigerant gauge. 
RA3.2.2.4.3 Digital Hygrometer Calibration 
Digital hygrometers shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended 
procedures. When the manufacturer certifies the calibration for a limited time, the digital 
hygrometer shall be recalibrated according to the manufacturers required procedu re when the 
calibration period expires. 
RA3.2.2.5 Charge Verification Measurements 
The following procedure shall be used to obtain measurements necessary to verify the required 
refrigerant charge. 
(a) Follow the manufacturer’s directions and adhere to the manufacturer's limitations on 
indoor ambient air temperature (T indoor air ) and outdoor ambient air temperature (T outdoor 
air) applicable to this procedure. Ensure that the return air dry bulb temperature remains 
equal to or greater than 70°F prior to and while performing the measurements. 
(b) Verify that a liquid line filter drier has been installed if required per outdoor condensing 
unit manufacturer's instructions , and installed with the proper orientation with respect to 
refrigerant flow, if applicable. 
(c) Connect the refrigerant gauges to the service ports, taking normal precautions to not 
introduce air into the system. 
(d) Attach one pipe temperature sensor to the suction line near the suction line (low side) 
service valve and attach one pipe temperature sensor to the liquid line near the liquid line 
(high side) service valve. The sensors should be positioned to make good co ntact with the 
surface of the refrigerant line. 
(e) Attach a temperature sensor to measure the condenser entering air dry -bulb 
temperature. The sensor shall be placed so that it records the average condenser air 
entering temperature and is shaded from direct sun. 
(f) Insert a dry -bulb temperature sensor into the return plenum at the "Title 24 – Return 
Plenum Measurement Access" detailed in Section RA3.2.2.3. 
(g) Be sure that all cabinet panels that affect airflow are in place before making 
measurements. The temperature sensors shall remain attached to the system until the 
final charge is determined. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
    
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-7 
(h) Operate the air conditioner in cooling mode for 15 minutes to allow the temperatures and 
pressures to stabilize before taking any measurements. While the system is stabilizing, 
proceed with setting up the remaining temperature sensors if used. 
(i) If used, place the cotton wick wet -bulb temperature sensor in distilled water, and ensure 
it is saturated. Do not get the dry -bulb temperature sensors wet. 
(j) If the system has a fixed metering device, at 12 minutes, insert a wet -bulb temperature 
sensor into the return plenum at the "Title 24 – Return Plenum Measurement Access" 
detailed in Section RA3.2.2.3. 
(k) If the system has a fixed metering device, after the system has operated for 15 minutes, 
and when the return plenum wet -bulb temperature has stabilized, using the temperature 
sensor already in place, measure and record the return (evaporator entering) air wet-bulb 
temperature (T return, wb ). 
(l) Using the temperature sensor already in place, measure and record the return 
(evaporator entering) air dry -bulb temperature (T return, db ). 
(m)Using the refrigerant gauge or saturation pressure measurement sensor already attached, 
measure and record the suction line (low side) pressure, and record the refrigerant 
saturation temperature corresponding to the measured low side pressure (T evaporator, sat ). 
(n) Using the refrigerant gauge or saturation pressure measurement sensor already attached, 
measure and record the liquid line (high side) pressure, and record the refrigerant 
saturation temperature corresponding to the measured high side pressure (T condenser, sat ). 
(o) Using the pipe temperature sensor already in place, measure and record the suction line 
temperature (T suction, ). 
(p) Using the pipe temperature sensor already in place, measure and record the liquid line 
temperature (T liquid). 
(q) Using the dry -bulb temperature sensor already in place, measure and record the 
condenser (entering) air dry -bulb temperature (T condenser, db ). 
The above measurements shall be used to verify the refrigerant charge as described in following 
sections. 
RA3.2.2.6 Refrigerant Charge and Metering Device Calculations 
The following steps describe the calculations to determine if the system meets the required 
refrigerant charge and metering device function using the measurements determined in Section 
RA3.2.2.5. If a system fails, then remedial actions must be taken by th e HVAC system installer. Be 
sure to run the air conditioner for 15 minutes after the final adjustments before taking any 
measurements. 
RA3.2.2.6.1 Fixed Metering Device Calculations -Superheat Charging Method 
The Superheat Charging Method is used only for systems equipped with fixed metering devices. 
These include capillary tubes and piston -type metering devices. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
  
  
   RA3-8 2025 Residential Appendices 
(a) Calculate Actual Superheat as the suction line temperature minus the evaporator 
saturation temperature. 
Actual Superheat = T suction , – Tevaporator, sat . 
(b) Determine and record the Target Superheat using Table RA3.2 -2 or the manufacturer's 
superheat chart using the return air wet -bulb temperature (T return, wb ) and condenser air 
dry-bulb temperature (T condenser, db ). 
(c) If a dash mark is read from Table RA3.2 -2, the target superheat is less than 5°F. Note that 
a valid refrigerant charge verification test cannot be performed under these conditions. A 
severely undercharged unit will show over 9°F of superheat. However o vercharged units 
cannot be detected from the superheat method under these conditions. The usual reason 
for a target superheat determination of less than 5°F is that outdoor conditions are too 
hot, and the indoor conditions are too cool. One of the followin g is needed so a target 
superheat value can be obtained from Table RA3.2 -2 either 1) turn on the space heating 
system and/or open the windows to warm up indoor temperature; or 2) retest at another 
time when conditions are different. 
(d) Calculate the difference between actual superheat and target superheat (Actual 
Superheat -Target Superheat). 
(e) In order to allow for inevitable differences in measurements, the Pass/Fail criteria are 
different for the Installer and the HERS ECC-Rater. 
(f) For the Installer, if the difference is within the tolerance given as compliance criteria in 
Table RA3.2 -1, then the system passes the required refrigerant charge criterion. 
(g) For the HERS ECC-Rater inspecting the system, if the difference is within the criteria in 
Table RA3.2 -1, then the system passes the required refrigerant charge criterion. 
(h) For the Installer, if the system fails to meet the criteria, refrigerant needs to be added if 
the superheat is too high and refrigerant needs to be removed if it is too low. The installer 
needs to remain aware of other potential system faults. Adjust r efrigerant charge and 
check the measurements as many times as necessary to pass the test. After the final 
adjustment has been made, allow the system to run 15 minutes before completing the 
final measurement procedure. 
RA3.2.2.6.2 Variable Metering Device Calculations – Subcooling Charging Method 
The Subcooling Charging Method is used for systems equipped with variable metering devices. 
These include Thermostatic Expansion Valves (TXV) and Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV). The 
amount of refrigerant is set based on the measured subcooling value, an d the measured 
superheat value determines whether the metering device is working properly. 
(a) Calculate Actual Subcooling as the condenser saturation temperature minus the liquid line 
temperature. Actual Subcooling = T condenser, sat – Tliquid. 
(b) Determine the Target Subcooling specified by the manufacturer . 
(c) Calculate the deviation of the actual subcooling value from the target subcooling value. 
Subcooling Deviation = Actual Subcooling -Target Subcooling. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
     
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-9 
In order to allow for inevitable differences in measurements, the Pass/Fail criteria are 
different for the Installer than for the HERS ECC-Rater. 
(d) If the Subcooling Deviation is within the subcooling tolerance allowed by Table RA3.2 -1, 
then the system complies with the subcooling criterion, otherwise the system does not 
comply. 
(e) For the HVAC installer, if the system does not comply, and if the Actual Subcooling value is 
greater than the Target Subcooling value, the Installer shall remove refrigerant. If the 
Actual Subcooling value is less than the Target Subcooling value, the Inst aller shall add 
refrigerant. The Installer shall determine whether there are other system faults that may 
affect the validity of the refrigerant charge verification procedure , and make any needed 
system repairs or adjustments to clear system faults prior t o completion of the refrigerant 
charge verification procedure. The Installer shall adjust the refrigerant charge and check 
the measurements as many times as necessary to pass the test. After the final adjustment 
has been made, the Installer shall allow the system to run 15 minutes before completing 
the final measurement procedure. 
(f) Calculate Actual Superheat as the suction line temperature minus the evaporator 
saturation temperature. Actual Superheat = T suction, – Tevaporator, sat . 
(g) If possible, determine the Superheat Range specified by the manufacturer. 
(h) In order to allow for inevitable differences in measurements, the Pass/Fail criteria are 
different for the Installer than for the HERS ECC-Rater. 
If the superheat is within the tolerance allowed by Table RA3.2 -1, then the system 
complies with the metering device criterion, otherwise the system does not comply. 
For the HVAC installer, if the system does not comply remedial actions must be 
undertaken to ensure the TXV or EXV is operating properly. 
RA3.2.3 Weigh -In Charging Procedure 
This section specifies the weigh -in charging procedure in which the weight of the required 
refrigerant charge is determined by using the manufacturer's specifications for a standard 
refrigerant charge weight and taking into account adjustment factors such as deviations in 
refrigerant line length and diameter. The calculated weight of refrigerant is then installed using a 
refrigerant scale. RA3.2.3 provides two procedures: Section RA3.2.3.1 shall be used by the HVAC 
installer when the weigh -in procedure is r equired by the Standards for compliance.  Section 
RA3.2.3.2 shall be used by the HERS ECC-Rater when the Standards specify use of the procedure 
for compliance , or specify it as an optional procedure for compliance. The weigh -in charging 
procedure is an acceptable method for demonstrating compliance at any outdoor temperature, 
however if the weigh -in charging procedure is used, HERS verification of compliance cannot use 
group sampling. 
HVAC installers shall use the weigh -in charging procedure in accordance with the space 
conditioning system manufacturer’s specifications. 
Both the HVAC installer and the HERS ECC-Rater shall test the system airflow as specified by 
Standards Sections 150.1(c)7Aib and 150.2(b)1Fiia as applicable. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
       
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
  
   
  
 
 RA3-10 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.2.3.1 HVAC Installer -Weigh -In Charging Procedure 
Split system air conditioners and heat pumps are shipped from the factory charged with a 
standard amount of refrigerant as indicated on the nameplate. The manufacturer -supplied 
refrigerant charge is expected to be the correct amount for the system based on a standard liquid 
line length and diameter. It is the responsibility of the HVAC installer to ensure that the charge is 
correct for each air conditioner and to adjust the charge based on liquid line dimensions that 
deviate from the manufacturer's standard line specification. 
RA3.2.3.1.1 Procedure Options 
There shall be two options for compliance using the weigh -in charging procedure: 
RA3.2.3.1.1.1 Weigh -in Charge Adjustment 
This option is applicable to a new system or existing system when a new outdoor unit is installed 
(with factory charge in outdoor unit). The HVAC installer shall weigh in lineset and indoor coil 
charge adjustment after evacuation of lineset and indoor coil . The documentation shall include 
the calculated charge adjustment for the lineset. 
RA3.2.3.1.1.2 Weigh -in Total Charge 
This option is applicable to all systems. The installer shall weigh in the total system charge after 
refrigerant recovery and evacuation of the entire system. The total system charge includes the 
nameplate charge for the outdoor unit and any adjustment for the lineset dimensions and indoor 
coil in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The documentation shall include the 
nameplate charge and the calculated lineset adjustment. 
RA3.2.3.1.2 Minimum Qualifications for this Procedure 
Persons who use this procedure to demonstrate compliance with Title 24, Part 6 shall be qualified 
to perform the following: 
(a) Calculate the correct system charge based on the Manufacturer's standard charge and 
adjustments to the standard charge based on lineset dimensions and indoor coil. 
(b) Obtain accurate refrigerant charge weight. 
RA3.2.3.1.3 Instrumentation Specifications 
Instrumentation for the procedures described in this section shall conform to the following 
specifications: 
RA3.2.3.1.3.1 Refrigerant Scale 
An electronic refrigerant scale having an accuracy equal to or better than ±0.5 oz or ± 0.5% of the 
measured value shall be used. 
RA3.2.3.1.4 Calibration 
The accuracy of instrumentation shall be maintained using the following procedures. A sticker 
with the calibration check date shall be affixed to each instrument calibrated. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
    
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-11 
RA3.2.3.1.4.1 Refrigerant Scale 
Refrigerant scales shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures. 
When the manufacturer certifies the calibration for a limited time, the refrigerant scale shall be 
recalibrated according to the manufacturers required procedure when the calibration period 
expires. 
RA3.2.3.1.5 Weigh -in Procedure 
The weigh -in procedure shall be performed in accordance with all manufacturer specifications to 
document and confirm: 
(a) Liquid line filter drier has been installed if required per outdoor condensing unit 
manufacturer's instructions , and installed with the proper orientation with respect to 
refrigerant flow , if applicable. . 
(b) If refrigerant line connections require welding , Tthe system is braised with dry nitrogen in 
the lines and indoor coil. 
(c) In all cases where the OEM instructions call for checking for gas leaks with vacuum, Tthe 
system is evacuated to 500 microns or less and, when isolated, rises no more than 300 
microns over five minutes. 
(d) In all cases where the OEM instructions call for checking for gas leaks with nitrogen gas, 
the system is pressurized to the manufacturer’s specified pressure and if the pressure 
cannot be maintained, leaks shall be located and fixed. 
(e) The calculated weight adjustment for lineset length is based on the length and diameter 
of the lineset. 
(f) The calculated weight adjustment for coil size is based on manufacturer instructions. 
(g) The actual total weight adjustment is equal to the sum of the calculated weight 
adjustments for lineset and coil size. 
(h) The calculated and actual total weights of refrigerant in the system are recorded on or 
near the nameplate label, in indelible ink or other permanent means . 
(i) The lineset correction is calculated based on the length and diameter of the lineset. 
(j) The indoor coil correction to refrigerant weight is used if it is supplied by the 
manufacturer. 
(k) The amount of charge calculated for the lineset correction (and indoor coil correction if 
available) is added or removed, or the total charge based on the lineset, indoor coil, and 
standard label charge is installed. 
The HVAC Installer shall certify on the Certificate of Installation that the manufacturer's 
specifications for these procedures have been met. This shall be verified either through on -site 
observation using procedures in RA 3.2.3.2. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
      
 
  
  
        
               
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 RA3-12 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.2.3.2 HERS ECC-Rater -Observation of Weigh -In Charging Procedure 
When the Standards indicate this procedure is required, or is an option for compliance, the HERS 
ECC-Rater shall coordinate with the HVAC Installer to observe the weigh -in charging procedure.  
HERS ECC-Rater shall observe and confirm: 
(a) Either 1) or 2) below: 
1. Observe and confirm Vacuum and Pressurization tests: 
i. In all cases where the OEM instructions call for checking for gas leaks with vacuum , 
Tthe system is evacuated to 500 microns or less and, when isolated, rises no more 
than 300 microns over five minutes. 
ii. In all cases where the OEM instructions call for checking for gas leaks with 
nitrogen gas, the system was pressurized to the manufacturer’s specified pressure 
and if the pressure could not be maintained, leaks were located and fixed. 
2. (b) No fittings (other than the fitting to the compressor) are compression or flare 
fittings. 
(b) The calculated weight adjustment for lineset length was based on the length and 
diameter of the lineset. 
(c) The calculated weight adjustment for coil size was based on manufacturer instructions. 
(d) The actual charge adjustment was equal to the sum of the calculated weight adjustments 
for lineset and coil size. 
(e) The calculated and actual total weights of refrigerant in the system were recorded on or 
near the nameplate label, in indelible ink or other permanent means. 
(f) The lineset correction is calculated based on the length and diameter of the lineset , 
including the liquid line filter drier if required per outdoor condensing unit manufacturer 
instructions . 
(g) The indoor coil correction to refrigerant weight is used if it is supplied by the 
manufacturer. 
(h) The installer adds or removes the amount of charge calculated for the lineset correction 
or installs the total charge based on lineset, indoor coil, and standard label charge. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
       
 
 
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            2025 Residential Appendices RA3-13 
Table RA3.2 -2 Target Superheat (Suction Line Temperature -Evaporator Saturation Temperature) 
Return Air Wet -Bulb Temperature (°F) (T return, wb) 
Condenser Air 
Dry-Bulb 
Temperature 
(°F)(T cond ., db ) 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
55 8.8 10.1 11.5 12.8 14.2 15.6 17.1 18.5 20.0 21.5 23.1 24.6 26.2 27.8 29.4 31.0 32.4 33.8 35.1 36.4 37.7 39.0 40.2 41.5 42.7 43.9 45.0 
56 8.6 9.9 11.2 12.6 14.0 15.4 16.8 18.2 19.7 21.2 22.7 24.2 25.7 27.3 28.9 30.5 31.8 33.2 34.6 35.9 37.2 38.5 39.7 41.0 42.2 43.4 44.6 
57 8.3 9.6 11.0 12.3 13.7 15.1 16.5 17.9 19.4 20.8 22.3 23.8 25.3 26.8 28.3 29.9 31.3 32.6 34.0 35.3 36.7 38.0 39.2 40.5 41.7 43.0 44.2 
58 7.9 9.3 10.6 12.0 13.4 14.8 16.2 17.6 19.0 20.4 21.9 23.3 24.8 26.3 27.8 29.3 30.7 32.1 33.5 34.8 36.1 37.5 38.7 40.0 41.3 42.5 43.7 
59 7.5 8.9 10.2 11.6 13.0 14.4 15.8 17.2 18.6 20.0 21.4 22.9 24.3 25.7 27.2 28.7 30.1 31.5 32.9 34.3 35.6 36.9 38.3 39.5 40.8 42.1 43.3 
60 7.0 8.4 9.8 11.2 12.6 14.0 15.4 16.8 18.2 19.6 21.0 22.4 23.8 25.2 26.6 28.1 29.6 31.0 32.4 33.7 35.1 36.4 37.8 39.1 40.4 41.6 42.9 
61 6.5 7.9 9.3 10.7 12.1 13.5 14.9 16.3 17.7 19.1 20.5 21.9 23.3 24.7 26.1 27.5 29.0 30.4 31.8 33.2 34.6 35.9 37.3 38.6 39.9 41.2 42.4 
62 6.0 7.4 8.8 10.2 11.7 13.1 14.5 15.9 17.3 18.7 20.1 21.4 22.8 24.2 25.5 27.0 28.4 29.9 31.3 32.7 34.1 35.4 36.8 38.1 39.4 40.7 42.0 
63 5.3 6.8 8.3 9.7 11.1 12.6 14.0 15.4 16.8 18.2 19.6 20.9 22.3 23.6 25.0 26.4 27.8 29.3 30.7 32.2 33.6 34.9 36.3 37.7 39.0 40.3 41.6 
64 -6.1 7.6 9.1 10.6 12.0 13.5 14.9 16.3 17.7 19.0 20.4 21.7 23.1 24.4 25.8 27.3 28.7 30.2 31.6 33.0 34.4 35.8 37.2 38.5 39.9 41.2 
65 -5.4 7.0 8.5 10.0 11.5 12.9 14.3 15.8 17.1 18.5 19.9 21.2 22.5 23.8 25.2 26.7 28.2 29.7 31.1 32.5 33.9 35.3 36.7 38.1 39.4 40.8 
66 - 6.3 7.8 9.3 10.8 12.3 13.8 15.2 16.6 18.0 19.3 20.7 22.0 23.2 24.6 26.1 27.6 29.1 30.6 32.0 33.4 34.9 36.3 37.6 39.0 40.4 
67 - -5.5 7.1 8.7 10.2 11.7 13.2 14.6 16.0 17.4 18.8 20.1 21.4 22.7 24.1 25.6 27.1 28.6 30.1 31.5 33.0 34.4 35.8 37.2 38.6 39.9 
68 - - -6.3 8.0 9.5 11.1 12.6 14.0 15.5 16.8 18.2 19.5 20.8 22.1 23.5 25.0 26.5 28.0 29.5 31.0 32.5 33.9 35.3 36.8 38.1 39.5 
69 - - -5.5 7.2 8.8 10.4 11.9 13.4 14.8 16.3 17.6 19.0 20.3 21.5 22.9 24.4 26.0 27.5 29.0 30.5 32.0 33.4 34.9 36.3 37.7 39.1 
70 - - - -6.4 8.1 9.7 11.2 12.7 14.2 15.7 17.0 18.4 19.7 20.9 22.3 23.9 25.4 27.0 28.5 30.0 31.5 33.0 34.4 35.9 37.3 38.7 
71 - - - -5.6 7.3 8.9 10.5 12.1 13.6 15.0 16.4 17.8 19.1 20.3 21.7 23.3 24.9 26.4 28.0 29.5 31.0 32.5 34.0 35.4 36.9 38.3 
72 - - - - -6.4 8.1 9.8 11.4 12.9 14.4 15.8 17.2 18.5 19.7 21.2 22.8 24.3 25.9 27.4 29.0 30.5 32.0 33.5 35.0 36.5 37.9 
73 - - - - -5.6 7.3 9.0 10.7 12.2 13.7 15.2 16.6 17.9 19.2 20.6 22.2 23.8 25.4 26.9 28.5 30.0 31.5 33.1 34.6 36.0 37.5 
74 - - - - - -6.5 8.2 9.9 11.5 13.1 14.5 15.9 17.3 18.6 20.0 21.6 23.2 24.8 26.4 28.0 29.5 31.1 32.6 34.1 35.6 37.1 
75 - - - - - -5.6 7.4 9.2 10.8 12.4 13.9 15.3 16.7 18.0 19.4 21.1 22.7 24.3 25.9 27.5 29.1 30.6 32.2 33.7 35.2 36.7 
76 - - - - - - -6.6 8.4 10.1 11.7 13.2 14.7 16.1 17.4 18.9 20.5 22.1 23.8 25.4 27.0 28.6 30.1 31.7 33.3 34.8 36.3 
77 - - - - - - -5.7 7.5 9.3 11.0 12.5 14.0 15.4 16.8 18.3 20.0 21.6 23.2 24.9 26.5 28.1 29.7 31.3 32.8 34.4 36.0 
78 - - - - - - - -6.7 8.5 10.2 11.8 13.4 14.8 16.2 17.7 19.4 21.1 22.7 24.4 26.0 27.6 29.2 30.8 32.4 34.0 35.6 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols                                                                                                                            
 
   
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
  RA3-14 2016 Residential Appendices 
Condenser Air 
Dry-Bulb 
Temperature 
(°F)(T cond ., db ) 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
79 - - - - - - - -5.9 7.7 9.5 11.1 12.7 14.2 15.6 17.1 18.8 20.5 22.2 23.8 25.5 27.1 28.8 30.4 32.0 33.6 35.2 
80 - - - - - - - - -6.9 8.7 10.4 12.0 13.5 15.0 16.6 18.3 20.0 21.7 23.3 25.0 26.7 28.3 29.9 31.6 33.2 34.8 
81 - - - - - - - - -6.0 7.9 9.7 11.3 12.9 14.3 16.0 17.7 19.4 21.1 22.8 24.5 26.2 27.9 29.5 31.2 32.8 34.4 
82 - - - - - - - - -5.2 7.1 8.9 10.6 12.2 13.7 15.4 17.2 18.9 20.6 22.3 24.0 25.7 27.4 29.1 30.7 32.4 34.0 
83 - - - - - - - - - -6.3 8.2 9.9 11.6 13.1 14.9 16.6 18.4 20.1 21.8 23.5 25.2 26.9 28.6 30.3 32.0 33.7 
84 - - - - - - - - - -5.5 7.4 9.2 10.9 12.5 14.3 16.1 17.8 19.6 21.3 23.0 24.8 26.5 28.2 29.9 31.6 33.3 
85 - - - - - - - - - - -6.6 8.5 10.3 11.9 13.7 15.5 17.3 19.0 20.8 22.6 24.3 26.0 27.8 29.5 31.2 32.9 
86 - - - - - - - - - - -5.8 7.8 9.6 11.3 13.2 15.0 16.7 18.5 20.3 22.1 23.8 25.6 27.3 29.1 30.8 32.6 
87 - - - - - - - - - - -5.0 7.0 8.9 10.6 12.6 14.4 16.2 18.0 19.8 21.6 23.4 25.1 26.9 28.7 30.4 32.2 
88 - - - - - - - - - - - -6.3 8.2 10.0 12.0 13.9 15.7 17.5 19.3 21.1 22.9 24.7 26.5 28.3 30.1 31.8 
89 - - - - - - - - - - - -5.5 7.5 9.4 11.5 13.3 15.1 17.0 18.8 20.6 22.4 24.3 26.1 27.9 29.7 31.5 
Shaded area requires return plenum temperature of 70°F or higher. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
      
 
 
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-15 
Table RA3.2 -2 Target Superheat (Suction Line Temperature -Evaporator Saturation Temperature) 
Return Air Wet -Bulb Temperature (°F) (T return, wb) 
Condenser Air 
Dry-Bulb 
Temperature (°F)  
(T cond ., db) 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
90 - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 8.8 10.9 12.8 14.6 16.5 18.3 20.1 22.0 23.8 25.6 27.5 29.3 31.1 
91 - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.1 8.1 10.3 12.2 14.1 15.9 17.8 19.7 21.5 23.4 25.2 27.1 28.9 30.8 
92 - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.4 7.5 9.8 11.7 13.5 15.4 17.3 19.2 21.1 22.9 24.8 26.7 28.5 30.4 
93 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 9.2 11.1 13.0 14.9 16.8 18.7 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.2 30.1 
94 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.7 10.6 12.5 14.4 16.3 18.2 20.2 22.1 24.0 25.9 27.8 29.7 
95 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.6 8.1 10.0 12.0 13.9 15.8 17.8 19.7 21.6 23.6 25.5 27.4 29.4 
96 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7.5 9.5 11.4 13.4 15.3 17.3 19.2 21.2 23.2 25.1 27.1 29.0 
97 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7.0 8.9 10.9 12.9 14.9 16.8 18.8 20.8 22.7 24.7 26.7 28.7 
98 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.4 8.4 10.4 12.4 14.4 16.4 18.3 20.3 22.3 24.3 26.3 28.3 
99 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.8 7.9 9.9 11.9 13.9 15.9 17.9 19.9 21.9 24.0 26.0 28.0 
100 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.3 7.3 9.3 11.4 13.4 15.4 17.5 19.5 21.5 23.6 25.6 27.7 
101 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 8.8 10.9 12.9 15.0 17.0 19.1 21.1 23.2 25.3 27.3 
102 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.3 10.4 12.4 14.5 16.6 18.6 20.7 22.8 24.9 27.0 
103 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.7 7.8 9.9 11.9 14.0 16.1 18.2 20.3 22.4 24.5 26.7 
104 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.2 7.2 9.3 11.5 13.6 15.7 17.8 19.9 22.1 24.2 26.3 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols                                                                                                                            
 
     
 
 
                             
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            
                            90
95
100
105
110RA3-16 2016 Residential Appendices 
Table RA3.2 -2 Target Superheat (Suction Line Temperature -Evaporator Saturation Temperature) 
Return Air Wet -Bulb Temperature (°F) (T return, wb) 
Condenser Air 
Dry-Bulb 
Temperature (°F)  
(T cond . db) 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
- - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 8.8 10.9 12.8 14.6 16.5 18.3 20.1 22.0 23.8 25.6 27.5 29.3 31.1 
91 - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.1 8.1 10.3 12.2 14.1 15.9 17.8 19.7 21.5 23.4 25.2 27.1 28.9 30.8 
92 - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.4 7.5 9.8 11.7 13.5 15.4 17.3 19.2 21.1 22.9 24.8 26.7 28.5 30.4 
93 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 9.2 11.1 13.0 14.9 16.8 18.7 20.6 22.5 24.4 26.3 28.2 30.1 
94 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.7 10.6 12.5 14.4 16.3 18.2 20.2 22.1 24.0 25.9 27.8 29.7 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.6 8.1 10.0 12.0 13.9 15.8 17.8 19.7 21.6 23.6 25.5 27.4 29.4 
96 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7.5 9.5 11.4 13.4 15.3 17.3 19.2 21.2 23.2 25.1 27.1 29.0 
97 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7.0 8.9 10.9 12.9 14.9 16.8 18.8 20.8 22.7 24.7 26.7 28.7 
98 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.4 8.4 10.4 12.4 14.4 16.4 18.3 20.3 22.3 24.3 26.3 28.3 
99 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.8 7.9 9.9 11.9 13.9 15.9 17.9 19.9 21.9 24.0 26.0 28.0 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.3 7.3 9.3 11.4 13.4 15.4 17.5 19.5 21.5 23.6 25.6 27.7 
101 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.8 8.8 10.9 12.9 15.0 17.0 19.1 21.1 23.2 25.3 27.3 
102 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.3 10.4 12.4 14.5 16.6 18.6 20.7 22.8 24.9 27.0 
103 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.7 7.8 9.9 11.9 14.0 16.1 18.2 20.3 22.4 24.5 26.7 
104 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.2 7.2 9.3 11.5 13.6 15.7 17.8 19.9 22.1 24.2 26.3 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.7 8.8 11.0 13.1 15.2 17.4 19.5 21.7 23.8 26.0 
106 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.3 10.5 12.6 14.8 17.0 19.1 21.3 23.5 25.7 
107 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.7 7.9 10.0 12.2 14.4 16.6 18.7 21.0 23.2 25.4 
108 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.2 7.4 9.5 11.7 13.9 16.1 18.4 20.6 22.8 25.1 
109 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.9 9.1 11.3 13.5 15.7 18.0 20.2 22.5 24.7 
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.4 8.6 10.8 13.1 15.3 17.6 19.9 22.1 24.4 
111 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.9 8.1 10.4 12.6 14.9 17.2 19.5 21.8 24.1 
112 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5.4 7.6 9.9 12.2 14.5 16.8 19.1 21.5 23.8 
113 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7.2 9.5 11.8 14.1 16.4 18.8 21.1 23.5 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols     
   
                             
                            
                            2025 Residential Appendices RA3-17 
Condenser Air 
Dry-Bulb 
Temperature (°F)  
(T cond . db) 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 
114 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.7 9.0 11.4 13.7 16.1 18.4 20.8 23.2 
115 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6.2 8.6 10.9 13.3 15.7 18.1 20.5 22.9 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 RA3-18 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.3 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Forced Air System Airflow 
Rate, Fan Watt Draw, and Determination of Fan Efficacy. 
RA3.3 contains procedures for: 
(a) Verification of improved system airflow rate (cfm) in ducted split system and packaged 
space conditioning systems serving low-risesingle -family and multifamily residential 
buildings. 
(b) Verification of reduced fan power (Watt) draw achieved through improved air distribution 
system design, including more efficient motors and ducts that have less resistance to 
airflow. 
(c) Determination of fan efficacy (Watt/cfm) utilizing simultaneous measurement of system 
Watt draw and airflow rate. 
RA3.3.1 Instrumentation Specifications 
The instrumentation for the diagnostic measurements shall conform to the following 
specifications: 
RA3.3.1.1 Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be performed with measurement systems (i.e., sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 1% of pressure reading or ± 0.2 Pa (.0008 inches 
water) (whichever is greater). All pressure measurements within the d uct system shall be made 
with static pressure probes such as Dwyer A303 or equivalent. 
When required for compliance with Standards Section 150.0(m)13A, or when supply plenum 
pressure measurements are used for plenum pressure matching or flow grid measurements, a 
5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter hole for a static pressure probe (HSPP) or a permanent ly affixed static 
pressure probe (PSPP) shall be provided as shown in Figure RA3.3 -1. 
When supply plenum pressure measurements are used for plenum pressure matching or flow 
grid measurements, the supply plenum pressure measurement shall be taken at the supply 
plenum measurement access location as shown in Figure RA3.3 -1. 
The hole location shown in Figure RA3.3 -1 can be applied to any one of the four sides of the coil 
box or supply plenum. The hole location shall be labeled "Title 24 – Supply Plenum Measurement 
Access" in at least 12 -point type. 
Systems that cannot conform to the specifications for the hole location shown in Figure RA3.3 -1 
shall not be required to have holes as described in Figure RA3.3 -1; however , if supply plenum 
pressure measurements are required for compliance, an alternate location that provides access 
for making an accurate supply plenum pressure measurement shall be used. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-19 
B
A
Air FlowEvaporator 
Coil.75A.75B
A = Supply Plenum/Coil Box 
dimension parallel to 
airflow.
B = Supply Plenum/Coil Box 
dimension perpendicular 
to airflow.
Return Plenum/Blower 
CompartmentSupply Plenum/Coil BoxTitle 24 
Supply Plenum 
Measurement 
Access 5/16 inch Diameter Hole
Or Permanent Static 
Pressure Probe
Figure RA3.3 -1 Hole for the Placement of a Static Pressure Probe (HSPP) or Permanently Installed 
Static Pressure Probe (PSPP) 
RA3.3.1.2 Airflow Rate Measurements 
All measurements of system airflow rates shall be made with an airflow rate measurement 
apparatus (i.e., sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 7% of reading or ± 5 
cfm whichever is greater. 
RA3.3.1.3 Fan Watt Draw Measurements 
All measurements of air handler Watt draws shall be made with true power measurement 
systems (i.e., sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 2% of reading or ± 10 
watts whichever is greater. 
RA3.3.2 Apparatus 
RA3.3.2.1 System Airflow Rate Measurement Apparatus 
Forced air system airflow rate shall be measured using one of the apparatuses listed in Section 
RA3.3.2. The apparatus shall produce airflow rate measurements that conform to the accuracy 
requirements specified in Section RA3.3.1.2 for measurements of residential forced air system 
airflow at system return grilles of single and multiple return duct systems. 
The airflow rate measurement apparatus manufacturers shall publish in their product 
documentation, specifications for how their airflow measurement apparatuses are to be used for 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 RA3-20 2025 Residential Appendices 
accurately measuring residential system airflow at system return grilles of single and multiple 
return duct systems. 
The airflow measurement apparatus manufacturers shall certify to the Energy Commission that 
use of the apparatus in accordance with the specifications given in the manufacturer's product 
documentation will produce measurement results that are within the ac curacy required by 
Section RA3.3.1.2. 
For the airflow measurement apparatuses that are certified to the Commission as meeting the 
accuracy required by Section RA3.3.1.2, the following information will be posted on the Energy 
Commission website, making the information available to all people in volved in the airflow 
verification compliance process: 
(a) The product manufacturers' model numbers for the airflow measurement apparatuses. 
(b) The product manufacturers' product documentation that gives the specifications for use 
of the airflow measurement apparatuses to accurately measure residential system airflow 
at system return grilles of single and multiple return duct systems . 
A manufacturer's certification to the Commission of the accuracy of the airflow measurement 
apparatus, and submittal to the Commission of the product documentation that specifies the 
proper use of the airflow measurement apparatus to produce accurate airfl ow rate 
measurements shall be prerequisites for allowing the manufacturer's airflow measurement 
apparatus to be used for conducting the system airflow verification procedures in Section RA3.3 
for demonstrating compliance with Part 6. 
RA3.3.2.1.1 Fan Flowmeter 
The apparatus for measuring the system airflow rate shall consist of a duct pressurization and 
airflow measurement device (subsequently referred to as a fan flowmeter) that meets all 
applicable instrumentation specifications in Section RA3.3.1 , and a static pressure measurement 
device that meets the specifications in Section RA3.3.1 .1. The fan flowmeter shall be attached at 
the inlet to a return duct from the conditioned space. If the system is not a multi -zoned 
automatic dampered system, the fan flowmeter may be attached at the air handler blower 
compartment door as an alternative t o placement at the inlet to a return duct from conditioned 
space. The fan flowmeter shall be attached at a point where all the airflow through the system 
will flow through it. When the air handler blower compartment door attachment alternative is 
used, an air barrier must be placed between the return duct system and the air handler inlet(s). 
All registers shall be in their normal operating condition. The static pressure probe shall be fixed 
to the supply plenum at the location specified in Section RA3.3.1.1 so that it is not moved during 
this test. 
RA3.3.2.1.2 Flow Grid 
The apparatus for measuring the system airflow rate shall consist of a flow measurement device 
(subsequently referred to as a flow grid) that meets all applicable instrumentation specifications 
in RA3.3.1 and a digital pressure measurement device that meets the specifications in Section 
RA3.3.1 .1. The flow grid shall be attached at a point where all the fan airflow will flow through 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
     2025 Residential Appendices RA3-21 
the flow grid. All registers shall be in their normal operating condition. The static pressure probe 
shall be fixed to the supply plenum at the location specified in Section RA3.3.1.1 so that it is not 
moved during this test. 
RA3.3.2.1.3 Powered Flow Capture Hood 
A powered and pressure balanced flow capture hood (subsequently referred to as a Powered 
Flow Hood1) that has the capability to balance the flow capture static pressure difference 
between the room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (.0008 inches water) and 
meets the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section RA3.3.1 may be used to verify the 
system airflow rate at the return grille(s) if the powered flow hood has a flow capture area at 
least as large as the return grille in all dimensions. The fan adjustment needed to balance the 
flow capture static pressure differen ce between the room and the flow capture hood enclosure 
to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (.0008 inches water) shall be provided by either an automatic control or a manual 
control operated in accordance with the apparatus manufacturer's instructions specified in the 
manufac turer's product documentation. All supply registers shall be in their normal operating 
position. Measurement(s) shall be taken at the return grille(s). 
RA3.3.2.1.4 Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
A traditional flow capture hood2 meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section 
RA3.3.1 may be used to verify the system airflow rate at the return grille(s) if the device has a 
capture area at least as large as the return grille in all dimensions. All registers shall be in their 
normal operating position. Measurement(s) shall be taken at th e return grille(s). 
RA3.3.2.2 Air Handler Watt Draw Measurement Apparatus 
The air handler watt draw shall be measured using one of the following apparatuses. 
RA3.3.2.2.1 Portable Watt Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the air handler watt draw shall consist of a wattmeter meeting the 
applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.3.1 . The measuring device shall be attached to 
measure the air handler fan watt draw. All registers and blower access panel(s) shall be in their 
normal operating condition. 
When required to measure fan watt draw in packaged and heat pump units, it is recommended 
to use portable true power clamp -on meters to provide flexibility for isolating the correct fan 
wires serving in packaged or heat pump units.  Note: Higher voltage cl amp -on meters may be 
required for packaged and heat pump units . 
RA3.3.2.2.2 Utility Revenue Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the air handler watt draw shall consist of the utility revenue meter 
meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.3.1 and a stopwatch that provides 
1 Also known as "active" flow hood, or "fan assisted" flow hood . 
2 Also known as "non -powered" flow hood, "standard" flow hood, "commercially available" flow hood, or "passive" flow hood . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
  
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 RA3-22 2025 Residential Appendices 
measurements in units of seconds. All registers and blower access panel(s) shall be in their 
normal operating condition. 
RA3.3.2.2.3 Digital Utility Revenue Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the air handler watt draw shall consist of the digital utility revenue 
meter meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.3.1 that provides direct 
digital display of the Watt draw. All registers and blower access panel(s) shall be in their normal 
operating condition. 
RA3.3.3 Procedures 
RA3.3.3.1 System Airflow Rate Measurement Procedures 
When required for compliance, the installed system's airflow shall be diagnostically tested using 
one of the methods specified in this section. 
For systems utilizing an intentional ducted ventilation airflow from outside the conditioned space 
into the return system, the outside airflow may be included in the system airflow if that flow 
occurs in all operating modes of the HVAC system. 
Diagnostic system airflow rate measurement values shall be converted to fan cfm/ton by dividing 
the measured system airflow rate (Qah) by the nominal tons of condensing unit cooling capacity 
for the air conditioner. 
The measured airflow rate shall be expressed in cubic feet per minute of standard air (standard 
air has a density of 0.075 lb/ft³). When the airflow measurement is made at altitudes significantly 
different from sea level or at temperatures significantly di fferent from 70°F, the airflow indicated 
on the device gauge may differ from the standard CFM by as much as 15 percent. Corrections 
from indicated to standard CFM shall be made using the procedure specified by the airflow 
measurement device manufacturer. 
RA3.3.3.1.1 System Airflow Rate Measurement Usi ng Plenum Pressure Matching and Fan 
Flowmeter 
This system airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures: 
(a) If the fan flowmeter is to be connected to the air handler outside the conditioned space, 
then the door or access panel between the conditioned space and the air handler location 
shall be opened. 
(b)  With the system fan on at the maximum speed used in the installation (the cooling speed  
when air conditioning is present), measure the pressure difference (in Pa) between the 
supply plenum and the conditioned space (Psp). Psp is the target pressure to be maintained during the system airflow tests. Place the pressure probe in the Supply Pressure Measurement Location described in Section RA3.3.1.1.
 Adjust the probe to 
achieve the highest pressure and then firmly attach the probe to ensure that it does not 
move during the system airflow test.  
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
   
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-23 
(c) If the fan flowmeter is to be connected to the air handler at the access, block the return 
duct system from the plenum upstream of the air handler fan and the fan flowmeter. 
Filters are often located in an ideal location for this blockage. 
(d) Attach the fan flowmeter to the duct system at the inlet to one return duct from the 
conditioned space with the grille and filter removed (if there is more than one system 
return grille, block off all return grilles other than the one used for this measure ment. 
Alternatively , the fan flowmeter may be placed at the air handler. 
(e) Turn on the system fan and the fan flowmeter, adjust the fan flowmeter until the 
pressure between supply plenum and conditioned space matches Psp. 
(f) Record the flow through the fan flowmeter (Qah, cfm) -this is the diagnostic system 
airflow. In some systems, system fan and fan flowmeter combinations may not be able to 
produce enough flow to reach Psp. In this case record the maximum flow (Qmax, cfm) a nd 
pressure (Pmax) between the supply plenum and the conditioned space. The following 
equation shall be used to correct measured system flow and pressure (Qmax and Pmax) 
to operating condition at operating pressure (Psp). 
Equation RA3.3 -1 Air Handler Flow 
Qah = Qmax x (Psp/Pmax) ^0.5 
RA3.3.3.1.2 System Airflow Rate Measurement Using Flow Grid 
The system airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures: 
(a) With the system fan on at the maximum speed used in the installation (the cooling speed 
when air conditioning is present), measure the pressure difference (in Pa) between the 
supply plenum and the conditioned space (Psp). Place the pressure probe in the Su pply 
Pressure Measurement Location described in Section RA3.3.1.1 . Adjust the probe to 
achieve the highest pressure and then firmly attach the probe to ensure that it does not 
move during the system airflow test. 
(b) The flow grid shall be attached at a point where all the system air flows through the flow 
grid. If there are multiple return grilles in the duct system, flow grids may be used to 
measure airflow at the return grilles, but only by installing a flow grid in each return grill 
and making simultaneous measurements of all return grill airflows. 
(c) Re-measure the system operating pressure with the flow grid in place. 
(d) Measure the airflow through the flow grid (Qgrid) and the test pressure (Ptest). If multiple 
flow grids are used Qgrid is the sum of the flows through each of the flow grids. 
(e) The following equation for air handler flow shall be used to correct flow through the flow 
grid and pressure (Qgrid and Ptest) to operating condition at operating pressure (Psp). 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
     
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
   
  
 RA3-24 2025 Residential Appendices 
Equation RA3.3 -2 Air Handler Flow 
Qah = Qgrid x (Psp/Ptest) ^0.5 
RA3.3.3.1.3 System Airflow Rate Measurement Using Powered Flow Capture Hood 
The system airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures ;: all 
registers shall be fully open, and the air filter shall be installed. Turn on the system fan at the 
cooling speed and measure the airflow at the return grille(s) with a calibrated powered flow hood 
to determine the total system return airflow. Operati on of the powered flow hood shall conform 
to the specifications in the manufacturer's product documentation. For multiple return systems, 
the total system return airflow (Qah , cfm) shall be the sum of the airflow measurements at each 
of the system's return grilles. 
RA3.3.3.1.4 System Airflow Rate Measurement Using Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
The system airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures ;: all 
registers shall be fully open, and the air filter shall be installed. Turn on the system fan at the 
cooling speed and measure the airflow at the return grille(s) with a calibrated traditional flow 
capture hood to determine the total system return airf low. For multiple return systems, the total 
system return airflow (Qah, cfm) shall be the sum of the airflow measurements at each of the 
system's return grilles. 
RA3.3.3.1.5 Alternative to Compliance with Minimum System Airflow Requirements for 
Altered Systems 
When an altered space conditioning system is unable to demonstrate compliance with the 
applicable minimum system airflow rate across the cooling coil required for refrigerant charge 
verification compliance , the system shall instead comply with Section RA3.3.3. 1.5.1 below . If the 
remedial actions in Section RA3.3.3.1.5.1 fail to bring the system into compliance with the 
applicable minimum system airflow rate , the installer shall complete the refrigerant charge 
verification utilizing the highest system airflow rate attainable. 
RA3.3.3.1.5.1 Remedial Actions 
The installer shall attempt to correct non -compliant system airflow by performing the following 
remedial actions: 
a) Check to determine that the air filter media is clean. If the air filter media is dirty, then 
replace it with clean filter media. 
b) Open all registers and dampers and remove any obstructions. 
c) Replace crushed, blocked , or restricted ducts if possible. 
d) Check to determine that the evaporator coil is clean, or that there are no obstructions to 
airflow through the evaporator coil. If the evaporator coil is dirty or blocked with debris, if 
possible, clean the evaporator coil using a method approved by the ma nufacturer. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-25 
e) Set the air handler fan to high speed for cooling , and ensure that the blower wheel and 
motor are operating properly, within manufacturer’s specifications. 
f) Check to determine whether the return duct system or return filter grille is sized too small 
for the installed system. If the return duct or return grille is sized too small, if possible, 
perform applicable alterations work on the return duct system or ret urn grille in order to 
improve the system airflow rate. 
When performing these remedial actions determines that there is a fault, a corrective action shall 
be performed if possible. In many cases, airflow can be improved by adding a return duct and 
filter grille , or enlarging the existing return duct or filter grille. Alteration of the return duct 
system is an alternative that shall be considered if applicable to the existing system, and if other 
remedial actions do not improve the airflow. Alteration of the retur n duct system to bring the 
system airflow rate int o compliance is expected to be attainable for systems with ducts in an attic 
space with sufficient clearances for accommodating improvements to the return duct system. 
RA3.3.3.1.5.2 Installer Compliance 
For each of the listed remedial actions, the HVAC installer shall certify that the remedial action 
was performed , and indicate whether the action was completed successfully or was not 
completed successfully. When a remedial action was not completed successfully the installer 
shall indicate on the installation certificate the reason the action was not completed succes sfully. 
RA3.3.3.1.5.3 HERS ECC-Rater Compliance 
The HERS ECC-Rater shall review the information submitted on the installation certificate and 
perform follow -up communications with the HVAC installer or the homeowner. The system 
complies if the HERS ECC-Rater determines the remedial actions have been performed, and the 
information reported on the installation certificate is valid. 
RA3.3.3.2 Air Handler Fan Watt Draw Measurement Procedures 
The diagnostic air handler watt draw shall be measured using one of the following methods: 
RA3.3.3.2.1 Air Handler Watt Draw Measurement Using Portable Watt Meter 
The air handler watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures ;: all 
registers shall be fully open, and the air filter shall be installed. Turn on the system fan at the 
maximum speed used in the installation (usually the cooling speed when air conditioning is 
present; usually the cooling speed with outdoor air introduc tion if ventilation is provided through 
the return duct system) and measure the fan watt draw (Wfan). 
When required to measure fan watt draw in packaged and heat pump units, it is recommended 
to use portable true power clamp -on meters to provide flexibility for isolating the correct fan 
wires serving in packaged or heat pump units.  
Note: Higher voltage clamp -on meters may be required for packaged and heat pump units . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
 
   
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 RA3-26 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.3.3.2.2 Air Handler Watt Draw Measurement Using Utility Revenue Meter 
The air handler watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures ;: all 
registers shall be fully open, and the air filter shall be installed. Turn on the system fan at the 
maximum speed used in the installation (usually the cooling speed when air conditioning is 
present; usually the cooling speed with outdoor air introduc tion if ventilation is provided through 
the return duct system) and turn off every circuit breaker except the one exclusively serving the 
air handler. Record the Kh factor on the revenue meter, count the number of full revolutions of 
the meter wheel over a period exceeding 90 seconds. Record the number of revolutions (Nrev) 
and time period (trev, seconds). Compute the air handler watt draw (Wfan) using the following 
formula: 
Equation RA3.3 -3 Air Handler Fan Watt Draw  Wfan = (Kh x Nrev x 3600 ) / trev 
Return all circuit breakers to their original positions. 
RA3.3.3.2.3 Air Handler Watt Draw Measurement Using Digital Utility Revenue Meter 
The air handler watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures ;: all 
registers shall be fully open, and the air filter shall be installed. Turn on the system fan at the 
maximum speed used in the installation (usually the cooling speed when air conditioning is 
present; usually the cooling speed with outdoor air introduc tion if ventilation is provided through 
the return duct system) and turn off every circuit breaker except the one exclusively serving the 
air handler. Read the Watt dr aw from the digital utility meter digital display. Return all circuit 
breakers to their original positions. 
RA3.3.3.3 Determination of Forced Air System Fan Efficacy 
Demonstrating compliance with fan efficacy requirements requires simultaneous measurement 
of the system airflow rate using Section RA3.3.3.1 procedures and fan Watt draw using Section 
RA3.3.3.2 procedures. The results of the simultaneous airflow rate and fan Watt draw 
measurements are used for calculation of a value for the forced air system fan efficacy as follows: 
(a) The measured value for fan Watt draw (Watt) shall be divided by the measured value for 
airflow rate (cfm) to determine the fan efficacy (Watt/cfm). 
RA3.3.3.4 Determining Compliance with Fan Efficacy or System Airflow Requirements 
Compliance with the requirements for improved airflow or for improved fan efficacy both require 
simultaneous measurement of airflow and fan Watts. The simultaneous measurements shall be 
used to calculate the following values used to determine compliance: 
RA3.3.3.4.1 Airflow Calculation (cfm/ton) 
For packaged systems, and for split systems with only one indoor unit, the measured value for 
airflow (cfm) shall be converted to cfm per ton by dividing the measured system airflow rate by 
the nominal tons of condensing unit cooling capacity. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
   
 
   
 
  
  
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
   
 
    
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-27 
For indoor units of multiple -split systems, the measured value for airflow in cfm shall be 
converted into cfm per ton by dividing the measured indoor unit airflow rate by the nominal tons 
of indoor unit cooling coil capacity. 
RA3.3.3.4.2 Fan Efficacy Calculation (Watt/cfm) 
The measured value for fan Watt draw (Watt) shall be divided by the measured value for airflow 
rate (cfm) to determine the fan efficacy (Watt/cfm). 
RA3.3.3.4.3 Compliance Criteria 
In order to comply with either the fan efficacy requirement, or the system airflow requirement, 
the following criteria shall be met: 
(a) The system airflow (cfm/ton) shall meet or exceed the system airflow compliance criteria 
specified in the Standards or on the Certificate of Compliance as applicable. 
(b) The calculated value for fan efficacy (Watt/cfm) shall be equal to or less than the fan 
efficacy compliance criterion specified in the Standards or on the Certificate of 
Compliance as applicable . 
RA3.3.4 Verification of Central Fan Ventilation Cooling Systems (CFVCS) 
When field verification and diagnostic testing of a central fan ventilation coo ling system is 
required for compliance credit for the performance standards set forth in Standards Section 
150.1(b), the CFVCS shall be verified according to the procedures in this section. Central fan 
ventilation cooling is not applicable to multifamily buildings. 
RA3.3.4.1 CFVCS Airflow Rate Measurements . 
The CFVCS airflow shall be verified according to the applicable procedures specified in RA 3.3.3.1, 
to measure and record the following system airflow rates: 
a. The system airflow at high fan speed as required for compliance with Standards Section 
150.0(m)13 . 
b. The system airflow rate at the speed used for ventilation cooling as specified on the 
Certificate of Compliance for the CFVCS.  
RA3.3.4.2 CFVCS Air Handler Fan Watt Draw Measurements . 
The CFVCS airflow shall be verified according to the applicable procedures specified in RA3.3.3.2, 
to measure and record the following system airflow Watt draw values : 
a. The system Watt draw at high fan speed as required for compliance with Standards 
Section 150.0(m)13. 
b. The system Watt draw at the speed used for ventilation cooling as specified on the 
Certificate of Compliance for the CFVCS . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
    
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  RA3-28 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.3.4.3 Determination of CFVCS Fan Efficacy 
Demonstrating compliance with fan efficacy requirements requires simultaneous measurement 
of the system airflow rate using Section RA3.3.4.1 procedures and fan Watt draw using Section 
RA3.3.4.2 procedures. The results of the simultaneous airflow rate and fan Watt draw 
measurements shall be used for calculation of a value for the forced air system fan efficacy as 
follows: 
a. The measured value for fan Watt draw (Watt) at high fan speed shall be divided by the 
measured value for airflow rate (cfm) at the high fan speed to determine the fan efficacy 
(Watt/cfm) for the CFVCS at high fan speed. 
b. The measured value for fan Watt draw (Watt) at the ventilation fan speed shall be divided 
by the measured value for airflow rate (cfm) at the ventilation fan speed to determine the 
fan efficacy (Watt/cfm) for the CFVCS at ventilation fan speed . 
RA3.3.4.4 Determining Compliance with Fan Efficacy and System Airflow Requirements 
Compliance with the requirements for airflow rate and fan efficacy require that the Watt draw 
and airflow rate measurements are made simultaneously at both high speed and ventilation 
speed . The simultaneous measurements shall be used to calculate the following values used to 
determine compliance: 
RA3.3.4.4.1 Fan Efficacy Calculation (Watt/cfm) 
The measured value for fan Watt draw (Watt) shall be divided by the measured value for airflow 
rate (cfm) to determine the fan efficacy (Watt/cfm). 
RA3.3.4.5 Compliance Criteria 
In order for the CFVCS to comply , the requirements in both subsections a and b below shall be 
met: 
a. The system airflow (cfm/ton) shall meet or exceed the system airflow compliance criteria 
specified on the Certifi cate of Compliance at both the high fan speed, and the ventilation 
fan speed . 
b. The calculated value for fan efficacy (Watt/cfm) shall be equal to or less than the fan 
efficacy compliance criterion specified on the Certificate of Compliance at both the high 
fan speed, and the ventilation fan speed. 
RA3.4 Field Verification of Installed HVAC System Components and Devices 
RA3.4.1 Purpose and Scope 
The purpose of these procedures is to verify that residential space cooling systems and heat 
pumps have the required components to achieve the energy efficiency claimed in the compliance 
documents. The procedures apply when a Fault Indicator Display ( FID) is specified for split system 
equipment, or when an HSPF /HSPF2 , SEER /SEER2 , or EER/EER2 higher than the default is 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-29 
claimed. For dwelling units with multiple systems, the procedures shall be applied to each system 
separately. 
The installer shall certify on the Certificate of Installation that the components required for 
compliance have been installed. 
RA3.4.2 Fault Indicator Display ( FID) Verification Procedure 
The FID verification procedure shall consist of visual inspection to confirm that the FID is installed 
on the system, and that the manufacturer has certified to the Energy Commission that the FID 
model meets the applicable requirements of Reference Joint Appendix JA6. In addition, the space 
conditioning system shall comply with the procedures specified in Sections RA3.4.2.1, or 
RA3.4.2.2, or RA3.4.2.3. 
RA3.4.2.1 Verification of installation of a FID with "self diagnostic reporting" functionality 
when outdoor air temperature is less than 55F 
The space conditioning system installer shall use the weigh -in charging procedure in Section 
RA3.2.3.1 to comply with refrigerant charge requirements. HERS v Verification compliance for the 
refrigerant charge requirement shall be satisfied by visual inspection to confirm the system has a 
FID installed, and confirming the installed FID "self diagnostic reporting function" indicates FID 
sensors and internal processes are operating within the FID device's specified design parameters. 
RA3.4.2.2 Verification of Installation of a FID that does not have "self diagnostic reporting" 
functionality when outdoor air temperature is less than 55F 
The space conditioning system installer shall use the weigh -in charging procedure in Section 
RA3.2.3.1 to comply with the refrigerant charge requirements, and HERS verification compliance 
for the refrigerant charge requirement shall be delayed until a time when the outdoor air 
temperature is equal to or greater than 55F, at which time the procedure in RA3.4.2.3 shall be 
performed. 
RA3.4.2.3 Verification of Installation of a FID when the outdoor air temperature is equal to 
or greater than 55F 
When the outdoor air temperature is warmer than 55F, the space conditioning system installer 
shall use either the standard charge verification procedure specified in RA3.2.2, the weigh -in 
charging procedure specified in RA3.2.3.1, or an approved alternative procedure as specified in 
RA1, to comply with the refrigerant charge verification requirement . HERS v Verification 
compliance for the refrigerant charge requirement shall be validation of the FID installation when 
the outdoor air temperature is warm enoug h for the installed FID to perform a valid refrigerant 
charge test according to the FID manufacturer specification. The HERS ECC-Rater verification shall 
consist of operating the air conditioner in cooling mode for at least 15 minutes and performing a 
visual inspection to verify the FID reports the system is operating within acceptable parameters, 
or otherwise reports a system fault.  If the FID reports that there is a system fault, the system 
does not comply with the refrigerant charge verification require ment. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
 
 
  
  
  
   
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
    
    
    
   
 
 
     
  
    
  
 
  
 RA3-30 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.4.3 Time Delay Relay Verification Procedure 
When a system rating specification includes a time delay relay, the installation of the time delay 
relay shall be verified. 
The procedure shall be: 
(a) Turn the thermostat down until the compressor and indoor fan are both running. 
(b) Turn the thermostat up so the compressor stops running. 
(c) Verify that the indoor fan continues to run for at least 30 seconds. 
RA3.4.4 HVAC System Verification Procedures 
This section defines procedures for field verification of installed HVAC systems. 
RA3.4.4.1 Rated Space Conditioning System Equipment Verification Procedure 
When installation of specific matched system equipment is necessary for compliance with 
requirements for higher than minimum values for system HSPF /HSPF2 , SEER /SEER2 , or EER/EER2 , 
the installed system equipment shall be verified according to the procedure specified in this 
section . The verification shall utilize certified rating data from the AHRI Directory of Certified 
Product Performance at http://www.ahridirectory.org http://www.ahridirectory.org or another 
directory of certified product performance ratings approved by the Energy Commission for 
determining compliance. 
The procedure shall consist of visual verification of installation of the following system equipment 
components and confirmation that the installed equipment is rated to achieve the required 
HSPF /HSPF2 , SEER /SEER2 or EER/EER2 rating: 
(a) The manufacturer name and the model number of the outdoor unit or package unit . 
(b) The manufacturer name and the model number of the inside coil if applicable . 
(c) The name of the product directory used to certify the system performance . 
(d) The certification number of the installed system if certification numbers for listed 
products are published by the product directory . 
(e) The HSPF /HSPF2 , SEER /SEER2 or EER/EER2 value published by the product directory . 
(f) The manufacturer name and the model of the furnace or air handler when a specific 
furnace or air handler is necessary to achieve the SEER /SEER2 , or EER/EER2 rating . 
(g) The specified metering device when a specific refrigerant metering device (such as a TXV 
or an EXV) is necessary to achieve the high efficiency rating. 
(h) When a system rating specification includes a time delay relay, the installation of the time 
delay relay shall be verified according to the procedure in Section 3.4.3. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
 
    
  
 
 
    
 
    
 
    
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-31 
RA3.4.4.2 Rated Heat Pump Capacity Verification Procedure 
When heat pump systems are installed, and verification of the installed heat pump system 
capacity is required, the installed heat pump equipment shall be verified according to the 
procedure specified in this section . The verification shall utilize certified rating data from the 
AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance at 
http://www.ahridirectory.org http://www.ahridirectory.org or another directory of certified 
product performance ratings approved by the Energy Commission for determining compliance 
(product directory) . 
The procedure shall consist of visual verification of the model numbers of the installed system 
equipment and confirmation that the installed equipment is rated to provide the required 
heating capacity : 
(a) Record the manufacturer name and the model number of the outdoor unit or package 
unit. 
(b) Record the manufacturer name and the model number of the inside coil if applicable . 
(c) Record the name of the product directory used to certify the system performance . 
(d) Record the certification number of the installed system if certification numbers for listed 
products are published by the product directory . 
(e) Record the system's rated heating capacity at 47 degrees F published by the product 
directory . 
(f) Record the system's rated heating capacity at 17 degrees F if the value is published by the 
product directory . 
If the installed system rated heating capacities at 47 degrees F and 17 degrees F are equal to or 
greater than the values specified on the Certificate of Compliance, the system complies. If the 
product directory does not publish capacity ratings at 17 degree s F, then compliance with 
capacity at 17 degree s F is not required. 
RA3.4.4.3 Variable Capacity Heat Pump Performance Compliance Option Eligibility 
Verification 
When a performance certificate of compliance indicates a space conditioning system requires 
verification of the variable capacity heat pump (VCHP) compliance option eligibility requirements, 
the installed VCHP system shall be field verified to confirm comp liance with the eligibility 
requirements as specified in this subsection RA3.4.4.3 . 
If field verification determines the VCHP does not comply with all eligibility requirements in this 
section, then the dwelling in which the VCHP is installed shall not be eligible to claim the VCHP 
performance compliance credit for that space conditioning system. 
Compliance with Section 150.0(m)11 (Duct System Sealing and Leakage Testing) is not required 
for systems that use this VCHP performance compliance option . However , there are 
requirements to verify that VCHP system indoor unit ducts are located entirely in conditioned 
space that are specified as eligibility requirements for this compliance option. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 RA3-32 2025 Residential Appendices 
Compliance with Section 150.0(m)13 is not required for systems that use this VCHP performance 
compliance option . However there are requirements for verification of minimum airflow rates for 
VCHP system indoor units that are specified as eligibility requirements for this compliance option. 
(a) Low -static system certification for ducted systems. The manufacturer of ducted indoor 
units shall certify to the Energy Commission that the system is a VCHP that meets the 
definition of a low -static system as defined in 10 CFR Parts 429 and 430, Docket No. EERE – 
2016 –BT–TP–0029, Federal Register Vol. 82, No . 3, January 5, 2017). The manufacturer's 
model number(s) shall be included in listings of certified -to-the-Energy Commission low -
static pressure VCHP systems which will be published on the Energy Comm ission's 
website . 
If the installed VCHP system has ducted indoor units, then verification of the Energy 
Commission listings of certified VCHP systems shall confirm the installed system is 
included in the Energy Commission listings of certified low static systems. 
If the VCHP model is not included in the Energy Commission listings of certified low static 
systems, then the system does not comply with the VCHP compliance option eligibility 
requirements. 
(b) Non -continuous default fan operation certification for ducted systems . The 
manufacturer may elect to certify to the Energy Commission that their ducted indoor unit 
+ outdoor unit combination does not operate the indoor unit fan continuously by default. 
This certification is required in order to receive credit for the non -continuous fan 
operation component of the VCHP compliance option credit. 
If the installed VCHP system has ducted indoor units, and the certificate of compliance 
indicates credit has been taken for non -continuous default fan operation, then visual 
inspection of the Energy Commission listings of certified VCHP systems shall confi rm the 
installed system is included in the Energy Commission listings and the certification 
indicates the system is a type with indoor units that do es not run the fan continuously 
during periods when there is no call for conditioning. 
If the model is not included in the Energy Commission listings of certified low static 
systems as a type with indoor units that do es not run the fan continuously during periods 
when there is no call for conditioning, then the system does not comply with the VCHP 
compliance option eligibility requirements. 
A revised certificate of compliance may be submitted to the enforcement agency that 
does not specify credit for non -continuous default fan operation. 
(c) Refrigerant charge verification . The installed system shall have refrigerant charge verified 
in accordance with applicable procedures in RA3.2, as specified in Standards Sections 
150.1(c)7A and 150.2(b)1Fii, or 150.2(b)1Fiii. 
If the system does not meet the refrigerant charge verification requirements, then the 
system does not comply with the VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
  
 
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-33 
(d) Low leakage ducts located entirely in conditioned space verification . Ducted indoor units 
shall be verified in accordance with the Verified Low Leakage Ducts in Conditioned Space 
procedure in Section RA3.1.4.3.8. 
If the system does not meet the RA3.1.4.3.8 requirements, then the system does not 
comply with the VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
(e) Ductless space conditioning system indoor units located entirely in conditioned space 
verification . Ductless systems shall be verified in accordance with the ductless space 
conditioning system indoor units located entirely in conditioned space procedure in 
RA3.1.4.1.8 to visually confirm ductless indoor units are located entirely in conditioned 
space. 
If the system is not considered to be entirely in conditioned space according to 
RA3.1.4.1.8 requirements, then the system does not comply with the VCHP compliance 
option eligibility requirements. 
(f) Space -Conditioning System Airflow Supply to All Habitable Spaces . Field verification 
according to the procedure in RA3.1.4.1.7 shall confirm that airflow is supplied to all 
habitable spaces in a dwelling that specifies use of the VCHP compliance option. 
If space conditioning system airflow is not supplied to all habitable spaces in the dwelling 
as determined by the procedure in RA3.1.4.1.7, then the system does not comply with the 
VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
(g) Wall mounted thermostat in zones > 150 ft2. Field verification according to the procedure 
in RA3.4.5 shall confirm that VCHP space conditioning zones in the dwelling that are 
greater than 150 ft2 are controlled by a permanently installed wall -mounted thermostat. 
If a zone area served by an indoor unit is greater than 150 ft2, and the indoor unit is not 
controlled by a permanently installed wall -mounted thermostat located in the zone 
served by the indoor unit as determined according to the procedure in RA3.4.5, then the 
system does not comply with the VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
(h) Non -continuous fan operation -field verification . If non -continuous indoor unit fan 
operation is specified for improved compliance credit for ducted VCHP systems in the 
CBECC -Res model, and thus the certificate of compliance indicates field verification of 
non-continuous indoor unit fan operation is req uired, then the system shall be field 
verified in accordance with the procedures in RA3.4.6 to confirm that the installed 
system's indoor unit + outdoor unit combination does not operate the fan continuo usly 
when the system thermostat is not calling for conditioning. 
If field verification according to RA3.4.6 determines the installed system's indoor unit + 
outdoor unit combination operates the fan continuously when the system thermostat is 
not calling for conditioning, then the system does not comply with the VCHP comp liance 
option eligibility requirements. 
A revised certificate of compliance may be submitted to the enforcement agency that 
does not specify credit for non -continuous default fan operation. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 RA3-34 2025 Residential Appendices 
(i) Minimum airflow rate verification . Each new ducted indoor unit shall have airflow 
verified in accordance with the procedures in RA3.3 to confirm the airflow at full capacity 
in cooling mode is equal to or greater than 350 cfm/ton of nominal cooling capacity. 300 
cfm/ton shall be verified for altered systems if required for compliance with the 
refrigerant charge verification procedure. 
For indoor units of single -split systems, the measured value for airflow in cfm shall be 
converted into cfm per ton by dividing the measured indoor unit airflow rate by the 
nominal tons of outdoor unit cooling capacity . 
For indoor units of multiple -split systems, the measured value for airflow in cfm shall be 
converted into cfm per ton by dividing the measured indoor unit airflow rate by the 
nominal tons of indoor unit cooling capacity . 
If the indoor unit does not meet or exceed the 350 cfm/ton minimum airflow rate 
required for new systems, or the 300 cfm/ton required for altered systems meeting the 
refrigerant charge minimum airflow rate, then the system does not comply with the VCHP 
com pliance option eligibility requirements. 
(j) Air filter sizing . Ducted low -static VCHP indoor units with any length of duct shall have the 
air filters for the return air inlets verified to confirm the air filter sizing conforms to the 
procedures in i or ii below as applicable. 
i. Nominal 2 -inch or greater depth air filters shall be sized by the system designer to 
accommodate a maximum allowable clean -filter pressure drop of 0.1 inch wc at the 
air filter's design airflow rate. Field verification of the system designers sizing 
methodology shall not be required for nominal 2 -inch or greater depth air filters, 
however verification that the installed 2 -inch or greater depth air filter is rated to 
meet a clean filter pressure drop of less than or equal to 0.1 inch wc at the air filter' s 
design airflow rate shall conform to the procedures in RA3.1.4.8. 
If any of the indoor unit's applicable nominal 2 -inch or greater depth air filters fails to 
meet the maximum 0.1 inch wc. clean filter pressure drop requirement as verified 
according to the procedure in RA3.1.4.8, then the system does not comply with the 
VCHP compliance option eligibility requirements. 
ii. Nominal one -inch minimum depth air filters shall be allowed if the filter face area is 
sized based on a maximum face velocity of 150 ft. per minute at the air filter design 
airflow rate according to the procedures in RA3.1.4.7. 
All of the indoor unit air filters that are required to be sized and verified according to a 
face velocity specification shall comply with this subsection ii. If any of the indoor 
unit's applicable nominal 1 -inch depth air filters has a face area less than the required 
face area determined according to the procedures in RA3.1.4.7, then the system does 
not comply with the VCHP compliance option eligibility requi rements. 
(k) Air filter maximum pressure drop . Ducted low -static VCHP indoor units with any length of 
duct shall have the air filters for the return air inlets verified according to the procedures 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-35 
in RA3.1.4.8 to confirm the air filter is rated to provide a clean filter pressure drop less 
than or equal to 0.1 inch wc., at an airflow rate greater than or equal to the air filter's 
design airflow rate. 
If verification of the indoor unit's air filters according to the procedures in RA3.1.4.8 
determines that one or more of the air filters does not provide clean filter pressure drop 
less than or equal to 0.1 inch wc., at an airflow rate greater than or equa l to the air filter's 
design airflow rate, then the system does not comply with the VCHP compliance option 
eligibility requirements. 
RA3.4.5 Verification of Wall -Mounted Thermostat 
When compliance requires verification that a wall -mounted thermostat has been installed to 
control a space conditioning system's indoor unit operation, the system's indoor unit 
thermostat(s) shall be verified according to the following procedures. If a sys tem has more than 
one indoor unit, then all of the system's indoor unit thermostats shall be verified according to 
this procedure. 
(a) If the conditioned floor area (ft2) of the zone served by an indoor unit is not a criterion for 
determining the compliance requirement for wall -mounted thermostats, then skip to 
subsection (b) below. 
Otherwise, if the conditioned floor area (ft2) of the zone served by an indoor unit is a 
criterion for determining the compliance requirements for wall -mounted thermostats in 
the zone, then record the value in square feet for conditioned floor area served by the 
indoor unit. 
i. If the zone area size (ft2) criterion indicates that a wall-mounted thermostat is not 
required for the zone, then the indoor unit complies , and no further thermostat 
verification is required for the zone served by the indoor unit. 
ii. If the zone area size (ft2) criterion indicates that a wall -mounted thermostat is 
required for the zone, then perform the remaining steps (b) and ( c). 
(b) If possible, locate the wall -mounted thermostat that controls the indoor unit, and verify 
whether or not the thermostat controls the indoor unit by setting the thermostat to a 
cooling setpoint that is less than the room temperature, or alternatively by setting the 
thermostat to a heating setpoint that is greater than the room temperature. 
If there is no wall -mounted thermostat installed in the zone that controls the indoor unit, 
then the indoor unit does not comply. 
If there is a wall -mounted thermostat installed that controls the indoor unit, but it is not 
located within the zone served by the indoor unit, then the indoor unit does not comply. 
(c) For a wall -mounted thermostat installed in the zone that controls the indoor unit located 
in step (b), by visual inspection determine if the thermostat is mounted permanently to 
the wall. Wall -mounted brackets or other means that facilitate non -permane nt 
attachment of handheld thermostats to the wall do not meet this requirement. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
   
  
  
  
 RA3-36 2025 Residential Appendices 
If the thermostat is not permanently mounted to the wall, then the indoor unit does not 
comply. 
RA3.4.6 Verification of Non -Continuous Indoor Unit Fan Operation 
When compliance requires field verification that an installed space conditioning system indoor 
unit does not operate the air distribution fan during periods when the space does not require 
heating or cooling, the system's indoor unit operation shall be fie ld verified according to the 
following procedures. If a system has more than one indoor unit, then all of the system's 
applicable indoor units shall be verified according to this procedure. 
(a) If possible, locate the manufacturer's indoor unit + outdoor unit combination in the 
Energy Commission listing of systems that have been certified by the manufacturer as 
systems that do not operate the air distribution fan during periods when the space does 
not require heating or cooling , which is located at: https://www.energy.ca.gov/rules -and-
regulations/building -energy -efficiency/manufacturer -certification -building -equipment . 
Record the result of the search for the system model(s). If the manufacturer's indoor unit 
+ outdoor unit combination is not included in the CEC listing, then the indoor unit does 
not comply. 
(b) Switch the system to heating mode. 
(c) Switch on the heating system by setting the thermostat to a setpoint that is greater than 
the room temperature. 
(d) Verify the thermostat activates the indoor unit airflow. 
(e) Switch off the heating system by setting the thermostat to a setpoint that is less than the 
room temperature. 
(f) Verify the indoor unit air circulation fan does not operate when the compressor is off, 
except for a fan overrun (fan off delay) of less than 10 minutes that may occur at the end 
of the compressor on cycle. 
(g) Switch the system to cooling mode. 
(h) Switch on the cooling system by setting the thermostat to a setpoint that is less than the 
room temperature. 
(i) Verify the thermostat activates the indoor unit airflow. 
(j) Switch off the cooling system by setting the thermostat to a setpoint that is greater than 
the room temperature. 
(k) Verify the indoor unit air circulation fan does not operate the indoor fan when the 
compressor is off, except for a fan overrun (fan off delay) of less than 10 minutes that may 
occur at the end of the compressor on cycle. 
If the system does not operate the indoor unit air distribution fan(s) during periods when the 
spaces served by the system do not require heating or cooling to meet the thermostat setpoint, 
then the system complies. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
      
   
 
  
    
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
   
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-37 
RA3.5 Quality Insulation Installation Procedures 
RA3.5.1 Purpose and Scope 
RA3.5 is a procedure for verifying the quality of insulation installation and air leakage control 
used in low -rise residential buildings.  This procedure is to be followed by the insulation installer 
and a n qualified Home Energy Rating System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance for 
meeting the requirements of Sections 150.1(c) , or 170.2(a)6 , and 110.7of the Standards.  
The procedure applies to wood and metal construction of framed and non -framed envelope 
assemblies.  Framed assemblies include wall stud cavities, roof/ceiling assemblies, and floors 
typically insulated with: (1) batts of mineral fiber and mineral wool; (2) loose -fill materials of 
mineral fiber, mineral wool, and cellulose; (3) spray polyurethane foam; and , (4) rigid board 
sheathing materials.  Non -framed assemblies include wall, roof/ceiling, and floors constructed of 
structural insulated panels and insula ted concrete forms. 
Note 1:  For newly constructed buildings, t his procedure applies to the entire thermal envelope 
of the building.  In many instances, residential homes will use several types of insulation material, 
even in the same framed assembly.  Each insulation material and the integrity of air leakage 
control for the building's entire thermal envelope must be verified by the HERS ECC-rater for the 
home to comply with the Standards. 
Note 2:  Structural bracing, tie -downs, and framing of steel or specialized framing used to meet 
structural requirements of the California Building Code (CBC) are allowed.  These areas shall be 
called out on the building plans with diagrams and/or specific design drawings indicating the R -
value amount and fastening method to be used.  All structural framing areas shall be insulated in 
a manner that resists thermal bridging from the outside to the inside of the assembly separating 
conditioned from unconditio ned space.  The insulation and air barrier integrity shall be verified 
by the HERS ECC-rater. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
  
 
 
   
   
    
 
  
 
 
    
   
 
  
 
   
 RA3-38 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.2 Definitions 
Term Definitions 
Continuous Air Barrier A combination of interconnected materials and assemblies joined and sealed together to provide a continuous barrier to 
air leakage through the building envelope separating conditioned from unconditioned space, or adjoining conditioned 
spaces of different o ccupancies or uses.  An air barrier is required in all thermal envelope assemblies to limit air 
movement between unconditioned/outside spaces and conditioned/inside spaces and must meet one of the following: 
1. Using individual materials that have an air permeance not exceeding 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 
in. w.g. (1.57 psf) (0.02 L/s.m2 at 75 pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178; or 
2. Using assemblies of materials and components that have an average air leakage not to exceed 0.04 cfm/ft2 under a 
pressure differential of 0.3 in. w.g (1.57 psf) (0.2 L/s.m2 at 75 pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357, ASTM 
E1677, ASTM E1680 or ASTM E283; or 
3. Testing the completed building and demonstrating that the air leakage rate of the building envelope does not exceed 
0.40 cfm/ft2 at a pressure differential of 0.3 in w.g. (1.57 psf) (2.0 L/s.m2 at 75 pa) in accordance with ASTM E779 or an 
equivalent approved method. 
Individual materials and assemblies of materials that can demonstrate compliance with the air barrier testing 
requirements must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions and a HERS ECC-rater shall verify the 
integrity of the installation.  Below are example materials meeting the air permeance testing performance levels of 1 
above.  Manufacturers of these and other product types must provide a specification or product data sheet showing 
compliance to the ASTM testing requirements to be consid ered as an air barrier. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
   
  
    
   
    
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
    
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-39 
Term 
Continuous Air Barrier 
(Continued) 
Air-tight 
Compression Definitions 
Plywood – minimum 3/8 inch 
Oriented strand board – minimum 3/8 inches 
Extruded polystyrene insulation board – minimum ½1/2 inch 
Foil-back polyisocyanurate insulation board – minimum ½1/2 inch 
Extruded polystyrene insulation board – minimum ½1/2 inch 
Foil backed urethane foam insulation (1 inch) 
Closed cell spray polyurethane foam with a minimum density of 2.0 pcf  and a minimum thickness of 2.0 inches 
Open cell spray polyurethane foam with a minimum density of 0.4 to1.5 pcf and a minimum  thickness of 5½ inches 
Exterior or interior gypsum board -minimum 1/2 inch 
Cement board -minimum 1/2 inch 
Built up roofing membrane 
Modified bituminous roof membrane 
Particleboard -– minimum 1/2 inch 
Fully adhered single -ply roof membrane 
Portland cement/sand parge, or gypsum plaster minimum 5/8 inch 
Cast -in-place and precast concrete 
Fully grouted uninsulated and insulated concrete block masonry 
Sheet steel or aluminum 
Limiting the passage of air either in or out of the building envelope. 
Note:  Thermal envelope assemblies (such as wall assemblies) shall be built to minimize air movement.  Air movement 
brings unconditioned air and moisture through or into the assembly.  For these procedures, air -tight shall be defined as 
an assembly or air barrier with all openings caulked, or sealed with minimally expansive foam, or taping/sealing of 
adjoining surfaces of air barrier materials and assemblies. 
The improper placement of insulation in an assembly that results in an installation less than the product's nominal 
thickness . Batt insulation should be “lofted” and loose -fill and spray foam material properly field applied to the 
manufacturer ’s specified density to achieve its full R -value. Limited compression is allowed at plumbing, vents, and other 
obstructions and in cavities of non -standard framing. Compression of insulation in these situations is limited to no more 
than 30% of its' nominal thicknes s. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 RA3-40 2025 Residential Appendices 
Term 
Delaminated 
Draft Stops 
Friction Fit 
Gaps 
Hard Covers 
Inset Stapling Definitions 
Separation of the insulation's full thickness to facilitate it 's installation around or between obstructions.  Batt and blanket 
insulation are often split or delaminated to fit around electrical wires and plumbing runs through a wall cavity to prevent 
voids, or compression of the insulation . The delamination must ensure that the full thickness of the insulation is installed 
between the obstruction and the finish material covering the framing.  For example, an electrical wire located one -third 
of the distance from the front of the cavity sho uld have batt insulation delaminated so that two -thirds of the batt is 
installed towards the outside wall surface and one -third is installed towards the inside wall surface from the wire. 
A material, device or construction installed to prevent the movement of air within open spaces of concealed areas of 
building components, such as crawl spaces, floor/ceiling assemblies, wall assemblies, roof/ceiling assemblies and attics. 
Note:  Draft stops are important components of the air barrier and shall be air -tight. Fire blocks constructed of porous 
insulation materials cannot serve as draft stops since they are not air tight. 
A means of installing insulation within the framed cavity without the use of mechanical fasteners such that the material's 
full thickness in all directions is sufficient to keep the material in its intended position . In standard framing dimensions of 
2x4 and 2x6 @ 16" oc and 24" oc batt and blanket insulation materials have enough side -to-side frictional force to hold 
the insulation in place without any other means of attachment. 
Note:  Friction fitting of faced batt and blanket insulation, with or without an attachment flange, is allowed provided the 
insulation's installation integrity can be maintained. 
Uninsulated areas at the edge of insulation where insulation is not in contact with framing members or other materials at 
the edge of the insulation.  Gaps occur when insulation length and width is too short for the cavity. Gaps in insulation are 
avoidable and are not permitted. 
Building materials, such as plywood or gypboard, which become part of the ceiling air barrier. 
Note:  Hard covers shall be installed above areas where there is a drop ceiling.  For example, a home with 10 ft ceilings 
may have an entry closet with a ceiling lowered to 8 ft.  In this case, a hard cover is installed at the 10 ft level above the 
entry closet.  Hard covers become part of the ceiling air barrier and shall be air -tight. 
A method of attaching faced batt or blanket insulation to wood framing , where the flange of the insulation facing is 
pushed inside the face of the framing member and stapled . This method causes a void between the insulation and the air 
barrier. In windy areas installers often staple the flanges of faced batts to the sides of the stud to assure that the 
insulation remains in place until covered with drywall, particularly on the wall between the house and the garage where 
there isn't any exterior sheathing to help keep the insulation in place. The void created by the flange inset shall not 
extend more than two inches from the stud on each side. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
  
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-41 
Term 
Insulation Types --Framed 
Assemblies Definitions 
There are four basic types of insulation, or insulation "systems", installed in residential buildings and their use varies 
based on the design and type of construction: 
1. Batt and Blanket : Batt and blanket insulation is made of mineral fiber and mineral wool --either processed fiberglass, 
rock , or slag wool --and is used to insulate below floors, above ceilings, below roofs, and within walls. 
2. Loose -fill: Loose -fill insulation includes loose fibers or fiber pellets that are blown into building cavities or attics using 
special equipment.  Loose -fill insulations typically are produced using mineral fiber, mineral wool, or cellulose.  They are 
installed in walls, floors, attics and below roofs using a dry -pack process or a moist -spray technique , and may include a 
netting material. 
3. Rigid Board : Rigid board insulation sheathing is made from fiberglass, expanded polystyrene (EPS), extruded 
polystyrene (XPS), polyisocyanurate (PIR) , or polyurethane (PUR) . This type of insulation is used for above roof decks, 
exterior walls, cathedral ceilings, basement walls, as perimeter insulation at concrete slab edges, and to insulate special 
framing situations such as window and door headers, and around metal seismi c bracing.  Rigid board insulation may also 
be integral to exterior siding mate rials. 
4. Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF) : A two -part liquid foamed plastic (such as polyurethane or modified urethane) 
material formed by the reaction of an isocyanurate and a polyol that uses a blowing agent to develop a cellular structure 
when spray applied onto a substrate.  SPF insulation is a two -compon ent reactive system mixed at a spray gun or a single -
component system that cures by exposure to humidity.  The liquid is sprayed through a nozzle into wall, roof/ceiling, and 
floor cavities. SPF insulation can be formulated to have specific physical proper ties (i.e., density, compressive strength, 
fire resistance and R -value).  There are two types of SPF insulation: 
a. Low Density Open -Cell SPF (ocSPF) Insulation :  A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having an open cellular 
structure resulting in an installed nominal density of 0.4 to 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 
b. Medium Density Closed -Cell SPF (ccSPF) Insulation : A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having a closed 
cellular structure resulting in an installed nominal density of greater than 1.5 to less than 2.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
       
  
  
 
  
 
 
   RA3-42 2025 Residential Appendices 
Term 
Insulation Types --Non-
framed Assemblies 
Minimally Expansive 
Foam Sealing Material 
Net Free -Area 
Non -Standard Framing 
Voids & Air Spaces Definitions 
There are two basic types of insulation used and their use varies based on the design and type of construction: 
1. Structural Insulated Panel (SIP): A composite building material consisting of an insulating layer of rigid polymer foam 
sandwiched between two layers of structural board.  The board can be sheet metal, plywood, cement , or oriented strand 
board (OSB) and the foam is either expanded polystyrene foam (EPS), extruded polystyrene foam (XPS) or polyurethane 
(PUR) foam.  SIPs combine several components of conventional building, such as studs and joists, insulation, vapor barrier 
and air barrier.  They can be used for many different applications, such as exterior walls, roofs, floors, and foundation 
systems. 
2. Insulated Concrete Form (ICF):  A system of formwork for concrete that stays in place as permanent building 
insulation and is used for cast -in-place, reinforced above and below -grade concrete walls, floors, and roofs.  ICFs are 
interlocking modular units that can be dry -stacked (without mortar) and filled with concrete as a single concrete masonry 
unit (CMU).  ICFs lock together externally and have internal metal or plastic ties to hold the outer layer(s) of insulation t o 
create a concrete form for the structural walls, roof/ceilings, or floors of a building.  ICFs are manufactured from several 
materials including:  expanded and extruded polystyrene foam, polyurethane foam, cement -bonded wood fiber, and 
cement -bonded polystyrene beads.  
A single -component polyurethane foam system typically formulated in a handheld can or portable container to seal and 
fill construction gaps and crevasses crevices , holes, and cracks without distorting adjacent framing.  These materials are 
not used for insulation purposes, rather as agents for air sealing of gaps and crevasses crevices that are too small to be 
insulated. 
The net free -area of a vent cover is equal to the total vent opening less the interference to airflow caused by a screen or 
louver used for ventilation.  Screened or louvered vent opening covers are typically marked by the manufacturer with the 
"net free -area."  For example , a 22.5 in. by 3.5 in. eave vent screen with a total area of 78.75 square inches may have a 
net free -area of only 45 square inches. 
Standard framing consists of installation of framing members spaced at regular intervals (16" or 24" on center), where 
batt insulation products can be installed to the full dimensional width of the cavity between framing members. Non -
Standard framing may include multiple framing members, framing members at unusual spacing, additional blocking 
within c avity, structural columns or beams, or metal structural connections that alter the cavity depth or width. 
An uninsulated space within an enclosed building assembly created where the assembly has been insulated by partial 
filling of the framed cavity.  The partial fill results in an air space (void) between the insulation surface and the assembl y’s 
exterior or interior layers which form the assembly’s air barrier. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
    
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-43 
RA3.5.3 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of batt and blanket insulation.  These procedures must be field 
verified before the building construction permit is finalized. 
These procedures are to be followed by the insulation installer and a n qualified Home Energy 
Rating System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance to meet the requirements of 
Sections 150.1(c) 1E or 170.2(a)6 , and 110.7 of the Standards.  
RA3.5.3.1 Thermal Specification 
This insulation type is manufactured in different widths, lengths, and thicknesses and is available 
with or without a facing.  Faced batts and blanket insulation material are also available with or 
without an attachment flange.  Specific product R -values a re readily available from the 
manufacturer for the specific materials being installed and the R -value of the product is marked 
on the face of the product (faced or unfaced material).  The installed insulation must meet the R -
value stated on the compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.3.1.1 Requirements for Walls, Roof/Ceilings and Floors 
(a) Materials shall comply with, and be installed in conformance with, all applicable building 
codes for building. California Building Code (including, but not limited to, California Electric 
Code Section 719) and installed to meet all applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer Guide 
and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread rating and smoke density requirements of Chapter 
26 and Section 706 of the Title 24, Part 2:  all installations with exposed facings must use fire 
retardant facings which have been tested and certified not to exceed a flame spread index 
(FSI) of 25 and a smoke development index (SDI) of 450. Insulation facings that do not touch a 
ceiling, wall, or floor surface, and faced batts on the undersides of roofs with an air space 
between the ceiling and facing are considered exposed applications. 
(d) Materials shall be installed according to manufacturer specifications and instructions. 
(e) Batt and blanket insulation shall be correctly sized to fit snugly at the sides and ends. 
(f) Batt and blanket insulation shall be installed so that they will be in contact with the air 
barrier. 
(g) Where necessary, batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to fit properly -there shall be no 
gaps, nor shall the insulation be doubled -over or compressed. 
(h) When batt and blanket insulation are cut to fit a non -standard cavity, they shall be snuggly 
fitted to fill the cavity without compression. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
  
 
   
  
   
 
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
   
  
   RA3-44 2025 Residential Appendices 
(i) Batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to butt -fit around wiring and plumbing, or be split 
(delaminated) so that one layer can fit behind the wiring or plumbing, and one layer fit in 
front. 
RA3.5.3.1.2 R-value Measurement Equipment 
The ECC-HERS rater shall verify the installed thickness of insulation in all assemblies and locations 
on walls, roof/ceilings, and floors, and to ensure that insulation levels and installation integrity 
meet the R -value specified on the Certificate of Compliance, and a ll other required compliance 
documentation. 
RA3.5.3.1.3 Certificates 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. All Insulation Certificate s of Installation 
signed by the insulation installer shall be provided stating the installation is consistent with the 
Certificate of Compliance, plans and specifications for which the building permit was issued.  The 
insulation installer shall complete all applicable sections of the Certificate of Installation form and 
attach a product specification or data sheet for every insulation material used. 
RA3.5.3.1.4 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificate of Installation, 
with insulation material labels or specification/data sheets attached, signed by the insulation 
installer, shall be available on the building site for eac h of the HERS ECC-rater '’s verification 
inspections.  Note: The HERS ECC-rater cannot verify compliance credit without these completed 
forms. 
RA3.5.3.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) Wall stud cavities shall be caulked , foamed , or otherwise sealed to provide a substantially air -
tight envelope to the outdoors, attic, garage and crawl space.  All plumbing and wiring 
penetrations through the top and bottom plates and electrical boxes that penetrate the 
sheathing shall be sealed. All gaps in the air ba rrier shall be caulked, taped, or sealed with 
minimally expansive foam. 
(b) Bottom plates of framed and non -framed assemblies shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or 
slab, and above ground subfloor. 
(c) Insulation shall uniformly fill the cavity side -to-side, top -to-bottom, and front -to-back. 
(d) Batt insulation shall fill the cavity by friction fitting, inset or face stapling of flanges of faced 
batts, or by other support methods as necessary. 
(e) Batt and blanket insulation shall be installed to fill the cavity and be in contact with the 
sheathing on the back and the wallboard on the front -– no gaps or voids. 
Exception to RA3.5.3.2 (e): Batt insulation with flanges that are inset stapled to the side of the 
stud , the surface of the batt facing the occupied space must be flush with the face of the 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
   
  
   
 
 
     
  
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-45 
cavity (or protrude beyond) except for the portion s of the batt that are less than two inches 
from the side of the stud. 
(f) When batt and blanket insulation are cut to fit a non -standard framing, they shall be snuggly 
fitted to fill the cavity with limited compression. 
(g) Batt insulation shall be cut to butt -fit around wiring and plumbing, or be split (delaminated) 
so that one layer can be fit behind the wiring or plumbing, and one layer fit in front. The 
layers must be proportional to the obstruct i’on's position in the cavity to avoid compression 
and voids. 
RA3.5.3.2.1 Narrow -Framed Cavities 
(a) Non -standard width cavities shall be filled with insulation to snuggly fit into the space, or with 
minimally expansive foam sealing material. 
(b) Narrow spaces less than 1 inch in width at windows and door jambs, shall be filled with 
minimally expansive foam sealing. In cases where the manufactu r’er's warranty would be 
void if minimally expansive foam is used to seal the gap between the window frame or door 
jamb, the cavity must be airtight and batt insulation cut to width and snuggly fitted (with 
limited compression) in the space. 
(c) Narrow spaces less than 2 inches in width, such as between studs at building corners, and at 
the intersection of interior partition walls to exterior walls, shall be filled with insulation 
snuggly fitted in the space, or with minimally expansive foam seali ng. 
RA3.5.3.2.2 Special Situati on–s--Installation Prior to Exterior Sheathing or Lath 
(a) Hard to access wall stud cavities, such as corner channels, wall intersections, and behind 
tub/shower enclosures shall be insulated to the proper R -value. In most cases this can only be 
completed prior to the installation of the tub/shower enclosure, the e xterior sheathing, or 
the exterior stucco lath. 
(b) An air barrier shall be installed on the inside of the exterior wall(s) directly adjacent to the 
tub/shower enclosure. 
RA3.5.3.2.3 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) Insulation shall be delaminated or cut to fit around wiring , plumbing, vents, and other 
obstructions with limited compression. Compression of insulation in these situations is 
limited to ≤ 30% of its nominal thickness. 
(b) Insulation shall be placed between the sheathing and the rear of electrical boxes and other 
obstructions that are not as deep as the cavity (i.e. , communications boxes, medicine 
cabinets) . 
(c) In cold climate s, where water pipes may freeze (such as Climate Zones 2, 11-14 and 16) pipes 
shall have at lea st ½1/2 of the insulation between the water pipe and towards the outside 
surface of the exterior wall. As much insulation as possible shall be placed between the pipe 
and the outside (without compression), and remaining insulation shall be placed between the 
pipe and the interior assembly material. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
  
    
   
 
   
   
   
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 RA3-46 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.3.2.4 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps, voids, or compression. 
RA3.5.3.2.5 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps or compression. 
(c) Steel-framed kneewalls and skylight shafts, external surfaces of steel studs shall meet or 
exceed the mandatory minimum insulation requirements and be covered with continuous 
insulation unless otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance using correct U -factors 
from Joint Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive 
Director). 
(d) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
(e) The house side of the insulation shall be in contact with the drywall or other wall finish. 
(f) The insulation shall be supported so that it will not fall down by either friction fitting to the 
framing, inset or face stapling of flanges, or using other support such as netting. 
(g) Insulation for all kneewall and skylight shafts shall be completely enclosed by vertical and 
horizontal framing, including horizontal plates at top and bottom of the insulation. 
RA3.5.3.2.6 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment, which require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance . 
RA3.5.3.2.7 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or, an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.3.2.8 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
    
  
 
   
 
 
  
  
    
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-47 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that minimizes heat loss/gain due to thermal bridging 
through the structural framing assembly. 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing that separate conditioned from unconditioned space. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.3.2.9 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
(a) All single -member window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 for a 2x4 
framing, or equivalent width, and a minimum of R -5 for all other assemblies.  Insulation is to 
be placed between the interior face of the header and inside surface of the interior wall 
finish. 
(b) No header insulation is required for single -member headers that are the same width as the 
wall, provided that the entire wall has at least R -2 insulation. 
RA3.5.3.2.10 Special Situations --Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attics, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from the exterior or unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall 
construction as specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.3.3 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) Batt and blanket insulation shall be correctly sized to fit snugly at the sides and ends. 
(b) Batt and blanket insulation shall be installed to be in contact with the air barrier. 
(c) Where necessary, batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to fit proper l–y -there shall be no 
gaps, nor shall the insulation be doubled -over or compressed. 
(d) When batt and blanket insulation are cut to fit a non -standard cavity, they shall be snuggly 
fitted to fill the cavity with limited compression. 
(e) Batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to butt -fit around wiring and plumbing, or be split 
(delaminated) so that one layer can fit behind the wiring or plumbing, and one layer fit in 
front. 
(f) Batt and blanket insulation t hat is thicker than the framing depth shall be installed so that the 
insulation expands to touch adjacent insulation over each framing member. 
(g) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement. If hard covers or draft stops are missing or 
incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is insta lled. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 RA3-48 2025 Residential Appendices 
(h) Baffles shall be placed at eaves or soffit vents of vented attics to keep insulation from 
blocking eave ventilation and prevent air movement under the insulation.  The required net -
free -ventilation shall be maintained. 
(i) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
@ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the 
light's housing and the ceiling. 
(j) Insulation shall cover all recessed lighting fixtures.  Fixtures that are not rated for insulation 
contact (IC), and air -tight, shall be removed and/or replaced . 
(k) Facings and insulation shall be kept away from combustion appliance flues in accordance with 
flue manufacturer's installation instructions or labels on the flue. 
RA3.5.3.3.1 Special Situations --Enclosed Rafter Ceilings 
(a) In vented rafter ceilings, a n air space shall be maintained between the insulation and roof 
sheathing as specified by California Building Code, Sections 1203.2 and R806. 3, or as specified 
by the local building department. 
(b) Insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an 
attic below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air 
barrier shall be uniform across the transition of roof to wall. The insulat ion shall be in contact 
with the air barrier. 
RA3.5.3.3.2 RESERVED 
RA3.5.3.3.3 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
(a) Batt and blanket insulation shall be placed below all platform s or cat -walk s used for HVAC 
equipment installation and access. 
(b) Batt and blanket insulation shall be installed so that they will be in contact with the air 
barrier. 
(c) Batt and blanket insulation shall be installed under HVAC platform to the full depth and rated 
R-value as specified on the Certificate of Compliance, without gaps or compression. If 
necessary, HVAC platform shall be raised to accommodate ceiling insulation . 
RA3.5.3.3.4 Special Situations --Attic Access 
Permanently attach rigid board insulation or batt or blanket insulation with the appropriate R -
value to the access door using adhesive or mechanical fastener.  The bottom of the attic access 
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage of conditioned air to th e unconditioned attic. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
   
    
  
 
 
  
   
    
 
 
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-49 
RA3.5.3.3.5 Special Situations --Below Roof Deck Insulation (Vented and Unvented 
Attics) 
(a) Below roof deck insulation consisting of batts that nominally fill the cavity space between 
roof framing members shall be stapled, or supported with cabling, tension rods, or other 
support measures which maintain the batt uniformly against the roof deck wi th limited 
compression. Batts with facing directed to the attic space shall be face stapled. Inset stapling 
of underside batts is not allowed. Batts supported with cabling, tensions rods, or other 
methods supporting the batt from below shall be supported a t intervals less than or equal to 
16", and no further than 8" from the end of the batt. Batts that are directly stapled through 
the insulation material to the roof deck should maintain the batt uniformly against the roof 
deck with limited compression. 
(b) When the batt thickness nominally exceeds the depth of the roof framing members, full -
width batts must be used , and the batt shall be secured as described in (a). Full depth 
insulation coverage at the bottom of the roof framing member is not required as part of the 
QII inspection process. 
(c) For vented attics, below deck batt or blanket insulation shall be installed in a manner that 
does not obstruct eave, ridge, or eyebrow vents to allow for adequate attic ventilation. The 
required net free ventilation area of all eave and roof vents shall be mai ntained. Eave vent 
baffles shall be installed to prevent air movement under or into the batt. 
RA3.5.3.3.6 RESERVED 
RA3.5.3.4 Raised Floors 
(a) Batt and blanket insulation shall be correctly sized to fit snugly at the sides and ends. 
(b) Batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to fit properly without gaps. Insulation shall not be 
doubled -over or compressed. 
(c) Batt and blanket insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
RA3.5.3.4.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
(a) Batt and blanket insulation shall be correctly sized to fit snugly at the sides and ends, but not 
be so large as to buckle. 
(b) Batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to fit properly without gaps. Insulation shall not be 
doubled -over or compressed. 
(c) Batt and blanket insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
(d) On floors that are over garages, or where there is an air space between the insulation and the 
subfloor, the rim joist shall be insulated. 
(e) Batt and blanket insulation shall be cut to butt -fit around wiring and plumbing, or be split 
(delaminated) so that one layer can fit behind the wiring or plumbing, and one layer fit in 
front. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
   RA3-50 2025 Residential Appendices 
(f) Faced batts or blankets shall be placed toward the living space and be in contact with the 
underside of the floor sheathing.  Continuous support shall be provided to keep the facing in 
contact with the floor sheathing.  The insulation shall be properly sup ported by stapling of 
flanges, netting or other method approved by the manufacturer for the product. 
(g) Batt and blanket insulation shall be properly supported to avoid gaps, voids, and 
compression. 
RA3.5.3.4.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated to create a 
continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists adjoining conditioned space shall be air tight 
and insulated. 
Figure RA3.5 -1 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage – Batt and Blanket Insulation 
RA3.5.3.4.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
Figure RA3.5 -2 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage – Batt and Blanket Insulation 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-51 
RA3.5.4 LOOSE FILL INSULATION 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of loose -fill insulation.  These procedures must be field verified before 
the building construction permit is finalized. 
These procedures are to be followed by the insulation installer and a n qualified Home Energy 
System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify conformance to meet the requirements of Sections 
150.1(c) 1E or 170.2(a)6, and 110.7 of the Standards.  
RA3.5.4.1 Thermal Specification 
This insulation type is manufactured to be blown or sprayed into framed cavity walls, floors, and 
ceilings.  It is installed with or without a net depending on the loose -fill type or in special 
installations where netting is required, such as below a roof deck or under floors.  Its overall R -
value is dependent on the installed density and installed thickness.  Specific product R -values are 
readily available from the manufacturer for the specific materials being installed.  R -value and 
coverage chart of the product is typically marked on the bag which the insulation was drawn 
from and from the manufacturer's product data sheet or product specification information.  The 
installed insulation must meet the R -value stated on the compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.4.1.1 Requirements for Walls, Roof/Ceilings and Floors 
(a) Materials shall comply with, and be installed in conformance with, all applicable building 
codes for building. California Building Code (including, but not limited to, California Electric 
Code Section 719) and installed to meet all applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer Guide 
and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread rating and smoke density requirements of Chapter 
26 and Section 706 of the Title 24, Part 2:  all installations with exposed facings must use fire 
retardant facings which have been tested and certified not to exceed a flame spread index 
(FSI) of 25 and a smoke development index (SDI) of 450. Insulation facings that do not touch a 
ceiling, wall, or floor surface, and faced batts on the undersides of roofs with an air space 
between the ceiling and facing are considered exposed applications. 
(d) Materials shall be installed according to manufacturer specifications and instructions. 
(e) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers or draft stops are missing 
or incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is inst alled. 
(f) Required eave ventilation shall not be obstructed -the net free -ventilation area of the eave 
vent shall be maintained. 
(g) Eave vent baffles shall be installed to prevent air movement under or into the batt. 
(h) Insulation shall cover all recessed lighting fixtures.  If the fixtures are not rated for insulation 
contact (IC) and air tight, the fixtures shall be replaced. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
    
 
  
  
 
      RA3-52 2025 Residential Appendices 
(i) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
@ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the 
light's housing and the ceiling. 
(j) Loose -fill insulation shall be must completely fill the framed cavity. 
(k) Loose -fill insulation shall be installed so that they will be in contact with the air barrier. 
RA3.5.4.1.2 R-value Measurement Equipment 
The HERS ECC-rater shall measure the installed thickness and density of insulation in at least 6 
random locations on walls, roof/ceilings , and floors (i.e., 6 measurements per opaque surface 
type:  wall, roof/ceiling , or floor) to ensure minimum thickness levels and the installed density 
meets the R -value specified on the Certificate of Compliance, and all other required compliance 
documentation.  For walls, measurement areas shall include low and high areas of the ins ulated 
assembly and the HERS ECC-rater shall verify density measurements are consistent with the 
manufacturer's coverage chart. 
RA3.5.4.1.3 Certificates 
(a) All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met.  All Insulation Certificates of 
Installation signed by the insulation installer shall be provided stating the installation is 
consistent with the Certificate of Compliance, plans and specifications f or which the building 
permit was issued.  The insulation installer shall complete all applicable sections of the 
Certificate of Installation form and attach a bag label or a manufacturer's coverage chart for 
every different type of loose -fill insulation ma terial used. 
(b) For loose -fill insulation, compliance information shall include the minimum installed weight -
per-square -foot (or the minimum weight per cubic foot) consistent with the manufacturer's 
labeled installed -design -density for the desired R -value, and the number of inches required to 
achieve the desired R -value. 
RA3.5.4.1.4 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificate of Installation, 
with insulation material bag labels or coverage charts attached, signed by the insulation installer, 
shall be available on the building site for each of t he HERS ECC-rater's verification inspections. 
Note: The HERS ECC-rater cannot verify compliance credit without these completed forms. 
RA3.5.4.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) Wall stud cavities shall be caulked, foamed , or otherwise sealed to provide a substantially air -
tight envelope to the outdoors, attic, garage and crawl space. Special attention shall be paid 
to plumbing and wiring penetrations through the top plates, electrical boxes that penetrate 
the sheathing, an d the sheathing seal to the bottom plate.  All gaps in the air barrier shall be 
caulked , or sealed with expansive , or minimally expansive , foam. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
   
   
 
   
 
  
  
   
   
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-53 
(b) Bottom plates of framed and non -framed assemblies shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or 
slab, and above ground subfloor. 
(c) Insulation shall uniformly fill the cavity side -to-side, top -to-bottom, and front -to-back. 
(d) Loose fill insulation shall be installed to fill the cavity and be in contact with the sheathing on 
the back and the wallboard on the front -no gaps or voids. 
(e) Loose fill wall insulation shall be installed to fit around wiring, plumbing, and other 
obstructions. 
(f) Non -standard -width cavities shall be filled with insulation fitted into the space without 
excessive compression. 
(g) The installer shall certify on the Certificate of Installation forms that the manufacturer's 
minimum weight -per-square -foot requirement has been met. 
RA3.5.4.2.1 Narrow -Framed Cavities 
(a) Non -standard width cavities shall be filled with insulation to snuggly fit into the space, or with 
minimally expansive foam sealing material. 
(b) Narrow spaces less than 1 inch in width at windows and door jambs, shall be filled with 
minimally expansive foam sealing. In cases where the manufacturer's warranty would be void 
if minimally expanding foam is used to seal the gap between the window frame or door jamb, 
the cavity must be airtight and filled with insulation snuggly fitted (with limited compression) 
in the space. 
(c) Narrow spaces less than 2 inches in width, such as between studs at building corners, and at 
the intersection of interior partition walls to exterior walls, shall be filled with insulation 
snuggly fitted in the space, or with minimally expansive foam seali ng. 
RA3.5.4.2.2 Special Situations --Installation Prior to Exterior Sheathing or Lath 
(a) Hard to access wall stud cavities, such as ; corner channels, wall intersections, and behind 
tub/shower enclosures shall be insulated to the proper R -value.  In most cases this can only 
be completed prior to the installation of the tub/shower enclosure, the exterior sheathing, or 
the exterior stucco lath. 
(b) An air barrier shall be installed on the inside of the exterior wall(s) directly adjacent to the 
tub/shower enclosure. 
RA3.5.4.2.3 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) Insulation shall completely fill around wiring and plumbing without compression. 
(b) Insulation shall fill between the sheathing and the rear of electrical boxes and phone boxes. 
(c) In cold climates, where water pipes may freeze (such as Climate Zones 2, 11 -14 and 16) pipes 
shall have at least 1/2 of the insulation between the water pipe and towards the outside 
surface of the exterior wall. As much insulation as possible shall be plac ed between the pipe 
and the outside (without compression), and remaining insulation shall be placed between the 
pipe and the interior assembly material. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
   
 
  
  
  
 
 
 RA3-54 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.4.2.4 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps, voids, or excessive compression. 
RA3.5.4.2.5 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps or compression. 
(c) Steel -framed kneewalls and skylight shafts, shall meet or exceed the mandatory minimum 
insulation requirements and external surfaces of steel studs shall be covered with continuous 
insulation unless otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance usin g correct U -factors 
from Joint Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive 
Director). 
(d) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
(e) The house side of the insulation shall be in contact with the drywall or other wall finish. 
(f) The insulation shall be supported so that it will not fall down by using support such as netting. 
(g) Insulation for all kneewall and skylight shafts shall be completely enclosed by vertical and 
horizontal framing, including horizontal plates at top and bottom of the insulation. 
RA3.5.4.2.6 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment, which require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance. 
RA3.5.4.2.7 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or , an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.4.2.8 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that restricts thermal bridging through the structural 
framing assembly. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-55 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing that separate conditioned from unconditioned space. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.4.2.9 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
(a) All single -member window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 for a 2x4 
framing, or equivalent width, and a minimum of R -5 for all other assemblies.  Insulation is to 
be placed between the interior face of the header and inside surface o f the interior wall 
finish. 
(b) No header insulation is required for single -member headers that are the same width as the 
wall, provided that the entire wall has at least R -2 insulation. 
RA3.5.4.2.10 Special Situations --Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attics, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from unconditioned space shall be 
insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall construction as 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.4.2.11 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers or draft stops are missing 
or incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is inst alled or the entire drop area 
shall be filled with loose -fill insulation level with the rest of the attic. 
(b) Baffles shall be placed at eaves or soffit vents of vented attics to keep insulation from 
blocking eave ventilation and prevent air movement under or into the insulation.  The 
required net -free -ventilation shall be maintained. 
(c) Attic rulers appropriate to the material shall be installed and evenly distributed throughout 
the attic to verify depth:  one ruler for every 250 square feet and clearly readable from the 
attic access.  Attic rulers shall be scaled to read inches of insula tion and the R -value installed. 
(d) Insulation shall be applied underneath and on both sides of obstructions such as cross -bracing 
and wiring. 
(e) Insulation shall be applied all the way to the outer edge of the wall top plate. 
(f) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
@ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the 
light's housing and the ceiling. 
(g) Insulation shall cover recessed lighting fixtures.  Fixtures that are not rated for insulation 
contact (IC), and air tight, shall be removed and/or replaced. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  RA3-56 2025 Residential Appendices 
(h) Insulation shall be kept away from combustion appliance flues in accordance with flue 
manufacturer's installation instructions or labels on the flue. 
(i) Insulation shall be blown to a uniform thickness throughout the attic with all areas meeting or 
exceeding the insulation manufacturer's minimum requirements for depth and weight -per-
square -foot. 
(j) The installer shall certify on the Certificate of Installation forms that the manufacturer's 
minimum weight -per-square -foot requirement has been met. 
(k) The HERS ECC-rater shall verify that the manufacturer's minimum weight -per-square -foot 
requirement has been met for attics insulated with loose -fill insulation.  Verification shall be 
determined using the methods of the Insulation Contractor’s Association of America (I CAA) 
Technical Bulletin #17 or #33 except that only one sample shall be taken in the area that 
appears to have the least amount of insulation. The rater shall record the weight -per-square -
foot of the sample on the Certificate of Verification. 
(l) The HERS ECC-rater shall verify that the manufacturer’s minimum insulation thickness has 
been installed.  For cellulose insulation, this verification shall take into account the time that 
has elapsed since the insulation was installed.  At the time of installation, the insulation shall 
be greater than or equal to the manufacturer’s minimum initial insulation thickness.  If the 
HERS ECC-rater does not verify the insulation thickness at the time of installation, and if the 
insulation has been in place less th an fourteen days, the insulation thickness shall be greater 
than the manufacturer’s minimum required thickness to achieve the given R -value at the time 
of installation, less 1/2 inch to account for settling.  If the insulation has been in place for 
fourtee n days or more, the insulation thickness shall be greater than or equal to the 
manufacturer’s minimum required settled thickness to achieve the given R -value. 
RA3.5.4.2.12 Special Situations --Enclosed Rafter Ceilings 
(a) An air space shall be maintained between the insulation and roof sheathing as specified by 
California Building Code Sections 1203.2 and R806.2, or as specified by the local building 
department. 
(b) Insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an 
attic below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air 
barrier shall be uniform across the transition of roof to wall. The ins ulation shall be in contact 
with the air barrier. 
RA3.5.4.2.13 RESERVED 
RA3.5.4.2.14 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
(a) Loose -fill insulation shall be placed below any platform or cat -walk for HVAC equipment 
installation and access. 
(b) Loose -fill insulation shall be installed so that it will be in contact with the air barrier. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-57 
(c) Loose -fill insulation shall be installed under HVAC platform to the full depth and rated R -value 
as specified on the Certificate of Compliance, without gaps or compression. If necessary, 
HVAC platform shall be raised to accommodate ceiling insulation. 
RA3.5.4.2.15 Special Situations --Attic Access 
Permanently attach rigid board insulation or batt or blanket insulation with the appropriate R -
value to the access door using adhesive or mechanical fastener.  The bottom of the attic access 
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage of conditioned air to th e unconditioned attic. 
RA3.5.4.2.16 Special Situations --Below Roof Deck Insulation (Vented and Unvented 
Attics) 
(a) Below roof deck loose -fill insulation shall be netted and installed per manufacturer's 
specifications. 
(b) For vented attics, below deck loose -fill insulation shall be installed in a manner that does not 
obstruct soffit, eave, ridge , or eyebrow vents to allow for adequate attic ventilation. Netting 
shall be installed in a manner that allows for the required net free area of soffit, eave, gable, 
and roof vents to be maintained after being filled. Eave vent baffles shall be installed to 
prevent air movement under or into the insulation. 
(c) Netting shall be installed to seal around conduit, plumbing, roof penetrations and all other 
obstructions that penetrate the netting. 
(d) Loose -fill insulation shall be installed uniformly in the netted cavity side -to-side, top -to-
bottom, and front -to-back and be in continuous contact with the roof sheathing. Loose -fill 
insulation shall be installed to fit around wiring, conduit, plumbing, and other obstructions. 
(e) The installer shall certify on the Certificate of Installation compliance documents that the 
manufacturer's minimum weight -per-square -foot requirement has been met. 
(f) The HERS ECC-Rater shall verify that the manufacturer's minimum insulation thickness and 
specified R -value has been installed. 
(g) The HERS ECC-Rater shall verify the minimum weight -per-square -foot requirement has been 
met. Verification shall be determined using manufacturer's recommended verification 
procedures. The HERS ECC-Rater shall record the weight -per-square -foot of the sample on 
the Certificate of Verification. 
(h) Box netted installations are where netting is suspended from the top of roofing framing 
member, or top chord, to provide a fill depth that completely encloses the top chord, creating 
a uniform insulation layer of loose -fill insulation across the entire und erside of the roof deck. 
For these installations, netted insulation cavity thickness shall be uniform and meet the 
minimum insulation thickness. 
(i) For draped netted installations, where netting is attached directly to the bottom of the roof 
framing member, the HERS ECC-Rater shall verify that average insulation depth in the cavity 
meets the depth as specified by the Certificate of Compliance. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
   
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 RA3-58 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.4.3 Raised Floors 
(a) Loose -fill insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
(b) Loose -fill insulation shall completely fill around wiring and plumbing. 
(c) Loose -fill insulation shall be properly supported where necessary to avoid sagging, gaps, 
voids, and compression. 
RA3.5.4.3.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
(a) Loose -fill insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
(b) On floors that are over garages, or where there is an air space between the insulation and the 
subfloor, the rim joist shall be insulated. 
(c) Loose -fill insulation shall completely fill around wiring and plumbing. 
(d) Loose -fill insulation shall be properly supported to avoid sagging, gaps, voids, and 
compression. 
RA3.5.4.3.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated with fully 
supported loose -fill insulation to create a continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists 
adjoining conditioned space shall be air tight and insulated. 
Puct + 
Figure RA3.5 -3 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage – Loose Fill Insulation 
RA3.5.4.3.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
   
   
   
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-59 
Figure RA3.5 -4 Homes with No Conditioned Space over Garage – Loose Fill Insulation 
RA3.5.5 RIGID BOARD INSULATION 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of rigid board insulation sheathing material.  These procedures must 
be field verified before the building construction permit is finalized. 
These procedures are to be followed by the insulation installer and a n qualified Home Energy 
Rating System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance for meeting the requirements of 
Sections 150.1(c) 1E or 170.2(a)6, and 110.7 of the Standards. 
RA3.5.5.1 Thermal Specification 
This insulation type is manufactured of different materials and is in sheet or board form.  Rigid 
board insulation materials are typically used on the exterior side of framed wall assemblies and 
over the top of exterior roof decks.  These products also may be used for special situations in 
rafter spaces of cathedral ceilings, floors, at floor rim joists, and within or on the outside of 
window and door headers.  This insulation type may also be integral to exterior siding materials.  
Rigid board insulation m aterial most often is used in conjunction with other insulation materials 
installed within the framed cavity.  The R -value is dependent on the type of material and its 
thickness.  Specific product R -values are readily available from the manufacturer for th e specific 
materials being installed.  R -value of the product is typically marked on the product.  The installed 
insulation must meet the R -value stated on the compliance documentation. 
(a) Requirements for Walls, Ceilings and Floors Materials shall comply with, and be installed in 
conformance with, all applicable building codes for building. California Building Code 
(including, but not limited to, California Electric Code Section 719) and in stalled to meet all 
applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer 
Guide and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread rating and smoke density requirements of 
Chapter 26 and Section 706 of the Title 24, Part 2: all installations with exposed facings 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  RA3-60 2025 Residential Appendices 
must use fire retardant facings which have been tested and certified not to exceed a flame 
spread index (FSI) of 25 and a smoke development index (SDI) of 450. Insulation facings 
that do not touch a ceiling, wall, or floor surface, and faced batts on the u ndersides of 
roofs with an air space between the ceiling and facing are considered exposed 
applications. 
(d) Materials shall be installed according to manufacturer specifications and instructions. 
(e) Rigid board insulation shall be attached according to the manufacturer's specifications. 
(f) Rigid board insulation may be used as the air barrier provided it has been tested to 
conform to the air barrier performance conditions of the Standards. 
RA3.5.5.1.1 R-value Measurement Equipment 
The HERS ECC-raters shall verify the installed thickness of insulation in all assemblies and 
locations on walls, roof/ceilings, and floors, and to ensure that insulation levels and installation 
integrity meet the R -value specified on the Certificate of Compliance, and all other required 
compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.5.1.2 Certificates 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met.  All Insulation Certificates of Installation 
signed by the insulation installer shall be provided stating the installation is consistent with the 
Certificate of Compliance, plans and specifications f or which the building permit was issued.  The 
insulation installer shall also complete the applicable sections of the Certificate of Installation 
form and attach a product specification or data sheet for every insulation material used. 
RA3.5.5.1.3 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificate of Installation, 
with insulation material labels or specification/data sheets attached, signed by the insulation 
installer, shall be available on the building site for eac h of the HERS ECC-rater's verification 
inspections.  Note: The HERS ECC-rater cannot verify compliance credit without these completed 
forms. 
RA3.5.5.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) Wall stud cavities shall be caulked, foamed , or otherwise sealed to provide a substantially air -
tight envelope to the outdoors, attic, garage and crawl space.  All plumbing and wiring 
penetrations through the top and bottom plates and electrical boxes that penetrate the 
sheathing shall be sealed. A ll gaps in the air barrier shall be caulked , or sealed with minimally 
expansive foam. 
(b) Bottom plates of framed and non -framed assemblies shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or 
slab, and above ground subfloor. 
(c) Installation shall uniformly fit across the plane of the wall and taping and/or caulking of all 
joints and seams of the insulation shall be maintained to be considered as the air barrier.  
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
  
 
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-61 
RA3.5.5.2.1 Narrow -Framed Cavities 
(a) Non -standard with cavities shall be filled with insulation to snuggly fit into the space, or with 
minimally expansive foam sealing material. 
(b) Narrow spaces less than 1 inch in width at windows and door jambs, shall be filled with 
minimally expansive foam sealing material. In cases where the manufacturer's warranty 
would be void if minimally expanding foam is used to seal the gap between the wind ow frame 
or door jamb, the cavity must be airtight and filled with insulation snuggly fitted in the space. 
(c) Narrow spaces less than 2 inches in width, such as between studs at building corners, and at 
the intersection of interior partition walls to exterior walls, shall be filled with insulation 
snuggly fitted in the space, or with minimally expansive foam seali ng. 
RA3.5.5.2.2 Special Situations --Installation Prior to Exterior Sheathing or Lath 
(a) Hard to access wall stud cavities, such as corner channels, wall intersections, and behind 
tub/shower enclosures shall be insulated to the proper R -value.  In most cases this can only 
be completed prior to the installation of the tub/shower enclosure, the exterior sheathing, or 
the exterior stucco lath. 
(b) An air barrier shall be installed on the inside of the exterior wall(s) directly adjacent to the 
tub/shower enclosure. 
RA3.5.5.2.3 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) Penetrations and obstructions to the insulation shall be completely caulked and sealed. 
(b) Insulation shall fill between the sheathing and the rear of electrical boxes and phone boxes. 
RA3.5.5.2.4 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps and voids. 
RA3.5.5.2.5 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) Steel -framed kneewalls and skylight shafts shall meet or exceed the mandatory minimum 
insulation requirements and external surfaces of steel studs shall be covered with continuous 
insulation unless otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance using correct U -factors 
from Joint Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive 
Director). 
(c) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
 
 
  
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  RA3-62 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.5.2.6 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment, which require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance. 
RA3.5.5.2.7 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or , an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.5.2.8 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that restricts thermal bridging through the structural 
framing assembly. 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing that separate conditioned from unconditioned space. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.5.2.9 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
(a) All single -member window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 for a 2x4 
framing, or equivalent width, and a minimum of R -5 for all other assemblies.  Insulation is to 
be placed between the interior face of the header and inside surface o f the interior wall finish 
wall material. 
(b) No header insulation is required for single -member headers that are the same width as the 
wall, provided that the entire wall has at least R -2 insulation. 
RA3.5.5.2.10 Special Situation --Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attics, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from unconditioned space shall be 
insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall construction as 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
   
  
    2025 Residential Appendices RA3-63 
RA3.5.5.3 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) Baffles shall be placed at eaves or soffit vents of vented attics to keep insulation from 
blocking eave ventilation and prevent air movement under the insulation.  The required net -
free -ventilation shall be maintained. 
(b) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers or draft stops are missing 
or incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is inst alled. 
(c) Rigid board insulation installed above the roof deck shall be applied to the outer edge of the 
plane of the wall top plate. 
(d) Insulation shall cover all recessed lighting fixtures. If the fixtures are not rated for insulation 
contact (IC) and air tight, the fixtures shall be removed and/or replaced. 
(e) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with air leakage less than 2.0 
cfm @ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a ga sket or caulk between 
the light's housing and the ceiling. 
RA3.5.5.3.1 Special Situations --Enclosed Rafter Ceilings 
(a) An air space shall be maintained between the insulation and roof sheathing as specified by 
California Building Code Section 1203.2 and R806.2, or as specified by the local building 
department. 
(b) Insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an 
attic below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air 
barrier shall be uniform across the transition of roof to wall. The insulat ion shall be in contact 
with the air barrier. 
RA3.5.5.3.2 RESERVED 
RA3.5.5.3.3 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
Insulation shall be placed below any platform or cat -walk for HVAC equipment installation and 
access. 
RA3.5.5.3.4 Special Situations --Attic Access 
Permanently attach rigid board insulation or batt or blanket insulation with the appropriate R -
value to the access door using adhesive or mechanical fastener.  The bottom of the attic access 
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage of conditioned air to th e unconditioned attic. 
RA3.5.5.4 Raised Floors 
Rigid board insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
RA3.5.5.4.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
(a) Rigid board insulation shall be in contact with the air barrier -usually the subfloor. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   RA3-64 2025 Residential Appendices 
(b) On floors that are over garages, or where there is an air space between the insulation and the 
subfloor, the rim joist shall be insulated. 
RA3.5.5.4.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated with fully 
supported rigid board insulation to create a continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists 
adjoining conditioned space shall be air tight and insulated. 
RA3.5.5.4.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
RA3.5.6 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of spray polyurethane foam (SPF) insulation.  These procedures must 
be field verified before the building construction permit i s finalized. 
These procedures are to be followed by the insulation installer and a n qualified Home Energy 
Rating System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance for meeting the requirements of 
Sections 150.1(c) and 110.7of the Standards.  
These procedures apply to two types of SPF used as building insulation: medium -density closed 
cell SPF (ccSPF) and low -density open cell SPF (ocSPF).  Most often, the same procedures will 
apply to both ccSPF and ocSPF.  However, in some construction situations the procedures will be 
different. 
NOTE: SPF insulation shall be field verified using these procedures whenever R -values other than 
the default R -value per inch are used for compliance (see "R-value" in sections RA3.5.6.1.1 and 
RA3.5.6.1.2 below).  
RA3.5.6.1 Thermal Specification 
RA3.5.6.1.1 ccSPF 
A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having a closed cellular structure resulting in an 
installed nominal density of 1.5 to less than 2.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 
R-value: The total R -value shall be calculated based on the nominal required thickness of the 
insulation multiplied by a thermal resistivity of 5.8 per inch.  The R -value of ccSPF insulation shall 
meet or exceed the installed thickness specified in Table 3.5-1 below. 
Alternatively, the total R -value may be calculated based on the thickness of insulation multiplied 
by the "tested R -value per inch " as certified by the Department of Consumer Affairs , Bureau of 
Household Goods and Services . Supporting documentation showing the certified R -value per inch 
shall be made available at the site for verification and noted on the Certificate of Installation. 
Based on this calculation, the overall assembly U -factor shall be determined by selecting the 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-65 
assembly type, framing configuration, and cavity insulation from the appropriate Reference Joint 
Appendix JA4 table or other approved method specified in Section JA4 of the Reference 
Appendices.  
The R -value of the installed insulation shall be based on the verified thickness at an R -value of 5.8 
per inch unless supporting documentation is provided that verifies use of other values.  Approved 
compliance software shall make appropriate adjustments to account for th e R-value and U -factor 
effects of the ccSPF assembly.   
Nominal Thickness:  ccSPF sprayed into framed cavities or on flat surfaces will expand with 
variable thicknesses, visibly appearing as undulations on the surface of the insulation.  The 
average thickness of the foam insulation must meet or exceed the requi red R -value. Depressions 
in the foam insulation’s surface shall not be greater than 1/2 -inch of the required thickness at any 
given point of the surface area being insulated. 
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ccSPF insulation is not required to fill the cavities of framed 
assemblies provided the installed thickness of insulation conforms to compliance documentation 
and that the bottom and top plates of vertical framing and both en ds of horizontal framing, 
including band and rim joists, are sprayed to completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact 
with the framing to a distance of 2.0 inches away from the framing for ccSPF insulation, or filled 
to the thickness meeting ASTM t esting as an air barrier.  
Air Barrier:  ccSPF installed as an air barrier shall be a minimum of 2.0 inches in thickness; 
alternatively, ccSPF insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no 
greater than 0.02 L/s -m2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance to ASTM E2178 
or ASTM E283.     
RA3.5.6.1.2 Open Cell Spray Foam (ocSPF) 
A spray applied polyurethane foam insulation having an open cellular structure resulting in an 
installed nominal density of 0.4 to less than 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 
R-value: The total R -value shall be calculated based on the nominal required thickness of the 
insulation multiplied by a thermal resistivity of 3.6 per inch.  The R -value of ocSPF insulation shall 
meet or exceed the installed thickness specified in Table 3.5-1 below. 
Alternatively, the total R -value may be calculated based on the thickness of insulation multiplied 
by the "tested R -value per inch" as certified by the Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of 
Household Goods and Services . Supporting documentation showing the certified R -value per inch 
shall be made available at the site for verification and noted on the Certificate of Installation . 
Based on this calculation, the overall assembly U -factor shall be determined by selecting the 
assembly that matches the asse mbly type, framing configuration, and cavity insulation from the 
appropriate Reference Joint Appendix JA4 table or other approved method specified in Section 
JA4 of the Reference Appendices.  
The R -value of the installed insulation shall be based on the verified thickness at an R -value of 3.6 
per inch unle ss supporting documentation is provided that verifies use of other values.  Approved 
compliance software shall make appropriate adjustments to account for the R -value and U -factor 
effects of the ocSPF assembly.   
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
          
          
          
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
     
 
 
    RA3-66 2025 Residential Appendices 
Nominal Thickness:  ocSPF sprayed into framed cavities or on flat surfaces will expand with 
variable thicknesses, visibly appearing as undulations on the surface of the insulation.  The 
average thickness of the foam insulation must meet or exceed the required R -value. Depressions 
in the foam insulation surface shall not be greater than 1/2 -inch of the required thickness 
provided these depressions do not exceed 10% of the surface area being insulated. 
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ocSPF insulation shall completely fill cavities of 2x4 inch framing or 
less.  Cavities greater than 2x4 inch framing dimensions may be filled to the thickness that meets 
the required R -value used for compliance provided that the bottom and top plates of vertical 
framing and both ends of horizontal framing, including band and rim joists, are sprayed to 
completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact with the framing to a distance of 5.5 inches 
away from the framing for oc SPF insulation, or filled to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an 
air barrier.  
Air Barrier:  ocSPF installed as an air barrier shall be a minimum of 5.5 inches in thickness; 
alternatively, ocSPF insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no 
greater than 0.02 L/s -m2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance to ASTM E2178 
or ASTM E283. 
Table RA3.5 -1: Required Thickness (inches) of SPF Insulation to Achieve Specified R -values 
Equivalent R -Values for SPF 
insulation 11 13 15 19 21 22 25 30 38 
Required thickness of ccSPF 
insulation @ R5.8/inch 2.00 2.25 2.75 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.50 5.25 6.75 
Required thickness of ocSPF 
insulation @ R3.6/inch 3.0 3.5 4.2 5.3 5.8 6.1 6.9 8.3 10.6 
RA3.5.6.1.3 Requirements for Walls, Ceilings and Floors 
(a) Materials shall comply with, and be installed in conformance with, all applicable building 
codes for building. California Building Code (including, but not limited to, California Electric 
Code Section 719) and installed to meet all applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer Guide 
and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread index and smoke developed index requirements of 
the CBC, Title 24, Part 2, Section 2603.5.4. 
(d) The installer shall determine , and the HERS ECC-rater shall verify , that the manufacturer’s 
nominal insulation thickness has been installed and certified and that all requirements of the 
Certificate of Verification have been met. 
(e) The installer shall determine , and the HERS ECC-rater shall verify , that insulation is in 
substantial contact with the assembly air barrier.  When SPF insulation is being used to 
provide air barrier control, the SPF insulation must cover and be in contact with the entire 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
   
  
  
   
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-67 
surface of the framing, filling the cavity to a distance away from the framing specified in 
"Filling of Framed Assemblies" above. 
(f) SPF insulation shall be applied by SPF applicators trained and experienced in the use and 
maintenance of high -pressure, plural -component equipment. SPF applicators shall be 
certified by the SPF insulation manufacturer for the application of SPF insulation systems. 
(g) SPF insulation shall be spray -applied to fully adhere to assembly framing, floor and ceiling the 
joists, and other framing surfaces within the construction cavity.  When multiple layers of SPF 
material are applied, each foam lift (i.e. , spray application) shall have adhesion at substrate 
and foam interfaces.  SPF insulation shall not exhibit areas that: 
1. Have voids or gaps in the uniformity of the insulation  
2. Are extremely soft or spongy 
3. Show the presence of liquid 
4. Have blistering between lifts 
5. Show differences in coloration of adjacent foam layers 
6. Indicate the presence of other materials between lifts 
(h) SPF insulation shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s specifications, 
recommendations , and temperature/humidity limitations. 
(i) Substrates to which SPF insulation is applied shall be secure and free of surface moisture, 
frost, grease, oils, dirt, dust , or other contaminants that would adversely affect SPF adhesion. 
(j) SPF insulation shall meet all provisions of the CBC Title 24, Parts 2 and 2.5.  SPF shall be 
separated from occupied spaces by an approved thermal barrier, such as 0.5 inch gypsum 
wallboard or other approved material, or show equivalence through testing in accordance 
with CBC, Title 24, Part 2, Section 2603, and Part 2.5, Section R316. 
(k) SPF insulation may be used as the air barrier provided it has been tested to conform to the air 
barrier performance conditions of the Standards. 
RA3.5.6.1.4 R-value Measurement Equipment 
(a) The HERS ECC-rater shall measure the installed thickness of insulation in at least 6 random 
locations on walls, roof/ceilings , and floors (i.e., 6 measurements per opaque surface type:  
wall, roof/ceiling , or floor) to ensure minimum thickness levels necessary to meet the R -value 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
Measurement areas shall include low and high areas of the SPF insulated surface. 
(b) Probes for inspection of installed thickness of SPF insulation.  The insulation thickness shall be 
verified by using a probe, gauge , or device capable of measuring the installed thickness of 
insulation. A pointed measurement probe or other gauge or device, capable of penetrating 
the full thickness of the insulation, shall be used having measurements marked by at least 
one-eighth inch increments.  Insulation thickness measurement probes and gauges or devic es 
shall be accurate to within ±1/8 inch and shall be designed and used in a manner to cause 
minimal damage to the insulation. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
  RA3-68 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.6.1.5 Certificates 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificates of Installation 
shall be signed by the SPF applicator stating that the installation is consistent with the Certificate 
of Compliance, plans and specifications for which t he building permit was issued shall be 
provided. The SPF applicator shall also make available supporting documentation showing the 
certified R -value per inch . 
RA3.5.6.1.6 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met.  All compliance documentation shall be 
completed, signed by the SPF applicator, and a measuring probe or similar device shall be 
available at the building site for the HERS -ECC-rater's verification inspection.  Note:  The HERS 
ECC-rater shall not verify compliance credit without these completed forms. 
RA3.5.6.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) SPF insulation shall be applied to provide an air -tight envelope to the outdoors and between 
adjoining cavity surfaces of conditioned and unconditioned space, such as the:  attic, garage, 
and crawl space.  Special attention shall be paid to plumbing and wi ring penetrations through 
the top plates and bottom plate framing, and electrical boxes that penetrate the sheathing 
and the sheathing seal to the top and bottom plate framing. 
(b) Bottom plates of framed and non -framed assemblies shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or 
slab, and above ground subfloor. 
(c) SPF insulation installation shall uniformly cover the cavity side -to-side and end -to-end and 
shall be installed to cover and form an air barrier on the framing at the top, bottom , and sides 
of each cavity. 
NOTE: 
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ccSPF insulation is not required to fill the cavities of framed 
assemblies provided the installed thickness of insulation conforms to compliance documentation 
and that the bottom and top plates of vertical framing and both ends of horizontal framing, 
including band and rim joists, are sprayed to completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact 
with the framing to a distance of 2.0 inches away from the framing for ocSPF insulation, or filled 
to the thickness meeting ASTM t esting as an air barrier.  
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ocSPF insulation shall completely fill cavities of 2x4 inch framing or 
less.  Cavities greater than 2x4 inch framing dimensions may be filled to the thickness that meets 
the required R -value used for compliance provided that the bottom and top plates of vertical 
framing and both ends of horizontal framing, including band and rim joists, are sprayed to 
completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact with the framing to a distance of 5.5 inches 
away from the framing for oc SPF insulation, or filled to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an 
air barrier.  
Air Barrier: ccSPF installed as an air barrier shall be 2.0 inches in thickness.  ocSPF installed as an 
air barrier shall be a minimum of 5.5 inches in thickness.  Alternatively, ccSPF and ocSPF 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
   2025 Residential Appendices RA3-69 
insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no greater than 0.02 L/s -
m2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance to with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283.  
RA3.5.6.2.1 Narrow -Framed Cavities 
(a) Non -standard width cavities shall be filled with SPF insulation at a depth consistent with the 
SPF thickness required to achieve the specified R -value. 
(b) Narrow spaces less than 1 inch in width at windows and door jambs, shall be filled with 
minimally expansive foam sealing material or SPF insulation. In cases where the 
manufacturer's warranty would be void if minimally expanding foam is used to seal the ga p 
between the window frame or door jamb, the cavity must be airtight and filled with a 
different insulation product snuggly fitted (with limited compression) in the space. 
(c) Narrow spaces less than 2 inches in width, such as between studs at building corners and at 
the intersection of interior partition walls, shall be filled with insulation snuggly fitted into the 
space, with minimally expansive foam, or SPF insulation. 
RA3.5.6.2.2 Special Situations --Installation Prior to Exterior Sheathing or Lath 
(a) Hard to access wall stud cavities, such as corner channels, wall intersections, and behind 
tub/shower enclosures shall be insulated to the proper R -value.  In most cases, this can only 
be completed prior to the installation of the tub/shower enclosure, the exterior sheathing, or 
the exterior stucco lath. 
(b) An air barrier shall be installed on the inside of the exterior wall(s) directly adjacent to the 
tub/shower enclosure. 
RA3.5.6.2.3 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) SPF insulation shall be applied to fully seal around wiring and plumbing. 
(b) SPF insulation shall be applied to fully seal between the sheathing and the rear of electrical 
boxes and telephone boxes. 
(c) In cold climates, where water pipes may freeze (Climate Zones 14 and 16), pipes shall have at 
least 2/3 of the insulation between the water pipe and the outside surface of the exterior 
wall.  If the pipe is near the exterior finish assembly layers, as much insulation as possible 
shall be placed between the pipe and the exterior assembly material. 
RA3.5.6.2.4 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -Value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps or voids. 
RA3.5.6.2.5 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) Kneewalls within conditioned space do not need to be insulated. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
   
   
 
 
  
 
    
  
  
 RA3-70 2025 Residential Appendices 
(c) Steel -framed kneewalls and skylight shafts shall meet or exceed the mandatory minimum 
insulation requirements and external surfaces of steel studs shall be covered with continuous 
insulation unless otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance using correct U -factors 
from Joint Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive 
Director). 
(d) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
(e) The house side of the insulation shall be in contact with the drywall or other wall finish. 
(f) Insulation for all kneewall and skylight shafts shall be completely enclosed by vertical and 
horizontal framing, including horizontal plates at top and bottom of the insulation. 
(g) SPF insulation shall be installed without gaps. 
(h) SPF insulation shall be fully adhered and self -supporting so that it will remain in place. 
NOTE: 
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ccSPF insulation is not required to fill the cavities of framed 
assemblies provided the installed thickness of insulation conforms to compliance documentation 
and that the bottom and top plates of vertical framing and both ends of horizontal framing, 
including band and rim joists, are sprayed to completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact 
with the framing to a distance of 2.0 inches away from the framing for ocSPF insulation, or filled 
to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an air b arrier. 
Filling of Framed Assemblies: ocSPF insulation shall completely fill cavities of 2x4 inch framing or 
less.  Cavities greater than 2x4 inch framing dimensions may be filled to the thickness that meets 
the required R -value used for compliance provided that the bottom and top plates of vertical 
framing and both ends of horizontal framing, including band and rim joists, are sprayed to 
completely fill the cavity adjacent to and in contact with the framing to a distance of 5.5 inches 
away from the framing for oc SPF insulation, or filled to the thickness meeting ASTM testing as an 
air barrier.  
Air Barrier: ccSPF installed as an air barrier shall be 2.0 inches in thickness.  ocSPF installed as an 
air barrier shall be a minimum of 5.5 inches in thickness.  Alternatively, ccSPF and ocSPF 
insulation shall be installed at a thickness that meets an air permeance no greater than 0.02 L/s -
m2 at 75 Pa pressure differential when tested in accordance to with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283.  
RA3.5.6.2.6 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment that require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as the other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as specifi ed on the Certificate of 
Compliance. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
   
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
   
  
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-71 
RA3.5.6.2.7 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or , an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air tight. 
RA3.5.6.2.8 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that restricts thermal bridging through the structural 
framing assembly. 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing that separate conditioned from unconditioned space. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.6.2.9 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
(a) All single -member window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 for a 2x4 
framing, or equivalent width, and a minimum of R -5 for all other assemblies.  Insulation is to 
be placed between the interior face of the header and inside surface of th e interior wall 
finish. 
(b) No header insulation is required for single -member headers that are the same width as the 
wall, provided that the entire wall has at least R -2 insulation. 
RA3.5.6.2.10 Special Situations --Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attics, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from unconditioned space shall be 
insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall construction as 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.6.3 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) SPF insulation shall be applied to fully adhere to the substrate of the ceiling or roof deck. 
(b) SPF insulation shall be applied to fully adhere to the joist and other framing faces to form a 
complete air seal within the construction cavity. 
(c) SPF insulation shall be spray -applied to fully adhere to and seal around wiring and plumbing. 
(d) Hard covers shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities to keep 
insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers, they shall be in place before 
insulation is installed. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 RA3-72 2025 Residential Appendices 
(e) In vented attics, required eave ventilation shall not be obstructed; the net free -ventilation 
area of the eave vent shall be maintained. 
(f) In unvented attics where SPF is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, all gable 
end areas shall be insulated to the same R -value as the walls and as specified on compliance 
documentation.  It is not necessary to place hard covers over drop ce ilings and interior wall 
cavities in this situation. 
(g) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
@ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the 
light's housing and the ceiling. 
(h) SPF insulation shall not be applied directly to recessed luminaires unless the recessed 
luminaire is rated for SPF insulation contact ( SPCL ) appropriate for use with polyurethane 
spray foam in accordance with NEMA LE 7 -2015. Recessed light fixtures not rated for SPF 
insulation contact ( SPCL ) and insulated with SPF insulation shall be separated from the spray 
foam by a suitable barrier or box as directed in NEMA LSD 57 -2018. In a cathedral ceiling 
installation, where SPF is applied above the luminaire, but not encasing it with foam, the 
luminaire shall have a minimum ½1/2-inch air space between the two components. 
(i) SPF insulation shall be kept away from combustion appliance flues in accordance with flue 
manufacturers' installation instructions or labels on the flue for clearance. 
RA3.5.6.3.1 Special Situations --Enclosed Rafter Ceilings 
SPF insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an 
attic below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air barrier 
shall be uniform across the transition of roof to wall.  The ins ulation shall be in contact with the 
air barrier. 
RA3.5.6.3.2 Special Situations --Attics and Cathedral Ceilings 
In attics where entry is made for the service of utilities, SPF shall be protected from ignition in 
accordance with CBC, Part 2, Section 2603, and Part 2.5, Section R316. 
RA3.5.6.3.3 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
A minimum of 3 inches of ccSPF insulation or 5.3 inches of ocSPF shall be placed below any 
platform or cat -walk access ways installed in vented attics for HVAC equipment or other needs.  
The overall assembly R -value shall meet the required R -values specifi ed in the compliance 
documentation. 
RA3.5.6.3.4 Special Situations --Attic Access 
A minimum of 3 inches of ccSPF or 5.3 inches of ocSPF insulation shall be applied to the access 
door assuring good adhesion to the door surface.  Alternatively, permanently attach rigid foam or 
batt insulation with adhesive or mechanical fastener.  The ove rall assembly R -value shall meet 
the required values specified in the compliance documentation. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
   
   
  
   
   
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-73 
RA3.5.6.4 Raised Floors 
(a) SPF insulation shall be spray -applied to fully adhere to the bottom side of the floor sheathing. 
(b) SPF insulation shall uniformly cover the cavity side -to-side and end -to-end. 
RA3.5.6.4.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
(a) SPF insulation shall be spray -applied to fully adhere to the bottom side of the floor sheathing. 
(b) SPF insulation installation shall uniformly cover the cavity side -to-side and end -to-end. 
RA3.5.6.4.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated by spraying 
SPF insulation to create a continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists adjoining 
conditioned space shall be air tight and insulated. 
Figure RA3.5 -7 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage – Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation 
RA3.5.6.4.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
   
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
    
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 RA3-74 2025 Residential Appendices 
Figure RA3.5 -8 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage – Spray Polyurethane Foam 
Insulation 
RA3.5.7 STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANEL (SIP) 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) systems.  These procedures must be 
field verified before the building construction permit i s finalized. 
These procedures are to be followed by the SIP installer and a n qualified Home Energy Rating 
System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance for meeting the requirements of Sections 
150.1(c) and 110.7 of the Standards.  
RA3.5.7.1 Thermal Specification 
This insulation type is a composite building material manufactured with an internal insulating 
layer of rigid insulation of sheet or board material, or from cured spray polyurethane foam 
insulation material. The internal insulation is sandwiched between t wo layers of structural 
board, usually referred to as a "panel."  The result is "panelized" construction versus traditional 
framed construction.  SIPs combine several components of conventional building, such as studs 
and joists, insulation, vapor retarder and air barrier. They can be used for different applications, 
such as exterior walls, roofs, and floors.  Examples of common SIP sizes are panels ranging in 
length from 4x8 feet to 4x24 feet and having core thickness of 3 1/2 inches to 11 1/2 inches, 
depending on the manufacturer.  Panels are typically cut at the manufacturing facility to precisely 
fit the building's design characteristics.  Openings for windows and doors are cut into one or 
more panels, and often small chases are provided within the inte rnal insulation for electrical 
wiring and plumbing. 
SIPs can be used for the entire building envelope or for individual assemblies, such as for just 
walls or just floors.  In these situations, the SIP system will used in conjunction with other 
traditional insulation materials installed within cavities of fr amed assemblies.  The R -value of a 
SIP is dependent on the type of material used internally for insulation and the overall thickness of 
the panel.  Specific product R -values are readily available from the manufacturer and for the 
specific materials being i nstalled.  The R -value of the product is typically marked on the product. 
The installed insulation must meet the R -value stated on the compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.7.1.1 Requirements for Walls, Ceilings and Floors 
(a) Materials shall comply with, and be installed in conformance with, all applicable building 
codes for building. California Building Code (including, but not limited to, California Electric 
Code Section 719) and installed to meet all applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer Guide 
and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread rating and smoke density requirements of Chapter 
26 and Section 706 of the Title 24, Part 2:  all installations with exposed facings must use fire 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
  
  
 
 
  
   
  
    
  
  
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-75 
retardant facings which have been tested and certified not to exceed a flame spread index 
(FSI) of 25 and a smoke development index (SDI) of 450. Insulation facings that do not touch a 
ceiling, wall, or floor surface, and faced batts on the undersides of r oofs with an air space 
between the ceiling and facing are considered exposed applications. 
(d) Materials shall be installed according to manufacturer specifications and instructions. 
(e) SIP systems are considered an air barrier; however extension of the air barrier shall be made 
across all interconnections of panels, at window and door openings, and at all adjoining 
surfaces of different panel areas (i.e., where SIP walls adjoin the floor and roof/ceiling). 
RA3.5.7.1.2 R-value Measurement Equipment 
The HERS ECC-raters shall verify the installed thickness of insulation in all SIP panels and locations 
on walls, roof/ceilings, and floors, and to ensure that insulation levels and installation integrity 
meet the R -value specified on the Certificate of Compliance, and all other required compliance 
documentation. 
RA3.5.7.1.3 Certificates 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met.  An Insulation Certificate of Installation 
signed by the installer shall be provided that states the installation is consistent with the 
Certificate of Compliance, plans and specifications for which the building permit was issued. 
The SIP installer shall also complete the applicable sections of the Certificate of Installation form 
and attach a product specification or data sheet for every insulation material used. 
RA3.5.7.1.4 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificate of Installation, 
with insulation material labels or specification/data sheets attached, signed by the SIP installer, 
shall be available on the building site for each of th e HERS ECC-rater's verification inspections. 
Note: The HERS ECC-rater cannot verify compliance credit without these completed forms. 
RA3.5.7.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) Connections of wall panels shall be sealed, caulked, foamed, or taped (i.e., SIP tape) to 
provide a substantially air -tight envelope to the outdoors, attic, garage , and crawl space.  All 
plumbing and wiring penetrations through the top and bottom of panels, and electrical boxes 
that penetrate the SIP sheathing shall be sealed.  All gaps in the air barrier shall be caulked , or 
sealed with minimally expansive foam or taped (i.e., SIP tape). 
(b) Bottom connections of wall panels shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or slab, and above 
ground subfloor. 
(c) Insulation shall uniformly fit across the plane of the wall and taping (i.e., SIPs tape), caulking 
or sealing of all joints and seams of panel joints (i.e., spline connections) shall be maintained 
to be considered as the air barrier.  
RA3.5.7.2.1 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) Penetrations and obstructions to the SIP shall be completely caulked and sealed. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
  RA3-76 2025 Residential Appendices 
(b) Insulation shall fill between the sheathing and the rear of electrical boxes and phone boxes. 
RA3.5.7.2.2 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps and voids. 
RA3.5.7.2.3 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) Steel -framed kneewalls and skylight shafts, shall meet or exceed the mandatory minimum 
insulation requirements and external surfaces of steel studs shall be covered with insulation 
unless otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance using correct U -factors from Joint 
Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive Director). 
(c) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.7.2.4 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment, which require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as the other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as speci fied on the Certificate of 
Compliance. 
RA3.5.7.2.5 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or , an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air tight. 
RA3.5.7.2.6 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that restricts thermal bridging through the structural 
framing assembly. 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-77 
RA3.5.7.2.7 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
All single -member window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 for a 2x4 
framing, or equivalent width, and a minimum of R -5 for all other assemblies.  Insulation is to be 
placed between the exterior face of the header and inside surface o f the finish wall material. 
RA3.5.7.2.8 Special Situations —Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attic, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from unconditioned space shall be 
insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall construction as 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.7.3 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) Baffles shall be placed at eaves or soffit vents of vented attics to keep insulation from 
blocking eave ventilation and prevent air movement under the insulation.  The required net -
free -ventilation shall be maintained. 
(b) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers or draft stops are missing 
or incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is inst alled. 
(c) In traditional framed attics, required eave ventilation shall not be obstructed for conventional 
attics – the net free -ventilation area of the eave vent shall be maintained. Eave vent baffles 
shall be installed to prevent air movement under or into the cei ling insulation of conventional 
attics. 
(d) Insulation shall cover all recessed lighting fixtures. If the fixtures are not rated for zero 
clearance insulation contact (IC) and air tight, the fixture shall be removed and/or replaced. 
(e) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as air tight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
at 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with gasket or caulk between the 
light’s housing and the ceiling. 
RA3.5.7.3.1 Special Situations --Attics and Cathedral Ceilings 
Insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an attic 
below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air barrier shall be 
uniform across the transition of roof to wall.  The insulation shall be in contact with the air 
barrier. 
RA3.5.7.3.2 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
Insulation shall be placed below any platform or cat -walk for HVAC equipment installation and 
access, as specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
   
  
 
 RA3-78 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.5.7.3.3 Special Situations --Attic Access 
Permanently attach rigid board insulation, batt or blanket insulation, or SIP with the appropriate 
R-value to the access door using adhesive or mechanical fastener. The bottom of the attic access 
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage of conditioned air to the unconditioned attic. 
RA3.5.7.4 Raised Floors 
SIPs air barrier shall be maintained through use of SIP tape, or sealing and caulking between 
panels and at all spline joints. 
RA3.5.7.4.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
On floors that are over garages, the rim joist shall be insulated. 
RA3.5.7.4.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated to create a 
continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists adjoining conditioned space shall be air tight 
and insulated. 
Figure RA3.5 -9 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage – Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) 
RA3.5.7.4.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
   
 
    
   
 
   
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-79 
Figure RA3.5 -10 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage – Structural Insulated Panel (SIP) 
RA3.5.8 INSULATED CONCRETE FORM (ICF) 
These procedures detail the installation and inspection protocols necessary to qualify for Quality 
Insulation Installation (QII) of insulated concrete forms (ICFs).  These procedures must be field 
verified before the building construction permit is finaliz ed. 
These procedures are to be followed by the insulation installer and a n qualified Home Energy 
Rating System (HERS) ECC-rater must verify its conformance for meeting the requirements of 
Sections 150.1(c) and 110.7 of the Standards. 
RA3.5.8.1 Thermal Specification 
Conventional concrete and concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls, floors and roofs can be insulated 
on the inside, on the outside, or have insulation between two layers of concrete (i.e., sandwich 
panel walls/block walls).  ICFs are typically single forming mas onry blocks with insulation to 
improve the thermal resistance of the material.  ICFs are manufactured in conventional CMU 
dimensions of 6 inch, 8 inch, 10 inch, and larger widths. Insulated concrete forms (ICFs) typically 
have a layer of insulation locate d: (1) within the inner core of the concrete masonry unit; or, (2) 
on one or all sides surrounding an inner core of concrete.  
A similar type of insulated concrete form system is autoclaved aerated concrete (AAC) which has 
an air void matrix rather than sand and gravel commonly used in conventional concrete.  The 
density range of AAC is 30 to 50 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) compare d to conventional concrete 
used with ICFs with a density of approximately 80 to 140 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 
The R -value of ICFs is dependent on the type of insulation material used and its thickness. 
Insulation used within the inner core of ICFs can be: (1) poured -in-place vermiculite or perlite; (2) 
foamed -in-place spray polyurethane foam insulation material; or, (3) standard molded insulation 
inserts of rigid board insulation material.  Insulation used to make up one or more of the outer 
layers of the ICF is a rigid board insulation material.  Specific product R -values are readily 
available from the manufactur er for the specific materials being installed.  R -value of the product 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
   
 RA3-80 2025 Residential Appendices 
is typically marked on the product.  The installed insulation must meet the R -value stated on the 
compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.8.1.1 Requirements for Walls, Ceilings and Floors 
(a) Materials shall comply with, and be installed in conformance with, all applicable building 
codes for building. California Building Code (including, but not limited to, California Electric 
Code Section 719) and installed to meet all applicable fire codes. 
(b) Materials shall meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Material, Title 24, Part 12, 
Chapter 4, Article 3, listed in the California Department of Consumer Affairs Consumer Guide 
and Directory of Certified Insulating Materials. 
(c) Materials shall comply with flame spread rating and smoke density requirements of Chapter 
26 and Section 706 of the Title 24, Part 2:  all installations with exposed facings must use fire 
retardant facings which have been tested and certified not to exceed a flame spread index 
(FSI) of 25 and a smoke development index (SDI) of 450. Insulation facings that do not touch a 
ceiling, wall, or floor surface, and faced batts on the undersides of roofs with an air space 
between the ceiling and facing are considered exposed applications. 
(d) Materials shall be installed according to manufacturer specifications and instructions. 
(e) ICF systems are considered an air barrier; however , extension of the air barrier shall be made 
across all interconnections of window and door openings, and at all adjoining surfaces of 
exterior envelope assemblies of different materials (i.e., where ICF walls adjoin framed floors 
and roof/ceilings). 
RA3.5.8.1.2 R-value Measurement Equipment 
The HERS ECC-raters shall verify the installed type and thickness of insulation in the ICF system 
being used for walls, roof/ceilings, and floors, and to ensure that insulation levels and installation 
integrity meet the R -value specified on the Certificate of Complianc e, and all other required 
compliance documentation. 
RA3.5.8.1.3 Certificates 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met.  An Insulation Certificate of Installation 
signed by the installer shall be provided that states the installation is consistent with the 
Certificate of Compliance, plans and specifications for which the building permit was issued.  The 
ICF installer shall also complete the applicable sections of the Certificate of Installation form and 
attach a product specification or data sheet for every insulation material used. 
RA3.5.8.1.4 Certificates and Availability 
All provisions of Residential Appendix RA2 shall be met. The Insulation Certificate of Installation, 
with insulation material labels or specification/data sheets attached, signed by the ICF installer, 
shall be available on the building site for each of th e HERS ECC-rater's verification inspections. 
Note: The HERS ECC-rater cannot verify compliance credit without these completed forms. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
   
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-81 
RA3.5.8.2 Wall Insulation 
(a) Connections of ICF walls shall be grouted and sealed meeting manufacturer's specifications.  
All plumbing and wiring penetrations through the top and bottom of the ICF, and electrical 
boxes that penetrate the plane of the ICF shall be sealed.  All gaps between interconnecting 
envelope assemblies of different materials shall have air barrier caulked , or sealed with 
minimally expansive foam or taped. 
(b) Bottom connections of ICFs shall be sealed to the ground subfloor or slab, and above ground 
subfloor. 
(c) Insulation shall uniformly fit across the plane of the wall and taping, caulking , or sealing of all 
joints and seams of the ICF shall be maintained to be considered as the air barrier.  
RA3.5.8.2.1 Special Situations --Obstructions 
(a) Penetrations and obstructions to the ICF shall be completely caulked and sealed. 
(b) Insulation shall fill between the sheathing and the rear of electrical boxes and phone boxes. 
RA3.5.8.2.2 Special Situations --Rim Joists 
(a) All rim -joists shall be insulated to the same R -value as the adjacent walls. 
(b) The insulation shall be installed without gaps and voids. 
RA3.5.8.2.3 Special Situations --Kneewalls and Skylight Shafts 
(a) Framing for kneewalls and skylight shafts that separate conditioned from unconditioned 
space shall be insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value specified on the Certificate of 
Compliance, and all other required compliance documentation. 
(b) Steel -framed kneewalls and skylight shafts, shall exceed the mandatory minimum insulation 
requirements and external surfaces of steel studs shall be covered with insulation unless 
otherwise specified on the Certificate of Compliance using correct U -factors from Joint 
Appendix JA4, Table 4.3.4 (or U -factors approved by the Commission Executive Director). 
(c) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.8.2.4 Special Situations --HVAC/Plumbing Closet 
Walls of interior closets for HVAC and/or water heating equipment, which require combustion air 
venting, shall be insulated to at least the same R -value as the other demising walls (i.e., walls 
separating conditioned space and attached garage), or as speci fied on the Certificate of 
Compliance. 
RA3.5.8.2.5 Special Situations --Double Walls and Framed Bump -Outs 
(a) Insulation shall fill the entire cavity; or , an additional air barrier shall be installed inside the 
double wall or bump -out and in contact with the insulation so that the insulation fills the 
cavity formed with the additional air barrier. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 RA3-82 2025 Residential Appendices 
(b) Entire double walls and framed bump -outs shall be air tight. 
RA3.5.8.2.6 Special Situations --Structural Bracing, Tie -downs, Steel Structural Framing 
(a) Framing and bracing used for structural purposes shall be identified on plan documents with 
diagrams and/or design drawings. 
(b) Insulation shall be installed in a manner that restricts thermal bridging through the structural 
framing assembly. 
(c) Insulation shall be applied to fully enclose and/or adhere to all sides and ends of structural 
assembly framing. 
(d) The structural portions of assemblies shall be air -tight. 
RA3.5.8.2.7 Special Situations --Window and Door Headers 
All window and door headers shall be insulated to a minimum of R -3 between the exterior face of 
the header and inside surface of the finish wall material. 
RA3.5.8.2.8 Special Situation —Gable Ends in Unvented Attics 
(a) In unvented attics, where insulation is applied directly to the underside of the roof deck, 
framing for gable ends that separate the unvented attic from unconditioned space shall be 
insulated to meet or exceed the wall R -value of the adjacent exterior wall construction as 
specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The backside of air permeable insulation exposed to the unconditioned attic space shall be 
completely covered with a continuous air barrier. 
RA3.5.8.3 Roof/Ceilings 
(a) Baffles shall be placed at eaves or soffit vents of vented attics to keep insulation from 
blocking eave ventilation and prevent air movement under the insulation.  The required net -
free -ventilation shall be maintained. 
(b) Hard covers or draft stops shall be placed over all drop ceiling areas and interior wall cavities 
to keep insulation in place and stop air movement.  If hard covers or draft stops are missing 
or incomplete, they shall be completed before insulation is inst alled. 
(c) In traditional framed attics, required eave ventilation shall not be obstructed for conventional 
attics -the net free -ventilation area of the eave vent shall be maintained.  Eave vent baffles 
shall be installed to prevent air movement under or into the ce iling insulation of conventional 
attics. 
(d) Insulation shall cover all recessed lighting fixtures.  If the fixtures are not rated for insulation 
contact (IC) and air tight, the fixtures shall be removed and/or replaced. 
(e) All recessed light fixtures that penetrate the ceiling shall be listed for zero clearance 
insulation contact (IC), have a label that certifies it as airtight with leakage less than 2.0 cfm 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-83 
@ 75 Pa when tested to ASTM E283, and shall be sealed with a gasket or caulk between the 
light's housing and the ceiling. 
RA3.5.8.3.1 Special Situations --Attics and Cathedral Ceilings 
Insulation installed in unvented rafter ceilings or to the underside of unvented roofs with an attic 
below shall have an R -value conforming to compliance documentation and the air barrier shall be 
uniform across the transition of roof to wall.  The insulat ion shall be in contact with the air 
barrier. 
RA3.5.8.3.2 Special Situations --HVAC Platform 
Insulation shall be placed below any platform or cat -walk for HVAC equipment installation and 
access. 
RA3.5.8.3.3 Special Situations --Attic Access 
Permanently attach rigid board insulation, batt , or blanket insulation with the appropriate R -
value to the access door using adhesive or mechanical fastener.  The bottom of the attic access 
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage of conditioned air to the unconditioned attic. 
RA3.5.8.4 Raised Floors 
The outer and inner face, and all joints of the ICF air barrier, shall be maintain through use of 
tape, or sealing and caulking as needed. 
RA3.5.8.4.1 Homes with Floors Over Garage 
On floors that are over garages, the rim joist shall be insulated. 
RA3.5.8.4.2 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The separation between conditioned space (house) and the garage shall be insulated to create a 
continuous thermal barrier. All rim and band joists adjoining conditioned space shall be air tight 
and insulated. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
   
 
  
 RA3-84 2025 Residential Appendices 
Figure RA3.5 -11 Homes with Conditioned Space Over Garage – Insulated Concrete Form (ICF) 
RA3.5.8.4.3 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage 
The band joist where the garage transitions to an attic above conditioned space shall have an air 
barrier installed in contact with the edge of the attic insulation. 
Figure RA3.5 -12 Homes with No Conditioned Space Over Garage – Insulated Concrete Form (ICF) 
RA3.6 Field Verification of Water Heating Systems 
RA3.6.1 Purpose and Scope 
Water Heating HERS field verification offers credits for improved performance in terms of 
“quality” pipe insulation installation, for the installation of field -verified hot water distribution 
systems that are more compact and therefore perform better than typical hot water d istribution 
systems and for the installation of specific circulation strategies.  The listed HERS measures can 
be completed on a sampling basis. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
  
 
  
 
   
   
   
   
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-85 
RA3.6.2 HERS -Verified Pipe Insulation Requirements for all Hot Water Distribution Single 
Dwelling Systems 
Unless otherwise stated, i The HERS ECC-rater shall verify that all domestic hot water piping 
nsulation must meet the insulation requirements specified in §150.0(j) . The rater shall visually 
verify the following: . 
(a) All domestic hot water piping shall be insulated as specified in Section 609.1 2 of the 
California Plumbing Code. 
A. Pipe insulation shall fit tightly to the pipe and all elbows and tees shall be fully insulated. 
No piping should be visible due to insulation voids with the exception of the last segment 
of piping that penetrates walls and delivers hot water to the sink, a ppliance, etc. All 
domestic hot water piping shall be insulated as specified in Section 609.11 of the 
California Plumbing Code.  In addition, the following piping conditions shall have a 
minimum insulation wall thickness of 1 inch: 
(b) 
(a)B. The first five feet of cold water piping from storage gas water heaters. 
(b)C. All hot water piping with a nominal diameter between 3/4 inch (19 millimeter) and 
1 inch. 
(c)D. All hot water piping less than 3/4 inch in diameter that is associated with a 
domestic hot water recirculation system or leading to the kitchen fixtures. 
E. (d) All underground hot water piping. 
(c) In addition, aAll piping below grade must be installed in a waterproof and non -
crushable casing or sleeve that allows for installation, removal and replacement of the 
enclosed pipe and insulation.  The internal cross -section or diameter of the casing or 
sleeve shall be large enough to allow for insulation of the hot water piping. 
(e) Piping from the heating source to storage tank or between tanks. 
(d) D. Pipe insulation may be omitted where hot water distribution piping is buried 
within attic, crawlspace or wall insulation, as described below . : 
1. In attics and crawlspaces the insulation shall completely surround the pipe with at least 
1 inch of insulation and the pipe shall be completely covered with at least 4 inches of 
insulation further away from the conditioned space. 
2. In walls, the insulation must completely surround the pipe with at least 1 inch of 
insulation. If burial within the insulation does not meet these specifications, then this 
exception does not apply, and the section of pipe not meeting the specifications must be 
insulated as specified in §150.0(j). 
RA3.6.3 HERS -Verified Pipe Insulation for Central Systems Credit (PIC -H) 
For central systems with hot water piping serving multiple dwelling units, the heating plant and 
recirculation system piping insulation installation quality shall be field verified by a HERS ECC-
rater. The HERS ECC-rater shall inspect the heating plant and horizontal supply header and return 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 RA3-86 2025 Residential Appendices 
piping in accordance with mandatory requirements in Title 24 Part 6 section 160.4. The rater shall 
use a sampling approach that one in seven DHW recirculation pipe risers and associated branches 
be inspected to verify the pipe insulation meet with the following requirements: 
(a) All piping for multifamily domestic hot water systems shall be insulated to the thickness 
specified in Table 160.4 -A, including the first 8 feet of inlet cold water piping to the heating 
plant. Insulation on the piping and appurtenances shall be continuous . 
(b) All appurtenances at the heating plant, from a heating source to storage tank(s), or in 
between storage tanks and storage water heaters, and recirculation supply and return loop 
shall meet the following: 
1. Insulation to be flush with pipe insulation or have minimum of one inch if 
appurtenance is bulkier. 
2. Removable and re -installable for maintenance or replacement. 
3. Pipe supports, hangers, and clamps shall be attached on the outside of rigid pipe 
insulation. 
(c) All pipe insulation seams shall be sealed along the length of the pipe and between adjacent 
sections of insulation material. 
(d) Insulation for pipe elbows shall be mitered, and insulation for tees shall be notched. 
Alternatively, tees and elbows may be pre -formed, or site fabricated with PVC covers. 
(e) Isolation valves shall be fully functional. Extended stem isolation valves shall be installed on 
hot water piping or where pipe insulation is required. 
The visual inspection shall verify that all hot water piping is insulated. This credit can only be 
taken for trunk and branch hot water distribution systems. Specific installation requirements 
include: 
1. The HERS rater shall verify that all hot water piping is insulated in accordance with the 
provisions in RA3.6.2 HERS -Verified Pipe Insulation Requirements for all Hot Water 
Distribution Systems . 
RA3.6.4 HERS -Verified Central Parallel Piping (PP -H) 
This measure expands on the requirements for parallel piping systems that use one or more 
central manifolds with individual runs from the manifold to each point of use. Visual inspection 
shall verify that all supply lines of the parallel piping system meet the specific installation 
requirements listed below: 
(a) The measured length of pipe from the water heater to each central manifold shall not 
exceed 5 feet (measured to the nearest half foot). 
(b) The hot water distribution system piping from the manifold to the fixtures and appliances 
must take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -story and the 
water heater in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot water s upply 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-87 
piping from the manifold to the attic, and then running the line back down to a first floor 
point of use. 
1. The hot water distribution piping must be separated by at least two inches from any 
other hot water supply piping, and at least six inches from any cold water supply 
piping. 
(c) The HERS inspector ECC-rater shall also verify that other hot water piping is insulated and 
installed to meet the requirements of RA3.6.2. 
RA3.6.5 HERS -Verified Compact Hot Water Distribution System Expanded Credit (CHWDS -H-
EX) 
To meet the Compact Hot Water Distribution System Expanded Credit eligibility requirements, 
the requirements in RA4.4.6 must be met.  In addition, the following HERS field verifications are 
required: 
(a) No hot water piping larger than 1 inch diameter is allowed, 
(b) Length of 1 inch diameter piping is limited to 8 ft or less, 
(c) Two and three story buildings cannot have hot water distribution piping in the attic, 
unless the water heater is also located in the attic, and 
(d) Eligible recirculating systems must be HERS -Verified Demand Recirculation: Manual 
Control conforming to RA4.4.17. 
RA3.6.6 HERS Verified Demand Recirculation; Manual Control (R -DRmc -H) 
Demand controlled recirculation systems shall operate “on -demand”, meaning that pump 
operation shall be initiated shortly prior to the hot water draw. The recirculation pump can be 
located external to the water heater or be integral to the water heater.  T he controls shall 
operate on the principal of shutting off the pump with a sensed rise in pipe temperature (Delta -
T). For this HERS verification process, a manual switch is required. 
Verification shall include: 
(a) More than one circulation loop may be installed. Each loop shall have its own pump and 
controls. 
(b) Verify that the pump, demand controls and thermo -sensor are present.  Manual switches 
shall be located in the kitchen, all bathrooms, and any hot water fixture location that is at 
least 20 feet (measured along the hot water piping) from the water heater. 
(c) Manual controlled systems may be activated by wired or wireless button mechanisms. 
Verify that manual controls have standby power of 1 watt or less. 
(d) Verify that pump and control placement for the demand recirculation meets one of the 
following criteria: 
1. When a dedicated return line has been installed the pump, controls and thermo -
sensor are installed at the end of the supply portion of the recirculation loop (typically 
under a sink); or 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 RA3-88 2025 Residential Appendices 
2. The pump and controls are installed on the return line near the water heater and the 
thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location as close to the end of the supply 
portion of the recirculation loop as possible (typically under a sink), or 
3. When the cold water line is used as the return, the pump, demand controls and 
thermosensor shall be installed in an accessible location at the end of supply portion 
of the hot water distribution line (typically under a sink). 
(e) Verify that a check valve is installed in the recirculation loop to prevent unintentional 
circulation of the water (thermo -siphoning) and back flow when the system is not 
operating.  This check valve may be included with the pump. 
(f) The HERS inspector ECC-rater shall also verify that the supply portion of each circulation 
loop, the first five feet of branches off the loop and the dedicated return line are insulated 
based on the conductivity range in TABLE 120.3 -A, the insulation level shall be selected 
from the fluid temperature range based on the thickness requirements in TABLE 120.3 -A 
and the insulation shall be installed in accordance with RA3.6.2 . Other hot water piping 
shall meet the requirements of §150.0(j) and be installed in ac cordance with RA3.6.2. 
Insulation is not required on the cold water line when it is used as the return. 
(g) The hot water distribution system piping from the water heater(s) to the fixtures and 
appliances must take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -
story and the water heater in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot 
water supply piping from the water heater to the attic, and then running the line back 
down to a first floor point of use. 
(h) Verify that manual controls initiate pump operation by pressing one of the manual 
controls and observing that the pump turns on and then shuts off in accordance with one 
of the two methods listed: 
1. After the pump has been activated, the controls shall allow the pump to operate 
until the water temperature at the thermo -sensor rises not more than 10ºF (5.6 ºC) 
above the initial temperature of the water in the pipe, or 
2. The controls shall not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the pipe 
exceeds 102ºF (38.9 ºC). 
(i) Verify that the controls have a feature that limits pump operation to a maximum of 5 
minutes following any activation.  This is provided in the event that the normal means of 
shutting off the pump have failed. 
(j) The manufacturer(s) of the recirculation pump and the controls shall provide installation 
and operation instructions that provide details of the operation of the pump and controls , 
and such instructions shall be available at the jobsite for inspection. 
RA3.6.7 HERS -Verified Demand Recirculation:  Sensor Control (RDRsc -H) 
Demand controlled recirculation systems shall operate “on -demand”, meaning that pump 
operation shall be initiated shortly prior to the hot water draw.  The recirculation pump can be 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-89 
located external to the water heater or be integral to the water heater.  The controls shall 
operate on the principal of shutting off the pump with a sensed rise in pipe temperature (Delta -
T). For this HERS verification process a sensor control is used to activate the pump rather than a 
manual control. 
Verification shall include: 
(a) More than one circulation loop may be installed. Each loop shall have its own pump and 
controls. 
(b) Verify that the pump, demand controls and thermo -sensor are present. Sensor controls 
shall be located in the kitchen, bathrooms, and any hot water fixture location that is at 
least 20 feet (measured along the hot water piping) from the water heater. 
(c) Sensor controlled systems may be activated by wired or wireless mechanisms, including 
motion sensors, door switches and flow switches. 
(d) Verify that sensor s controls have standby power of 1 watt or less. 
(e) Verify that pump and control placement for the demand recirculation meets one of the 
following criteria: 
1. When a dedicated return line has been installed the pump, controls and thermo -
sensor are installed at the end of the supply portion of the recirculation loop 
(typically under a sink); or 
2. The pump and controls is installed on the return line near the water heater and the 
thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location as close to the end of the supply 
portion of the recirculation loop as possible (typically under a sink), or 
3. When the cold water line is used as the return, the pump, demand controls and 
thermosensor shall be installed in an accessible location at the end of supply 
portion of the hot water distribution line (typically under a sink). 
(f) Verify that a check valve is installed in the recirculation loop to prevent unintentional 
circulation of the water (thermo -siphoning) and back flow when the system is not 
operating.  This check valve may be included with the pump. 
(g) The hot water distribution system piping from the water heater(s) to the fixtures and 
appliances must take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -
story and the water heater in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot 
water supply piping from the water heater to the attic, and then running the line back 
down to a first floor point of use. 
(h) The HERS inspector ECC-rater shall also verify that the supply portion of each circulation 
loop, the first five feet of branches off the loop and the dedicated return line are insulated 
based on the conductivity range in TABLE 120.3 -A, the insulation level shall be selected 
from the fluid temperature range based on the thickness requirements in TABLE 120.3 -A 
and the insulation shall be installed in accordance with RA3.6.2 . Other hot water piping 
shall meet the requirements of §150.0(j) and be installed in accordance with RA3.6.2. 
Insulation is not required on the cold water line when it is used as the return. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 RA3-90 2025 Residential Appendices 
(i) Verify that sensor controls initiate pump operation by activating one of the sensor 
controls and observing that the pump turns on and then shuts off in accordance with one 
of the two methods listed. 
1. After the pump has been activated, the controls shall allow the pump to operate 
until the water temperature at the thermo -sensor rises not more than 10ºF (5.6 
ºC) above the initial temperature of the water in the pipe, or 
2. The controls shall not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the 
pipe exceeds 102ºF (38.9 ºC). 
(j) Verify that the controls have a feature that limits pump operation to a maximum of 5 
minutes following any activation.  This is provided in the event that the normal means of 
shutting off the pump have failed. 
(k) The manufacturer(s) of the recirculation pump and the controls shall provide installation 
and operation instructions that provide details of the operation of the pump and controls , 
and such instructions shall be available at the jobsite for inspection. 
RA3.6.8 HERS -Multiple Recirculation Loop Design for DHW Systems Serving Multiple Dwelling 
Units Reserved The visual inspection shall verify that a central DHW system serving a 
building with more than eight dwelling units has at least two recirculation loops, each 
serving roughly the same number of dwelling. Unique building sections may have 
additional recircu lation loops. These recirculation loops may be connected to the same 
water heating equipment or be connected to independent water heating equipment. 
The HERS inspector shall verify that there are at least two recirculation loops each 
serving roughly the same number of dwelling units. Unique sections of the building may 
have separate loops. Ideally each loop will have its own pump and controls. 
RA3.6.9 HERS -Verified Drain Water Heat Recovery System (DWHR -H) 
A HERS inspection ECC-rater is required to obtain this credit. All DWHR unit(s) shall be certified to 
the Energy Commission according to the following requirements: 
(a) Vertical DWHR unit(s) shall be compliant with CSA B55.2 , and tested and labeled in 
accordance with CSA B55.1 or IAPMO IGC 346 -2017.  Sloped DWHR unit(s) shall be 
compliant with IAPMO PS 92 , and tested and labeled with IAPMO IGC 346 -2017.  
(b) The DWHR unit(s) shall have a minimum rated effectiveness of 42 percent. 
The HERS inspector ECC-rater shall verify that: 
(a) The make, model, and CSA B55.1 or IAPMO IGC 346 -2017 rated effectiveness of the 
DWHR unit(s) shall match the compliance documents.  The DWHR unit(s) shall also be 
verified as a model certified to the Energy Commission as qualified for credit as a DWHR 
unit(s). 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
   
 
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
  
 
 
   
   
 
  
 
   
   
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
  
    
 
   2025 Residential Appendices RA3-91 
(b) The installation configuration (e.g. , equal flow, unequal flow to the water heater, or 
unequal flow to the showers) and the percent of served shower fixtures shall match the 
compliance documents. 
(c) For water heating system serving a single dwelling, the DWHR system shall, at the 
minimum, recover heat from the master bathroom shower and must at least transfer that 
heat either back to all the respective showers or the water heater. 
(d) For central water heating system serving multiple dwellings, the DWHR system shall, at 
the minimum, recover heat from half the showers located above the first floor and must 
at least transfer that heat either back to all the respective showers or the water heater. 
(e) The DWHR unit(s) shall be installed within 1 degrees of the rated slope.  Sloped DWHR 
shall have a minimum lengthwise slope of 1 degree. The lateral level tolerance shall be 
within plus or minus 1 degree. 
(f) The installation shall comply with any applicable California Plumbing Code requirements. 
RA3.7 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Mechanical Ventilation 
Systems 
RA3.7.1 Purpose and Scope 
RA3.7 contains proc edures for verification of heat recovery efficiency and fan efficacy, and for 
measuring the airflow rate for mechanical ventilation systems. 
RA3.7 is applicable to mechanical ventilation systems in residential dwelling units. 
RA3.7 provides required procedures for installers, HERS ECC-raters and others who are required 
to perform field verification of mechanical ventilation systems for compliance with Part 6. 
Table RA3.7 -1 – Summary of Verification and Diagnostic procedures 
Diagnostic Description Procedure 
Whole -Building 
Mechanical Ventilation 
Airflow Verification of whole -building 
ventilation system airflow rate . 
Continuous Operation RA3.7.4.1 
Whole -Building 
Mechanical Ventilation 
Airflow Verification of whole -building 
ventilation system airflow rate . 
Intermittent Operation RA3.7.4.2 
Kitchen Local 
Mechanical Exhaust Verification of vented range hood 
airflow rate or capture efficiency RA3.7.4.3 
Heat Recovery 
Ventilation (HRV) or 
Energy Recovery 
Ventilation (ERV) Rated 
Performance 
Verification Verification of the HRV/ERV fan 
efficacy (W/cfm) or heat recovery 
efficiency. RA3.7.4.4 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 RA3-92 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.7.2 Instrumentation Specifications 
The instrumentation for the air distribution diagnostic measurements shall conform to the 
following specifications: 
RA3.7.2.1 Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be measured with measurement systems (i.e., sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy equal to or better than ± 1% of pressure reading or ± 0.2 
Pa (0.0008 inches water) (whichever is greater). All pressure meas urements within the duct 
system shall be made with static pressure probes such as Dwyer A303 or equivalent. 
RA3.7.2.2 Airflow Rate Measurements 
All measurements of ventilation fan airflow rate shall be made with an airflow rate measurement 
apparatus (i.e., sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy equal to or better than ± 
10% of reading. The apparatus shall have an accuracy specific ation that is applicable to the 
airflow rates that must be verified utilizing the procedures in Section RA3.7 .4. Airflows shall be 
measured at the mechanical ventilation fan’s inlet terminals/grilles or outlet terminals/grilles . 
RA3.7.2.3 Calibration 
All instrumentation used for mechanical ventilation system airflow rate diagnostic measurements 
shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s calibration procedure to ensure the airflow 
measurement apparatus conforms to the accuracy requirement specified in Section RA3.7.2.2. 
RA3.7.3 Diagnostic Apparatus for Measurement of Ventilation System Airflow 
Ventilation system airflow rate shall be measured using one of the apparatuses listed in Section 
RA3.7.3. The apparatus shall produce airflow rate measurements that conform to the accuracy 
requirements specified in Section RA3.7.2 for measurements of residential mechanical ventilation 
system airflow at system inlet or outlet terminals, grilles , or registers for single or multiple branch 
ventilation duct systems. 
The airflow rate measurement apparatus manufacturers shall publish in their product 
documentation, specifications for how their airflow measurement apparatuses are to be used for 
accurately measuring residential mechanical ventilation system airflow at sys tem inlet or outlet 
terminals, grilles , or registers of single or multiple branch ventilation systems. 
The airflow measurement apparatus manufacturers shall certify to the Energy Commission that 
use of the apparatus in accordance with the specifications given in the manufacturer's product 
documentation will produce measurement results that are within the ac curacy required by 
Section RA3.7.2.2. 
For the airflow measurement apparatuses that are certified to the Commission as meeting the 
accuracy required by Section RA3.7.2.2, the following information shall be posted on the Energy 
Commission website, making the information available to all people i nvolved in the airflow 
verification compliance process: 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
    
      2025 Residential Appendices RA3-93 
(a) The product manufacturers' model numbers for the airflow measurement apparatuses. 
(b) The product manufacturers' product documentation that gives the specifications for use 
of the airflow measurement apparatuses to accurately measure residential mechanical 
ventilation system airflow at system inlet or outlet terminals, grilles , or registers of single 
or multiple branch ventilation systems . 
A manufacturer's certification to the Commission of the accuracy of the airflow measurement 
apparatus, and submittal to the Commission of the product documentation that specifies the 
proper use of the airflow measurement apparatus to produce accurate airfl ow rate 
measurements shall be prerequisites for allowing the manufacturer's airflow measurement 
apparatus to be used for conducting the system airflow verification procedures in Section RA3.7 
for demonstrating compliance with Part 6. 
RA3.7.3.1 Residential Mechanical Exhaust Airflow Measurement Device 
A flowmeter designed for measurement of residential exhaust airflows that meets the applicable 
instrument accuracy specifications in RA3.7.2 may be used to measure the mechanical exhaust 
ventilation airflow. 
RA3.7.3.2 Powered Flow Capture Hood Airflow Measurement Device 
A powered and pressure balanced flow capture hood (subsequently referred to as a Powered 
Flow Hood3) that has the capability to balance the flow capture static pressure difference 
between the room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (0.0008 inches water) and 
meets the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section RA3.7.2 may be used to verify the 
ventilation airflow rate if the powered flow hood has a flow capture area at least as large as the 
ventilation syste m inlet or outlet, terminal, register, or grille in all dimensions. The fan 
adjustment needed to balance the flow capture static pressure difference between the room and 
the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (0.0008 inches water) shall be provide d by either 
an automatic control or a manual control operated in accordance with the apparatus 
manufacturer's instructions specified in the manufacturer's product documentation. 
RA3.7.3.3 Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
A traditional flow capture hood4 meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section 
RA3.7.2 may be used to verify the ventilation system airflow rate if the non -powered flow hood 
has a capture area at least as large as the ventilation system inlet or outlet terminal, regist er or 
grille in all dimensions. 
RA3.7.4 Procedures 
This section describes the procedures used to verify Mechanical ventilation system airflow. 
3 Also known as "active" flow hood, or "fan assisted" flow hood. 
4Also known as “non -powered flow hood, "standard" flow hood , "commercially available" flow hood, or "passive" flow hood . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
  
   
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 RA3-94 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.7.4.1 Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Rate Measurement -Continuous Operation 
If multiple fans are specified to operate simultaneously to provide the total required ventilation 
airflow, the measurements shall be made with all applicable fans operating simultaneously. 
RA3.7.4.1.1 Supply and Exhaust Ventilation Systems 
(a) A flow measuring device that meets the applicable instrumentation requirements given in 
Section RA3.7.2, and RA3.7.3 shall be used to measure the ventilation airflow(s). 
(b) Measure and record the ventilation airflow(s). 
(c) If the measured total airflow is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow rate required 
by the Standards or the Certificate of Compliance, the mechanical ventilation system 
complies. Otherwise , the mechanical ventilation system does not comply, and corrective 
action shall be taken. 
RA3.7.4.1.2 Balanced Ventilation Systems 
(a) A flow measuring device that meets the applicable instrumentation requirements given in 
Section RA3.7.2, and RA3.7.3 shall be used to measure the ventilation airflows. 
(b) Confirm that both the supply side and the exhaust side of the balanced system operate 
simultaneously in response to a shared system control. 
(c) Measure the airflow rate for the exhaust side of the system. 
(d) Measure the airflow rate for the supply side of the system. 
(e) Calculate the percent difference between the exhaust and supply airflow rates. 
(f) Calculate the average of the exhaust and the supply airflow rates. 
(g) If the exhaust and supply airflow rates are within 20% of each other, and the average of the 
exhaust and supply airflow rates is greater than or equal to the airflow rate required by the 
Standards or the Certificate of Compliance, the balanced ventilation system complies. 
Otherwise, the system does not comply, and corrective action shall be taken. 
(h) If the balanced system is an HRV or ERV and compliance with a recovery efficiency or fan 
efficacy specification is required, then also perform the verification specified in RA3.7.4.4 . 
RA3.7.4.2 Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Rate Measurement -Intermittent Operation 
The Executive Director may approve intermittent mechanical ventilation systems, devices, or 
controls for use for compliance with field verification and diagnostic testing requirements for 
mechanical ventilation airflow, subject to a manufacturer providing sufficient evidence to the 
Executive Director that the installed mechanical ventilation systems, devices, or controls will 
provide at least the minimum ventilation airflow required by the Standards, and subject to 
consideration of the manufacturer's propos ed field verification and diagnostic test protocol for 
the ventilation system(s). Ventilation airflow of systems with multiple operating modes shall be 
tested in all modes designed to comply with the required ventilation airflows . 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
     
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
     
       
 
     
  
  
 
   
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
   
   2025 Residential Appendices RA3-95 
Approved systems, devices, or controls, and field verification and diagnostic test protocols for 
intermittent mechanical ventilation systems shall be listed in directories published by the Energy 
Commission. 
RA3.7.4.3 Kitchen Local Mechanical Exhaust -Vented Range Hood Verification 
The verification shall utilize certified performance rating data from the Home Ventilating Institute 
(HVI) Certified Home Ventilating Products Directory at 
https://hvi.org/proddirectory/index.cfm https ://hvi.org/proddirectory/index.cfm , 
https://www.hvi.org/hvi -certified -products -directory / the Association of Home Appliance 
Manufacturers (AHAM) Certified Products Directory at 
https://www.aham.org/AHAM/What_We_Do/Kitchen_Range_Hood_Certification https://www.a 
ham.org/AHAM/What_We_Do/Kitchen_Range_Hood_Certification , or another directory of 
certified product performance ratings approved by the Energy Commission for determining 
compliance. The verification procedure shall consist of visual inspection of the installed kitchen 
range hood to verify and record the following information: 
(a) The manufacturer name and model number. 
(b) The model is listed in the HVI , AHAM , or other CEC-approved directory. 
(c) The rated airflow value or rated capture efficiency value listed in the HVI , AHAM , or other 
CEC-approved directory. 
(d) The sound rating value listed in the HVI , AHAM , or other CEC-approved directory. 
(e) If the value for the rated airflow or rated capture efficiency given in the directory is 
greater than or equal to the airflow or capture efficiency requirements specified in the 
Standards, and if the value for the sone rating given in the directory is less than or equal 
to the sone rating requirements specified in Standards, then the kitchen range hood 
complies . Otherwise , the kitchen range hood does not comply. If the kitchen range hood 
is not listed in the HVI, AHAM, or other CEC-approved directory, then the system does not 
comply. 
RA3.7.4.4 Heat Recovery Ventilation (HRV) or Energy Recovery Ventilation (ERV) Rated 
Performance Verification 
The verification shall utilize certified performance rating data from the Home Ventilating Institute 
(HVI) Certified Home Ventilating Products Directory at 
https://hvi.org/proddirectory/index.cfm https://hvi.org/proddirectory/index.cfm , 
https://www.hvi.org/hvi -certified -products -directory / or another directory of certified product 
performance ratings approved by the Energy Commission for determining compliance. The 
verification procedure shall consist of visual inspection of the installed system to verify an d 
record the following information: 
1. Record the manufacturer make and model from the installed system nameplate. 
2. Verify the model is listed in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory. 
3. If compliance with a fan efficacy performance rating (w/cfm) is required, then determine and 
record the fan efficacy rating for the installed model using the model details in the energy 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
     
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
       
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
    
 
 
   
 
 
  RA3-96 2025 Residential Appendices 
ratings in the HVI , or other CEC -approved directory in accordance with steps a, b, and c 
below . 
a. Record the required ventilation airflow (cfm) for the installed HRV/ERV as specified on the 
certificate of compliance. 
b. From the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC approved directory, determine, and 
record the rated Power Consumed (Watts) at 32 degrees Fahrenheit , at the closest Net 
Airflow (cfm) listed in the directory that is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow 
(cfm) required on the certificate of compliance. Alternatively, linear interpolation of the 
directory ratings at 32 degrees Fahrenheit shall be allowed if the interpolated value is 
calculated based on a Net Airflow (cfm) that is equal to the vent ilation airflow (cfm) 
required on the certificate of compliance. Interpolation shall be in accordance with 
equation RA3.7 -1. Extrapolation of the directory ratings at 32 degrees Fahrenheit shall not 
be allowed. 
Equation RA3.7 -1 pc = pc1 + [(na – na1) / (na2 – na1)] X (pc2 – pc1) 
where: 
na is the known value for Net Airflow equal to the ventilation airflow required on the 
certificate of compliance, 
pc is the unknown value for Power Consumed (Watts) at 32 degrees Fahrenheit . 
na1 and pc1 are the closest rated values at 32 degrees Fahrenheit for Net Airflow 
(cfm) and Power Consumed (Watts) respectively that are below the known na 
value. 
na2 and pc2 are the closest rated values at 32 degrees Fahrenheit for Net Airflow 
(cfm) and Power Consumed (Watts) respectively that are above the known na 
value. 
c. Divide the value for Power Consumed (Watts) recorded in step b, by the Net Airflow (cfm) 
used in step b to determine the Power Consumed. 
4. If compliance with a sensible recovery efficiency (SRE) performance rating (%) is required, 
then determine and record the SRE rating for the installed model using the model details in 
the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory in accordance with steps a, and 
b below . 
a. Record the required ventilation airflow (cfm) for the installed HRV/ERV as specified on the 
certificate of compliance. 
b. From the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC approved directory, determine, and 
record the rated SRE (%) at 32 degrees F ahrenheit , at the closest Net Airflow (cfm) listed 
in the directory that is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow (cfm) required on 
the certificate of compliance. Alternatively, linear interpolation of the directory ratings at 
32 degrees F ahrenheit shall be allowed if the interpolated value is calculated based on a 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
      
 
 
 
   
 
   
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
  
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-97 
Net Airflow (cfm) that is equal to the ventilation airflow (cfm) required on the certificate 
of compliance. Interpolation shall be in accordance with equation RA3.7 -2. Extrapolation 
of the directory ratings at 32 degrees F ahrenheit shall not be allowed. 
Equation RA3.7 -2 sre = sre1 + [(na – na1) / (na2 – na1)] X (sre2 – sre1) 
where: 
na is the known value for Net Airflow equal to the ventilation airflow required on the 
certificate of compliance, 
sre is the unknown value for SRE at 32 degrees F ahrenheit . 
na1 and sre1 are the closest rated values at 32 degrees Fahrenheit for Net Airflow 
(cfm) and SRE respectively that are below the known na value. 
na2 and sre2 are the closest rated values at 32 degrees Fahrenheit for Net Airflow 
(cfm) and SRE respectively that are above the known na value. 
5. Determining Compliance. 
a. If the value determined for SRE by one or both of the alternatives in step 4 for the 
installed system is greater than or equal to the SRE required for compliance, then the 
system complies with the sensible recovery efficiency rating requirement . Otherwise the 
system does not comply. 
b. If the value determined for fan efficacy (W/cfm) by one or both of the alternatives in step 
3 for the installed system is less than or equal to the fan efficacy required for compliance, 
then the system complies with the fan efficacy rating requirement. Otherwise , the system 
does not comply. 
c. If compliance with both fan efficacy and sensible recovery efficiency ratings are required, 
then both ratings shall comply at the same Net Airflow (cfm) , otherwise the system does 
not comply. 
d. If the system is not listed in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory, then the system 
does not comply . 
RA3.8 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Air Leakage of Building 
Enclosures and Dwelling Unit Enclosures 
RA3.8.1 Purpose and Scope 
The purpose of this test procedure is to measure the air leakage rate through a building 
enclosure or a dwelling unit enclosure. 
The measurement procedure shall be based on the specifications of Residential Energy Services 
Network's (RESNET) Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building , Dwelling Unit, and Sleeping 
Unit Enclosures ; Airtightness of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems ; and Airflow of 
Mechanical Ventilation Systems (ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 -2019 ) (RESNET 380) as further specified in 
Subsections RA3.8.2, RA3.8.3, RA3.8.4 below. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
  
   
   
 
   
 
 
  
  
   
  
    
  
  
 
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
  
 
   
   RA3-98 2025 Residential Appendices 
This enclosure leakage procedure is applicable to: 
• Single family building enclosures 
• Multifamily dwelling unit enclosures 
RA3.8.2 Instrument Specifications 
The instrumentation for the enclosure leakage measurements shall conform to the specifications 
in RESNET 380 Section 4.1. 
RA3.8.3 Enclosure Leakage Measurement Procedures 
The enclosure leakage measurement procedure shall conform to the following specifications: 
(a) The procedure for preparation of the building or dwelling unit for testing shall conform to 
the applicable requirements in RESNET 380 Section 4.2. 
(b) The procedure for installation of the test apparatus, and preparations for measurement 
shall conform to the applicable requirements in RESNET 380 Section 4.3. 
If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in cubic feet per minute per 
ft2 of dwelling unit enclosure surface area at 50 Pa (0.2 inch water) (CFM50/ft2 of 
enclosure) , the dwelling unit enclosure interior surface area in ft2 (compart mentalization 
boundary area) shall be recorded . Note: the compartmentalization boundary area is the 
sum of the interior surface area s of the dwelling unit enclosure walls between dwelling 
units, exterior walls, ceiling, and floor. 
(c) The procedure for the conduct of the enclosure leakage test shall conform to the One -
Point Airtightness Test specified in RESNET 380 Section 4.4.1 or the multi -point 
airtightness test specified in the RESNET 380 Section 4.4.2 . 
RA3.8.4 Determination of Test Results 
The results of the test shall be determined as follows: 
(a) The leakage airflow in CFM50 if determined by the One -Point Airtightness Test specified 
in RESNET 380 Section 4.4.1 shall be adjusted using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.1, equation 
(5a). 
(b) If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in air changes per hour at 50 
Pa (0.2 inch water) ( ACH50) , the leakage results determined by RESNET 380 Section 4.5.1, 
equation (5a) shall be converted to ACH50 using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.2, equation (7a). 
(c) If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in CFM50 /ft2 of enclosed the 
leakage results determined by RESNET 380 Section 4.5.1, equation (5a) shall be converted 
to CFM50/ft2 of enclosure using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.2, equation 10 . 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
      
 
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
 
   
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA3-99 
RA3.8.5 Determining Compliance 
If the applicable value(s) for CFM50, ACH50, or CFM50/ft2 of enclosure determined in Section 
RA3.8.4 are less than or equal to the enclosure leakage compliance criterion specified by the 
Standards or the Certificate of Compliance, the enclosure complies. Otherwise , the enclosure 
does not comply. 
RA3.9 Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole House Fans (WHF) 
RA3.9.1 Purpose and Scope 
RA3.9 contains procedures for measurement of WHF systems in single -family buildings : 
(a) Measurement of WHF airflow rate to confirm compliance with the airflow rate 
requirements specified in the performance standards set forth in Standards section 
150.1(b). 
(b) Measurement of WHF Watt draw. 
(c) Calculation of WHF efficacy (w/cfm) utilizing simultaneous measurement of WHF Watt 
draw and airflow rate. 
RA3.9.2 Instrument Specifications 
The instrumentation for the diagnostic measurements shall conform to the following 
specifications: 
RA3.9.2.1 Pressure Measurement 
All pressure measurements shall be performed with measurement systems (i.e., sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 1% of pressure reading or ± 0.2 Pa (.0008 inches 
water) (whichever is greater). 
RA3.9.2.2 Airflow Rate Measurements 
All measurements of WHF airflow rates shall be made with an airflow rate measurement 
apparatus (i.e., sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 7% of reading or ± 5 
cfm whichever is greater. 
RA3.9.2.3 Fan Watt Draw Measurements 
All measurements of WHF watt draws shall be made with true power measurement systems (i.e., 
sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy of ± 2% of reading or ± 10 watts 
whichever is greater. 
RA3.9.3 WHF Airflow Rate Measurement Apparatus 
WHF airflow rate shall be measured using one of the apparatuses listed in Section RA3.9.3. The 
apparatus shall produce airflow rate measurements that conform to the accuracy requirements 
specified in Section RA3.9.2 for measurements of residential WHFs. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
    RA3-100 2025 Residential Appendices 
The airflow rate measurement apparatus manufacturers shall publish in their product 
documentation, specifications for how their airflow measurement apparatuses are to be used for 
accurately measuring WHF airflow rates. 
The airflow measurement apparatus manufacturers shall certify to the Energy Commission that 
use of the apparatus in accordance with the specifications given in the manufacturer's product 
documentation will produce measurement results that are within the ac curacy required by 
Section RA3.9.2. 
For the airflow measurement apparatuses that are certified to the Commission as meeting the 
accuracy required by Section RA3.9.2, the following information will be posted on the Energy 
Commission website, making the information available to all people invo lved in the airflow 
verification compliance process: 
(a) The product manufacturers' model numbers for the airflow measurement apparatuses. 
(b) The product manufacturers' product documentation that gives the specifications for use of 
the airflow measurement apparatuses to accurately measure WHF airflow. 
A manufacturer's certification to the Commission of the accuracy of the airflow measurement 
apparatus, and submittal to the Commission of the product documentation that specifies the 
proper use of the airflow measurement apparatus to produce accurate airfl ow rate 
measurements shall be prerequisites for allowing the manufacturer's airflow measurement 
apparatus to be used for conducting the system airflow verification procedures in Section RA3.9 
for demonstrating compliance with Part 6. 
RA3.9.3.1 Fan Flowmeter 
The apparatus for measuring the system airflow rate shall consist of a building pressurization and 
airflow measurement device (su bsequently referred to as a fan flowmeter) that meets all 
applicable instrumentation specifications in Section RA3.9.2 , and a static pressure measurement 
device that meets the specifications in Section RA3.9.2.1. The fan flowmeter shall be attached at 
the inlet to a WHF from the conditioned space. The fan flowmeter shall be attached at a point 
where all the airflow throug h the system will flow through it. All WHF dampers shall be in their 
normal operating condition. The static pressure probe(s) shall be fixed to locations inside and 
outside the dwelling such that they will not be moved during this test. 
RA3.9.3.2 Powered Flow Capture Hood 
A powered and pressure balanced flow capture hood (subsequently referred to as a Powered 
Flow Hood5) that has the capability to balance the flow capture static pressure difference 
between the room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (.0008 inches water) and 
meets the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section RA3.9.2 may be used to verify the 
system airflow rate at the WHF inlet if the powered flow hood has a flow capture area at least as 
large as the WHF inlet in all dimensions. The fan adjustment needed to balance the flow capture 
static pressure difference between t he room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa 
5 Also known as "active" flow hood, or "fan assisted" flow hood. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
   
 
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
     2025 Residential Appendices RA3-101 
(.0008 inches water) shall be provided by either an automatic control or a manual control 
operated in accordance with the apparatus manufacturer's instructions specified in the 
manufacturer's product documentation. All WHF dampers shall be in their normal operating 
position. Measurement(s) shall be taken at the inlet of the WHF. 
RA3.9.3.3 Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
A traditional flow capture hood6 meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section 
RA3.9.2.2 may be used to verify the system airflow rate at the WHF inlet if the device has a 
capture area at least as large as the WHF inlet grille in all dimensions. All WHF dampers shall b e in 
their normal operating position. Measurement(s) shall be taken at the inlet of the WHF. 
RA3.9.3.4 WHF Watt Draw Measurement Apparatus 
The air handler watt draw shall be measured using one of the following apparatuses. 
RA3.9.3.5 Portable Watt Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the WHF watt draw shall consist of a wattmeter meeting the 
applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.3.1 . The measuring device shall be attached to 
measure the WHF watt draw. All WHF dampers shall be in their normal operating condition. 
When required to measure fan watt draw on WHF equipment that is wired directly to an 
electrical junction box, it is recommended to use portable true power clamp -on meters to 
provide flexibility for isolating the correct fan wires serving the WHF. 
RA3.9.3.6 Utility Revenue Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the WHF watt draw shall consist of a utility revenue meter meeting 
the applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.9.2.3 and a stopwatch that provides 
measurements in units of seconds. All WHF dampers and access panels shal l be in their normal 
operating condition. 
RA3.9.3.7 Digital Utility Revenue Meter 
The apparatus for measuring the WHF watt draw shall consist of a digital utility revenue meter 
meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in RA3.3.1 that provides direct digital 
display of the watt draw. All WHF dampers and access panels shall be in their normal operating 
condition. 
RA3.9.4 Procedures 
RA3.9.4.1 WHF Airflow Rate Measurement Procedures 
When required for compliance, the installed WHF airflow shall be diagnostically tested using one 
of the methods specified in this section. 
The measured airflow rate shall be expressed in cubic feet per minute of standard air (standard 
air has a density of 0.075 lb/ft³). When the airflow measurement is made at altitudes significantly 
6 Also known as "non -powered" flow hood, "standard" flow hood, "commercially available" flow hood, or "passive" flow hood . 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
  
   
    
   
 
 
    
   
   
  
 
 
     
   
  
 
 
  
    
 RA3-102 2025 Residential Appendices 
different from sea level or at temperatures significantly different from 70°F, the airflow indicated 
on the device gauge may differ from the standard CFM by as much as 15 percent. Corrections 
from indicated to standard CFM shall be made using the procedure specified by the airflow 
measurement device manufacturer. 
When multiple WHFs are used to comply with the required WHF airflow rate for the dwelling 
unit, all WHFs in the dwelling unit shall be operated simultaneously and the sum of the airflow 
rate measurements of the simultaneously operating WHFs for the dwellin g shall be determined. 
When flow capture hood devices are used, the capture area shall be at least as large as the WHF 
inlet grille in all dimensions. 
WHF airflow shall be measured with the dwelling unit window openings configured such that 
when the WHF(s) are operating, a dwelling unit pressure of negative 10 Pa ± 5 Pa with reference 
to (WRT) outside is attained. This is the WHF operating pressure (WHF -OP). 
RA3.9.4.1.1 WHF Airflow Rate Measurement Using Attic Pressure Matching and Fan 
Flowmeter 
(a) Open the window(s) that are typically opened during WHF operation. 
(b) Place a pressure sensing probe /tube in the attic. If necessary, u se a suitable means such 
as cardboard sheets and tape to facilitate sealing off the access opening between the attic 
and the dwelling unit's conditioned space to allow the pressure sensing probe/ tube to be 
inserted into the attic spac e without crimping or restricting the pressure sensing 
probe/ tube. There shall be no leakage of air from the attic through the attic access 
opening into the dwelling unit during this verification procedure. 
(c) Attach the attic pressure sensing tube to a digital pressure gage such that it will measure 
the pressure difference between the dwelling unit conditioned space and the attic . 
(d) Turn on all WHFs required to meet the dwelling unit WHF airflow rate required for 
compliance . If applicable, a djust multiple WHFs or variable speed WHFs to operate at a 
total airflow rate greater than or equal to the WHF airflow rate required for compliance. 
(e) Adjust the dwelling unit window openings to bring the dwelling unit to the WHF -OP of 
negative 10 Pa ± 5 Pa WRT outside. 
(f) Measure and record the pressure difference (Pa) between the attic and the dwelling unit 
conditioned space (Pattic) while the dwelling unit is at the WHF -OP. 
(g) Turn off the WHF. 
(h) Do not change the window openings. The same dwelling unit window opening 
configuration used to establish the WHF -OP used for the measurement in step (f) shall be 
used for the pressure matching procedure specified below. 
(i) Attach the fan flowmeter to the inlet grille of the WHF . The fan flowmeter 's capture 
enclosure or ductwork shall cover the WHF intake grille completely. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
     
   
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-103 
(j) Turn on all WHF s that were used during the measurement in step (f) . The speed of the 
WHFs shall be the same as used for the measurement in step (f). 
(k) Turn on the fan flowmeter. Adjust the fan flowmeter speed until the pressure difference 
(Pa) between the attic and the dwelling unit conditioned space matches P attic determined 
in step (f). 
(l) Record the flow through the fan flowmeter. When multiple WHFs are used to meet the 
required airflow, r epeat steps (g) through ( l) for each WHF , then sum the airflow 
measurements for all WHFs to arrive at the total WHF airflow for the dwelling unit. 
RA3.9.4.1.2 WHF Airflow Rate Measurement Using Powered Flow Capture Hood 
The WHF airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures: 
(a) Open the window(s) that are typically opened during WHF operation. 
(b) Turn on all WHFs required to meet the dwelling unit WHF airflow rate. Adjust multiple or 
variable speed WHFs to operate at an airflow rate that will be greater than or equal to the 
rate required for compliance. 
(c) Adjust the dwelling unit window openings to bring the dwelling unit to the WHF -OP of 
negative 10 Pa ± 5 Pa WRT outside. 
(d) Measure the airflow rate(s) at the inlet grille(s) in accordance with RA3.9.3.2 with a 
calibrated powered flow hood to determin e the total WHF airflow for the dwelling unit. 
No part of the WHF intake shall be blocked or masked off to accommodate an undersized hood. 
Operation of the powered flow hood shall conform to the specifications in the manufacturer's 
product documentation. 
RA3.9.4.1.3 WHF Airflow Rate Measurement Using Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
The WHF airflow measurement shall be performed using the following procedures. 
(a) Open the window(s) that are typically opened during WHF operation. 
(b) Turn on all WHFs required to meet the dwelling unit WHF airflow rate. Adjust multiple or 
variable speed WHFs to operate at an airflow rate that will be greater than or equal to the 
rate required for compliance. 
(c) Adjust the dwelling unit window openings to bring the dwelling unit to the WHF -OP of 
negative 10 Pa ± 5 Pa WRT outside. 
(d) Measure the airflow rate(s) at the inlet grille(s) with a calibrated traditional flow capture 
hood to determine the total WHF airflow for the dwelling unit. 
No part of the WHF intake shall be blocked or masked off to accommodate an undersized hood. 
Operation of the flow hood shall conform to the specifications in the manufacturer's product 
documentation. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
 
    
 
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
   
    
   
  
  
  
   
 
   
  RA3-104 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA3.9.4.2 WHF Fan Watt Draw Measurement Procedures 
When multiple WHFs are used to comply with the required WHF watt draw for the dwelling unit, 
all WHFs in the dwelling unit shall be operated simultaneously and the sum of the watt draw 
measurements of the simultaneously operating WHFs for the dwelling shal l be determined. 
When required for compliance, the WHF watt draw shall be measured using one of the following 
methods: 
RA3.9.4.2.1 WHF Watt Draw Measurement Using Portable Watt Meter 
The WHF watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures. 
(a) The WHF(s) shall be operating at the WHF -OP used for the airflow rate measurement 
procedures specified in Section RA3.9.4.1. 
(b) Measure the watt draw(s) to determine the total WHF watt draw for the dwelling unit. 
When measuring watt draw of units that are wired directly to an electrical junction box, it is 
recommended to use portable true power clamp -on meters to provide flexibility for isolating the 
correct fan wires. 
RA3.9.4.2.2 WHF Watt Draw Measurement Using Utility Revenue Meter 
The WHF watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures. 
(a) Turn off every circuit breaker except the one exclusively serving the WHF(s). 
(b) The WHF(s) shall be operating at the WHF -OP used for the airflow rate measurement 
procedures specified in Section RA3.9.4.1. 
(c) Record the Kh factor on the revenue meter, count the number of full revolutions of the 
meter wheel over a period exceeding 90 seconds. 
(d) Record the number of revolutions (Nrev) and time period (trev, seconds). 
(e) Using the following equation, compute the WHF watt draw (Wfan). 
Equation RA3.9 -1 WHF Fan Watt Draw  Wfan = (Kh x Nrev x 3600) / trev 
(f) Return all circuit breakers to their original positions. 
RA3.9.4.2.3 WHF Watt Draw Measurement Using Digital Utility Revenue Meter 
The WHF watt draw measurement shall be performed using the following procedures : 
(a) Turn off every circuit breaker except the one exclusively serving the WHF(s). 
(b) The WHF(s) shall be operating at the WHF -OP used for the airflow rate measurement 
procedures specified in Section RA3.9.4.1. 
(c) Read the Watt draw from the digital utility meter digital display. 
(d) Return all circuit breakers to their original positions. 
– Resident ial HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
 
 
   
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA3-105 
RA3.9.4.3 Determination of WHF Efficacy 
Demonstrating compliance with WHF efficacy requirements requires simultaneous measurement 
of the WHF airflow rate using Section RA3.9.4.1 procedures and fan watt draw using Section 
RA3.9.4.2 procedures. The results of the simultaneous airflow rate and fan Watt draw 
measurements are used for calculation of a value for the WHF efficacy as follows: 
RA3.9.4.3.1 Fan Efficacy Calculation (watt/cfm) 
The measured value for fan watt draw (watt) shall be divided by the measured value for airflow 
rate (cfm) to determine the fan efficacy (watt/cfm). 
RA3.9.4.4 WHF Compliance Criteria 
In order for the WHF to comply, the requirements in both subsections (a) and (b) below shall be 
met. 
(a) The measured WHF airflow (cfm) shall meet or exceed the WHF airflow compliance 
criterion specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) The calculated value for fan efficacy (watt/cfm) shall be less than or equal to the WHF 
efficacy compliance criterion specified on the Certificate of Compliance. 
Appendix RA3 – Residential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols    
    
   
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-1 
Residential Appendix RA4 
Appendix RA4 – Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency 
Measures 
RA4.1 Purpose and Scope 
This appendix contains the eligibility requirements which must be met when any of the following 
features are installed to achieve compliance with the residential building energy efficiency 
standards.  Building Envelope Measures. 
RA4.2 Envelope Measures 
RA4.2.1 Radiant Barriers 
Radiant barriers shall meet specific eligibility and installation criteria to be modeled by any 
compliance software and receive energy credit for compliance with the Building Energy Efficiency 
Standards for low -rise residential buildings. 
The emittance of the radiant barrier shall be less than or equal to 0.05 as tested in accordance 
with ASTM C1371 or ASTM E408. 
Installation shall conform to ASTM C1158 (Standard Practice for Installation and Use of Radiant 
Barrier Systems (RBS) in Building Construction), ASTM C727 (Standard Practice for Installation 
and Use of Reflective Insulation in Building Constructions), ASTM C1313 (Standard Specification 
for Sheet Radiant Barriers for Building Construction Applications ), and ASTM C1224 ( Standard 
Specification for Reflective Insulation for Building Applications ), and the radiant barrier shall be 
securely installed in a permane nt manner with the shiny side facing down toward the interior of 
the building (ceiling or attic floor). Moreover, radiant barriers shall be installed at the top chords 
of the roof truss/rafters in any of the following methods: 
(a) Draped over the truss/rafter (the top chords) before the upper roof decking is installed. 
(b) Spanning between the truss/rafters (top chords) and secured (stapled) to each side. 
(c) Secured (stapled) to the bottom surface of the truss/rafter (top chord). A minimum air 
space shall be maintained between the top surface of the radiant barrier and roof decking 
of not less than 1.5 inches at the center of the truss/rafter span. 
(d) Attached [laminated] directly to the underside of the roof decking. The radiant barrier 
shall be laminated and perforated by the manufacturer to allow moisture/vapor transfer 
through the roof deck. 
(e) In addition, the radiant barrier shall be installed to cover all gable end walls and other 
vertical surfaces in the attic. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
     
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
   
 RA4-2 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA4.2.1.1 For Prescriptive Compliance:  The attic shall be ventilated to: 
(a) Provide a minimum free ventilation area of not less than one square foot of vent area for 
each 300 ft² of attic floor area. 
(b) Provide no less than 30 percent upper vents. 
(c) Ridge vents or gable end vents are recommended to achieve the best performance. The 
material should be cut to allow for full airflow to the venting. 
(d) The product shall meet all requirements for California certified insulation materials [radiant 
barriers] of the Department of Consumer Affairs, Bureau of Household Goods and Services , as 
specified by CCR, Title 24, Part 12, Chapter 12 -13, Standards for Insulating Material. 
(e) The use of a radiant barrier shall be listed in the Special Features and Modeling Assumptions 
listings of the Certificate of Compliance and described in detail in the Residential ACM Manual 
Conform to the radiant barrier manufacturer's instructions. 
RA4.2.2 Fenestration Including Dynamic Glazing 
For each manufactured fenestration products including dynamic glazing a temporary NFRC Label , 
or a temporary Default Label , will be attached to each fenestration product.  The labels shall 
remain attached to the fenestration product until the building inspector verifies the efficiencies. 
Before installation the installer or responsible party shall fill out the Installation Certificate form 
for the fenestration including dynamic glazing and verify the efficiencies (e.g. , U-factor and SHGC) 
matches the Certificate of Compliance and the building plans.  A copy of the Installation 
Certificate shall remain at the job site and a copy given to the building owner and the 
enforcement agency for their records. 
RA4.2.2.1 Installer Shall Verify: 
(a) Name of the manufacture, brand name, model matches building plans or energy compliance 
forms; 
(b) That each manufactured fenestration product shall be provided with a temporary NFRC Label 
Certificate or a Default Label to identify the thermal performance (e.g. , U-factor, and SHGC) 
of each fenestration product being installed; 
(c) Identify the azimuth orientation in degrees or in cardinal orientation for each of the installed 
fenestration products and annotated on the Installation Certificate; 
(d) If no NFRC Label is included on the fenestration, then verify with the Responsible Person of 
the building construction or enforcement agency to ensure the fenestration product used 
actually meets or exceeds the energy specifications; 
(e) For dynamic glazing ,; to ensure reliable proper control operation, the controls shall be 
installed and verified to meet manufactures operation specifications.  A copy of the User 
Manual shall be provided to the building owner; 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
   
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-3 
(f) The installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the Installation Certificate 
and signed copy of the Installation Certificate(s) shall remain at the job site; and 
(g) A copy shall be given to the building owner and the enforcement agency for their records. 
RA4.2.2.2 Window Film 
These procedures detail the installation protocols necessary for window films.  Each window film 
product to be installed is provided with a temporary NFRC Label on the box to identify the 
thermal performance efficiencies (e.g. , U-factor, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), and Visible 
Transmittance (VT)). The labels shall be located at the job site for verification by the enforcement 
agency. In addition, the responsible person or the installer shall fill out the Installation Cer tificate 
and shall verify the thermal performance efficiencies of each window film to be installed matches 
the energy Certificate of Compliance documentation and the building plans orientation schedule. 
A copy of the Installation Certificates shall be given to the building owner and t he enforcement 
agency for their records along with other window film information. 
RA4.2.2.2.1 Window Film Documentation at Occupancy 
(a) The IW FA Architectural Visual Inspection Standard Window Film (dated August 21, 2018 ), a 
copy can be obtained through www.iwfa.com www.iwfa.com ; 
(b) A sample (8” x 10”) of the film installed with a copy of its Performance Specification Sheet 
attached; and 
(c) A 15 or more year Warranty Certificate(s) shall be given to the building owner. 
RA4.2.2.3 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Verify Before Installation; 
(a) Name of the manufacture, brand name, model matches building plans or energy compliance 
forms; and 
(b) From the building plans or energy compliance documentation identify the azimuth 
orientation in degrees or in cardinal orientation for each of the window film to be installed to 
ensure the correct window film type is installed in the appropriate orientation ; and 
(c) Verify the temporary NFRC label on the box for each window film’s U -factor, Solar Heat Gain 
(SHGC) and Visible Transmittance (VT) matches the energy compliance documentation and 
building plans; and 
(d) List the NFRC Certified Product Directory (CPD) identification number provided on the label 
on the Installation Certificate form; and 
(e) If no NFRC Label is included on the box or identification of the window film, then verify with 
the Responsible Person of the building construction or enforcement agency to ensure the 
window film used actually meets or exceeds the energy specifications; and 
(f) Installation of window films shall follow the International Window Film Association (IWFA) 
Architectural Visual Inspection Standards Window Film (dated August 21, 2018 ); and , 
(g) After the installation, the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Installation Certificate. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
     
 
  
  
 
  
   
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
     
 
      
 
   
 
 
 
  
   
 
  
  RA4-4 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA4.2.2.4 Documentation at Occupancy 
The following documentation shall be made available to the building owner at occupancy: 
(a) Completed and signed Installation Certificate form(s); 
(b) A 10 or more year Warranty Certificate(s) shall be given to the building owner for 
fenestration products other than window films. 
RA4.3 HVAC Measures 
RA4.3.1 Evaporatively -Cooled Condensing Units 
To ensure reliable energy savings and proper operation and control, the evaporatively -cooled 
condensing unit shall conform to the requirements in section RA4.3.1. 
The HERS verifications and eligibility testing listed in sections RA4.3.1.1 and RA4.3.1.2 shall be 
completed, certified by the HVAC installer on the Certificate of Installation, and verified by a 
HERS ECC-Rater on the Certificate of Verification. 
The builder or installer shall provide a Certificate of Compliance that reports the use of an 
evaporatively -cooled condensing unit for determining performance standards compliance, that 
requires HERS verification of the system equipment, duct sealing, and refrigerant charge for 
compliance as described in Section RA4.3.1.1. 
RA4.3.1.1 HERS Verification 
The following shall be verified by a HERS ECC-rater and reported on a Certificate of Verification 
for the system: 
(a) EER2 at 95 o F dry bulb and 75 o F wet bulb temperature is listed with ARI (generally called 
EERa). 
(b) EER2 at 82 o F dry bulb and 65 o F wet bulb temperature is submitted to ARI and published 
by the manufacturer in accordance with ARI guidelines (generally called EERb). 
(c) Presence of TXV is verified , if the ARI certified EER 2s are based on equipment with TXVs. 
(d) Ducts are tested and sealed in all installations of this equipment according to applicable 
requirements in Section RA3.1. 
(e) Proper refrigerant charge or presence of Fault Indicator Display (FID) is verified if 
compliance credit is taken for this measure when TXVs are not installed. 
RA4.3.1.2 Eligibility Testing Eligibility Testing 
The installing contractor shall complete the following eligibility testing and document the results 
on the applicable Certificate of Installation. 
(a) Verify that there is water in the water casing. 
(b) Switch on the cooling system by setting the thermostat below the room temperature. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
     
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
   
  
 
   
 
 
  
   
 
   
   
 
  2025 Residential Appendices RA4-5 
(c) Verify that the water pump starts running when the system is turned on. 
(d) When the water pump is running, verify that all the condenser coils are wet. 
(e) Verify that the high pressure trip for the compressor is set (per manufacturer’s 
specifications) at or below 300 psig for R22 Refrigerant and at or below the saturation 
pressure corresponding to a temperature of 1310 F for all other refrigerants. 
(f) Turn off the water supply to the water casing, drain the water from the sump, and verify 
that the water pump and the compressor trip. 
(g) Verify that the condenser coils have a corrosion resistant coating and that the water 
casing is made up of corrosion resistant material. 
(h) Verify that the electrolytic protection is installed. 
(i) Verify that a blow -down pump is installed for periodic blow -down to remove solids from 
the water casing. 
(j) Verify that the operation of this pump is automatic based on compressor run time or 
the conductivity of the water in the casing. 
(k) Verify that the water casing is sloped downward towards the blow -down pump location 
to facilitate removal of solids. 
(l) Drift eliminators must be installed to reduce the loss of water to less than 0.002% of 
the recirculated water (as per test method CTI -HBIK Std.140 or other approved 
procedure). 
(m) Condensate water must be routed to the evaporative condenser sump, unless it is not 
practical , i.e., the fan coil and condenser not separated by conditioned space. 
(n) Condenser must have a certification from the manufacturer that water consumption is 
less than 0.15 gph per ton of capacity. 
(o) Water connection is made with tubing no large than ¼1/4 inch diameter. 
(p) Overflow from the unit is not connected directly to the sewer drain (son in the event of 
a water float failure an overflow condition can be more easily detected) or another 
means of determining an overflows condition is provided. 
(q) The system has a backup solenoid water shutoff control or no spill sump. 
RA4.3.2 Evaporative Cooling 
Qualifying equipment is limited to either indirect -direct or indirect evaporative coolers.  Direct 
evaporative coolers and indirect or indirect -direct evaporative coolers that do not meet the 
following eligibility criteria shall not be used. 
RA4.3.2.1 Eligibility Testing 
The installing contractor shall complete the following eligibility testing and document the results 
on the applicable Certificate of Installation. 
(a) Eligible equipment shall be listed under Title 20 Appliance Standards. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
    
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
   RA4-6 2025 Residential Appendices 
(b) The equipment manufacturer shall certify to the Commission that water use does not 
exceed 7.5 gallons per ton hour based on the Title 20 Appliance Standards testing criteria. 
(c) Equipment shall be permanently installed (no window or portable units). 
(d) Installation shall provide for automatic relief of supply air from the house with maximum 
air velocity through the relief dampers not exceeding 800 fpm (at the Title 20 rated 
airflow).  Pressure relief dampers and ductwork shall be distributed to provide a dequate 
airflow through all habitable rooms. For installations with an attic, ceiling dampers shall 
be installed to relieve air into the attic, and then to outside through attic vents.  For 
installations without an attic, sidewall relief dampers are accept able. 
(e) To minimize water consumption, bleed systems shall not be allowed. 
(f) A water quality management system (either “pump out” or conductivity sensor) is 
required.  “Pump out” systems can either be integral to the evaporative cooler or they can 
be accessories that operate on a timed interval.  The time interval between dumps sha ll 
be set to a minimum of six hours of cooler operation.  Longer intervals are encouraged if 
local water quality allows. 
RA4.4 Water Heating Measures 
RA4.4.1 Proper Installation of Pipe Insulation 
Unless otherwise stated, i Insulation must meet the requirements specified in §150.0(j). Pipe 
insulation shall fit tightly to the pipe and all elbows and tees shall be fully insulated.  No piping 
should be visible due to insulation voids with the exception of the last segment of piping that 
penetrates walls and delivers hot water to the sink, appliance, etc.  All domestic hot water piping 
shall b e insulated as specified in Section 609. 11 12 of the California Plumbing Code.  
Pipe insulation may be omitted where hot water distribution piping is buried within attic, 
crawlspace or wall insulation, as described below: In attics and crawlspaces the insulation shall 
completely surround the pipe with at least 1 inch of insulation and the pipe shall be completely 
covered with at least 4 inches of insulation further away from the conditioned space. In walls, the 
insulation must completely surround the pipe with at least 1 inch of insulation. If burial within the 
insulation does not meet these specifications, then this exception does not apply, and the section 
of pipe not meeting the specifications must be insulated as specified in §150.0(j). 
RA4.4.2 The Standard Distribution System (STD) 
The Standard Distribution System design requires that hot water distribution piping meets the 
requirements of Proper Installation of Pipe Insulation R4.4.1. 
RA4.4.3 Reserved for future use Thermostatic Balancing Valve 
To receive the thermostatic balancing valve credit, calculations shall be completed that 
demonstrate that the length of the return piping portion of the domestic hot water recirculation 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
   
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-7 
loop does not exceed 160 feet. If the domestic hot water has multiple recirculation pipe loops, 
the length of any hot water return pipe shall not exceed 160 feet to receive credit. 
A variable speed circulation pump with pump differential pressure control shall be installed. The 
circulation pump design flow rate should be calculated to meet the design hot water return 
temperature based on the calculated distribution system heat losses and the design hot water 
supply temperature. The circulation pump specified should be the smallest pump required to 
meet the design flow rate as calculated and documented by the responsible person associated 
with the project. 
Each thermostatic balancing valve shall be installed after the last fixture on the hot water supply 
riser it serves. As part of the installer’s start -up procedure, the installer shall perform the 
following: 
(a) Close all fixtures in the domestic water system . 
(b) Start the circulation pump at a constant speed, targeting the circulation pump design 
flow, and allow the system 60 minutes to warm up . 
(c) Verify that the temperature at the last riser does not exceed 120 °F. 
(d) If the temperature at the last riser exceeds 120 °F, adjust the pump speed down and 
repeat the procedure, allowing 30 minutes for warm up . 
(e) Once the temperature at the last riser is equal to or less than 120 °F, record the pump 
differential pressure and set the pump into differential pressure control mode using the 
recorded differential pressure as the set point . 
RA4.4.4 Central Parallel Piping (PP) 
This hot water distribution system is comprised of one or more manifolds located relatively close 
to the water heater and pipes running from the manifold to individual fixtures and appliances. 
The manifolds may have valves for each pipe running from the ma nifold to individual fixtures and 
appliances. These valves must be readily accessible in accordance with the plumbing code. The 
measured length of pipe from the water heater each central manifold shall not exceed 15 feet 
(measured to the nearest half foot) . 
The hot water distribution system piping from the manifold to the fixtures and appliances must 
take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -story and the water heater 
in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot water s upply piping from the manifold 
to the attic, and then running the line back down to a first floor point of use. 
The hot water distribution piping must be separated by at least two inches from any other hot 
water supply piping, and at least six inches from any cold water supply piping or the hot water 
supply piping must be insulated based on the conductivity range in TABLE 120.3 -A and the 
insulation level shall be selected from the fluid temperature range based on the thickness 
requirements in TABLE 120.3 -A. 
Other hot water piping shall be insulated to a level that meets the requirements of §150.0(j) and 
be installed in accordance with Proper Installation of Pipe Insulation R4.4.1. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
      
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
    
 
 
 RA4-8 2025 Residential Appendices 
RA4.4.5 Point of Use (POU) 
This measure requires that all hot water fixtures in the dwelling unit, with the exception of a 
stand -alone tub must use no more pipe per run than defined in Table 4.4.5. To meet this 
requirement most houses will require multiple water heaters. 
Table 4.4.5 
Size Nominal Length of Pipe 
(Inch) (feet) 
3/8” 15 
1/2” 10 
3/4” 5 
(a) Measurements shall be made to the nearest half foot. 
(b) If a combination of piping is used in a single run , then one half the allowed length of each 
size is the maximum installed length. 
(c) The hot water distribution system piping from the water heater(s) to the fixtures and 
appliances must take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -
story and the water heater in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot 
water supply piping from the manifold to the attic, and then running the line back down 
to a first floor point of use. 
(d) Hot water piping shall be insulated to a level that meets the requirements of §150.0(j) and 
be installed in accordance with Proper Installation of Pipe Insulation R4.4.1. 
RA4.4.6 Compact Hot Water Distribution System (CHWDS) 
To receive the Compact Hot Water Distribution System credit (available for single family homes 
and multifamily dwellings served by individual water heaters), plan calculations must be 
completed that demonstrate that the water heater to fixture proximity is more compact than a 
threshold criteria that is defined based on the dwelling unit conditioned floor area and number of 
stories. Compactness is characterized by calculating the “Weighted Distance” from the water 
heater to key fixtures and the threshold cri teria is identified by the “Qualification Distance”.  (The 
Qualification Distance is calculated directly by the ACM.) Determination of the Weighted Distance 
for a particular floor plan is dependent on whether it is a non -recirculating or a recirculating 
distribution system, with the recirculation option only available for single family homes. 
Calculation of the Weighted Distance varies depending on the type of system being installed. The 
calculation is based on a equation with modifications based on the distribution system type. In 
each case the basis of the calculation is the plan -view, straig ht line distance from the water 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
    
    
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
    
  
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA4-9 
heater to the center of the further use point fixture in three locations of the dwelling unit, two of 
which are the master bathroom and the kitchen. It is calculated using the following equation: 
Weighted_Distance = x * d_MasterBath + y * d_Kitchen + z * d_FurthestThird 
Where: 
x, y, and z = Weighted Distance coefficients (unitless), see Table 4.4.6 -1. 
d_MasterBath = The plan view, straight line distance from the water heater to the 
furthest fixture served by that water heater in the master bathroom (feet). 
d_Kitchen = The plan view, straight line distance from the water heater to the furthest 
fixture served by that water heater in the kitchen (feet). 
d_FurthestThird = The plan view, straight line distance from the water heater to the 
furthest fixture served by that water heater in the furthest room7 in the dwelling unit 
(feet). 
Table 4.4.6 -1: Weighted Distance Coefficients 
Distribution System x y z 
Non -Recirculating 0.4 0.4 0.2 
Recirculating 0.0 0.0 1.0 
Note that the calculations are only based on horizontal plan view distance measurements from 
the center of the water heater to the center of the use point in the designated location8. Vertical 
pipe run lengths (for example, the vertical distance from the first to second floor) is neglected in 
the calculations. Use points that are located on floors different than the water heater would have 
their location translated to the floor where the water heater is located. 
In single family homes with multiple water heaters, the Weighted Distance “z term” calculation is 
performed for each water heater to arrive at a Furthest Third term averaged over each of the “n” 
water heaters installed. For a non -recirculating distribution system, the resulting Weighted 
Distance calculation would include the Master Bath, the Kitchen and an average of the Furthest 
Third term for each of the installed water heaters. (For recirculating systems, similarly the 
Furthest Third term would represent an average across the “n” water heaters.) 
The Qualification Distance is a function of conditioned floor area (CFA), number of stories, and 
number of installed water heaters.  The Qualification Distance for systems with multiple water 
heaters is identified by using the equation for the appropriate distribution system (recirculation 
or non -recirculation), and dividing by the number of water heaters installed as shown in the 
Equation below: 
7 Because the Master Bath and Kitchen have unique separate terms, the d_FurthestThird fixture must located in neither of these rooms . The 
laundry room is excluded, and shall not be used as the furthest third fixture.  In multifamily cases where there is not anoth er qualifying use 
point, the d_FurthestThird term equals zero. 
8 For example, a shower/tub combination would take the measurement from the fixture supply outlet of the shower/tub, while a tw o sink lavatory 
in the master bath would take the measurement from the fixture supply outlet of the lavatory furthest from the water heater . 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
    
 
   
   
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
     
     
     
 
     
 
     
   
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 RA4-10 2025 Residential Appendices 
Qualification Distance = (a + b * CFA) / n 
Where: 
a, b = Qualification distance coefficients (unitless), see Table 4.4.6 -2, 
CFA = Conditioned floor area of the dwelling unit (ft2), and 
n = Number of water heaters in the dwelling unit (unitless). 
Table 4.4.6 -2: Coefficients for the Qualification Distance Calculation 
Building Type Coefficient a 
Non -Recirculating Coefficient a 
Recirculating Coefficient b 
Non -Recirculating Coefficient b 
Recirculating 
Single Family 
One story 10 22.7 0.0095 0.0099 
Single Family 
Two story 15 11.5 0.004 5 0.0095 
Single Family 
Three story 10 0.5 0.0030 0.014 
Multi family 
One story 7.5 n/a 0.0080 n/a 
Multifamily 
Two or more 
story 7.5 n/a 0.0050 n/a 
RA4.4.7 Recirculation Systems 
RA4.4.7.1 Installation requirements for all recirculation systems 
The supply portion of each circulation loop, the first five feet of branches off the loop and the 
dedicated return line are insulated based on the conductivity range in TABLE 120.3 -A and the 
insulation level shall be selected from the fluid temperature range based on the thickness 
requirements in TABLE 120.3 -A and the insulation shall be installed in accordance with Proper 
Installation of Pipe Insulation . Other hot water piping shall meet the requirements of §150.0(j) 
and be installed in accordance with Pro per Installation of Pipe Insulation R4.4.1. 
A check valve shall be installed in the recirculation loop to prevent unintentional circulation of 
the water (thermo -siphoning) and back flow when the system is not operating.  This check valve 
may be included with the pump. 
The hot water distribution system piping from the water heater(s) to the fixtures and appliances 
must take the most direct path.  For example, in a house with more than 1 -story and the water 
heater in the garage, this requirement would exclude running hot water supply piping from the 
water heater to the attic, and then running the line back down to a first floor point of use. 
The recirculation pump can be located external to the water heater or be integral to the water 
heater.  
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
  
  
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-11 
The manufacturer(s) of the recirculation pump and the controls shall provide installation and 
operation instructions that provide details of the operation of the pump and controls , and such 
instructions shall be available at the jobsite for inspection. 
RA4.4.8 Recirculation with non -demand controls (R-ND) 
All recirculation controls with the exception of demand recirculation control systems fall under 
this category. 
(a) More than one circulation loop may be installed. Each loop shall have its own pump and 
controls. 
(b) The active control shall be either: timer, temperature, or time and temperature. Timers 
shall be set to less than 24 hours. The temperature sensor shall be connected to the 
piping and to the controls for the pump. 
RA4.4.9 Demand Recirculation; Manual Control (R-DRmc) 
Demand controlled recirculation systems shall operate “on -demand”, meaning that pump 
operation shall be initiated shortly prior to the hot water draw. The controls shall operate on the 
principal of shutting off the pump with a sensed rise in pipe temperatu re (Delta -T). For this 
measure a manual switch is used to activate the pump. 
(a) More than one circulation loop may be installed. Each loop shall have its own pump and 
controls. 
(b) Manual controls shall be located in the kitchen, bathrooms, and any hot water fixture 
location that is at least 20 feet (measured along the hot water piping) from the water 
heater. 
(c) Manual controlled systems may be activated by wired or wireless mechanisms, Manual 
controls shall have standby power of 1 watt or less. 
(d) Pump and demand control placement meets one of the following criteria. 
1. When a dedicated return line has been installed the pump, demand controls and 
thermo -sensor are installed at the end of the supply portion of the recirculation loop 
(typically under a sink); or 
2. The pump and demand controls are installed on the return line near the water heater 
and the thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location as close to the end of the 
supply portion of the recirculation loop as possible (typically under a sink), o r 
3. When the cold water line is used as the return, the pump, demand controls and 
thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location at the end of supply portion of the hot 
water distribution line (typically under a sink). 
(e) Insulation is not required on the cold water line when it is used as the return. 
(f) Demand controls shall be able to shut off the pump in accordance with one of the 
following two methods: 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
    
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
 RA4-12 2025 Residential Appendices 
1. After the pump has been activated, the controls shall allow the pump to operate 
until the water temperature at the thermo -sensor rises not more than 10ºF ( 5.6 
ºC ) above the initial temperature of the water in the pipe, or 
2. The controls shall not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the 
pipe exceeds 102ºF (38.9 ºC). 
(g) The controls shall limit pump operation to a maximum of 5 minutes following any 
activation.  This is provided in the event that the normal means of shutting off the pump 
have failed. 
RA4.4.10 Demand Recirculation; Sensor Control (RDRsc) 
Demand controlled recirculation systems shall operate “on -demand”, meaning that pump 
operation shall be initiated shortly prior to the hot water draw. The controls shall operate on the 
principal of shutting off the pump with a sensed rise in pipe temperatu re (Delta -T). For this 
measure a sensor control is used to activate the pump rather than a manual control. 
(a) More than one circulation loop may be installed. Each loop shall have its own pump and 
controls. 
(b) Sensor controls shall be located in the kitchen, bathrooms, and any hot water fixture 
location that is at least 20 feet (measured along the hot water piping) from the water 
heater. 
(c) Sensor controlled systems may be activated by wired or wireless mechanisms, including 
motion sensors, door switches and flow switches. Sensors controls shall have standby 
power of 1 watt or less. 
(d) Pump and demand control placement meets one of the following criteria. 
1. When a dedicated return line has been installed the pump, demand controls and 
thermo -sensor are installed at the end of the supply portion of the recirculation loop 
(typically under a sink); or 
2. The pump and demand controls are installed on the return line near the water heater 
and the thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location as close to the end of the 
supply portion of the recirculation loop as possible (typically under a sink), or 
3. When the cold water line is used as the return, the pump, demand controls and 
thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location at the end of supply portion of the 
hot water distribution line (typically under a sink). 
(e) Insulation is not required on the cold water line when it is used as the return. 
(f) Demand controls shall be able to shut off the pump in accordance with one of the 
following two methods: 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
  2025 Residential Appendices RA4-13 
1. After the pump has been activated, the controls shall allow the pump to operate until 
the water temperature at the thermo -sensor rises not more than 10ºF ( 5.6 ºC ) above 
the initial temperature of the water in the pipe, or 
2. The controls shall not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the pipe 
exceeds 102ºF (38.9 ºC). 
(g) The controls shall limit pump operation to a maximum of 5 minutes following any 
activation.  This is provided in the event that the normal means of shutting off the pump 
have failed. 
RA4.4.11 Multiple Dwelling Units: Recirculation Temperature Modulation Control 
A recirculation temperature modulation control shall reduce the hot water supply temperature 
when hot water demand is determined to be low by the control system. The control system may 
use a fixed control schedule or dynamic control schedules based measure ments of hot water 
demand. The daily hot water supply temperature reduction, which is defined as the sum of 
temperature reduction by the control in each hour within a 24 -hour period, shall be more than 
50 degrees Fahrenheit to qualify for the energy saving s credit. 
Recirculation systems shall also meet the requirements of §110.3. 
RA4.4.12 Multiple Dwelling Units: Recirculation Continuous Monitoring Systems 
Systems that qualify as a recirculation continuous monitoring systems for domestic hot water 
systems serving multiple dwelling units shall record no less frequently than hourly measurements 
of key system operation parameters, including hot water supply tem peratures, hot water return 
temperatures, and status of gas valve relays of water heating equipment. The continuous 
monitoring system shall automatically alert building operators of abnormalities identified from 
monitoring results. 
Recirculation systems shall also meet the requirements of §110.3. 
RA4.4.13 Multiple Dwelling Units: Demand Recirculation 
Demand controlled recirculation systems shall operate “on -demand”, meaning that pump 
operation shall be initiated shortly prior to, or by a hot water draw. The controls shall operate on 
the principal of shutting off the pump with a sensed rise in pipe temp erature (Delta -T). For this 
measure sensor or manual controls may be used to activate the pump(s). 
(a) Manual or sensor controls shall be installed and if powered, have standby power of 1 watt 
or less. Controls may be located in individual units or on the loop. Controls may be 
activated by wired or wireless mechanisms, including buttons, motion sensors, doo r 
switches and flow switches. 
(b) Pump and control placement shall meet one of the following criteria: 
1. When a dedicated return line has been installed the pump, controls and thermo -sensor 
are installed at the end of the supply portion of the recirculation loop; or 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
    
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
   
   
  
   
  
 
 
  
 
     
  
 
  
  
 
 RA4-14 2025 Residential Appendices 
2. The pump and controls are installed on the dedicated return line near the water heater 
and the thermo -sensor is installed in an accessible location as close to the end of the 
supply portion of the recirculation loop as possible, or 
3. When the cold water line is used as the return, the pump, demand controls and 
thermosensor shall be installed in an accessible location at the end of supply portion of 
the hot water distribution line (typically under a sink). 
(c) Insulation is not required on the cold water line when it is used as the return. 
(d) Demand controls shall be able to shut off the pump in accordance with these three 
methods: 
1. After the pump has been activated, the controls shall allow the pump to operate until 
the water temperature at the thermo -sensor rises not more than 10ºF ( 5.6 ºC ) above 
the initial temperature of the water in the pipe, or 
2. The controls shall not allow the pump to operate when the temperature in the pipe 
exceeds 102ºF (38.9 ºC). 
3. The controls shall limit pump operation to a maximum of 10 minutes following any 
activation.  This is provided in the event that the normal means of shutting off the 
pump have failed. 
Recirculation systems shall also meet the requirements of §110.3. 
RA4.4.14 HERS -Verified Pipe Insulation Credit (PIC -H)for Single Dwelling 
Consistent with the requirements of RA 3.6.2 4.4.1 , this measure requires a n ECC-rater HERS 
inspection to verify that all hot water piping is insulated correctly. 
RA4.4.15 HERS -Verified Parallel Piping (PP-H) 
Consistent with the requirements of RA4.4.4 this measure requires a n ECC -rater HERS inspection 
to verify that the length of pipe between the water heater and each central manifold does not 
exceed 5 feet and to verify pipe insulation. 
RA4.4.16 HERS -Verified Compact Hot Water Distribution System Expanded Credit (CHWDS -H-
EX) 
A HERS inspection ECC-rater verification is required in order to obtain this credit. To meet the 
Compact Hot Water Distribution System Expanded Credit eligibility requirements, the 
requirements in RA4.4.6 must be met.  In addition, the following HERS field verifications are 
required: 
(a) No hot water piping >1” diameter piping is allowed, 
(b) Length of 1” diameter piping is limited to 8 ft or less, 
(c) Two and three story buildings cannot have hot water distribution piping in the attic, 
unless the water heater is also located in the attic and, 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
   
  
 
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  2025 Residential Appendices RA4-15 
(d) Eligible recirculating systems must be HERS -Verified Demand Recirculation: Manual 
Control conforming to RA4.4.17. 
RA4.4.17 HERS -Verified Demand Recirculation:  Manual Control (RDRmc -H) 
This measure shall include s a visual ECC-rater HERS inspection to verify that the demand pump, 
manual controls and thermo -sensor are pre sent and operating properly. 
RA4.4.18 HERS -Verified Demand Recirculation:  Sensor Control (RDRsc -H) 
This measure shall include s a visual ECC-rater HERS inspection to verify that the demand pump, 
sensor controls a nd thermo -sensor are present and operating properly. 
RA4.4.19 HERS -Verified Multiple Recirculation Loops for DHW Systems Serving Multiple 
Dwelling Units 
Multiple Dwelling Units: Master Mixing Valves Central DHW systems serving a building with 
more than eight dwelling units shall have at least two recirculation loops, each serving roughly 
the same number of dwelling units. Unique building sections may have additional recirculation 
loops.  These recirculation loops may be connected to the same water heating equipment or be 
connected to independent water heating equipment. This credit may be taken in combination 
with recirculation system. 
For central systems with hot water piping serving multiple dwelling units master mixing valves 
(MMV) shall meet the following minimum specification, installation, and startup requirements. 
RA4.4.19.1 Plumbing Plans 
The plumbing plans shall include the following M MV specification at a minimum: 
(a) Manufacturer’s installation and commissioning instructions and plumbing drawings. 
(b) MMV conforms to the American Society of Sanitation Engineers (ASSE) 1017 -2009 
standard, Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot 
Water Distribution Systems. 
(c) Water mixing parameters and associated values: 
1. Input parameters 
A. Recirculation pump flow rate 
B. Mixing valve outlet water temperature 
C. Recirculation return water temperature 
D. Mixing valve hot inlet water temperature 
2. Calculated parameters 
A. Percentage of water flow returning to cold side of MMV 
B. Percentage of water flow returning to hot side of MMV 
3. Manufacturer’s operating parameter 
A. Maximum water mixing ratio 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
    
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 RA4-16 2025 Residential Appendices 
These input parameters shall be used to calculate percentage of water flow on cold side and hot 
side of MV during recirculation water flow only condition to determine if the water mixing ratio 
exceeds mixing capability of the specified master mixing valve. If the calculated water flow ratio 
to the MMV inlet exceeds manufacturer’s recommendations for that valve, the designer shall 
provide instructions to commission the balancing valve to eliminate temperature creep to 
mitigate scalding risk after periods of no water draw. 
RA4.4.19.2 Installation 
Installation of MMV shall meet manufacturer’s instruction an d the following requirements at a 
minimum : 
(a) The MMV shall be installed on the central heating plant hot water supply outlet header 
leading to the recirculation loop. 
(b) Check valves installed on the recirculation return line and cold -water line to inlet cold 
connection of MMV and on recirculation return piping leading back to storage tank or 
water heater. 
(c) Isolation valves installed on the inlet cold water, inlet recirculation return, inlet hot and 
outlet connections to MMV and on recirculation return piping connection to storage tank 
or water heater. 
(d) Balancing valve installed on the recirculation return piping to the water heater for MMVs 
that cannot 100% close the hot inlet port during operation. 
(e) Thermometers installed on the outlet of the MMV and on the recirculation return line 
next the water pump. 
RA4.4.19.3 Startup 
(a) Startup testing of MMV during recirculation only operation. 
1. Close all hot fixtures in the domestic water system. 
2. Ensure that the water heater is operational and idling with storage tank plumbed 
to the mixing valve and meeting the hot inlet temperature specified in the 
plumbing plans. 
3. Start the recirculation pump and set mixed outlet temperature or setpoint 
temperature on the MMV. Start the circulation pump at the specified water flow 
rate and adjust as needed to meet recirculation return temperature specified in 
the plumbing plans. 
4. Let distribution system warm up and stabilize for 30 minutes and adjust mixing 
parameters as needed to realign with values in plumbing plans. 
5. Let the recirculation pump operate for three hours without any water draws to 
ensure there is no temperature creep. 
6. If during or after the three -hour period the MMV outlet and return temperature 
stays elevated by greater than 2°F and doesn’t return back to the specified 
temperature, then make necessary adjustments to the MMV. If temperature creep 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-17 
persists with mechanical MMV, adjust the balancing valve as necessary on the 
recirculation return line leading back to the water heater to ensure average MMV 
outlet temperature meets the specified temperature. 
7. If adjustments are made to MMV or balancing valve in Step 6, then repeat Step 5. 
(b) Startup testing of MMV for a combination of recirculation and hot water draws. 
1. Once the MMV is operational in a closed loop, make a water draw for 10 minutes using 
one of the following options: 
A. With a shower operating at full flow at every: three dwelling units in a building with 
15 or fewer dwelling units, five dwelling units in a building with 16 to 30 dwelling 
units, eight dwelling units in a building with 31 to 60 dwelling units, ten dwelling 
units in a building than 60 to 20 dwelling units, twenty dwelling units in a building 
with more than 200 dwelling units. 
B. The hot water valve on a hose bib, mop sink, or other fixture on the branch line or 
location on the hot water distribution line is opened to a draw volume of 1 gpm for 
every: three dwelling units in a building with 15 or fewer dwelling units, five 
dwelling units in a building with 16 to 30 dwelling units, eight dwelling units in a 
building with 31 to 60 dwelling units, ten dwelling units in a building than 60 to 200 
dwelling units, twenty dwelling units in a building with more than 200 dwelling 
units. 
2. Monitor recirculation return temperature on the thermometer during the 10 -minute draw 
period and ensure design return water temperature is maintained at the specified 
temperature documented in the plumbing plans. 
3. If the recirculation return temperature falls more than 5°F below the specified 
temperature during the draw period, then adjust MMV setup to ensure compliance . 
RA4.4.20 Solar Water Heating Systems 
Solar water -heating systems and/or collectors shall be certified and rated by the Solar Rating and 
Certification Corporation (SRCC), the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical 
Officials, Research and Testing (IAPMO R&T), or by a listing agency that is approved by the 
Executive Director. 
To use collectors with the SRCC OG -100 certification and rating, the installed system shall meet 
the following eligibility criteria: 
(a) Include all of the features modeled and generated in the Commission approved solar 
savings fraction calculation. 
(b) The collectors shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. 
(c) The collectors shall be located in a position that is not shaded by adjacent buildings or 
trees between 9:00 AM and 3:00 PM (solar time) on December 21. 
To use a solar water -heating system with the SRCC OG -300 certification and rating, the installed 
system shall meet the following eligibility criteria: 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
     
 
  
 
  
   
 
     
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
  RA4-18 2025 Residential Appendices 
(a) The collectors shall face within 35 degrees of south and be tilted at a slope of at least 
3:12. 
(b) The system shall be installed in the exact configuration for which it was rated. The 
system shall have the same collectors, pumps, controls, storage tank and backup 
water heater fuel type as the rated condition. 
(c) The system shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. 
(d) The collectors shall be located in a position that is not shaded by adjacent buildings or 
trees between 9:00 AM and 3:00 PM (solar time) on December 21. 
RA4.4.21 HERS -Verified Drain Water Heat Recovery System (DWHR -H) 
An ECC -rater HERS inspection is required to obtain this credit. All DWHR unit(s) shall be certified 
to the Energy Commission according to the following requirements: 
(a) Vertical DWHR unit(s) shall be compliant with CSA B55.2 , and tested and labeled in 
accordance with CSA B55.1 or IAPMO IGC 346 -2017.  Sloped DWHR unit(s) shall be 
compliant with IAPMO PS 92 , and tested and labeled with IAPMO IGC 346 -2017.  
(b) The DWHR unit(s) shall have a minimum rated effectiveness of 42 percent. 
The HERS inspector ECC-rater shall verify that: 
(a) The make, model, and CSA B55.1 or IAPMO IGC 346 -2017 rated effectiveness of the 
DWHR unit(s) shall match the compliance documents.  The DWHR unit(s) shall also be 
verified as a model certified to the Energy Commission as qualified for credit as a DWHR 
unit(s). 
(b) The installation configuration (e.g. , equal flow, unequal flow to the water heater, or 
unequal flow to the showers) and the percent of served shower fixtures shall match the 
compliance documents. 
(c) For water heating system serving a single dwelling, the DWHR system shall, at the 
minimum, recover heat from the master bathroom shower and must at least transfer that 
heat either back to all the respective showers or the water heater. 
(d) For central water heating system serving multiple dwellings, the DWHR system shall, at 
the minimum, recover heat from half the showers located above the first floor and must 
at least transfer that heat either back to all the respective showers or the water heater. 
(e) The DWHR unit(s) shall be installed within 1 degrees of the rated slope.  Sloped DWHR 
shall have a minimum lengthwise slope of 1 degree. The lateral level tolerance shall be 
within plus or minus 1 degree. 
(f) The installation shall comply with any applicable California Plumbing Code requirements. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
     
     
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
   2025 Residential Appendices RA4-19 
RA4.5 Other Measures 
RA4.5.1 Controlled Ventilation Crawlspace (CVC) 
Drainage. Proper enforcement of site engineering and drainage, and emphasis on the importance 
of proper landscaping techniques in maintaining adequate site drainage, is critical. 
Ground Water Aand Soils. Local ground water tables at maximum winter recharge elevation 
should be below the lowest excavated site foundation elevations. Sites that are well drained and 
that do not have surface water problems are generally good candidates for this stem -wall 
insulation strategy. However, the eligibility of this alternative insulating technique is entirely at 
the enforcement agency officials' discretion. Where disagreements exist, it is incumbent upon 
the applicant to provide sufficient proof that site drainage strategies (e.g., perimeter drainage 
techniques) will prevent potential problems. 
Ventilation. All crawl space vents must have automatic vent dampers to receive this credit. 
Automatic vent dampers must be shown on the building plans and installed. The dampers should 
be temperature actuated to be fully closed at approximately 40°F and fu lly open at approximately 
70°F. Cross ventilation consisting of the required vent area reasonably distributed between 
opposing foundation walls is required. 
Foam Plastic Insulating Materials. Foam plastic insulating materials must be shown on the plans 
and installed when complying with the following requirements: 
Fire Safety —CBC Section 719. Products shall be protected as specified. Certain products have 
been approved for exposed use in under floor areas by testing and/or listing. 
Direct Earth Contact —Foam plastic insulation used for crawl -space insulation having direct earth 
contact shall be a closed cell water resistant material and meet the slab -edge insulation 
requirements for water absorption and water vapor transmission rate s pecified in the mandatory 
measures. 
Vapor Retarder:  A Class I or Class II vapor retarder shall be placed over the earth floor of the 
crawl space to reduce moisture entry and protect insulation from condensation, as specified in 
the exception to Section 150.0(d). 
RA4.5.2 Sunspace 
The installation of a sunspace can be a very beneficial energy features in many parts of California.  
However, if orientation fenestration area or fenestration performance values are installed that to 
not match compliance documentation then the performance of a sunroom can have significant 
negative energy impacts.  Another critical component s of sunroom is ventilation.  Sunrooms must 
have the ability to vent to the outside and to provide airflow to the rest of the house.  If any of 
these components are not present in the actual installation the performance documentation 
should be reviewed carefully. 
RA4.5.3 Multiple Orientations Compliance 
When all orientations are used to document compliance as allowed under Section 150.1(c)4 
EXCEPTION, the following guidelines shall be meet.  Compliance for multifamily or subdivisions 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures                 
 
     
 
    
 
 
 
 
  RA4-20 2025 Residential Appendices 
that is based upon multiple orientation the annual energy consumption for each specific design 
(including the reverse images of that design) must be calculated in each of the four cardinal 
orientations: true north, true east, true south and true west. With this option, a dwelling unit 
plan must be modeled using the identical combination of energy features and levels in each 
orientation , and must comply with the energy budget in each case. All of the orientation must 
either use the reversed plan or the origi nal/standard to demonstrate compliance. 
If the dwelling unit have unique designs or energy features the dwelling unit plan must be 
modeled using the worst -case condition for the energy features that the plan may contain (e.g. , 
highest glazing percentage, least overhangs, largest wall surface area, and with exterior walls 
instead of party walls if applicable). See Reference Residential Appendix RA 2.6.1 for information 
that describes how to determine when a dwelling is considere d to be a unique model. Each 
unique dwelling plan must also be modeled separately for each unique floor level.  The option of 
modeling each individual dwelling unit, with its unique characteristics separately according to its 
actual orientation is always an acceptable alternative. 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Residential Appendices RA4-21 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
– Eligibility Criteria for Energy Efficiency Measures    
     
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA1 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and 
Documentation Procedures 
California Home Energy Rating Systems Field Verification and 
Diagnostic Testing 
Appendix NA1 provides direction for communication and docu mentation processes that must be 
completed for compliance with the HERS verification verification requirements for multifamily 
dwelling units (dwelling units) , and for HERS verification verification of duct sealing of HVAC systems 
covered by § 120.4(g) , §141.0(b)2D ii, and §141.0(b)2E (systems) that require field verification and 
diagnostic testing by a n ECC-certified Home Energy Rating System (HERS) Rater, using the testing 
procedures in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA2. The Commission approves HERS 
Provider ECC-Provider s, subject to the Commission’s HERS P program regulations, which appear in 
the California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Chapter 4, Article 8, Sections 1670 -1675 Title 24, Part 1, 
Section 10 -103.3 . Approved HERS Provider ECC-Provider s are authorized to certify HERS Rater ECC-
Rater s and maintain quality control over field verification and diagnostic testing . 
When the Certificate of Compliance indicates that field verification and diagnostic testing of specific 
energy efficiency measures are required as a condition for compliance with Title 24, Part 6, an 
approved HERS Provider ECC-Provider and certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall be used to conduct 
the field verification and diagnostic testing according to the applicable procedures in Reference 
Nonresidential Appendix NA2. HERS Providers and HERS Raters shall be considered special 
inspectors by enforcement agenci es and shall demonstrate competence to the satisfaction of the 
enforcement agency, for field verifications and diagnostic testing. As specified by California Code of 
Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1673(j)(2) Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -
103.3 , HERS Provider ECC-Provider s and HERS Rater ECC-Rater s shall be independent entities from 
the builder or subcontractor installer of the energy efficiency improvements being field verified or 
diagnostically tested. An “Independent Entity means having no financial interest in, and not 
advocating or recommending the use of any product or service as a means of gaining increased 
business with, firms or persons specified in CCR Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Sections 
1671 and 1673(j) Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 ”. Third Party Quality Control Programs approved 
by the Commission may serve some of the functions of HERS Rater ECC-Rater s for field verification 
and diagnostic testing purposes as specified in NA1.7. Also, Acceptance Test Technicians may serve 
the function of a HERS Rater an ECC -Rater for field verification and diagnostic testing purposes as 
specified in NA1. 9. 
The remainder of Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA1 describes the: 
(a) Requirements for documentation and communication for HERS verification verification 
compliance processes; 
(b) Responsibilities assigned to each of the parties involved in the field verification and 
diagnostic testing process; 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
    
 
   
 
   
  
   
 
   
 
  
 
   
   
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
   
  
   
   
  
 
  
  
 Appendix NA1 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(c) Requirements for procedures for installing contractors and Certificate of Installation 
documentation; 
(d) Requirements for HERS Rater ECC-Rater field verification and diagnostic testing and 
documentation procedures; 
(e) Requirements for sampling procedures for HERS verification verification compliance; 
(f) Requirements for Third Party Quality Control Programs; 
(g) Requirements for HERS verification verification compliance for alterations to existing 
buildings. 
Table NA1 -describes the measures that require installer certification and HERS Rater ECC-Rater field 
verification and diagnostic testing and identifies the protocol or test procedure in the Reference 
Nonresidential Appendices that shall be used for completing installer and HERS Rater ECC-Rater field 
verification and diagnostic testing. 
Table NA1 -1 – Summary of Measures Requiring Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
Measure Title Description Procedure(s) 
Duct Sealing Component Packages require that space conditioning 
ducts be sealed. If sealed and tested ducts are 
claimed for compliance, field verification and 
diagnostic testing is required to verify that approved 
duct system materials are utilized, and that duct 
leaka ge meets the specified criteria. NA2.1.4.2 
Dwelling -Unit Mechanical 
Ventilation Airflow – 
Continuous Operation Verify that whole -building ventilation system 
complies with the airflow rate required by ASHRAE 
Standard 62.2. NA2.2.4.1 
Dwelling -Unit Mechanical 
Ventilation Airflow – 
Intermittent Operation Verify that whole -building ventilation system 
complies with the airflow rate required by ASHRAE 
Standard 62.2. NA2.2.4.2 
Kitchen Local Mechanical 
Exhaust Verification Verify using certified performance rating data from 
the HVI Directory or the AHAM Directory for 
determining that the kitchen exhaust system 
complies with listed requirements. NA2.2.4. 1.4 
Heat Recovery Ventilation 
(HRV) or Energy Recovery 
Ventilation (ERV) Rated 
Performance Verification Verify that HRV or ERV system meets or exceeds the 
performance required for compliance. NA2.2.4.1.5 
Building Envelope Air 
Leakage The purpose of this test procedure is to measure the 
air leakage rate through a multifamily dwelling unit 
enclosures measured in cubic feet per minute NA2.3 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -3 
Documentation and Communication Requirements for HERS 
Verification Verification Complia nce 
The required building energy compliance features and the required field verification and diagnostic 
testing procedures shall be identified on a Certificate of Compliance completed in accordance with 
the requirements in Standards Sections 10 -103(a)1 and 10 -103(a)2. The builder or subcontractor 
shall complete all applicable Certificate of Installation documentation in accordance with the 
requirements in Standards Section 10 -103(a)3 and the procedures described in NA1, and shall 
provide certification that the construction or installation complies with the applicable requirements 
on the Certificate of Compliance and all applicable field verification and eligibility criteria . The 
person responsible for the acceptance testing shall perform the required field verification and 
diagnostic testing and report the results on the Certificate of Acceptance documentation submitted 
in accordance with the requirements in Standards Sectio n 10 -103(a)4 and the procedures described 
in NA1, and shall provide certification that the construction or installation information reported on 
the Certificates of Installation are consistent with applicable requirements on the Certificate of 
Compliance. A certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall perform all applicable HERS field verification and 
diagnostic testing and report the results on the applicable Certificate of Verification documentation 
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Standards Section 10 -103(a)5 and the 
procedures in NA1. 
NA1.2.1 Compliance Document Registration and Verification 
Document registration requirements are introduced in Section NA1.2.1.1 and further described in 
the procedures in subsequent sections of NA1. Verification of electronic documentation is 
introduced in Section NA1.2.1.2 and is applicable to many aspects of t he documentation procedures 
described in subsequent sections of Nonresidential Appendix NA1. 
NA1.2.1.1 Document Registration Terminology and Effective Dates for Registration 
Requirements 
When submittal of documentation to a Data Registry is required by applicable sections of Standards 
Section 10 -103(a), the completed documents are referred to as registered documents, and the 
process of completing these documents by submitting information a nd certification signatures to 
the Data Registry is called registration. Refer to Reference Joint Appendix JA1 for additional 
terminology for Data Registries, registered documents , and registration Providers. Additional 
specification for the document regis tration process is given in Reference Joint Appendix JA7. 
Data Registry is a web service with a user interface and database maintained by a Registration 
Provider that complies with the applicable requirements in Reference Joint Appendix JA7, with 
guidance from the Data Registry Requirements Manual, and provides for registratio n of residential 
or nonresidential compliance documentation used for demonstrating compliance with Part 6. 
Residential Data Registry is a Data Registry that i s maintained by a HERS Provider an ECC -Provider 
that provides for registration, when required by Part 6, of all residential compliance documentation 
and the nonresidential Certificate of Verification. 
Nonresidential Data Registry is a Data Registry that is maintained by a Registration Provider 
approved by the Commission that provides for registration, when required by Part 6, of all 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
    
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
  Appendix NA1 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
nonresidential compliance documentation. However, nonresidential Data Registries may not 
provide for registration of nonresidential Certificates of Verification. 
Registration Provider is an organization that administers a Data Registry service that conforms to 
the requirements in Reference Joint Appendix JA7 and may conform to the guidance given in the 
Data Registry Requirements Manual. 
NA1.2.1.1.1 Document Registration Registration rRequirements 
Contingent upon the approval of Nonresidential Data Registry(s) by the Commission, for all 
nonresidential buildings, high -rise residential buildings, and hotels and motels, when designated to 
allow use of an occupancy group or type regulated by Part 6: 
(a) All Certificate of Compliance, Certificate of Installation, and Certificate of Acceptance 
documentation and Compliance Registration Package shall be submitted for registration and 
retention to an approved Nonresidential Data Registry. When submittal of documentation to 
a Data Registry is required, the completed documents are referred to as registered 
documents, and the process of completing these documents by submitting information and 
certification signatures to the Data Registry is c alled registration. 
(b) All Certificate of Verification documents for applicable HERS measures are required to be 
submitted for registration and retention to an approved Residential Data Registry. 
All submittals to the Data Registries shall be made electronically in accordance with the 
specifications in Reference Joint Appendix JA7. 
NA1.2.1.2 Verification of Registered Document s 
When document registration is required, printed paper copies or electronic copies of the applicable 
completed, signed, registered compliance documentation shall be allowed for use for required 
submittals to enforcement agencies, subject to verification tha t the information shown on the 
submitted document(s) conforms to the information shown on the current revision of the 
registered document(s) on file in the Data Registry for the building. 
The document registration Provider shall make document verification services available via phone, 
internet, or utilization of digital technologies, to enable enforcement agency officials, builders, 
installation contractors, HERS Rater ECC-Rater s, and other authorized users of the Data Registry to 
verify that the information shown on submitted documentation is consistent with the information 
shown on the current revision of the registered document on file in the Data Registry for the 
applicable b uilding. 
NA1.2.2 Summary of Documentation and Communication Procedures 
The documentation and communication process for measures that require field verification and 
diagnostic testing is summarized below. The subsequent sections of this chapter contain additional 
information and requirements that apply to all situations; however , the section on alterations, 
NA1.8, applies specifically to the differences in the requirements for alterations. NA1.7 applies 
specifically to the differences in the requirements for Third Party Quality Control Programs. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
      
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -5 
(a) The documentation author and the principal mechanical designer shall complete the 
compliance documents for the building. 
(b) The documentation author or the principal mechanical designer shall provide a signed 
Certificate of Compliance to the builder that indicates duct sealing with HERS Rater ECC-Rater 
diagnostic testing and field verification is required for compliance. 
(c)(b) The builder or principal mechanical designer shall make arrangements for transmittal 
of a signed copy of the Certificate of Compliance, for units that require HERS 
verification verification , to a HERS Provider an ECC -Provider . The builder shall also arrange for 
the services of a certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater prior to installation of the duct system, so 
that once the installation is complete the HERS Rater ECC-Rater has ample time to complete 
the field verification and diagnostic testing without delaying final approval of occupancy by 
the enforcement agency. The builder or principal mechanical designer shall make available 
to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater a copy of the Certificate of Compliance that was 
approved/signed by the principal designer/owner and submitted to the enforcement 
agency. 
(d)(c) The builder or subcontractor shall install the duct system(s) that requires field 
verification and diagnostic testing. The builder or the installing subcontractor shall perform 
diagnostic testing according to the procedures specified in Reference Nonreside ntial 
Appendix NA1.4 and NA2. 
(e)(d) When the installation is complete, the builder or the installing subcontractor shall 
complete and sign the Certificate of Installation, and Certificate of Acceptance, and post a 
copy of the completed signed Certificate s at the building site for review by the enforcement 
agency in conjunction with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent upon 
approval of a Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry. The builder or subco ntractor shall also provide a 
signed copy of the Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance to the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater . 
(f)(e) The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall confirm that the Certificate of Installation and 
Certificate of Acceptance has been completed as required, and that the installer’s diagnostic 
test results and all other Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance information 
shows com pliance consistent with the requirements given in the plans and specifications 
and Certificate of Compliance approved by the local enforcement agency for the building. 
(g)(f) The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall complete the field verification and diagnostic testing 
as specified in NA1.6 and shall enter the test results into the HERS Provider ECC-Provider 
Data Registry. 
(h)(g) The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall make available copies of the Certificate of 
Verification to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , builder, and the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall arrange 
to have a copy of the completed signed Certificate of Verification posted at the building site 
for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final inspection. 
Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on an approved 
Data Registry . 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
    
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA1 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(i)(h) The enforcement agency shall not approve a building t for occupancy until the 
enforcement agency has received a completed signed copy of the Certificate of Installation, 
Certificate of Acceptance, and the Certificate of Verification at the building site in 
conjunction with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent upon approval of a 
Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on 
an approved Data Registry. 
(j)(i) The Registration Providers shall make document verification services available, via 
phone or internet communications interface, to the enforcement agency, builders and 
contractors, HERS Rater ECC-Rater s, the Energy Commission, and other authorized users of 
the Data Registry. The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall ensure that the Certificate of 
Verification information and approval signatures are retained as specified by Title 20 Section 
1673(e) Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 . 
Summary of Responsibilities 
Section NA1.3 summarizes responsibilities set forth in Appendix NA1 and organizes them by the 
responsible party . This section is not, however, a complete accounting of the responsibilities of the 
respective parties. 
NA1.3.1 Builder 
The builder shall make arrangements for submittal of a copy of the Certificate of Compliance, for 
buildings with features requiring HERS verification verification , to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider . 
The builder shall make arrangements for the services of a certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater prior to 
installation of the features , so that once the installation is complete the HERS Rater ECC-Rater has 
ample time to complete the field verification and diagnostic testing without delaying final approval 
of occupancy for the building permit by the enforcement agency. The builder shall make available 
to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater a copy of the Certificate of Compliance that was approved/signed by 
the principal designer or owner and submitted to the enforcement agency. 
The builder’s employees or subcontractors responsible for the installation shall perform diagnostic 
testing, as specified in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA1.4, NA1.5 and NA2, and shall 
complete and sign the Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance to certify the 
diagnostic testing results and that the installation work meets the requirements for compliance as 
shown on the Certificate of Compliance. The builder or subcontractor shall post a copy of the 
Certificate of Installation and C ertificate of Acceptance at the construction site for review by the 
enforcement agency, in conjunction with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent 
upon approval of a Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry. The builder or subcontractor shall also make available a 
completed signed copy of the Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance to the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater . 
If the builder chooses to utilize group sampling for HERS verification verification compliance, the 
builder, the builder’s authorized representative, or the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall identify the units 
to be included in the sample group for field verification and diagnostic testing. The HERS Rater ECC-
Rater , with no direction from the installer or builder, shall randomly select one duct system from a 
sample group for field verification and diagnostic testing upon receiving the builder’s or builder 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
 
 
 
    
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -7 
representative’s request for HERS verification verification of that group. The builder or the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater shall arrange for registered copies of all Certificates of Verification to be posted at 
the building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final 
inspection for each individual system. Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry . 
The builder shall leave in the building, for the building owner at occupancy, copies of all compliance, 
operating, maintenance, and ventilation information specified in applicable sections of Title 24, Part 
1, Section 10 -103(b). 
NA1.3.2 HERS Provider ECC-Provider and Rater 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall maintain a Data Registry with the capability to receive and 
store electronic data and image information provided by authorized users of the Data Registry 
sufficient to facilitate administration the of HERS compliance verification procedures and 
documentation proced ures as described in NA1 and Joint Appendix JA7. Data Registry capabilities 
include a secure web -based interface accessible by authorized users, and the ability to receive and 
process data transfer files as specified by Reference Joint Appe ndix JA7. The HERS Provider ECC-
Provider shall maintain a list of the buildings in the group from which sampling is drawn, the units 
selected for sampling, the units sampled and the results of the sampling, the units selected for re -
sampling, the units that have been tested and verified as a result of re -sampling, and the corrective 
action taken. 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall retain records of all information and approval signatures for 
completed Certificates of Compliance, Certificates of Installation, and Certificates of Verification for 
a period of ten years as specified by Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Section 1673(e) Title 
24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 . 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater providing the diagnostic testing and verification shall transmit the test 
results to the Data Registry. Registered Certificates of Verification from the Provider shall be made 
available for the tested dwelling unit and each of the remaining untested dwelling units from a 
designated group for which compliance is verified based on the results of a sample test. The 
registered Certificates of Verification shall be made available to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the 
builder, the enforcement agency, and to other auth orized users of the HERS Provider ECC-Provider 
data registry. 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall produce a separate Certificate of Verification for each system that 
meets the diagnostic requirements for compliance. The registered Certificate of Verification shall 
have unique HERS Provider ECC-Provider -designated identifiers for registration number, and sample 
group number, and shall include the lot location, building permit number, time and date stamp of 
issuance of the certificate, Provider logo or seal, and indicate if the space conditioning unit has been 
“tested or if it was a “not tested” unit approved as part of sample group. The HERS Rater ECC-Rater 
shall not provide a Certificate of Verification for a building with a space conditioning unit that does 
not have a completed signed Certificate of Installation as specified in Section NA1.4 and Certificate 
of Acceptance as specified in Section NA1.5. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing on a sampled space conditioning unit identifies a failure to 
meet the requirements for compliance credit, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall report to the HERS 
Provider ECC-Provider , the builder, and the enforcement agency that re -sampling will be required. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 Appendix NA1 -8 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
If re-sampling identifies another failure, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall report to the HERS 
Provider ECC-Provider , the builder, and the enforcement agency that corrective action, diagnostic 
testing, and field verification will be required for all the untested space conditioning units in the 
group. The report shall identify each space conditioning unit that shall be f ully tested and corrected. 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall also report to the builder when diagnostic testing and field 
verification has shown that the failures have been corrected for all of the space conditioning units. 
When individual space conditioning unit testing and verification confirms that the requirements for 
compliance have been met, the HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall make available to the builder and 
the enforcement agency a registered copy of the Certificate of Verification for each space 
conditioning unit in the group. 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall file a report with the enforcement agency if there has been a 
sample group failure, explaining all actions taken (including field verification, testing, and corrective 
actions) to bring into compliance space conditioning units for which full testing has been required. 
NA1.3.3 Third -Party Quality Control Program 
Third Party Quality Control Programs (TPQCP) verify the work of participating installers, collect and 
evaluate more detailed data than necessary for compliance, identify in real time during the 
installation invalid and inaccurate installer testing and nonc ompliant installations, and enable 
corrected testing with the goal of bringing installations into compliance before the installer leaves 
the job site. TPQCP personnel and participating TPQCPs do not sign Certificate of Verification 
documentation, given tha t they provide assistance and quality control to HERS Rater ECC-Rater s, 
who remain responsible for this documentation. 
An approved Third Party Quality Control Program shall: 
(a) Provide training to participating program installers, installing but not limited to contractors, 
subcontractors, and technicians, to ensure proficiency in: 
i. Quality HVAC installation procedures, common causes of failure, and corrections. 
ii. Understanding of the Standards requirements for field verification and diagnostic testing 
of measures, which are subject to TPQCP program procedures . 
iii. Understanding all applicable specifications for field verification and diagnostic testing 
procedures specified in the Reference Residential Appendices. 
iv. Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures. 
(b) Collect field verification and diagnostic test data (data) from participating installers for each 
installation completed, 
(c) Confirm the location of the system undergoing testing using an electronic tracking means 
such as Global Positioning System Satellite (GPS) technology, 
(d) Provide data checking analysis to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the collected data to 
independently determine whether compliance has been achieved, and to uncover invalid or 
erroneous information, 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
   
  
 
   
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -9 
(e) Provide real -time direction to the installer to retest and correct problems when data 
checking determines that compliance has not been achieved, or erroneous information is 
present, so that testing can be redone and corrections can be made before the insta ller 
leaves the site, 
(f) Ensure the installer resubmits updated data from new testing when retesting and correction 
is completed, 
(g) Maintain a database of all data submitted by participating TPQCP installers, and 
(h) Enable Energy Commission staff to query retained TPQCP data or documents. 
TPQCPs do not impose restrictions on HERS Rater ECC-Rater s or Providers that limit their 
independence or ability to properly perform their functions, nor do they impose restrictions on the 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater ’s use of equipment (beyond those required by the Energy Commission).  
Refer to NA1.7 for additional detail describing the roles and responsibilities and approval 
procedures for TPQCP. 
NA1.3.4 Enforcement Agency 
The enforcement agency, at its discretion, may require independent testing and field verification to 
be scheduled so that it can be completed in conjunction with the enforcement agency’s required 
inspections. The enforcement agency may also require that it observe the diagnostic testing and 
field verification performed by builders or subcontractors and the certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater in 
conjunction with the enforcement agency’s required inspections to corroborate the results 
documented on the Certificate of Installation, Certificate of Acceptance, and the Certificate of 
Verification. 
For buildings for which field verification and diagnostic testing is required for compliance, the 
enforcement agency shall not approve a building for occupancy until the enforcement agency has 
received a completed Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptan ce that has been signed 
by the builder/owner or installing subcontractor, and a completed registered copy of the Certificate 
of Verification that has been made available by the HERS Provider ECC-Provider Data Registry.  The 
Certificates shall b e posted at the building site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction 
with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent upon approval of a Nonresidential Data 
registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on an approved Data Registry . 
Installer Requirements –Certificate of Installation Documentation 
Certificates of Installation are required for all buildings and shall include the required compliance 
information for all of the installed space conditioning systems in the building that must comply. 
When compliance requires HERS verification verification , the builder’s employees or subcontractors 
shall perform diagnostic testing according to the procedures specified in Reference Nonresidential 
Appendix NA2 , and verify that the measures meet the requirements for compliance shown on the 
Certificate of Compli ance. The owner or installer shall complete a Certificate of Installation and sign 
the certificate to certify that the installation work meets the requirements for compliance. 
A signed copy of the Certificate of Installation shall be posted at the job site for review by the 
enforcement agency, in conjunction with requests for final inspection . Alternatively, contingent 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
      
  
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
  
   
   
 
   
 
 
    
  
 
 
 
  
 Appendix NA1 -10 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
upon approval of a Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry . A copy shall be provided to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater . 
When the Standards do not require the Certificate of Installation to be registered, the Certificates of 
Installation that are posted in the field for review by the enforcement agency at final inspection are 
not required to be registered certificates from a Data Registry , but shall conform to all other 
applicable requirements of 10 -103(a)3. 
Acceptance Procedures -Certificate of Acceptance Documentation 
When compliance requires acceptance testing , the acceptance test Field Technician shall perform 
the required field verification and diagnostic testing according to the procedures specified in 
Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA2, and verify that the work meets the requirements for 
compliance as sh own on the Certificate of Compliance. The owner or installer shall complete a 
Certificate of Installation and sign the certificate to certify that the installation work meets the 
requirements for compliance credit . 
A signed copy of the Certificate of Acceptance shall be posted at the job site for review by the 
enforcement agency, in conjunction with requests for final inspection . Alternatively, contingent 
upon approval of a Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry . A copy shall be provided to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater . 
When the Standards do not require the Certificate of Acceptance to be registered, the Certificates 
of Acceptance that are posted in the field for review by the enforcement agency at final inspection 
are not required to be registered certificates from a Data Registry , but shall conform to all other 
applicable requirements of 10 -103(a)4. 
HERS Procedures – Verification, Testing, and Sampling 
At the builder’s or owner’s option, HERS field verification and diagnostic testing sha ll be completed 
either for each system or dwelling unit, or alternatively for a sample from a designated group of 
systems or dwelling units . Field verification and diagnostic testing for compliance shall use the 
diagnostic procedure s in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA2. If the builder or owner elects to 
demonstrate HERS verification verification compliance utilizing group sampling, the applicable 
procedures described i n NA1.6.2, NA1.6.3 and NA1.6.4 shall be followed. 
NA1.6.1 HERS Procedures -General Requirements 
The general requirements in NA1.6.1 are applicable to all measures that require HERS 
verification verification for compliance , and shall be incorporated into procedures specified in 
Sections NA1.6.2, NA1.6.3, and NA1.6.4 whenever applicable. 
The builder or subcontractor shall make available to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater a copy of the 
Certificate of Compliance approved/signed by the system designer/builder or owner, a copy of the 
Certificate of Installation as described in NA1.4, and a copy of the Certificat e of Acceptance as 
described in NA1.5. Prior to performing field verification and diagnostic testing, the HERS Rater ECC-
Rater shall confirm that the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of Acceptance have been 
completed as required, and that the installer’s diagnostic test results and all other Certificate of 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
      
  
  
  
  
  
 
    
  
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
   
    
  
  
 
   
  
 
  
    
 
  
 
   
      
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -11 
Installation and Certificate of Acceptance information indicate compliance consistent with the 
Certificate of Compliance. 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall perform all applicable field verification and diagnostic testing. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing determines that the requirements for compliance are met, 
the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall submit or make arrangements for submittal of the Certificate of 
Verification information to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider data registry. 
Authorized users of the HERS Provider ECC-Provider data registry that are not certified HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater s may provide documentation author support to facilitate submittal of the 
Certificate of Verification information to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider data registry on behalf of 
the HERS Rater ECC-Rater when such facilitation has been authorized by the HERS Rater ECC-Rater . 
Documentation authors shall provide an electronic signature to the Data Registry to certify the 
documentation is accurate and complete. 
The Certificate of Verification shall be electronically signed by the HERS Rater ECC-Rater who 
performed the field verification and diagnostic testing services to certify that the information 
provided on the Certificate is true and correct. 
A completed signed registered copy of the Certificate of Verification shall be posted at the building 
site for review by the enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final inspection. 
Alternatively, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on an approved Data 
Registry . 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall make document verification services available, to 
enforcement agencies, builders and contractors, HERS Rater ECC-Rater s, the Energy Commission, 
and other authorized users of the HERS Provider ECC-Provider data registry. 
NA1.6.2 HERS Procedures -Initial Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall diagnostically test and field verify the first system or dwelling unit of 
each building when the builder elects to demonstrate HERS verification verification compliance 
utilizing group sampling. This initial testing allows the builder to identify and correct any potential 
construction flaws or practices in advance of subsequent further installations . If field verification 
and diagnostic testing determines that the requirements for compliance are met, the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater shall transmit the test results to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider registry, 
whereupon the Provider shall make available a copy of the registered Certificate of Verification to 
the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the builder, and the enforcement agency. 
NA1.6.3 HERS Procedures -– Group Sample Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing 
After the initial field verification and diagnostic testing is completed, the builder or the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater shall identify a group of up to seven individual systems or dwelling units in the 
building from which a sample will be selected and identify the names and license numbers of the 
subcontractors responsible for the installations requiring field verification and diagnostic testing. 
The date the first system or dwelling unit in the group is identified shall establish the start date for 
the new opened sample group . The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall record ed and track the start 
date for each sample group . 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
    
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
    
    
    
 
   
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 Appendix NA1 -12 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
If dwelling units have multiple measures requiring HERS verification verification installed, each 
dwelling unit in a designated group shall have the same measures requiring HERS 
verification verification as the other dwelling units in the designated group. If some dwelling units 
have installed a different set of measures requiring HERS verification verification , those dwelling 
units shall be in a separate group. 
If the dwelling units in a designated group have multiple measures that require HERS 
verification verification , sample testing for individual measures may be conducted in any of the 
dwelling units in the group -it is not required that all of the sample tests for all of the individual 
measures be completed in the same dwelling unit. Individual measures shall be allowed to be 
included in a group regardless of whether compliance requires one sample test, or if compliance 
requires more than one sample test (up to100% sample test rate) be reported for such individual 
measures. 
If dwelling units have central forced -air space conditioning equipment that introduces outside air 
into the conditioned space utilizing means that connect outside air ventilation ducts directly to the 
dwelling unit’s central forced air duct system (Central Fan-Integrated Ventilation System or CFI 
Ventilation System), the CFI ventilation technology shall be considered a separate measure for HERS 
verification verification sampling purposes, and dwellings with CFI ventilation systems shall be 
placed in separate groups from other dwelling units that do not utilize CFI ventilation technology. 
For newly constructed buildings, systems or dwelling units in a designated group shall all be located 
within the same enforcement agency jurisdiction. Refer to Section NA1.8 for requirements for 
sample groups applicable to alterations. 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall verify that a Certificate of Compliance , a Certificate of Installation, 
and a Certificate of Acceptance have been completed for each unit having features requiring HERS 
verification verification . The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall also confirm that the Certificate of 
Installation and Certificate of Acceptance have been completed as required, and that the field 
technician’s diagnostic test results and all other Certificate of Acceptance information shows 
compliance consistent with the Certificate of Compliance. The Certificates of Acc eptance for each 
group shall be submitted to the Provider but are not required to be registered , in preparation for 
potential future quality assurance audits . The group shall be closed prior to selection of the sample 
that will be field verified and diagnostically tested. 
The builder or the HERS Rater ECC-Rater may request removal of units from the group by notifying 
the HERS Provider ECC-Provider prior to selection of the sample that will be tested and shall provide 
justification for the change. Removed units which are installed shall either be field verified and 
diagnostically tested individually or shall be included in a subsequent group for sam pling. 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater , with no direction from the installer, builder, or owner shall randomly 
select one system or dwelling unit from the “closed ” group for field verification and diagnostic 
testing upon receiving the builder’s or builder representative’s request for HERS 
verification verification of that group . The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall enter the test and/or field 
verification results into the Data Registry regardless of whether the results indicate a pass or fail. If 
the test fails , then the failure must be entered into the Provider’s Data Registry even if the installer 
immediately corrects the problem. In addition, the procedures in NA1.6.4 shall be followed. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
       
 
 
 
 
   
    
 
  
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
  
   
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
   
 
    
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -13 
If field verification and diagnostic testing determines that the requirements for compliance are met, 
the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall enter the test results into the Data Registry. Whereupon, the 
Provider shall make available to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the builder, the enforcement agency and 
other approved users of the Data Registry, a copy of the registered Certificate of Verification for the 
“tested” system or dwelling unit and a Certificate of Verification shall also be provided for each “not 
tested” system or dwelling unit in the sample group. The Certificate of Verification shall report the 
successful diagnostic testing results and conclusions regarding compliance for the “”tested” system 
or dwelling unit . The Certificate of Verification shall also provide: 
(a) Building permit number for the unit. 
(b) Registration Number – that conforms to the numbering convention specified in Reference 
Joint Appendix JA7. 
(c) Group Number – that conforms to the numbering convention specified in Reference Joint 
Appendix JA7. 
(d) Time and date stamp of the Provider’s issuance of the registered Certificate of Verification. 
(e) Provider’s logo, water mark, or official seal. 
(f) Indication that the conditioning unit was a “tested” unit , or was a “not tested” unit from the 
sample group. 
The registered Certificate of Verification shall not be provided for measures that have not yet been 
installed. 
Whenever the builder changes subcontractors who are responsible for installation of the systems or 
dwelling unit measures , the builder shall notify the HERS Rater ECC-Rater of the subcontractor 
change , and terminate sampling for any affected group. All units requiring HERS Rater ECC-Rater 
field verification and diagnostic testing for compliance that were installed by previous 
subcontractors or were subject to field verification and diagnostic testing under the supervision of a 
previous HERS Provider ECC-Provider , for which the builder does not have a completed Certificate of 
Verification, shall either be individually tested or included in a separate group for sampling. Systems 
or dwelling units completed b y new subcontractors shall either be individually tested or shall be 
included in a new separate group for sampling . 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall not notify the builder when sample testing will occur prior to the 
completion of the work that is to be tested, or prior to entry of the data from the Certificate of 
Installation. 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall close a group within 6 months after the group was 
started/ opened . When such group closure occurs, the HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall notify the 
builder or contractor and HERS Rater ECC-Rater that the group has been closed, and a sample shall 
be selected for field verification and diagnostic testing. 
NA1.6.4 HERS Procedures -Re-sampling, Full Testing and Corrective Action 
“Re-sampling” refers to the procedure that requires testing of additional systems or dwelling units 
within a group when the selected sample from a group fails to comply with the HERS 
verification verification requirements. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
   
   
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
 Appendix NA1 -14 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
When a failure is encountered during sample testing, the failure shall be entered into the Provider’s 
Data Registry. Corrective action shall be taken on the failed system and then retested to verify that 
corrective action was successful. Corrective action and retesting on the system shall be repeated 
until the t esting indicates compliance and the results have been entered into the Data R egistry, 
whereupon , a registered Certificate of Verification for the system shall be made available to the 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the builder, the enforcement agency, and other auth orized users of the Data 
Registry. 
In addition, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall conduct re -sampling to assess whether the first failure in 
the group is unique or if the rest of the units in the group are likely to have similar failings. 
NA1.6.4.1 Re-sampling procedures for a “closed” group 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall randomly select for re -sampling one of the remaining untested 
systems or dwelling units in the group for testing. 
If testing in the re -sample confirms that the requirements for compliance credit are met, then the 
system or dwelling unit with the failure shall not be considered an indication of failure in the other 
units in the group. The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall transmit the re -sample test results to the Data 
Registry, whereupon the Provider shall make available to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the builder, the 
enforcement agency, and other authorized users of the Data Registry, a copy of the registered 
Certificate of Veri fication for each of the remaining units in the group including the dwelling unit in 
the re -sample. 
If field verification and diagnostic testing of the second sample results in a failure, the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater shall report the second failure to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider , the builder, and 
the enforcement agency. All systems or dwelling units in the group must thereafter be individually 
field verified and diagnostically tested. 
NA1.6.4.2 Corrective Action 
The builder shall take corrective action on any system or dwelling unit in the group that failed to 
comply when tested. In cases where corrective action would require destruction of building 
components, and the performance compliance method is used, the builder may choose to 
reanalyze compliance and choose different measures that will achieve compliance. In this case a 
new Certificate of Compliance shall be completed and submitted to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider , 
the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , and the enforcement agency. The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall conduct 
field verification and diagnostic testing for each of these measures to verify that problems have 
been corrected and that the requirements for compliance have been met. Upon verification of 
compliance, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall enter the test results into the Data Registry. Whereupon 
the Provider shall make available to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater , the builder, the enforcement agency, 
and other authorized users of the Data Registry a copy of the registered Certificate of Verification 
for each individual unit in the group. 
The HERS Provider ECC-Provider shall file a report with the enforcement agency explaining all action 
taken (including field verification, diagnostic testing, and corrective action,) to bring into compliance 
systems or dwelling units for which full testing has been required. If corrective action requires work 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
      
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
  
2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -15 
not specifically exempted by the CMC or the CBC, the builder shall obtain a permit from the 
enforcement agency prior to commencement of any of the work. 
Corrections to avoid reporting a failure to the Data Registry shall not be made to a sampled or re -
sampled feature after the HERS Rater ECC-Rater selects the sample feature , or during the course of 
HERS testing of the unit. If it becomes evident that such corrections have been made to a sampled 
or re -sampled feature to avoid reporting a failure, field verification and diagnostic testing shall be 
required to be performed on 100 percent of the individual systems or dwelling units in the group. 
Third Party Quality Control Programs 
The Energy Commission may approve Third Party Quality Control Programs (TPQCP) to verify the 
work of participating installers, collect and evaluate more detailed data than necessary for 
compliance, identify in real time during the installation invalid and inaccurate installer testing and 
noncompliant installations, and enable corrected testing with the goal of bringing installations into 
compliance before the installer leaves the job site. TPQCP personnel and participating TPQCP 
installation contractors do not have the authority to sign Certificate of Verification documentation 
as a HERS Rater an ECC -Rater . 
NA1.7.1 Third Party Quality Control Program Responsibilities 
An approved Third Party Quality Control Program shall: 
(a) Provide training to participating program installers (including contractors, subcontractors, and 
technicians) to ensure proficiency in: 
i. Quality HVAC installation procedures, common causes of failure, and corrections. 
ii. Understanding of the Standards requirements for field verification and diagnostic testing of 
measures, which are subject to TPQCP program procedures 
iii. Understanding all applicable specifications for field verification and diagnostic testing 
procedures specified in the Reference Residential Appendices. 
iv. Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures. 
(b) Collect field verification and diagnostic test data (data) from participating installers for each 
installation completed. 
(c) Automatically confirm the location of the system undergoing testing using an electronic tracking 
means such as Global Positioning System Satellite (GPS ) technology if available. 
(d) Provide data checking analysis to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the collected data to 
independently determine whether compliance has been achieved. Data checking based on more 
detailed data than is required for showing compliance must be able to un cover invalid or 
erroneous information supplied by installers. 
(e) Provide direction to the installer to retest and correct problems when data checking determines 
that compliance has not been achieved.  The direction to the installer shall occur in real time so 
that testing can be redone , and corrections can be made before the installer leaves the site. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
    
 
  
 
 
   
   
   
  
 
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
    
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
  
 
 
 
 Appendix NA1 -16 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(f) Ensure the installer resubmits updated data from new testing when retesting and correction is 
completed. 
(g) Maintain a database of all data submitted by all participating TPQCP installers. 
(h) Provide functionality that enables Energy Commission staff to query retained TPQCP data or 
documents. 
(i) TPQCP shall not impose restrictions on the HERS Rater ECC-Rater or the HERS Provider ECC-
Provider that limit their independence, or the ability of the HERS Rater ECC-Rater or the HERS 
Provider ECC-Provider to properly perform their functions. 
(j) TPQCP shall not impose restrictions on the HERS Rater ECC-Rater ’s use of equipment beyond 
those required by the Energy Commission. 
NA1.7.2 Requirements for Data Collected by a Third Party Quality Control Program 
TPQCP data collection shall conform to the following requirements: 
(a) Data shall be more detailed than the data required for showing compliance with the Standards. 
(b) Data shall enable the TPQCP to conduct an independent check on the validity and accuracy of 
the installer’s claim that compliance has been achieved. 
(c) Data shall not be alterable by the installer to indicate that compliance has been achieved when 
in fact compliance has not been achieved. 
NA1.7.3 HERS Provider ECC-Provider Responsibilities 
HERS Provider ECC-Provider s shall conform to the following requirements: 
(a) HERS Provider ECC-Provider s shall assign a HERS Rater an ECC -Rater to conduct independent 
field verification and diagnostic testing of the installation work performed by the 
participating Third Party Quality Control Program installing contractors, and to submit 
Certificates of Verification at the close of the sampling gr oup. 
(b) HERS Provider ECC-Provider s shall notify enforcement agencies when groups close or exceed 
six months without closing. 
(c) HERS Provider ECC-Provider s shall explain, in their applications for approval by the Energy 
Commission, the way in which their program will work with TPQCPs. 
NA1.7.4 HERS Rater ECC-Rater Responsibilities 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater s shall conform to the following requirements: 
(a) Complete all of the responsibilities of a HERS Rater an ECC -Rater as specified in Appendix 
NA1 , with the exception that sampling procedures utilized for TPQCP installations shall be 
limited to sampling of a “closed” group as described in Section NA1.6 . However, the sample 
tested shall be selected and field verified from within a group of up to thirty dwelling units. 
(b) HERS Rater ECC-Rater s shall be independent entities from the Third Party Quality Control 
Program. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
       
 
   
   
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
   
 
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -17 
(c) If re-sampling is required, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall perform full testing and corrective 
action as specified in Section NA1.6 with the exception that re -sampling shall be completed 
for a minimum of one out of every thirty dwelling units from the group. 
NA1.7.5 Conflict of Interest Guidelines 
The TPQCP shall meet the requirements imposed on a HERS Rater an ECC -Rater specified in the 
Energy Commission’s HERS P program regulations ( California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 
2, Chapter 4, Article 8, Sections 1670 -1675 Title 24, Part 1, Section 10 -103.3 ), including the 
requirement to be an independent entity from the builder, the HERS Provider ECC-Provider , the 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater that provides independent field verifications, and the subcontractor installer 
as specified by Section 1673(j). How ever, a Third Party Quality Control Program may have business 
relationships with installers participating in the program to advocate or promote the program and 
an installer’s participation in the program, and to advocate or promote products that the Third 
Party Quality Control Program sells to installers as part of the Program. 
NA1.7.6 Conditions of TPQCP Approval 
Prior to approval by the Commission, the Third Party Quality Control Program shall provide a 
detailed explanation to the Commission of the following: 
(a) The data that is to be collected from the installers. 
(b) The data checking process that will be used to evaluate the validity and accuracy of the data 
submitted by the TPQCP installation contractors. 
(c) The justification for why this data checking process will provide strong assurance that the 
installation actually complies. 
(d) A detailed description of the database that will be maintained by the TPQCP, and the 
functionality that will allow Energy Commission staff to query retained data or documents. 
(e) A detailed explanation of how their data input complies with Reference Joint Appendix 
JA7.9. 
(f) A detailed description of the training that will be provided to TPQCP installers. 
(g) The procedures the TPQCP will follow to ensure the installer makes appropriate on -site data 
submittals, installation corrections. 
The Third Party Quality Control Program may apply for a confidential designation for information 
submitted to the Energy Commission as specified in the Commission’s Administrative Regulations 
(California Code of Regulations, Title 20, Division 2, Chapter 7 , Article 2, Section 2505). 
NA1.7.7 Training for TPQCP Installation Contractors 
As a condition to participation in the TPQCP program, all approved TPQCP installing contractors and 
the TPQCP installing contractor’s responsible installation technicians shall be trained and confirmed 
to be proficient in the following: 
(a) Quality installation procedures. 
(b) The requirements of this Appendix . 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
   
  
 Appendix NA1 -18 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(c) Any applicable specialized TPQCP -specific procedures . 
The training requirements also apply to the installing contractor’s specialty subcontractors who 
provide Third Party Quality Control Program services. All installation verification and diagnostic 
work performed in the program shall be subject to the same q uality assurance procedures as 
required by the Energy Commission’s HERS program regulations. 
Installer Requirements and HERS Procedures for Alterations 
This section on alterations describes the differences that apply to alterations. Otherwise , the 
procedures and requirements detailed in previous sections of NA1 shall also apply to alterations. 
For alterations, building owners or their agents may carry out the actions that are assigned to 
builders in previous sections of Appendix NA1. 
Applicable procedures for registration of compliance documents described in Appendix NA1 shall 
also apply to alterations. 
When compliance for an alteration requires diagnostic testing and field verification, the building 
permit applicant may choose for the testing and field verification to be completed for the permitted 
system or dwelling unit alone, or alternatively as part of a designated sample group of space 
conditioning systems for which the same installing company ha s completed work that requires field 
verification and diagnostic testing for compliance. 
When sampling is utilized for HERS verification Verification compliance for alterations, the buildings 
in a designated sample group are not required to be located within the same enforcement agency 
jurisdiction. However, to enable the enforcement agency to schedule testing to accomplish the 
corroboration of field v erification and diagnostic testing procedures performed by builders, 
subcontractors, or certified HERS Rater ECC-Rater s as described in Section NA1.3.4, the enforcement 
agency may require that a sep arate system from the sample group that is located within its 
jurisdiction be tested. 
The building permit applicant shall submit or make arrangements for submittal of the required 
Certificate of Compliance information to the HERS Provider ECC-Provider and complete the 
applicable Certificate of Compliance documentation in accordance with the requirements in 
Standards Section 10 -103(a)1 and 10 -103(a)2. 
When the enforcement agency does not require building design plans to be submitted with the 
application for a building permit for an alteration, any applicable registered Certificate of 
Compliance documentation specified in 10 -103(a)1 is not required to be approved by the 
enforcement agency prior to issuance of a building permit, but shall be approved by the 
enforcement agency prior to final inspection of the dwelling unit, and shall be made available to the 
enforcement agency for all applicable inspections as specified in Standards Section 10 -103(a)2A. 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater s or other authorized users of the Data Registry may provide documentation 
author support to facilitate the submittal of any required Certificate of Compliance information to 
the enforcement agency on behalf of the building owner or agent of the building owner , when such 
facilitation has been authorized by the building owner or agent of the building owner. The building 
owner or agent of the building owner who is eligible under Division 3 of the Business and 
Professions Code to take responsibility for the design specification for the alteration shall sign the 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
       
 
  
   
 
  
 
    
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -19 
Certificate of Compliance, to certify the information provided on the Certificate is true and correct, 
to certify conformance with Part 6, and shall submit the Certificate of Compliance to the 
enforcement agency for approval. 
The building permit applicant or building owner or agent shall make available to the HERS Rater ECC-
Rater a copy of the registered Certificate of Compliance approved by the enforcement agency. 
The installer or field technician shall perform diagnostic testing and the procedures specified in 
Reference nonresidential Appendix NA1.4 and NA2. 
When the installation is complete, the person responsible for the installation shall complete and 
sign the Certificate of Installation , and post a copy at the building site for review by the 
enforcement agency in conjunction with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent 
upon approval of a Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the 
certificates on an approved Data Registry . The owner or subcontractor shall also provide a 
completed signed copy of the Certificate of Installation to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater . 
The field technician responsible for performing the acceptance test on the system shall complete 
the Certificate of Acceptance. The Certificate of Acceptance shall be signed by the system designer 
or installing contractor who is responsible for the system performance. A copy of the completed 
signed Certificate shall be posted at the building site for review by the enforcement agency in 
conjunction with requests for final inspection. Alternatively, contingent upon approval of a 
Nonresidential Data registry, the enforcement agency may elect to view the certificates on an 
approved Data Registry . The owner or subcontractor shall also provide a completed signed copy of 
the Certificate of Installation to the HERS Rater ECC-Rater . 
The HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall verify that the Certificate of Compliance , Certificate of Installation , 
and Certificate of Acceptance have been completed for each unit having features requiring HERS 
verification verification , and that the field technician’s diagnostic test results and all other Certificate 
of Acceptance information shows compliance consistent with the Certificate of Compliance for the 
system. 
If group sampling is utilized for compliance, the HERS Rater ECC-Rater shall define a group of up to 
seven systems or dwelling units for sampling purposes, requiring that all systems or dwelling units 
within the group have been installed by the same company. The installing company may request a 
group for sampling that is smaller than seven systems or dwelling units . Whenever the HERS 
Rater ECC-Rater for an installing company is changed, a new group shall be established. 
Re-sampling, full testing and corrective action shall be completed , if necessary , as specified in 
NA1.6.4. For alterations, the installing company shall offer to complete field verification and 
diagnostic testing and any necessary corrective action at no charge to building owners in the group. 
The enforcement agency shall not approve the alteration until the enforcement agency has 
received a completed Certificate of Installation as specified in NA1.4, Certificate of Acceptance as 
specified in Section NA1.5, and a copy of the registered Certifica te of Verification as specified in 
NA1.6. 
Third Party Quality Control Programs, as specified in NA1.7, may also be used with alterations. 
When a Third Party Quality Control Program is used, the enforcement agency may approve 
compliance based on the Certificate of Installation prior to completion of the Certificate of 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
 
 
   
   
     
   
 
    
  
 
    
  
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
  Appendix NA1 -20 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Verification , where data checking has indicated that the unit complies, on the condition that a 
Certificate of Verification will be submitted if the required HERS verification verification procedures 
determine that re -sampling, full testing , or corrective action is necessary, such work shall be 
completed. 
Acceptance Test Technicians Alternative Procedure 
When HERS field verification and diagnostic testing is required to be performed in accordance with 
NA1 and NA2 procedures , compliance with HERS verification verification may alternatively be 
satisfied by a certified Acceptance Test Technician (ATT) according to the requirements specified in 
this section. 
NA1.9.1 Field Verification by the Acceptance Test Technician 
Under this alternative procedure, when the Certificate of Compliance indicates that HERS field 
verification and diagnostic testing is required as a condition for compliance with Title 24, Part 6 , a 
certified ATT may perform the verification to satisfy the condition of compliance , at the discretion 
of the enforcement agency . Systems verified under this procedure are not eligible for use of the 
sampling procedures described in NA1 .6. 
NA1.9.2 Certificate of Acceptance Documentation 
The ATT shall perform the required field verification and diagnostic testing according to the 
procedures specified in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA2 and verify that the work meets the 
requirement s for compliance as shown on the Certificate of Compliance. The owner or installer shall 
complete a Certificate of Installation and sign the certificate to certify that the installation work 
meets the requirements for compliance credit. 
The ATT shall sign a copy of the Certificate of Acceptance and submit a copy to the approved ATTCP . 
The acceptance procedures for the Certificate of Acceptance shall conform to the requirements in 
NA1.5. 
A signed copy of the Certificate of Ac ceptance shall be posted at the job site for review by the 
enforcement agency, in conjunction with requests for final inspection in accordance with NA1.3.4 . 
The Certificate of Acceptance that is posted in the field for review by the enforcement agency at 
final inspection shall conform to all applicable requirements of 10 -103(a)4. 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures    
     
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA1 -21 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
Appendix NA1 – Nonresidential HERS Verification, Testing, and Documentation Procedures       
       
   
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA2 
Appendix NA2 – Non residential HERS Field Verification and 
Diagnostic Test Procedure s 
RESERVED Procedures for Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of 
Air Distribution Systems 
NA2.1.1 Purpose and Scope 
1. NA2.1 contains procedures for field verification and diagnostic testing for air leakage in 
single zone, constant volume, nonresidential air distribution systems serving zones with 
5000 ft² of conditioned floor area or less as required by Standards section 141.0(b)2Dii . 
2. NA2.1 procedures are applicable to new space conditioning systems in newly 
constructed buildings and to new or altered space conditioning systems in existing 
buildings. 
3. NA2.1 procedures shall be used by installers, HERS Rater ECC-Rater s, and others who are 
required to perform field verification of air distribution systems in accordance with NA1 
procedures and Standards Section 120.4(g) and 141.0(b)2D . 
4. Table NA2.1 -1 provides a summary of the duct leakage verification and diagnostic test 
protocols included in Section NA2.1, and the compliance criteria. 
NA2.1.2 Instrumentation Specifications 
The instrumentation for the air distribution diagnostic measurements shall conform to the 
following specifications: 
NA2.1.2.1 Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be measured with measurement systems (i.e. , sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 Pa. All pressure measurements 
within the duct system shall be made with static pressure probes, Dwyer A303 or equivalent. 
NA2.1.2.2 Duct Leakage Measurements 
All measurements of duct leakage airflow shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 3 percent of 
measured airflow or better using digital gauges. 
NA2.1.2.3 Calibration 
All instrumentation used for duct leakage diagnostic measurements shall be calibrated 
according to the manufacturer’s calibration procedure to conform to the accuracy requirement 
specified in Section NA2.1.2. 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s     
         
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
    
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
  Appendix NA2 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA2.1.2.4 Diagnostic Apparatus 
NA2.1.2.5 Apparatus for Duct Pressurization and Leakage Flow Measurement 
The apparatus for duct system pressurization and duct system leakage measurements shall 
consist of a duct system pressurization and leakage airflow measurement device meeting the 
specifications in Section NA2.1.2 . 
NA2.1.2.6 Apparatus for Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing (Existing Duct Systems) 
The apparatus for determining leakage in and verifying sealing of all accessible leaks in existing 
duct systems provide means for introducing controllable amounts of non -toxic visual or 
theatrical smoke into the duct pressurization apparatus for identifyin g leaks in accessible 
portions of the duct system. The means for generating smoke shall have sufficient capacity to 
ensure that any accessible leaks will emit visibly identifiable smoke. 
NA2.1.3 Verification and Diagnostic Procedures 
NA2.1.3.1 Nominal Air Handler Airflow 
Nominal air handler airflow shall be calculated according to one of the following methods as 
applicable: 
(a) For heating -only systems, the nominal air handler airflow shall be 21.7 CFM per kBtu/hr 
of rated heating output capacity. 
(b) For split or packaged cooling systems with only one indoor unit, the nominal air handler 
airflow shall be 400 CFM per nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as 
specified by the manufacturer. 
(c) For small duct high velocity systems, the nominal air handler airflow shall be 250 CFM 
per nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as specified by the 
manufacturer. 
(d) For multiple -split systems that provide cooling, the nominal air handler airflow for each 
indoor unit shall be 350 CFM per nominal ton of indoor unit cooling capacity as specified 
by the manufacturer . 
NA2.1.3.2 Diagnostic Duct Leakage 
Diagnostic duct leakage measurement shall be used by installers and HERS Rater ECC-Rater s to 
verify that duct leakage meets the compliance criteria for sealed duct systems for which field 
verification and diagnostic testing is required. Table NA2.1 -1 summarizes the diagnostic test 
procedures that shall be used to demonstrate compliance. 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
        
   
  
   
 
  
    
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -3 
Table NA2.1 -1 – Duct Leakage Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols 
Case User and Application Procedure(s) 
Sealed and tested new duct systems Installer Testing 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater Testing NA2.1.4.2.1 NA2.1.3.2.1 
Sealed and tested altered existing 
duct systems Installer Testing 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater Testing NA2.1.4.2.1 NA2.1.3.2.1 
Sealed and tested altered existing 
duct systems Installer Testing and 
Inspection 
HERS Rater ECC-Rater Testing 
and Verification NA2.1.4.2.2 
NA2.1.4.2.3 
NA2.1.4.2.4 NA2.1. 3.2.2 
NA2.1. 3.2.3 
NA2.1. 3.2.4 
NA2.1.3.2.1 Diagnostic Duct Leakage from Fan Pressurization of Ducts 
The objective of this procedure is for an installer to determine and a HERS Rater an ECC-Rater to 
verify the leakage of a new or altered duct system. The duct leakage shall be determined by 
pressurizing the entire duct system ducts to 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) with respect to outside. 
The following procedure shall be used for the fan pressurization tests: 
(a) Verify that the air handler, supply and return plenums and all the connectors, transition 
pieces, duct boots, and registers are installed, and ensure the following locations have 
been sealed: 
1. Connections to plenums and other connections to the air -handling unit. 
2. Refrigerant line and other penetrations into the air -handling unit. 
3. Air handler access door or panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape 
is acceptable). 
The entire duct system including the air -handler shall be included in the test. 
(b) For newly installed or altered ducts, verify that cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape 
has not been used. 
(c) Temporarily seal all the supply registers and return grilles, except for one large centrally 
located return grille or the air handler cabinet access door or panel. Verify that all 
outside air dampers and/or economizers are sealed prior to pressurizing the system. 
(d) Attach the fan flowmeter device to the duct system at the unsealed return grille or the 
air handler cabinet access door or panel. 
(e) Install a static pressure probe at a supply register located close to the air handler, or at 
the supply plenum. 
(f) Adjust the fan flowmeter to produce a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) pressure at the 
supply register or the supply plenum with respect to the outside or with respect to the 
building space with the entry door open to the outside. 
(g) Record the flow through the flowmeter, this is the duct leakage flow at 25 Pa (0.1 inches 
water). 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s     
       
  
 
  
 
 
   
   
  
 
   
   
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
   
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
 Appendix NA2 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(h) Divide the duct leakage flow by the nominal air handler airflow determined by the 
procedure in Section NA2.1.4.1 NA2.1.3.1 and convert to a percentage. If the duct 
leakage flow percentage is equal to or less than the target compliance criterion from 
Table NA2.1 -1, the system passes. 
NA2.1.3.2.2 Sealing of All Accessible Leaks 
For altered existing duct systems that are unable to pass the leakage test in Section NA2.1.4.2.1 
NA2.1.3.2.1 , the objective of this test is to verify that all accessible leaks are sealed. The 
following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Complete the leakage test specified in Section NA2.1.4.2.1 Section NA2.1.3.2.1 . 
(b) Seal all accessible ducts . 
(c) After sealing is complete, again use the procedure in NA2.1.4.2.1 NA2.1.3.2.1 to measure 
the leakage after duct sealing. 
(d) Complete the Smoke Test as specified in NA2.1.4.2.3 NA2.1.3.2.3 . 
(e) Complete the Visual Inspection as specified in NA2.1.4.2.4 NA2.1.3.2.4 . 
All duct systems that fail to pass the leakage test specified in Section NA2.1.4.2.1 
NA2.1.3.2.1 shall be tested and inspected by a HERS Rater to verify that all accessible ducts have 
been sealed and damaged ducts have been replaced. Compliance with HERS Verification 
requirements shall not utilize group sampling procedures when the installer used the Sealing of 
All Accessible Leaks procedure in Section NA2.1.4.2.2 NA2.1.3.2.2 . 
NA2.1.3.2.3 Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing 
For altered existing ducts that fail the leakage tests, the objective of the smoke test is to confirm 
that all accessible leaks have been sealed. The following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Inject either theatrical or other non -toxic smoke into a fan pressurization device that is 
maintaining a duct pressure difference of 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) relative to the duct 
surroundings, with all grilles and registers in the duct system sealed. 
(b) Visually inspect all accessible portions of the duct system during smoke injection. 
(c) The system shall pass the test if one of the following conditions is met: 
1. No visible smoke exits the accessible portions of the duct system. 
2. Smoke only emanates from the furnace cabinet which is gasketed and sealed by the 
manufacturer and no visible smoke exits from the accessible portions of the duct 
system. 
NA2.1.3.2.4 Visual Inspection of Accessible Duct Sealing 
For altered existing duct systems that are unable to pass the leakage test in Section NA2.1.4.2.1 
NA2.1.3.2.1 , the objective of this inspection in conjunction with the smoke test (Section 
NA2.1.4.2.3 NA2.1.3.2.3 ) is to confirm that all accessible leaks have been sealed. Visually inspect 
to verify that the following locations have been sealed: 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
        
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
   
 
   
   
 
 
  
   
 
 
    
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
 
   
 
   
 
    
   
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -5 
(a) Connections to plenums and other connections to the air -handling unit. 
(b) Refrigerant line and other penetrations into the air -handling unit. 
(c) Air handler access door or panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is 
acceptable). 
(d) Register boots sealed to surrounding material. 
(e) Connections between lengths of duct, as well as connections to takeoffs, wyes, tees, and 
splitter boxes. 
Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Mechanical Ventilation 
Systems 
NA2.2.1 Purpose and Scope 
NA2.2. contains procedures for verification of heat recovery efficiency and fan efficacy, and for 
measuring the airflow rate for mechanical ventilation systems . 
NA2.2. is applicable to mechanical ventilation systems in high -rise residential dwelling units . 
NA2.2. provides required procedures for installers, HERS rater ECC-rater s and others who are required to 
perform field verification of mechanical ventilation systems for compliance with Part 6. 
Table NA2.2 -1 – Summary of Verification and Diagnostic procedures 
Diagnostic Description Procedure 
Dwelling -Unit 
Mechanical 
Ventilation Airflow Verification of the dwelling unit 
ventilation system airflow rate . 
Continuous Operation NA2.2.4.1 
Dwelling -Unit 
Mechanical 
Ventilation Airflow Verification of the dwelling unit 
ventilation system airflow rate . 
Intermittent Operation NA2.2.4.2 NA2.2.4.1.3 
Kitchen Local 
Mechanical Exhaust 
Verification Verification of vented range hood airflow 
rate or capture efficiency NA2.2.4.1.4 
Heat Recovery 
Ventilation (HRV) or 
Energy Recovery 
Ventilation (ERV) 
Rated Performance 
Verification Verification of the HRV/ERV fan efficacy 
(W/cfm) or heat recovery efficiency. NA2.2.4.1.5 
NA2.2.2 Instrumentation Specifications 
The instrumentation for the air distribution diagnostic measurements shall conform to the 
following specifications: 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s     
         
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
    
   
   
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
    
  Appendix NA2 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA2.2.2.1 Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be measured with measurement systems (i.e., sensor plus data 
acquisition system) having an accuracy equal to or better than ± 1% of pressure reading or ± 0.2 
Pa (0.0008 inches water) (whichever is greater). All pressure measurements within the duct 
system shall be made with static pressure probes such as Dwyer A303 or equivalen t. 
NA2.2.2.2 Airflow Rate Measurements 
All measurements of ventilation fan airflow rate shall be made with an airflow rate 
measurement apparatus (i.e., sensor plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy equal to 
or better than ± 10% of reading. The apparatus shall have an accuracy specific ation that is 
applicable to the airflow rates that must be verified utilizing the procedures in Section NA2.2.4 . 
NA2.2.2.3 Calibration 
All instrumentation used for mechanical ventilation system airflow rate diagnostic 
measurements shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s calibration procedure to 
ensure the airflow measurement apparatus conforms to the accuracy requirement speci fied in 
Section NA2.2.2.2 . 
NA2.2.3 Diagnostic Apparatus for Measurement of Ventilation System Airflow 
Ventilation system airflow rate shall be measured using one of the apparatuses listed in Section 
NA2.2.3 . The apparatus shall produce airflow rate measurements that conform to the accuracy 
requirements specified in Section NA2.2.2 for measurements of high -rise residential mechanical 
ventilation system airflow at system inlet or outlet terminals, grilles , or registers for single or 
multiple branch ventilation duct systems. 
The airflow rate measurement apparatus manufacturers shall publish in their product 
documentation, specifications for how their airflow measurement apparatuses are to be used 
for accurately measuring residential mechanical ventilation system airflow at sys tem inlet or 
outlet terminals, grilles , or registers of single or multiple branch ventilation systems. 
The airflow measurement apparatus manufacturers shall certify to the Energy Commission that 
use of the apparatus in accordance with the specifications given in the manufacturer's product 
documentation will produce measurement results that are within the ac curacy required by 
Section NA2.2.2.2 . 
For the airflow measurement apparatuses that are certified to the Commission as meeting the 
accuracy required by Section NA2.2.2.2 , the following information shall be posted on the Energy 
Commission website, making the information available to all people involved in the airflow 
verification compliance process: 
(a) The product manufacturers' model numbers for the airflow measurement apparatuses. 
(b) The product manufacturers' product documentation that gives the specifications for use 
of the airflow measurement apparatuses to accurately measure high -rise residential 
mechanical ventilation system airflow at system inlet or outlet terminals, grilles , or 
registers of single or multiple branch ventilation systems . 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
        
 
  
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
   
   
 
   
  
 
    
    2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -7 
A manufacturer's certification to the Commission of the accuracy of the airflow measurement 
apparatus, and submittal to the Commission of the product documentation that specifies the 
proper use of the airflow measurement apparatus to produce accurate airfl ow rate 
measurements shall be prerequisites for allowing the manufacturer's airflow measurement 
apparatus to be used for conducting the system airflow verification procedures in Section NA2.2 
for demonstrating compliance with Part 6. 
NA2.2.3.1 High -Rise Residential Mechanical Exhaust Airflow Measurement Device 
A flowmeter designed for measurement of high -rise residential exhaust airflows that meets the 
applicable instrument accuracy specifications in NA2.2.2.2 may be used to measure the 
mechanical exhaust ventilation airflow. 
NA2.2.3.2 Powered Flow Capture Hood Airflow Measurement Device 
A powered and pressure balanced flow capture hood (subsequently referred to as a Powered 
Flow Hood 0F 1) that has the capability to balance the flow capture static pressure difference 
between the room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (0.0008 inches water) 
and meets the applicable instrumentation specifications in Section NA2.2.2.2 may be used to 
verify the ventilation airflow rate if the powered flow hood has a flow capture area at least as 
large as the ventilation system inlet or outlet terminal, register , or grille in all dimensions. The 
fan adjustment needed to balance the flow capture static pressure difference between the 
room and the flow capture hood enclosure to 0.0 ± 0.2 Pa (0.0008 inches water) shall be 
provided by either an automatic control or a manual control operated in accordance with the 
apparatus manufacturer's instructions specified in the manufacturer's product documentati on. 
NA2.2.3.3 Traditional Flow Capture Hood 
A traditional flow capture hood 1F 2 meeting the applicable instrumentation specifications in 
Section NA2.2.2.2 may be used to verify the ventilation system airflow rate if the non -powered 
flow hood has a capture area at least as large as the ventilation system inlet or outlet terminal, 
register or grille in all dimensions. 
NA2.2.4 Procedures 
This section describes the procedures used to verify Mechanical ventilation system airflow. 
NA2.2.4.1 Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Rate Measurement -Continuous Operation 
If multiple fans are specified to operate simultaneously to provide the total required ventilation 
airflow, the measurements shall be made with all applicable fans operating simultaneously. 
Also known as "active" flow hood, or "fan assisted" flow hood. 
2Also known as “non -powered flow hood, "standard" flow hood , "commercially available" flow hood, or "passive" flow hood . 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s 1     
         
 
   
  
   
  
 
  
 
   
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
   
  
    
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA2 -8 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA2.2.4.1.1 Supply and Exhaust Ventilation Systems 
a) A flow measuring device that meets the applicable instrumentation requirements specified 
in Section NA2.2. 3.2, and NA2.2.3.3 shall be used to measure the ventilation airflow(s) . 
b) Measure and record the ventilation airflow(s). 
c) If the measured total airflow is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow rate required 
by the Standards or the Certificate of Compliance, the mechanical ventilation system 
complies . Otherwise the mechanical ventilation system does not comply, and corrective 
action shall be taken. 
NA2.2.4.1.2 Balanced Ventilation Systems 
a) A flow measuring device that meets the applicable instrumentation requirements given in 
Section NA2.2.3.2 and NA2.2.3.3 shall be used to measure the ventilation airflows. 
b) Confirm that both the supply side and the exhaust side of the balanced system operate 
simultaneously in response to a shared system control. 
c) Measure the airflow rate for the exhaust side of the system. 
d) Measure the airflow rate for the supply side of the system. 
e) Calculate the percent difference between the exhaust and supply airflow rates. 
f) Calculate the average of the exhaust and the supply airflow rates. 
g) If the exhaust and supply airflow rates are within 20% of each other, and the average of the 
exhaust and supply airflow rates is greater than or equal to the airflow rate required by the 
Standards or the Certificate of Compliance, the balanced ventilation system complies. 
Otherwise, the system does not comply, and corrective action shall be taken. 
h) If the balanced system is an HRV or ERV and compliance with a recovery efficiency or fan 
efficacy specification is required, then also perform the verification specified in NA2.2.4.1.5 . 
NA2.2.4.1.3 Mechanical Ventilation Airflow Rate Measurement -Intermittent Operation 
The Executive Director may approve intermittent mechanical ventilation systems, devices, or 
controls for use for compliance with field verification and diagnostic testing requirement s for 
mechanical ventilation airflow, subject to a manufacturer providing sufficient evidence to the 
Executive Director that the installed mechanical ventilation systems, devices, or controls will 
provide at least the minimum ventilation airflow required by the Standards , and subject to 
consideration of the manufacturer's proposed field verif ication and diagnostic test protocol for 
the ventilation system(s). Ventilation airflow of systems with multiple operating modes shall be 
tested in all modes designed to comply with the required ventilation airflows . 
Approved systems, devices, or controls, and field verification and diagnostic test protocols for 
intermittent mechanical ventilation systems shall be listed in directories published by the Energy 
Commission. 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
           
   
  
 
 
 
   
  
      
 
     
  
 
   
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
    
  
    
    
   
 
  
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -9 
NA2.2.4.1.4 Kitchen Local Mechanical Exhaust -Vented Range Hood Verification 
The verification shall utilize certified performance rating data from the Home Ventilating 
Institute (HVI) Certified Home Ventilating Products Directory at , https://www.hvi.org/hvi -certified -
products -directory/ , the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (AHAM) Certified Products 
Directory at https://www.aham.org/AHAM/What_We_Do/Kitchen_Range_Hood_Certification , 
or another directory of certified product performance ratings approved by the Energy 
Commission for determining compliance. The verification procedure shall cons ist of visual 
inspection of the installed kitchen range hood to verify and record the following information: 
a) The manufacturer name and model number. 
b) The model is listed in the HVI or AHAM or other approved d irectory . 
c) The rated airflow value or rated capture efficiency value listed in the HVI , AHAM , or 
other approved directory . 
d) The sound rating value listed in the HVI , AHAM , or other approved directory . 
e) If the value for the rated airflow or rated capture efficiency given in the directory is 
greater than or equal to the airflow or capture efficiency requirements specified in the 
Standards, and if the value for the sone rating given in the directory is less than or equal 
to the sone rating requirements specified in the Standards, then the kitchen range hood 
complies . Otherwise , the kitchen range hood does not comply. If the kitchen range hood 
is not listed in the HVI, AHAM, or other CEC-approved directory, t hen the system does 
not comply. 
NA2.2.4.1.5 Heat Recovery Ventilation (HRV) or Energy Recovery Ventilation (ERV) 
Rated Performance Verification 
The verification shall utilize certified performance rating data from the Home Ventilating 
Institute (HVI) Certified Home Ventilating Products Directory a t https://www.hvi.org/hvi -certified -
products -directory/ https://hvi.org/proddirectory/index.com , or anothe r directory of certified 
product performance ratings approved by the Energy Commission for determining compliance. 
The verification procedure shall consist of visual inspection of the installed system to verify and 
record the following information: 
1. Record the manufacturer make and model from the installed system nameplate. 
2. Verify the model is listed in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory. 
3. If compliance with a fan efficacy performance rating (w/cfm) is required, then determine 
and record the fan efficacy rating for the installed model using the model details in the 
energy ratings in the in the HVI or other CEC-approved directory in accordance with steps 
a, b, and c below . 
a. Record the required ventilation airflow (cfm) for the installed HRV/ERV as specified 
on the certificate of compliance. 
b. From the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC approved directory, determine, and 
record the rated Power Consumed (Watts) at 32 degrees F, at the closest Net Airflow 
(cfm) listed in the directory that is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s     
       
 
 
 
        
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
      
 
 
 Appendix NA2 -10 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(cfm) required on the certificate of compliance. Alternatively, linear interpolation of 
the directory ratings at 32 degrees F shall be allowed if the interpolated value is 
calculated based on a Net Airflow (cfm) that is equal to the ventilation airflow (cf m) 
required on the certificate of compliance. Interpolation shall be in accordance with 
equation NA2.2 -1. Extrapolation of the directory ratings at 32 degrees F shall not be 
allowed. 
Equation NA2.2 -1 pc = pc1 + [(na – na1) / (na2 – na1)] X (pc2 – pc1) 
where: 
na is the known value for Net Airflow equal to the ventilation airflow required on 
the certificate of compliance, 
pc is the unknown value for Power Consumed (Watts) at 32 degrees F. 
na1 and pc1 are the closest rated values at 32F for Net Airflow (cfm) and Power 
Consumed (Watts) respectively that are below the known na value. 
na2 and pc2 are the closest rated values at 32F for Net Airflow (cfm) and Power 
Consumed (Watts) respectively that are above the known na value. 
c. Divide the value for Power Consumed (Watts) recorded in step b, by the Net 
Airflow (cfm) used in step b to determine the Power Consumed. 
4. If compliance with a sensible recovery efficiency (SRE) performance rating (%) is required, 
then determine and record the SRE rating for the installed model using the model details 
in the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory in accordance with steps 
a, and b below . 
a. Record the required ventilation airflow (cfm) for the installed HRV/ERV as specified 
on the certificate of compliance. 
b. From the energy ratings in the HVI or other CEC approved directory, determine, and 
record the rated SRE (%) at 32 degrees F, at the closest Net Airflow (cfm) listed in the 
directory that is greater than or equal to the ventilation airflow (cfm) required on the 
certificate of compliance. Alternatively, linear interpolation of the directory ratings at 
32 degrees F shall be allowed if the interpolated value is calculated based on a Net 
Airflow (cfm) that is equal to the ventilation air flow (cfm) required on the certificate 
of compliance. Interpolation shall be in accordance with equation NA2.2 -2. 
Extrapolation of the directory ratings at 32 degrees F shall not be allowed. 
Equation NA2.2 -2 sre = sre1 + [(na – na1) / (na2 – na1)] X (sre2 – sre1) 
where: 
na is the known value for Net Airflow equal to the ventilation airflow required on 
the certificate of compliance, 
sre is the unknown value for SRE at 32 degrees F. 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
       
  
 
  
  
   
   
   
  
  
   
 
   
 
  
 
   
  
 
  
 
   
  
 
  
  
  
   
 
   
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -11 
na1 and sre1 are the closest rated values at 32F for Net Airflow (cfm) and SRE 
respectively that are below the known na value. 
na2 and sre2 are the closest rated values at 32F for Net Airflow (cfm) and SRE 
respectively that are above the known na value. 
5. Determining compliance. 
a. If the value determined for SRE by one or both of the alternatives in step 4 for the 
installed system is greater than or equal to the SRE required for compliance, then the 
system complies with the sensible recovery efficiency rating requirement . Otherwise , 
the system does not comply . 
b. If the value determined for fan efficacy (W/cfm) by one or both of the alternatives in 
step 3 for the installed system is less than or equal to the fan efficacy required for 
compliance, then the system complies with the fan efficacy rating requirement . 
Otherwise , the system does not comply. 
c. If compliance with both fan efficacy and sensible recovery efficiency ratings are 
required, then both ratings shall comply at the same Net Airflow (cfm) , otherwise the 
system does not comply. 
d. If the system is not listed in the HVI or other CEC -approved directory, then the system 
does not comply. 
Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Multifamily Dwelling Unit 
Enclosures 
NA2.3.1 Purpose and Scope 
The purpose of this test procedure is to measure the air leakage rate through a dwelling unit 
enclosure. 
The measurement procedure shall be based on the specifications of Residential Energy Services 
Network's (RESNET) Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building , Dwelling Unit, and Sleeping 
Unit Enclosures ; Airtightness of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems ; and Airflow of 
Mechanical Ventilation Systems (ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 -2019 ) (RESNET 380) as further specified 
in Subsections NA2.3 .2, NA2.3 .3, NA2.3 .4 below. 
This enclosure leakage procedure is applicable to Multifamily dwelling unit enclosures . 
NA2.3.2 Instrument Specifications 
The instrumentation for the enclosure leakage measurements shall conform to the 
specifications in RESNET 380 Section 4.1. 
NA2.3.3 Enclosure Leakage Measurement Procedures 
The enclosure leakage measurement procedure shall conform to the following specifications: 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s     
       
 
  
 
  
   
  
  
   
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
    
 
 
 
  Appendix NA2 -12 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
1) The procedure for preparation of the building or dwelling unit for testing shall conform 
to the applicable requirements in RESNET 380 Section 4.2. 
2) The procedure for installation of the test apparatus, and preparations for measurement 
shall conform to the applicable requirements in RESNET 380 Section 4.3. 
If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in cubic feet per minute per 
ft2 of dwelling unit enclosure surface area at 50 Pa (0.2 inch water) (CFM50 /ft2 of 
enclosure) , the dwelling unit enclosure interior surface area in ft2 (compartmentalization 
boundary area) shall be recorded . 
Note: the com partmentalization boundary area is the sum of the interior surface area s 
of the dwelling unit enclosure walls between dwelling units, exterior walls, ceiling, and 
floor . 
3) The procedure for the conduct of the enclosure leakage test shall conform to the One -
Point Airtightness Test specified in RESNET 380 Section 4.4.1. or the multi -point 
airtightness test specified in RESNET 380 Section 4.4.2. 
NA2.3.4 Determination of Test Results 
The results of the test shall be determined as follows: 
1) The leakage airflow in CFM50 if determined by the One -Point Airtightness Test specif ied 
in RESNET 380 Section 4.4.1 shall be adjusted using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.1 , equation 
(5a). 
2) If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in air changes per hour at 50 
Pa (0.2 inch water) (ACH50) , the leakage results determined by RESNET 380 Section 
4.5.1 , equation (5a) shall be converted to ACH50 using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.2 , 
equation (7a). 
3) If compliance requires the results of the test to be reported in CFM50/ft2 of enclosure , 
the leakage results determined by RESNET 380 Section 4.5.1 , equation (5a) shall be 
converted to CFM50/ft2 of enclosure using RESNET 380 Section 4.5.2, equation 10 . 
NA2.3.5 Determining Compliance 
If the applicable value(s) for CFM50 , ACH50, or CFM50/ft2of dwelling unit enclosure area 
determined in Section NA2.3 .4 are less than or equal to the enclosure leakage compliance 
criterion specified by the Standards or the Certificate of Compliance , the enclosure complies. 
Otherwise the enclosure does not comply. 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s    
       
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA2 -13 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
Appendix NA2 – Nonresidential HERS Field Verification and Diagnostic Test Procedure s       
    
 
   
   
 
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
  
    
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA3 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA3 
Appendix NA3 – Fan Motor Efficiencies 
Table NA3 -1 – Fan Motor Efficiencies (< 1 HP) 
Nameplate or Brake 
Horsepower Standard Fan Motor 
Efficiency NEMA* High 
Efficiency Premium Efficiency 
1/20 40% ... ... 
1/12 49% ... ... 
1/8 55% ... ... 
1/6 60% ... ... 
1/4 64% ... ... 
1/3 66% ... ... 
1/2 70% 76.0% 80.0% 
3/4 72% 77.0% 84.0% 
NOTE: For default drive efficiencies, see Nonresidential ACM Reference Manual 
*NEMA -Proposed standard using test procedures. 
Minimum NEMA efficiency as specified by test IEEE 112b Rating Method. 
Appendix NA3 – Fan Motor Efficiencies    
      
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
 
 Appendix NA3 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Table NA3 -2 – Fan Motor Efficiencies (1 HP and over) 
Motor 
Horsepower Open 
Motors 
2 pole 
3600 rpm Open 
Motors 
4 pole 
1800 rpm Open 
Motors 
6 pole 
1200 rpm Open 
Motors 
8 pole 
900 rpm Enclosed 
Motors 
2 pole 
3600 rpm Enclosed 
Motors 
4 pole 
1800 rpm Enclosed 
Motors 
6 pole 
1200 rpm Enclosed 
Motors 
8 pole 
900 rpm 
1 77.0 85.5 82.5 74.0 77.0 85.5 82.5 74.0 
1.5 84.0 86.5 86.5 75.5 84.0 86.5 87.5 77.0 
2 85.5 86.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 86.5 88.5 82.5 
3 85.5 89.5 88.5 86.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 84.0 
5 86.5 89.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 85.5 
7.5 88.5 91.0 90.2 88.5 89.5 91.7 91.0 85.5 
10 89.5 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 91.7 91.0 88.5 
15 90.2 93.0 91.7 89.5 91.0 92.4 91.7 88.5 
20 91.0 93.0 92.4 90.2 91.0 93.0 91.7 89.5 
25 91.7 93.6 93.0 90.2 91.7 93.6 93.0 89.5 
30 91.7 94.1 93.6 91.0 91.7 93.6 93.0 91.0 
40 92.4 94.1 94.1 91.0 92.4 94.1 94.1 91.0 
50 93.0 94.5 94.1 91.7 93.0 94.5 94.1 91.7 
60 93.6 95.0 94.5 92.4 93.6 95.0 94.5 91.7 
75 93.6 95.0 94.5 93.6 93.6 95.4 94.5 93.0 
100 93.6 95.4 95.0 93.6 94.1 95.4 95.0 93.0 
125 94.1 95.4 95.0 93.6 95.0 95.4 95.0 93.6 
150 94.1 95.8 95.4 93.6 95.0 95.8 95.8 93.6 
200 95.0 95.8 95.4 93.6 95.4 96.2 95.8 94.1 
250 95.0 95.8 95.4 94.5 95.8 96.2 95.8 94.5 
300 95.4 95.8 95.4 — 95.8 96.2 95.8 — 
350 95.4 95.8 95.4 — 95.8 96.2 95.8 — 
400 95.8 95.8 95.8 — 95.8 96.2 95.8 — 
450 95.8 96.2 96.2 — 95.8 96.2 95.8 — 
500 95.8 96.2 96.2 — 95.8 96.2 95.8 — 
Appendix NA3 – Fan Motor Efficiencies      
    
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA4 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public 
School Buildings 
Purpose and Scope 
This document describes the compliance procedures that shall be followed when the whole 
building performance approach is used for relocatable public school buildings. Relocatable public 
school buildings are constructed (manufactured) at a central location and could be shipped and 
installed in any California climate zone. Furthermore, once they arrive at the school site, they 
could be positioned so that the windows face in any direction. The portable nature of relocatable 
classrooms requires that a special p rocedure be followed for showing compliance when the 
whole building performance method is used. Compliance documentation for relocatable public 
school buildings will be reviewed by the Division of the State Architect (DSA). 
The Plan Check Process 
The Division of the State Architect is the enforcement agency for relocatable public school 
buildings. Since relocatables are manufactured in batches, like cars or other manufactured 
products, the plan check and approval process occurs in two phases. The f irst phase is when the 
relocatable manufacturer completes design of a model or modifies a model. At this point, 
complete plans and specifications are submitted to the DSA; DSA reviews the plans for 
compliance with the energy standards and other California Building Code (CBC) requirements; 
and a “pre -check” (PC) design approval is granted. Once the PC design is approved, a school 
district or the manufacturer may file an “over -the-counter” application with DSA to construct one 
or more relocatables. The over -the-counter application is intended to be reviewed quickly, since 
the PC design has already been pre -checked. The over -the-counter application is the building 
permit application for construction and installation of a relocatable at a specific site , and incl udes 
the approved PC design drawings as well as site development plans for the proposed site where 
the relocatable will be installed. An over -the-counter application also is required for the 
construction of a stockpile of one or more relocatables based on the approved PC design 
drawings. Stockpiled relocatables are stored typically at the manufacturer’s yard until the actual 
school site is determined where the relocatable will be installed. Another over -the-counter 
application is required to install a previ ously stockpiled relocatable at which time site 
development plans for the proposed site are checked. 
The effective date for all buildings subject to the energy standards is the date of permit 
application. If a building permit application is submitted on or after the effective date, then the 
new energy standards apply. For relocatable classrooms, the date of the permit application is the 
date of the over -the-counter application, not the date of the application for PC design approval. 
The PC design is only valid until the code changes. 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings     
  
   
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 Appendix NA4 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
The Compliance Process 
Like other nonresidential buildings, the standard design for relocatable public school buildings is 
defined by the prescriptive requirements. In the case of relocatables, there are two choices of 
prescriptive criteria: 
(a) Table 140.3 -D in the Standards may be used for relocatable school buildings that can be 
installed in any climate zone in the state. In this case, the compliance is demonstrated in 
climates 14, 15, and 16 and this is accepted as evidence that the classroom will comply in 
all climate zones. These relocatables will have a permanent label that allows it to be used 
anywhere in the state as specified in Section 140.3(a)8 of the Standards. 
(b) Table 140.3 -B in the Standards may be used for relocatable school buildings that are to be 
installed in only specific climate zones. In this case, compliance is demonstrated in each 
climate zone for which the relocatable has been designed to comply. These relocatables 
will have a permanent label that identifies in which climate zones it may be installed as 
specified in Section 140.3(a)8 in the Standards. It is not lawful to install the relocatable in 
other climate zones. 
The building envelope of the standard design has the same geometry as the proposed design, 
including window area and position of windows on the exterior walls, and meets the prescriptive 
requirements specified in Section 140.3. Lighting power for the stand ard design meets the 
prescriptive requirements specified in Section 140.6. The HVAC system for the standard design 
meets the prescriptive requirements specified in Section 140.4. The system typically installed in 
relocatables is a single -zone packaged heat pump or furnace. Most relocatable school buildings 
do not have water heating systems, so this component is neutral in the analysis. Other modeling 
assumptions such as equipment loads are the same for both the proposed design and the 
standard design and ar e specified in the Nonresidential ACM Reference Manual. 
Manufacturers shall certify compliance with the standards and all compliance documentation 
shall be provided. If the manufacturer chooses to comply using Table 140.3 -B in the Standards for 
compliance in only specific climate zones, then the manufacturers s hall indicate the climates 
zones for which the classroom will be allowed to be located as specified in Section 140.3(a)8 of 
the Standards. 
Since relocatable public school buildings could be positioned in any orientation, it is necessary to 
perform compliance calculations for multiple orientations. Each model with the same proposed 
design energy features shall be rotated through 8 different or ientations either in climate zones 
14, 15 and 16 for relocatables showing statewide compliance or in the specific climate zones that 
the manufacturer proposes for the relocatable to be allowed to be installed, i.e., the building 
with the same proposed desi gn energy features is rotated in 45 degree increments and shall 
comply in each case. Approved compliance programs shall automate the rotation of the building 
and reporting of the compliance results to insure it is done correctly and uniformly and to avoid 
unnecessary documentation. 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings    
     
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 -3 
Documentation 
The program shall present the results of the compliance calculations in a format similar to Table 
NA4 Table NA4 . For each of the cases (8 orientations times number of climates), the Time 
Dependent Valuation (TDV) energy for the Standard Design and the Proposed Design are shown 
(the energy features of the Proposed Design shall be the same for all orientations). The final 
column shows the compliance margin, which is the difference between the TDV energy for the 
Proposed Design and the Standard Design . Approved compliance programs shall scan the data 
presented in the Table NA4 format and prominently highlight the case that has the smallest 
compliance margin. Complete compliance documentation shall be submitted for the building and 
energy features that achieve compliance in all of the climate zones and orientations as 
represente d by the case with the smallest margin. DSA may require that compliance 
documentation for other cases also be submitted; showing that the Proposed Design building and 
energy features are identical to the case submitted, in each orientation and climate zone. Table 
NA4 Table NA4 shows rows for climate zones 14, 15, and 16, which are the ones used when the 
criteria of Table 140.3 -D in the Standards is used to show compliance throughout the state. If the 
criteria of Table 140.3 -B in the Standards is used, then rows shall be added to the table for each 
climate zone for which the manufacturer wants the relocatable to be allowed to be installed. 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings     
  
     
   
   
  
 
 
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
 
  
  
 
 
 
  Appendix NA4 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Table NA4 -1 – Summary of Compliance Calculations Needed for Relocatable Classrooms 
Climate Zone Azimuth LSC 
Proposed 
Design TDV Energy LSC 
Standard 
Design LSC 
Compliance 
Margin 
14 30 
14 75 
14 120 
14 165 
14 210 
14 255 
14 300 
14 345 
15 30 
15 75 
15 120 
15 165 
15 210 
15 255 
15 300 
15 345 
16 30 
16 75 
16 120 
16 165 
16 210 
16 255 
16 300 
16 345 
Optional Features 
Relocatable classrooms may come with a variety of optional features, like cars. A school district 
can buy the “basic model” , or it can pay for options. Many of the optional features do not affect 
energy efficiency and are not significant from the perspective of energy code compliance. 
Examples include floor finishes (various grades of carpet or tiles), casework, and ceiling and wall 
finishes. Other optional features do affect energy performance such as window construction, 
insulation, lighting systems, lighting controls, HVAC ductwork, HVAC equipment, and HVAC 
controls. 
When a manufacturer offers a relocatable classroom model with a variety of options, it is 
necessary to identify those options that affect energy performance and to show that the model 
complies with any combination of the optional features. Most of the time , optional energy 
features are upgrades that clearly improve performance. If the basic model complies with the 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings    
    
   
 
  
  
  
 
  
   
 
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
   
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 -5 
Standards, then adding any or all of the optional features would improve performance. The 
following are examples of optional features that are clear upgrades in terms of energy 
performance: 
(a) HVAC equipment that has both a higher SEER /SEER2 and higher EER /EER2 than the 
equipment in the basic model. 
(b) Lighting systems that result in less power than the basic model. 
(c) Lighting controls, such as occupant sensors, that are recognized by the standards and for 
which power adjustment factors in Table 140.6 -A are published in Section 140.6. 
(d) Windows that have both a lower SHGC and lower U -factor (limited to relocatables that do 
not take credit for daylighting). 
(e) Wall, roof , or floor construction options that result in a lower U -factor than the basic 
model. 
For energy code compliance purposes, it is necessary to show that every variation of the 
relocatable classroom that is offered to customers will comply with the Standards. There are two 
approaches for achieving this, as defined below: 
1. Basic Model Plus Energy Upgrades Approach. The simplest approach is to show that the 
basic model complies with the Standards and that all of the options that are offered to 
customers are clear energy upgrades that would only improve performance. As long as 
each and every measure in the basic model is met or exceeded by the energy upgrades, 
the relocatable classroom will comply with the Standards. 
While clear upgrades are obvious in most cases, the following are some examples of 
options that are not energy upgrades, for which additional analysis would be needed to 
show compliance that every combination of options comply. 
(a) HVAC equipment that has a higher SEER /SEER2 , but a lower EER /EER2 . 
(b) Windows that lower SHGC but increase U -factor, or vice versa. 
(c) Insulation options that reduce the U -factor for say walls, but increase it for the roof. 
(d) Any other combination of measures that results in the performance of anyone 
measure being reduced in comparison to a complying basic model. 
2. Modeling of Every Combination Approach. A more complex whole building performance 
approach is required when a model is available with options which in combination may or 
may not comply. In this case every combination of options shall be modeled, and the 
specific combinations that comply shall b e determined and only those combinations shall 
be allowed. This approach, while possible, requires considerably more effort on the part 
of the relocatable manufacturer and its energy consultant. It also places a great er burden 
on DSA when they issue the over -the-counter building permit for the PC design that only 
allows specific combinations of energy options. DSA would have to examine the specific 
optional features that are proposed with the over -the-counter applicati on and make sure 
that the proposed combination of measures achieves compliance. 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings     
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
   
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
 Appendix NA4 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
The manufacturer or its energy consultant would need to prepare a table or chart that 
shows all of the acceptable combinations that achieve compliance. This chart could be 
quite complex, depending on the number of optional features that are offered. 
Table NA4 Table NA4 is intended to illustrate the complexity that could be involved in 
modeling of every combination of energy features. It shows a list of typical optional 
features that would affect energy performance. In this example, there are two possible 
for each of the eight options, e.g. , the feature is either there or not (in an actual case 
there could be a different number of options and a different number of states for any 
option). In the example any one of the features could be combined with any of the others. 
The number of possible co mbinations in this example is two (the number of states) to the 
eighth power (the number of measures that have two states). The number of possible 
options is then 28 or 256. This is the number of combinations that would need to be 
model ed in order to determine which combination of optional features achieves 
compliance. 
Table NA4 -2 – Examples of Optional Features for Relocatable Classrooms 
Order Options Offered States 
1 Efficient lighting option Yes/No 
2 High efficiency heat pump Yes/No 
3 Improved wall insulation Yes/No 
4 Improved roof insulation Yes/No 
5 Occupant sensor for lighting Yes/No 
6 Low-e windows Yes/No 
7 Skylights Yes/No 
8 Daylighting Controls Yes/No 
Appendix NA4 – Compliance Procedures for Relocatable Public School Buildings     
   
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 5-1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA5 
Appendix NA5 – Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of 
Whole Building Air Leakage 
Purpose and Scope 
The purpose of this test procedure is to measure the air leakage rate through a building 
envelope. 
1. This enclosure leakage procedure is applicable to nonresidential buildings. 
a. Buildings that have less than 10,000 ft2 of conditioned floor area may perform the 
whole -building air leakage test in accordance with Residential Energy Services 
Network (RESNET)/ANSI/ICC3 380 -2019 Guidelines and RA3.8 rather than those in 
NA5 .2-7. 
b. Buildings that have more than 50,000 ft2 of conditioned floor area, a sectional test 
method of co -pressurizing representative test floors and taking data from the specific 
floors is permitted when following the procedures in Sections NA5 .2-7. Representative 
test floors must meet the following conditions as adopted from ASHRAE 90.1 -2019 
Exceptions to 5.4.3.1.1: 
i. The entire floor area of all stories that have any spaces directly under a roof. 
ii. The entire floor area of all stories that have a building entrance or loading 
dock. 
iii. Representative above -grade wall sections of the building totaling at least 25% 
of the wall area enclosing the remaining conditioned space. Floor areas in parts 
a) and b) shall not be included in the 25%. 
iv. When interpreting the data and determining the final air leakage rate, the 
measured air leakage is area -weighted by the surface areas of the building 
envelope. 
2. The measurement procedure shall be based on the specifications of ASTM E3158 by 
blower door fan assembly (architectural only) and multi -point regression testing as 
further specified in Sections NA5 .2, NA5 .3, NA5 .4. NA5 .5, NA5 .6, NA5 .7 below. 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage                                                                                              
  
   
 
  
   
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
   
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Appendix NA5 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Instrument Specifications 
The instrumentation for the enclosure leakage measurements shall conform to the specifications 
in ASTM E3158. 
Pre-Test 
NA5.3.1 Pre-Test Inspection (to occur the day before testing day) 
1. Visually review the building for completion of air barrier components. 
2. Meet with electrical and mechanical (or controls) subcontractors to review electrical 
needs for testing equipment and shutdown/sealing plan for mechanical systems and 
ductwork. 
3. Contractor to provide dedicated electrical service for running of fans during the air 
leakage testing (minimum of 1 non -GFCI circuit 120V/20A per fan required). 
4. Review weather forecasts and verify appropriate test conditions. 
NA5.3.2 Pre-Test Set Up (To be performed by General Contractor) 
1. Seal all intentional penetrations where they penetrate the air barrier (i.e. , louvers, 
vents, etc.). 
2. Fill plumbing traps with water. Toilets, sinks, floor drains, waterless urinals must be 
primed. Airtight caps on drains are acceptable. 
3. Shut off the HVAC system – or leave in “pilot” mode (to avoid introducing air 
movement that is not included in the calculations). Any automated pressure relief 
dampers must either be disabled, sealed , or set to a pressure well above 75 Pa. 
4. Disable combustion equipment or leave in “pilot” position. 
5. Seal all intentional openings in building envelope so that they are air -tight. Acceptable 
sealing materials include but are not limited to carpet protection plastic, adhesive grill 
mask and tape and plastic (4 mil poly sheeting or thicker). Intentional openings 
include, but are not limited to, the following: 
a. Supply air intakes 
b. Make -up air and other intakes/louvers 
c. Exhaust ducts/vents/louvers 
d. Plumbing exhausts 
e. Pressure relief dampers or louvers 
f. Fume hoods 
g. Other exhaust vents (kitchen, bathroom, dryer, etc.) 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage                                                                     
     
 
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 5-3 
h. Any other locations where air leakage can occur within the mechanical system 
during inactive periods 
i. Any other intentional opening in the building envelope other than doors and 
operable windows 
6. Close and lock exterior windows and doors. Close any vents within window frames. 
7. Prop interior doors open to create a single uniform zone. 
8. Where drop ceilings are installed in a location that constitutes a barrier to air flow 
between the testing equipment and the plane of air tightness of the space being 
tested, remove ceiling tiles at a rate of one per 500 ft2 to prevent movement of tiles 
during test and to ensure a uniform pressure within plenum space. Additional tiles can 
be removed to ensure a uniform pressure distribution in the plenum space. 
9. Install exterior electrical box caps (if applicable). 
Run Preliminary Test 
Pressurize the building to 75 Pa to approximate if building is expected to pass test and to confirm 
that pre -test set up is complete and that temporary sealing stays in place while under pressure. 
Enclosure Measurement Procedures 
NA5.5.1 Pressurization Test 
1. Reference ASTM E3158 -18 for Whole Building Air Leakage Testing. 
2. Record interior and exterior weather conditions. 
3. Record average wind speeds. 
4. Record interior and exterior temperatures before the testing begins. 
5. Record site elevation in feet above sea level. 
6. Measure bias pressures with fans off and covered. 
7. Perform a multi -point pressurization test from at least +25 to +50 Pa (leakage is reported 
at 75 Pa, as attained or extrapolated). 
8. Record a minimum of 5 points between minimum and maximum induced pressures. 
9. Measure bias pressures at end of multi -point test with fans off and covered. 
10. Record interior and exterior temperatures. 
11. If the pressure exponent n is less than 0.45 or greater than 1.0 per Section 9.5.1 of ASTM 
E3158 -18, then the pressurization test is invalid and shall be repeated. 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage                                                                                              
  
    
  
  
    
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 Appendix NA5 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA5.5.2 Depressurization Test 
1. Reverse direction of fans. 
2. Measure bias pressures with fans off and covered. 
3. Perform a multi -point depressurization test from at least -25 to -50 Pa (optional). 
4. Record a minimum of 5 points between minimum and maximum induced pressures. 
5. Measure bias pressures at end of multi -point test with fans off and covered. 
6. Record interior and exterior temperatures after the testing is complete. 
7. If the pressure exponent n is less than 0.45 or greater than 1.0 per Section 9.5.1 of ASTM 
3158 -18, then the depressurization test is invalid and shall be repeated. 
Determination of Test Results 
1. Calculate the building envelope air leakage in accordance with guidelines in ASTM E3158 -
18 multi -point regression tests or the relevant building envelope area when testing in 
sections. 
2. If the building envelope air leakage rate exceeds 0.4 cfm/ft2 but is less than 0.6 cfm/ft2, a 
visual inspection of the air barrier shall be conducted in accordance with NA 5.7. Any leaks 
observed should be sealed where such sealing can be made without destruction of 
existing building components. An additional report identifying the corrective actions taken 
to seal air leaks should be submitted to the building owner and code o fficial, and any 
further requirement to meet the air leakage rate will be waived. 
3. If the building envelope air leakage rate exceeds 0.6 cfm/ft2, a visual inspection of the air 
barrier shall be conducted in accordance with NA 5.7, and any leaks noted should be 
repaired. The building will then be re -tested until either the building envelope air leakage 
rate less than 0.4 cfm/ft2, or the building envelope air leakage rate is in the range of 0.4 
cfm/ft2 but is less than 0.6 cfm/ft2 and a visual inspection and repair program is executed. 
Exception to NA5 .6 3. Alterations where less than 100% of the wall area is being altered or 
additions that are an extension of the existing air barrier, if the building is tested in accordance 
with the procedures for whole building air leakage in NA5 and the tested leakage rate exceeds 
0.6 cfm/ft2 of building shell area at 75 pa, a Visual Inspection and Diagnostic Evaluation shall been 
completed in accordance with NA5 .7 and all observed leaks shall be sealed where such sealing 
can be made without destructio n of existing building components. An additional report 
identifying the corrective actions taken to seal air leaks should be submitted to the building 
owner and code official, and any further requirement to meet the air leakage rate will be waived. 
Visual Inspection and Diagnostic Evaluation of Air Leakage After Test 
Failure Visual Inspection 
1. Ensure that all temporary seals and covers for intentional openings such as at louvers, 
exhaust/intake vents, fireplaces, and rooftop units are properly sealed and not damaged 
or loosened during the construction. 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage                                                                     
    
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
   
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA4 5-5 
2. Ensure that all plumbing -traps are filled with water. 
3. Ensure that all operable windows, trickle -vents, and doors are properly shut and locked. 
4. Ensure that all mechanical systems are shut -off and any mechanical dampers set to the 
closed position. 
Diagnostic Evaluation 
5. Identify locations with air leakage using infrared thermography or smoke pens in 
accordance with ASTM E1186 -17, while the building is maintained at a minimum 25 Pa 
pressure (during pressurization) or -25 Pa (during depressurization). The following 
locations shall be evaluated: 
a. The perimeter of windows and doors. 
b. Around operable window hardware and door hardware 
c. Penetrations through the roof, wall, and floor assemblies along the plane of the 
intended air -barrier. 
d. Electrical outlets located on exterior -facing walls. 
e. Lighting and other electrical penetrations through the roof level ceiling. 
f. Above -and below -grade vestibules. 
g. Stairs leading to unconditioned space. 
Reporting 
1. Generate report in accordance with ASTM E3158 reporting instructions. 
2. The report shall include information on the tested building envelope area, conditioned 
floor area, conditioned air -by-volume, stories above grade, and air leakage rates. 
3. Results shall be reported at the upper 95 percent confidence interval. 
Verification of Continuous Air Barrier 
An independent third -party verification shall be conducted in accordance with the following 
requirements: 
1. A design review shall be conducted to verify and document compliance with the 
requirements Section 140.3(a)9, specifically: 
a. All air barrier components are identified on construction documents . 
b. All joints, interconnections, and penetrations of the continuous air barrier 
components are identified on construction documents . 
c. The continuous air barrier extends on all surfaces of the building envelope (walls, 
roof, and lowest floor) . 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage                                                                                              
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 Appendix NA5 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
d. The continuous air barrier is designed to resist positive and negative pressures 
from wind, stack effect, and mechanical ventilation. 
e. The compliance documents indicate the intent to verify the continuous air barrier 
by way of on -site visual inspection. 
2. Inspection shall occur during construction when the continuous air barrier is accessible for 
a visual inspection. The entire continuous air barrier shall be inspected. The third -party 
entity conducting the verification shall coordinate with the constructio n team to schedule 
site visits such that the entire continuous air barrier is verified. 
3. Inspection of the continuous air barrier materials and assemblies shall verify the following 
are installed correctly: 
a. Transitions to adjacent air barrier systems – including but not limited to roof parapet 
transitions, glazed framing systems to adjacent framed wall assemblies assembly 
transitions, plaza waterproofing to podium transitions, vertical wall to soffit 
transitions . 
b. Detailing of penetrations through air barrier systems. 
c. Building assemblies used as ducts or plenums . 
d. Contractor internal quality control/quality assurance . 
Appendix NA4 5– Field Verification and Diagnostic Testing of Whole Building Air Leakage        
   
 
  
 
  
     
 
 
 
   
    
 
  
 
  
   
  
  
  
   
 
 
  
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA6 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA6 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to 
Calculate Thermal Performance 
Scop e 
This procedure provides for non-rated site-built skylight s, and alterations to fenestration (i.e., 
repairs or replacement of glass), with an option to comply with the Energy Standards. The Center 
of Glass (COG) values are required to be used in Equation NA6 -1, NA6 -2 and NA6 -3 and shall be 
determined by the manufacturers in accordance with NFRC procedures. A copy of the 
manufacturer cut sheet s or data sheet shall be provided identifying the COG values as an 
attachment with the Fenestration Certificate of Compliance . 
(a) NONRESIDENTIAL AND MULTIFAMILY BUILDINGS FOUR STORIES OR GREATER 
For Nonresidential cases, th e Alternative Default Fenestration Procedure option is 
available for up to 200 ft2 of site-built skylight area , and alterations to vertical 
fenestration. The manufacturer cut sheet or data sheet shall be used to identify the COG 
values for the U -factor, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC C) and Visible Transmittance 
(VT C). If unable to determine center of glass information, the alternative Energy 
Commissions Default Tables in Section 11 0.6 of the Energy Standards must be use d to 
determine the appropriate fenestration default values. The values listed in Table 110.6 -A 
for U -factors and Table 110.6 -B for SHGC values are whole fenestration product values. 
Since there is no default Visible Transmittance value available, the altern ative is VT C =1.0 ; 
this will be use d to determine the total fenestration product, VT T, which includes the glass 
and frame of the fenestration. 
For Nonresidential , the altered fenestration (other than a repair ) shall meet the values 
listed in Table 141.0 -A unless the altered glass area meets the Exception to Section 
141.0(b)2A in the Energy Standards. If the altered fenestration or glass alone is not rated 
by NFRC then the Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure can be used . 
(b) RESIDENTIAL AND MULTIFAMILY BUILDINGS THREE STORIES OR LESS 
For Residential case s, the Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure option is available 
only when nonrated site -built fenestration is being installed in a residential dwelling. For 
Residential site -built fenestration up to 250 ft² in area or 5% times the conditioned floor 
area (CFA) , whichever is greater shall meet Sections §110.6(a)2 and §110.6(a)3. 
The Alternate Default Fenestration calculated values are typically less efficient than those 
listed in the Prescriptive Approach in Table 150.1 -A and Table 150.1 -B of the Energy 
Standards . The Visible Transmittance (VT) value is not required to meet residential energy 
compliance. If unable to acquire center of glass (COG) thermal performance values from 
the manufacturer, then the Energy Commissions Default Tables shall be used; Table 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance    
   
  
  
  
  
  
 
    
  
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
   
 
  
  
  
    
 
 Appendix NA6 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
110.6 -A for U -factors and Table 110.6 -B for SHGC values and documented on the on a 
self-produced manufactured default label.  The default label shall be attached to the 
unrated fenestration product. An example of the label can be found in the Residential 
Compliance Manual. 
(c) DOCUMENTATION 
1. The Energy Commission's Fenestration Label Certificate form for nonresidential 
application shall be use d to document the Alternate Default Fenestration calculated 
values for each non -rated site -built fenestration unit; or 
2. For residential, a manufactured Default Label attached to each non -rated site -built 
fenestration unit. 
The equations listed below are to be used for only for unrated site -built fenestration that 
meets the requirements in either item 1 or 2 above. 
Default U-factor 
Equation NA6 -1 
UT= C 1+ (C 2 X U c) 
Where: 
UT = U-factor Is the Total Performance of the fenestration including glass and frame 
C1 = Coefficient selected from Table NA6 -6 
C2 = Coefficient selected from Table NA6 -6 
UC = Center of glass U -factor calculated in accordance with NFRC 100 Section 4.5.3.1 
(http://www.nfrc.org/software.aspx ) 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
    
 
    
 
    
 
    
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA6 -3 
Table NA6 -6 – U-factor Coefficients 
Product Type Frame Type C1 C2 
Site-Built Vertical Fenestration Metal 0.311 0.872 
Site-Built Vertical Fenestration Metal Thermal Break 0.202 0.867 
Site-Built Vertical Fenestration Non -Metal 0.202 0.867 
Skylights with a Curb Metal 0.711 1.065 
Skylights with a Curb Metal Thermal Break 0.437 1.229 
Skylights with a Curb Non -Metal 0.437 1.229 
Skylights with no Curb 
(Deck Mounted) Metal 0.310 0.878 
Skylights with no Curb 
(Deck Mounted) Metal Thermal Break 0.195 0.882 
Skylights with no Curb 
(Deck Mounted) Non -Metal 0.310 0.878 
Default Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, SHGC 
The SHGC of the fenestration product shall be calculated using the following equation: 
Equation NA6 -2 
SHGC T = 0.08 + (0.86 x SHGC c) 
Where: 
SHGC T = SHGC Is the Total Performance of the fenestration including glass and frame 
SHGC C = Center of glass SHGC calculated in accordance with NFRC 200 Section 4.5.1.1 
http://www.nfrc.org/software.aspx 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance    
    
   
        
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
   
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
   
 
 Appendix NA6 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Default Visibl e Transmittance, VT 
Equation NA6 -3 -VT of Center of Glass (COG) calculation 
VTT= VT Fx VT C 
Where: 
VTT = Is the Total Performance of the fenestration including glass and frame 
VTF = 0.53 for projecting windows, such as casement and awning windows 
VTF = 0.67 for operable or sliding windows 
VTF = 0.77 for fixed or non -operable windows 
VTF= 0.88 for curtain wall/storefront, Site -built and manufactured non -curb mounted 
skylights 
VTF = 1.0 for Curb Mounted manufactured Skylights  
VTC = Center of glass VT is calculated in accordance with NFRC 200 Section 4.5.1.1 or NFRC 
202 for Translucent Products or NFRC 203 for Tubular Daylighting Devices and Hybrid 
Tubular Daylighting Devices or ASTM E972 (http://www.nfrc.org/software.aspx ) 
Responsibilities for Compliance 
This section describes the responsibilities of energy consultants, designers, architects, builders, 
installers, and enforcement agencies when using the procedures of this appendix. 
NA6.5.1 Energy Consultants, Designers, Architects 
The person with responsibility for preparing the compliance documentation shall establish the 
inputs from the following: 
(a) The center of glass U -factor, SHGC and VT shall be taken from manufacturers’ literature 
and determined using methods consistent with NFRC 100, NFRC 200, NFRC 202 and NFRC 
203 procedures. 
(b) The frame type (Metal, Metal Thermal Break, Non -metal) shall be verified from 
manufacturers’ literature and through observations of frame sections provided by the 
manufacturer. 
For the Prescriptive Overall Compliance Method, the calculated values shall be entered on the 
prescriptive Certificate of Compliance form. In addition , the Fenestration Certificate of 
Compliance Label Certificate must be also filled and located at the project site location in 
according to Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA7. 
For the Performance Compliance Approach, the calculated values shall be entered and 
documented on the Performance Certificate s of Compliance . In addition , the Fenestration 
Certificate of Compliance Label Certificate must be filled and located at the project site location 
in according to Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA7. 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance    
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
  
     
  
 
  
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA6 -5 
For both the prescriptive and performance compliance method, the building plans shall contain a 
window schedule that lists the calculated values in which matches the Fenestration Certificate of 
Compliance form or improved thermal performance values than listed on the Fenestration 
Certificate of Compliance form. The specifications of the windows shall be consistent with the 
values used in this procedure, e.g. , frame type glazing product, etc. 
Permit applications must include fenestration U -factor, SHGC and VT values documentation for 
the building plan checker. This documentation must include a copy of the manufacturer’s 
documentation showing the Glazing Type information (center of glass U -facto r, center of glass 
SHGC, center of glass VT, number of panes, coatings , and the frame type (frame material type, 
presence of thermal breaks, and identification of structural glazing (glazing with no frame)) that is 
used to determine U T, SHGC T, and VT T. If the proposed design uses multiple fenestration 
products, manufacturer’s documentation for each fenestration product shall be attached to the 
plans. Manufacturer’s documentation must be provided for each unique combination of glazing 
and frame used for com pliance and shall be located at the project's location. 
If mixed fenestration is included in the compliance analysis, then the compliance submittal must 
clearly identif y which are certified fenestration products, and which are non -certified 
fenestration products. In nonresidential buildings, n on-certified fenestration products are limited 
to 200 ft2 of skylight area and altered vertical fenestration . In residential buildings, non -certified 
fenestration products are limited to 250 ft² in area , or 0.5% of the CFA, whichever is greater. 
The manufacturer’s documentation and calculations for each product must be included in the 
submittal, and either the Prescriptive Certificate of Compliance or Performance Certificate of 
Compliance form must be included on the building plans. All non -certified fenestration products , 
including skylights , require a completed Fenestration Certificate of Compliance . 
NA6.5.2 Builder and Installer Responsibilities 
The builder must ensure that the fenestration (glass and frame) documentation showing the U 
factor, SHGC, and VT used for determining compliance is provided to the installer. The builder is 
responsible for ensuring that the persons preparing compliance doc umentation are specifying 
products the builder intends to install. The builder is responsible for ensuring that the installer 
installs glass with thermal performance equal to or better than the thermal performance used for 
energy compliance and that the fr ame type installed is the same as that used for compliance. The 
builder also must ensure that the field inspector for the enforcement agency is provided with 
manufacturer’s documentation attached to each Energy Commission's Fenestration Certificate of 
Compliance Label Certificate showing the thermal performance and method of determining 
thermal performance for the actual fenestration products installed. The builder should verify that 
these fenestration products are clearly shown on the building plans before fenestration products 
are purchased and installed. A copy of the manufacturer’s documentation and Fenestration 
Certificate of Compliance shall be located at the project location. 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance    
     
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
    
    
  
 
  
    
 
 
 
      
 
 
 
  
 
  Appendix NA6 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA6.5.3 Enforcement Agency Responsibilities 
NA6.5.3.1 Plan Checker 
The enforcement agency plan checker or reviewer is responsible for ensuring that the plans 
identify all site -built fenestration and skylights occasionally residential site -built fenestration will 
be used and also identified on the Fenestration Certificate of Compliance form. The plan checker 
shall ensure that site -built fenestration and skylights using the alternate default procedure shall 
meet the following: 
(a) Confirm that U-factors, SHGC and VT (for Commercial use only) values are clearly shown 
on the window schedules on the plans and documented on the energy compliance forms, 
and 
(b) Confirm that m anufacturer documentation of the Glazing Type and Frame Type has been 
provided for the each of the fenestration products using the procedure of this appendix 
and documents the Center of Glass values; and 
(c) Verify the building meets the non-certified fenestration requirement (Nonresidential: up 
to 200 ft2 of skylight area, or an altered vertical fenestration ; Residential: up to 250 ft² in 
area , or 0.5% of the CFA, whichever is greater ); and 
(d) For Nonresidential , confirm that a Fenestration Certificate of Compliance Label Certificate 
has been completed for each non -rated site -built fenestration product , or for Residential , 
verify that the non -rated site -built fenestration efficiencies match the building plans and 
energy compliance forms . 
NA6.5.3.2 Enforcement Agency Inspector 
(a) For Residential up to 250 ft² in area or 0.5% of the CFA, whichever is greater , of non -
rated site -built fenestration is allowed. The inspector should verify the manufacture r’s 
label attached to each residential site -built fenestration product to ensure that it 
matches with residential energy compliance forms. 
(b) For Nonresidential up to 200 ft2 of skylight area and altered vertical site-built 
fenestration are allowed for this alternative procedure. The field inspector is 
responsible for ensuring that the U -factor, SHGC and VT for the installed fenestration 
match the building plans and energy compliance forms. Inspection of the Commission’s 
Fenestration Certificate of Compliance Label Certificate shall match each of the 
Prescriptive Certificate of Compliance form or the Performance Certificate of 
Compliance forms fo r the installed site -built fenestration product. 
Appendix NA6 – Alternate Default Fenestration Procedure to Calculate Thermal Performance          
    
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA7 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for 
Nonresidential Buildings and Covered Processes 
Purpose and Scope 
This appendix defines acceptance procedures that must be completed on certain controls and 
equipment before the installation is deemed to be in compliance with the Standards. These 
requirements apply to all newly installed equipment for which there are acc eptance 
requirements in new and existing buildings. The procedures apply to nonresidential, high -rise 
residential multifamily , hotel/motel buildings and covered processes as defined by the California 
Energy Commission’s Energy Efficiency Standards for Nonresidential Buildings (Standards).  The 
purpose of the acceptance tests is to assure: 
(a) The presence of equipment or building components according to the specifications in the 
compliance documents. 
(b) Installation quality and proper functioning of the controls and equipment to meet the 
intent of the design and the Standards. 
Modifications and additions to these acceptance requirements needed to improve clarity or to 
better ensure proper installation and functionality may be approved by the Energy Commission. 
Introduction 
Acceptance requirements are defined as implementation of targeted inspection checks and 
functional and performance testing to determine whether specific building components, 
equipment, systems, and interfaces between systems conform to the criteria set for th in the 
Standards and to related construction documents (plans or specifications). Acceptance 
requirements improve code compliance effectiveness and help meet the expected level of 
performance. 
Acceptance testing is not intended to take the place of commissioning or test and balance 
procedures that a building owner might incorporate into a building project. It is an adjunct 
process focusing only on demonstrating compliance with the Standards. 
Third -party review of the information provided on Certificate of Acceptance documentation is 
not required, with one exception: duct leakage diagnostic test results for some constant volume 
space conditioning systems serving less than 5,000 square feet of c onditioned floor area are 
required to be verified by a certified HERS Rater as specified in Standards Section 120.4(g) . 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
   
  
  
 
  
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
   
 
  
     Appendix NA7 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Roles and Responsibilities 
Individuals who perform the field testing and verification work, and provide the information 
required for completion of the Certificate of Acceptance documentation are not required to be 
licensed professionals. The person who signs the Certificate of Accep tance document to certify 
compliance with the acceptance requirements shall be licensed as specified in Standards Section 
10-103(a)4. 
NA7.3.1 Responsible Person 
The Certificate of Acceptance shall be signed by the person who is in charge of the acceptance 
testing for the scope of work identified on the Certificate of Acceptance. The Responsible Person 
shall be a licensed professional who is eligible under Division 3 of the Business and Professions 
code in the applicable classification, to take responsibility for the aspects of the system design, 
construction, or installation applicable to the scope of work identified on the Certificate of 
Acceptance. The Responsible Person shall review the information on the Certificate of Acceptance 
document and sign the document to certify compliance with the acceptance requirements. The 
Responsible Person shall assum e responsibility for the acceptance testing work performed by the 
Field Technician agent(s) or employee(s), and if necessary , shall interview the person who 
performed the acceptance test work in order to ascertain whether the testing work reported on 
the Certificate of Acceptance was completed as reported and is consistent with the Responsible 
Person '’s expectation. The Responsible Person may also perform the required acceptance testing 
work, and in that case shall also sign as the Field Technician on the C ertificate of Acceptance 
document. 
NA7.3.2 Field Technician 
The Field Technician is responsible for performing the acceptance test procedures and 
documenting the results on the Certificate of Acceptance document. The Field Technician shall 
sign the Certificate of Acceptance to certify that the information provided on the Certificate of 
Acceptance is true and correct. Field Technicians shall be certified Acceptance Test Technicians 
(ATT) when required by Sections 10 -103.1 or 10 -103.2. 
NA7.3.3 Documentation Author 
Documentation Authors who provide administrative support for document preparation for 
Certificate of Acceptance documentation shall sign a declaration statement on the documents 
they prepare to certify the information provided on the documentation is accurate and complete. 
NA7.3.4 Enforcement Agency 
The Certificate of Acceptance shall be submitted to the enforcement agency in order to receive 
the final Certificate of Occupancy. The enforcement agency shall have the authority to require 
the Responsible Person and Field Technician to demonstrate competence, to its satisfaction. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -3 
Building Envelop e Acceptance Tests 
NA7.4.1 Fenestration 
Each fenestration product shall provide an NFRC Label Certificate or the Commission’s 
Fenestration Certificate to identify the thermal performance (e.g. , U-factor, SHGC, and VT) of 
each fenestration product being installed. The labels shall be located at the job site for 
verification by the enforcement agency. In addition, the responsible party shall fill out the 
Fenestration Acceptance Certificate. The re sponsible party shall verify the thermal performance 
of each specified fenestration product being insta lled matches the label certificate, energy 
compliance documentation and building plans. A copy of the certificate shall be given to the 
building owner and the enforcement agency for their records. 
NA7.4.1.1 Elements Requiring Verification: 
The responsible party shall verify the following: 
(a) The thermal performance for each fenestration product matches the building plans, 
energy compliance documentation, and the label certificate; and 
(b) The delivery receipt or purchase order matches the delivered fenestration product(s); and 
(c) Verify the NFRC Label Certificate is filled out and includes an NFRC’s Certified Product 
Directory (CPD) number and a Certificate Number (when the Component Modeling 
Approach Label is submitted). 
(d) For non -rated fenestration verify Fenestration Certificate of Compliance is completely 
filled. 
(e) The Certificate of Acceptance form is completed and signed. 
NA7.4.1.2 Required Documentation 
(a) NFRC Product Label Certificate: 
1. The Component Modeling Approach (CMA) Label Certificate can list a single or 
multiple fenestration products, each with its own CPD number on the left column and 
verified for authenticity by contacting NFRC or 
2. The Certificate Number for each CMA Label Certificate can be verified for authenticity 
by contacting NFRC or 
3. Commission’s Fenestration Label Certificate: 
4. The Fenestration Certificate of Compliance is used to document Fenestration products 
not certified or rated by NFRC by using the Commission’s Default Table values in 
§110.6 -A and Table 110.6 -B or the calculated values as indicated Nonresidential 
Appendix NA6. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
   
 
   
  
   
  
 
 
 
    
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(b) Purchase Order or Receipt: 
1. A copy of the purchase order or a detailed payment receipt shall be used to cross 
reference with the NFRC Product Label Certificate CPD number or the Fenestration 
Certificate of Compliance values; and 
2. The purchase order or a detailed payment receipt should match the energy 
compliance documentation and the building plans. 
(c) Fenestration Building Plans: 
1. The building plans shall list in a schedule for each fenestration product to be installed 
in the building. 
(d) Certificate of Acceptance Form: 
1. The acceptance form shall be filled out by the responsible party and signed; and 
2. The signed Certificate of Acceptance shall be submitted to enforcement agency or 
field inspector; and 
3. A copy of the Certificate of Acceptance shall be given to the building owner. 
NA7.4.2 Window Films 
NA7.4.2.1 Procedures 
These procedures detail the installation and verification protocols necessary to meet acceptance 
requirements of window films. Each window film product shall be provided with a temporary 
NFRC Label on the box to identify the thermal performance (e.g. U -factor, Solar Heat Gain 
Coefficient(SHGC) , and Visible Transmittance (VT) ) of each window film product being installed. 
The labels , an Energy Commission Default Fenestration Certificate of Compliance form or an 
NFRC label, shall be located at the job site for verification by the enforcement agency. In addition, 
the responsible person shall fill out the Installation Certificate  and the Certificate of Acceptance, 
Fenestration Acceptance Certificate . The responsible person shall verify the thermal performance 
of each window film to be installed matches the energy Certificate of Compliance documentation 
and building plans. A copy of the Installation and Acceptance certificate shall be given to the 
building owner and the enforcement agency for their records . 
NA7.4.2.2 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Meet the Following Protocols before 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the name of the manufacture or brand name matches with building plans; 
(b) From the building plans or energy compliance forms, identify the azimuth orientation in 
degrees or in cardinal orientation for each of the window film to be installed to ensure the 
correct window film specifications are installed in the appropriate orientation; 
(c) Verify the temporary NFRC label on the box for each window film’s U -factor, Solar Heat 
Gain (SHGC) and Visible Transmittance (VT) matches the energy compliance Certificate of 
Installation documentation and building plans, if the U -factor and SHGC values do not 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
    
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
   
  
  
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -5 
match refer back to the Responsible Person of the building construction or enforcement 
agency. Energy recompliance may have to be done and building plans updated; 
(d) Verify the NFRC Window Film Label Certificate is filled out and includes an NFRC’s 
Certified Product Directory (CPD) number; 
(e) List the NFRC Certified Product Directory (CPD) identification (ID) number provided on the 
label on the Certificate of Installation form ; 
(f) If no NFRC Label is included on the box or identification of the window film , then verify 
with the Responsible Person of the building construction or enforcement agency to 
ensure the window film is actually meets or exceeds the energy specifications before 
installation; 
(g) Installation of window films shall follow the International Window Film Association 
(IWFA) Visual Quality Standards for Applied Window Film (dated January 1, 2015 ); and 
(h) After the installation the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Certificate of Installation . A signed copy of the Certificate(s) of Installation shall remain at 
the job site for verification by the building inspector. 
NA7.4.2.3 Field Technician or Responsible Person Shall Meet the Following Protocols After 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the Certificate of Installation and the Declaration Statement is signed before 
inspection; and 
(b) The window film(s) label on the box matches the Certificate of Installation and building 
plan’s schedule, U -factor, SHGC, and VT for each of the installed window films; and 
(c) If any of the acceptance procedures fails, refer back to the Responsible Person, Installer, 
or the enforcement agency for correction; and, after correction verify failed procedures 
have been corrected and re -inspect again; and 
(d) After window film inspection, complete all parts of the Certificate of Acceptance , 
including the signature of the Declaration Statements; and 
(e) Provide certificates and additional copies to the builder, enforcement agency and building 
owner at occupancy. 
NA7.4.2.4 Documentation at Occupancy : 
The following documentation shall be made available to the responsible party of construction or 
building owner at occupancy; 
(a) A completed and signed Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance , form(s); 
(b) The IWFA Visual Quality Standards for Applied Window Film (dated January 1, 2015 ), a 
copy can be obtained through www.iwfa.com ; 
(c) A sample (8” by 10”) of the film installed with a copy of its Performance Specification 
Sheet attached; and 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
 
  
    
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(d) 15 or more year Warranty Certificate(s) . 
NA7.4.3 Dynamic Glazing 
NA7.4.3.1 Procedures 
These procedures detail the installation and verification protocols necessary to meet acceptance 
requirements of dynamic glazing.  Each dynamic glazing product shall be provided with a 
temporary NFRC Label on the glazing or an NFRC Label Certificate to identify the thermal 
performance (e.g. , U-factor, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC), and Visible Transmittance (VT)) 
of each product being installed. The NFRC label certificate shall be located at the job site for 
verification by the enforcement agency. In addition, the responsible person shall fill out the 
Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of Acceptance, Fenestration Acceptance Certificate. 
The responsible person shall verify 1) the dynamic glazing to be installed matches the energy 
Certificate of Compliance documentation and building plans. A copy of the Installation and 
Accept ance certificate shall be given to the building owner and the enforcement agency for their 
records. 
NA7.4.3.2 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Meet the Following Protocols before 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the dynamic glazing matches with building plans and Energy Compliance forms; 
(b) From the building plans or energy compliance forms, identify the azimuth orientation in 
degrees or in cardinal orientation for each of the dynamic glazing to be installed to ensure 
the correct dynamic glazing specifications or model are installed in the ap propriate 
orientation; 
(c) Verify dynamic glazing controls if applicable matches the building plans schedule; 
(d) Verify NFRC’s Certified Product Directory (CPD) number if applicable ; 
(e) If no NFRC Label Form is included, then the default values of Table 110.6 -A and 110.6 -B in 
Section 110.6 of the Standards are being specified ; 
(f) Installation of dynamic glazing shall meet the manufacture r’s installation instructions; 
(g) After the installation the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Installation Certificate of Installation . A signed copy of the Certificate(s) of Installation 
shall remain at the job site for verification by the building inspector. 
NA7.4.3.3 Field Technician or Responsible Person Shall Meet the Following Protocols After 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the Certificate of Installation and the Declaration Statement is signed before 
inspection of the installation; and 
(b) When controls are installed with the dynamic glazing, it should be verified that it meets 
the exact operation specifications of the dynamic glazing installation, functional and 
testing instructions. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
  
 
  
 
 
   
 
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -7 
(c) After dynamic glazing inspection is complete, ensure the Certificate of Acceptance form is 
completed and including the signature of the Declaration Statements; and 
(d) Provide certificates and additional copies to the builder, enforcement agency and building 
owner at occupancy. 
NA7.4.3.4 Documentation at Occupancy : 
The following documentation shall be made available to the responsible party of construction or 
building owner at occupancy; 
(a) A completed and signed Certificate of Installation and Certificate of Acceptance , form(s); 
1. If supplied by the manufacturer, a copy of the manufacturer’s warranty and user 
manual. 
NA7.4.4 Clerestories for PAF 
NA7.4.4.1 Procedures 
These procedures detail the installation and verification protocols necessary to meet acceptance 
requirements of clerestory fenestrations for PAF.  In addition, the responsible person shall fill out 
the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of Acceptance. The responsible person shall 
verify the clerestory fenestration to be installed matches the energy compliance documentation 
(Certificate of Compliance) and building plans. A copy of the Installation and Acceptance 
certificate shall be given to the building owner and the enforcement agency for their records. 
For buildings with up to seven (7) clerestory fenestration units claiming the Clerestory 
Fenestration PAF, all clerestory fenestration units shall be tested. For buildings with more than 
seven (7) clerestory fenestration units claiming the PAF, random samp ling may be done to select 
the seven clerestory fenestration units. If any of the clerestory fenestration units in the sample 
group or seven clerestory fenestration units fails the acceptance test, another group of seven 
clerestory fenestration units must be tested. 
NA7.4.4.2 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Meet the Following Protocols before 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the height of the clerestory fenestration ’s head height and glazing height match the 
building plans ; 
(b) Installation of clerestory fenestration shall meet the manufacture r’s installation 
instructions; 
(c) After the installation the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Certificate of Installation . A signed copy of the Certificate(s) shall remain at the job site 
for verification by the building inspector. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
   
 
  
 
  
     
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -8 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.4.4.3 Field Technician or Responsible Person Shall Meet the Following Protocols After 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the Certificate of Installation and the Declaration Statement is signed before 
inspection of the installation; and 
(b) If operable shading is installed on the clerestory fenestration , verify that the clerestory 
fenestration shading is controlled separately from other fenestration shading control. 
(c) After clerestory fenestration inspection is completed, complete the Certificate of 
Acceptance Test , and sign the Declaration Statements of the certificate ; and 
(d) Provide certificates and additional copies to the builder, enforcement agency and building 
owner at occupancy. 
NA7.4.4.4 Documentation at Occupancy: 
The following documentation shall be made available to the responsible party of construction or 
building owner at occupancy; 
(a) A completed and signed copy of the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of 
Acceptance Test , form(s); 
(b) If supplied by the manufacturer, a copy of the manufacturer’s warranty and user manual . 
NA7.4.5 Interior and Exterior Horizontal Slats 
NA7.4.5.1 Procedures 
These procedures detail the installation and verification protocols necessary to meet acceptance 
requirements of interior and exterior horizontal slats for PAF. In addition, the responsible person 
shall fill out the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of Acceptance. The responsible 
person shall verify the horizontal slat to be installed matches the energy compliance 
documentation (Certificate of Compliance) and building plans. A copy of the Installation and 
Acceptance certificate shall be gi ven to the building owner and the enforcement agency for their 
records. 
For buildings with up to and including seven (7) horizontal slat assemblies claiming the Interior 
and Exterior Horizontal Slats for PAF or RSHGC for exterior horizontal slats , all horizontal slat 
assemblies shall be tested. For buildings with more than seven (7) horizontal slat assemblies 
claiming, random sampling may be done to select the seven horizontal slat assemblies. If any of 
the horizontal slat assemblies in the sample group or seven horizontal slat assemblies fails the 
acceptance test, another group of seven horizontal slat assemblies must be tested. 
Each horizontal slat assembly shall be provided with documentation of visible reflectance testing 
per ASTM E903 and may come with documentation of visible transmittance testing per ASTM 
E1175. The documentation shall be located at the job site for verifica tion by the enforcement 
agency. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
    
   
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -9 
NA7.4.5.2 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Meet the Following Protocols before 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the horizontal (not diagonal or vertical) distance from the front edge of the slat to 
the back edge of the slat matches the building plans ; 
(b) Verify the vertical (not diagonal or horizontal ) distance from the lowest edge of the slat to 
the highest edge of the slat below it matches the building plans; 
(c) Verify there is a factory installed label permanently affixed and prominently located at a 
mounting point of the slat to the building ; 
(d) Verify the visible reflectance on the ASTM E903 test results matches the building plans; 
(e) If the horizontal slat surfaces are not opaque and free of perforations, verify that the 
horizontal slat ’s ASTM E1175 test results match es the building plans ; 
(f) Installation of horizontal slats shall meet the manufactures installation instructions; and 
(g) After the installation the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Certificate of Installation . A signed copy of the Certificate(s) shall remain at the job site 
for verification by the building inspector. 
NA7.4.5.3 Field Technician or Responsible Person Shall Meet the Following Protocols After 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the Certificate of Installation and the Declaration Statement is signed before 
inspection of the installation; 
(b) Verify that horizontal slats are permanently mounted; 
(c) If the horizontal slats extend beyond each side of the window jamb, then verify the 
extension matches the length shown on the building plans; 
(d) If the horizontal slats do not extend beyond each side of the window jamb, then verify 
that the horizontal slats are entirely within the window rough opening or that fins at the 
window jambs match the building plans; 
(e) Verify that horizontal slat assemblies extend the entire height of the window; 
(f) Verify that exterior horizontal slats are horizontal or slope downwards from the window 
and that interior horizontal slats are horizontal or slope upwards from the window; 
(g) After horizontal slats inspection is completed, complete the Certificate of Acceptance 
Test , and sign the Declaration Statements of the certificate ; and 
(h) Provide certificates and additional copies to the builder, enforcement agency and building 
owner at occupancy. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
  Appendix NA7 -10 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.4.5.4 Documentation at Occupancy: 
The following documentation shall be made available to the responsible party of construction or 
building owner at occupancy; 
(a) A completed and signed copy of the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of 
Acceptance Test , form(s); 
(b) If supplied by the manufacturer, a copy of the manufacturer’s warranty and user manual ;. 
(c) ASTM E903 test results and, if applicable, ASTM E1175 results should also be retained by 
the building owner. 
NA7.4.6 Interior and Exterior Light Shelves for PAF 
NA7.4.6.1 Procedures 
These procedures detail the installation and verification protocols necessary to meet acceptance 
requirements of interior and exterior light shelves for PAF.  In addition, the responsible person 
shall fill out Certificate of Acceptance. The responsible per son shall verify the light shelf to be 
installed matches the energy compliance documentation (Certificate of Compliance) and building 
plans. A copy of the Installation and Acceptance certificate shall be given to the building owner 
and the enforcement agen cy for their records. 
For buildings with up to seven (7) light shelf units claiming the Interior and Exterior Light Shelves 
for PAF, all light shelf units shall be tested. For buildings with more than seven (7) light shelf units 
claiming the PAF, random sampling may be done to select the seven light shelf units. If any of the 
light shelf units in the sample group or seven light shelf units fails the acceptance test, another 
group of seven light shelf units must be tested. 
Each interior light shelf shall be provided with documentation of visible reflectance testing per 
ASTM E903. Exterior light shelves may be provided with documentation of visible reflectance 
testing per ASTM E903. The documentation shall be located at the j ob site for verification by the 
enforcement agency. 
NA7.4.6.2 The Responsible Person or Installer Shall Meet the Following Protocols before 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the horizontal (not diagonal or vertical) distance from the front edge of the interior 
light shelf to the back edge of the light shelf matches the building plans; 
(b) Verify the vertical (not diagonal or horizontal) distance from the highest edge of the 
interior light shelf to the top of the clerestory window above it matches the building 
plans; 
(c) Verify the visible reflectance on the ASTM E903 test results of the interior light shelf 
matches the building plans; 
(d) If there is an exterior light shelf: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
  
 
   
  
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -11 
1. Verify the horizontal (not diagonal or vertical) distance from the front edge of the 
exterior light shelf to the back edge of the exterior light shelf matches the building 
plans; 
2. verify the vertical (not diagonal or horizontal) distance from the lowest edge of the 
exterior light shelf to the sill of the window below it matches the building plans; 
3. If the exterior light shelf is less than two feet below the clerestory window sill, 
verify the visible reflectance on the ASTM E903 test results matches the building 
plans; 
(e) Verify that light shelves are installed at the height specified in the building plans ; 
(f) Installation of light shelves shall meet the manufacture r’s installation instructions; 
(g) After the installation the installer completes and signs the Declaration Statement on the 
Certificate of Installation . A signed copy of the Certificate(s) shall remain at the job site 
for verification by the building inspector. 
NA7.4.6.3 Field Technician or Responsible Person Shall Meet the Following Protocols After 
Installation: 
(a) Verify the Certificate of Installation and the Declaration Statement is signed before 
inspection of the installation; and 
(b) If there is any window area below the interior light shelf on the same floor, then verify 
there is an exterior light shelf above that window area. 
(c) Verify that that the light shelf is permanently mounted; 
(d) Verify the light shelf extends beyond each side of the window jamb by the length shown 
on the building plans; 
(e) Verify that interior light shelves are horizontal; 
(f) If there is an exterior light shelf, verify that the exterior light shelf is horizontal or slopes 
downwards from the window; 
(g) If operable shading is installed on the clerestory window, then verify the clerestory 
window shading is controlled separately from shading serving other vertical fenestration; 
(h) After light shelves inspection is completed, complete the Certificate of Acceptance Test 
and sign the Declaration Statements of the certificate ; and 
(i) Provide certificates and additional copies to the builder, enforcement agency and building 
owner at occupancy. 
NA7.4.6.4 Documentation at Occupancy: 
The following documentation shall be made available to the responsible party of construction or 
building owner at occupancy; 
(a) A completed and signed copy of the Certificate of Installation and the Certificate of 
Acceptance Test , form(s); 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
  
   
  
  
 
  
  
  
   
   
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
   
  
 
  
 
   
  Appendix NA7 -12 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(b) If supplied by the manufacturer, a copy of the manufacturer’s warranty and user manual ;. 
(c) ASTM E 903 test results and, if applicable, ASTM E1175 results should also be retained by 
the building owner. 
Mechanical Systems Acceptance Tests 
NA7.5.1 Outdoor Air 
NA7.5.1.1 Variable Air Volume Systems Outdoor Air Acceptance 
NA7.5.1.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Sensor used to control outdoor air flow is either factory calibrated or field calibrated. 
(b) Attach calibration certification or results. 
(c) Dynamic damper control is being used to control outside air. 
(d) Specify the type of dynamic control being utilized to control outside air. 
(e) Specify the method of delivering outside air to the unit. 
(f) Pre-occupancy purge has been programmed to meet the requirements of Standards 
§120.1(d)2 Pre-occupancy purge has been programmed for the 1 -hour period immediately 
before the building is normally occupied . 
NA7.5.1.1.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: If the system has an outdoor air economizer, force the economizer high limit to disable 
economizer control (e.g. , for a fixed drybulb high limit, lower the setpoint below the 
current outdoor air temperature). 
Step 2: Adjust supply airflow to achieve design airflow or maximum airflow at full cooling. Verify 
and document the following: 
(a) Measured outside airflow reading is within 10 percent of the total ventilation air called for 
in the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) Outside air damper position stabilizes within 5 minutes. 
Step 3: Adjust supply airflow to either the sum of the minimum zone airflows, full heating, or 30 
percent of the total design airflow.  Verify and document the following: 
(a) Measured outside airflow reading is within 10 percent of the total ventilation air called for 
in the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) Outside air damper position stabilizes within 5 minutes. 
Step 4: Restore system to “as -found” operating conditions . 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
 
  
   
  
 
  
   
   
  
 
 
  
 
   
  
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -13 
NA7.5.1.2 Constant Volume System Outdoor Air Acceptance 
NA7.5.1.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) System is designed to provide a fixed minimum OSA when the unit is on. 
(b) Specify the method of delivering outside air to the unit. 
(c) Pre-occupancy purge has been programmed to meet the requirements of Standards 
§120.1(d)2 Pre-occupancy purge has been programmed for the 1 -hour period immediately 
before the building is normally occupied . 
(d) Minimum position is marked on the outside air damper. 
(e) The system has means of maintaining the minimum outdoor air damper position. 
NA7.5.1.2.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: If the system has an outdoor air economizer, force the economizer to the minimum 
position and stop outside air damper modulation (e.g. , for a fixed drybulb high limit, lower 
the setpoint below the current outdoor air temperature). 
(a) Measured outside airflow reading is within 10 percent of the total ventilation air called for 
in the Certificate of Compliance. 
NA7.5.2 Constant -Volume, Single -Zone, Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps 
NA7.5.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Thermostat is located within the space -conditioning zone that is served by the HVAC 
system as required by Standards §120.2(a) . 
(b) Thermostat meets the temperature adjustment and dead band requirements of 
Standards §120.2(b). 
(c) Occupied, unoccupied, and holiday schedules have been programmed as specified by the 
facility’s schedule. 
(d) Pre-occupancy purge has been programmed to meet the requirements of Standards 
§120.1(d)2. 
NA7.5.2.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Disable economizer and demand control ventilation systems (if applicable). 
Step 2: Simulate a heating demand during the occupied condition. Verify and document the 
following: 
(a) Supply fan operates continually. 
(b) The unit provides heating. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
   
  
  
 
 
  
  Appendix NA7 -14 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(c) No cooling is provided by the unit. 
(d) Outside air damper is at minimum position. 
Step 3: Simulate operation in the dead band during occupied condition. Verify and document the 
following: 
(e) Supply fan operates continually. 
(f) Neither heating nor cooling is provided by the unit. 
(g) Outside air damper is at minimum position. 
Step 4: Simulate cooling demand during occupied condition. Lock out economizer (if applicable). 
Verify and document the following: 
(h) Supply fan operates continually. 
(i) The unit provides cooling. 
(j) No heating is provided by the unit. 
(k) Outside air damper is at minimum position. 
Step 5: Simulate operation in the dead band during unoccupied mode. Verify and document the 
following: 
(l) Supply fan is off. 
(m)Outside air damper is fully closed. 
(n) Neither heating nor cooling is provided by the unit. 
Step 6: Simulate heating demand during unoccupied conditions. Verify and document the 
following: 
(o) Supply fan is on (either continuously or cycling). 
(p) Heating is provided by the unit. 
(q) No cooling is provided by the unit. 
(r) Outside air damper is either closed or at minimum position. 
Step 7: Simulate cooling demand during unoccupied condition. Lock ou t economizer (if 
applicable). Verify and document the following: 
(s) Supply fan is on (either continuously or cycling). 
(t) Cooling is provided by the unit. 
(u) No heating is provided by the unit. 
(v) Outside air damper is either closed or at minimum position. 
Step 8: Simulate manual override during unoccupied condition. Verify and document the 
following: 
(w) System operates in “occupied” mode. 
(x) System reverts to “unoccupied” mode when manual override time period expires. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
    
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -15 
Step 9: Restore economizer and demand control ventilation systems (if applicable) , and remove 
all system overrides initiated during the test. 
NA7.5.3 Air Distribution Systems 
Purpose and Scope 
(a) NA7.5.3 contains procedures for acceptance testing for air leakage in single zone, 
constant volume, nonresidential air distribution systems serving zones with 5,000 ft² of 
conditioned floor area or less. 
(b) NA7.5.3 procedures are applicable to new space conditioning systems in newly 
constructed buildings and to new or altered space conditioning systems in existing buildings. 
(c) NA7.5.3 procedures shall be used by installers, ATTs, and others who are required to 
perform acceptance testing of air distribution systems in accordance with Standards §120.4(g), 
§141.0(b)2Dii, §160.3(c)2Hi, and §180.2(b)2Biic. 
NA7.5.4 (d) Table NA7.5.3 -1 provides a summary of the duct leakage acceptance test 
protocols and the compliance criteria. 
NA7.5.4.1 NA7.5.3.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing on new duct systems, verify and document the following: 
(a) Duct connections meet the requirements of Standards §120.4. 
(b) Specify choice of drawbands. 
(c) Flexible ducts are not constricted in any way. 
(d) Duct leakage tests shall be performed before access to ductwork and connections are 
blocked. 
(e) Joints and seams are properly sealed according to the requirements of Standards §120.4. 
(f) Joints and seams are not sealed with cloth back rubber adhesive tape unless used in 
combination with Mastic and drawbands.  Cloth backed tape may be used if tape has 
been approved by the CEC. Ducts are fully accessible for testing. 
(g) Insulation R -Values meet the minimum requirements of §120.4(a). Insulation is protected 
from damage and suitable for outdoor service if applicable as specified by Standards 
§120.4(f). 
Prior to Functional Testing on all new and existing duct systems, visually inspect to verify that the 
following locations have been sealed: 
(h) Connections to plenums and other connections to the forced air unit; 
(i) Refrigerant line and other penetrations into the forced air unit; 
(j) Air handler door panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is acceptable); 
(k) Register boots sealed to surrounding material; and 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  Appendix NA7 -16 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(l) Connections between lengths of duct, as well as connections to takeoffs, wyes, tees, and 
splitter boxes. 
NA7.5.4.2 NA7.5.3.2 Functional Testing 
Perform duct leakage test to verify the duct leakage conforms to the requirements of Standards 
§120.4(g), §141.0(b)2Dii, §160.3(c)2Hi, and §180.2(b)2Biic. 
NA7.5.3.2.1 Instrumentation Specifications 
The instrumentation for the air distribution diagnostic measurements shall conform to the 
following specifications: 
(a) Pressure Measurements 
All pressure measurements shall be measured with measurement systems (i.e., sensor 
plus data acquisition system) having an accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 Pa. All pressure 
measurements within the duct system shall be made with static pressure probes, such as 
Dwyer A303 or equivalent. 
(b) Duct Leakage Measurements 
All measurements of duct leakage airflow shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 3 
percent of measured airflow or better using digital gauges. 
(c) Calibration 
All instrumentation used for duct leakage diagnostic measurements shall be calibrated 
according to the manufacturer’s calibration procedure to conform to the accuracy 
requirement specified in Section NA7.5.3.2.1. 
NA7.5.3.2.2 Diagnostic Apparatus 
(a) Apparatus for Duct Pressurization and Leakage Flow Measurement 
The apparatus for duct system pressurization and duct system leakage measurements shall 
consist of a duct system pressurization and leakage airflow measurement device meeting the 
specifications in Section NA7.5.3.2.1. 
(b)Apparatus for Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing (Existing Duct Systems) 
The apparatus for determining leakage in and verifying sealing of all accessible leaks in existing 
duct systems provide means for introducing controllable amounts of non -toxic visual or theatrical 
smoke into the duct pressurization apparatus for identifyin g leaks in accessible portions of the 
duct system. The means for generating smoke shall have sufficient capacity to ensure that any 
accessible leaks will emit visibly identifiable smoke. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -17 
NA7.5.3.2.3 Verification and Diagnostic Procedures 
NA7.5.3.2.3.1 Nominal Air Handler Airflow 
Nominal air handler airflow shall be calculated according to one of the following methods : 
(a) For heating -only systems, the nominal air handler airflow shall be 21.7 CFM per kBtu/hr of 
rated heating output capacity. 
(b) For split or packaged cooling systems with only one indoor unit, the nominal air handler 
airflow shall be 400 CFM per nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as 
specified by the manufacturer. 
(c) For small duct high velocity systems, the nominal air handler airflow shall be 250 CFM per 
nominal ton of outdoor condensing unit cooling capacity as specified by the 
manufacturer. 
(d) For multiple -split systems that provide cooling, the nominal air handler airflow for each 
indoor unit shall be 350 CFM per nominal ton of indoor unit cooling capacity as specified 
by the manufacturer. 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2 Diagnostic Duct Leakage 
Diagnostic duct leakage measurement shall be used by installers and ATTs to verify that duct 
leakage meets the compliance criteria for sealed duct systems for which acceptance testing is 
required. Table NA7.5.3 -1 summarizes the test procedures that shall be used to demonstrate 
compliance. 
Table NA7.5.3 -1 – Duct Leakage Verification and Diagnostic Test Protocols 
Case User and Application Procedure(s) 
Sealed and tested new duct 
systems Installer Testing 
ATT Testing NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 
Sealed and tested altered 
existing duct systems Installer Testing 
ATT Testing NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 
Sealed and tested altered 
existing duct systems Installer Testing and 
Inspection 
ATT Testing and Verification NA7.5.3.2.3.2.2 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.3 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.4 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 Diagnostic Duct Leakage from Fan Pressurization of Ducts 
The objective of this procedure is for an ATT to verify , the leakage of a new or altered duct 
system. The duct leakage shall be determined by pressurizing the entire duct system ducts to 25 
Pa (0.1 inches water) with respect to outside. The following procedure shall be used for the fan 
pressurization tests: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
  
 
   
   Appendix NA7 -18 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) Verify that the air handler, supply and return plenums and all the connectors, transition 
pieces, duct boots, and registers are installed, and ensure the following locations have been 
sealed: 
1. Connections to plenums and other connections to the air -handling unit. 
2. Refrigerant line and other penetrations into the air -handling unit. 
3. Air handler access door or panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is 
acceptable). 
The entire duct system including the air -handler shall be included in the test. 
(b) For newly installed or altered ducts, verify that cloth backed rubber adhesive duct tape 
has not been used. 
(c) Temporarily seal all the supply registers and return grilles, except for one large centrally 
located return grille or the air handler cabinet access door or panel. Verify that all outside 
air dampers and/or economizers are sealed prior to pressurizing the system. 
(d) Attach the fan flowmeter device to the duct system at the unsealed return grille or the air 
handler cabinet access door or panel. 
(e) Install a static pressure probe at a supply register located close to the air handler, or at 
the supply plenum. 
(f) Adjust the fan flowmeter to produce a positive 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) pressure at the 
supply register or the supply plenum with respect to the outside or with respect to the 
building space with the entry door open to the outside. 
(g) Record the flow through the flowmeter, this is the duct leakage flow at 25 Pa (0.1 inches 
water). 
(h) Divide the duct leakage flow by the nominal air handler airflow determined by the 
procedure in Section NA7.5.3.2.3.1 and convert to a percentage. If the duct leakage flow 
percentage is equal to or less than the target compliance criterion from Table NA7.5. 3-1, 
the system passes. 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.2 Sealing of All Accessible Leaks 
For altered existing duct systems that are unable to pass the leakage test in Section 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 , the objective of this test is to verify that all accessible leaks are sealed. The 
following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Complete the leakage test specified in Section NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 . 
(b) Seal all accessible ducts. 
(c) After sealing is complete, again use the procedure in NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 to measure the leakage 
after duct sealing. 
(d) Complete the Smoke Test as specified in NA7.5.3.2.3.2.3 . 
(e) Complete the Visual Inspection as specified in NA7.5.3.2.3.2.4 . 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
  
   
   
   
  
 
 
 
  
       
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
    
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -19 
All duct systems that fail to pass the leakage test specified in Section NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 shall be 
tested and inspected by an ATT to verify that all accessible ducts have been sealed and damaged 
ducts have been replaced. 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.3 Smoke -Test of Accessible -Duct Sealing 
For altered existing ducts that fail the leakage tests, the objective of the smoke test is to confirm 
that all accessible leaks have been sealed. The following procedure shall be used: 
(a) Inject either theatrical or other non -toxic smoke into a fan pressurization device that is 
maintaining a duct pressure difference of 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) relative to the duct 
surroundings, with all grilles and registers in the duct system sealed. 
(b) Visually inspect all accessible portions of the duct system during smoke injection. 
(c) The system shall pass the test if one of the following conditions is met: 
1. No visible smoke exits the accessible portions of the duct system. 
2. Smoke only emanates from the furnace cabinet which is gasketed and sealed by the 
manufacturer and no visible smoke exits from the accessible portions of the duct 
system. 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.4 Visual Inspection of Accessible Duct Sealing 
For altered existing duct systems that are unable to pass the leakage test in Section 
NA7.5.3.2.3.2.1 and a smoke test per Section NA7.5.3.2.3.2.3 shall be verified that all accessible 
leaks have been sealed. Visually inspect to verify that the following locations have been sealed: 
(a) Connections to plenums and other connections to the air -handling unit. 
(b) Refrigerant line and other penetrations into the air -handling unit. 
(c) Air handler access door or panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is 
acceptable). 
(d) Register boots sealed to surrounding material. 
(e) Connections between lengths of duct, as well as connections to takeoffs, wyes, tees, and 
splitter boxes. Step 1: Perform duct leakage test as specified by Reference Nonresidential 
Appendix NA2 to verify the duct leakage conforms to the requirements of Standards 
§120.4(g) 140.4(l)1 and §141.0(b)2D ii. 
Step 2: Obtain HERS Rater field verification as specified in Reference Nonresidential Appendix 
NA1. Or at the discretion of the enforcement agency, field verification may be satisfied by 
the ATT as specified in Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA1.9. 
NA7.5.5 NA7.5.4 Air Economizer Controls and Exhaust Air Heat Recovery 
NA7.5.5.1 NA7.5.4.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
    
 
 
  
  
  
   
  
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 Appendix NA7 -20 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) Economizer or heat recovery bypass high limit shutoff control complies with Table 140.4 -
ETable 140.4 -G of Standards § Section1 140.4(e)2. 
(b) If the high -limit control is fixed dry -bulb or fixed enthalpy + fixed dry -bulb, it shall have an 
adjustable setpoint. 
(c) Economizer or heat recovery bypass lockout control sensor is located to prevent false 
readings. 
(d) Sensor performance curve is provided by factory with economizer or heat recovery bypass 
instruction material. 
(e) Sensor output value measured during sensor calibration is plotted on the performance 
curve. 
(f) Economizer or heat recovery bypass damper moves freely without binding. 
1. Indicate if bypass control is achieved through heat/energy recovery wheel rotation 
speed modulation as means other than air dampers, 
(g) Economizer or heat recovery bypass has control systems, including two -stage or 
electronic thermostats, that cycle compressors off when economizers or heat recovery 
bypass can provide partial cooling. 
(h) Economizer reliability features are present as specified by Standards Section 140.4(e)2D. 
1. Indicate N/A for heat recovery bypass. 
(i) Economizer inlet damper is designed to modulate up to 100 percent open, and return air 
damper to 100 percent closed, without over -pressurizing the building. 
1. Indicate N/A for heat recovery bypass. 
(j) For systems with DDC controls lockout sensor(s) are either factory calibrated or field 
calibrated. 
(k) For systems with non -DDC controls, manufacturer’s startup and testing procedures have 
been applied. 
(l) The economizer has been certified to the Energy Commission as specified by Section 
140.4(e)2Diii. 
1. Indicate N/A for heat recovery bypass. 
NA7.5.5.2 NA7.5.4.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Disable demand control ventilation systems (if applicable). 
Step 2: Enable the economizer and simulate a cooling demand large enough to drive the system 
into full economizer cooling mode (e.g., the economizer or heat recovery bypass ) is fully 
open. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Economizer or heat recovery bypass damper is 100 percent open and return air damper is 
100 percent closed. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
  
 
 
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
    
  
 
  
 
 
   2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -21 
1. If bypass is achieved through heat/energy recovery wheel rotation speed 
modulation, wheel speed is fully stopped. 
(b) All applicable fans and dampers operate as intended to maintain building pressure. 
(c) The unit heating is disabled (if unit has heating capability). 
Step 3: Disable the economizer and simulate a cooling demand. Verify and document the 
following: 
(d) Economizer damper closes to its minimum position. 
(e) All applicable fans and dampers operate as intended to maintain building pressure. 
(f) The unit heating is disabled (if unit has heating capability). 
(g) Indicate N/A for this step for heat recovery bypass. 
Step 4: If unit has heating capability, simulate a heating demand and set the economizer so that it 
is capable of operating (i.e. , actual outdoor air conditions are below lockout setpoint). 
Verify the following: 
For economizer systems 
(h) The economizer is at minimum position. 
(i) Return air damper opens. 
For HRV/ERV or DOAS systems: 
(j) Heat recovery bypass control modulates bypass damper/wheel speed to control 
temperature setpoint . 
Step 5:  Turn off the unit. Verify and document the following: 
(k) Economizer damper closes completely. 
(l) Indicate N/A for this step for heat recovery bypass. 
Step 6: Restore demand control ventilation systems (if applicable) and remove all system 
overrides initiated during the test. 
NA7.5.6 NA7.5.5 Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) Systems 
NA7.5.6.1 NA7.5.5.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Carbon dioxide control sensor is factory calibrated as specified by §120.1(d)4 F. 
(b) The sensor is located in the high density space between 3 ft and 6 ft above the floor or at 
the anticipated level of the occupants’ heads. 
(c) DCV control setpoint is at or below the CO 2 concentration permitted by §120.1(d)4 .C. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  Appendix NA7 -22 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.5.6.2 NA7.5.5.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Disable economizer controls. 
Step 2: Simulate a signal at or slightly above the CO 2 concentration setpoint required by 
§120.1(d)4 .C. Verify and document the following: 
(a) For single zone units, outdoor air damper modulates open to satisfy the total ventilation 
air called for in the Certificate of Compliance. 
(b) For multiple zone units, the zone damper (or outdoor air damper when applicable) 
modulates open to satisfy the zone ventilation requirements. 
Step 3: Simulate signal well below the CO 2 setpoint. Verify and document the following: 
(c) For single zone units, outdoor air damper modulates to the design minimum value. 
(d) For multiple zone units, the zone damper (or outdoor air damper when applicable) 
modulates to satisfy the reduced zone ventilation requirements. 
Step 4: Restore economizer controls and remove all system overrides initiated during the test. 
Step 5: With all controls restored, apply CO 2 calibration gas at a concentration slightly above the 
setpoint to the sensor. Verify that the outdoor air damper modulates open to satisfy the 
total ventilation air called for in the Certificate of Compliance. 
NA7.5.7 NA7.5.6 Supply Fan Variable Flow Controls 
NA7.5.7.1 NA7.5.6.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply fan includes device(s) for modulating airflow, such as variable speed drive or 
electrically commutated motor. 
(b) For multiple zone systems: 
1. Discharge static pressure sensors are either factory calibrated or field -calibrated. 
2. The static pressure location, setpoint, and reset control meets the requirements of 
§140.4(c)2 .A and §140.4(c)2 .B. 
NA7.5.7.2 NA7.5.6.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Simulate demand for full design airflow. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply fan controls modulate to increase capacity. 
(b) For multiple zone systems, supply fan maintains discharge static pressure within +/ -10 
percent of the current operating setpoint. 
(c) Supply fan controls stabilize within a 5 minute period. 
Step 2: Simulate demand for reduced or minimum airflow. Verify and document the following: 
(d) Supply fan controls modulate to decrease capacity. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
  
  
   
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
   
  
 
  
  
   
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -23 
(e) Current operating setpoint has decreased (for systems with DDC to the zone level). 
(f) For multiple zone systems, supply fan maintains discharge static pressure within +/ -10 
percent of the current operating setpoint. 
(g) Supply fan controls stabilize within a 5 minute period. 
Step 3: Restore system to correct operating conditions. 
NA7.5.8 NA7.5.7 Valve Leakage Test 
NA7.5.8.1 NA7.5.7.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Valve and piping arrangements were installed as specified by the design drawings. 
NA7.5.8.2 NA7.5.7.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: For each of the pumps serving the distribution system, dead head the pumps using the 
discharge isolation valves at the pumps. Document the following: 
(a) Record the differential pressure across the pumps. 
(b) Verify that this is within 5 percent of the submittal data for the pump. 
Step 2: Reopen the pump discharge isolation valves. Automatically close all valves on the systems 
being tested. If 3 -way valves are present, close off the bypass line. Verify and document 
the following: 
(c) The valves automatically close. 
(d) Record the pressure differential across the pump. 
(e) Verify that the pressure differential is within 5 percent of the reading from Step 1 for the 
pump that is operating during the valve test. 
Step 3: Restore system to correct operating conditions. 
NA7.5.9 NA7.5.8 Supply Water Temperature Reset Controls 
NA7.5.9.1 NA7.5.8.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply water temperature sensors have been either factory or field calibrated. 
NA7.5.9.2 NA7.5.8.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Change reset control variable to its maximum value. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Chilled or hot water temperature setpoint is reset to appropriate value. 
(b) Verify that actual supply temperature changes to within 2 percent of the new setpoint. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
   
  
 
    Appendix NA7 -24 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 2: Change reset control variable to its minimum value. Verify and document the following: 
(c) Chilled or hot water temperature setpoint is reset to appropriate value. 
(d) Verify that actual supply temperature changes to within 2 percent of the new setpoint. 
Step 3: Restore reset control variable to automatic control. Verify and document the following: 
(e) Chilled or hot water temperature set -point is reset to appropriate value. 
(f) Verify that actual supply temperature changes to within 2 percent of the new setpoint. 
NA7.5.10 NA7.5.9 Hydronic System Variable Flow Controls 
NA7.5.10.1 NA7.5.9.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The static pressure location, setpoint, and reset control meets the requirements of the 
Standards Section 140.4(k)6B. 
(b) Pressure sensors are either factory or field calibrated. 
NA7.5.10.2 NA7.5.9.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Modulate control valves to reduce water flow to 50 percent of the design flow or less, but 
not lower than the pump minimum flow. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Pump operating speed decreases (for systems with DDC to the zone level). 
(b) Current operating setpoint has not increased (for all other systems that are not DDC). 
(c) System pressure is within 5 percent of current operating setpoint. 
(d) System operation stabilizes within 5 minutes after test procedures are initiated. 
Step 2: Open control valves to increase water flow to a minimum of 90 percent design flow. 
Verify and document the following: 
(e) Pump speed increases. 
(f) Pumps are operating at 100 percent speed. 
(g) System pressure is greater than the setpoint in Step 1. 
(h) System pressure is either within ±5 percent of current operating setpoint. System 
operation stabilizes within 5 minutes after test procedures are initiated. 
Step 3:  Restore system to correct operating conditions. 
NA7.5.11 NA7.5.10 Automatic Demand Shed Control Acceptance 
NA7.5.11.1 NA7.5.10.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Acceptance Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) That the EMCS interface enables activation of the central demand shed controls. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
  
 
  
  
  
   
  
 
  
  
    
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
   
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -25 
NA7.5.11.2 NA7.5.10.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Engage the global demand shed system. Verify and document the following: 
(a) That the cooling setpoint in non -critical spaces increases by the proper amount. 
(b) That the cooling setpoint in critical spaces do not change. 
Step 2: Disengage the global demand shed system. Verify and document the following: 
(c) That the cooling setpoint in non -critical spaces return to their original values. 
(d) That the cooling setpoint in critical spaces do not change. 
(e) Step 3 : Return system to normal operat ing conditions. 
NA7.5.12 NA7.5.11 Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) for Packaged Direct -Expansion Units 
NA7.5.12.1 NA7.5.11.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Verify fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) hardware is installed on HVAC unit. 
(b) Verify the FDD system matches the make and model reported on the design drawings. 
(c) Verify the following air temperature sensors are permanently installed: 
1. Outside air. 
2. Supply air. 
3. Return air. 
(d) Verify the controller has the capability of displaying the value of the following parameters: 
1. Air temperatures: outside air, supply air, return air. 
(e) Verify the controller provides system status by indicating the following conditions: 
1. Free cooling available. 
2. Economizer enabled. 
3. Compressor enabled. 
4. Heating enabled. 
5. Mixed air low limit cycle active. 
NA7.5.12.2 NA7.5.11.2 Functional Testing 
For each HVAC unit to be tested, complete the following: 
NA7.5.12.2.1 NA7.5.11.2.1 Functional Testing for Air Temperature Sensor 
Failure/Fault 
Step 1: Verify the FDD system indicates normal operation. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
  
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -26 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 2: Disconnect outside air temperature sensor from unit controller.  Verify and document the 
following: 
(a) FDD system reports a fault. 
Step 3: Connect outside air temperature sensor to unit controller.  Verify and document the 
following: 
(b) FDD system indicates normal operation. 
NA7.5.12.2.2 NA7.5.11.2.2 Functional Testing for Excess Outside Air 
Step 1: Coordinate this test with NA7.5.1 Outdoor Air. 
(a) If NA7.5.1 Outdoor Air passes, verify FDD system indicates normal operation. 
NA7.5.12.2.3 NA7.5.11.2.3 Functional Testing for Economizer Operation 
Step 1: Interfere with normal unit operation so test NA7.5.4 Air Economizer Controls fails by 
immobilizing the outdoor air economizer damper according to manufacturer’s 
instructions. 
(a) After NA7.5.4 Air Economizer Controls fails, verify FDD system reports a fault. 
Step 2: Successfully complete and pass NA7.5.4 Air Economizer Controls. 
(b) After NA7.5.4 Air Economizer Controls passes, verify FDD system reports normal 
operation. 
NA7.5.13 NA7.5.12 Automatic Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) for Air Handling Units and 
Zone Terminal Units. 
NA7.5.13.1 NA7.5.12.1 Construction Inspection for Air Handling Units 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
a) Verify on the submittal documents or sensor specifications that locally installed supply air, 
outside air, and return air (if applicable) temperature sensors have an accuracy of ±2ºF 
over the range of 40ºF to 80ºF. 
NA7.5.13.2 NA7.5.12.2 Functional Testing for Air Handling Unit Economizers 
Testing of each AHU with FDD controls shall include the following tests. 
(a) Bypass alarm delays. 
Step 1: If applicable, bypass alarm delays to ensure that faults generate alarms immediately. 
(b) Sensor failure: 
Step 1: Disconnect local supply air temperature sensor from unit controller. 
Step 2: Verify that the FDD system reports a fault. 
Step 3: Connect SAT sensor to the unit controller. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -27 
Step 4: Verify that FDD indicates normal system operation and clear all faults and alarms. 
Step 5: If the outside air temperature sensor is local, disconnect the local OAT from the 
unit controller. 
Step 6: Verify that the FDD system reports a fault. 
Step 7: Connect the local OAT sensor to the unit controller. 
Step 8: Verify that FDD indicates normal system operation and clear all faults and alarms. 
(c) Inappropriate economizing: 
Step 1: Override the operating state to occupied heating mode by overriding zone 
thermostat(s) to create a heating demand and overriding the OAT sensor below the low 
limit lockout. 
Step 2: From the control system workstation, override the economizer dampers to 100 
percent outdoor air. 
Step 3: Verify that a fault is reported at the control workstation. 
Step 4: Remove the economizer damper override and verify that the control system 
indicates normal system operation. 
Step 5: Remove all overrides and clear all faults and alarms. 
Step 6: Override the operating state to economizer -only cooling mode by overriding zone 
thermostat(s) to create a cooling demand and overriding the OAT sensor so that free 
cooling is available. 
Step 7: From the control system workstation, override the economizer dampers to 0 
percent outdoor air. 
Step 8: Verify that a fault is reported at the control workstation. 
Step 9: Remove the economizer damper override and verify that the control system 
indicates normal system operation. 
Step 10: Remove all overrides and clear all faults and alarms. 
(d) Reinstate alarm delay. 
Step 1: Reinstate alarm delays to ensure that faults generate alarms as before step (a), if 
applicable. 
NA7.5.13.3 NA7.5.12.3 Functional Testing for Air Handling Unit Valves 
(a) Bypass alarm delays 
Step 1: If applicable, bypass alarm delays to ensure that faults generate alarms 
immediately . 
(b) Valve/actuator fault: 
Step 1: Override the operating state to occupied cooling mode by overriding zone 
thermostat(s) to create a cooling demand and overriding the OAT sensor to 90 ºF. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -28 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 2: From the control system workstation, override the heating coil valves to the full 
open position (100 percent heating mode). 
Step 3: Verify flow through the valve by differential temperature or differential pressure 
method. 
Step 4: Verify that a fault is reported at the control workstation. 
Step 5: Remove the heating coil valve override and verify that the control system indicates 
normal system operation. 
Step 6: Remove all overrides and clear all faults and alarms. 
Step 7: Override the operating state to occupied heating mode by overriding zone 
thermostat(s) to create a heating demand and overriding the OAT sensor to 40 ºF. 
Step 8: From the control system workstation, override the cooling coil valve to the full 
open position (100 percent % cooling mode). 
Step 9: Verify flow through the valve by differential temperature or differential pressure 
method. 
Step 10: Verify that a fault is reported at the control workstation. 
Step 11: Remove the cooling coil valve override and verify that the control system 
indicates normal system operation. 
Step 12: Remove all overrides and clear all faults and alarms. 
(c) Reinstate alarm delay. 
Step 1: Reinstate alarm delays to ensure that faults generate alarms as before Step (a), if 
applicable. 
NA7.5.13.4 NA7.5.12.4 Functional Testing for Zone Terminal Units 
Testing shall be performed on one of each type of terminal unit (VAV box) in the project. A 
minimum of 5 percent of the terminal boxes shall be tested. 
(a) Sensor drift/failure: 
Step 1: Disconnect the tubing to the differential pressure sensor of the VAV box. 
Step 2: Verify that control system detects and reports the fault. 
Step 3: Reconnect the sensor and verify proper sensor operation. 
Step 4: Verify that the control system does not report a fault. 
(b) Damper/actuator fault: 
1. Damper stuck open. 
Step 1: Command the damper to be fully open (room temperature above setpoint). 
Step 2: Disconnect the actuator to the damper. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -29 
Step 3: Adjust the cooling setpoint so that the room temperature is below the cooling 
setpoint to command the damper to the minimum position. Verify that the control 
system reports a fault. 
Step 4: Reconnect the actuator and restore to normal operation. 
2. Damper stuck closed. 
Step 1: Set the damper to the minimum position. 
Step 2: Disconnect the actuator to the damper. 
Step 3: Set the cooling setpoint below the room temperature to simulate a call for 
cooling. Verify that the control system reports a fault. 
Step 4: Reconnect the actuator and restore to normal operation. 
(c) Valve/actuator fault (For systems with hydronic reheat): 
Step 1: Command the reheat coil valve to (full) open. 
Step 2: Disconnect power to the actuator. Set the heating setpoint temperature to be 
lower than the current space temperature, to command the valve closed. Verify that the 
fault is reported at the control workstation. 
Step 3: Reconnect the actuator and restore normal operation. 
(d) Feedback loop tuning fault (unstable airflow): 
Step 1: Set the integral coefficient of the box controller to a value 50 times the current 
value. 
Step 2: The damper cycles continuously and airflow is unstable. Verify that the control 
system detects and reports the fault. 
Step 3: Reset the integral coefficient of the controller to the original value to restore 
normal operation. 
(e) Disconnected inlet duct: 
Step 1: From the control system workstation, commands the damper to full closed, then 
disconnect power to the actuator and verify that a fault is reported at the control 
workstation. 
(f) Discharge air temperature sensor: 
Step 1: Adjust zone setpoints to drive the box from dead band to full heating. 
Step 2: Verify that in heating, the supply air temperature resets up to the maximum 
setpoint while the airflow is maintained at the dead band flow rate. 
Step 3: Verify that after the supply air temperature is reset up to the maximum setpoint, 
the airflow rate then increases up to the heating maximum flow rate in order to meet the 
heating load. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
 
  
 
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -30 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.5.14 NA7.5.13 Distributed Energy Storage DX AC Systems Acceptance Tests 2F 3 
These acceptance requirements apply only to constant or variable volume, direct expansion (DX) 
systems with distributed energy storage (DES/DXAC). These acceptance requirements are in 
addition to those for other systems or equipment such as economizers, pa ckaged equipment, etc. 
NA7.5.14.1 NA7.5.13.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Performance Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The water tank is filled to the proper level. 
(b) The water tank is sitting on a foundation with adequate structural strength. 
(c) The water tank is insulated , and the top cover is in place. 
(d) The DES/DXAC is installed correctly (refrigerant piping, etc.). 
(e) Verify that the correct model number is installed and configured. 
NA7.5.14.2 NA7.5.13.2 Equipment Testing 
Step 1: Simulate cooling load during daytime period (e.g. , by setting time schedule to include 
actual time and placing thermostat cooling set -point below actual temperature). Verify 
and document the following: 
(a) Supply fan operates continually. 
(b) If the DES/DXAC has cooling capacity, DES/DXAC runs to meet the cooling demand (in ice 
melt mode). 
(c) If the DES/DXAC has no ice and there is a call for cooling, the DES/DXAC runs in direct 
cooling mode. 
Step 2: Simulate no cooling load during daytime condition. Verify and document the following: 
(d) Supply fan operates as specified by the facility thermostat or control system. 
(e) The DES/DXAC and the condensing unit do not run. 
Step 3: Simulate no cooling load during morning shoulder time period. Verify and document the 
following: 
(f) The DES/DXAC is idle. 
Step 4: Simulate a cooling load during morning shoulder time period. Verify and document the 
following: 
(g) The DES/DXAC runs in direct cooling mode. 
3 From AEC, Distributed Energy Storage for Direct -Expansion Air Conditioners, January 27, 2005 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
   
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
   
  
  
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -31 
NA7.5.14.3 NA7.5.13.3 Calibrating Controls 
Set the proper time and date, as specified by manufacturer’s installation manual for approved 
installers. 
NA7.5.15 NA7.5.14 Thermal Energy Storage (TES) Systems 
The following acceptance tests apply to thermal energy storage systems that are used in 
conjunction with chilled water air conditioning systems. 
NA7.5.15.1 NA7.5.14.1 Eligibility Criteria 
The following types of TES systems are eligible for compliance credit: 
(a) Chilled Water Storage 
(b) Ice-on-Coil Internal Melt 
(c) Ice-on-Coil External Melt 
(d) Ice Harvester 
(e) Brine 
(f) Ice-Slurry 
(g) Eutectic Salt 
(h) Clathrate Hydrate Slurry (CHS) 
(i) Cryogenic 
(j) Encapsulated (e.g. , Ice Balls) 
The following Certificate of Compliance information for both the chiller and the storage tank shall 
be provided on the plans to document the key TES System parameters and allow plan check 
comparison to the inputs used in the compliance software. 
Chiller: 
(k) Brand and Model 
(l) Type (Centrifugal, Reciprocating, Other) 
(m)Heat Rejection Type (Air, Water, Other) 
(n) Charge Mode Capacity (Tons) 
(o) Discharge Mode Capacity (Tons) 
(p) Discharge Mode Efficiency (kW/Ton or EER) 
(q) Charge Mode Efficiency (kW/Ton or EER) 
(r) Fluid Type and Percentage 
Storage Tank: 
(s) Brand and Model  
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -32 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(t) Number of Tanks 
(u) Storage Capacity per Tank (ton -hours) 
(v) Storage Rate (tons) 
(w) Minimum Charging Temperature 
(x) Discharge Rate (tons) 
NA7.5.15.2 NA7.5.14.2 Functional Testing 
Acceptance testing also shall be conducted and documented on the Certificate of Acceptance in 
two parts: the TES System Design Verification part and the TES System Controls and Operation 
Verification part. 
In the TES System Design Verification part, the installing contractor shall certify the following 
information, which verifies proper installation of the TES System consistent with system design 
expectations: 
(a) Chiller(s) start -up procedure has been completed. 
(b) System fluid test and balance has been completed. 
(c) Air separation and purge has been completed. 
(d) Fluid (e.g. , glycol) has been verified at the concentration and type indicated on the design 
documents. 
(e) The TES system has been fully charged at least once and the charge duration noted. 
(f) The system has been partially discharged at least once and the discharge duration noted. 
(g) The system is in a partial charge state in preparation for the TES System Controls and 
Operation Verification part step 2 tests . 
(h) The schedule of operation has been activated as designed. 
(i) Mode documentation describes the state of system components in each mode of 
operation. 
In the TES System Controls and Operation Verification part, the installing contractor also shall 
complete the following acceptance testing to ensure the TES System is controlled and operates 
consistent with the compliance simulation. The installing contrac tor shall convey the results of 
the testing to the enforcement agency using the Certificate of Acceptance. 
(a) Verify that the TES system and the chilled water plant is controlled and monitored by an 
energy management system (EMS). 
(b) Indicate the method of simulation that will be used during the test.  Either manual 
selection of each operating mode or the use of an EMS by inputting the schedule as 
indicated by the designer. 
(c) Storage/charge mode.  Manually select storage mode.  Verify that the TES system stores 
energy.  If scheduled, input the time interval that would result in storage/charge mode.  
Verify that the TES system stores energy.  
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
    
 
   
  
 
 
   
 
 
   
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -33 
(d) End of charge signal.  Simulate a full storage charge by changing the (manufacturer 
recommended) thermal storage end of charge output sensor to the EMS.  Verify that the 
storage charging has stopped. 
(e) Discharge mode.  Generate a call for cooling.  Manually select storage only discharge 
mode.  Verify that the TES system starts discharging with the compressors off.  Return to 
the off/secured mode.  If scheduled, input the time interval that would result i n discharge 
mode and verify that the storage starts discharging with the compressors off. 
(f) Mechanical cooling only mode.  Generate a call for cooling.  Manually select mechanical 
cooling only mode and verify that the storage does not discharge , and the cooling load is 
met by the compressor only.  Return to the off/secure mode.  If scheduled, input the time 
interval that would result in mechanical cooling only mode and verify that the storage 
does not discharge , and the cooling load is met by the compressor only. 
(g) Discharge and mechanical cooling mode.  Generate a call for cooling.  Manually select 
discharge and mechanical cooling mode and verify that the TES system discharges with 
the compressor sharing the load.  If scheduled, input the time interval that would re sult in 
discharge and mechanical cooling mode and verify that the storage starts discharging with 
the compressor sharing the load. 
(h) Off/storage -secured mode.  Manually select the off/storage -secured mode and verify that 
the storage does not discharge , and all compressors are off, regardless of the presence of 
calls for cooling.  If scheduled, input the time interval that would result in off/storage -
secured mode and verify that the storage does not discharge and all compressors are off, 
regardless of th e presence of calls for cooling.  
(i) Charge plus cool mode. If provisions for this mode have been made by the system 
designer, verify that the tank(s) can be charged while serving an active cooling load, 
simulated by generating a call for cooling and entering the charge mode either manually 
or by time schedule.  If the system disallows this mode of operation, verify that the 
energy storage is disallowed or discontinued while an active cooling load is present. 
NA7.5.16 NA7.5.15 Supply Air Temperature Reset Controls 
The following acceptance tests apply to supply air temperature reset controls. 
NA7.5.16.1 NA7.5.15.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply air temperature reset controls are installed as specified by the requirements of the 
Section 140.4(f). 
(b) All system air temperature sensors are factory or field calibrated within 2% of a calibrated 
reference temperature sensor.  Attach a copy of the calibration certificate or field 
verification results.  
(c) Document current supply air temperature. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
  
 
   
   
   
   
  
  
   
   
   
  
   
  
  
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -34 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.5.16.2 NA7.5.15.2 Functional Testing 
(a) Check to make sure that chilled and hot water coils, if used, are not already fully open and 
calling for maximum cooling/heating. If this is the case, reverse Steps 1 and 2 and/or 
change the setpoint range as necessary to conduct this test. 
(b) Identify the reset controller parameter. 
Step 1: During occupied mode, adjust the reset control parameter to decrease the supply air 
temperature (to the lower supply temperature limit). Verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply air temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(b) Actual supply air temperature decreases to meet the new setpoint within ±2ºF. 
(c) Supply air temperature stabilizes within 15 minutes. 
Step 2: During occupied mode, adjust the reset control parameter to increase the supply air 
temperature (to the upper supply temperature limit). Verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply air temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(b) Actual supply air temperature increases to meet the new setpoint within ±2ºF. 
(c) Supply air temperature stabilizes within 15 minutes. 
Step 3: Restore reset control parameter to automatic control. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Supply air temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(b) Actual supply air temperature changes to meet the new setpoint within ±2ºF. 
(c) Supply air temperature stabilizes within 15 minutes. 
NA7.5.17 NA7.5.16 Condenser Water Supply Temperature Reset Controls 
The following acceptance tests apply to condenser water temperature reset controls. 
NA7.5.17.1 NA7.5.16.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Condenser water supply system, control system, and temperature control sequence, 
including condenser water supply high and low limits, are available and documented in 
the building documents. 
(b) Cooling tower fan motors are operational, and cooling tower fan speed controls (e.g. , 
VSDs) are installed, operational, and connected to cooling tower fan motors as specified 
by Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) start -up manuals and sequence of operation. 
(c) Cooling tower fan control sequence, including tower design wetbulb temperature and 
approach, is available and documented in the building documents. 
(d) The following temperature sensors are installed as specified by the plans: outdoor air dry -
bulb, outdoor air wet -bulb, entering condenser water, and leaving chilled water. Note any 
discrepancies. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -35 
(e) All ambient dry bulb temperature, relative humidity, and pressure sensors used by 
controller are factory calibrated within 2% of a calibrated reference sensor. Attach a copy 
of calibration certificate or field verification results. 
(f) Document the current outdoor air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures, entering 
condenser water temperature, and leaving chilled water temperature readings from the 
control system. 
NA7.5.17.2 NA7.5.16.2 Functional Testing 
(a) The system cooling load must be sufficiently high to run the test. If necessary, artificially 
increase the evaporator load to perform the functional tests , or wait until a time of stable 
chiller operation. If necessary, reverse Steps 1 and 2 in the test based on atmospheric 
conditions and buildings loads. 
(b) If testing in cold ambient conditions, ensure that freeze protection controls are installed 
and functional to prevent equipment damage. 
(c) If the actual control sequence differs significantly from that implied by the tests and/or 
has already been tested during the building commissioning process, attach a description 
of the control sequence, a description of the tests that were done to verify the system 
operates according to the sequence, the test results, and a plot of associated trend data. 
(d) Identify the reset control parameter. 
Step 1:  Adjust the reset control parameter to decrease the condenser water supply temperature 
toward the lower supply temperature limit.  Allow time for the system to stabilize. Verify 
and document the following: 
(a) Condenser water supply temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(b) Actual condenser water supply temperature decreases to meet the new setpoint within 
±2ºF. 
(c) Cooling tower fan(s) stage properly and/or adjust speed accordingly to meet higher 
setpoint. 
(d) Chiller load amperage decrease. 
Step 2:  Adjust the reset control parameter to increase the condenser water supply temperature 
toward the upper supply temperature limit. 
Verify and document the following: 
(e) Condenser water supply temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(f) Actual condenser water supply temperature increases to meet the new setpoint within 
±2ºF. 
(g) Cooling tower fan(s) stage properly and/or adjust speed accordingly to meet the lower 
setpoint. 
(h) Chiller load amperage increase. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
   
  
   
 
   
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
    
 
  
 
  
 
   
  
  
  
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -36 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 3:  Restore reset control parameter to automatic control. Verify and document the 
following: 
(i) Condenser water supply temperature controls modulate as intended. 
(j) Actual condenser water supply temperature changes to meet the new setpoint. 
(k) Cooling tower fan(s) and chiller(s) stage properly and/or adjust speed accordingly to 
return to normal operation and meet the setpoint. 
NA7.5.18 NA7.5.17 Occupied Standby 
NA7.5.18.1 NA7.5.17.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional Testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Confirm that all spaces served by the zone are eligible to be in occupied standby mode as 
specified in Section §120.2(e)3. 
(b) Verify that the occupant sensor is placed so that it can detect occupants in the space 
without obstruction. Repeat for all spaces served by the zone. 
(c) Confirm that the mechanical system is controlled by an independent signal if the occupant 
sensor also controls the lighting. 
NA7.5.18.2 NA7.5.17.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Put the zone in occupied mode (i.e., adjust the occupancy schedule) 
Step 2: Physically occupy the space and confirm that the occupant sensor detect s the 
presence of an occupant in the zone. 
Step 3: Adjust the thermostat ic control so that the space temperature is within the 
deadband. 
Step 4: Confirm that the zone is supplied with minimum ventilation. 
Step 5: Adjust setpoint outside of occupied heating/cooling deadband but inside the 
occupied standby deadband. Conf irm the zone is in heating or cooling mode. 
Step 6: Physically vacate all spaces served by the zone. 
Step 7: For space conditioning systems that also provide ventilation to the zone, confirm 
that within 5 minutes of occupant sensing controls indicating that the zone is 
unoccupied the setpoint is setup or setback and the zone is within the occupied 
standby deadband. Occupant sensing controls may have a time delay of up to 20 
minutes before indicating the space is unoccupied and occupant sensing zone 
controls may allow up to an additional 5 minute time delay after occupant sensing 
controls have indicated all rooms served by the zone are unoccupied before 
resetting zone temperature setpoints and shutting off zone ventilation air). 
Step 8 : Confirm that no ventilation is being supplied to the space with the occupant 
sensor. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
    
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -37 
Step 9: Put the zone in pre -occupancy ventilation mode (i.e. , adjust the occupancy 
schedule to one hour prior to normal scheduled occupancy). 
Step 10: Physically vacate all spaces served by the zone. 
Step 11: Confirm that within 5 minutes of occupant sensing controls indicating that all 
spaces served by the zone are unoccupied, the zone is supplied with pre -
occupancy ventilation rate of Section 120.1(d)2: either the minimum rate of 
outdoor air required by Section 120.1(c) or three complete air changes is supplied 
to the zone during the one hour period immediately before the zone is scheduled 
to be occupied. (See Step 7 concerning maximum occupant sensing control time 
delay). 
Step 12: Occupy a space served by the zone during the one hour immediately prior to 
scheduled occupancy. Confirm that the zone is supplied with pre -occupancy 
ventilation rate of Section 120.1(d)2. 
Step 13: Restore the system to normal operation. 
NA7.5.19 NA7.5.18 Cooling Tower Conductivity Controls 
The following acceptance tests apply to all open -and closed -circuit cooling towers. 
NA7.5.19.1 NA7.5.18.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The conductivity controls, makeup water flow meter(s), and overflow alarms are 
installed as specified on the plans. 
(b) Maximum achievable cycles of concentration are documented on the NRCC -MCH -E 
compliance document. 
(c) Blowdown control sequence is available and documented in the building documents. 
(d) Controls are programmed to automate bleed to the maximum cycles of concentration 
documented on the NRCC -MCH -E form. 
(e) Controls shall be programmed not to allow blowdown until one or more of the 
parameters in Table NA7 reaches the value specified in NRCC -MCH -E. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
   
    
  
 
    
   
 
 
   
   
 
 
    Appendix NA7 -38 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Table NA -7 RECIRCULATING WATER PARAMETERS 
Recirculating Water Parameters Maximum Values 
Conductivity (micro -siemens/cm ) 2970 micro -siemens/cm ohms 
Total dissolved solids (ppm) 1845 ppm 
Total alkalinity as CaCO23 (ppm) excluding 
galvanized steel 540 ppm 
Total alkalinity as CaCO3 (ppm) galvanized 
steel (passivated) 450 ppm 
Calcium hardness as CACO3 (ppm) 540 ppm 
Chlorides as Cl (ppm) 270 ppm 
Sulfates (ppm) 225 ppm 
Silica (ppm) 135 ppm 
Langelier saturation index (LSI) 2.5 LSI 
NA7.5.19.2 NA7.5.18.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Override the makeup water valve to open until the tower water is above the maximum fill 
level. 
Step 2: Close the makeup water valve. Verify that the overflow alarm is triggered either through 
an audible signal or via alert to the Energy Management Control System. 
Step 3: Restore the makeup water control parameter to automatic control. 
Indoor Lighting Controls Acceptan ce Tests 
NA7.6.1 Automatic Daylighting Controls Acceptance Tests 
NA7.6.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) (a) The daylit zones are shown on plans documents . 
(b) (b) The general lighting in skylit daylit zones, primary sidelit daylit zones and secondary 
sidelit daylit zones is controlled by automatic daylighting controls. In parking garages, the 
general lighting in the combined primary and secondary sidelit daylit zones is controlled 
by automatic daylighting controls . 
(c) (c) The automatic daylighting controls provide separate control for luminaires in each type 
of daylit zone. General lighting in overlapping skylit daylit zone and a sidelit daylit zone 
are controlled as part of the skylit zone. General lighting in both a primary sidelit daylit 
zone and secondary sidelit daylit zone are controlled as part of the primary sidelit daylit 
zone. 
(d) (d) All photosensors are not readily accessible to unauthorized personnel. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
     
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
   
  
   
 
 
  
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
    
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -39 
NA7.6.1.2 Functional Testing -Sampling 
All photocontrols serving more than 5,000 ft² of daylit area shall undergo functional testing. 
Photocontrols that are serving smaller spaces may be sampled as follows: 
For buildings with up to five (5) photocontrols, all photocontrols shall be tested. For buildings 
with more than five (5) photocontrols, sampling may be done on spaces with similar sensors and 
cardinal orientations of glazing; sampling shall include a mini mum of one ( 1) photocontrol for 
each group of up to five ( 5) additional photocontrols. If the first photocontrol in the sample group 
passes the functional test, the remaining photocontrols in the sample group also pass. If the first 
photocontrol in the sam ple group fails the functional test, the rest of the photocontrols in the 
group shall be tested. If any tested photocontrol fails the functional test, it shall be repaired, 
replaced , or adjusted until it passes the test. 
For each photocontrol to be tested , test each group of lights controlled separately by the 
photocontrol according to the protocol in NA7.6.1. 4 and NA7.6.1. 5. In all interior spaces other 
than parking garages, separate test s are conducted for daylighting control of the primary sidelit 
daylit zone and for daylight control of the secondary sidelit daylit zone. In parking garages, the 
tests are conducted on daylighting controls that control the combined area of the primary and 
secondary sidelit daylit zone. 
NA7.6.1.3 RESERVED 
NA7.6.1.4 Continuous Dimming Control Systems Functional Testing 
Continuous dimming control systems provide more than 10 levels of controlled light output per 
zone . 
(a) Reference Location . Identify the minimum daylight ing location in the controlled zone 
(Reference Location) for each daylit zone type (skylit, primary sidelit, and secondary 
sidelit) in the space . This can be identified using either the illuminance method or the 
distance method and will be used for illuminance measurements in subsequent tests . For 
parking garages, the reference location should always be the farthest edge of the 
secondary sidelit daylit zone away from the opening or glazing . 
Illuminance Method 
The Reference Location is the task location with lowest daylight illuminance in the zone 
illuminated by controlled luminaires. 
Turn off controlled lighting and measure daylight illuminance within zones illuminated by 
controlled luminaires. (Note: turn the controlled lighting back on before proceeding to the 
No Daylight Test) 
Distance Method 
The Reference Location is the task location within the zone illuminated by controlled 
luminaires that is farthest away from daylight sources. 
(b) No Daylight Test . Simulate or provide conditions without daylight. Verify and document 
the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
   
  
 
  
      
  
 
    
   
    
  
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -40 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
1. Document the reference illuminance at the Reference Location, which is the electric 
lighting illuminance level at the Reference Location. 
2. Automatic daylight control system turns on all controlled lighting to full light output 
(full design output, or full programmed output) unless it has been documented, such 
as in design documents, that continuous dimming luminaires have been intentionally 
tuned to less than full light output . 
3. Light output is stable with no visible flicker. 
(c) Full Daylight Test . Simulate or provide bright conditions where the daylight illuminance is 
greater than 150 percent of the reference illuminance (measured during the No Daylight 
Test ). Alternatively, provide simulated bright conditions by shining a bright light into the 
daylight sensor . Verify and document the following: 
1. The controlled lighting power reduction is at least 90 percent under fully dimmed 
conditions for non -parking garage locations. For parking garages, the controlled 
lighting power reduction is 100 percent under fully dimmed conditions. 
2. Only luminaires in daylit zones are affected by daylight control . If the daylighting 
control system control s luminaires outside of the daylight zones including those 
behind obstructions, the control system is not compliant. 
3. If a Power Adjustment Factor ( PAF) is claimed for daylight continuous dimming plus 
off controls in accordance with Section 140.6(a)2H; a compliant system shall 
automatically turn off the luminaires in order to pass the Full Daylight Test for daylight 
continuous dimming plus off controls. This portion of the Full Daylight Test does not 
apply to lighting systems that are not claiming a PAF for daylight continuous dimming 
plus off controls. 
(d) Partial Daylight Test . Simulate or provide daylight conditions where illuminance provided 
only by daylight only at the Reference Location is between 60 and 95 percent of 
Reference Illuminance measured during the No Daylight Test . Verify and document the 
following: 
1. Measure that the combined daylight and controlled electric lighting illuminance at the 
Reference Location is no less than the reference illuminance measured at this location 
during the No D aylight Test . 
2. Verify that the combined daylight and controlled electric lighting illuminance at the 
Reference Location is no greater than 150 percent of the reference illuminance. 
3. Light output is stable with no visible flicker. 
(Note: only luminaires in daylit zones are affected by daylight control) 
(e) Alternate Partial Daylight Test . When outdoor horizontal illuminance is at least 4,000 fc 
and where illuminance from daylight only at the Reference Location (Partial Daylight 
Illuminance) is no greater than 80 percent of Reference Illuminance measured at this location 
during the No Daylight Test. Measure the outdoor horizontal illuminance level and the 
daylight illuminance level, and do not proceed until the aforementioned illuminance criteria 
are met. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
  
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -41 
Verify and document the following: 
1. Measure the Partial Daylight Illuminance at the Reference Location. This can be 
measured by turning the electric lighting off. (Turn the electric lighting back on 
before proceeding to next step. ) 
2. Measure the combined daylight and controlled electric lighting at the Reference 
Location. 
3. This alternate partial daylight test is passed if the measured illuminance value 
(from Step 2) is no less than the Reference Illuminance measured at this 
location during the no daylight test and no greater than Partial Daylight 
Combined Illuminance Maximum (PDCIM). 
In other words, the measured value must be within the following range in order 
to pass this test. 
Reference Illuminance (from the no daylight test ) ≤ measured illuminance value 
(from Step 2) ≤ PDCIM, 
where PDCIM = Reference Illuminance (from the no daylight test ) + 0.40 x 
Daylight Illuminance (from Step 1) 
4. Light output is stable with no visible flicker. 
5. Only luminaires in daylit zones are affected by daylight control. 
NA7.6.1.5 Stepped Switching or Stepped Dimming Control Systems Functional Testing 
Stepped switching or stepped dimming control systems provide no more than 10 discrete steps 
of control of light output. 
(a) Reference Location . Identify the minimum daylight location in the controlled zone 
(Reference Location) for each daylit zone type (skylit, primary sidelit, and secondary 
sidelit) in the space. This can be identified using either the illuminance method or the 
distance method and will be used for illuminance measurements in subsequent tests. For 
parking garages, the reference location should always be the farthest edge of the 
secondary sidelit daylit zone away from the opening or glazing. 
Illuminance Method 
The Reference Location is the task location with lowest daylight illuminance in the zone 
illuminated by controlled luminaires. 
Turn off controlled lighting and measure daylight illuminance within zones illuminated by 
controlled luminaires. (Note: turn the controlled lighting back on before proceeding to the 
No Daylight Test) 
Distance Method 
The Reference Location is the task location within the zone illuminated by controlled 
luminaires that is farthest away from daylight sources . 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -42 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(b) No daylight test . Simulate or provide conditions without daylight. Verify and document 
the following: 
1. Document the reference illuminance, which is the electric lighting illuminance 
level at the Reference Location. 
2. Automatic daylight control system turns on all stages of controlled lighting to 
full light output unless it has been documented, such as in design documents, 
that dimming luminaires have been intentionally tuned to less than full light 
output. 6.4. 
3. Light output is stable with no visible flicker. 
(c) Full daylight test . Simulate or provide bright conditions where the daylight illuminance is 
greater than 150 percent of the reference illuminance (measured during the No Daylight 
Test). Alternatively, provide simulated bright conditions by shining a bright light into the 
daylight sensor . Verify and document the following: 
1. When daylight illuminance is greater than 150 percent of the design 
illuminance, lighting power reduction is at least 90 percent under fully dimmed 
conditions for non -parking garage locations. For parking garages, the lighting 
power reduction is 100 percen t under fully dimmed conditions 
2. RESERVED 
3. Only luminaires in daylit zones are affected by daylight control. If the 
daylighting control system controls luminaires outside of the daylight zones 
including those behind obstructions, the control system is not compliant. 
(d) Partial daylight test . If the control system has one (1) to three (3) steps of control 
between on and off, test all control steps between on and off. If the control system has 
more than three (3) steps between on and off, testing three (3) control steps between on 
and off is suf ficient to demonstrate compliance. If the control system has zero (0) steps 
between on and off, the partial daylight test is not necessary. For stepped switching 
control systems, steps in a controlled zone are achieved by turning som e luminaires or 
groups of luminaires on or off without any steps between on and off. 
For each control stage that is tested in this step, the control stages with lower setpoints 
than the stage tested are left ON and those stages of control with higher setpoints are 
dimmed or controlled off. Simulate or provide conditions so that each control stage turns 
on and off or dims. Verify and d ocument the following for each control stage: 
1. Measure that the combined daylight and controlled electric lighting illuminance at the 
Reference Location is no less than the reference illuminance measured at this location 
during the No Daylight Test. 
2. Verify that the combined daylight and controlled electric lighting illuminance at the 
Reference Location is no greater than 150 percent of the reference illuminance. 
3. Light output is stable with no visible flicker. (Note: only luminaires in daylit zones are 
affected by daylight control) 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
    
   
  
    
    
    
  
     
 
  
  
    
   
   
  
   
 
 
   
 
   
  
   
  
     
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -43 
4. The control stage shall not cycle on and off or cycle between dim and undimmed while 
daylight illuminance remains constant. 
NA7.6.2 Shut -off Controls Acceptance Tests 
NA7.6.2.1 Occupant Sensing Lighting Control s Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The occupant sensing lighting controls are shown on plan documents and are installed . 
(b) Occupant sensing lighting control is installed per manufacturer’s instructions to minimize 
false triggering -such as to install an occupancy sensor away from HVAC diffuser s to avoid 
probable false triggering . 
NA7.6.2.2 Occupant Sensing Lighting Control s Functional Testing -– Sampling 
For buildings with up to seven (7) occupant sensors, all occupant sensors shall be tested. For 
buildings with more than seven (7) occupant sensors, sampling may be done on spaces with 
similar sensors and space geometries; sampling shall include a minimum of 1 occupant sensor for 
each group of up to 7 additional occupant sensors. If the first occupant sensor in the sample 
group passes the acceptance test, the remaining building spaces in the sample group also pass. If 
the first occupant sensor in the sample group fails the acceptance test , the rest of the occupant 
sensors in that group must be tested. If any tested occupant sensor fails it shall be repaired, 
replaced , or adjusted until it passes the test. 
For buildings with up to seven multi -zone occupant sensors, all occupant sensors shall be tested. 
For buildings with more than seven multi -zone occupant sensors, sampling may be done on the 
space to choose up seven mu lti-zone occupant sensors from the space and all seven multi -zone 
occupant sensors shall be tested. 
NA7.6.2.3 Occupant Sensing Lighting Control s Functional Testing 
This requirement applies to areas where occupant sensing controls are required to comply with 
Section 130.1(c) with the exception of Section 130.1(c)6D. 
For each sensor to be tested do the following: 
(a) Unoccupied Test . Simulate an unoccupied condition in the controlled space . Verify and 
document the following: 
1. The occupant sensing control turn the controlled lighting off or partially -off in 20 
minutes or less from the start of an unoccupied condition. In addition: 
a. For partial -on occupant sensing controls, occupant sensing controls and vacancy 
sensing controls, the controlled lighting is turned off in unoccupied condition. 
b. In the partially off state, partial off occupant sensing controls automatically reduce 
lighting power by at least 50 percent, or automatically reduce in one of the 
following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
   
  
 
    
 
  
  
     
 
 
  
    
 
   
  
   
 
   
    
   
  
  
  Appendix NA7 -44 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
i. For warehouses with metal halide or high pressure sodium lighting, reduce 
lighting power by at least 40 percent; 
ii. For aisle ways and open areas in warehouse s in which the installed lighting 
power is 80 percent or less of the value allowed under the Area Category 
Method, reduce lighting power by at least 40 percent; 
iii. For corridors and stairwells that provide access to guestrooms and dwelling 
units of high -rise residential buildings and hotel/motels in which the 
installed lighting power is 80 percent or less of the valued allowed under 
the Area Category Method, reduce lighting power by at least 40 percent. 
c. For occupant sensing controls in parking garages, parking areas, and loading and 
unloading areas, the control has at least one control step between 20 to 50 
percent of the design lighting power , or the controls has at least one control step 
between 20 to 60 percent of the design lighting power -for the controls serving 
metal halide luminaires with a lamp plus ballast mean system efficacy of 75 
lumens per watt. In the partially off state, partial off occupant sensing controls 
automatically reduce lighting p ower by one control step. 
(b) Occupied Test. Simulate an occupied condition in the controlled space . Verify and 
document the following: 
1. Status indicator or annunciator operates correctly. 
2. Immediately upon an occupied condition : 
a. The occupant sensing control or partial off occupant sensing control turns 
on controlled lighting; or 
b. The vacancy sensing control indicate a space is occupied and the controlled 
lighting can be turned on manually ; or 
c. The partial -on occupant sensing control automatically turns on the 
controlled lighting at between 50 to 70 percent of controlled lighting 
power. After the partial -on stage, manual switches can be activated to turn 
on the controlled lighting at full controlled lighting power. 
NA7.6.2.4 Multi -Zone Occupant Sensing Lighting Control s Functional Testing 
This requirement applies to areas where multi -zone occupant sensing controls are required to 
comply with Section 130.1(c)6D for offices larger than 250 square feet . 
(a) Occupied Control Zone Test . Simulate an occupied condition in the control zone controlled 
by the occupant sensor. Verify and document the following: 
1. Simulate an occupancy in a control zone. Immediately upon occupancy of the control 
zone, the occupant sensor s turn on controlled lighting. 
2. Measure the illuminance at a location in the control zone where the light output is from 
the controlled lighting at full light output . 
3. Signal sensitivity is adequate to achieve desired control. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
   
  
   
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
    
    
     
  
   
    
      
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -45 
4. Status indicator or annunciator operates properly. 
(b) Unoccupied Control Zone Test. In offices where two or more occupant sensors to create 
more than one control zones, simulate an unoccupied condition in the control zone 
controlled by the occupant sensor. Confirm that at least one other control zone within the 
office is occupied. Verify and document the following: 
1. In 20 minutes or less from the start of the unoccupied condition in the control zone , the 
occupant sensor uniformly reduces light output of the controlled lighting . 
2. Measure the illuminance at the same location as in Step (a). Verify that the light output 
during unoccupancy is no more than 20 percent of the full light output measured in Step 
(a)1. 
3. The occupant sensing control does not trigger a false on from movement outside of the 
control zone or from HVAC operation. 
(Informational note: The field of view of occupant sensors in the adjacent control zones in 
offices greater than 250 square feet may overlap, but the field of view should stay away 
from an adjacent enclosed spaces that is not part of the large office, like conference 
rooms, and private offices.) 
4. Signal sensitivity is adequate to achieve desired control. 
(c) Control Zone Size Test . Follow the procedures described in either Method 1 or Method 2 
below. 
Method 1: Simulate an unoccupied condition in the control zone controlled by the occupant 
sensor while standing in an adjacent control zone. Determine the “edge” of the control zone 
controlled by the occupant sensor by moving toward the occupant sensor until the lights 
controlled by the occupant sensor turn on as in Step (a) – to simulate an occupied condition 
for that control zone. Measure, determine and document the following: 
1. Measure the distance (in feet) from the “edge” of the control zone to the spot that is 
directly below the occupant sensor. This is the radius of the control zone. 
2. Determine the area of the control zone by using the formula: Area = π*radius2 . 
3. The area of the control zone must be less than or equal to 600 square feet. 
Method 2: Simulate an unoccupied condition for the entire office space. Verify and document 
the following: 
1. Walk thru the space and count the number of zones of lighting turned on automatically as 
walking thru the space. 
2. Document the number of zones being turned on. Determine the size of the office in 
square footage from construction plans or from other information source. 
3. Divide the size of the office by the number of zones. This calculated value is the assessed 
control zone size (in square feet). 
4. If the value is less than or equal to 600 square feet, it passes the test. Otherwise, it fails 
the test. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
     
    
  
  
    
 
   
 
 
 
 
    
   
   
   
 
  
    
 
   
  
  
 
   
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -46 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(d) Unoccupied Office Test. Simulate an unoccupied condition in all control zone s controlled by 
all occupant sensor s in the office . Verify and document the following:  
In 20 minutes or less from the start of the unoccupied condition of the entire office, all 
general lighting in the office shall turn off. 
NA7.6.2.5 Automatic Time Switch Lighting Control s Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The automatic time swi tch controls are shown on plan documents and are installed . 
(b) Automatic time switch control is programmed with acceptable weekday, weekend, and 
holiday (if applicable) schedules. 
(c) Document for the automatic time switch programming including weekday, weekend, 
holiday schedules as well as all set -up and preference program settings. 
(d) The correct time and date isare properly set in the time switch. 
(e) The battery back -up (if applicable) is installed and energized. 
(f) Manual override time limit is set to no more than 2 hours. 
(g) Manual override switches located remote ly from area with controlled luminaires allow 
the user to see the controlled luminaires or have a visual signal or display showing the 
current state of the controlled luminaires . 
NA7.6.2.6 Automatic Time Switch Lighting Control s Functional Testing 
(a) Occupied Test. Simulate an occupied condition in the controlled space . Verify and document 
the following: 
1. The automatic time switch control turns the controlled lighting . 
2. Reserved 
(b) Unoccupied Test. Simulate an unoccupied condition in the controlled space . Verify and 
document the following: 
1. The automatic time switch control turns off all controlled lighting. 
2. During test, for the area controlled by an automatic time -switch control with a configured 
automatic holiday shut -OFF, the controlled lighting can be turned off automatically by the 
holiday shut -OFF. For exempt areas that are not required to comply , the lighting is not 
required to be configured with automatic holiday shut -OFF. 
3. For the area controlled by an automatic time -switch control with a time -override located 
in and for the area, verify the lighting can be turned on manually by initiating the time -
override and the lighting is configured to remain ON for no more than 2 hours . For 
exempt areas that are not required to comply , the lighting can be configured to remain 
ON for more than 2 hours and until the next scheduled shut off occurs. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
     
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
   2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -47 
NA7.6.3 Demand Responsive Controls Acceptance Tests 
NA7.6.3.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to Functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The demand responsive control is setup to communicate in one of the following 
communication protocols: Wi -Fi, ZigBee, BACnet, Ethernet or other wired or wireless bi -
directional communication pathway according to the requirements in Standards § 
110.12 . (requirements of Section 110.12 ). The demand responsive control s isareis setup 
to communicate for the functional testing of NA7.6.3.2 . 
NA7.6.3.2 Functional Testing 
There are three methods to verify the reduction in lighting power due to the demand responsive 
lighting controls. For methods 1 and 2, buildings with up to seven (7) enclosed spaces requiring 
demand responsive lighting controls, all spaces shall be tested. For buildings with more than 
seven (7) enclosed spaces requiring demand responsive lighting controls, sampling may be done 
on addition al spaces with similar lighting systems; sampling shall include a minimum of 1 
enclosed space for each group of up to 7 a dditional enclosed spaces. If the first enclosed space 
with a demand responsive lighting control in the sample group passes the acceptance test, the 
remaining building spaces in the sample group also pass. If the first enclosed space with a 
demand responsi ve lighting control in the sample group fails the acceptance test , the rest of the 
enclosed spaces in that group must be tested. If any tested demand responsive lighting control 
system fails it shall be repaired, replaced , or adjusted until it passes the t est. Method 3 tests the 
entire facility at once, does not require sampling, but requires the facility lighting to be 
disaggregated from other end -use loads. 
Test the reduction in lighting power due to the demand responsive lighting control using one of 
the following three methods. 
NA7.6.3.2.1 Method 1: Illuminance Measurement. 
Measure the reduction in illuminance in enclosed spaces required to meet Section 110.12(c ), as 
follows: 
(a) In each space, select one location for illuminance measurement. The preferred 
measurement location is not in a skylit or primary sidel it area so that the illuminance 
meter is not in direct view of window or skylight. If this is not possible, perform the test at 
a time and location at which daylight illuminance provides less than half of the design 
illuminance. Mark each location to ensure that the illuminance meter can be accurately 
located. 
(b) Full output test 
1. Using the manual switches/dimmers in each space, set the lighting system to full 
output. Note that for lighting system that has been task tuned, override the controls 
to allow the lighting system to go to full output. Note also that the lighting in areas 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  Appendix NA7 -48 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
with photocontrols or occupant vacancy sensors may be at less than full output, or 
may be off. 
2. Take one illuminance measurement at each location, using an illuminance meter. 
3. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
4. Take one illuminance measurement at each location with the electric lighting system 
in the demand response condition. 
5. Calculate the area -weighted average reduction in illuminance in the demand response 
condition, compared with the full output condition. The area -weighted reduction 
must be at least 15%. 
(c) Minimum output test 
1. Determine illuminance at minimum output condition: 
i. Using the manual switches/dimmers in each space, set the lighting system to 
minimum output (but not off). Note that the lighting in areas with 
photocontrols or occupant vacancy sensors may be at more than minimum 
output, or may be off. 
ii. Take one illuminance measurement at each location, using an illuminance 
meter. 
2. Determine illuminance at demand response condition: 
i. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
ii. Take one illuminance measurement at each location with the electric lighting 
system in the demand response condition. 
3. Determine compliance: 
i. In each space, the illuminance in the demand response condition must not be 
less than the illuminance in the minimum output condition (but not turned off) . 
EXCEPTION: In daylit spaces, the illuminance in the demand response condition may 
reduce below the minimum output condition. 
NA7.6.3.2.2 Method 2: Current measurement . 
Measure the reduction in electrical current in spaces required to meet Section 110.12 , as 
follows: 
(a) At the lighting circuit panel, select at least one lighting circuit that serves spaces 
required to meet Section 110.12 . 
(b) Full output test 
1. Using the manual switches/dimmers in each space, set the lighting system to full 
output. Note that the lighting in areas with photocontrols or occupant vacancy 
sensors may be at less than full output, or may be off. 
2. Take one electric current measurement for each selected circuit. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -49 
3. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
4. Take one illuminance measurement at each location with the electric lighting 
system in the demand response condition. 
5. Add together all the circuit currents , and calculate the reduction in current in the 
demand response condition, compared with the full output condition. The 
combined reduction must be at least 15% . 
(c) Minimum output test 
1. Using the manual switches/dimmers in each space, set the lighting system to 
minimum output (but not off). Note that the lighting in areas with photocontrols 
or occupant vacancy sensors may be at more than minimum output, or may be off. 
2. Take one electric current measurement for each selected circuit. 
3. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
4. Take one electric current measurement for each selected circuit with the electric 
lighting system in the demand response condition. 
5. In each space, the electric current in the demand response condition must not be 
less than the electric current in the minimum output condition. 
EXCEPTION: Circuits that supply power to the daylit portion of enclosed spaces as 
long as lighting in non-daylit portions of the enclosed space. 
NA7.6.3.2.3 Method 3: Full facility current measurement. 
Measure the reduction in electrical current of the full facility on the lighting end -use 
disaggregated circuit for spaces that are required to meet Section 110.12, as follows: 
(a) At the circuit panel, select the circuit that serves the lighting load of the entire facility. 
(b)Full output test 
1. Using the facility lighting controls, set the lighting system to full output. Note that the 
lighting in areas with photocontrols or occupant /vacancy sensors may be at less than 
full output or may be off. 
2. Take one electric current measurement on the circuit. This is your pre -event current. 
3. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
4. Take one electric current measurement on the circuit. This is your post -event current. 
5. Calculate the difference between the pre -event current and the post -event current to 
determine your wattage reduction. 
6. Divide the wattage reduction by the total design wattage of lighting required to meet 
Section 110.12. The percent reduction in wattage must be at least 15%. 
(c) Minimum output test 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
   
   
  
 
 
    
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -50 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
1. Using the facility controls, set the lighting system to minimum output (but not off). 
Note that the lighting in areas with photocontrols or occupant /vacancy sensors may 
be at more than minimum output or may be off. 
2. Take on e electric current measurement on the circuit. This is your pre -event current. 
3. Simulate a demand response condition using the demand responsive control. 
4. Take one electric current measurement on the circuit. This is you post event current. 
5. The post -event current must not be less than the pre -event current in the minimum 
output condition. 
NA7.6.4 Institutional Tuning Power Adjustment Factor (PAF) Acceptance Tests 
For buildings with up to seven (7) enclosed areas claiming the institutional tuning PAF (power 
adjustment factor), all areas shall be tested. For buildings with more than seven (7) areas 
claiming this PAF, random sampling may be done on seven of the larger enclosed areas with 
tuned dimming systems. If any of the areas in the sample group of seven areas fails the 
acceptance test, another group of seven areas must be tested. If any tested system fails, it shall 
be tuned until it pas ses the test. 
NA7.6.4.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a)The construction documents specify which lighting systems shall have their maximum light 
output or maximum power draw set to no greater than 85 percent of full light output or 
full power draw. 
(b) The controls or the methods of controlling the maximum output of luminaires is such that 
the maximum light output of the controlled lighting system can be limited , and that 
normal operation of the controlled lighting does not override the maximum light output. 
(c) The controls are not readily accessible to unauthorized personnel. 
NA7.6.4.2 Functional Testing 
For each area to be tested, follow the procedures in Method 1 or Method 2 below : 
(a) The acceptance test technician shall either observe the first seven (7) systems being 
successfully tuned or shall verify systems that have already been tuned using the sampling 
protocol described in NA7 .6.4. 
(b) If the acceptance test technician is observing the tuning of the system, the party responsible 
for the tuning shall certify that the remainder of the system is tuned in a similar manner. 
NA7.6.4.2.1 Method 1: Observation of the Systems During Institutional Tuning 
Step 1: Determination of maximum power or light output prior to institutional tuning 
(a) Set all lighting controls to provide maximum output of the tested system without applying 
the limits specified for institutional tuning. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
    
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -51 
(b) Measure the full light output at a location where the illuminance is due to the controlled 
lighting, or measure the power draw of the controlled lighting. Current measurements 
may be used instead of power measurements. 
Step 2: Institutional Tuning and Post -tuning Measurement 
(a) Apply the limits specified for institutional tuning to the lighting system. Do not alter any 
other control settings. 
(b) Verify the light or power reduction after institutional tuning by measuring the light output 
at the same location as in Step 1 or measure the power draw of the same circuit as in Step 
1. Current measurements may be used instead of power measurements. 
(c) If the light output or power draw measured in Step 2(b) is 85% or less of the light output 
or power draw measured in Step 1(b), the system passes this test; otherwise , the system 
fails this test. 
NA7.6.4.2.2 Method 2: Verification of Systems Already Tuned 
Step 1: Measurement of tuned lighting system 
(a) Set all lighting controls except institutional tuning controls to provide maximum output of 
tested system. Controls set to maximum light output include but not limited to : manual 
dimmers, multilevel occupant sensing, and automatic daylighting controls. 
(b) Measure full light output at location where most of the illuminance is due to the 
controlled lighting or measure power draw of the controlled lighting. Current 
measurements may be used instead of power measurements. 
Step 2: Measurement of lighting system with institutional tuning overriden 
(a) Reset institutional tuning controls to allow full light output. Set all lighting controls to 
provide maximum output of tested system including but not limited to : institution tuning 
control, manual dimmers, multilevel occupant sensing, and automatic daylighting 
controls. 
(b) Measure full light output at the same location as in Step 1 or measure the power draw of 
the same circuit as in Step 1. Current measurements may be used instead of power 
measurements. 
(c) If the light output or power draw measured in Step 1(b) is 85% or less of the light output 
or power draw measured in Step 2(b), the system passes this test; otherwise , the system 
fails this test. 
Step 3: Restore Institutional Tuning settings 
(a) If the tested system passed the test in Step 2, restore the institutional tuning settings. 
NA7.6.5 Demand Responsive Controls – Controlled Receptacles 
NA7.6.5.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
  
  
   
  
  
 
  
  
    
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 Appendix NA7 -52 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) (a) That t The demand responsive control is capable of receiving a setup to communicate 
in one of the following communication protocols: Wi -Fi, ZigBee, BACnet, Ethernet or other 
wired or wireless bi -directional communication pathway according to the requirements in 
Standards § 110.12. The demand respons ive control is setup to communicate for the 
functional testing of NA7.6.5.2. e signal directly or indirectly through another device and 
that it complies with the requirements in Section 110.12 . 
(b) (b) If the demand response signal is received from another device (such as an EMCS), that 
system must itself be capable of receiving a demand response signal from a utility meter 
or other external source. 
(c) (c) Verify that demand responsive controlled receptacles are installed. 
(d) (d) Verify if that the receptacle has a permanent and durable marking for controlled 
receptacles or circuits to differentiate them from uncontrolled receptacles or circuits. 
(e) (e) Verify the receptacle is controlled by an automatic shut -off control. 
NA7.6.5.2 Functional Test ing 
NA7.6.5.2.1 
For buildings with up to seven (7) enclosed spaces requiring demand responsive controlled 
receptacles, an Acceptance Test Technician shall test all spaces. 
For buildings with more than seven (7) enclosed spaces requiring demand responsive controlled 
receptacles lighting controls : 
1. An Acceptance Test Technician may either: 
a. test Test all of the spaces; or 
b. test Test seven spaces and sample the additional spaces; with each sample to 
include a minimum of 1 enclosed space for each sample group of up to 7 
additional enclosed spaces. 
2. If the first enclosed space with a demand responsive controlled receptacle in a sample 
group passes the acceptance test, the remaining building spaces in the sample group also 
pass. If the first enclosed space with a demand responsive controlled receptacle in the 
sample group fails, the Acceptance Test Technician shall test rest of the enclosed spaces 
in that group. 
NA7.6.5.2.2 
If any tested demand responsive controlled receptacle fails, it shall be repaired, replaced or 
adjusted until it passes the test. 
NA7.6.5.2.3 
The acceptance test for each demand responsive controlled receptacle includes testing the 
reduction in receptacle power due to the demand responsive control using both of the following 
methods: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
   
  
  
 
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
 
   
   
   
 
 
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -53 
(a) ON Test 
1. Trigger the shut off control to turn the demand responsive controlled receptacle ON, 
or if the receptacle has a manual control turn the receptacle ON. 
2. Verify each controlled outlet has full voltage (125 V) present. 
3. Simulate a DR condition. 
4. Verify at each controlled outlet that zero voltage (0 V) is present (deenergized). 
5. Verify the controlled receptacle cannot be overridden to turn ON by the automatic 
shut -off controls or any manual control. 
6. Simulate a normal condition (non -DR condition). 
7. Verify each controlled outlet has full voltage (125 V) present. 
(b) OFF Test 
1. Trigger the automatic shut -off control to turn the demand responsive controlled 
receptacle OFF or if the receptacle has an ON/OFF button, manually turn the 
receptacle OFF. 
2. Verify at each controlled outlet that zero voltage (0 V) is present (deenergized). 
3. Simulate a DR condition. 
4. Verify at each controlled outlet that zero voltage (0 V) is present (deenergized). 
5. Verify that the demand responsive controlled receptacle cannot be overridden to turn 
ON by automatic shut -off controls or any manual control. 
6. Simulate a normal condition (non -DR condition). 
7. Verify each controlled outlet has zero voltage (0 V) present. 
Indoor Lighting Control s Installat ion Verifications 
NA7.7.1 Lighting Control Systems Installed to Comply with Section 110.9(b) 
NA7.7.1.1 Installation Inspection 
If a lighting control required by Title 24, Part 6 is a field assembled system consisting of two or 
more components, verify the system components meet all of the requirements for each lighting 
control type, in accordance with Section 110.9, On the approved installation compliance form, 
identify, list, and verify each type of lighting control system as follows: 
(a) Separately identify and list each type of lighting control system. When there are identical 
lighting control systems in a single building, identical lighting control system may be listed 
together. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
    
 
  
  
   
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
   
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -54 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(b) Identify and list all requirements for the type of self -contained lighting control device for 
which the lighting control system is installed to function as, in accordance with Section 
110.9  and in accordance with the Title 20 Appliance Efficiency Regulatio ns. 
(c) Verify the lighting control system complies with all of the applicable requirement as listed. 
(d) If the lighting control system does not meet all applicable requirements, the installation 
fails. 
NA7.7.2 Energy Management Control System (EMCS) Installed in Accordance with Section 
130. 0(e) 
NA7.7.2.1 Installation Inspection 
(a) The EMCS shall be separately tested for each respective lighting control system for which 
it is installed to function as. 
(b) List and verify functional compliance with all applicable requirements in accordance with 
applicable Sections 110.9, 130.1 , 130.2 and Section 160.5 . 
(c) If applicable, list and verify functional compliance with all applicable requirements for all 
applications for which the EMCS is installed to function as, in accordance with appliable 
Section 140.6 and 170.2(e)2 thru 4 . 
(d) If applicable, list and verify functional compliance with all applicable requirements for all 
applications for which the EMCS is installed to function as, in accordance with applicable 
Section 140.7 and 170.2(e)6 . 
(e) If applicable, list and verify functional compliance with all applicable requirements for all 
applications for which the EMCS is installed to function as, in accordance with applicable 
Section 150(k) and 160.5(a) . 
NA7.7.3 RESERVED 
NA7.7.4 Interlocked Lighting Systems Serving an Area in Accordance with Section 140.6(a)1 
and 170.2(e)2A 
NA7.7.4.1 Installation Inspection 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) The space qualifies only as one or more the following types: Auditorium, convention 
center, conference room, multipurpose room, or theater, in accordance with the 
definitions of those space types in Section 100.1 . 
(b) There are no more than two interlocked lighting systems serving the space. 
(c) The two lighting systems are interlocked with a non -programmable double throw switch 
to prevent simultaneous operation, in accordance with applicable Section 140.6(a) 1 and 
170.2(e) 2A. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -55 
(d) If all of the above items are not true, the installation fails, and all connected lighting in the 
space shall be counted as part of the total installed lighting power. 
NA7.7.5 Lighting Controls Installed to Earn a Power Adjustment Factor (PAF) in Accordance 
with Section 140.6(a)2 and 170.2(e)2 B. 
NA7.7.5.1 Construction Inspection for all PAFs except Institutional Tuning 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) Separately list all requirements for each PAF that is claimed in accordance with applicable 
Sections 110.9, and 140.6(a)2, Table 140.6 -A, 170.2(e)2B , and Table 170.2 -L. 
(b) Verify the installation complies with all applicable requirements in accordance with 
applicable Sections 110.9, and 140.6(a)2, Table 140.6 -A, 170.2(e)2B, and Table 170.2 -L. 
(c) If all of the above items are not true for a specific PAF, the installation fails, and that 
specific PAF cannot be used. 
(d) For lighting systems that are claiming a PAF for daylight continuous dimming plus OFF 
control in accordance with Section 140.6(a)2H and 170.2(e) 2Bviii , the system must 
successfully complete the functional performance test in Section NA 7.6.1. 3, and in 
addition during the Full Daylight Test the controls shall automatically turn OFF the 
luminaires that are receiving the daylight continuous dimming plus OFF PAF credit. 
NA7.7.6 Lighting for a Videoconferencing Studio in Accordance with Section 140.6 (c)2Gvii 
NA7.7.6.1 Installation Inspection 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) The videoconferencing studio is using only the Area Category Method for compliance. The 
extra lighting allowance shall not be taken when using the Complete Building Method or 
Tailored Method of compliance. 
(b) The videoconferencing studio is a room with permanently installed videoconferencing 
cameras, audio equipment, and playback equipment for both audio -based and video -
based two -way communication between local and remote sites. 
(c) General lighting is switched in accordance with Table 130.1 -A. 
(d) Wall wash lighting is separately switched from the general lighting system. 
(e) All of the lighting is controlled by a multiscene programmable control system (scene 
preset control system). 
(f) If all of the above is not true, the installation fails, and the extra wattage for 
videoconferencing studio lighting cannot be used. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
    
  
   
    
   
 
 
  
    
 
   
 
 
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
   
  
    
  
 Appendix NA7 -56 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Outdoor Lighting Controls Acceptance Test s 
NA7.8.1 Motion Sens ing Controls Acceptance Test s 
NA7.8.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) The motion sens ing controls are shown on plan documents and are installed . 
(b) Motion sensor is located to minimize false signals. 
(c) Desired sensor coverage is not blocked by obstructions that could adversely affect 
performance. 
NA7.8.1.2 Functional Testing 
For building sites with up to seven (7) motion sensors, all motion sensors shall be tested. For 
sites with more than seven (7) motion sensors, sampling may be done on outdoor areas with 
similar sensors that cover similar unobstructed areas; sampling shall include a minimum of 1 
motion sensor for each group of up to 7 additional motion sensors. 
If the first sensor in the sample group passes the acceptance test, the remaining outdoor areas in 
the sample group also pass. If the first motion sensor in the sample group fails the acceptance 
test, the rest of the sensors in that group shall be tested and any failed sensor in the sample 
group shall be repaired or replaced and retested until the sensor passes the test. 
Step 1: Simulate motion in area under luminaire controlled by the motion sensor. Verify and 
document the following: 
(a) Status indicator operates correctly. 
(b) Luminaires controlled by sensors turn on immediately upon entry into the area lit by the 
controlled luminaires near the sensor. 
(c) Signal sensitivity is adequate to achieve desired control. 
Step 2: Simulate no motion in area with lighting controlled by the motion sensor. 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) The controlled luminaires are turned off or the lighting power of each controlled 
luminaire is reduced by at least 50 percent and no more than 90 percent within a 
maximum of 15 minutes from the start of an unoccupied condition. 
(b) The sensor does not trigger a false “on” from movement outside of the controlled area. 
(c) Signal sensitivity is adequate to achieve desired control. 
NA7.8.2 Photocontrol s Acceptance Test s 
NA7.8.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
     
  
    
 
 
  
 
  
  
   
   
    
  
  
      
  
 
  
  
 
    
  
 
   
   
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -57 
The photocontrol s are shown on plan documents and are installed. 
NA7.8.2.2 Functional Testing 
For building sites with up to seven (7) photosensors, all photosensors shall be tested. For sites 
with more than seven (7) photosensors, sampling may be done on outdoor areas with similar 
photosensors that cover similar unobstructed areas; sampling shall include a minimum of 1 
photosensors for each group of up to 7 additional photosensors.  
If the first photosensors in the sample group passes the acceptance test, the remaining outdoor 
areas in the sample group also pass. If the first photosensors in the sample group fails the 
acceptance test, the rest of the photosensors in that group shall be tested and any failed 
photosensors in the sample group shall be repaired or replaced and retested until the 
photosensors passes the test. 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) During daytime simulation, all controlled luminaires are turned off. 
(b) During nighttime simulation, all controlled luminaires are turned on. 
NA7.8.3 RESERVED 
NA7.8.4 RESERVED 
NA7.8.5 Automatic Scheduling Control s Acceptance Test s 
NA7.8.5.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing , confirm and document the following: 
(a) The automatic scheduling control s are shown on plan documents and are installed. 
(b) The control is programmed with on schedules and off schedule that matches the schedules in 
the construction documents. If the schedule is unknown, confirm that the programmed 
schedule matches the default schedule where the off schedule is from midnight to 6am and 
the on schedule is all other night time hours, seven days per week. 
(c) The lighting control programming including both on schedule and off schedule, for weekday, 
weekend, and holidays (if applicable). 
(d) The correct time and date isare properly set in the control. 
NA7.8.5.2 Functional Testing 
Verify and document the following: 
(a) During daytime simulation, all controlled luminaires are turned off. 
(b) During nighttime simulation with the programmed occupied period , all controlled luminaires 
are turned on. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
      
    
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
   
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -58 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(c) During nighttime simulation with the programmed unoccupied period , the controlled 
luminaire s are turned off or the lighting power of controlled luminaires is reduced by at least 
50 percent and no more than 90 percent . 
RESERVED 
Refrigerated Warehouse Refrigeration System Acceptance Tests 
The measurement devices used to verify the refrigerated warehouse controls shall be calibrated 
once every two years using a NIST traceable reference. The calibrated measurement devices to 
be used in these acceptance tests are called the "standard" and shall have the following 
measurement tolerances: The temperature measurement devices shall be calibrated to +/ -0.7°F 
between -30°F and 200°F. The pressure measurement devices shall be calibrated to +/ -2.5 psi 
between 0 and 500 psig. The relative humidity (RH) measurement devices shall be c alibrated to 
+/-1% between 5% and 90% RH. 
NA7.10.1 Electric Resistance Underslab Heating System 
NA7.10.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following for all electric resistance underslab 
heating systems: 
(a) Verify that summer on-peak period is programmed into all underslab heater controls to 
meet the requirements of Section 120.6(a)2. 
NA7.10.1.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Using the control system, lower slab temperature setpoint. Verify and document the 
following using an electrical test meter: 
(a) The underslab electric resistance heater is off. 
Step 2: Using the control system, raise the slab temperature setpoint. Verify and document the 
following using an electrical test meter: 
(b) The underslab electric resistance heater is on. 
Step 3: Using the control system, change the control system’s time and date corresponding to the 
local utility’s summer on -peak period. If control system only accounts for time, set system 
time corresponding to the local utility’s summer on -peak period. Ve rify and document the 
following using an electrical test meter: 
(c) The underslab electric resistance heater is off. 
Step 4: Restore system to correct schedule and control setpoints. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
   
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
  
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -59 
NA7.10.2 Evaporators and Evaporator Fan Motor Variable Speed Control 
NA7.10.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, document the following on all evaporators: 
(a) All refrigerated space temperature sensors used for control are verified to read accurately 
(or provide an appropriate offset) using a temperature standard. 
(b) All refrigerated space humidity sensors used for control are verified to read accurately (or 
provide an appropriate offset) using a humidity standard. 
(c) All refrigerated space temperature and humidity sensors are verified to be mounted in a 
location away from direct evaporator discharge air draft. 
(d) Verify that all fan s motors are operational and rotating in the correct direction. 
(e) Verify that fan speed control is operational and connected to evaporator fan motors. 
(f) Verify that all speed controls are in “auto” mode. 
NA7.10.2.2 Functional Testing 
Conduct and document the following functional tests on all evaporators. 
Step 1: Measure current space temperature or humidity. Program this temperature or humidity 
as the test temperature or humidity setpoint into the control system for the functional 
test steps. Allow 5 minutes for system to normalize. 
Step 2: Using the control system, lower test temperature or humidity setpoint in 1 degree or 1% 
RH increments below any control dead band range until: 
(a) Evaporator fan controls modulate to increase fan motor speed. 
(b) Evaporator fan motor speed increases in response to controls. 
(c) Verify and document the above. 
Step 3: Using the control system, raise the test temperature or humidity setpoint in 1 degree or 
1% RH increments above any control dead band range until fans go to minimum speed. 
Verify and document the following: 
(d) Evaporator fan controls modulate to decrease fan motor speed. 
(e) Evaporator fan motor speed decreases in response to controls. 
(f) Minimum fan motor control speed (rpm or percent of full speed). 
Step 4: Restore control system to correct control setpoints. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -60 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.10.3 Condensers and Condenser Fan Motor Variable Speed Control 
NA7.10.3.1 Evaporative Condensers and Condenser Fan Motor Variable Speed Control 
NA7.10.3.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, document the following: 
(a) Verify the minimum condensing temperature control setpoint is at or below 70°F. 
(b) Verify the master system controller saturated condensing temperature input is the 
temperature equivalent reading of the condenser pressure sensor. 
(c) Verify all drain leg pressure regulator valves are set below the minimum condensing 
temperature/pressure setpoint. 
(d) Verify all receiver pressurization valves, such as the outlet pressure regulator (OPR), are 
set lower than the drain leg pressure regulator valve setting. 
(e) Verify all condenser inlet and outlet pressure sensors read accurately (or provide an 
appropriate offset) using a pressure standard. 
(f) Verify all ambient dry bulb temperature sensors used by controller read accurately (or 
provide an appropriate offset) using a temperature standard. 
(g) Verify all relative humidity sensor used by controller read accurately (or provide an 
appropriate offset) using RH standard. 
(h) Verify all temperature sensors used by the controller are mounted in a location that is not 
exposed to direct sunlight. 
(i) Verify that all sensor readings used by the condenser controller convert or calculate to the 
correct conversion units at the controller (e.g., saturated pressure reading is correctly 
converted to appropriate saturated temperature; dry bulb and relative hum idity sensor 
readings are correctly converted to wet bulb temperature, etc.). 
(j) Verify that all fan motors are operational and rotating in the correct direction. 
(k) Verify that all condenser fan speed controls are operational and connected to condenser 
fan motors to operate in unison the fans serving a common condenser loop. 
(l) Verify that all speed controls are in “auto” mode. 
NA7.10.3.1.2 Functional Testing 
Note: The system cooling load must be sufficiently high to run the test. Artificially increase 
evaporator loads or decrease compressor capacity (manually turn off compressors, etc.) as may 
be required to perform the Functional Testing. 
Step 1: Override any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality before performing functional tests. 
Step 2: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -61 
(a) Document current outdoor ambient air dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures, relative 
humidity and refrigeration system condensing temperature/condensing pressure readings 
from the control system. 
(b) Calculate and document the temperature difference (TD), defined as the difference 
between the wet bulb temperature and the refrigeration system saturated condensing 
temperature (SCT). 
(c) Document current head pressure control setpoint. 
Step 3: Using the desired condenser fan motor cycling or head pressure control strategy, program 
into the control system a setpoint equal to the reading or calculation obtained in Step 2. 
This will be referred to as the “test setpoint.” Allow 5 minutes for condenser fan speed to 
normalize. 
Step 4: Using the control system, raise the test setpoint in 1 degree (or 3 psi) increments until the 
condenser fan control modulates to minimum fan motor speed. Verify and document the 
following: 
(d) Fan motor speed decreases. 
(e) All condenser fan motors serving common condenser loop decrease speed in unison in 
response to controller output. 
(f) Minimum fan motor control speed (rpm or percent of full speed). 
(g) If the refrigeration system is already operating at minimum saturated condensing 
temperature/head pressure, reverse Steps 4 and 5. 
Step 5: Using the control system, lower the test setpoint in 1 degree (or 3 psi) increments until 
the condenser fan control modulates to increase fan motor speed. Verify and document 
the following: 
(h) Fan motor speed increases. 
(i) All condenser fan motors serving common condenser loop increase speed in unison in 
response to controller output. 
Step 6: Document the current minimum condensing temperature setpoint. Using the control 
system, change the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to a value greater than 
the current operating condensing temperature. Verify and document the following: 
(j) Condenser fan controls modulate to decrease capacity. 
(k) All condenser fans serving common condenser loop modulate in unison. 
(l) Condenser fan controls stabilize within a 5 minute period. 
Step 7: Using the control system, reset the system head pressure controls, fan motor controls 
and minimum condensing temperature control setpoint to original settings documented 
in Steps 3 and 6. 
Step 8: Restore any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality. Reset the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to the value 
documented in Step 6. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -62 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.10.3.2 Air-Cooled Condensers and Condenser Fan Motor Variable Speed Control 
Conduct and document the following functional tests on all air -cooled condensers. 
NA7.10.3.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, document the following: 
(a) Verify that the minimum condensing temperature control setpoint is at or below 70°F. 
(b) Verify that the master system controller saturated condensing temperature input is the 
temperature equivalent reading of the condenser pressure sensor. 
(c) Verify all drain leg pressure regulator valves are set below the minimum condensing 
temperature/pressure setpoint. 
(d) Verify all receiver pressurization valves, such as the outlet pressure regulator (OPR), are 
set lower than the drain leg pressure regulator valve setting. 
(e) Verify all condenser inlet and outlet pressure sensors read accurately (or provide an 
appropriate offset) using a pressure standard. 
(f) Verify all ambient dry bulb temperature sensors used by controller read accurately (or 
provide an appropriate offset) using temperature standard. 
(g) Verify all temperature sensors used by the controller are mounted in a location that is not 
exposed to direct sunlight. 
(h) Verify that all sensor readings used by the condenser controller convert or calculate to the 
correct conversion units at the controller (e.g., saturated pressure reading is correctly 
converted to appropriate saturated temperature, etc.) 
(i) Verify that all fan motors are operational and rotating in the correct direction. 
(j) Verify that all condenser fan speed controls are operational and connected to condenser 
fan motors to operate in unison the fans serving a common condenser loop. 
(k) Verify that all speed controls are in “auto” mode. 
NA7.10.3.2.2 Functional Testing 
Note: The system cooling load must be sufficiently high to run the test. Artificially increase 
evaporator loads or decrease compressor capacity (manually turn off compressors, etc.) as may 
be required to perform the Functional Testing. 
Step 1: Override any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality before performing functional tests. 
Document current outdoor ambient air dry bulb temperature and refrigeration system 
condensing temperature/condensing pressure readings from the control system. 
Step 2: Calculate and document the temperature difference (TD), defined as the difference 
between the dry bulb temperature and the refrigeration system saturated condensing 
temperature (SCT). 
Document current head pressure control setpoint. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -63 
Step 3: Using the desired condenser fan motor cycling or head pressure control strategy, program 
into the control system a setpoint equal to the reading or calculation obtained in Step 2. 
This will be referred to as the “test setpoint.” Allow 5 minutes for condenser fan speed to 
normalize. 
Step 4: Using the control system, raise the test setpoint in 1 degree (or 3 psi) increments until the 
condenser fan control modulates to minimum fan motor speed. Verify and document the 
following: 
(a) Fan motor speed decreases. 
(b) All condenser fan motors serving common condenser loop decrease speed in unison in 
response to controller output. 
(c) Minimum fan motor control speed (rpm or percent of full speed). 
(d) If the refrigeration system is already operating at minimum saturated condensing 
temperature/head pressure, reverse Steps 4 and 5. 
Step 5: Using the control system, lower the test setpoint in 1 degree (or 3 psi) increments until 
the condenser fan control modulates to increase fan motor speed. Verify and document 
the following: 
(a) Fan motor speed increases. 
(b) All condenser fan motors serving common condenser loop increase speed in unison in 
response to controller output. 
Step 6: Document current minimum condensing temperature setpoint. Using the control system 
change the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to a value greater than the 
current operating condensing temperature. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Condenser fan controls modulate to decrease capacity. 
(b) All condenser fans serving common condenser loop modulate in unison. 
(c) Condenser fan controls stabilize within a 5 minute period. 
Step 7: Using the control system, reset the system head pressure controls, fan motor controls 
and minimum condensing temperature control setpoint to original settings documented 
in Steps 32 and 6. 
Step 8: Restore any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality. Reset the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to the value 
documented in Step 6. 
NA7.10.3.3 Adiabatic Condensers and Condenser Fan Motor Variable Speed Control 
Conduct and document the following functional tests on all adiabatic condensers. 
NA7.10.3.3.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, document the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -64 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) Verify the control system minimum Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) setpoint is 
at or below 70°F. 
(b) Verify the control system maximum SCT setpoint (if used) is at or near the system design 
SCT. 
(c) Verify accuracy of refrigerant pressure -temperature conversions and consistent use of 
either temperature or pressure for the controlled variable setpoint in the control system. 
(d) Verify the discharge pressure sensor (or condenser pressure if used) reads accurately, 
using a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable reference 
pressure gauge or meter. At the minimum, the discharge pressure sensor accuracy shall 
be verified at two different pressures within the typical operating range. Calibrate if 
needed. Replace if outside manufacturer ’s recommended calibration range. 
(e) Verify the ambient dry bulb temperature using a NIST traceable instrument, including 
verification of at least two different ambient readings. Calibrate if needed. Replace if 
outside manufacturer’s recommended calibration range. 
(f) Verify all ambient dry bulb temperature sensors are not mounted in direct sunlight or is 
provided within a suitable solar shield. 
(g) Verify that all sensor readings used by the condenser controller convert or calculate to the 
correct conversion units and are displayed at the controller (e.g., observed pressure 
reading is correctly converted to appropriate saturated temperature, etc.) 
(h) Verify that all fan motors are operational and rotating in the correct direction. 
(i) Verify that all condenser fan speed controls operate automatically in response to changes 
in both pressure (SCT) and ambient temperature. 
NA7.10.3.3.2 Functional Testing 
Note: The system cooling load must be sufficiently high, and ambient conditions sufficiently 
below design, to operate with all condenser fans in operation and observe controls in average 
conditions. Be cognizant of weather conditions in scheduling testing and, if necessary and 
possible, arrange to artificially increase or decrease evaporator loads in order to perform the 
Functional Testing at typical system conditions. The functional test shall be performed in dry 
mode. 
Step 1: Verify mechanical controls and other strategies will not affect tests. 
(a) Verify condenser pressure low -limit holdback and/or bypass regulating valves, if any, are 
set below the minimum SCT setpoint. Condenser pressure controls valves will cause fans 
to operate at 100% speed if they are not set below the minimum SCT value. In wa rm 
weather, this may require setting out of range, and deferring valve settings until cold 
weather allows valves to be adjusted. 
(b) Turn off any heat reclaim controls and any intermittent defrost pressure offset strategies 
that would affect condenser setpoint control. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
  
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -65 
(c) Document adiabatic mode switching setpoints, if necessary for test temporarily change 
the adiabatic mode setpoint such that the condenser operates in dry mode. Verify that 
the adiabatic pads are completely dry before beginning tests. 
Step 2: Operate in control range and verify 
(a) Verify the condenser control value is operating in the variable setpoint control 
range, i.e. , above the minimum SCT setpoint and below the maximum SCT 
setpoint. 
i. If necessary, increase or decrease the system load. 
ii. If necessary, during low load or low ambient conditions with system 
observed at the minimum SCT, temporarily adjust the minimum SCT to a 
lower value, if the refrigeration system design will allow, or increase the 
control TD to result in a higher control value. 
(b) Observe control operation for at least 30 minutes to confirm stable control 
operation, as shown by condenser fan speed varying as compressor capacity 
changes, and not ranging from maximum to minimum fan speed or constant 
“hunting”. If required, adjust cont rol response setpoints to achieve stable 
operation. Since condenser control settings require fine -tuning over time, this is 
often accomplished using control system history or visual trends, showing one 
hourly and daily operation. 
Step 3: Identify control Temperature Difference 
(a) Record the current outdoor ambient air dry bulb and refrigeration system 
condensing temperature/condensing pressure readings from the control system. 
Note whether discharge pressure or a dedicated condenser pressure sensor is 
used for condenser pressure co ntrol. 
(b) Document current head pressure control setpoints, including the Temperature 
Difference (TD) setpoint. 
(c) Calculate and record the actual observed TD, defined as the difference between 
the dry bulb temperature and the refrigeration system SCT. 
(d) Confirm agreement between the current control system TD setpoint and the 
observed TD. If values are different, address and correct controls system methods. 
Step 4: Test adjusted control Temperature Difference (Setpoint1). 
(a) Enter a smaller TD value into the control system sufficient enough to cause an 
observable response, such as 1 to 2 degrees smaller, but not small enough to cause 
the system to operate continuously at 100% fan speed. Record this value as TD Test 
Setpoint 1. 
(b) Observe change in control system operation which should include an increase in fan 
speed and a decrease in condensing temperature. 
(c) Allow time for the control system to achieve stable operation. 
(d) Document current head pressure control setpoints, including the TD setpoint. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -66 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(e) Calculate and record the actual observed TD, defined as the difference between the 
wet bulb temperature and the refrigeration system SCT. 
(f) Confirm agreement between the current control system TD setpoint and the observed 
TD. If values are different, address and correct control system methods. 
Step 5: Test adjusted control Temperature Difference (Setpoint2) Enter a TD value into the 
control system that is different from TD Test Setpoint1, sufficient enough to cause an 
observable response. Record this value a TD Test Setpoint2. 
(a) Observe change in control system operation which should include an increase in fan 
speed and a decrease in condensing temperature. 
(b) Allow time for the control system to achieve stable operation. 
(c) Record the current outdoor ambient dry bulb temperature. 
(d) Record the current refrigeration system condensing temperature/condensing pressure 
readings from the control system. 
(e) Document current head pressure control setpoints, including the TD setpoint. 
(f) Calculate and record the actual observed TD, defined as the difference between the 
dry bulb temperature and the refrigeration system SCT. 
(g) Confirm agreement between the current control system TD setpo int and the observed 
TD. If values are different, address and correct control system methods. 
Step 6: Document current minimum condensing temperature setpoint. Using the control system 
change the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to a value greater than the 
current operating condensing temperature. Verify and document the following: 
(a) Condenser fan controls modulate to decrease capacity. 
(b) All condenser fans serving common condenser loop modulate in unison. 
(c) Condenser fan controls stabilize within a 5 minute period. 
Step 7: Using the control system, reset the system head pressure controls, fan motor controls 
and minimum condensing temperature control setpoint to original settings documented 
in Steps 3 and 6. 
Step 8: Restore any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality. Reset the minimum condensing temperature setpoint to the value 
documented in Step 6. 
NA7.10.4 Variable Speed Screw Compressors 
Conduct and document the following functional tests on all variable -speed screw compressors. 
NA7.10.4.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, document the following: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
 
   
   
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -67 
(a) Verify all single open -drive screw compressors dedicated to a suction group have variable 
speed control. 
(b) Verify all compressor suction and discharge pressure sensors read accurately (or provide 
an appropriate offset) using a standard. 
(c) Verify all input or control temperature sensors used by controller read accurately (or 
provide an appropriate offset) using temperature standard. 
(d) Verify that all sensor readings used by the compressor controller convert or calculate to 
the correct conversion units at the controller (e.g., saturated pressure reading is correctly 
converted to appropriate saturated temperature, etc.). 
(e) Verify that all compressor speed controls are operational and connected to compressor 
motors. 
(f) Verify that all speed controls are in “auto” mode. 
(g) Verify that compressor panel control readings for “RPMs,” “% speed,” “kW”, and “amps” 
match the readings from the PLC or other control systems. 
(h) Verify that compressor nameplate data is correctly entered into the PLC or other control 
system. 
NA7.10.4.2 Functional Testing 
Note: The system cooling load must be sufficiently high to run the test. Artificially increase or 
decrease evaporator loads (add or shut off zone loads, change setpoints, etc.) as may be required 
to perform the Functional Testing. 
Step 1: Override any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality before performing functional tests. 
Step 2: Measure and document the current compressor operating suction pressure and saturated 
suction temperature. 
Step 3: Document the suction pressure/saturated suction temperature setpoint. Program into the 
control system a target setpoint equal to the current operating condition measured in 
Step 2. Allow 5 minutes for system to normalize. This will be referred to a s the “test 
suction pressure/saturated suction temperature setpoint.” 
Step 4: Using the control system, raise the test suction setpoint in 1 psi increments until the 
compressor controller modulates to decrease compressor speed. Verify and document 
the following: 
(a) Compressor speed decreases. 
(b) Compressor speed continues to decrease to minimum speed. 
(c) Any slide valve or other unloading means does not unload until after the compressor has 
reached its minimum speed (RPM). 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
 
   
   
 
 
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -68 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 5: Using the control system, lower the test suction setpoint in 1 psi increments until the 
compressor controller modulates to increase compressor speed. Verify and document the 
following: 
(d) Any slide valve or other unloading means first goes to 100 percent before compressor 
speed increases from minimum. 
(e) Compressor begins to increase speed. 
(f) Compressor speed continues to increase to 100 percent. 
Step 6: Using the control system, program the suction target setpoints back to original settings as 
documented in Step 3. 
Step 7: Restore any heat reclaim, floating suction pressure, floating head pressure and defrost 
functionality. 
Commercial Kitchen Exhaust System Acceptance Tests 
NA7.11.1 Kitchen Exhaust Systems with Type I Hood Systems 
The following acceptance tests apply to commercial kitchen exhaust systems with Type I exhaust 
hoods. All Type I exhaust hoods used in commercial kitchens shall be tested. 
NA7.11.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Step 1: Verify exhaust and replacement air systems are installed, power is installed and control 
systems such as demand control ventilation are calibrated. 
Step 2: For kitchen/dining facilities having total Type 1 and Type II kitchen hood exhaust airflow 
rates greater than 5,000 cfm, calculate the maximum allowable exhaust rate for each 
Type 1 hood as specified by Table 140.9 -ATable 140.9 -C. 
NA7.11.1.2 Functional Testing at Full Load Conditions 
The following acceptance test applies to systems with and without demand control ventilation 
exhaust systems.  These tests shall be conducted at full load conditions. 
Step 1: Operate all sources of outdoor air providing replacement air for the hoods. 
Step 2: Operate all sources of recirculated air providing conditioning for the space in which the 
hoods are located. 
Step 3: Operate all appliances under the hoods at operating temperatures. 
Step 4: Verify that the thermal plume and smoke is completely captured and contained within 
each hood at full load conditions by observing smoke or steam produced by actual 
cooking operation and/or by visually seeding the thermal plume using devices such a s 
smoke candles or smoke puffers. Smoke bombs shall not be used (note: smoke bombs 
typically create a large volume of effluent from a point source and do not necessarily 
confirm whether the cooking effluent is being captured). For some appliances (e.g., 
broilers, griddles, fryers), actual cooking at the normal production rate is a reliable 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
   
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
   2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -69 
method of generating smoke). Other appliances that typically generate hot moist air 
without smoke (e.g., ovens, steamers) need seeding of the thermal plume with artificial 
smoke to verify capture and containment. 
Step 5: Verify that space pressurization is appropriate (e.g. , kitchen is slightly negative relative to 
adjacent spaces and all doors open/close properly). 
Step 6: Verify that each Type 1 hood has an exhaust rate that is below the maximum allowed. 
Step 7: Make adjustments as necessary until full capture and containment and adequate space 
pressurization are achieved and maximum allowable exhaust rates are not exceeded. 
Adjustments may include: 
(a) Adjust exhaust hood airflow rates. 
(b) Add hood side panels. 
(c) Add rear seal (back plate). 
(d) Increase hood overhang by pushing equipment back. 
(e) Relocate supply outlets to improve the capture and containment performance. 
Step 8: Measure and record final exhaust airflow rate per Type 1 hood. 
NA7.11.1.3 Functional Testing for Exhaust Systems with Demand Control Ventilation 
The following additional acceptance test shall be performed on all exhaust hoods with demand 
control ventilation exhaust systems. 
Step 1: Turn off all kitchen hoods, makeup air and transfer systems. 
Step 2: Turn on one of the appliances on the line and bring to operating temperature. Confirm 
that: 
(a) DCV system automatically switches from off to the minimum flow setpoint. 
(b) The minimum flow setpoint does not exceed the larger of: 
1. 50% of the design flow, or 
2. The ventilation rate required as specified by Section 120.1. 
(c) The makeup air and transfer air system flow rates modulate as appropriate to match the 
exhaust rate. 
(d) Appropriate space pressurization is maintained. 
Step 3: Press the timed override button. Confirm that system ramps to full speed and back to 
minimum speed after override times out. 
Step 4: Operate all appliances at typical conditions. Apply sample cooking products and/or utilize 
smoke puffers as appropriate to simulate full load conditions. Confirm that: 
(e) DCV system automatically ramps to full speed. 
(f) Hood maintains full capture and containment during ramping to and at full -speed. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
   
 
   
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
  
   
 Appendix NA7 -70 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(g) Appropriate space pressurization is maintained. 
Parking Garage Ventilation System Acceptance Tests 
NA7.12.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following tests prior to the functional testing: 
(a) Carbon monoxide control sensor is factory -calibrated as specified by Section 120.6(c). 
(b) The sensor is located in the highest expected concentration location in its zone as 
specified by Section 120.6(c). 
(c) Control setpoint is at or below the CO concentration permitted by Section 120.6(c). 
NA7.12.2 Functional Testing 
Conduct the following tests with garage ventilation system operating in occupied mode and with 
actual garage CO concentration well below setpoint. 
Step 1: With all sensors active and all sensors reading below 25 ppm, observe that fans are at 
minimum speed and fan motor demand is no more than 30 percent of design wattage. 
Step 2: Apply CO span gas with a concentration of 30 ppm, and a concentration accuracy of +/ -
2%, one by one to 50% of the sensors but no more than 10 sensors per garage and to at 
least one sensor per proximity zone. For each sensor tested observe: 
(a) CO reading is between 25 and 35 ppm. 
(b) Ventilation system ramps to full speed when span gas is applied. 
(c) Ventilation system ramps to minimum speed when span gas is removed. 
Step 3: Temporarily override the programmed sensor calibration/replacement period to 5 
minutes. 
(d) Wait 5 minutes and observe that fans ramp to full speed and an alarm is received by the 
facility operators. Restore calibration/replacement period. 
Step 4: Temporarily place the system in unoccupied mode and override the programmed 
unoccupied sensor alarm differential from 30% for 4 hours to 1% for 5 minutes. Wait 5 
minutes and observe that fans ramp to full speed and an alarm is received by the facil ity 
operators. Restore programming. 
Step 5: Temporarily override the programmed occupied sensor proximity zone alarm differential 
from 30% for 4 hours to 1% for 5 minutes. Wait 5 minutes and observe that fans ramp to 
full speed and an alarm is received by the facility operators. Restore prog ramming. 
Com pressed Air System Acceptance Tests 
NA7.13.1 Compressed Air Control System 
Acceptance tests for compressed air controls in accordance with Section 120.6(e)2. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
   
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -71 
NA7.13.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing : 
(a) Size (hp), rated capacity (acfm), and control type of each air compressor. 
(b) Total system capacity (the sum of the individual capacities). 
(c) System operating pressure. 
(d) Compressor(s) designated as trim compressors. 
(e) Method for observing and recording the states of each compressor in the system, which 
shall include at least the following states: 
Off 
Unloaded 
Partially loaded 
Fully loaded 
Short cycling (loading and unloading more often than once per minute) 
Blow off (venting compressed air at the compressor itself) 
NA7.13.1.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: As specified by the test methods outlined in the Construction Inspection, verify that these 
methods have been employed, so that the states of the compressors and the current air 
demand (as measured by a flow sensor or otherwise inferred by system m easurements) 
can be observed and recorded during testing. 
Step 2:  Run the compressed air supply system steadily at as close to the expected operational 
load range as can be practically implemented, for a duration of at least 10 minutes. 
Step 3:  Observe and record the states of each compressor and the current air demand during the 
test. 
Step 4:  Confirm that the combinations of compressors states meet the following criteria: 
(a) No compressor exhibits short -cycling (loading and unloading more often than once per 
minute). 
(b) No compressor exhibits blowoff (venting compressed air at the compressor itself). 
(c) For new systems, the trim compressors shall be the only compressors partially loaded, 
while the base compressors will either be fully loaded or off by the end of the test. 
NA7.13.2 Compressed Air Monitoring 
Acceptance tests for compressed air monitoring installed in accordance with Section 120.6(e)3. 
NA7.13.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following monitoring system capabilities prior to functional testing: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
  
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
   
 
  
 
   
  
 
 
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
 Appendix NA7 -72 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) Measurement of header or compressor discharge pressure. 
(b) Measurement of amps or power of each compressor. 
(c) Measurement or determination of airflow in cfm. 
(d) Data logging of pressure, power, airflow, and calculated compressed air system specific 
efficiency in kW/100 cfm at intervals of 5 minutes or less. 
(e) Maintained data storage. 
(f) Visual trending display of each recorded point, load, and specific efficiency. 
NA7.13.2.2 Functional Testing 
Verify and document the following monitoring system capabilities: 
(a) Data observed during test is being recorded to a log file that can be opened and viewed 
to see trend of airflow, power, and specific efficiency in at least 5 minute intervals. 
(d) Airflow and compressor power data vary with loading and unloading of the compressor 
within typical performance expectations. Measurements should be observed across 
various loading, whether manually varied in response to actual operational loads. 
Elevator Lighting and Ventilation Controls 
NA7.14.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing: 
a) The occupancy sensor has been located to minimize false signals, and the elevator cab 
does not have any obstructions that could adversely affect the sensor’s performance. 
b) For PIR sensors, the sensor pattern does not enter into the elevator lobby. 
c) For ultrasonic sensors, the sensor does not emit audible sound. 
Note that some elevators are able to use weight sensors to provide occupancy sensing. In this 
case, document that the elevator uses weight sensing to provide occupant sensing and proceed 
to the functional test. 
NA7.14.2 Functional Testing 
For each elevator cab being tested, confirm the following: 
a) Verify that the lighting and ventilation controlled inside the elevator cab turn off after 15 
minutes from the start of an unoccupied condition. 
b) Verify that the signal sensitivity is adequate to achieve desired control. The sensor should 
not detect motion in the elevator lobby. 
c) Verify that lighting and ventilation immediately turn "on" when an unoccupied condition 
becomes occupied. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
   
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -73 
d) Verify that the lighting and ventilation will not shut off when occupied.  Stand in the 
elevator with the door closed and wait 15 minutes to confirm that the lighting and 
ventilation remain on. 
Escalator and Moving Walkway Speed Control 
NA7.15.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing: 
a) Variable speed drive is installed on the escalator. 
b) Occupancy sensor has been located to minimize false signals. 
c) Occupancy sensors do not trigger from pedestrians on adjacent escalators. 
d) Occupancy sensors do not encounter any obstructions that could adversely affect desired 
performance. 
e) Ultrasonic occupancy sensors do not emit audible sound . 
NA7.15.2 Functional Testing 
For each escalator or moving walkway being tested, confirm the following: 
a) Verify the amount of time necessary to ride the entire length of the escalator while 
standing still. 
b) Stand away from the escalator.  After being in an unoccupied condition for more than 
three times the length of time for a full ride, the escalator should slow down. 
c) Approach the escalator entrance while in an unoccupied condition from multiple angles to 
ensure passenger detection cannot be bypassed. 
d) Verify the slow speed setting is 10 ft/min. 
e) Verify the full speed setting is below 100 ft/min. 
f) Verify the acceleration and deceleration of speed changes.  The acceleration shall not 
exceed 1 ft/sec sq. 
g) Approach the escalator in an unoccupied condition at an average walking pace.  The 
escalator should reach full speed before boarding. 
h) Approach the escalator in an unoccupied condition at an average walking pace in the 
wrong direction . The escalator should reach full speed before boarding.  An alarm should 
signal to alert that the pedestrian is approaching in the wrong direction. 
Lab Exhaust Ventilation System Acceptance Test 
NA7.16.1 Construction Inspection for VAV Lab Exhaust System with Occupancy Control 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
  
    
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
  
      
 
 
   
 
  
 
    
 
 
 
 
   
 
  
 
  
  Appendix NA7 -74 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(a) Test and balance report confirms correspondence between design values on plans and 
specification and measure values to within 10%: 
1. Area and volume of each lab space. 
2. Design airflow rate of lab space, (cfm) . 
3. Occupied minimum airflow rate of each lab space, (cfm) . 
4. Unoccupied minimum airflow rate of each lab spaced, (cfm) . 
5. Design inlet airflow rate o exhaust fan system, (cfm ). 
6. Power of exhaust fan system at design conditions, (watts). 
7. Calculate wats/cfm at design conditions. Item (a )6 divided by item (a)5. 
(b) Listing of fume hoods design airflow rate by VAV (variable air volume) vs CV (constant 
volume) by space. When the total design airflow rate of fume hoods is greater than the 
unoccupied minimum airflow rate of the space, all fume hoods in the space shall be VAV. 
(c) Pressure independent flow control valves are used. 
(d) Document whether system has air filtration, scrubbers, or other air treatment devices. 
(e) Document fan power requirements described in (e)1 through (e)3 based on type of fan 
control used: none, simple turndown, wind responsive, contaminant monitoring. 
1. If control is “none,” and system has one of the filtration methods in item (d), 
water /cfm in item (a)7 shall be no greater than 0.85 watts/cfm of exhaust fan system 
airflow . Alternatively, the rated fan power does not surpass fan kW budget as calculated 
per Section 140.4(c)1A . 
2. If control is “none,” and system does not have one of the filtration methods in item 
(d), watts/cfm in item (a)7 shall be no greater than 0.65 watts/cfm of exhaust fan 
system . Alternatively, the fan power does not surpass fan kW budget as calculated per 
Section 140.4(c)1A. 
NA7.16.2 3. If control is “simple turndown,” “wind responsive,” or “contaminant 
monitoring,” exhaust fan system watts per cfm in item (a)7 shall be no greater than 
1.3 watts per cfm of exhaust fan system airflow, and fan system shall comply with the 
applicable accepta nce testing requirements in Nonresidential Reference Appendices 
NA 7.16. 3 through NA 7.16.8. 
NA7.16.3 NA7.16.2 Functional Testing for VAV Lab Exhaust System with Occupancy Controls 
If control signals have been calibrated to measure flow rates and power consumption, recorded 
control signals are acceptable methods of measurement. 
Step 1: Simulate design conditions by opening all fume hood sashes and other exhaust devices 
such as snorkels to their design open position and occupy all lab spaces served by the 
exhaust fan system. 
(a) Verify that the occupant sensors can detect occu pants in all portions of the spaces and 
are reporting occupied occupancy status to controller. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
      
   
   
   
 
  
 
 
   
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
  
   
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
   
 
    
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -75 
(b) Verify that the inlet airflow rate of the exhaust fans meets the design flowrate. 
(c) Verify fan power under design conditions. 
(d) Measured power under design conditions shall be no greater than the design fan power. 
Step 2: Simulate minimum flowrate under occupied conditions by adjusting fume hoods and 
other exhaust devices . Adjust the thermostatic control so that the space temperature is 
within the dead band. 
(a) Verify that the occupant sensors can detect occupants in all portions of the spaces and 
are reporting occupied occupancy status to controller. 
(b) Verify that the total exhaust airflow rate of each space meets the minimum allowed 
occupied airflow rate . 
(c) Verify fan power under design conditions. 
(d) Measure d power under minimum flo wrate occupied condi tions [Step 2(c) ] shall be no 
greater than measured power under design conditions [Step 1(c)]. 
Step 3: Simulate minimum flowrate under unoccupied conditions by adjusting fume hoods and 
other exhaust devices and vacate all lab spaces served by the exhaust fan system for at 
least 20 minutes so occupant control trea ts lab spaces as unoccupied. Adjust the 
thermostatic control so that the space temperature is within the dead band. 
(a) Verify that the occupant sensors are reporting unoccupied occupancy status to controller. 
(b) Verify that the total exhaust airflow rate of each space meets the minimum allowed 
unoccupied flowrate. 
(c) Verify fan power under minimum flowrate occupied conditions. 
(d) Measured power under minimum flowrate unoccupied conditions [Step 3(c)] shall be no 
greater than measured power under minimum flowrate occupied conditions [Step 2(c)]. 
NA7.16.4 NA7.16.3 Construction Inspection for Simple Turndown Control 
Requirements for simple turndown control are required in addition to requirements for VAV lab 
exhaust system with occupancy controls in NA7.16. 1 and NA7.16.2 if the builder uses simple 
turndown controls to meet fan system power consumption requirements . 
(a) Confirm that design values on plans and specifications and measured values are within 
10%: 
1. Design inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system (cfm). 
2. Power of exhaust fan system at design conditions ( watts). 
3. Inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable 
airflow rate (cfm). 
4. Power of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable airflow rate 
(watts ). 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
      
  
 
 
  
     
  
 
  
   
  
  
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -76 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
5. Power of exhaust fan system at 60% of design exhaust fan system airflow rate 
(watts). 
6. Calculate watts/cfm at maximum design conditions, Item (a)2 divided by item 
(a)1. 
(b) Measured occupied minimum acceptable exhaust fan system inlet airflow rate [item (a)3] 
is no greater than 60% of measured design exhaust fan system airflow rate [item(a)1]. 
(c) Measured exhaust fan system power at 60% of design fan system airflow rate [item (a) 5] 
is no greater than 40% of measured exhaust fan system power at design exhaust fan 
system airflow rate [item (a)2]. 
NA7.16.5 NA7.16.4 Functional Testing for Simple Turndown Control 
If control signals have been calibrated to measured flow rate s and power consumption, recorded 
control signals are acceptable methods of measurement. 
Step 1: Simulate design conditions. Adjust the thermostatic control so that the space 
temperature is within the dead band . 
(a) Verify that the occupant sensors can detect occupants in all portions of the spaces and 
are reporting occupied occupancy status to controller. 
(b) Verify that the exhaust fan system inlet airflow rate (cfm) meets the design airflow rate. 
(c) Record fan system power (watts). 
Step 2: Simulate turndown airflow rate . Adjust the thermostatic control so that the space 
temperature is within the dead band. 
(a) Record exhaust fan system inlet airflow rate (cfm). 
(b) Confirm that the airflow rate entering fan system for turndown airflow rate [Step 2(b)] is 
no greater than 60% of the exhaust fan system design airflow rate [ Step 1(b)]. 
Step 3: Simulate 60% of design airflow rate. Adjust thermostatic control so that the space 
temperature is within the dead band. 
(c)(a) Record fan system power (watts). 
(b) Confirm that the f an system power under 60% design airflow rate [Step 3(a)] is no greater 
than 40% of the exhaust fan system design airflow rate [Step 1(c)]. 
NA7.16.6 
NA7.16.7 NA7.16.5 Construction Inspection for Wind Speed/Direction Responsive Control 
Requirements for wind speed/direction responsive control are required in addition to 
requirements for VAV lab exhaust system with occupancy controls in NA7.16.1 and NA7.16.2 if 
the builder uses wind speed/direction responsive controls to meet fan system po wer 
consumption requirements. 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing: 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -77 
(a) Wind speed and direction sensor is factory -calibrated (with calibration certificate) or field 
calibrated, as specified by Section 140.9(c)3C. 
(b) The sensor is located in a location and at a height that is outside the wake region of 
nearby structures and experiences similar wind conditions to the free stream 
environment above the exhaust stacks as specified by Section 140.9(c)3C. 
(c) The sensor is installed in close proximity to the fan that it will control so that it captures a 
representative wind speed/direction reading. 
(d) The sensor is wired correctly to the controls to ensure proper control of volume flow rate. 
(e) Wind speed/direction look -up table has been established and matches dispersion analysis 
results. 
(f) Verify the methodology to measure volume flow rate: 
1. Airflow sensor. 
2. Static pressure as proxy. 
3. Fan speed to volume flow rate curve. 
4. Other. 
(d)(g) Confirm that design values on plans and specifications and measured values are 
within 10%: 
7.1. Design inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system (cfm). 
8.2. Power of exhaust fan system at design conditions (watts). 
9.3. Inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable 
airflow rate (cfm). 
10.4. Power of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable airflow rate 
(watts). 
11.5. Power of exhaust fan system at 60% of design exhaust fan system airflow rate 
(watts). 
12.6. Calculate watts/cfm at maximum design conditions, Item ( g)2 divided by item 
(g)1. 
(e)(h) Measured occupied minimum acceptable exhaust fan system inlet airflow rate 
[item ( g)3] is no greater than 60% of measured design exhaust fan system airflow rate 
[item( g)1]. 
(f)(i) Measured exhaust fan system power at 60% of design fan system airflow rate 
[item ( g)5] is no greater than 40% of measured exhaust fan system power at design 
exhaust fan system airflow rate [item ( g)2]. 
5. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
  
 
 
  
   
  
  
 
 
 
 
   
    
   
    
  
 
  
 
   
    
   
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 Appendix NA7 -78 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
NA7.16.8 NA7.16.6 Functional Testing for Wind Speed/Direction Responsive Control 
Step 1: Simulate design conditions . Simulate the minimum look -up table wind speed by either 
covering the sensor or overriding the curve points so the current wind speed is below the 
speed correlating to minimum volume flow rate at the stack. 
(a) With all sensors active and all sensors reading below the minimum wind speed, observe 
Record minimum volume airflow rate at the stack (cfm) . 
(b) Record airflow rate entering the exhaust fan system (cfm). 
(c) Record exhaust fan system power at maximum wind speed (watts). 
(d) Restore all curve points. 
Step 2: Simulate the minimum occupied airflow rate by inducing a wind speed or overriding curve 
points . Simulate a mid -range wind speed from the look -up table by either inducing a wind 
current, with an air speed accuracy of +/ -2%, or overriding the curve points so the current 
wind speed correlates to a mid -range volume flow rate at the stack. 
(a) With all sensors active and all sensors reading a mid -range wind speed, observe Record 
corresponding mid -range volume airflow rate at the stack (cfm) . 
(b) Record airflow rate entering the exhau st fan system (cfm). 
(c) Confirm that the airflow rate entering fan system airflow rate at minimum occupied 
conditions [Step 2(b)] is no greater than 60% of the exhaust fan system design airflow rate 
[Step 1(b)]. 
(d) Step 3: Simulate the 60% of design airflow rate by inducing wind speed or overriding 
curve points . 
(e)(a) Record exhaust fan system power at 60% design airflow rate (watts). 
(f)(b) Confirm that the fan system power at 60% design airflow rate [Step 3(a)] is no 
greater than 40% of the exhaust fan system airflow rate at maximum wind speed [Step 
1(c)]. 
(g)(c) Restore all curve points. 
Step 3: Simulate the maximum look -up table wind speed by either inducing a wind current, with 
an air speed accuracy of +/ -2%, or overriding the curve points so the current wind speed 
correlates to the maximum volume flow rate at the stack. 
(a) With all sensors active and all sensors reading above the maximum wind speed, observe 
maximum volume flow rate at the stack. 
(b) Restore all curve points. 
Step 4: Temporarily override the programmed sensor calibration/replacement period to 5 
minutes. Wait 5 minutes and observe that minimum volume flow rate at the stack is that 
at worst -case wind conditions and an alarm is received by the facility operators. Restore 
calibration/replacement period. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
    
       
 
   
 
 
 
  
   
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -79 
Step 5: Simulate sensor failure by disconnecting the sensor. Observe that minimum volume flow 
rate at the stack is that at worst -case wind conditions and an alarm is received by the 
facility operators. Reconnect sensor. 
NA7.16.9 NA7.16.7 Construction Inspection for Monitored Contaminant Control 
Requirements for monitored contaminant control are required in addition to requirements for 
VAV lab exhaust system with occupancy controls in NA7.16.1 and NA7.16.2 if the builder uses 
monitored contaminant controls to meet fan system power consumption requirements. 
Verify and document the following tests prior to functional testing: 
(a) Contaminant sensor is factory -calibrated (with calibration certificate) or field calibrated, 
as specified by Section 140.9(c)3D. 
(b) The sensor is located within each exhaust plenum as specified by Section 140.9(c)3D. 
(c) The sensor is wired correctly to the controls to ensure proper control of volume flow rate. 
(d) Contaminant concentration threshold has been established and matches dispersion 
analysis results. 
(e) Verify the methodology to measure volume flow rate: 
1. Airflow sensor 
2. Static pressure as proxy 
3. Fan speed to volume flow rate curve 
4. Other 
(f) If multiple sensors are present, ensure fan is controlled based on the highest 
concentration reading. 
(g) Confirm that design values on plans and specifications and measured values are within 
10%: 
13.1. Design inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system (cfm). 
14.2. Power of exhaust fan system at design conditions (watts). 
15.3. Inlet airflow rate of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable 
airflow rate (cfm). 
16.4. Power of exhaust fan system at occupied minimum acceptable airflow rate 
(watts). 
17.5. Power of exhaust fan system at 60% of design exhaust fan system airflow rate 
(watts). 
18.6. Calculate watts/cfm at maximum design conditions, Item ( g)2 divided by item 
(g)1. 
(h) Measured occupied minimum acceptable exhaust fan system inlet airflow rate [item ( g)3] 
is no greater than 60% of measured design exhaust fan system airflow rate [item( g)1]. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
  
     
  
 
  
   
   
   
 
  
 
  
   
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -80 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(i) Measured exhaust fan system power at 60% of design fan system airflow rate [item ( g)5] 
is no greater than 40% of measured exhaust fan system power at design exhaust fan 
system airflow rate [item ( g)2]. 
(g) 
NA7.16.10 NA7.16.8 Functional Testing Ffor Monitored Contaminant Control 
Step 1: Ensure no contaminant event is present. Simulate minimum exhaust air demand in all lab 
spaces design conditions . 
(a) Verify that the volume flow rate at the stack is at or above the minimum non -event value. 
(b) Record airflow rate at the stack (cfm). 
(c) Record airflow rate entering the exhaust fan system (cfm). 
(d) Record exhaust fan system power at design conditions (watts). 
Step 2: Increase exhaust air demand at the lab spaces Simulate a contaminant event . 
(a) Verify that the volume flow rate at the stack is at or above the minimum non -event value. 
Step 3: Simulate the minimum occupied airflow rate exhaust air demand in all lab spaces. 
Simulate a contaminant event . 
(a) Record airflow rate at the stack (cfm). 
(b) Record airflow rate entering the exhaust fan system (cfm). 
(c) Confirm that the airflow rate entering fan system airflow rate at minimum occupied 
conditions [Step 3(b)] is no greater than 60% of the exhaust fan system design airflow rate 
[Step 1( c)]. 
(d) Verify that the volume flow rate at the stack is at or above the minimum event value. 
Step 4: Simulate the 60% of design airflow rate. 
(a) Record exhaust fan system power at 60% design airflow rate (watts). 
(b) Confirm that the fan system power at 60% design airflow rate [Step 4(a)] is no greater 
than 40% of the exhaust fan system airflow rate at maximum wind speed [Step 1( d)]. 
Increase exhaust air demand at the lab spaces. 
Verify that the volume flow rate at the stack is at or above the minimum event value. 
Step 5: Temporarily override the programmed sensor calibration/replacement period to 5 
minutes. Wait 5 minutes and observe that minimum volume flow rate at the stack is that 
of a contaminant event and an alarm is received by the facility operators. Restore 
calibration/replacement period. 
Step 6: Simulate sensor failure by disconnecting the sensor. Observe that minimum volume flow 
rate at the stack is that of a contaminant event and an alarm is received by the facility 
operators. Reconnect sensor. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
   
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
  
    
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -81 
Fume Hood Automatic Sash Closure System Acceptance Test 
NA7.17.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following prior to functional testing: 
a) The fume hood sash zone presence sensor has a valid factory calibration certificate. 
b) Each fume hood sash obstruction sensor has a valid factory calibration certificate. 
c) Presence sensor has been located and adjusted to minimize false signals. 
d) Presence sensor pattern does not enter adjacent zones. 
e) Sash obstruction sensor has been installed per manufacturer instructions. 
f) Presence sensor has been installed per manufacturer instructions. 
NA7.17.2 Functional Testing 
For each sash closure control system to be tested, perform the following: 
a) Test auto close operation . Verify and document the following: 
1. Open the sash to maximum position or sash stop, whichever is lower. 
2. Vacate zone presence sensor range to simulate unoccupied state and confirm that 
sash closes automatically to minimum, closed position within 5 minutes. 
3. Verify that the presence sensor does not trigger a false signal from movement in an 
area adjacent to the space containing the controlled sash. 
b) Confirm that the manual controls are operational. Verify and document the following: 
Open Test 
1. If equipped, disable any auto open control mode. 
2. Close sash to its minimum, closed position and confirm that it does not open 
automatically with triggering of the zone presence sensor. 
3. If equipped, open the sash using a push button, foot pedal, or similar mechanism, 
confirming that the sash raises to the maximum position or sash stop. Otherwise, 
manually open the sash by hand. 
Closed Test 
1. If equipped, press the button that closes the sash and ensure that the sash closes to 
the minimum, closed height. Otherwise , close by hand. 
2. If equipped, while the sash is closing, trigger the stop button, verify the sash stops 
immediately when the stop button is activated. 
c) Confirm that the sash object detection controls are operational. Verify and document the 
following: 
1. Open the sash to its maximum position or sash stop, whichever is lower. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
   
   
      
  
  
  
   
   
   
  
  
   
  
  
 
  Appendix NA7 -82 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
2. Place a transparent object in the pathway of the sash and simulate an unoccupied 
state by vacating the zone presence sensor range. Verify that the sash does not close 
automatically on the object within the closing time delay setting (maximum of 5 
minutes). 
3. Open the sash to its maximum position or sash stop, whichever is lower, without any 
obstructions in the path of the sash. 
4. Simulate an unoccupied state by vacating the zone presence sensor range. When the 
sash begins to automatically close, insert a transparent object into the path of the 
sash and verify that the sash stops before contacting the object. 
d) Confirm that net downward force is not more than 10 pounds when closing. Verify and 
document the following: 
1. Disable object detection controls. 
2. Place scale in sash opening of fume hood. 
3. Close sash manually. 
4. Sash closing force shall not exceed 10 pounds as measured by scale. 
5. Repeat test with sash closing initiated by vacancy being detected by presence sensor. 
Multifamily Building Acceptance Tests 
NA7.18.1 Dwelling Unit Ventilation System Acceptance 
NA7.18.1.1 Dwelling Unit Ventilation Acceptance 
NA7.18.1.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
a) System is designed to provide the required outside air when the unit is operating. 
b) Specify the ventilation system type, such as balanced, supply or exhaust. 
c) Specify the method of control. 
d) Confirm the kitchen range hood is ventilated to outside. 
e) Record the kitchen range hood manufacturer name and equipment model number . 
f) Confirm the kitchen range hood is HVI certified to perform in compliance . 
g) Confirm HRV or ERV equipment is HVI certified to perform in compliance . 
NA7.18.1.1.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Perform the required dwelling unit mechanical ventilation system verification procedure 
as specified by Reference Nonresidential Appendix NA2.2 to verify the dwelling unit 
ventilation systems conform s to the requirements of Section 160.2 (b)2. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
    
  
 
   
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
   
 
   
 
  
 
   
   
  
 
 
 
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -83 
Step 2: Obtain HERS Rater ECC-Rater field verification as specified in Reference Nonresidential 
Appendix NA1. 
NA7.18.2 Dwelling Unit Enclosure Leakage Acceptance 
NA7.18.2.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
a) Confirm the pressure boundary wall, ceiling, and floor penetrations are sealed. 
b) Confirm all gaps around windows and doors are sealed. 
c) Confirm all chases are sealed at floor level using a hard cover and the hard cover is sealed. 
NA7.18.2.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Perform the dwelling unit envelope air leakage procedure as specified by Reference 
Nonresidential Appendix NA2.3 to verify the dwelling unit ventilation airflow conforms to 
the requirements of Section 160.2 (b)2. 
Step 2: Obtain HERS Rater ECC-Rater field verification as specified in Reference Nonresidential 
Appendix NA1. 
NA7.18.3 Central Ventilation System Duct Leakage Acceptance 
The objective of this procedure is to verify the leakage of a new central ventilation duct system 
that serves multiple dwelling units and provides continuous airflows or is part of a balanced 
ventilation system. The duct leakage shall be determined by pres surizing the entire duct system 
ducts to 50 Pa (0.2 inches water) with respect to outside for ducts serving more than six dwelling 
units, and to 25 Pa (0.1 inches water) with respect to outside for ducts serving two to six dwelling 
units. The following pro cedure shall be used for the fan pressurization tests: 
Test procedure, based on ATSM 1554 Method D ASTM E1554/1554M -13 (2018) Method D – Total 
duct leakage test.  
NA7.18.3.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
a) Confirm windows and other openings are open to connect the building to the outside. 
b) Confirm HVAC dampers are in their normal operating positions (NOP). 
NA7.18.3.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Measure and record environmental data at the beginning and conclusion of each test 
including ambient temperature, indoor temperature and barometric pressure. 
Step 2: Install static pressure probe in main plenum pointing into airstream induced by the test. If 
the test fan is on the roof, the static pressure probe will need to be connected to the 
measurement device at the test site with a tube long enough to make the con nection. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
   
  
 
  
   
  
 
 
  
  
   
   
 
 
 
  Appendix NA7 -84 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 3: If the test fan is mounted inside, with the building open to the outside, use the building as 
reference pressure.  If the test fan is located on the roof, use the outside as the reference 
pressure. 
Step 4: Attach the test fan to the duct system : 
a) For roof top and wall mounted exhaust systems, remove the fan from the curb or 
opening and seal the test fan to the curb following test equipment manufacturer’s 
instructions, making sure the dampers are open (NOP). 
b) Alternatively, the test fan may be applied to a grille opening on the inside of the 
building following test equipment manufacturer’s instructions. 
Step 5: Temporarily seal the system including: 
a) All of the grilles on the system using masking tape and air impermeable sheeting or 
duck mask made for this application. 
b) Air handler access door or panel (do not use permanent sealing material, metal tape is 
acceptable). 
c) For systems with an air handler with supply and return plenums, the entire duct 
system including the air -handler shall be included in the test. 
Step 6: Adjust the test fan speed to maintain 25 Pa or 50 Pa at the static pressure probe location. 
Step 7: Record the air flow (CFM) and temperature. 
Step 8: Determine the nominal fan airflow using the product specifications of the installed 
equipment for the design static pressure. 
Step 9: Divide the duct leakage flow by the nominal fan flow and convert to a percentage. If the 
duct leakage flow percentage is equal to or less than the target compliance criterion of 6% 
leakage the system passes. 
The leakage test can be conducted at rough -in or after the grilles or registers are installed. If the 
leakage test is conduct at rough -in, the spaces between the grille or register boots and the 
wallboard shall be sealed, and at least one grille or registe r must be removed to verify proper 
sealing. 
For compliance with the leakage requirements in Section 160.2(b)2Ci , an ATT shall identify a 
group of up to three central ventilation duct systems in the building from which a sample will be 
selected for testin g. 
NA7.18.4 Rated Central Ventilation System Heat Recovery or Energy Recovery Acceptance 
The objective of this procedure is to verify the heat recovery ventilation (HRV) or energy recovery 
ventilation (ERV) requirement in multifamily buildings for compliance with Section 170.2(c)3B ivb, 
a central ERV/HRV serving multiple dwelling units . 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
  
    
  
     
  
        
  
    
  
   
 
  
  
 
  
 
  
     
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -85 
NA7.18.4.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
a) Confirm the total design ventilation airflow rate for the dwelling units served by the 
central ventilation system as required by Section 160.2(b)2A v. 
b) Visually c onfirm that an ERV/HRV is installed and record the make and model. 
NA7.18.4.2 Functional Testing 
Step 1: Verify that the ERV/HRV can provide the airflow rate that meet s the design ventilation 
airflow rate by checking its product specifications. 
Step 2: Verify that the ERV/HRV’s nominal sensible recovery efficiency is 67 percent or greater , by 
checking its product specifications or databases such as HVI, AHRI, etc . 
Step 3: Verify that the ERV/HRV can meet the fan power requirements of Section 170.2(c) , by 
checking its product specifications or databases such as HVI, AHRI, etc. 
Step 4: Verify that the ERV/HRV has a recovery bypass or free cooling function by visual 
inspection and checking its prod uct specifications. Verify that its recovery bypass or free 
cooling control capabilities meet the requirements in Section 170.2, Table 170 .2-G. 
Step 5: Conduct functional testing of the bypass function according to NA7.5.4 . 
Steam Trap Fault Detection Acceptance Tests 
NA7.19.1 Steam Trap Fault Detection 
Acceptance test s for steam trap fault detection in accordance with Section 120.6( i). 
NA7.19.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Verify and document the following steam trap system capabilities prior to functional testing: 
a) Distribution system steam trap arrangement and connected steam line operating pressure 
subject to 120.6( i) were installed as designed including the presence of monitoring 
equipment, strainer, and blow -off valve. 
b) Visual confirmation of the central steam trap monitoring system installation, operation 
and programmed as designed. 
c) Confirm the central steam trap monitoring system displays status of all installed steam 
trap sensors with a descriptive label or cross -references to a look -up table with location of 
sensor. 
NA7.19.1.2 Functional Testing 
For steam systems with up to seven (7) steam traps required to have fault detection in 
accordance with Section 120.6( i), all steam traps would be tested. For steam systems with more 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
     
  
  
 
   
 
  
 
   
    
  
 Appendix NA7 -86 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
than seven (7) steam traps; sampling would include a minimum of 1 steam trap for each group of 
up to 7 additional steam traps. If the first steam trap in the sample group passes the acceptance 
test, the remaining steam traps in the sample group also pass. If the first steam trap in a sample 
group fails, the rest of the steam traps in that group must be tested. If any tested steam trap fault 
detection sensor fails it must be repaired, replaced, or adjusted until it passes the test. 
For each fault detection sensor, test the following: 
Step 1: Identify the status of the steam trap and note if the steam line is operational or non -
operational at the time of the functional test. 
Step 2: Confirm that central steam trap monitoring system is receiving a signal that reflects the 
status of the steam trap. 
Step 3: Generate a fault at the steam trap sensor for each tested steam trap. 
Step 4: Verify that the central steam trap monitoring system detects the fault and reports the 
fault detection to the operator. 
Step 5: Reconnect steam trap sensor and verify the fault detection sensor is communicating with 
the central steam trap monitoring system. 
Step 6: Verify that central steam trap monitoring system does not report a fault. 
Transcritical CO 2 Systems Acceptance Tests 
NA7.20.1 Transcritical CO 2 Gas Cooler and Gas Cooler Fan Motor Variable Speed Control for 
Refrigerated Warehouses and Commercial Refrigeration 
The purpose of these tests is to confirm proper operation of gas cooler control, including 
variable speed fan operation and variable setpoint control logic, which are both important 
elements of floating head pressure control, with the intent to operate with the lowest total 
system energy (considering both compressors and gas cooler fan power) through the course of 
the year. 
Note : Transcritical CO 2 refrigeration systems are unique in that they can operate in one of two 
modes: subcritical operation and supercritical operation. Subcritical operation generally occurs 
during periods where ambient conditions are below 75F to 80F, where high pressure CO 2 vapor 
will condense in the gas cooler and the refrigeration system will operate analogous to other 
mechanical refrigeration systems (rejecting heat at a constant pressure and temperature) . 
Supercritical operation generally occurs dur ing periods where ambient conditions are above 75F 
to 80F, where the high pressure CO 2 vapor will not condense (or partially condense) in the gas 
cooler, and pressure and temperature can vary semi -independently during the heat rejection 
process. Because these two modes of operation are based on ambient conditions, it may not be 
possible fo r the field technician to observe both subcritical and supercritical control strategies 
during a single acceptance test. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
 
  
  
 
     
    
    
   
 
      
 
    
  
  
  
   
  
   
    
  
 
 
   
  
 
  
   
    
    2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -87 
The field technician shall perform either the functional test outlined in NA7.20.1.1.2 or 
NA7.20.1.1.3 depending on the ambient conditions and resulting system operating mode at the 
time of the test. The construction inspection must be completed regardless of ambient 
conditions. 
The following test methods are general in nature, with the understanding that refrigeration 
systems are commonly custom designed, with many design choices, as well as varying load 
profiles. For all of these reasons, a thorough understanding of both refrig eration system design 
and refrigeration control system operation is necessary to effectively conduct these tests. 
The measurement devices used to verify the refrigeration system controls shall be calibrated to 
a NIST traceable reference, with a calibration reference dated within the past two years. The 
calibrated measurement devices to be used in these acceptance test s are called the "standard" 
and shall have the following measurement tolerances: The temperature measurement devices 
shall be calibrated to +/ -0.7°F between -30°F and 200°F. The pressure measurement devices 
shall be calibrated to +/ -7.5 psi between 0 and 1500 psig. 
NA7.20.1.1 Air-Cooled and Adiabatic Gas Coolers and Gas Cooler Fan Motor Variable Speed 
Control 
Conduct and document the following functional tests on all air -cooled and adiabatic gas 
coolers. 
NA7.20.1.1.1 Construction Inspection 
Prior to functional testing, verify and document the following: 
(a) Verify the control system minimum saturated condensing temperature (SCT) setpoint is 
at or below 60°F. If the design saturated suction temperature (SST) of the intermediate 
suction group is greater than or equal to 30°F, verify the control system SCT setp oint is 
at or below 70°F. 
(b) Verify accuracy of refrigerant pressure -temperature conversions and consistent use of 
either temperature or pressure for the controlled variable setpoint in the control 
system. 
1. The condensing temperature has an equivalent pressure during subcritical 
operation. 
2. Either pressure or temperature may be used in the control system as the 
controlled variable to maintain gas cooler pressure (condensing 
temperature) during subcritical operation, as long as the setpoint value is 
similarly expressed in pressure or temperatu re. 
3. Documentation may be achieved through pictures of control system screens or 
control system documentation, supported by sample calculations of observed 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
  
  
 
      
  
 
       
 
 
   
       
  
  
   
  
       
    
 
  
            
    
   
     
   
   
     
 
  
    
 
     
 Appendix NA7 -88 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
pressures or temperatures and associated conversion values, as available in the 
control system interface. 
(c) Verify the gas cooler outlet temperature sensor reads accurately, using a NIST traceable 
instrument, including verification of at least two different gas cooler 
outlet readings. Calibrate if needed. Replace if outside manufacturer’s recommended 
calibrati on range. If multiple gas coolers are installed in parallel, ensure sensor is 
installed on the common header. 
(d) Verify the discharge pressure sensor (or gas cooler pressure if used) reads accurately, 
using a NIST traceable reference pressure gauge or meter, and with pressure checked 
for at least two pressures within the typical operating range. Calibrate if needed. 
Replace if outside manufacturers recommended calibration range. 
(e) Verify the ambient dry bulb temperature using a NIST traceable instrument, including 
verification of at least two different ambient readings. Calibrate if needed. Replace if 
outside manufacturer’s recommended calibration range. If the ambient dry bulb 
temperature sensor is installed between the adiabatic pad and the gas cooler coil for 
adiabatic gas coolers, verification must be performed when operating in “dry” mode. 
(f) Verify the ambient dry bulb temperature is not mounted in direct sunlight or is provided 
with a suitable solar shield. The ambient dry bulb temperature sensor may be 
installed between the adiabatic pad and the gas cooler coil for adiabatic gas coolers and 
is referred to as the precool air temperature sensor. 
(g) Verify that all sensor readings used by the gas cooler controller display correct values at 
the controller, as well as derived values (e.g., observed pressure is correctly converted 
saturation temperature for CO 2) 
(h) Verify that all fan motors are operational and rotating in the correct direction. 
(i) Verify that gas cooler fan speed controls are operational and controlling all gas 
cooler fan motors in unison. 
(j) Verify that all speed controls operate automatically in response to changes in pressure, 
gas cooler outlet temperature, and ambient dry bulb or precool air temperature. 
(k) Verify the installation of the gas cooler holdback valve, which may be located near the 
inlet of the intermediate pressure vessel or near the outlet of the gas cooler. 
NA7.20.1.1.2 Functional Testing (Option A: Subcritical Operation) 
Planning: The system cooling load must be sufficiently high, and ambient conditions sufficiently 
below the critical point, to operate subcritically with all gas cooler fans in operation and observe 
controls in average conditions. Account for weather conditions in scheduling testing by, if 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
      
   
 
  
 
    
 
   
  
   
  
    
 
 
 
  
 
   
   
  
  
     
  
      
    
 
  
 
 
   2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -89 
necessary , artificially increas ing or decreas ing evaporator loads in order to perform the 
Functional Testing at typical system conditions. 
Step 1: Verify mechanical controls and other strategies will not affect tests : 
(a) Turn off any heat reclaim controls and any intermittent defrost pressure offset 
strategies that would affect gas cooler setpoint control. 
(b) If testing an adiabatic gas cooler, adjust setpoints to ensure that the gas cooler stays in 
“dry” mode or “precool” mode consistently throughout the test. 
Step 2: Operate in control range and verify stable control : 
(a) Verify the gas cooler control value is operating in the variable setpoint control range, 
i.e., above the minimum SCT setpoint and below the maximum SCT setpoint. 
• If necessary, increase or decrease the system load. 
• If necessary, during low load or low ambient conditions with system observed 
at the minimum SCT, temporarily adjust the minimum SCT to a lower value, if 
the refrigeration system design will allow, or increase the control TD to result in 
a higher control va lue. 
(b) Observe control operation for at least 30 minutes to confirm stable control operation, as 
shown by gas cooler fan speed varying as compressor capacity changes, and not ranging 
from maximum to minimum fan speed or constant “hunting”. If required, adjust con trol 
response setpoints to achieve stable operation. 
Note : Since gas cooler control settings require fine -tuning over time, this is often 
accomplished using control system history or visual trends, showing one hourly and daily 
operation. 
Step 3: Identify control TD : 
(a) Record the current outdoor ambient air dry bulb or precool air temperature and 
refrigeration system condensing temperature/condensing pressure readings from the 
control system. Note whether discharge pressure or a dedicated gas cooler pressure 
sensor is us ed for gas cooler pressure control. 
(b) Document current head pressure control setpoints, including the TD setpoint. 
(c) Calculate and record the actual observed temperature difference (TD), defined as the 
difference between the ambient dry bulb temperature or precool air temperature and 
the refrigeration system saturated condensing temperature (SCT). 
(d) Confirm agreement between the current control system TD setpoint and the observed 
TD. If values are different, address and correct control system methods. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
   
    
  
 
 
  
    
 
  
   
 
    
 
   
    
    
 
  
 
     
  
 
 
  
   
     
     
  Appendix NA7 -90 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Step 4: Test adjusted control TD : 
(a) Enter a smaller TD value into the control system, sufficient to cause an observable 
response, such as 1 -2 degrees smaller, but not small enough to cause system to operate 
continuously at 100% fan speed. Record this value as TD Test Setpoint 1. 
(b) Observe change in control system operation which should include an increase in fan 
speed and a decrease in condensing temperature. 
(c) Allow time for the control system to achieve stable operation. 
(d) Document current head pressure control setpoints, including the TD setpoint. 
(e) Calculate and record the actual observed temperature difference (TD), defined as the 
difference between the ambient dry bulb or precool air temperature and the 
refrigeration system saturated condensing temperature (SCT). 
(f) Confirm agreement between the current control system TD setpoint and the observed 
TD. If values are different, address and correct control system methods. 
(g) Perform the above test sequence with a second TD value, recorded as TD Test Setpoint 
2, and record the same values above to confirm agreement between the current control 
system TD setpoint and the observed TD. If needed perform corrective actions and 
repe at testing until variable setpoint control can be confirmed and documented. 
Step 5: Verify and document all fans operate in unison down to minimum SCT : 
(a) Document that all fans are in operation, fan speed, actual SCT and control system 
minimum SCT setpoint, by recording control system screens or trends along with 
observations. 
1. In cool weather and/or light loads, this may be the observed operation during 
testing without need to manipulate system setpoints. 
2. In warmer weather and/or higher loads, the control system minimum SCT value 
can be increased slowly to a value equal to, and then above, the current 
operating condition, in order to observe the fans operating in unison and fan 
speeds dropping as the minimu m SCT setpoint is achieved. 
Step 6: Restore setpoints : 
(a) Restore any heat reclaim or defrost functionality that was turned off to allow testing. 
(b) Reset the minimum condensing temperature setpoint if it was adjusted during Step 5. 
(c) Reset adiabatic mode controls to original values. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
     
    
     
 
  
  
 
  
 
   
    
 
  
 
   
  
  
  
     
  
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA7 -91 
NA7.20.1.1.3 Functional Testing (Option B: Supercritical Operation) 
Planning: Ambient conditions must be sufficiently above the critical point to 
operate supercritically. Account for weather conditions in scheduling testing by, if necessary , 
artificially increas ing or decreas ing evaporator loads in order to perform the Functional Testing 
at typical system conditions. 
Step 1: Verify mechanical controls and other strategies will not affect tests : 
(a) Turn off any heat reclaim controls and any intermittent defrost pressure offset 
strategies that would affect gas cooler setpoint control. 
(b) If testing an adiabatic gas cooler, adjust setpoints to ensure that the gas cooler stays in 
“dry” mode or “precool” mode consistently throughout the test. 
Step 2: Operate in supercritical mode and verify pressure control : 
(a) Observe operation for at least 30 minutes or reference control system history or visual 
trends to verify the gas cooler holdback valve modulates its opening in response to 
changes in ambient dry bulb or precool air temperature resulting in a change in gas 
cooler pressure. Fan speeds are allowed to operate fixed at 100% to maximize the 
temperature reduction of the outlet gas or modulate to maintain a temperature 
difference between the ambient dry bulb or precool air temperature and the gas cooler 
outlet temp erature. Reference the original equipment manufacturer operating manual 
or sequence of operation descriptions to confirm the observed variation in the pressure 
setpoint is consistent with the design control strategy. 
Step 3: Restore setpoints : 
(a) Restore any heat reclaim or defrost functionality that was turned off to allow testing. 
(b) Reset adiabatic mode controls to original values. 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes    
    
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA7 -92 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
Appendix NA7 – Installation and Acceptance Requirements for Nonresidential Buildings and Covered 
Processes         
    
 
   
   
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
       
 
       
 
       
 
       
 
       
 
       
 
       
  
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA8 -1 
Nonresidential Appendix NA8 
Appendix NA8 – Luminaire Power 
Luminaire Power 
The following tables contain a limited list of lamp and ballast combinations. These tables provide 
an alternate voluntary option to the provision in Section 130(c) for determining luminaire power 
for any lamp and ballast combination specifically listed in Appendix NA8. This appendix is not 
intended to list all possible lamp and ballast combinations, and shall not to be used to determine 
luminaire power for any lighting system not specifically listed in this appendix. 
Table NA8 -1 – Fluorescent U -Tubes 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts -
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 1 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT NO Electronic Normal 
Output 39 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 2 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT NO Electronic Normal 
Output 62 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 3 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT NO Electronic Normal 
Output 92 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 1 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 33 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 2 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 64 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 3 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 93 
2 ft. 
Fluorescent 
U-Tube T8 4 FB31T8/F32T8U 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 116 
NO = ballast factor 85 to 100% 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power    
     
  
  
  
  
  
  
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
       
 
  Appendix NA8 -2 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Table NA8 -2 – Fluorescent Linear Lamps T5 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps 
Designation Ballasts -
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
~23” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 (14W) 1 F14T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 18 
~23” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 (14W) 2 F14T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 34 
~34.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 (21W) 1 F21T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 27 
~34.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 (21W) 2 F21T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 50 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 (28W) 1 F28T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 30 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 (28W) 2 F28T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 60 
~58.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 (35W) 1 F35T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 40 
~58.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 (35W) 2 F35T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 78 
~23” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (24W) 1 F24T5HO 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 29 
~23” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (24W) 2 F24T5HO 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 55 
~34.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 High 
Output(39W) 1 F39T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 43 
~34.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 High 
Output(39W) 2 F39T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 85 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (54W) 1 F54T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 62 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (54W) 2 F54T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 121 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (54W) 1 F54T5 1 ELECT DIM Elect. Dimming 63 
~46” Fluorescent Program 
Start T5 High Output (54W) 2 F54T5 1 ELECT DIM Elect. Dimming 125 
~57.5” Fluorescent 
Program Start T5 High 
Output (80W) 1 ºF80T5 1 ELECT Elect. Program 
Start BF=1 90 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power         
     
  
  
  
   
  
        
        
        
        
        
       
       
       
       
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA8 -3 
Table NA8 -3 – Fluorescent Rapid Start T -8 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts 
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) Electronic Ballasts  1 F17T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 22 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) Electronic Ballasts  2 F17T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 33 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F17T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 53 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F17T8 2 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 55 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) Electronic Ballasts  4 F17T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 63 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) 1 F17T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 20 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) 2 F17T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 37 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) 3 F17T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 56 
2 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (17W) 4 F17T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 69 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  1 F25T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 27 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  2 F25T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 48 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F25T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 68 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  4 F25T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 89 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  1 F25T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 24 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  2 F25T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 41 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F25T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 59 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  4 F25T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 76 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  1 F25T8 1 ELECT HO Electronic High 
Output 29 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  2 F25T8 1 ELECT HO Electronic High 
Output 51 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F25T8 1 ELECT HO Electronic High 
Output 74 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power    
     
  
  
   
  
        
        
        
        
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
    
   
    
   
    
   Appendix NA8 -4 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts 
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  1 F25T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 25 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  2 F25T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 49 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  3 F25T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 76 
3 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (25W) Electronic Ballasts  4 F25T8 1 ELECT DIM Electronic 
Dimming 96 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 1 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 29 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 2 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 54 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 3 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 79 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 4 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO Electronic 
Normal Output 104 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 1 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 27 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 2 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 48 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 3 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 70 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 4 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO Electronic 
Reduced Output 91 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 1 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO 
EE EE Normal 
Output 33 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 2 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO 
EE Energy efficiency 
Normal Output 52 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” 
30W) 3 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO 
EE Energy efficiency 
Normal Output 77 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power         
     
  
  
   
  
    
   
 
    
   
    
   
    
   
    
   
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
      
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA8 -5 
Lamps -Lamps - Ballasts Ballasts - Ballasts - System 
Type Number Designation Number Designation Description Watts 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 4 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT NO Energy efficiency 101 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” EE Normal Output 
30W) 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 1 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO EE Reduced 28 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” EE Output 
30W) 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 2 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO EE Reduced 45 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” EE Output 
30W) 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 3 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO EE Reduced 66 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” EE Output 
30W) 
4 foot Fluorescent Instant 4 F32T8/30ES 1 ELECT RO EE Reduced 88 
Start T8 (“Energy Saving” EE Output 
30W) 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 1 F32T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 32 
T8 (32W) Normal Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 2 F32T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 62 
T8 (32W) Normal Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 3 F32T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 93 
T8 (32W) Normal Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 4 F32T8 1 ELECT NO Electronic 114 
T8 (32W) Normal Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 1 F32T8 1 EE NO EE Normal 35 
T8 (32W) Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 2 F32T8 1 EE NO EE Normal 55 
T8 (32W) Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 3 F32T8 1 EE NO EE Normal 82 
T8 (32W) Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 4 F32T8 1 EE NO EE Normal 107 
T8 (32W) Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 1 F32T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 29 
T8 (32W) Reduced Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 2 F32T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 51 
T8 (32W) Reduced Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 3 F32T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 76 
T8 (32W) Reduced Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 4 F32T8 1 ELECT RO Electronic 98 
T8 (32W) Reduced Output 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 2 F32T8 1 ELECT HO Electronic High 77 
T8 (32W) Output 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power    
             
   
  
    
     
  
       
         
  
  
   
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
 
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
     
  
       
       
       Appendix NA8 -6 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts 
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 3 F32T8 1 ELECT HO Electronic High 
Output 112 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 1 F32T8 1 EE RO EE Reduced 
Output 30 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 2 F32T8 1 EE RO EE Reduced 
Output 48 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 3 F32T8 1 EE RO EE Reduced 
Output 73 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 4 F32T8 1 EE RO EE Reduced 
Output 96 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 2 F32T8 1 ELECT TL Electronic Two 
Level (50 & 
100%) 65 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 1 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM1 Electronic 
Dimming 35 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 2 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM1 Electronic 
Dimming 68 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 3 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM1 Electronic 
Dimming 102 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 1 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM2 Electronic 
Dimming 33 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 2 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM2 Electronic 
Dimming 64 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 3 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM2 Electronic 
Dimming 93 
4 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (32W) 4 F32T8 1 ELECT DIM2 Electronic 
Dimming 116 
5 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (40W) 1 F40T8 1 ELECT Electronic 46 
5 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (40W) 2 F40T8 1 ELECT Electronic 79 
5 foot Fluorescent Rapid Start 
T8 (40W) 3 F40T8 1 ELECT Electronic 112 
RO = ballast factor 70 to 85%     NO = ballast factor 85 to 100%  HO = ballast factor >100% 
Table NA8 -4 – Fluorescent Rapid Start High Output (HO) T8, 8 ft 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts -
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts 
8 foot Fluorescent Rapid 
Start T8 High Output (86W) 1 F96T8/HO 1 ELECT Electronic 88 
8 foot Fluorescent Rapid 
Start T8 High Output (86W) 2 F96T8/HO 1 ELECT Electronic 160 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power         
    
 
  
  
   
  
  
   
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
         
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
 
 
  2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA8 -7 
HO = ballast factor >100% 
Table NA8 -5 – High Intensity Discharge 
Type Lamps -
Number Lamps -
Designation Ballasts 
Number Ballasts -
Designation Ballasts -
Description System 
Watts Comment 
Metal Halide 1 M35/39 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 58 -
Metal Halide 1 M35/39 1 ELECT Electronic 44 -
Metal Halide 1 M50 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 67 -
Metal Halide 1 M50 1 ELECT Electronic 58 -
Metal Halide 1 M70 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 95 -
Metal Halide 1 M70 1 ELECT Electronic 86 -
Metal Halide 1 M100 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 130 -
Metal Halide 1 M100 1 ELECT Electronic 110 -
Metal Halide 1 M150 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 185 -
Metal Halide 1 M150 1 ELECT Electronic 168 -
Metal Halide 1 M175 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 208 -
Metal Halide 1 M175 1 ELECT Electronic 194 -
Metal Halide 1 M200 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 232 -
Metal Halide 1 M250 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 295 -
Metal Halide 1 M250 1 ELECT Electronic 269 -
Metal Halide 1 M320 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 368 -
Metal Halide 1 M320 1 ELECT Electronic 343 -
Metal Halide 1 M360 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 422 -
Metal Halide 1 M400 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 452 -
Metal Halide 1 M400 1 ELECT Electronic 430 -
Metal Halide 1 M450 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 508 -
Metal Halide 1 M750 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 818 -
Metal Halide 1 M1000 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 1080 -
Metal Halide 1 M1500 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 1605 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S35 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 47 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S50 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 66 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S70 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 91 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S100 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 128 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S150 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 188 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S200 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 230 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S250 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 295 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S400 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 464 -
High Pressure Sodium 1 S1000 1 MAG STD Mag. Stand. 1100 -
Table NA8 -6 –12 Volt Tungsten Halogen Lamps Including MR16, Bi -pin, AR70, AR111, PAR36 
(Shall NOT apply to track lighting systems) 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power    
     
  
  
  
  
   
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
      
   
 
 
 
 
 Appendix NA8 -8 2025 Nonresidential Appendices 
Lamps - Lamps -Ballasts -Ballasts - Ballasts - System 
Type Number Designation Number Designation Description Watts Comment 
High Pressure 20 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 23 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 25 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 28 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 35 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 38 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 37 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 41 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 42 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 45 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 50 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 54 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 65 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 69 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 71 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 75 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 75 watt Electronic Power 1 1 ELECT 80 -Sodium lamp Supply 
High Pressure 20 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 24 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 25 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 29 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 35 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 39 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 37 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 42 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 42 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 46 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 50 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 55 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 65 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 70 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 71 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 76 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
High Pressure 75 watt Mag.1 1 MAG 81 -Sodium lamp Transformer 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power         
    
 2025 Nonresidential Appendices Appendix NA8 -9 
(This page intentionally left blank.) 
Appendix NA8 –Luminaire Power